Assignment 2

profileTj_smith
StevensonWilliamJ._-ISEEBookOnlineAccessforOperationsManagement-McGrawHill2020.epub

page i 

page ii 

page iii 

page iv 

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Published by McGraw-Hill Education, 2 Penn Plaza, New York, NY 10121. Copyright © 2021 by McGraw-Hill Education. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written consent of McGraw-Hill Education, including, but not limited to, in any network or other electronic storage or transmission, or broadcast for distance learning.

Some ancillaries, including electronic and print components, may not be available to customers outside the United States.

This book is printed on acid-free paper.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LWI 24 23 22 21 20

ISBN 978-1260-57571-2

MHID 1-260-57571-3

Cover Image: Daniel Prudek/Shutterstock

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

All credits appearing on page or at the end of the book are considered to be an extension of the copyright page.

The internet addresses listed in the text were accurate at the time of publication. The inclusion of a website does not indicate an endorsement by the authors or McGraw-Hill Education, and McGraw-Hill Education does not guarantee the accuracy of the information presented at these sites.

mheducation.com/highered

page v 

Supply Chain Management

Benton

Purchasing and Supply Chain Management

Third Edition

Bowersox, Closs, Cooper, and Bowersox

Supply Chain Logistics Management

Fifth Edition

Burt, Petcavage, and Pinkerton

Supply Management

Eighth Edition

Johnson

Purchasing and Supply Management

Sixteenth Edition

Simchi-Levi, Kaminsky, and Simchi-Levi

Designing and Managing the Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies, Case Studies

Third Edition

Stock and Manrodt

Supply Chain Management

Project Management

Brown and Hyer

Managing Projects: A Team-Based Approach

Larson

Project Management: The Managerial Process

Eighth Edition

Service Operations Management

Bordoloi, Fitzsimmons, and Fitzsimmons

Service Management: Operations, Strategy, Information Technology

Ninth Edition

Management Science

Hillier and Hillier

Introduction to Management Science: A Modeling and Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets

Sixth Edition

Business Research Methods

Schindler

Business Research Methods

Thirteenth Edition

Business Forecasting

Keating and Wilson

Forecasting and Predictive Analytics

Seventh Edition

Business Systems Dynamics

Sterman

Business Dynamics: Systems Thinking and Modeling for Complex World

Operations Management

Cachon and Terwiesch

Operations Management

Second Edition

Cachon and Terwiesch

Matching Supply with Demand: An Introduction to Operations Management

Fourth Edition

Jacobs and Chase

Operations and Supply Chain Management: The Core

Fifth Edition

Jacobs and Chase

Operations and Supply Chain Management

Sixteenth Edition

Schroeder and Goldstein

Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases

Eighth Edition

Stevenson

Operations Management

Fourteenth Edition

Swink, Melnyk, and Hartley

Managing Operations Across the Supply Chain

Fourth Edition

Business Statistics

Bowerman, Drougas, Duckworth, Froelich, Hummel, Moninger, and Schur

Business Statistics and Analytics in Practice

Ninth Edition

Doane and Seward

Applied Statistics in Business and Economics

Sixth Edition

Doane and Seward

Essential Statistics in Business and Economics

Third Edition

Lind, Marchal, and Wathen

Basic Statistics for Business and Economics

Ninth Edition

Lind, Marchal, and Wathen

Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics

Eighteenth Edition

Jaggia and Kelly

Business Statistics: Communicating with Numbers

Third Edition

Jaggia and Kelly

Essentials of Business Statistics: Communicating with Numbers

Second Edition

McGuckian

Connect Master: Business Statistics

Business Analytics

Jaggia, Kelly, Lertwachara, and Chen

Business Analytics: Communicating with Numbers

page vi 

page vii 

Preface

The material in this book is intended as an introduction to the field of operations management. The topics covered include both strategic issues and practical applications. Among the topics are forecasting, product and service design, capacity planning, management of quality and quality control, inventory management, scheduling, supply chain management, and project management.

My purpose in revising this book continues to be to provide a clear presentation of the concepts, tools, and applications of the field of operations management. Operations management is evolving and growing, and I have found updating and integrating new material to be both rewarding and challenging, particularly due to the plethora of new developments in the field, while facing the practical limits on the length of the book.

This text offers a comprehensive and flexible amount of content that can be selected as appropriate for different courses and formats, including undergraduate, graduate, and executive education.

This allows instructors to select the chapters, or portions of chapters, that are most relevant for their purposes. That flexibility also extends to the choice of relative weighting of the qualitative or quantitative aspects of the material, and the order in which chapters are covered, because chapters do not depend on sequence. For example, some instructors cover project management early, others cover quality or lean early, and so on.

As in previous editions, there are major pedagogical features designed to help students learn and understand the material. This section describes the key features of the book, the chapter elements, the supplements that are available for teaching the course, highlights of the fourteenth edition, and suggested applications for classroom instruction. By providing this support, it is our hope that instructors and students will have the tools to make this learning experience a rewarding one.

What’s New in This Edition

In many places, content has been rewritten or added to improve clarity, shorten wording, or update information. New material has been added on supply chains, and other topics. Some problems are new, and others have been revised. Many new readings and new photos have been added.

Some of the class preparation exercises have been revised. The purpose of these exercises is to introduce students to the subject matter before class in order to enhance classroom learning. They have proved to be very popular with students, both as an introduction to new material and for study purposes. These exercises are available in the Instructor’s Resource Manual. Special thanks to Linda Brooks for her help in developing the exercises.

Acknowledgments

I want to thank the many contributors to this edition. Reviewers and adopters of the text have provided a “continuously improving” wealth of ideas and suggestions. It is encouraging to me as an author. I hope all reviewers and readers will know their suggestions were valuable, were carefully considered, and are sincerely appreciated. The list includes post-publication reviewers.

Jenyi Chen

Cleveland State University

Eric Cosnoski

Lehigh University

Mark Gershon

Temple University

Narges Kasiri

Ithaca College

Nancy Lambe

University of South Alabama

Anita Lee-Post

University of Kentucky

Behnam Nakhai

Millersville University of Pennsylvania

Rosa Oppenheim

Rutgers Business School

Marilyn Preston

Indiana University Southeast

Avanti Sethi

University of Texas at Dallas

John T. Simon

Governors State University

Lisa Spencer

California State University, Fresno

Nabil Tamimi

University of Scranton

Oya Tukel

Cleveland State University

Theresa Wells

University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire

Heath Wilken

University of Northern Iowa

Additional thanks to the instructors who have contributed extra material for this edition, including accuracy checkers: Ronny Richardson, Kennesaw State University and Gary Black, University of Southern Indiana; Solutions and SmartBook: Tracie Lee, Idaho State University; PowerPoint Presentations: Avanti Sethi, University of Texas-Dallas; Test Bank: Leslie Sukup, Ferris State University.

Special thanks goes out to Lisa Spencer, California State University-Fresno, for her help with additional readings and examples.

page viii 

Finally, I would like to thank all the people at McGraw-Hill for their efforts and support. It is always a pleasure to work with such a professional and competent group of people. Special thanks go to Noelle Bathurst, Portfolio Manager; Michele Janicek, Lead Product Developer; Fran Simon and Katie Ward, Product Developers; Jamie Koch, Assessment Content Project Manager; Sandy Ludovissy, Buyer; Matt Diamond, Designer; Jacob Sullivan, Content Licensing Specialist; Harper Christopher, Executive Marketing Manager; and many others who worked behind the scenes.

I would also like to thank the many reviewers of previous editions for their contributions: Vikas Agrawal, Fayetteville State University; Bahram Alidaee, University of Mississippi; Ardavan Asef-Faziri, California State University at Northridge; Prabir Bagchi, George Washington State University; Gordon F. Bagot, California State University at Los Angeles; Ravi Behara, Florida Atlantic University; Michael Bendixen, Nova Southeastern; Ednilson Bernardes, Georgia Southern University; Prashanth N. Bharadwaj, Indiana University of Pennsylvania; Greg Bier, University of Missouri at Columbia; Joseph Biggs, Cal Poly State University; Kimball Bullington, Middle Tennessee State University; Alan Cannon, University of Texas at Arlington; Injazz Chen, Cleveland State University; Alan Chow, University of Southern Alabama at Mobile; Chrwan-Jyh, Oklahoma State University; Chen Chung, University of Kentucky; Robert Clark, Stony Brook University; Loretta Cochran, Arkansas Tech University; Lewis Coopersmith, Rider University; Richard Crandall, Appalachian State University; Dinesh Dave, Appalachian State University; Scott Dellana, East Carolina University; Kathy Dhanda, DePaul University; Xin Ding, University of Utah; Ellen Dumond, California State University at Fullerton; Richard Ehrhardt, University of North Carolina at Greensboro; Kurt Engemann, Iona College; Diane Ervin, DeVry University; Farzaneh Fazel, Illinois State University; Wanda Fennell, University of Mississippi at Hattiesburg; Joy Field, Boston College; Warren Fisher, Stephen F. Austin State University; Lillian Fok, University of New Orleans; Charles Foley, Columbus State Community College; Matthew W. Ford, Northern Kentucky University; Phillip C. Fry, Boise State University; Charles A. Gates Jr., Aurora University; Tom Gattiker, Boise State University; Damodar Golhar, Western Michigan University; Robert Graham, Jacksonville State University; Angappa Gunasekaran, University of Massachusetts at Dartmouth; Haresh Gurnani, University of Miami; Terry Harrison, Penn State University; Vishwanath Hegde, California State University at East Bay; Craig Hill, Georgia State University; Jim Ho, University of Illinois at Chicago; Seong Hyun Nam, University of North Dakota; Jonatan Jelen, Mercy College; Prafulla Joglekar, LaSalle University; Vijay Kannan, Utah State University; Sunder Kekre, Carnegie-Mellon University; Jim Keyes, University of Wisconsin at Stout; Seung-Lae Kim, Drexel University; Beate Klingenberg, Marist College; John Kros, East Carolina University; Vinod Lall, Minnesota State University at Moorhead; Kenneth Lawrence, New Jersey Institute of Technology; Jooh Lee, Rowan University; Anita Lee-Post, University of Kentucky; Karen Lewis, University of Mississippi; Bingguang Li, Albany State University; Cheng Li, California State University at Los Angeles; Maureen P. Lojo, California State University at Sacramento; F. Victor Lu, St. John’s University; Janet Lyons, Utah State University; James Maddox, Friends University; Gita Mathur, San Jose State University; Mark McComb, Mississippi College; George Mechling, Western Carolina University; Scott Metlen, University of Idaho; Douglas Micklich, Illinois State University; Ajay Mishra, SUNY at Binghamton; Scott S. Morris, Southern Nazarene University; Philip F. Musa, University of Alabama at Birmingham; Roy Nersesian, Monmouth University; Jeffrey Ohlmann, University of Iowa at Iowa City; John Olson, University of St. Thomas; Ozgur Ozluk, San Francisco State University; Kenneth Paetsch, Cleveland State University; Taeho Park, San Jose State University; Allison Pearson, Mississippi State University; Patrick Penfield, Syracuse University; Steve Peng, California State University at Hayward; Richard Peschke, Minnesota State University at Moorhead; Andru Peters, San Jose State University; Charles Phillips, Mississippi State University; Frank Pianki, Anderson University; Sharma Pillutla, Towson University; Zinovy Radovilsky, California State University at Hayward; Stephen A. Raper, University of Missouri at Rolla; Pedro Reyes, Baylor University; Buddhadev Roychoudhury, Minnesota State University at Mankato; Narendra Rustagi, Howard University; Herb Schiller, Stony Brook University; Dean T. Scott, DeVry University; Scott J. Seipel, Middle Tennessee State University; Raj Selladurai, Indiana University; Kaushic Sengupta, Hofstra University; Kenneth Shaw, Oregon State University; Dooyoung Shin, Minnesota State University at Mankato; Michael Shurden, Lander University; Raymond E. Simko, Myers University; John Simon, Governors State University; Jake Simons, Georgia Southern University; Charles Smith, Virginia Commonwealth University; Kenneth Solheim, DeVry University; Young Son, Bernard M. Baruch College; Victor Sower, Sam Houston State University; Jeremy Stafford, University of North Alabama; Donna Stewart, University of Wisconsin at Stout; Dothang Truong, Fayetteville State University; Mike Umble, Baylor University; Javad Varzandeh, California State University at San Bernardino; Timothy Vaughan, University of Wisconsin at Eau Claire; Emre Veral, page ixBaruch College; Mark Vroblefski, University of Arizona; Gustavo Vulcano, New York University; Walter Wallace, Georgia State University; James Walters, Ball State University; John Wang, Montclair State University; Tekle Wanorie, Northwest Missouri State University; Jerry Wei, University of Notre Dame; Michael Whittenberg, University of Texas; Geoff Willis, University of Central Oklahoma; Pamela Zelbst, Sam Houston State University; Jiawei Zhang, NYU; Zhenying Zhao, University of Maryland; Yong-Pin Zhou, University of Washington.

William J. Stevenson

page xviii 

FOR INSTRUCTORS

You’re in the driver’s seat.

Want to build your own course? No problem. Prefer to use our turnkey, prebuilt course? Easy. Want to make changes throughout the semester? Sure. And you’ll save time with Connect’s auto-grading too.

They’ll thank you for it.

Adaptive study resources like SmartBook ® 2.0 help your students be better prepared in less time. You can transform your class time from dull definitions to dynamic debates. Find out more about the powerful personalized learning experience available in SmartBook 2.0 at www.mheducation.com/highered/connect/smartbook

page xix 

FOR STUDENTS

Effective, efficient studying.

Connect helps you be more productive with your study time and get better grades using tools like SmartBook 2.0, which highlights key concepts and creates a personalized study plan. Connect sets you up for success, so you walk into class with confidence and walk out with better grades.

Study anytime, anywhere.

Download the free ReadAnywhere app and access your online eBook or SmartBook 2.0 assignments when it’s convenient, even if you’re offline. And since the app automatically syncs with your eBook and SmartBook 2.0 assignments in Connect, all of your work is available every time you open it. Find out more at www.mheducation.com/readanywhere

No surprises.

The Connect Calendar and Reports tools keep you on track with the work you need to get done and your assignment scores. Life gets busy; Connect tools help you keep learning through it all.

Learning for everyone.

McGraw-Hill works directly with Accessibility Services Departments and faculty to meet the learning needs of all students. Please contact your Accessibility Services office and ask them to email [email protected], or visit www.mheducation.com/about/accessibility for more information.

page xx 

Note to Students

The material in this text is part of the core knowledge in your education. Consequently, you will derive considerable benefit from your study of operations management, regardless of your major. Practically speaking, operations is a course in management.

This book describes principles and concepts of operations management. You should be aware that many of these principles and concepts are applicable to other aspects of your professional and personal life. You can expect the benefits of your study of operations management to serve you in those other areas as well.

Some students approach this course with apprehension, and perhaps even some negative feelings. It may be that they have heard that the course contains a certain amount of quantitative material that they feel uncomfortable with, or that the subject matter is dreary, or that the course is about “factory management.” This is unfortunate, because the subject matter of this book is interesting and vital for all business students. While it is true that some of the material is quantitative, numerous examples, solved problems, and answers at the back of the book help with the quantitative material. As for “factory management,” there is material on manufacturing, as well as on services. Manufacturing is important, and something that you should know about for a number of reasons. Look around you. Most of the “things” you see were manufactured: cars, trucks, planes, clothing, shoes, computers, books, pens and pencils, desks, and cell phones. And these are just the tip of the iceberg. So it makes sense to know something about how these things are produced. Beyond all that is the fact that manufacturing is largely responsible for the high standard of living people have in industrialized countries.

After reading each chapter or supplement in the text, attending related classroom lectures, and completing assigned questions and problems, you should be able to do each of the following:

  1. Identify the key features of that material.

  2. Define and use terminology.

  3. Solve typical problems.

  4. Recognize applications of the concepts and techniques covered.

  5. Discuss the subject matter in some depth, including its relevance, managerial considerations, and advantages and limitations.

You will encounter a number of chapter supplements. Check with your course syllabus to determine which ones are included.

This book places an emphasis on problem solving. There are many examples throughout the text illustrating solutions. In addition, at the end of most chapters and supplements you will find a group of solved problems. The examples within the chapter itself serve to illustrate concepts and techniques. Too much detail at those points would be counterproductive. Yet, later on, when you begin to solve the end-of-chapter problems, you will find the solved problems quite helpful. Moreover, those solved problems usually illustrate more and different details than the problems within the chapter.

I suggest the following approach to increase your chances of getting a good grade in the course:

  1. Do the class preparation exercises for each chapter if they are available from your instructor.

  2. Look over the chapter outline and learning objectives.

  3. Read the chapter summary, and then skim the chapter.

  4. Read the chapter and take notes.

  5. Look over and try to answer some of the discussion and review questions.

  6. Work the assigned problems, referring to the solved problems and chapter examples as needed.

Note that the answers to many problems are given at the end of the book. Try to solve each problem before turning to the answer. Remember—tests don’t come with answers.

And here is one final thought: Homework is on the Highway to Success, whether it relates to your courses, the workplace, or life! So do your homework, so you can have a successful journey!

W.J.S.

page xxi 

Brief Contents

Preface vii

1  Introduction to Operations Management 2

2  Competitiveness, Strategy, and Productivity 40

3  Forecasting 74

4  Product and Service Design 138

SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 4: Reliability 176

5  Strategic Capacity Planning for Products and Services 190

SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 5: Decision Theory 222

6  Process Selection and Facility Layout 244

7  Work Design and Measurement 300

SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 7: Learning Curves 336

8  Location Planning and Analysis 348

9  Management of Quality 378

10  Quality Control 418

11  Aggregate Planning and Master Scheduling 464

12  Inventory Management 502

13  MRP and ERP 560

14  JIT and Lean Operations 610

SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 14: Maintenance 646

15  Supply Chain Management 654

16  Scheduling 692

17  Project Management 732

18  Management of Waiting Lines 784

19  Linear Programming 824

Appendix A: Answers to Selected Problems 858

Appendix B: Tables 870

Appendic C: Working with the Normal Distribution 876

Appendic D: Ten Things to Remember Beyond the Final Exam 882

Company Index 883

Subject Index 884

image

page xxii 

Contents

Preface vii

1  Introduction to Operations Management 2

Introduction 4

Production of Goods Versus Providing Services 8

Why Learn About Operations Management? 10

Career Opportunities and Professional Societies 12

Process Management 13

The Scope of Operations Management 14

Reading:

Why Manufacturing Matters 17

Operations Management and Decision Making 18

Reading:

Analytics 20

The Historical Evolution of Operations Management 21

Operations Today 24

Reading:

Agility Creates a Competitive Edge 26

Key Issues for Today’s Business Operations 27

Readings:

Sustainable Kisses 28

Diet and the Environment: Vegetarian vs. Nonvegetarian 29

Operations Tour:

Wegmans Food Markets 33

Summary 36

Key Points 36

Key Terms 36

Discussion and Review Questions 36

Taking Stock 37

Critical Thinking Exercises 37

Case:

Hazel 38

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 38

Problem-Solving Guide 39

2  Competitiveness, Strategy, and Productivity 40

Introduction 42

Competitiveness 42

Mission and Strategies 44

Readings:

Amazon Ranks High in Customer Service 45

Low Inventory Can Increase Agility 50

Operations Strategy 51

Implications of Organization Strategy for Operations Management 54

Transforming Strategy into Action: The Balanced Scorecard 54

Productivity 56

Readings:

Why Productivity Matters 59

Dutch Tomato Growers’ Productivity Advantage 60

Productivity Improvement 62

Summary 62

Key Points 63

Key Terms 63

Solved Problems 63

Discussion and Review Questions 64

Taking Stock 64

Critical Thinking Exercises 65

Problems 65

Cases:

Home-Style Cookies 67

Hazel Revisited 68

“Your Garden Gloves” 69

Girlfriend Collective 69

Operations Tour:

The U.S. Postal Service 70

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 73

3  Forecasting 74

Introduction 76

Features Common to All Forecasts 78

Elements of a Good Forecast 78

page xxiii 

Forecasting and the Supply Chain 79

Steps in the Forecasting Process 79

Approaches to Forecasting 80

Qualitative Forecasts 80

Forecasts Based on Time-Series Data 82

Associative Forecasting Techniques 98

Reading:

Lilacs 104

Forecast Accuracy 104

Reading:

High Forecasts Can be Bad News 106

Monitoring Forecast Error 107

Choosing a Forecasting Technique 111

Using Forecast Information 112

Computer Software in Forecasting 113

Operations Strategy 113

Reading:

Gazing at the Crystal Ball 114

Summary 115

Key Points 117

Key Terms 117

Solved Problems 118

Discussion and Review Questions 124

Taking Stock 125

Critical Thinking Exercises 125

Problems 125

Cases:

M&L Manufacturing 136

Highline Financial Services, Ltd. 137

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 137

4  Product and Service Design 138

Reading:

Design as a Business Strategy 140

Introduction 140

Reading:

Dutch Boy Brushes Up Its Paints 142

Idea Generation 142

Reading:

Vlasic’s Big Pickle Slices 143

Legal and Ethical Considerations 144

Human Factors 145

Cultural Factors 145

Reading:

Green Tea Ice Cream? Kale Soup? 146

Global Product and Service Design 146

Environmental Factors: Sustainability 146

Readings:

Kraft Foods’ Recipe for Sustainability 148

China Clamps Down on Recyclables 149

Recycle City: Maria’s Market 150

Other Design Considerations 151

Readings:

Lego A/S in the Pink 152

Fast-Food Chains Adopt Mass Customization 155

Phases in Product Design and Development 162

Designing for Production 163

Service Design 165

Reading:

The Challenges of Managing Services 169

Operations Strategy 170

Summary 170

Key Points 171

Key Terms 171

Discussion and Review Questions 171

Taking Stock 172

Critical Thinking Exercises 172

Problems 172

Operations Tour:

High Acres Landfill 174

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 174

SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 4: Reliability 176

5  Strategic Capacity Planning for Products and Services 190

Introduction 191

Reading:

Excess Capacity Can Be Bad News! 192

Capacity Decisions Are Strategic 193

page xxiv 

Defining and Measuring Capacity 194

Determinants of Effective Capacity 196

Strategy Formulation 197

Forecasting Capacity Requirements 198

Additional Challenges of Planning Service Capacity 200

Do It In-House or Outsource It? 201

Reading:

My Compliments to the Chef, Er, Buyer 202

Developing Capacity Strategies 202

Constraint Management 207

Evaluating Alternatives 207

Operations Strategy 213

Summary 213

Key Points 214

Key Terms 214

Solved Problems 214

Discussion and Review Questions 216

Taking Stock 217

Critical Thinking Exercises 217

Problems 217

Case:

Outsourcing of Hospital Services 221

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 221

SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 5: Decision Theory 222

6  Process Selection and Facility Layout 244

Introduction 246

Process Selection 246

Operations Tour:

Morton Salt 250

Technology 252

Readings:

Foxconn Shifts Its Focus to Automation 254

Zipline Drones Save Lives in Rwanda 258

Self-Driving Vehicles 259

Process Strategy 260

Strategic Resource Organization: Facilities Layout 260

Reading:

A Safe Hospital Room of the Future 269

Designing Product Layouts: Line Balancing 272

Reading:

BMW’s Strategy: Flexibility 280

Designing Process Layouts 281

Summary 285

Key Points 286

Key Terms 286

Solved Problems 286

Discussion and Review Questions 290

Taking Stock 291

Critical Thinking Exercises 291

Problems 291

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 298

7  Work Design and Measurement 300

Introduction 301

Job Design 301

Quality of Work Life 305

Methods Analysis 310

Reading:

Taylor’s Techniques Help UPS 311

Motion Study 315

Work Measurement 316

Operations Strategy 327

Summary 328

Key Points 328

Key Terms 329

Solved Problems 329

Discussion and Review Questions 330

Taking Stock 331

Critical Thinking Exercises 331

Problems 331

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 334

SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 7: Learning Curves 336

8  Location Planning and Analysis 348

The Need for Location Decisions 350

The Nature of Location Decisions 350

Global Locations 352

Reading:

Coffee? 355

General Procedure for Making Location Decisions 355

Identifying a Country, Region, Community, and Site 356

Service and Retail Locations 363

Evaluating Location Alternatives 364

Summary 370

Key Points 370

page xxv 

Key Terms 371

Solved Problems 371

Discussion and Review Questions 372

Taking Stock 372

Critical Thinking Exercises 373

Problems 373

Case:

Hello, Walmart? 377

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 377

9  Management of Quality 378

Introduction 379

The Evolution of Quality Management 380

The Foundations of Modern Quality Management: The Gurus 381

Insights on Quality Management 383

Readings:

American Fast-Food Restaurants Are Having Success in China 386

Hyundai: Exceeding Expectations 389

Quality and Performance Excellence Awards 391

Quality Certification 392

Quality and the Supply Chain 393

Total Quality Management 394

Problem Solving and Process Improvement 398

Quality Tools 401

Operations Strategy 409

Summary 409

Key Points 409

Key Terms 410

Solved Problem 410

Discussion and Review Questions 411

Taking Stock 412

Critical Thinking Exercises 412

Problems 412

Cases:

Chick-n-Gravy Dinner Line 414

Tip Top Markets 415

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 416

10  Quality Control 418

Introduction 419

Inspection 420

Reading:

Falsified Inspection Reports Create Major Risks and Job Losses 424

Statistical Process Control 425

Process Capability 443

Readings:

RFID Chips Might Cut Drug Errors in Hospitals 448

Operations Strategy 448

Summary 449

Key Points 450

Key Terms 450

Solved Problems 450

Discussion and Review Questions 454

Taking Stock 455

Critical Thinking Exercises 455

Problems 456

Cases:

Toys, Inc. 462

Tiger Tools 462

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 463

11  Aggregate Planning and Master Scheduling 464

Introduction 466

Reading:

Duplicate Orders Can Lead to Excess Capacity 470

Basic Strategies for Meeting Uneven Demand 473

Techniques for Aggregate Planning 476

Aggregate Planning in Services 484

Disaggregating the Aggregate Plan 485

Master Scheduling 486

The Master Scheduling Process 487

Summary 491

Key Points 491

Key Terms 492

Solved Problems 493

Discussion and Review Questions 496

Taking Stock 496

Critical Thinking Exercises 496

Problems 496

Case:

Eight Glasses a Day (EGAD) 501

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 501

12  Inventory Management 502

Introduction 503

Reading:

$$$ 504

The Nature and Importance of Inventories 504

Requirements for Effective Inventory Management 507

page xxvi 

Readings:

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) Tags 509

Catch Them Before They Steal! Reducing Inventory Loss With an Assist From AI 510

Drones Can Help With Inventory Management in Warehouses 513

Inventory Ordering Policies 513

How Much to Order: Economic Order Quantity Models 514

Reorder Point Ordering 525

How Much to Order: Fixed-Order-Interval Model 530

The Single-Period Model 533

Operations Strategy 538

Summary 538

Key Points 538

Key Terms 540

Solved Problems 540

Discussion and Review Questions 545

Taking Stock 545

Critical Thinking Exercises 545

Problems 546

Cases:

UPD Manufacturing 553

Grill Rite 554

Farmers Restaurant 554

Operations Tours:

Bruegger’s Bagel Bakery 556

PSC, INC. 557

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 559

13  MRP and ERP 560

Introduction 561

An Overview of MRP 562

MRP Inputs 563

MRP Processing 566

MRP Outputs 573

Other Considerations 574

MRP in Services 576

Benefits and Requirements of MRP 576

MRP II 577

Capacity Requirements Planning 579

ERP 581

Readings:

The ABCS of ERP 583

11 Common ERP Mistakes and How to Avoid Them 587

Operations Strategy 589

Summary 589

Key Points 590

Key Terms 590

Solved Problems 590

Discussion and Review Questions 599

Taking Stock 599

Critical Thinking Exercises 600

Problems 600

Cases:

Promotional Novelties 605

DMD Enterprises 606

Operations Tour:

Stickley Furniture 606

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 609

14  JIT and Lean Operations 610

Introduction 612

Reading:

Toyota Recalls 614

Supporting Goals 615

Building Blocks 616

Reading:

General Mills Studied NASCAR Pit Crew to Reduce Changeover Time 619

Lean Tools 632

Reading:

Gemba Walks 635

Transitioning to a Lean System 635

Lean Services 637

JIT II 638

Operations Strategy 638

Summary 639

Key Points 639

Key Terms 640

Solved Problems 640

Discussion and Review Questions 641

Taking Stock 642

Critical Thinking Exercises 642

Problems 642

Case:

Level Operations 643

Operations Tour:

Boeing 644

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 645

SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 14: Maintenance 646

page xxvii 

15  Supply Chain Management 654

Introduction 656

Trends in Supply Chain Management 657

Readings:

Walmart Focuses on Its Supply Chain 660

Supply Chain Transparency 661

At 3M, a Long Road Became a Shorter Road 662

Global Supply Chains 663

ERP and Supply Chain Management 663

Ethics and the Supply Chain 664

Small Businesses 664

Management Responsibilities 665

Procurement 667

E-Business 670

Supplier Management 671

Inventory Management 674

Order Fulfillment 675

Logistics 676

Operations Tour:

Wegmans’ Shipping System 677

Readings:

UPS Sets the Pace for Deliveries and Safe Driving 679

Springdale Farm 680

Active, Semi-Passive, and Passive RFID Tags 681

Creating an Effective Supply Chain 681

Readings:

Clicks or Bricks, or Both? 683

Easy Returns 684

Strategy 686

Summary 687

Key Points 687

Key Terms 687

Discussion and Review Questions 687

Taking Stock 688

Critical Thinking Exercises 688

Problems 688

Case:

Mastertag 689

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 690

16 Scheduling 692

Scheduling Operations 694

Scheduling in Low-Volume Systems 697

Scheduling Services 715

Operations Strategy 719

Summary 719

Key Points 719

Key Terms 720

Solved Problems 720

Discussion and Review Questions 724

Taking Stock 724

Critical Thinking Exercises 724

Problems 725

Case:

Hi-Ho, Yo-Yo, Inc. 731

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 731

17 Project Management 732

Introduction 734

Project Life Cycle 734

Behavioral Aspects of Project Management 736

Reading:

Artificial Intelligence Will Help Project Managers 740

Work Breakdown Structure 741

Planning and Scheduling with Gantt Charts 741

PERT and CPM 742

Deterministic Time Estimates 745

A Computing Algorithm 746

Probabilistic Time Estimates 753

Determining Path Probabilities 756

Simulation 758

Budget Control 759

Time–Cost Trade-Offs: Crashing 759

Advantages of Using Pert and Potential Sources of Error 762

Critical Chain Project Management 763

Other Topics in Project Management 763

Project Management Software 764

Operations Strategy 764

Risk Management 765

Summary 766

Key Points 767

Key Terms 767

Solved Problems 767

Discussion and Review Questions 774

Taking Stock 774

Critical Thinking Exercises 774

Problems 774

Case:

Time, Please 781

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 782

page xxviii 

18  Management of Waiting Lines 784

Why Is There Waiting? 786

Reading:

New Yorkers Do Not Like Waiting in Line 787

Managerial Implications of Waiting Lines 787

Goal of Waiting-Line Management 788

Characteristics of Waiting Lines 789

Measures of Waiting-Line Performance 792

Queuing Models: Infinite-Source 793

Queuing Model: Finite-Source 807

Constraint Management 813

The Psychology of Waiting 813

Reading:

David H. Maister on the Psychology of Waiting 814

Operations Strategy 814

Reading:

Managing Waiting Lines at Disney World 815

Summary 815

Key Points 816

Key Terms 816

Solved Problems 816

Discussion and Review Questions 818

Taking Stock 818

Critical Thinking Exercises 818

Problems 818

Case:

Big Bank 822

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 822

19 Linear Programming 824

Introduction 825

Linear Programming Models 826

Graphical Linear Programming 828

The Simplex Method 840

Computer Solutions 840

Sensitivity Analysis 843

Summary 846

Key Points 846

Key Terms 846

Solved Problems 846

Discussion and Review Questions 849

Problems 849

Cases:

Son, Ltd. 853

Custom Cabinets, Inc. 854

Selected Bibliography and Further Readings 856

APPENDIX A Answers to Selected Problems 858

APPENDIX B Tables 870

APPENDIX C Working with the Normal Distribution 876

APPENDIX D Ten Things to Remember Beyond the Final Exam 882

 

Company Index 883

Subject Index 884

page 1 

page 2 

page 3 

Recalls of automobiles, foods, toys, and other products; major oil spills; and even dysfunctional state and federal legislatures are all examples of operations failures. They underscore the need for effective operations management. Examples of operations successes include the many electronic devices we all use, medical breakthroughs in diagnosing and treating ailments, and high-quality goods and services that are widely available.

page 4 

1.1 INTRODUCTION

Operations is that part of a business organization that is responsible for producing goods and/or services. Goods are physical items that include raw materials, parts, subassemblies such as motherboards that go into computers, and final products such as cell phones and automobiles. Services are activities that provide some combination of time, location, form, or psychological value. Examples of goods and services are found all around you. Every book you read, every video you watch, every e-mail or text message you send, every telephone conversation you have, and every medical treatment you receive involves the operations function of one or more organizations. So does everything you wear, eat, travel in, sit on, and access through the internet. The operations function in business can also be viewed from a more far-reaching perspective: The collective success or failure of companies’ operations functions has an impact on the ability of a nation to compete with other nations, and on the nation’s economy.

The ideal situation for a business organization is to achieve an economic match of supply and demand. Having excess supply or excess capacity is wasteful and costly; having too little means lost opportunity and possible customer dissatisfaction. The key functions on the supply side are operations and supply chains, and sales and marketing on the demand side.

While the operations function is responsible for producing products and/or delivering services, it needs the support and input from other areas of the organization. Business organizations have three basic functional areas, as depicted in Figure 1.1: finance, marketing, and operations. It doesn’t matter whether the business is a retail store, a hospital, a manufacturing firm, a car wash, or some other type of business; all business organizations have these three basic functions.

image

Finance is responsible for securing financial resources at favorable prices and allocating those resources throughout the organization, as well as budgeting, analyzing investment proposals, and providing funds for operations. Marketing is responsible for assessing consumer wants and needs, and selling and promoting the organization’s goods or services. Operations is responsible for producing the goods or providing the services offered by the organization. To put this into perspective, if a business organization were a car, operations would be its engine. And just as the engine is the core of what a car does, in a business organization, operations is the core of what the organization does. Operations management is responsible for managing that core. Hence, operations management is the management of systems or processes that create goods and/or provide services.

Operations and supply chains are intrinsically linked, and no business organization could exist without both. A supply chain is the sequence of organizations—their facilities, functions, and activities—that are involved in producing and delivering a product or service. The sequence begins with basic suppliers of raw materials and extends all the way to the final customer. See Figure 1.2. Facilities might include warehouses, factories, processing centers, offices, distribution centers, and retail outlets. Functions and activities include forecasting, purchasing, inventory management, information management, quality assurance, scheduling, production, distribution, delivery, and customer service.

image

Figure 1.3a provides another illustration of a supply chain: a chain that extends from wheat growing on a farm and ends with a customer buying a loaf of bread in a supermarket. The value of the product increases as it moves through the supply chain.

page 5 

image

One way to think of a supply chain is that it is like a chain, as its name implies. This is shown in Figure 1.2. The links of the chain would represent various production and/or service operations, such as factories, storage facilities, activities, and modes of transportation (trains, railroads, ships, planes, cars, and people). The chain illustrates both the sequential nature of a supply chain and the interconnectedness of the elements of the supply chain. Each link is a customer of the previous link and a supplier to the following link. It also helps to understand that if any one of the links fails for any reason (quality or delivery issues, weather problems, or some other problem [there are numerous possibilities]), that can interrupt the flow in the supply chain for the following portion of the chain.

Another way to think of a supply chain is as a tree with many branches, as shown in Figure 1.3b. The main branches of the tree represent key suppliers and transporters (e.g., trucking companies). That view is helpful in grasping the size and complexity that often exists in supply chains. Notice that the main branches of the tree have side branches (their own key suppliers), and those side branches also have their own side branches (their own key suppliers). In fact, an extension of the tree view of a supply chain is that each supplier page 6(branch) has its own supply tree. Referring to Figure 1.3a, the farm, mill, and bakery of the trucking companies would have their own “tree” of suppliers.

image

Supply chains are both external and internal to the organization. The external parts of a supply chain provide raw materials, parts, equipment, supplies, and/or other inputs to the organization, and they deliver outputs that are goods to the organization’s customers. The internal parts of a supply chain are part of the operations function itself, supplying operations with parts and materials, performing work on products, and/or performing services.

The creation of goods or services involves transforming or converting inputs into outputs. Various inputs such as capital, labor, and information are used to create goods or services using one or more transformation processes (e.g., storing, transporting, repairing). To ensure that the desired outputs are obtained, an organization takes measurements at various points in the transformation process ( feedback) and then compares them with previously established standards to determine whether corrective action is needed ( control). Figure 1.4 depicts the conversion system.

image

Table 1.1 provides some examples of inputs, transformation processes, and outputs. Although goods and services are listed separately in Table 1.1, it is important to note that goods and services often occur jointly. For example, having the oil changed in your car is a service, but the oil that is delivered is a good. Similarly, house painting is a service, but the paint is a good. The goods–service combination is a continuum. It can range from primarily goods, with little service, to primarily service, with few goods. Figure 1.5 illustrates this continuum. Because there are relatively few pure goods or pure services, companies usually sell product packages, which are a combination of goods and services. There are elements of both goods production and service delivery in these product packages. This makes managing operations more interesting, and also more challenging.

TABLE 1.1

Examples of inputs, transformation, and outputs

Inputs

Transformation

Outputs

Land

Processes

High goods percentage

Human

Cutting, drilling

Houses

Physical labor

Transporting

Automobiles

Intellectual labor

Teaching

Clothing

Capital

Farming

Computers

Raw materials

Mixing

Machines

Water

Packing

Televisions

Metals

Copying

Food products

Wood

Analyzing

Textbooks

Equipment

Developing

Cell phones

Machines

Searching

High service percentage

Computers

Researching

Health care

Trucks

Repairing

Entertainment

Tools

Innovating

Vehicle repair

Facilities

Debugging

Legal

Hospitals

Selling

Banking

Factories

Emailing

Communication

Retail stores

Writing

Energy

Other

Information

Time

Legal constraints

Government regulations

image

Table 1.2 provides some specific illustrations of the transformation process.

TABLE 1.2

Illustrations of the transformation process

Inputs

Processing

Output

Food Processor

Raw vegetables

Cleaning

Canned vegetables

Metal sheets

Making cans

Water

Cutting

Energy

Cooking

Labor

Packing

Building

Labeling

Equipment

Hospital

Doctors, nurses

Examination

Treated patients

Hospital

Surgery

Medical supplies

Monitoring

Equipment

Medication

Laboratories

Therapy

The essence of the operations function is to add value during the transformation process. Value-added is the term used to describe the difference between the cost of inputs and the value or price of outputs. In nonprofit organizations, the value of outputs (e.g., highway construction, police and fire protection) is their value to society; the greater the value-added, the greater the effectiveness of these operations. In for-profit organizations, the value of outputs is measured by the prices that customers are willing to pay for those goods or services. Firms use the money generated by value-added for research and development, investment in new facilities and equipment, worker salaries, and profits. Consequently, the greater the value-added, the greater the amount of funds available for these purposes. Value can also be psychological, as in branding.

Many factors affect the design and management of operations systems. Among them are the degree of involvement of customers in the process and the degree to which technology is used to produce and/or deliver a product or service. The greater the degree of customer page 7involvement, the more challenging it can be to design and manage the operation. Technology choices can have a major impact on productivity, costs, flexibility, and quality and customer satisfaction.

page 8 

1.2 PRODUCTION OF GOODS VERSUS PROVIDING SERVICES

Although goods and services often go hand in hand, there are some very basic differences between the two, differences that impact the management of the goods portion versus management of the service portion. There are also many similarities between the two.

Production of goods results in a tangible output, such as an automobile, eyeglasses, a golf ball, a refrigerator—anything that we can see or touch. It may take place in a factory, but it can occur elsewhere. For example, farming and restaurants produce nonmanufactured goods. Delivery of service, on the other hand, generally implies an act. A physician’s examination, TV and auto repair, lawn care, and the projection of a film in a theater are examples of services. The majority of service jobs fall into these categories:

Professional services (e.g., financial, health care, legal)

Mass services (e.g., utilities, internet, communications)

Service shops (e.g., tailoring, appliance repair, car wash, auto repair/maintenance)

Personal care (e.g., beauty salon, spa, barbershop)

Government (e.g., Medicare, mail, social services, police, fire)

Education (e.g., schools, universities)

Food service (e.g., catering)

Services within organizations (e.g., payroll, accounting, maintenance, IT, HR, janitorial)

Retailing and wholesaling

Shipping and delivery (e.g., truck, railroad, boat, air)

Residential services (e.g., lawn care, painting, general repair, remodeling, interior design)

Transportation (e.g., mass transit, taxi, airlines, ambulance)

Travel and hospitality (e.g., travel bureaus, hotels, resorts)

Miscellaneous services (e.g., copy service, temporary help)

Manufacturing and service are often different in terms of what is done, but quite similar in terms of how it is done.

page 9 

Consider these points of comparison:

Degree of customer contact. Many services involve a high degree of customer contact, although services such as internet providers, utilities, and mail service do not. When there is a high degree of contact, the interaction between server and customer becomes a “moment of truth” that will be judged by the customer every time the service occurs.

Labor content of jobs. Services often have a higher degree of labor content than manufacturing jobs do, although automated services are an exception.

Uniformity of inputs. Service operations are often subject to a higher degree of variability of inputs. Each client, patient, customer, repair job, and so on presents a somewhat unique situation that requires assessment and flexibility. Conversely, manufacturing operations often have a greater ability to control the variability of inputs, which leads to more-uniform job requirements.

Measurement of productivity. Measurement of productivity can be more difficult for service jobs due largely to the high variations of inputs. Thus, one doctor might have a higher level of routine cases to deal with, while another might have more difficult cases. Unless a careful analysis is conducted, it may appear that the doctor with the difficult cases has a much lower productivity than the one with the routine cases.

Quality assurance. Quality assurance is usually more challenging for services due to the higher variation in input, and because delivery and consumption occur at the same time. Unlike manufacturing, which typically occurs away from the customer and allows mistakes that are identified to be corrected, services have less opportunity to avoid exposing the customer to mistakes.

Inventory. Many services tend to involve less use of inventory than manufacturing operations, so the costs of having inventory on hand are lower than they are for manufacturing. However, unlike manufactured goods, services cannot be stored. Instead, they must be provided “on demand.”

Wages. Manufacturing jobs are often well paid, and have less wage variation than service jobs, which can range from highly paid professional services to minimum-wage workers.

Ability to patent. Product designs are often easier to patent than service designs, and some services cannot be patented, making them easier for competitors to copy.

There are also many similarities between managing the production of products and managing services. In fact, most of the topics in this book pertain to both. When there are important service considerations, these are highlighted in separate sections. Here are some of the primary factors for both:

  1. Forecasting and capacity planning to match supply and demand

  2. Process management

  3. Managing variations

  4. Monitoring and controlling costs and productivity

  5. Supply chain management

  6. Location planning, inventory management, quality control, and scheduling

Note that many service activities are essential in goods-producing companies. These include training, human resource management, customer service, equipment repair, procurement, and administrative services.

Table 1.3 provides an overview of the differences between the production of goods and service operations. Remember, though, that most systems involve a blend of goods and services.

page 10 

TABLE 1.3

Typical differences between production of goods and provision of services

Characteristic

Goods

Services

Output

Tangible

Intangible

Customer contact

Low

High

Labor content

Low

High

Uniformity of input

High

Low

Measurement of productivity

Easy

Difficult

Opportunity to correct problems before delivery

High

Low

Inventory

Much

Little

Wages

Narrow range

Wide range

Patentable

Usually

Not usually

1.3 WHY LEARN ABOUT OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT?

Whether operations management is your major or not, the skill set you gain studying operations management will serve you well in your career.

There are many career-related reasons for wanting to learn about operations management, whether you plan to work in the field of operations or not. This is because every aspect of business affects or is affected by operations. Operations and sales are the two line functions in a business organization. All other functions—accounting, finance, marketing, IT, and so on—support the two line functions. Among the service jobs that are closely related to operations are financial services (e.g., stock market analyst, broker, investment banker, and loan officer), marketing services (e.g., market analyst, marketing researcher, advertising manager, and product manager), accounting services (e.g., corporate accountant, public accountant, and budget analyst), and information services (e.g., corporate intelligence, library services, management information systems design services).

A common complaint from employers is that college graduates come to them very focused, when employers would prefer them to have more of a general knowledge of how business organizations operate. This book provides some of the breadth that employers are looking for in their new hires. Apart from the career-related reasons, there is a not-so-obvious one: Through learning about operations and supply chains, you will have a much better understanding of the world you live in, the global dependencies of companies and nations, some of the reasons that companies succeed or fail, and the importance of working with others.

Working together successfully means that all members of the organization understand not only their own role, but they also understand the roles of others. In practice, there is significant interfacing and collaboration among the various functional areas, involving exchange of information and cooperative decision making. For example, although the three primary functions in business organizations perform different activities, many of their decisions impact the other areas of the organization. Consequently, these functions have numerous interactions, as depicted by the overlapping circles shown in Figure 1.6.

image

Finance and operations management personnel cooperate by exchanging information and expertise in such activities as the following:

  1. Budgeting. Budgets must be periodically prepared to plan financial requirements. Budgets must sometimes be adjusted, and performance relative to a budget must be evaluated.

  2. Economic analysis of investment proposals. Evaluation of alternative investments in plant and equipment requires inputs from both operations and finance people.

  3. Provision of funds. The necessary funding of operations and the amount and timing of funding can be important and even critical when funds are tight. Careful planning can help avoid cash-flow problems.

page 11 

Marketing’s focus is on selling and/or promoting the goods or services of an organization. Marketing is also responsible for assessing customer wants and needs, and for communicating those to operations people (short term) and to design people (long term). That is, operations needs information about demand over the short to intermediate term so that it can plan accordingly (e.g., purchase materials or schedule work), while design people need information that relates to improving current products and services and designing new ones. Marketing, design, and production must work closely together to successfully implement design changes and to develop and produce new products. Marketing can provide valuable insight on what competitors are doing. Marketing also can supply information on consumer preferences so that design will know the kinds of products and features needed; operations can supply information about capacities and judge the manufacturability of designs. Operations will also have advance warning if new equipment or skills will be needed for new products or services. Finance people should be included in these exchanges in order to provide information on what funds might be available (short term) and to learn what funds might be needed for new products or services (intermediate to long term). One important piece of information marketing needs from operations is the manufacturing or service lead time in order to give customers realistic estimates of how long it will take to fill their orders.

Thus, marketing, operations, and finance must interface on product and process design, forecasting, setting realistic schedules, quality and quantity decisions, and keeping each other informed on the other’s strengths and weaknesses.

People in every area of business need to appreciate the importance of managing and coordinating operations decisions that affect the supply chain and the matching of supply and demand, and how those decisions impact other functions in an organization.

Operations also interacts with other functional areas of the organization, including legal, management information systems (MIS), accounting, personnel/human resources, and public relations, as depicted in Figure 1.7.

image

page 12 

The legal department must be consulted on contracts with employees, customers, suppliers, and transporters, as well as on liability and environmental issues.

Accounting supplies information to management on costs of labor, materials, and overhead, and may provide reports on items such as scrap, downtime, and inventories.

Management information systems (MIS) is concerned with providing management with the information it needs to effectively manage. This occurs mainly through designing systems to capture relevant information and designing reports. MIS is also important for managing the control and decision-making tools used in operations management.

The personnel or human resources department is concerned with the recruitment and training of personnel, labor relations, contract negotiations, wage and salary administration, assisting in manpower projections, and ensuring the health and safety of employees.

Public relations is responsible for building and maintaining a positive public image of the organization. Good public relations provides many potential benefits. An obvious one is in the marketplace. Other potential benefits include public awareness of the organization as a good place to work (labor supply), improved chances of approval of zoning change requests, community acceptance of expansion plans, and instilling a positive attitude among employees.

1.4 CAREER OPPORTUNITIES AND PROFESSIONAL SOCIETIES

There are many career opportunities in the operations management and supply chain fields. Among the numerous job titles are operations manager, production analyst, production manager, inventory manager, purchasing manager, schedule coordinator, distribution manager, supply chain manager, quality analyst, and quality manager. Other titles include office manager, store manager, and service manager.

People who work in the operations field should have a skill set that includes both people skills and knowledge skills. People skills include political awareness; mentoring ability; and collaboration, negotiation, and communication skills. Knowledge skills, necessary for credibility and good decision making, include product and/or service knowledge, process knowledge, industry and global knowledge, financial and accounting skills, and project management skills. See Table 1.4.

TABLE 1.4

Sample operations management job descriptions

Production Supervisor

Supply Chain Manager

Social Media Product Manager

  • Manage a production staff of 10–20.

  • Ensure the department meets daily goals through the management of productivity.

  • Enforce safety policies.

  • Coordinate work between departments.

  • Have strong problem-solving skills, and strong written and oral communication skills.

  • Have a general knowledge of materials management, information systems, and basic statistics.

  • Direct, monitor, evaluate, and motivate employee performance.

  • Be knowledgeable about shipping regulations.

  • Manage budgetary accounts.

  • Manage projects.

  • Identify ways to increase consumer engagement.

  • Analyze the key performance indicators and recommend improvements.

  • Lead cross-functional teams to define product specifications.

  • Collaborate with design and technical to create key product improvements.

  • Develop requirements for new website enhancements.

  • Monitor the competition to identify need for changes.

If you are thinking of a career in operations management, you can benefit by joining one or more of the following professional societies.

APICS, the Association for Operations Management 8430 West Bryn Mawr Avenue, Suite 1000, Chicago, Illinois 60631 www.apics.org

American Society for Quality (ASQ) 230 West Wells Street, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53203 www.asq.org

page 13 

Institute for Supply Management (ISM) 2055 East Centennial Circle, Tempe, Arizona 85284 www.ism.ws

Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences (INFORMS) 901 Elkridge Landing Road, Linthicum, Maryland 21090-2909 www.informs.org

The Production and Operations Management Society (POMS) College of Engineering, Florida International University, EAS 2460, 10555 West Flagler Street, Miami, Florida 33174 www.poms.org

The Project Management Institute (PMI) 4 Campus Boulevard, Newtown Square, Pennsylvania 19073-3299 www.pmi.org

Council of Supply Chain Management Professionals (CSCMP) 333 East Butterfield Road, Suite 140, Lombard, Illinois 60148 https://cscmp.org

APICS, ASQ, ISM, and other professional societies offer a practitioner certification examination that can enhance your qualifications. Information about job opportunities can be obtained from all of these societies, as well as from other sources, such as the Decision Sciences Institute (University Plaza, Atlanta, Georgia 30303) and the Institute of Industrial Engineers (25 Technology Park, Norcross, Georgia 30092).

1.5 PROCESS MANAGEMENT

A key aspect of operations management is process management. A process consists of one or more actions that transform inputs into outputs. In essence, the central role of all management is process management.

Businesses are composed of many interrelated processes. Generally speaking, there are three categories of business processes:

  1. Upper-management processes. These govern the operation of the entire organization. Examples include organizational governance and organizational strategy.

  2. Operational processes. These are the core processes that make up the value stream. Examples include purchasing, production and/or service, marketing, and sales.

  3. Supporting processes. These support the core processes. Examples include accounting, human resources, and IT (information technology).

Business processes, large and small, are composed of a series of supplier–customer relationships, where every business organization, every department, and every individual operation is both a customer of the previous step in the process and a supplier to the next step in the process. Figure 1.8 illustrates this concept.

image

A major process can consist of many subprocesses, each having its own goals that contribute to the goals of the overall process. Business organizations and supply chains have many such processes and subprocesses, and they benefit greatly when management is using a process perspective. Business process management (BPM) activities include process design, process execution, and process monitoring. Two basic aspects of this for operations and supply chain management are managing processes to meet demand and dealing with process variability.

Managing a Process to Meet Demand

Ideally, the capacity of a process will be such that its output just matches demand. Excess capacity is wasteful and costly; too little capacity means dissatisfied customers and lost page 14revenue. Having the right capacity requires having accurate forecasts of demand, the ability to translate forecasts into capacity requirements, and a process in place capable of meeting expected demand. Even so, process variation and demand variability can make the achievement of a match between process output and demand difficult. Therefore, to be effective, it is also necessary for managers to be able to deal with variation.

Process Variation

Variation occurs in all business processes. It can be due to variety or variability. For example, random variability is inherent in every process; it is always present. In addition, variation can occur as the result of deliberate management choices to offer customers variety.

There are four basic sources of variation:

  1. The variety of goods or services being offered. The greater the variety of goods and services, the greater the variation in production or service requirements.

  2. Structural variation in demand. These variations, which include trends and seasonal variations, are generally predictable. They are particularly important for capacity planning.

  3. Random variation. This natural variability is present to some extent in all processes, as well as in demand for services and products, and it cannot generally be influenced by managers.

  4. Assignable variation. These variations are caused by defective inputs, incorrect work methods, out-of-adjustment equipment, and so on. This type of variation can be reduced or eliminated by analysis and corrective action.

Variations can be disruptive to operations and supply chain processes, interfering with optimal functioning. Variations result in additional cost, delays and shortages, poor quality, and inefficient work systems. Poor quality and product shortages or service delays can lead to dissatisfied customers and can damage an organization’s reputation and image. It is not surprising, then, that the ability to deal with variability is absolutely necessary for managers.

Throughout this book, you will learn about some of the tools managers use to deal with variation. An important aspect of being able to deal with variation is to use metrics to describe it. Two widely used metrics are the mean (average) and the standard deviation. The standard deviation quantifies variation around the mean. The mean and standard deviation are used throughout this book in conjunction with variation. So, too, is the normal distribution. Because you will come across many examples of how the normal distribution is used, you may find the overview on working with the normal distribution in the appendix at the end of the book helpful.

1.6 THE SCOPE OF OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

The scope of operations management ranges across the organization. Operations management people are involved in product and service design, process selection, selection and management of technology, design of work systems, location planning, facilities planning, and quality improvement of the organization’s products or services.

The operations function includes many interrelated activities, such as forecasting, capacity planning, scheduling, managing inventories, assuring quality, motivating employees, deciding where to locate facilities, and more.

We can use an airline company to illustrate a service organization’s operations system. The system consists of the airplanes, airport facilities, and maintenance facilities, sometimes spread out over a wide territory. The activities include:

Forecasting such things as weather and landing conditions, seat demand for flights, and the growth in air travel.

Capacity planning, essential for the airline to maintain cash flow and make a reasonable profit. (Too few or too many planes, or even the right number of planes but in the wrong places, will hurt profits.)

page 15 

Locating facilities according to managers’ decisions on which cities to provide service for, where to locate maintenance facilities, and where to locate major and minor hubs.

Facilities and layout, important in achieving effective use of workers and equipment.

Scheduling of planes for flights and for routine maintenance; scheduling of pilots and flight attendants; and scheduling of ground crews, counter staff, and baggage handlers.

Managing inventories of such items as foods and beverages, first-aid equipment, in-flight magazines, pillows and blankets, and life preservers.

Assuring quality, essential in flying and maintenance operations, where the emphasis is on safety. This is important in dealing with customers at ticket counters, check-in, telephone and electronic reservations, and curb service, where the emphasis is on efficiency and courtesy.

Motivating and training employees in all phases of operations.

Managing the Supply Chain to Achieve Schedule, Cost, and Quality Goals

Consider a bicycle factory. This might be primarily an assembly operation: buying components such as frames, tires, wheels, gears, and other items from suppliers, and then assembling bicycles. The factory also might do some of the fabrication work itself, forming frames and making the gears and chains, and it might buy mainly raw materials and a few parts and materials such as paint, nuts and bolts, and tires. Among the key management tasks in either case are scheduling production, deciding which components to make and which to buy, ordering parts and materials, deciding on the style of bicycle to produce and how many, purchasing new equipment to replace old or worn-out equipment, maintaining equipment, motivating workers, and ensuring that quality standards are met.

Obviously, an airline company and a bicycle factory are completely different types of operations. One is primarily a service operation, the other a producer of goods. Nonetheless, these two operations have much in common. Both involve scheduling activities, motivating employees, ordering and managing supplies, selecting and maintaining equipment, satisfying quality standards, and—above all—satisfying customers. Also, in both businesses, the success of the business depends on short- and long-term planning.

page 16 

A primary function of an operations manager is to guide the system by decision making. Certain decisions affect the design of the system, and others affect the operation of the system.

System design involves decisions that relate to system capacity, the geographic location of facilities, the arrangement of departments and the placement of equipment within physical structures, product and service planning, and the acquisition of equipment. These decisions usually, but not always, require long-term commitments. Moreover, they are typically strategic decisions. System operation involves management of personnel, inventory planning and control, scheduling, project management, and quality assurance. These are generally tactical and operational decisions. Feedback on these decisions involves measurement and control. In many instances, the operations manager is more involved in day-to-day operating decisions than with decisions relating to system design. However, the operations manager has a vital stake in system design because system design essentially determines many of the parameters of system operation. For example, costs, space, capacities, and quality are directly affected by design decisions. Even though the operations manager is not responsible for making all design decisions, he or she can provide those decision makers with a wide range of information that will have a bearing on their decisions.

A number of other areas are part of, or support, the operations function. They include purchasing, industrial engineering, distribution, and maintenance.

Purchasing is responsible for the procurement of materials, supplies, and equipment. Close contact with operations is necessary to ensure correct quantities and timing of purchases. The purchasing department is often called on to evaluate vendors for quality, reliability, service, price, and ability to adjust to changing demand. Purchasing is also involved in receiving and inspecting the purchased goods.

Industrial engineering is often concerned with scheduling, performance standards, work methods, quality control, and material handling.

Distribution involves the shipping of goods to warehouses, retail outlets, or final customers.

Maintenance is responsible for general upkeep and the repair of equipment, the buildings and grounds, heating and air-conditioning, parking, removing toxic wastes, and perhaps security.

The operations manager is the key figure in the system. He or she has the ultimate responsibility for the creation of goods or provision of services.

page 17 

The kinds of jobs that operations managers oversee vary tremendously from organization to organization, largely because of the different products or services involved. Thus, managing a banking operation obviously requires a different kind of expertise than managing a steelmaking operation. However, in a very important respect, the jobs are the same: They are both essentially managerial. The same thing can be said for the job of any operations manager regardless of the kinds of goods or services being created.

The service sector and the manufacturing sector are both important to the economy. The service sector now accounts for more than 70 percent of jobs in the United States, and it is growing in other countries as well. Moreover, the number of people working in services is increasing, while the number of people working in manufacturing is not. The reason for the decline in manufacturing jobs is twofold: As the operations function in manufacturing companies finds more productive ways of producing goods, the companies are able to maintain or even increase their output using fewer workers. Furthermore, some manufacturing work has been outsourced to more productive companies, many in other countries, that are able to produce goods at lower costs. Outsourcing and productivity will be discussed in more detail in this and other chapters.

Many of the concepts presented in this book apply equally to manufacturing and service. Consequently, whether your interest at this time is on manufacturing or on service, these concepts will be important, regardless of whether a manufacturing example or service example is used to illustrate the concept.

The Why Manufacturing Matters reading gives another reason for the importance of manufacturing jobs.

page 18 

1.7 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT AND DECISION MAKING

The chief role of an operations manager is that of planner and decision maker. In this capacity, the operations manager exerts considerable influence over the degree to which the goals and objectives of the organization are realized. Most decisions involve many possible alternatives that can have quite different impacts on costs or profits. Consequently, it is important to make informed decisions.

Operations management professionals make a number of key decisions that affect the entire organization. These include the following:

What: What resources will be needed, and in what amounts?

When: When will each resource be needed? When should the work be scheduled? When should materials and other supplies be ordered? When is corrective action needed?

Where: Where will the work be done?

How: How will the product or service be designed? How will the work be done (organization, methods, equipment)? How will resources be allocated?

Who: Who will do the work?

An operations manager’s daily concerns include costs (budget), quality, and schedules (time).

Throughout this book, you will encounter the broad range of decisions that operations managers must make, and you will be introduced to the tools necessary to handle those decisions. This section describes general approaches to decision making, including the use of models, quantitative methods, analysis of trade-offs, establishing priorities, ethics, and the systems approach. Models are often a key tool used by all decision makers.

Models

A model is an abstraction of reality, a simplified representation of something. For example, a toy car is a model of a real automobile. It has many of the same visual features (shape, relative proportions, wheels) that make it suitable for the child’s learning and playing. But the toy does not have a real engine, it cannot transport people, and it does not weigh 3,000 pounds.

Other examples of models include automobile test tracks and crash tests; formulas, graphs, and charts; balance sheets and income statements; and financial ratios. Common statistical models include descriptive statistics such as the mean, median, mode, range, and standard deviation, as well as random sampling, the normal distribution, and regression equations.

Models are sometimes classified as physical, schematic, or mathematical.

Physical models look like their real-life counterparts. Examples include miniature cars, trucks, airplanes, toy animals and trains, and scale-model buildings. The advantage of these models is their visual correspondence with reality. 3-D printers (explained in Chapter 6) are often used to prepare scale models.

Schematic models are more abstract than their physical counterparts; that is, they have less resemblance to the physical reality. Examples include graphs and charts, blueprints, pictures, and drawings. The advantage of schematic models is that they are often relatively simple to construct and change. Moreover, they have some degree of visual correspondence.

Mathematical models are the most abstract: They do not look at all like their real-life counterparts. Examples include numbers, formulas, and symbols. These models are usually the easiest to manipulate, and they are important forms of inputs for computers and calculators.

The variety of models in use is enormous. Nonetheless, all have certain common features: They are all decision-making aids and simplifications of more complex real-life phenomena. Real life involves an overwhelming amount of detail, much of which is irrelevant for any particular problem. Models omit unimportant details so that attention can be concentrated on the most important aspects of a situation.

page 19 

Because models play a significant role in operations management decision making, they are heavily integrated into the material of this text. For each model, try to learn (1) its purpose, (2) how it is used to generate results, (3) how these results are interpreted and used, and (4) what assumptions and limitations apply.

The last point is particularly important because virtually every model has an associated set of assumptions or conditions under which the model is valid. Failure to satisfy all of the assumptions will make the results suspect. Attempts to apply the results to a problem under such circumstances can lead to disastrous consequences.

Managers use models in a variety of ways and for a variety of reasons. Models are beneficial because they:

  1. Are generally easy to use and less expensive than dealing directly with the actual situation.

  2. Require users to organize and sometimes quantify information and, in the process, often indicate areas where additional information is needed.

  3. Increase understanding of the problem.

  4. Enable managers to analyze what-if questions.

  5. Serve as a consistent tool for evaluation and provide a standardized format for analyzing a problem.

  6. Enable users to bring the power of mathematics to bear on a problem.

This impressive list of benefits notwithstanding, models have certain limitations of which you should be aware. The following are three of the more important limitations.

  1. Quantitative information may be emphasized at the expense of qualitative information.

  2. Models may be incorrectly applied and the results misinterpreted. The widespread use of computerized models adds to this risk because highly sophisticated models may be placed in the hands of users who are not sufficiently knowledgeable to appreciate the subtleties of a particular model; thus, they are unable to fully comprehend the circumstances under which the model can be successfully employed.

  3. The use of models does not guarantee good decisions.

Quantitative Approaches

Quantitative approaches to problem solving often embody an attempt to obtain mathematically optimal solutions to managerial problems. Q uantitative approaches to decision making in operations management (and in other functional business areas) have been accepted because of calculators and computers capable of handling the required calculations. Computers have had a major impact on operations management. Moreover, the growing availability of software packages for quantitative techniques has greatly increased management’s use of those techniques.

Although quantitative approaches are widely used in operations management decision making, it is important to note that managers typically use a combination of qualitative and quantitative approaches, and many important decisions are based on qualitative approaches.

Performance Metrics

Managers use metrics to manage and control operations. There are many metrics in use, including those related to profits, costs, quality, productivity, flexibility, assets, inventories, schedules, and forecast accuracy. As you read each chapter, note the metrics being used and how they are applied to manage operations.

Analysis of Trade-Offs

Operations personnel frequently encounter decisions that can be described as trade-off decisions. For example, in deciding on the amount of inventory to stock, the decision maker must take into account the trade-off between the increased level of customer service that the additional inventory would yield and the increased costs required to stock that inventory.

Decision makers sometimes deal with these decisions by listing the advantages and disadvantages—the pros and cons—of a course of action to better understand the consequences page 20of the decisions they must make. In some instances, decision makers add weights to the items on their list that reflect the relative importance of various factors. This can help them “net out” the potential impacts of the trade-offs on their decision.

Degree of Customization

A major influence on the entire organization is the degree of customization of products or services being offered to its customers. Providing highly customized products or services such as home remodeling, plastic surgery, and legal counseling tends to be more labor intensive than providing standardized products such as those you would buy “off the shelf” at a mall store or a supermarket or standardized services such as public utilities and internet services. Furthermore, production of customized products or provision of customized services is generally more time consuming, requires more highly skilled people, and involves more flexible equipment than what is needed for standardized products or services. Customized processes tend to have a much lower volume of output than standardized processes, and customized output carries a higher price tag. The degree of customization has important implications for process selection and job requirements. The impact goes beyond operations and supply chains. It affects marketing, sales, accounting, finance, and information systems.

A Systems Perspective

A systems perspective is almost always beneficial in decision making. Think of it as a “big picture” view. A system can be defined as a set of interrelated parts that must work together. In a business organization, the organization can be thought of as a system composed of subsystems (e.g., marketing subsystem, operations subsystem, finance subsystem), which in turn are composed of lower subsystems. The systems approach emphasizes interrelationships among subsystems, but its main theme is that the whole is greater than the sum of its individual parts. Hence, from a systems viewpoint, the output and objectives of the organization as a whole take precedence over those of any one subsystem.

A systems perspective is essential whenever something is being designed, redesigned, implemented, improved, or otherwise changed. It is important to take into account the impact on all parts of the system. For example, if the upcoming model of an automobile will add forward collision braking, a designer must take into account how customers will view the change, the cost of producing the new system, installation procedures, and repair procedures. In addition, workers will need training to make and/or assemble the new system, production scheduling may change, inventory procedures may have to change, quality standards will have to be established, advertising must be informed of the new features, and parts suppliers must be selected.

Establishing Priorities

In virtually every situation, managers discover that certain issues or items are more important than others. Recognizing this enables the managers to direct their efforts to where they will do the most good.

Typically, a relatively few issues or items are very important, so that dealing with those factors will generally have a disproportionately large impact on the results achieved. This well-known effect is referred to as the Pareto phenomenon . This is one of the most important and pervasive concepts in operations management. In fact, this concept can be applied at all levels of management and to every aspect of decision making, both professional and personal.

page 21 

1.8 THE HISTORICAL EVOLUTION OF OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Systems for production have existed since ancient times. For example, the construction of pyramids and Roman aqueducts involved operations management skills. The production of goods for sale, at least in the modern sense, and the modern factory system had their roots in the Industrial Revolution.

The Industrial Revolution

The Industrial Revolution began in the 1770s in England and spread to the rest of Europe and to the United States during the 19th century. Prior to that time, goods were produced in small shops by craftsmen and their apprentices. Under that system, it was common for one person to be responsible for making a product, such as a horse-drawn wagon or a piece of furniture, from start to finish. Only simple tools were available; the machines in use today had not been invented.

Then, a number of innovations in the 18th century changed the face of production forever by substituting machine power for human power. Perhaps the most significant of these was the steam engine, because it provided a source of power to operate machines in factories. Ample supplies of coal and iron ore provided materials for generating power and making machinery. The new machines, made of iron, were much stronger and more durable than the simple wooden machines they replaced.

In the earliest days of manufacturing, goods were produced using craft production : Highly skilled workers using simple, flexible tools produced goods according to customer specifications.

Craft production had major shortcomings. Because products were made by skilled craftsmen who custom-fitted parts, production was slow and costly. And when parts failed, the replacements also had to be custom made, which was also slow and costly. Another shortcoming was that production costs did not decrease as volume increased; there were no economies of scale, which would have provided a major incentive for companies to expand. Instead, many small companies emerged, each with its own set of standards.

A major change occurred that gave the Industrial Revolution a boost: the development of standard gauging systems. This greatly reduced the need for custom-made goods. Factories began to spring up and grow rapidly, providing jobs for countless people who were attracted in large numbers from rural areas.

Despite the major changes that were taking place, management theory and practice had not progressed much from early days. What was needed was an enlightened and more systematic approach to management.

Scientific Management

The scientific management era brought widespread changes to the management of factories. The movement was spearheaded by the efficiency engineer and inventor Frederick Winslow Taylor, who is often referred to as the father of scientific management. Taylor believed in a “science of management” based on observation, measurement, analysis and improvement of work methods, and economic incentives. He studied work methods in great detail to identify the best method for doing each job. Taylor also believed that management should be responsible for planning, carefully selecting and training workers, finding the best way to perform each job, achieving cooperation between management and workers, and separating management activities from work activities.

Taylor’s methods emphasized maximizing output. They were not always popular with workers, who sometimes thought the methods were used to unfairly increase output without a corresponding increase in compensation. Certainly, some companies did abuse workers in their quest for efficiency. Eventually, the public outcry reached the halls of Congress, and hearings were held on the matter. Taylor himself was called to testify in 1911, the same year in which his classic book, The Principles of Scientific Management, was published. The publicity from those hearings actually helped scientific management principles to achieve wide acceptance in industry.

page 22 

A number of other pioneers also contributed heavily to this movement, including the following:

Frank Gilbreth was an industrial engineer who is often referred to as the father of motion study. He developed principles of motion economy that could be applied to incredibly small portions of a task.

Henry Gantt recognized the value of nonmonetary rewards to motivate workers, and developed a widely used system for scheduling, called Gantt charts.

Harrington Emerson applied Taylor’s ideas to organization structure and encouraged the use of experts to improve organizational efficiency. He testified in a congressional hearing that railroads could save a million dollars a day by applying principles of scientific management.

Henry Ford, the great industrialist, employed scientific management techniques in his factories.

During the early part of the 20th century, automobiles were just coming into vogue in the United States. Ford’s Model T was such a success that the company had trouble keeping up with orders for the cars. In an effort to improve the efficiency of operations, Ford adopted the scientific management principles espoused by Frederick Winslow Taylor. He also introduced the moving assembly line, which had a tremendous impact on production methods in many industries.

Among Ford’s many contributions was the introduction of mass production to the automotive industry, a system of production in which large volumes of standardized goods are produced by low-skilled or semiskilled workers using highly specialized, and often costly, equipment. Ford was able to do this by taking advantage of a number of important concepts. Perhaps the key concept that launched mass production was interchangeable parts , sometimes attributed to Eli Whitney, an American inventor who applied the concept to assembling muskets in the late 1700s. The basis for interchangeable parts was to standardize parts so that any part in a batch of parts would fit any automobile coming down the assembly line. This meant that parts did not have to be custom fitted, as they were in craft production. The standardized parts could also be used for replacement parts. The result was a tremendous decrease in assembly time and cost. Ford accomplished this by standardizing the gauges used to measure parts during production and by using newly developed processes to produce uniform parts.

page 23 

A second concept used by Ford was the division of labor , which Adam Smith wrote about in The Wealth of Nations (1776). Division of labor means that an operation, such as assembling an automobile, is divided up into a series of many small tasks, and individual workers are assigned to one of those tasks. Unlike craft production, where each worker was responsible for doing many tasks, and thus required skill, with division of labor the tasks were so narrow that virtually no skill was required.

Together, these concepts enabled Ford to tremendously increase the production rate at his factories using readily available inexpensive labor. Both Taylor and Ford were despised by many workers, because they held workers in such low regard, expecting them to perform like robots. This paved the way for the human relations movement.

The Human Relations Movement

Whereas the scientific management movement heavily emphasized the technical aspects of work design, the human relations movement emphasized the importance of the human element in job design. Lillian Gilbreth, a psychologist and the wife of Frank Gilbreth, worked with her husband, focusing on the human factor in work. (The Gilbreths were the subject of a classic film, Cheaper by the Dozen.) Many of her studies dealt with worker fatigue. In the following decades, there was much emphasis on motivation. Elton Mayo conducted studies at the Hawthorne division of Western Electric. His studies revealed that in addition to the physical and technical aspects of work, worker motivation is critical for improving productivity. Abraham Maslow developed motivational theories, which Frederick Hertzberg refined. Douglas McGregor added Theory X and Theory Y. These theories represented the two ends of the spectrum of how employees view work. Theory X, on the negative end, assumed that workers do not like to work, and have to be controlled—rewarded and punished—to get them to do good work. This attitude was quite common in the automobile industry and in some other industries, until the threat of global competition forced them to rethink that approach. Theory Y, on the other end of the spectrum, assumed that workers enjoy the physical and mental aspects of work and become committed to work. The Theory X approach resulted in an adversarial environment, whereas the Theory Y approach resulted in empowered workers and a more cooperative spirit. William Ouchi added Theory Z, which combined the Japanese approach with such features as lifetime employment, employee problem solving, and consensus building, and the traditional Western approach that features short-term employment, specialists, and individual decision making and responsibility.

Decision Models and Management Science

The factory movement was accompanied by the development of several quantitative techniques. F. W. Harris developed one of the first models in 1915: a mathematical model for inventory order size. In the 1930s, three coworkers at Bell Telephone Labs—H. F. Dodge, H. G. Romig, and W. Shewhart—developed statistical procedures for sampling and quality control. In 1935, L.H.C. Tippett conducted studies that provided the groundwork for statistical sampling theory.

At first, these quantitative models were not widely used in industry. However, the onset of World War II changed that. The war generated tremendous pressures on manufacturing output, and specialists from many disciplines combined efforts to achieve advancements in the military and in manufacturing. After the war, efforts to develop and refine quantitative tools for decision making continued, resulting in decision models for forecasting, inventory management, project management, and other areas of operations management.

During the 1960s and 1970s, management science techniques were highly regarded; in the 1980s, they lost some favor. However, the widespread use of personal computers and user-friendly software in the workplace contributed to a resurgence in the popularity of these techniques.

The Influence of Japanese Manufacturers

A number of Japanese manufacturers developed or refined management practices that increased the productivity of their operations and the quality of their products, due in part to the influence of Americans W. Edwards Deming and Joseph Juran. This made them page 24very competitive, sparking interest in their approaches by companies outside Japan. Their approaches emphasized quality and continual improvement, worker teams and empowerment, and achieving customer satisfaction. The Japanese can be credited with spawning the “quality revolution” that occurred in industrialized countries, and with generating widespread interest in lean production.

The influence of the Japanese on U.S. manufacturing and service companies has been enormous and promises to continue for the foreseeable future. Because of that influence, this book will provide considerable information about Japanese methods and successes.

Table 1.5 provides a chronological summary of some of the key developments in the evolution of operations management.

TABLE 1.5

Historical summary of operations management

Approximate Date

Contribution/Concept

Originator

1776

Division of labor

Adam Smith

1790

Interchangeable parts

Eli Whitney

1911

Principles of scientific management

Frederick W. Taylor

1911

Motion study, use of industrial psychology

Frank and Lillian Gilbreth

1912

Chart for scheduling activities

Henry Gantt

1913

Moving assembly line

Henry Ford

1915

Mathematical model for inventory ordering

F. W. Harris

1930

Hawthorne studies on worker motivation

Elton Mayo

1935

Statistical procedures for sampling and quality control

H. F. Dodge, H. G. Romig, W. Shewhart, L.H.C. Tippett

1940

Operations research applications in warfare

Operations research groups

1947

Linear programming

George Dantzig

1951

Commercial digital computers

Sperry Univac, IBM

1950s

Automation

Numerous

1960s

Extensive development of quantitative tools

Numerous

1960s

Industrial dynamics

Jay Forrester

1975

Emphasis on manufacturing strategy

W. Skinner

1980s

Emphasis on flexibility, time-based competition, lean production

T. Ohno, S. Shingo, Toyota

1980s

Emphasis on quality

W. Edwards Deming, J. Juran, K. Ishikawa

1990s

Internet, supply chain management

Numerous

2000s

Applications service providers and outsourcing

Numerous

Social media, YouTube, and others

Numerous

1.9 OPERATIONS TODAY

Advances in information technology and global competition have had a major influence on operations management. While the internet offers great potential for business organizations, the potential, as well as the risks, must be clearly understood in order to determine if and how to exploit this potential. In many cases, the internet has altered the way companies compete in the marketplace.

Electronic business, or e-business , involves the use of the internet to transact business. E-business is changing the way business organizations interact with their customers and their page 25suppliers. Most familiar to the general public is e-commerce , consumer–business transactions, such as buying online or requesting information. However, business-to-business transactions such as e-procurement represent an increasing share of e-business. E-business is receiving increased attention from business owners and managers in developing strategies, planning, and decision making.

The word technology has several definitions, depending on the context. Generally, technology refers to the application of scientific knowledge to the development and improvement of goods and services. It can involve knowledge, materials, methods, and equipment. The term high technology refers to the most advanced and developed machines and methods. Operations management is primarily concerned with three kinds of technology: product and service technology, process technology, and information technology (IT). All three can have a major impact on costs, productivity, and competitiveness.

Product and service technology refers to the discovery and development of new products and services. This is done mainly by researchers and engineers, who use the scientific approach to develop new knowledge and translate that into commercial applications.

Process technology refers to methods, procedures, and equipment used to produce goods and provide services. They include not only processes within an organization but also supply chain processes.

Information technology (IT) refers to the science and use of computers and other electronic equipment to store, process, and send information. Information technology is heavily ingrained in today’s business operations. This includes electronic data processing, the use of bar codes to identify and track goods, obtaining point-of-sale information, data transmission, the internet, e-commerce, e-mail, and more.

Management of technology is high on the list of major trends, and it promises to be high well into the future. For example, computers have had a tremendous impact on businesses in many ways, including new product and service features, process management, medical diagnosis, production planning and scheduling, data processing, and communication. Advances in materials, methods, and equipment also have had an impact on competition and productivity. Advances in information technology also have had a major impact on businesses. Obviously, there have been—and will continue to be—many benefits from technological advances. However, technological advance also places a burden on management. For example, management must keep abreast of changes and quickly assess both their benefits and risks. Predicting advances can be tricky at best, and new technologies often carry a high price tag and usually a high cost to operate or repair. And in the case of computer operating systems, as new systems are introduced, support for older versions is discontinued, making periodic upgrades necessary. Conflicting technologies can exist that make technological choices even more difficult. Technological innovations in both products and processes will continue to change the way businesses operate, and hence require continuing attention.

The General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) of 1994 reduced tariffs and subsidies in many countries, expanding world trade. However, new tariffs in 2018 and 2019, some temporary, have had an impact on the strategies and operations of businesses large and small around the world. One effect is the importance business organizations are giving to management of their supply chains.

Globalization and the need for global supply chains have broadened the scope of supply chain management. However, tightened border security in certain instances and new tariffs have added challenges and uncertainties to managing supply chain operations. In some instances, organizations are reassessing their use of offshore outsourcing.

Competitive pressures and changing economic conditions have caused business organizations to put more emphasis on operations strategy, working with fewer resources, revenue management, process analysis and improvement, quality improvement, agility, and lean production.

During the latter part of the 1900s, many companies neglected to include operations strategy in their corporate strategy. Some of them paid dearly for that neglect. Now, more and page 26more companies are recognizing the importance of operations strategy on the overall success of their business, as well as the necessity for relating it to their overall business strategy.

Working with fewer resources due to layoffs, corporate downsizing, and general cost cutting is forcing managers to make trade-off decisions on resource allocation, and to place increased emphasis on cost control and productivity improvement.

Revenue management is a method used by some companies to maximize the revenue they receive from fixed operating capacity by influencing demand through price manipulation. Also known as yield management, it has been successfully used in the travel and tourism industries by airlines, cruise lines, hotels, amusement parks, and rental car companies, and in other industries such as trucking and public utilities.

Process analysis and improvement includes cost and time reduction, productivity improvement, process yield improvement, and quality improvement and increasing customer satisfaction. This is sometimes referred to as a Six Sigma process.

Given a boost by the “quality revolution” of the 1980s and 1990s, quality is now ingrained in business. Some businesses use the term total quality management (TQM) to describe their quality efforts. A quality focus emphasizes customer satisfaction and often involves teamwork. Process improvement can result in improved quality, cost reduction, and time reduction. Time relates to costs and to competitive advantage, and businesses seek ways to reduce the time to bring new products and services to the marketplace to gain a competitive edge. If two companies can provide the same product at the same price and quality, but one can deliver it four weeks earlier than the other, the quicker company will invariably get the sale. Time reductions are being achieved in many companies now. Union Carbide was able to cut $400 million of fixed expenses, and Bell Atlantic was able to cut the time needed to hook up long-distance carriers from 15 days to less than 1, at a savings of $82 million.

Agility refers to the ability of an organization to respond quickly to demands or opportunities. It is a strategy that involves maintaining a flexible system that can quickly respond to changes in either the volume of demand or changes in product/service offerings. This is particularly important as organizations scramble to remain competitive and cope with increasingly shorter product life cycles and strive to achieve shorter development times for new or improved products and services.

Lean production, a new approach to production, emerged in the 1990s. It incorporates a number of the recent trends listed here, with an emphasis on quality, flexibility, time reduction, and teamwork. This has led to a flattening of the organizational structure, with fewer levels of management.

Lean systems are so named because they use much less of certain resources than typical mass production systems use—space, inventory, and workers—to produce a comparable amount of output. Lean systems use a highly skilled workforce and flexible equipment. In effect, they incorporate advantages of both mass production (high volume, low unit cost) and craft production (variety and flexibility). Quality is also higher than in mass production. This approach has now spread to services, including health care, offices, and shipping and delivery.

The skilled workers in lean production systems are more involved in maintaining and improving the system than their mass production counterparts. They are taught to stop an operation if they discover a defect, and to work with other employees to find and correct the page 27cause of the defect so that it won’t recur. This results in an increasing level of quality over time and eliminates the need to inspect and rework at the end of the line.

Because lean production systems operate with lower amounts of inventory, additional emphasis is placed on anticipating when problems might occur before they arise and avoiding those problems through planning. Even so, problems can still occur at times, and quick resolution is important. Workers participate in both the planning and correction stages.

Compared to workers in traditional systems, much more is expected of workers in lean production systems. They must be able to function in teams, playing active roles in operating and improving the system. Individual creativity is much less important than team success. Responsibilities also are much greater, which can lead to pressure and anxiety not present in traditional systems. Moreover, a flatter organizational structure means career paths are not as steep in lean production organizations. Workers tend to become generalists rather than specialists, another contrast to more traditional organizations.

1.10 KEY ISSUES FOR TODAY’S BUSINESS OPERATIONS

There are a number of issues that are high priorities of many business organizations. Although not every business is faced with these issues, many are. Chief among the issues are the following.

Economic conditions. Trade disputes and tariffs have created uncertainties for decision makers.

Innovating. Finding new or improved products or services are only two of the many possibilities that can provide value to an organization. Innovations can be made in processes, the use of the internet, or the supply chain that reduce costs, increase productivity, expand markets, or improve customer service.

Quality problems. The numerous operations failures mentioned at the beginning of the chapter underscore the need to improve the way operations are managed. That relates to product design and testing, oversight of suppliers, risk assessment, and timely response to potential problems.

Risk management. The need for managing risk is underscored by recent events that include financial crises, product recalls, accidents, natural and man-made disasters, and economic ups and downs. Managing risks starts with identifying risks, assessing vulnerability and potential damage (liability costs, reputation, demand), and taking steps to reduce or share risks.

Cyber-security. The need to guard against intrusions from hackers whose goal is to steal personal information of employees and customers is becoming increasingly necessary. Moreover, interconnected systems increase intrusion risks in the form of industrial espionage.

Competing in a global economy. Low labor costs in third-world countries have increased pressure to reduce labor costs. Companies must carefully weigh their options, which include outsourcing some or all of their operations to low-wage areas, reducing costs internally, changing designs, and working to improve productivity.

Three other key areas require more in-depth discussion: environmental concerns, ethical conduct, and managing the supply chain.

Environmental Concerns

Concern about global warming and pollution has had an increasing effect on how businesses operate.

Stricter environmental regulations, particularly in developed nations, are being imposed. Furthermore, business organizations are coming under increasing pressure to reduce their carbon footprint (the amount of carbon dioxide generated by their operations and their supply chains) and to generally operate sustainable processes. Sustainability refers to service page 28and production processes that use resources in ways that do not harm ecological systems that support both current and future human existence. Sustainability measures often go beyond traditional environmental and economic measures to include measures that incorporate social criteria in decision making.

All areas of business will be affected by this. Areas that will be most affected include product and service design, consumer education programs, disaster preparation and response, supply chain page 29waste management, and outsourcing decisions. Note that outsourcing of goods production increases not only transportation costs, but also fuel consumption and carbon released into the atmosphere. Consequently, sustainability thinking may have implications for outsourcing decisions.

Because they all fall within the realm of operations, operations management is central to dealing with these issues. Sometimes referred to as “green initiatives,” the possibilities include reducing packaging, materials, water and energy use, and the environmental impact of the supply chain, including buying locally. Other possibilities include reconditioning used equipment (e.g., printers and copiers) for resale, and recycling.

The reading above suggests that even our choice of diet can affect the environment.

Ethical Conduct

The need for ethical conduct in business is becoming increasingly obvious, given numerous examples of questionable actions in recent history. In making decisions, managers must consider how their decisions will affect shareholders, management, employees, customers, the community at large, and the environment. Finding solutions that will be in the best interests of all of these stakeholders is not always easy, but it is a goal that all managers should strive to achieve. Furthermore, even managers with the best intentions will sometimes make mistakes. If mistakes do occur, managers should act responsibly to correct those mistakes as quickly as possible, and to address any negative consequences.

Many organizations have developed codes of ethics to guide employees’ or members’ conduct. Ethics is a standard of behavior that guides how one should act in various situations. The Markula Center for Applied Ethics at Santa Clara University identifies five principles for thinking ethically:

  • The Utilitarian Principle: The good done by an action or inaction should outweigh any harm it causes or might cause. An example is not allowing a person who has had too much to drink to drive.

  • The Rights Principle: Actions should respect and protect the moral rights of others. An example is not taking advantage of a vulnerable person.

  • The Fairness Principle: Equals should be held to, or evaluated by, the same standards. An example is equal pay for equal work.

  • The Common Good Principle: Actions should contribute to the common good of the community. An example is an ordinance on noise abatement.

  • The Virtue Principle: Actions should be consistent with certain ideal virtues. Examples include honesty, compassion, generosity, tolerance, fidelity, integrity, and self-control.

The center expands these principles to create a framework for ethical conduct. An ethical framework is a sequence of steps intended to guide thinking and subsequent decisions or actions. page 30Here is the one developed by the Markula Center for Applied Ethics:

  1. Recognize an ethical issue by asking if an action could be damaging to a group or an individual. Is there more to it than just what is legal?

  2. Make sure the pertinent facts are known, such as who will be impacted, and what options are available.

  3. Evaluate the options by referring to the appropriate preceding ethical principle.

  4. Identify the “best” option and then further examine it by asking how someone you respect would view it.

  5. In retrospect, consider the effect your decision had and what you can learn from it.

More detail is available at the Center’s website: http://www.scu.edu/ethics/practicing/decision/framework.html.

Operations managers, like all managers, have the responsibility to make ethical decisions. Ethical issues arise in many aspects of operations management, including:

  • Financial statements: accurately representing the organization’s financial condition.

  • Worker safety: providing adequate training, maintaining equipment in good working condition, maintaining a safe working environment.

  • Product safety: providing products that minimize the risk of injury to users or damage to property or the environment.

  • Quality: honoring warranties, avoiding hidden defects.

  • The environment: not doing things that will harm the environment.

  • The community: being a good neighbor.

  • Hiring and firing workers: avoiding false pretenses (e.g., promising a long-term job when that is not what is intended).

  • Closing facilities: taking into account the impact on a community, and honoring commitments that have been made.

  • Workers’ rights: respecting workers’ rights, dealing with workers’ problems quickly and fairly.

The Ethisphere Institute recognizes companies worldwide for their ethical leadership. Here are some samples from their list:

Apparel: Gap

Automotive: Ford Motor Company

Business services: Paychex

Café: Starbucks

Computer hardware: Intel

Computer software: Adobe Systems, Microsoft

Consumer electronics: Texas Instruments, Xerox

page 31 

E-commerce: eBay

General retail: Costco, Target

Groceries: Safeway, Wegmans, Whole Foods

Health and beauty: L’Oreal

Logistics: UPS

You can see a complete list of recent recipients and the selection criteria at Ethisphere.com.

The Need to Manage the Supply Chain

Supply chain management is being given increasing attention as business organizations face mounting pressure to improve management of their supply chains. In the past, most organizations did little to manage their supply chains. Instead, they tended to concentrate on their own operations and on their immediate suppliers. Moreover, the planning, marketing, production and inventory management functions in organizations in supply chains have often operated independently of each other. As a result, supply chains experienced a range of problems that were seemingly beyond the control of individual organizations. The problems included large oscillations of inventories, inventory stockouts, late deliveries, and quality problems. These and other issues now make it clear that management of supply chains is essential to business success. The other issues include the following:

  1. The need to improve operations. Efforts on cost and time reduction, and productivity and quality improvement, have expanded in recent years to include the supply chain. Opportunity now lies largely with procurement, distribution, and logistics—the supply chain.

  2. Increasing levels of outsourcing. Organizations are increasing their levels of outsourcing , buying goods or services instead of producing or providing them themselves. As outsourcing increases, some organizations are spending increasing amounts on supply-related activities (wrapping, packaging, moving, loading and unloading, and sorting). A significant amount of the cost and time spent on these and other related activities may be unnecessary. Issues with imported products, including tainted food products, toothpaste, and pet foods, as well as unsafe tires and toys, have led to questions of liability and the need for companies to take responsibility for monitoring the safety of outsourced goods.

  1. Increasing transportation costs. Transportation costs are increasing, and they need to be more carefully managed.

  2. Competitive pressures. Competitive pressures have led to an increasing number of new products, shorter product development cycles, and increased demand for customization. And in some industries, most notably consumer electronics, product life cycles are relatively short. Added to this are the adoption of quick-response strategies and efforts to reduce lead times.

  3. Increasing globalization. Increasing globalization has expanded the physical length of supply chains. A global supply chain increases the challenges of managing a supply chain. Having far-flung customers and/or suppliers means longer lead times and greater opportunities for disruption of deliveries. Often, currency page 32differences and monetary fluctuations are factors, as well as language and cultural differences. Also, tightened border security in some instances has slowed shipments of goods.

  4. Increasing importance of e-business. The increasing importance of e-business has added new dimensions to business buying and selling and has presented new challenges.

  5. The complexity of supply chains. Supply chains are complex; they are dynamic, and they have many inherent uncertainties that can adversely affect them, such as inaccurate forecasts, late deliveries, substandard quality, equipment breakdowns, and canceled or changed orders.

  6. The need to manage inventories. Inventories play a major role in the success or failure of a supply chain, so it is important to coordinate inventory levels throughout a supply chain. Shortages can severely disrupt the timely flow of work and have far-reaching impacts, while excess inventories add unnecessary costs. It would not be unusual to find inventory shortages in some parts of a supply chain and excess inventories in other parts of the same supply chain.

  7. The need to deal with trade wars. Trade wars can occur if a country objects to its trade imbalance with another country. This can result in tariffs and retaliatory tariffs, causing changes in cost structures. Uncertainty about how long and to what degree tariffs will be in place can greatly increase pressure on companies that have global supply chains.

Elements of Supply Chain Management

Supply chain management involves coordinating activities across the supply chain. Central to this is taking customer demand and translating it into corresponding activities at each level of the supply chain.

The key elements of supply chain management are listed in Table 1.6. The first element, customers, is the driving element. Typically, marketing is responsible for determining what customers want, as well as forecasting the quantities and timing of customer demand. Product and service design must match customer wants with operations capabilities.

TABLE 1.6

Elements of supply chain management

Element

Typical Issues

Chapter(s)

Customers

Determining what products and/or services customers want

3, 4

Forecasting

Predicting the quantity and timing of customer demand

3

Design

Incorporating customers, wants, manufacturability, and time to market

4

Capacity planning

Matching supply and demand

5, 11

Processing

Controlling quality, scheduling work

10, 16

Inventory

Meeting demand requirements while managing the costs of holding inventory

12, 13, 14

Purchasing

Evaluating potential suppliers, supporting the needs of operations on purchased goods and services

15

Suppliers

Monitoring supplier quality, on-time delivery, and flexibility; maintaining supplier relations

15

Location

Determining the location of facilities

8

Logistics

Deciding how to best move information and materials

15

Processing occurs in each component of the supply chain: It is the core of each organization. The major portion of processing occurs in the organization that produces the product or service for the final customer (the organization that assembles the computer, services the car, etc.). A major aspect of this for both the internal and external portions of a supply chain is scheduling.

Inventory is a staple in most supply chains. Balance is the main objective; too little causes delays and disrupts schedules, but too much adds unnecessary costs and limits flexibility.

page 33 

Purchasing is the link between an organization and its suppliers. It is responsible for obtaining goods and/or services that will be used to produce products or provide services for the organization’s customers. Purchasing selects suppliers, negotiates contracts, establishes alliances, and acts as a liaison between suppliers and various internal departments.

The supply portion of a value chain is made up of one or more suppliers, all links in the chain, and each one capable of having an impact on the effectiveness—or the ineffectiveness—of the supply chain. Moreover, it is essential that the planning and execution be carefully coordinated between suppliers and all members of the demand portion of their chains.

Location can be a factor in a number of ways. Where suppliers are located can be important, as can the location of processing facilities. Nearness to market, nearness to sources of supply, or nearness to both may be critical. Also, delivery time and cost are usually affected by location.

Two types of decisions are relevant to supply chain management—strategic and operational. The strategic decisions are the design and policy decisions. The operational decisions relate to day-to-day activities: managing the flow of material and product and other aspects of the supply chain in accordance with strategic decisions.

The major decision areas in supply chain management are location, production, distribution, and inventory. The location decision relates to the choice of locations for both production and distribution facilities. Production and transportation costs and delivery lead times are important. Production and distribution decisions focus on what customers want, when they want it, and how much is needed. Outsourcing can be a consideration. Distribution decisions are strongly influenced by transportation cost and delivery times, because transportation costs often represent a significant portion of total cost. Moreover, shipping alternatives are closely tied to production and inventory decisions. For example, using air transport means higher costs but faster deliveries and less inventory in transit than sea, rail, or trucking options. Distribution decisions must also take into account capacity and quality issues. Operational decisions focus on scheduling, maintaining equipment, and meeting customer demand. Quality control and workload balancing are also important considerations. Inventory decisions relate to determining inventory needs and coordinating production and stocking decisions throughout the supply chain. Logistics management plays the key role in inventory decisions.

Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) is being increasingly used to provide information sharing in real time among organizations and their major supply chain partners. This important topic is discussed in more detail in Chapter 13.

Operations Tours

Throughout the book you will discover operations tours that describe operations in all sorts of companies. The tour below is of Wegmans Food Markets, a major regional supermarket chain. Wegmans has been consistently ranked high on Fortune magazine’s list of the 100 Best Companies to Work For since the inception of the survey a decade ago.

page 36 

page 40 

page 41 

THE COLD HARD FACTS

The name of the game is competition. The playing field is global. Those who understand how to play the game will succeed; those who don’t are doomed to failure. And don’t think the game is just companies competing with each other. In companies that have multiple factories or divisions producing the same good or service, factories or divisions sometimes find themselves competing with each other. When a competitor—another company or a sister factory or division in the same company—can turn out products better, cheaper, and faster, that spells real trouble for the factory or division that is performing at a lower level. The trouble can be layoffs or even a shutdown if the managers can’t turn things around. The bottom line? Better quality, higher productivity, lower costs, and the ability to quickly respond to customer needs are more important than ever, and the bar is getting higher. Business organizations need to develop solid strategies for dealing with these issues.

page 42 

2.1 INTRODUCTION

In this chapter, you will learn about the different ways companies compete and why some firms do a very good job of competing. You will learn how effective strategies can lead to competitive organizations, as well as what productivity is, why it is important, and what organizations can do to improve it.

2.2 COMPETITIVENESS

Companies must be competitive to sell their goods and services in the marketplace. Competitiveness is an important factor in determining whether a company prospers, barely gets by, or fails. Business organizations compete through some combination of price, delivery time, and product or service differentiation.

Marketing influences competitiveness in several ways, including identifying consumer wants and needs, pricing, and advertising and promotion.

  1. Identifying consumer wants and/or needs is a basic input in an organization’s decision-making process, and central to competitiveness. The ideal is to achieve a perfect match between those wants and needs and the organization’s goods and/or services.

  2. Price and quality are key factors in consumer buying decisions. It is important to understand the trade-off decision consumers make between price and quality.

  3. Advertising and promotion are ways organizations can inform potential customers about features of their products or services, and attract buyers.

Operations has a major influence on competitiveness through product and service design, cost, location, quality, response time, flexibility, inventory and supply chain management, and service. Many of these are interrelated.

  1. Product and service design should reflect joint efforts of many areas of the firm to achieve a match between financial resources, operations capabilities, supply chain capabilities, and consumer wants and needs. Special characteristics or features of a product or service can be a key factor in consumer buying decisions. Other key factors include innovation and the time-to-market for new products and services.

  2. Cost of an organization’s output is a key variable that affects pricing decisions and profits. Cost-reduction efforts are generally ongoing in business organizations. Productivity (discussed later in the chapter) is an important determinant of cost. Organizations with higher productivity rates than their competitors have a competitive cost advantage. A company may outsource a portion of its operation to achieve lower costs, higher productivity, or better quality.

  3. Location can be important in terms of cost and convenience for customers. Location near inputs can result in lower input costs. Location near markets can result in lower transportation costs and quicker delivery times. Convenient location is particularly important in the retail sector.

  4. Quality refers to materials, workmanship, design, and service. Consumers judge quality in terms of how well they think a product or service will satisfy its intended purpose. Customers are generally willing to pay more for a product or service if they perceive the product or service has a higher quality than that of a competitor.

  5. Quick response can be a competitive advantage. One way is quickly bringing new or improved products or services to the market. Another is being able to quickly deliver existing products and services to a customer after they are ordered, and still another is quickly handling customer complaints.

  6. Flexibility is the ability to respond to changes. Changes might relate to alterations in design features of a product or service, or to the volume demanded by customers, or the mix of products or services offered by an organization. High flexibility can be a competitive advantage in a changeable environment.

page 43 

  1. Inventory management can be a competitive advantage by effectively matching supplies of goods with demand.

  2. Supply chain management involves coordinating internal and external operations (buyers and suppliers) to achieve timely and cost-effective delivery of goods throughout the system.

  3. Service might involve after-sale activities customers perceive as value-added, such as delivery, setup, warranty work, and technical support. Or it might involve extra attention while work is in progress, such as courtesy, keeping the customer informed, and attention to details. Service quality can be a key differentiator; and it is one that is often sustainable. Moreover, businesses rated highly by their customers for service quality tend to be more profitable, and grow faster, than businesses that are not rated highly.

  4. Managers and workers are the people at the heart and soul of an organization, and if they are competent and motivated, they can provide a distinct competitive edge via their skills and the ideas they create. One often overlooked skill is answering the telephone. How complaint calls or requests for information are handled can be a positive or a negative. If a person answering is rude or not helpful, that can produce a negative image. Conversely, if calls are handled promptly and cheerfully, that can produce a positive image and, potentially, a competitive advantage.

Why Some Organizations Fail

Organizations fail, or perform poorly, for a variety of reasons. Being aware of those reasons can help managers avoid making similar mistakes. Among the chief reasons are the following:

  1. Neglecting operations strategy.

  2. Failing to take advantage of strengths and opportunities, and/or failing to recognize competitive threats.

  3. Putting too much emphasis on short-term financial performance at the expense of research and development.

  4. Placing too much emphasis on product and service design and not enough on process design and improvement.

    page 44 

  5. Neglecting investments in capital and human resources.

  6. Failing to establish good internal communications and cooperation among different functional areas.

  7. Failing to consider customer wants and needs.

The key to successfully competing is to determine what customers want and then directing efforts toward meeting (or even exceeding) customer expectations. Two basic issues must be addressed. First: What do the customers want? (Which items on the preceding list of the ways business organizations compete are important to customers?) Second: What is the best way to satisfy those wants?

Operations must work with marketing to obtain information on the relative importance of the various items to each major customer or target market.

Understanding competitive issues can help managers develop successful strategies.

2.3 MISSION AND STRATEGIES

An organization’s mission is the reason for its existence. It is expressed in its mission statement . For a business organization, the mission statement should answer the question “What business are we in?” Missions vary from organization to organization, depending on the nature of their business. Table 2.1 provides several examples of mission statements.

TABLE 2.1

Selected portions of company mission statements

Microsoft

To help people and businesses throughout the world to realize their full potential.

Verizon

To help people and businesses communicate with each other.

Starbucks

To inspire and nurture the human spirit—one cup and one neighborhood at a time.

U.S. Dept. of Education

To promote student achievement and preparation for global competitiveness and fostering educational excellence and ensuring equal access.

A mission statement serves as the basis for organizational goals , which provide more detail and describe the scope of the mission. The mission and goals often relate to how an organization wants to be perceived by the general public, and by its employees, suppliers, and customers. Goals serve as a foundation for the development of organizational strategies. These, in turn, provide the basis for strategies and tactics of the functional units of the organization.

Organizational strategy is important because it guides the organization by providing direction for, and alignment of, the goals and strategies of the functional units. Moreover, strategies can be the main reason for the success or failure of an organization.

There are three basic business strategies:

  • Low cost

  • Responsiveness

  • Differentiation from competitors

Responsiveness relates to the ability to respond to changing demands. Differentiation can relate to product or service features, quality, reputation, or customer service. Some organizations focus on a single strategy, while others employ a combination of strategies. One company that has multiple strategies is Amazon.com. Not only does it offer low-cost and quick, reliable deliveries, it also excels in customer service.

page 45 

Strategies and Tactics

If you think of goals as destinations, then strategies are the roadmaps for reaching those destinations. Strategies provide focus for decision making. Generally speaking, organizations have overall strategies called organizational strategies, which relate to the entire organization. They also have functional strategies, which relate to each of the functional areas of the organization. The functional strategies should support the overall strategies of the organization, just as the organizational strategies should support the goals and mission of the organization.

Tactics are the methods and actions used to accomplish strategies. They are more specific than strategies, and they provide guidance and direction for carrying out actual operations, which need the most specific and detailed plans and decision making in an organization. You might think of tactics as the “how to” part of the process (e.g., how to reach the destination, following the strategy roadmap), and operations as the actual “doing” part of the process. Much of this book deals with tactical operations.

It should be apparent that the overall relationship that exists from the mission down to actual operations is hierarchical. This is illustrated in Figure 2.1.

image

A simple example may help to put this hierarchy into perspective.

page 46 

Here are some examples of different strategies an organization might choose from:

Low cost. Outsource operations to third-world countries that have low labor costs.

Scale-based strategies. Use capital-intensive methods to achieve high output volume and low unit costs.

Specialization. Focus on narrow product lines or limited service to achieve higher quality.

Newness. Focus on innovation to create new products or services.

Flexible operations. Focus on quick response and/or customization.

High quality. Focus on achieving higher quality than competitors.

Service. Focus on various aspects of service (e.g., helpful, courteous, reliable, etc.).

Sustainability. Focus on environmental-friendly and energy-efficient operations.

A wide range of business organizations are beginning to recognize the strategic advantages of sustainability, not only in economic terms, but also through promotional benefits by publicizing their sustainability efforts and achievements.

Sometimes, organizations will combine two or more of these, or other approaches, into their strategy. However, unless they are careful, they risk losing focus and not achieving advantage in any category. Generally speaking, strategy formulation takes into account the way organizations compete and a particular organization’s assessment of its own strengths and weaknesses in order to take advantage of its core competencies —those special attributes or abilities possessed by an organization that give it a competitive edge.

The most effective organizations use an approach that develops core competencies based on customer needs, as well as on what the competition is doing. Marketing and operations work closely to match customer needs with operations capabilities. Competitor competencies are important for several reasons. For example, if a competitor is able to supply high-quality products, it may be necessary to meet that high quality as a baseline. However, merely matching a competitor is usually not sufficient to gain market share. It may be necessary to exceed the quality level of the competitor or gain an edge by excelling in one or more other dimensions, such as rapid delivery or service after the sale. Walmart, for example, has been very successful in managing its supply chain, which has contributed to its competitive advantage.

page 47 

To be effective, strategies and core competencies need to be aligned. Table 2.2 lists examples of strategies and companies that have successfully employed those strategies.

TABLE 2.2

Examples of operations strategies

Organization Strategy

Operations Strategy

Examples of Companies or Services

Low price

Low cost

U.S. first-class postage

Walmart

Southwest Airlines

Responsiveness

Short processing time

On-time delivery

McDonald’s restaurants

Express Mail, UPS, FedEx

Uber, Lyft, Grubhub

Domino’s Pizza

FedEx

Differentiation: High quality

High-performance design and/or high-quality processing

Consistent quality

TV: Sony, Samsung, LG

Lexus

Disneyland

Five-star restaurants or hotels

Coca-Cola, PepsiCo

Wegmans

Electrical power

Differentiation: Newness

Innovation

3M, Apple

Google

Differentiation: Variety

Flexibility

Volume

Burger King (“Have it your way”)

Hospital emergency room

McDonald’s (“Buses welcome”)

Toyota

Supermarkets (additional checkouts)

Differentiation: Service

Superior customer service

Disneyland

Amazon

IBM

Nordstrom, Von Maur

Differentiation: Location

Convenience

Supermarkets, dry cleaners

Mall stores

Service stations

Banks, ATMs

Strategy Formulation

Strategy formulation is almost always critical to the success of a strategy. Walmart discovered this when it opened stores in Japan. Although Walmart thrived in many countries on its reputation for low-cost items, Japanese consumers associated low cost with low quality, causing Walmart to rethink its strategy in the Japanese market. And many felt that Hewlett-Packard (HP) committed a strategic error when it acquired Compaq Computers at a cost of $19 billion. HP’s share of the computer market was less after the merger than the sum of the shares of the separate companies before the merger. In another example, U.S. automakers adopted a strategy in the early 2000s of offering discounts and rebates on a range of cars and SUVs, many of which were on low-margin vehicles. The strategy put a strain on profits, but customers began to expect those incentives, and the companies maintained them to keep from losing additional market share.

On the other hand, Coach, the maker of leather handbags and purses, successfully changed its longtime strategy to grow its market by creating new products. Long known for its highly durable leather goods in a market where women typically owned few handbags, Coach created a new market for itself by changing women’s view of handbags by promoting “different handbags for different occasions” such as party bags, totes, clutches, wristlets, overnight bags, purses, and day bags. And Coach introduced many fashion styles and colors.

To formulate an effective strategy, senior managers must take into account the core competencies of the organizations, and they must scan the environment. They must determine page 48what competitors are doing, or planning to do, and take that into account. They must critically examine other factors that could have either positive or negative effects. This is sometimes referred to as the SWOT analysis (strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats). Strengths and weaknesses have an internal focus and are typically evaluated by operations people. Threats and opportunities have an external focus and are typically evaluated by marketing people. SWOT is often regarded as the link between organizational strategy and operations strategy.

An alternative to SWOT analysis is Michael Porter’s five forces model, 1 which takes into account the threat of new competition, the threat of substitute products or services, the bargaining power of customers, the bargaining power of suppliers, and the intensity of competition.

In formulating a successful strategy, organizations must take into account both order qualifiers and order winners. Order qualifiers are those characteristics that potential customers perceive as minimum standards of acceptability for a product to be considered for purchase. However, that may not be sufficient to get a potential customer to purchase from the organization. Order winners are those characteristics of an organization’s goods or services that cause them to be perceived as better than the competition.

Characteristics such as price, delivery reliability, delivery speed, and quality can be order qualifiers or order winners. Thus, quality may be an order winner in some situations, but in others only an order qualifier. Over time, a characteristic that was once an order winner may become an order qualifier.

Obviously, it is important to determine the set of order qualifier characteristics and the set of order winner characteristics. It is also necessary to decide on the relative importance of each characteristic so that appropriate attention can be given to the various characteristics. Marketing must make that determination and communicate it to operations.

Environmental scanning is the monitoring of events and trends that present either threats or opportunities for the organization. Generally, these include competitors’ activities; changing consumer needs; legal, economic, political, and environmental issues; the potential for new markets; and the like.

Another key factor to consider when developing strategies is technological change, which can present real opportunities and threats to an organization. Technological changes occur in products (high-definition TV, improved computer chips, improved cellular telephone systems, and improved designs for earthquake-proof structures); in services (faster order processing, faster delivery); and in processes (robotics, automation, computer-assisted processing, point-of-sale scanners, and flexible manufacturing systems). The obvious benefit is a competitive edge; the risk is that incorrect choices, poor execution, and higher-than-expected operating costs will create competitive disadvantages.

Important factors may be internal or external. The following are key external factors:

  1. Economic conditions. These include the general health and direction of the economy, inflation and deflation, interest rates, tax laws, and tariffs.

  2. Political conditions. These include favorable or unfavorable attitudes toward business, political stability or instability, and wars.

  3. Legal environment. This includes antitrust laws, government regulations, trade restrictions, minimum wage laws, product liability laws and recent court experience, labor laws, and patents.

  4. Technology. This can include the rate at which product innovations are occurring, current and future process technology (equipment, materials handling), and design technology.

  5. Competition. This includes the number and strength of competitors, the basis of competition (price, quality, special features), and the ease of market entry.

  6. Customers. Loyalty, existing relationships, and understanding of wants and needs are important.

    page 49 

  7. Suppliers. Supplier relationships, dependability of suppliers, quality, flexibility, and service are typical considerations.

  8. Markets. This includes size, location, brand loyalties, ease of entry, potential for growth, long-term stability, and demographics.

The organization also must take into account various internal factors that relate to possible strengths or weaknesses. Among the key internal factors are the following:

  1. Human resources. These include the skills and abilities of managers and workers, special talents (creativity, designing, problem solving), loyalty to the organization, expertise, dedication, and experience.

  2. Facilities and equipment. Capacities, location, age, and cost to maintain or replace can have a significant impact on operations.

  3. Financial resources. Cash flow, access to additional funding, existing debt burden, and cost of capital are important considerations.

  4. Products and services. These include existing products and services, and the potential for new products and services.

  5. Technology. This includes existing technology, the ability to integrate new technology, and the probable impact of technology on current and future operations.

  6. Other. Other factors include patents, labor relations, company or product image, distribution channels, relationships with distributors, maintenance of facilities and equipment, access to resources, and access to markets.

After assessing internal and external factors and an organization’s distinctive competence, a strategy or strategies must be formulated that will give the organization the best chance of success. Among the types of questions that may need to be addressed are the following:

What role, if any, will the internet play?

Will the organization have a global presence?

To what extent will outsourcing be used?

What will the supply chain management strategy be?

To what extent will new products or services be introduced?

What rate of growth is desirable and sustainable?

What emphasis, if any, should be placed on lean production?

How will the organization differentiate its products and/or services from competitors’?

The organization may decide to have a single, dominant strategy (e.g., be the price leader) or have multiple strategies. A single strategy would allow the organization to concentrate on one particular strength or market condition. On the other hand, multiple strategies may be needed to address a particular set of conditions.

Many companies are increasing their use of outsourcing to reduce overhead, gain flexibility, and take advantage of suppliers’ expertise. Amazon provides a great example of some of the potential benefits of outsourcing as part of a business strategy.

Growth is often a component of strategy, especially for new companies. A key aspect of this strategy is the need to seek a growth rate that is sustainable. In the 1990s, fast-food company Boston Market dazzled investors and fast-food consumers alike. Fueled by its success, it undertook rapid expansion. By the end of the decade, the company was nearly bankrupt; it had overexpanded. In 2000, it was absorbed by fast-food giant McDonald’s.

Companies increase their risk of failure not only by missing or incomplete strategies; they also fail due to poor execution of strategies. And sometimes they fail due to factors beyond their control, such as natural or man-made disasters, major political or economic changes, or competitors that have an overwhelming advantage (e.g., deep pockets, very low labor costs, less rigorous environmental requirements).

A useful resource on successful business strategies is the Profit Impact of Market Strategy (PIMS) database ( www.pimsonline.com). The database contains profiles of over 3,000 businesses located primarily in the United States, Canada, and western Europe. It is used by companies and academic institutions to guide strategic thinking. It allows subscribers to answer strategy questions about their business. Moreover, they can use it to generate benchmarks and develop successful strategies.

page 50 

According to the PIMS website,

The database is a collection of statistically documented experiences drawn from thousands of businesses, designed to help understand what kinds of strategies (e.g., quality, pricing, vertical integration, innovation, advertising) work best in what kinds of business environments. The data constitute a key resource for such critical management tasks as evaluating business performance, analyzing new business opportunities, evaluating and reality testing new strategies, and screening business portfolios. The primary role of the PIMS Program of the Strategic Planning Institute is to help managers understand and react to their business environment. PIMS does this by assisting managers as they develop and test strategies that will achieve an acceptable level of winning as defined by various strategies and financial measures.

Source: https://www.inc.com/encyclopedia/profit-impact-of-market-strategies-pims.html

Supply Chain Strategy

A supply chain strategy specifies how the supply chain should function to achieve supply chain goals. The supply chain strategy should be aligned with the business strategy. If it is well executed, it can create value for the organization. It establishes how the organization should work with suppliers and policies relating to customer relationships and sustainability. Supply chain strategy is covered in more detail in a later chapter.

Sustainability Strategy

Society is placing increasing emphasis on corporate sustainability practices in the form of governmental regulations and interest groups. For these and other reasons, business organizations are or should be devoting attention to sustainability goals. To be successful, they will need a sustainability strategy. That requires elevating sustainability to the level of organizational page 51governance; formulating goals for products and services, for processes, and for the entire supply chain; measuring achievements and striving for improvements; and possibly linking executive compensation to the achievement of sustainability goals.

Global Strategy

Global strategies have two different aspects. One relates to where parts or products are made, or where services such as customer support are performed. The other relates to where products or service are sold. With wages and standards of living increases in countries such as China and India, new market opportunities present themselves, requiring well-thought out strategies to take advantage of those potential opportunities while minimizing any associated risks.

As globalization increased, many companies realized that strategic decisions with respect to globalization had to be made. One issue companies face today is that what works in one country or region does not necessarily work in another, and strategies must be carefully crafted to take these variabilities into account. Another issue is the threat of political or social upheaval. Still another issue is the difficulty of coordinating and managing far-flung operations. Indeed, “In today’s global markets, you don’t have to go abroad to experience international competition. Sooner or later the world comes to you.” 2

2.4 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

The organization strategy provides the overall direction for the organization. It is broad in scope, covering the entire organization. Operations strategy is narrower in scope, dealing primarily with the operations aspect of the organization. Operations strategy relates to products, processes, methods, operating resources, quality, costs, lead times, and scheduling. Table 2.3 provides a comparison of an organization’s mission, its overall strategy, and its operations strategy, tactics, and operations.

TABLE 2.3

Comparison of mission, organization strategy, and operations strategy

In order for operations strategy to be truly effective, it is important to link it to organization strategy; that is, the two should not be formulated independently. Rather, formulation of organization strategy should take into account the realities of operations’ strengths and weaknesses, page 52capitalizing on strengths and dealing with weaknesses. Similarly, operations strategy must be consistent with the overall strategy of the organization, and with the other functional units of the organization. This requires that senior managers work with functional units to formulate strategies that will support, rather than conflict with, each other and the overall strategy of the organization. As obvious as this may seem, it doesn’t always happen in practice. Instead, we may find power struggles between various functional units. These struggles are detrimental to the organization because they pit functional units against each other rather than focusing their energy on making the organization more competitive and better able to serve the customer. Some of the latest approaches in organizations, involving teams of managers and workers, may reflect a growing awareness of the synergistic effects of working together rather than competing internally.

In the 1970s and early 1980s, operations strategy in the United States was often neglected in favor of marketing and financial strategies. That may have occurred because many chief executive officers did not come from operations backgrounds and perhaps did not fully appreciate the importance of the operations function. Mergers and acquisitions were common; leveraged buyouts were used, and conglomerates were formed that joined dissimilar operations. These did little to add value to the organization; they were purely financial in nature. Decisions were often made by individuals who were unfamiliar with the business, frequently to the detriment of that business. Meanwhile, foreign competitors began to fill the resulting vacuum with a careful focus on operations strategy.

In the late 1980s and early 1990s, many companies began to realize this approach was not working. They recognized that they were less competitive than other companies. This caused them to focus attention on operations strategy. A key element of both organization strategy and operations strategy is strategy formulation.

Operations strategy can have a major influence on the competitiveness of an organization. If it is well designed and well executed, there is a good chance the organization will be successful; if it is not well designed or executed, it is far less likely that the organization will be successful.

Strategic Operations Management Decision Areas

Operations management people play a strategic role in many strategic decisions in a business organization. Table 2.4 highlights some key decision areas. Notice that most of the decision areas have cost implications.

TABLE 2.4

Strategic operations management decisions

Decision Area

What the Decisions Affect

  1. Product and service design

  2. Capacity

  3. Process selection and layout

  4. Work design

  5. Location

  6. Quality

  7. Inventory

  8. Maintenance

  9. Scheduling

  10. Supply chains

  11. Projects

Costs, quality, liability, and environmental issues

Cost structure, flexibility

Costs, flexibility, skill level needed, capacity

Quality of work life, employee safety, productivity

Costs, visibility

Ability to meet or exceed customer expectations

Costs, shortages

Costs, equipment reliability, productivity

Flexibility, efficiency

Costs, quality, agility, shortages, vendor relations

Costs, new products, services, or operating systems

Two factors that tend to have universal strategic operations importance relate to quality and time. The following section discusses quality and time strategies.

Quality and Time Strategies

Traditional strategies of business organizations have tended to emphasize cost minimization or product differentiation. While not abandoning those strategies, many organizations have embraced strategies based on quality and/or time.

Quality-based strategies focus on maintaining or improving the quality of an organization’s products or services. Quality is generally a factor in both attracting and retaining customers. page 53Quality-based strategies may be motivated by a variety of factors. They may reflect an effort to overcome an image of poor quality, a desire to catch up with the competition, a desire to maintain an existing image of high quality, or some combination of these and other factors. Interestingly enough, quality-based strategies can be part of another strategy such as cost reduction, increased productivity, or time, all of which benefit from higher quality.

Time-based strategies focus on reducing the time required to accomplish various activities (e.g., develop new products or services and market them, respond to a change in customer demand, or deliver a product or perform a service). By doing so, organizations seek to improve service to the customer and to gain a competitive advantage over rivals who take more time to accomplish the same tasks.

Time-based strategies focus on reducing the time needed to conduct the various activities in a process. The rationale is that by reducing time, costs are generally less, productivity is higher, quality tends to be higher, product innovations appear on the market sooner, and customer service is improved.

Organizations have achieved time reduction in some of the following:

Planning time: The time needed to react to a competitive threat, to develop strategies and select tactics, to approve proposed changes to facilities, to adopt new technologies, and so on.

Product/service design time: The time needed to develop and market new or redesigned products or services.

Processing time: The time needed to produce goods or provide services. This can involve scheduling, repairing equipment, methods used, inventories, quality, training, and the like.

Changeover time: The time needed to change from producing one type of product or service to another. This may involve new equipment settings and attachments, different methods, equipment, schedules, or materials.

Delivery time: The time needed to fill orders.

Response time for complaints: These might be customer complaints about quality, timing of deliveries, and incorrect shipments. These might also be complaints from employees about working conditions (e.g., safety, lighting, heat or cold), equipment problems, or quality problems.

It is essential for marketing and operations personnel to collaborate on strategy formulation in order to ensure that the buying criteria of the most important customers in each market segment are addressed.

Agile operations is a strategic approach for competitive advantage that emphasizes the use of flexibility to adapt and prosper in an environment of change. Agility involves a blending of several distinct competencies such as cost, quality, and reliability along with flexibility. Processing aspects of flexibility include quick equipment changeovers, scheduling, and innovation. Product or service aspects include varying output volumes and product mix.

Successful agile operations requires careful planning to achieve a system that includes people, flexible equipment, and information technology. Reducing the time needed to perform work is one of the ways an organization can improve a key metric: productivity.

page 54 

2.5 IMPLICATIONS OF ORGANIZATION STRATEGY FOR OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Organization strategy has a major impact on operations and supply chain management strategies. For example, organizations that use a low-cost, high-volume strategy limit the amount of variety offered to customers. As a result, variations for operations and the supply chain are minimal, so they are easier to deal with. Conversely, a strategy to offer a wide variety of products or services, or to perform customized work, creates substantial operational and supply chain variations and, hence, more challenges in achieving a smooth flow of goods and services throughout the supply chain, thus making the matching of supply to demand more difficult. Similarly, increasing service reduces the ability to compete on price. Table 2.5 provides a brief overview of variety and some other key implications.

TABLE 2.5

Organization strategies and their implications for operations management

Organization Strategy

Implications for Operations Management

Low price

Requires low variation in products/services and a high-volume, steady flow of goods results in maximum use of resources through the system. Standardized work, material, and inventory requirements.

High quality

Entails higher initial cost for product and service design, and process design, and more emphasis on assuring supplier quality.

Quick response

Requires flexibility, extra capacity, and higher levels of some inventory items.

Newness/innovation

Entails large investment in research and development for new or improved products and services plus the need to adapt operations and supply processes to suit new products or services.

Product or service variety

Requires high variation in resource and more emphasis on product and service design; higher worker skills needed, cost estimation more difficult; scheduling more complex; quality assurance more involved; inventory management more complex; and matching supply to demand more difficult.

Sustainability

Affects location planning, product and service design, process design, outsourcing decisions, returns policies, and waste management.

2.6 TRANSFORMING STRATEGY INTO ACTION: THE BALANCED SCORECARD

The Balanced Scorecard (BSC) is a top-down management system that organizations can use to clarify their vision and strategy and transform them into action. It was introduced in the early 1990s by Robert Kaplan and David Norton, 3 and it has been revised and improved since then. The idea was to move away from a purely financial perspective of the organization and integrate other perspectives such as customers, internal business processes, and learning and growth. Using this approach, managers develop objectives, metrics, and targets for each objective and initiatives to achieve objectives, and they identify links among the various perspectives. Results are monitored and used to improve strategic performance results. Figure 2.2 illustrates the conceptual framework of this approach. Many organizations employ this or a similar approach.

image

page 55 

As seen in Figure 2.2, the four perspectives are intended to balance not only financial and nonfinancial performance, but also internal and external performance, as well as past and future performance. This approach can also help organizations focus on how they differ from the competition in each of the four areas if their vision is realized. Table 2.6 has some examples of factors for key focal points.

TABLE 2.6

Balanced scorecard factors examples

Focal Point

Factors

Suppliers

Delivery performance

Quality performance

Number of suppliers

Supplier locations

Duplicate activities

Internal Processes

Bottlenecks

Automation potential

Turnover

Employees

Job satisfaction

Learning opportunities

Delivery performance

Customers

Quality performance

Satisfaction

Retention rate

Although the Balanced Scorecard helps focus managers’ attention on strategic issues and the implementation of strategy, it is important to note that it has no role in strategy formulation.

page 56 

Moreover, this approach pays little attention to suppliers and government regulations, and community, environmental, and sustainability issues are missing. These are closely linked, and business organizations need to be aware of the impact they are having in these areas and respond accordingly. Otherwise, organizations may be subject to attack by pressure groups and risk damage to their reputation.

2.7 PRODUCTIVITY

One of the primary responsibilities of a manager is to achieve productive use of an organization’s resources. The term productivity is used to describe this. Productivity is an index that measures output (goods and services) relative to the input (labor, materials, energy, and other resources) used to produce it. It is usually expressed as the ratio of output to input:

(2–1)

Although productivity is important for all business organizations, it is particularly important for organizations that use a strategy of low cost, because the higher the productivity, the lower the cost of the output.

A productivity ratio can be computed for a single operation, a department, an organization, or an entire country. In business organizations, productivity ratios are used for planning workforce requirements, scheduling equipment, financial analysis, and other important tasks.

Productivity has important implications for business organizations and for entire nations. For nonprofit organizations, higher productivity means lower costs; for profit-based organizations, productivity is an important factor in determining how competitive a company is. For a nation, the rate of productivity growth is of great importance. Productivity growth is the increase in productivity from one period to the next relative to the productivity in the preceding period. Thus,

(2–2)

page 57 

For example, if productivity increased from 80 to 84, the growth rate would be

Productivity growth is a key factor in a country’s rate of inflation and the standard of living of its people. Productivity increases add value to the economy while keeping inflation in check. Productivity growth was a major factor in the long period of sustained economic growth in the United States in the 1990s.

Computing Productivity

Productivity measures can be based on a single input (partial productivity), on more than one input (multifactor productivity), or on all inputs (total productivity). Table 2.7 lists some examples of productivity measures. The choice of productivity measure depends primarily on the purpose of the measurement. If the purpose is to track improvements in labor productivity, then labor becomes the obvious input measure.

TABLE 2.7

Some examples of different types of productivity measures

Partial measures are often of greatest use in operations management. Table 2.8 provides some examples of partial productivity measures.

TABLE 2.8

Some examples of partial productivity measures

Labor productivity

Units of output per labor hour

Units of output per shift

Value-added per labor hour

Dollar value of output per labor hour

Machine productivity

Units of output per machine hour

Dollar value of output per machine hour

Capital productivity

Units of output per dollar input

Dollar value of output per dollar input

Energy productivity

Units of output per kilowatt-hour

Dollar value of output per kilowatt-hour

The units of output used in productivity measures depend on the type of job performed. The following are examples of labor productivity:

Similar examples can be listed for machine productivity (e.g., the number of pieces per hour turned out by a machine).

page 58 

Calculations of multifactor productivity measure inputs and outputs using a common unit of measurement, such as cost. For instance, the measure might use cost of inputs and units of the output:

(2–3)

Note: The unit of measure must be the same for all factors in the denominator

page 59 

Productivity measures are useful on a number of levels. For an individual department or organization, productivity measures can be used to track performance over time. This allows managers to judge performance and to decide where improvements are needed. For example, if productivity has slipped in a certain area, operations staff can examine the factors used to compute productivity to determine what has changed and then devise a means of improving productivity in subsequent periods.

Productivity measures also can be used to judge the performance of an entire industry or the productivity of a country as a whole. These productivity measures are aggregate measures.

In essence, productivity measurements serve as scorecards of the effective use of resources. Business leaders are concerned with productivity as it relates to competitiveness: If two firms both have the same level of output but one requires less input because of higher productivity, that one will be able to charge a lower price and consequently increase its share of the market. Or that firm might elect to charge the same price, thereby reaping a greater profit. Government leaders are concerned with national productivity because of the close relationship between productivity and a nation’s standard of living. High levels of productivity are largely responsible for the relatively high standards of living enjoyed by people in industrial nations. Furthermore, wage and price increases not accompanied by productivity increases tend to create inflationary pressures on a nation’s economy.

Advantages of domestic-based operations for domestic markets often include higher worker productivity, better control of quality, avoidance of intellectual property losses, lower shipping costs, political stability, low inflation, and faster delivery.

Productivity in the Service Sector

Service productivity is more problematic than manufacturing productivity. In many situations, it is more difficult to measure, and thus to manage, because it involves intellectual activities and a high degree of variability. Think about medical diagnoses, surgery, consulting, legal services, customer service, and computer repair work. This makes productivity improvements more difficult to achieve. Nonetheless, because service is becoming an increasingly large portion of our economy, the issues related to service productivity will have to be dealt with. It is interesting to note that government statistics normally do not include service firms.

page 60 

A useful measure closely related to productivity is process yield. Where products are involved, process yield is defined as the ratio of output of good product (i.e., defective product is not included) to the quantity of raw material input. Where services are involved, process yield measurement is often dependent on the particular process. For example, in a car rental agency, a measure of yield is the ratio of cars rented to cars available for a given day. In education, a measure for college and university admission yield is the ratio of student acceptances to the total number of students approved for admission. For subscription services, yield is the ratio of new subscriptions to the number of calls made or the number of letters mailed. However, not all services lend themselves to a simple yield measurement. For example, services such as automotive, appliance, and computer repair don’t readily lend themselves to such measures.

Factors that Affect Productivity

Numerous factors affect productivity. Generally, they are methods, capital, quality, technology, and management.

A commonly held misconception is that workers are the main determinant of productivity. According to that theory, the route to productivity gains involves getting employees to work harder. However, the fact is that many productivity gains in the past have come from technological improvements. Familiar examples include:

Drones

Automation

GPS devices

Copiers and scanners

Calculators

Smartphones

The internet, search engines

Computers

Apps

Voicemail

Email

3D printers

Radio frequency ID tags

Software

Medical imaging

However, technology alone won’t guarantee productivity gains; it must be used wisely and thoughtfully. Without careful planning, technology can actually reduce productivity, especially if it leads to inflexibility, high costs, or mismatched operations. Another current productivity pitfall results from employees’ use of computers or smartphones for nonwork-related activities (playing games or checking stock prices or sports scores on the internet or smartphones, and texting friends and relatives). Beyond all of these is the dip in productivity that results while employees learn to use new equipment or procedures that will eventually lead to productivity gains after the learning phase ends.

page 61 

Other factors that affect productivity include the following:

Standardizing processes and procedures wherever possible to reduce variability can have a significant benefit for both productivity and quality.

Quality differences may distort productivity measurements. One way this can happen is when comparisons are made over time, such as comparing the productivity of a factory now with one 30 years ago. Quality is now much higher than it was then, but there is no simple way to incorporate quality improvements into productivity measurements.

Use of the internet can lower costs of a wide range of transactions, thereby increasing productivity. It is likely that this effect will continue to increase productivity in the foreseeable future.

Computer viruses can have an immense negative impact on productivity.

Searching for lost or misplaced items wastes time, hence negatively affecting productivity.

Scrap rates have an adverse effect on productivity, signaling inefficient use of resources.

New workers tend to have lower productivity than seasoned workers. Thus, growing companies may experience a productivity lag.

Safety should be addressed. Accidents can take a toll on productivity.

A shortage of technology-savvy workers hampers the ability of companies to update computing resources, generate and sustain growth, and take advantage of new opportunities.

Layoffs often affect productivity. The effect can be positive and negative. Initially, productivity may increase after a layoff, because the workload remains the same but fewer workers do the work—although they have to work harder and longer to do it. However, as time goes by, the remaining workers may experience an increased risk of burnout, and they may fear additional job cuts. The most capable workers may decide to leave.

Labor turnover has a negative effect on productivity; replacements need time to get up to speed.

Design of the workspace can impact productivity. For example, having tools and other work items within easy reach can positively impact productivity.

Incentive plans that reward productivity increases can boost productivity.

And there are still other factors that affect productivity, such as equipment breakdowns and shortages of parts or materials. The education level and training of workers and their health can greatly affect productivity. The opportunity to obtain lower costs due to higher productivity elsewhere is a key reason many organizations turn to outsourcing. Hence, an alternative to outsourcing can be improved productivity. Moreover, as a part of their strategy for quality, the best organizations strive for continuous improvement. Productivity improvements can be an important aspect of that approach.

Improving Productivity

A company or a department can take a number of key steps toward improving productivity:

  1. Develop productivity measures for all operations. Measurement is the first step in managing and controlling an operation.

  2. Look at the system as a whole in deciding which operations are most critical. It is overall productivity that is important. Managers need to reflect on the value of potential productivity improvements before okaying improvement efforts. The issue is effectiveness. There are several aspects of this. One is to make sure the result will be something customers want. For example, if a company is able to increase its output through productivity improvements, but then is unable to sell the increased output, the increase in productivity isn’t effective. Second, it is important to adopt a systems viewpoint: A productivity increase in one part of an operation that doesn’t increase the productivity of the system would not be effective. For example, suppose a system consists of a sequence of two operations, where the output of the first operation is the input to the second operation, and each operation can complete its part of the process at a rate of 20 units per hour. If the productivity of the first operation is increased, but the productivity of the second operation is not, the output of the system will still be 20 units per hour.

  3. Develop methods for achieving productivity improvements, such as soliciting ideas from workers (perhaps organizing teams of workers, engineers, and managers), studying how other firms have increased productivity, and reexamining the way work is done.

  4. Establish reasonable goals for improvement.

  5. Make it clear that management supports and encourages productivity improvement. Consider incentives to reward workers for contributions.

  6. Measure improvements and publicize them.

page 62 

Don’t confuse productivity with efficiency. Efficiency is a narrower concept that pertains to getting the most out of a fixed set of resources; productivity is a broader concept that pertains to effective use of overall resources. For example, an efficiency perspective on mowing a lawn with a hand mower would focus on the best way to use the hand mower; a productivity perspective would include the possibility of using a power mower.

Fracking productivity improvement is another example. Drilling methods have become more effective. Drillers are now adopting a hydraulic fracturing method pioneered by companies such as Liberty Resources and EOG Resources that uses larger amounts of water and minerals. Although it is a more costly process, it has increased production rates in the first year of a well’s life, after which output tends to drop off dramatically. Processes such as these have reduced the break-even cost of producing a barrel of oil and kept profitable some acreage that drillers might otherwise have left idle.

1 Michael E. Porter, “The Five Competitive Forces that Shape Strategy,” Harvard Business Review 86, no. 1 (January 2008), pp. 78–93, 137.

2 Christopher A. Bartlett and Sumantra Ghoshal, “Going Global: Lessons from Late Movers,” Harvard Business Review, March-April 2000, p. 139.

3 Robert S. Kaplan and David P. Norton, Balanced Scorecard: Translating Strategy into Action (Cambridge, MA: Harvard Business School Press, 1996).

page 74 

page 75 

3.1 INTRODUCTION

Forecasts are a basic input in the decision processes of operations management because they provide information on future demand. The importance of forecasting to operations management cannot be overstated. The primary goal of operations management is to match supply to demand. Having a forecast of demand is essential for determining how much capacity or supply will be needed to meet demand. For instance, operations needs to know what capacity will be needed to make staffing and equipment decisions, budgets must be prepared, purchasing needs information for ordering from suppliers, and supply chain partners need to make their plans.

Businesses make plans for future operations based on anticipated future demand. Anticipated demand is derived from two possible sources, actual customer orders and forecasts. For businesses where customer orders make up most or all of anticipated demand, planning is straightforward, and little or no forecasting is needed. However, for many businesses, most or all of anticipated demand is derived from forecasts.

Two aspects of forecasts are important. One is the expected level of demand; the other is the degree of accuracy that can be assigned to a forecast (i.e., the potential size of forecast error). The expected level of demand can be a function of some structural variation, such as a trend or seasonal variation. Forecast accuracy is a function of the ability of forecasters to correctly model demand, random variation, and sometimes unforeseen events.

Forecasts are made with reference to a specific time horizon. The time horizon may be fairly short (e.g., an hour, day, week, or month), or somewhat longer (e.g., the next six months, the next year, the next five years, or the life of a product or service). Short-term forecasts pertain to ongoing operations. Long-range forecasts can be an important strategic planning tool. Long-term forecasts pertain to new products or services, new equipment, new facilities, or something else that will require a somewhat long lead time to develop, construct, or otherwise implement.

Forecasts are the basis for budgeting, planning capacity, sales, production and inventory, personnel, purchasing, and more. Forecasts play an important role in the planning process because they enable managers to anticipate the future so they can plan accordingly.

Forecasts affect decisions and activities throughout an organization, in accounting, finance, human resources, marketing, and management information systems (MIS), as well as in operations and other parts of an organization. Here are some examples of uses of forecasts in business organizations:

Accounting. New product/process cost estimates, profit projections, cash management.

Finance. Equipment/equipment replacement needs, timing and amount of funding/borrowing needs.

Human resources. Hiring activities, including recruitment, interviewing, and training; layoff planning, including outplacement counseling.

page 77 

Marketing. Pricing and promotion, e-business strategies, global competition strategies.

MIS. New/revised information systems, internet services.

Operations. Schedules, capacity planning, work assignments and workloads, inventory planning, make-or-buy decisions, outsourcing, project management.

Product/service design. Revision of current features, design of new products or services.

In most of these uses of forecasts, decisions in one area have consequences in other areas. Therefore, it is very important for all affected areas to agree on a common forecast. However, this may not be easy to accomplish. Different departments often have very different perspectives on a forecast, making a consensus forecast difficult to achieve. For example, salespeople, by their very nature, may be overly optimistic with their forecasts, and may want to “reserve” capacity for their customers. This can result in excess costs for operations and inventory storage. Conversely, if demand exceeds forecasts, operations and the supply chain may not be able to meet demand, which would mean lost business and dissatisfied customers.

Forecasting is also an important component of yield management, which relates to the percentage of capacity being used. Accurate forecasts can help managers plan tactics (e.g., offer discounts, don’t offer discounts) to match capacity with demand, thereby achieving high-yield levels.

There are two uses for forecasts. One is to help managers plan the system, and the other is to help them plan the use of the system. Planning the system generally involves long-range plans about the types of products and services to offer, what facilities and equipment to have, where to locate, and so on. Planning the use of the system refers to short-range and intermediate-range planning, which involve tasks such as planning inventory and workforce levels, planning purchasing and production, budgeting, and scheduling.

Business forecasting pertains to more than predicting demand. Forecasts are also used to predict profits, revenues, costs, productivity changes, prices and availability of energy and raw materials, interest rates, movements of key economic indicators (e.g., gross domestic product, inflation, government borrowing), and prices of stocks and bonds. For the sake of simplicity, this chapter will focus on the forecasting of demand. Keep in mind, however, that the concepts and techniques apply equally well to the other variables.

page 78 

Despite of its use of computers and sophisticated mathematical models, forecasting is not an exact science. Instead, successful forecasting often requires a skillful blending of science and intuition. Experience, judgment, and technical expertise all play a role in developing useful forecasts. Along with these, a certain amount of luck and a dash of humility can be helpful, because the worst forecasters occasionally produce a very good forecast, and even the best forecasters sometimes miss completely. Current forecasting techniques range from the mundane to the exotic. Some work better than others, but no single technique works all the time.

3.2 FEATURES COMMON TO ALL FORECASTS

A wide variety of forecasting techniques are in use. In many respects, they are quite different from each other, as you shall soon discover. Nonetheless, certain features are common to all, and it is important to recognize them.

  • Forecasting techniques generally assume that the same underlying causal system that existed in the past will continue to exist in the future.

Comment A manager cannot simply delegate forecasting to models or computers and then forget about it, because unplanned occurrences can wreak havoc with forecasts. For instance, weather-related events, tax increases or decreases, and changes in features or prices of competing products or services can have a major impact on demand. Consequently, a manager must be alert to such occurrences and be ready to override forecasts, which assume a stable causal system.

  • Forecasts are not perfect; actual results usually differ from predicted values; the presence of randomness precludes a perfect forecast. Allowances should be made for forecast errors.

  • Forecasts for groups of items tend to be more accurate than forecasts for individual items because forecasting errors among items in a group usually have a canceling effect. Opportunities for grouping may arise if parts or raw materials are used for multiple products or if a product or service is demanded by a number of independent sources.

  • Forecast accuracy decreases as the time period covered by the forecast—the time horizon—increases. Generally speaking, short-range forecasts must contend with fewer uncertainties than longer-range forecasts, so they tend to be more accurate.

An important consequence of the last point is that flexible business organizations—those that can respond quickly to changes in demand—require a shorter forecasting horizon and, hence, benefit from more accurate short-range forecasts than competitors who are less flexible and who must therefore use longer forecast horizons.

3.3 ELEMENTS OF A GOOD FORECAST

A properly prepared forecast should fulfill certain requirements:

  • The forecast should be timely. Usually, a certain amount of time is needed to respond to the information contained in a forecast. For example, capacity cannot be expanded overnight, nor can inventory levels be changed immediately. Hence, the forecasting horizon must cover the time necessary to implement possible changes.

  • The forecast should be accurate, and the degree of accuracy should be stated. This will enable users to plan for possible errors and will provide a basis for comparing alternative forecasts.

  • The forecast should be reliable; it should work consistently. A technique that sometimes provides a good forecast and sometimes a poor one will leave users with the uneasy feeling that they may get burned every time a new forecast is issued.

    page 79
  • The forecast should be expressed in meaningful units. Financial planners need to know how many dollars will be needed, production planners need to know how many units will be needed, and schedulers need to know what machines and skills will be required. The choice of units depends on user needs.

  • The forecast should be in writing. Although this will not guarantee that all concerned are using the same information, it will at least increase the likelihood of it. In addition, a written forecast will permit an objective basis for evaluating the forecast once actual results are in.

  • The forecasting technique should be simple to understand and use. Users often lack confidence in forecasts based on sophisticated techniques; they do not understand either the circumstances in which the techniques are appropriate or the limitations of the techniques. Misuse of techniques is an obvious consequence. Not surprisingly, fairly simple forecasting techniques enjoy widespread popularity because users are more comfortable working with them.

  • The forecast should be cost-effective: The benefits should outweigh the costs.

3.4 FORECASTING AND THE SUPPLY CHAIN

Accurate forecasts are very important for the supply chain. Inaccurate forecasts can lead to shortages and excesses throughout the supply chain. Shortages of materials, parts, and services can lead to missed deliveries, work disruption, and poor customer service. Conversely, overly optimistic forecasts can lead to excesses of materials and/or capacity, which increase costs. Both shortages and excesses in the supply chain have a negative impact not only on customer service but also on profits. Furthermore, inaccurate forecasts can result in temporary increases and decreases in orders to the supply chain, which can be misinterpreted by the supply chain.

Organizations can reduce the likelihood of such occurrences in a number of ways. One, obviously, is by striving to develop the best possible forecasts. Another is through collaborative planning and forecasting with major supply chain partners. Yet another way is through information sharing among partners and perhaps increasing supply chain visibility by allowing supply chain partners to have real-time access to sales and inventory information. Also important is rapid communication about poor forecasts, as well as about unplanned events that disrupt operations (e.g., flooding, work stoppages), and changes in plans.

3.5 STEPS IN THE FORECASTING PROCESS

There are six basic steps in the forecasting process:

  1. Determine the purpose of the forecast. How will it be used and when will it be needed? This step will provide an indication of the level of detail required in the forecast, the amount of resources (personnel, computer time, dollars) that can be justified, and the level of accuracy necessary.

  2. Establish a time horizon. The forecast must indicate a time interval, keeping in mind that accuracy decreases as the time horizon increases.

  3. Obtain, clean, and analyze appropriate data. Obtaining the data can involve significant effort. Once obtained, the data may need to be “cleaned” to get rid of outliers and obviously incorrect data before analysis.

  4. Select a forecasting technique.

  5. Make the forecast.

  6. Monitor the forecast errors. The forecast errors should be monitored to determine if the forecast is performing in a satisfactory manner. If it is not, reexamine the method, assumptions, the validity of data, and so on; modify as needed; and prepare a revised forecast.

page 80 

Once the process has been set up, it may only be necessary to repeat steps 3 and 6 as new data become available.

Note, too, that additional action may be necessary. For example, if demand was much less than the forecast, an action such as a price reduction or a promotion may be needed. Conversely, if demand was much more than predicted, increased output may be advantageous. That may involve working overtime, outsourcing, or taking other measures.

3.6 APPROACHES TO FORECASTING

There are two general approaches to forecasting: qualitative and quantitative. Qualitative methods consist mainly of subjective inputs, which often defy precise numerical description. Quantitative methods involve either the projection of historical data or the development of associative models that attempt to utilize causal (explanatory) variables to make a forecast.

Qualitative techniques permit inclusion of soft information (e.g., human factors, personal opinions, hunches) in the forecasting process. Those factors are often omitted or downplayed when quantitative techniques are used because they are difficult or impossible to quantify. Quantitative techniques consist mainly of analyzing objective, or hard, data. They usually avoid personal biases that sometimes contaminate qualitative methods. In practice, either approach, or a combination of both approaches, might be used to develop a forecast.

The following pages present a variety of forecasting techniques that are classified as judgmental, time-series, or associative.

Judgmental forecasts rely on analysis of subjective inputs obtained from various sources, such as consumer surveys, the sales staff, managers and executives, and panels of experts. Quite frequently, these sources provide insights that are not otherwise available.

Time-series forecasts simply attempt to project past experience into the future. These techniques use historical data with the assumption that the future will be like the past. Some models merely attempt to smooth out random variations in historical data; others attempt to identify specific patterns in the data and project or extrapolate those patterns into the future, without trying to identify causes of the patterns.

Associative models use equations that consist of one or more explanatory variables that can be used to predict demand. For example, demand for paint might be related to variables such as the price per gallon and the amount spent on advertising, as well as to specific characteristics of the paint (e.g., drying time, ease of cleanup).

3.7 QUALITATIVE FORECASTS

In some situations, forecasters rely solely on judgment and opinion to make forecasts. If management must have a forecast quickly, there may not be enough time to gather and analyze quantitative data. At other times, especially when political and economic conditions are changing, available data may be obsolete, and more up-to-date information might not yet be available. Similarly, the introduction of new products and the redesign of existing products or packaging suffer from the absence of historical data that would be useful in forecasting. In such instances, forecasts are based on executive opinions, consumer surveys, opinions of the sales staff, and opinions of experts.

Executive Opinions

A small group of upper-level managers (e.g., in marketing, operations, and finance) may meet and collectively develop a forecast. This approach is often used as a part of long-range planning and new product development. It has the advantage of bringing together the considerable knowledge and talents of various managers. However, there is the risk that the view of one person will prevail, and the possibility that diffusing responsibility for the forecast over the entire group may result in less pressure to produce a good forecast.

page 81 

Salesforce Opinions

Members of the sales staff or the customer service staff are often good sources of information because of their direct contact with consumers. They are often aware of any plans the customers may be considering for the future. There are, however, several drawbacks to using salesforce opinions. One is that staff members may be unable to distinguish between what customers would like to do and what they actually will do. Another is that these people are sometimes overly influenced by recent experiences. Thus, after several periods of low sales, their estimates may tend to become pessimistic. After several periods of good sales, they may tend to be too optimistic. In addition, if forecasts are used to establish sales quotas, there will be a conflict of interest because it is to the salesperson’s advantage to provide low sales estimates.

Consumer Surveys

Because it is the consumers who ultimately determine demand, it seems natural to solicit input from them. In some instances, every customer or potential customer can be contacted. However, usually there are too many customers or there is no way to identify all potential customers. Therefore, organizations seeking consumer input usually resort to consumer surveys, which enable them to sample consumer opinions. The obvious advantage of consumer surveys is that they can tap information that might not be available elsewhere. On the other hand, a considerable amount of knowledge and skill is required to construct a survey, administer it, and correctly interpret the results for valid information. Surveys can be expensive and time-consuming. In addition, even under the best conditions, surveys of the general public must contend with the possibility of irrational behavior patterns. For example, much of the consumer’s thoughtful information gathering before purchasing a new car is often undermined by the glitter of a new car showroom or a high-pressure sales pitch. Along the same lines, low response rates to a mail survey should—but often don’t—make the results suspect.

If these and similar pitfalls can be avoided, surveys can produce useful information.

Other Approaches

A manager may solicit opinions from a number of other managers and staff people. Occasionally, outside experts are needed to help with a forecast. Advice may be needed on political or economic conditions in the United States or a foreign country, or some other aspect of importance with which an organization lacks familiarity.

Another approach is the Delphi method , an iterative process intended to achieve a consensus forecast. This method involves circulating a series of questionnaires among individuals who possess the knowledge and ability to contribute meaningfully. Responses are kept anonymous, which tends to encourage honest responses and reduces the risk that one person’s opinion will prevail. Each new questionnaire is developed using the information extracted from the previous one, thus enlarging the scope of information on which participants can base their judgments.

The Delphi method has been applied to a variety of situations, not all of which involve forecasting. The discussion here is limited to its use as a forecasting tool.

As a forecasting tool, the Delphi method is useful for technological forecasting; that is, for assessing changes in technology and their impact on an organization. Often, the goal is to predict when a certain event will occur. For instance, the goal of a Delphi forecast might be to predict when video telephones might be installed in at least 50 percent of residential homes or when a vaccine for a disease might be developed and ready for mass distribution. For the most part, these are long-term, single-time forecasts, which usually have very little hard information to go by or data that are costly to obtain, so the problem does not lend itself to analytical techniques. Rather, judgments of experts or others who possess sufficient knowledge to make predictions are used.

page 82 

3.8 FORECASTS BASED ON TIME-SERIES DATA

A time series is a time-ordered sequence of observations taken at regular intervals (e.g., hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, annually). The data may be measurements of demand, sales, earnings, profits, shipments, accidents, output, precipitation, productivity, or the consumer price index. Note that forecasts based on sales will understate demand when demand exceeds sales, causing shortages (stockouts) to occur. Forecasting techniques based on time-series data are made on the assumption that future values of the series can be estimated from past values. Although no attempt is made to identify variables that influence the series, these methods are widely used, often with quite satisfactory results.

Analysis of time-series data requires the analyst to identify the underlying behavior of the series. This can often be accomplished by merely plotting the data and visually examining the plot. One or more patterns might appear: trends, seasonal variations, cycles, or variations around an average. In addition, there will be random and perhaps irregular variations. These behaviors can be described as follows:

  1. Trend refers to a long-term upward or downward movement in the data. Population shifts, changing incomes, and cultural changes often account for such movements.

  2. Seasonality refers to short-term, fairly regular variations generally related to factors such as the calendar or time of day. Restaurants, supermarkets, and theaters experience weekly and even daily “seasonal” variations.

  3. Cycles are wavelike variations of more than one year’s duration. These are often related to a variety of economic, political, and even agricultural conditions.

  4. Irregular variations are due to unusual circumstances such as severe weather conditions, strikes, or a major change in a product or service. They do not reflect typical behavior, and their inclusion in the series can distort the overall picture. Whenever possible, these should be identified and removed from the data.

  5. Random variations are residual variations that remain after all other behaviors have been accounted for.

These behaviors are illustrated in Figure 3.1. The small “bumps” in the plots represent random variability.

image

The remainder of this section describes the various approaches to the analysis of time-series data. Before turning to those discussions, one point should be emphasized: A demand forecast should be based on a time series of past demand rather than unit sales. Sales would not truly reflect demand if one or more stockouts occurred.

Naive Methods

A simple but widely used approach to forecasting is the naive approach. A naive forecast uses a single previous value of a time series as the basis of a forecast. The naive approach can be used with a stable series (variations around an average), with seasonal variations, or with trend. With a stable series, the last data point becomes the forecast for the next period. Thus, if demand for a product last week was 20 cases, the forecast for this week is 20 cases. With seasonal variations, the forecast for this “season” is equal to the value of the series last “season.” For example, the forecast for demand for turkeys this Thanksgiving season is equal to demand for turkeys last Thanksgiving; the forecast of the number of checks cashed at a bank on the first day of the month next month is equal to the number of checks cashed on the first day of this month; and the forecast for highway traffic volume this Friday is equal to the highway traffic volume last Friday. For data with trend, the forecast is equal to the last value of the series plus or minus the difference between the last two page 83values of the series. For example, suppose the last two values were 50 and 53. The next forecast would be 56:

Period

Actual

Change from Previous Value

Forecast

1

50

2

53

+3

3

53 + 3 = 56

Although at first glance the naive approach may appear too simplistic, it is nonetheless a legitimate forecasting tool. Consider the advantages: It has virtually no cost, it is quick and easy to prepare because data analysis is nonexistent, and it is easily understandable. The main objection to this method is its inability to provide highly accurate forecasts. However, if resulting accuracy is acceptable, this approach deserves serious consideration. Moreover, even if other forecasting techniques offer better accuracy, they will almost always involve a greater cost. The accuracy of a naive forecast can serve as a standard of comparison against which to judge the cost and accuracy of other techniques. Thus, managers must answer the question: Is the increased accuracy of another method worth the additional resources required to achieve that accuracy?

page 84 

Techniques for Averaging

Historical data typically contain a certain amount of random variation, or white noise, that tends to obscure systematic movements in the data. This randomness arises from the combined influence of many—perhaps a great many—relatively unimportant factors, and it cannot be reliably predicted. Averaging techniques smooth variations in the data. Ideally, it would be desirable to completely remove any randomness from the data and leave only “real” variations, such as changes in the demand. As a practical matter, however, it is usually impossible to distinguish between these two kinds of variations, so the best one can hope for is that the small variations are random and the large variations are “real.”

Averaging techniques smooth fluctuations in a time series because the individual highs and lows in the data offset each other when they are combined into an average. A forecast based on an average thus tends to exhibit less variability than the original data (see Figure 3.2). This can be advantageous because many of these movements merely reflect random variability rather than a true change in the series. Moreover, because responding to changes in expected demand often entails considerable cost (e.g., changes in production rate, changes in the size of a workforce, inventory changes), it is desirable to avoid reacting to minor variations. Thus, minor variations are treated as random variations, whereas larger variations are viewed as more likely to reflect “real” changes, although these, too, are smoothed to a certain degree.

image

Averaging techniques generate forecasts that reflect recent values of a time series (e.g., the average value over the last several periods). These techniques work best when a series tends to vary around an average, although they also can handle step changes or gradual changes in the level of the series. Three techniques for averaging are described in this section:

  1. Moving average

  2. Weighted moving average

  3. Exponential smoothing

Moving Average One weakness of the naive method is that the forecast just traces the actual data, with a lag of one period; it does not smooth at all. But by expanding the amount of historical data a forecast is based on, this difficulty can be overcome. A moving average forecast uses a number of the most recent actual data values in generating a forecast. The moving average forecast can be computed using the following equation:

(3–1)

where

For example, MA 3 would refer to a three-period moving average forecast, and MA 5 would refer to a five-period moving average forecast.

page 85 

Note that in a moving average, as each new actual value becomes available, the forecast is updated by adding the newest value and dropping the oldest and then recomputing the average. Consequently, the forecast “moves” by reflecting only the most recent values.

In computing a moving average, including a moving total column—which gives the sum of the n most current values from which the average will be computed—aids computations. To update the moving total: Subtract the oldest value from the newest value and add that amount to the moving total for each update.

Figure 3.3 illustrates a three-period moving average forecast plotted against actual demand over 31 periods. Note how the moving average forecast lags the actual values and how smooth the forecasted values are compared with the actual values.

image

The moving average can incorporate as many data points as desired. In selecting the number of periods to include, the decision maker must take into account that the number of data points in the average determines its sensitivity to each new data point: The fewer the data points in an average, the more sensitive (responsive) the average tends to be. (See Figure 3.4A.)

image

If responsiveness is important, a moving average with relatively few data points should be used. This will permit quick adjustment to, say, a step change in the data, but it also will page 86cause the forecast to be somewhat responsive even to random variations. Conversely, moving averages based on more data points will smooth more but be less responsive to “real” changes. Hence, the decision maker must weigh the cost of responding more slowly to changes in the data against the cost of responding to what might simply be random variations. A review of forecast errors can help in this decision.

The advantages of a moving average forecast are that it is easy to compute and easy to understand. A possible disadvantage is that all values in the average are weighted equally. For instance, in a 10-period moving average, each value has a weight of 1/10. Hence, the oldest value has the same weight as the most recent value. If a change occurs in the series, a moving average forecast can be slow to react, especially if there are a large number of values in the average. Decreasing the number of values in the average increases the weight of more recent values, but it does so at the expense of losing potential information from less recent values.

Weighted Moving Average A weighted average is similar to a moving average, except that it typically assigns more weight to the most recent values in a time series. For instance, the most recent value might be assigned a weight of .40, the next most recent value a weight of .30, the next after that a weight of .20, and the next after that a weight of .10. Note that the weights must sum to 1.00, and that the heaviest weights are assigned to the most recent values.

(3–2)

where

Note that if four weights are used, only the four most recent demands are used to prepare the forecast.

The advantage of a weighted average over a simple moving average is that the weighted average is more reflective of the most recent occurrences. However, the choice of weights is somewhat arbitrary and generally involves the use of trial and error to find a suitable weighting scheme.

Exponential Smoothing Exponential smoothing is a sophisticated weighted averaging method that is still relatively easy to use and understand. Each new forecast is based on the previous forecast plus a percentage of the difference between that forecast and the actual value of the series at that point. That is:

where (Actual − Previous forecast) represents the forecast error and α is a percentage of the error. More concisely,

(3–3a)

where

The smoothing constant α represents a percentage of the forecast error. Each new forecast is equal to the previous forecast plus a percentage of the previous error. For example, suppose the previous forecast was 42 units, actual demand was 40 units, and α = .10. The new forecast would be computed as follows:

Then, if the actual demand turns out to be 43, the next forecast would be

An alternate form of Formula 3–3a reveals the weighting of the previous forecast and the latest actual demand:

(3–3b)

For example, if α = .10, this would be

The quickness of forecast adjustment to error is determined by the smoothing constant, α. The closer its value is to zero, the slower the forecast will be to adjust to forecast errors (i.e., the greater the smoothing). Conversely, the closer the value of α is to 1.00, the greater the responsiveness and the less the smoothing. This is illustrated in Figure 3.4B.

image

page 88 

Selecting a smoothing constant is basically a matter of judgment or trial and error, using forecast errors to guide the decision. The goal is to select a smoothing constant that balances the benefits of smoothing random variations with the benefits of responding to real changes if and when they occur. Commonly used values of α range from .05 to .50. Low values of α are used when the underlying average tends to be stable; higher values are used when the underlying average is susceptible to change.

Some computer packages include a feature that permits automatic modification of the smoothing constant if the forecast errors become unacceptably large.

Exponential smoothing is one of the most widely used techniques in forecasting, partly because of its ease of calculation and partly because of the ease with which the weighting scheme can be altered—simply by changing the value of α.

Note: Exponential smoothing should begin several periods back to enable forecasts to adjust to the data, instead of starting one period back. A number of different approaches can be used to obtain a starting forecast, such as the average of the first several periods, a subjective estimate, or the first actual value as the forecast for period 2 (i.e., the naive approach). For simplicity, the naive approach is used in this book. In practice, using an average of, say, the first three values as a forecast for period 4 would provide a better starting forecast because that would tend to be more representative.

Other Forecasting Methods

You may find two other approaches to forecasting interesting. They are briefly described in this section.

Focus Forecasting Some companies use forecasts based on a “best recent performance” basis. This approach, called focus forecasting , was developed by Bernard T. Smith, page 89and is described in several of his books. 1 It involves the use of several forecasting methods (e.g., moving average, weighted average, and exponential smoothing) all being applied to the last few months of historical data after any irregular variations have been removed. The method that has the highest accuracy is then used to make the forecast for the next month. This process is used for each product or service, and is repeated monthly.

Diffusion Models When new products or services are introduced, historical data are not generally available on which to base forecasts. Instead, predictions are based on rates of product adoption and usage spread from other established products, using mathematical diffusion models. These models take into account such factors as market potential, attention from mass media, and word of mouth. Although the details are beyond the scope of this text, it is important to point out that diffusion models are widely used in marketing and to assess the merits of investing in new technologies.

Techniques for Trend

Analysis of trend involves developing an equation that will suitably describe trend (assuming that trend is present in the data). The trend component may be linear, or it may not. Some commonly encountered nonlinear trend types are illustrated in Figure 3.5. A simple plot of the data often can reveal the existence and nature of a trend. The discussion here focuses exclusively on linear trends because these are fairly common.

image

There are two important techniques that can be used to develop forecasts when trend is present. One involves use of a trend equation; the other is an extension of exponential smoothing.

Trend Equation A linear trend equation has the form

(3–4)

where

page 90 

For example, consider the trend equation F t = 45 + 5 t. The value of F t when t = 0 is 45, and the slope of the line is 5, which means that, on average, the value of F t will increase by five units for each time period. If t = 10, the forecast, F t , is 45 + 5(10) = 95 units. The equation can be plotted by finding two points on the line. One can be found by substituting some value of t into the equation (e.g., t = 10) and then solving for F t . The other point is a (i.e., F t at t = 0). Plotting those two points and drawing a line through them yields a graph of the linear trend line.

The coefficients of the line, a and b, are based on the following two equations:

(3–5)

(3–6)

where

Note that these two equations are identical to those used for computing a linear regression line, except that t replaces x in the equations. Values for the trend equation can be obtained easily by using the Excel template.

page 92 

Trend-Adjusted Exponential Smoothing

A variation of simple exponential smoothing can be used when a time series exhibits a linear trend. It is called trend-adjusted exponential smoothing , or sometimes double smoothing, to differentiate it from simple exponential smoothing, which is appropriate only when data vary around an average or have step or gradual changes. If a series exhibits a trend, and simple smoothing is used on it, the forecasts will all lag the trend: If the data are increasing, each forecast will be too low; if decreasing, each forecast will be too high.

The trend-adjusted forecast (TAF) is composed of two elements—a smoothed error and a trend factor.

(3–7)

where

and

(3–8)

where

In order to use this method, one must select values of α and β (usually through trial and error) and make a starting forecast and an estimate of trend.

Using the cell phone data from the previous example (where it was concluded that the data exhibited a linear trend), use trend-adjusted exponential smoothing to obtain forecasts for periods 6 through 11, with α = .40 and β = .30.

page 93 

The initial estimate of trend is based on the net change of 28 for the three changes from period 1 to period 4, for an average of 9.33. The Excel spreadsheet is shown in Table 3.2. Notice that an initial estimate of trend is estimated from the first four values and that the starting forecast (period 5) is developed using the previous (period 4) value of 728 plus the initial trend estimate:

TABLE 3.2

Using the Excel template for trend-adjusted smoothing

Source: Microsoft

Unlike a linear trend line, trend-adjusted smoothing has the ability to adjust to changes in trend. Of course, trend projections are much simpler with a trend line than with trend-adjusted forecasts, so a manager must decide which benefits are most important when choosing between these two techniques for trend.

Techniques for Seasonality

Seasonal variations in time-series data are regularly repeating upward or downward movements in series values that can be tied to recurring events. Seasonality may refer to regular annual variations. Familiar examples of seasonality are weather variations (e.g., sales of winter and summer sports equipment) and vacations or holidays (e.g., airline travel, greeting card sales, visitors at tourist and resort centers). The term seasonal variation is also applied to daily, weekly, monthly, and other regularly recurring patterns in data. For example, rush hour traffic occurs twice a day—incoming in the morning and outgoing in the late afternoon. Theaters and restaurants often experience weekly demand patterns, with demand higher later in the week. Banks may experience daily seasonal variations (heavier traffic during the noon hour and just before closing), weekly variations (heavier toward the end of the week), and monthly variations (heaviest around the beginning of the month because of Social Security, payroll, and welfare checks being cashed or deposited). Mail volume; sales of toys, beer, automobiles, and turkeys; highway usage; hotel registrations; and gardening also exhibit seasonal variations.

page 94 

Seasonality in a time series is expressed in terms of the amount that actual values deviate from the average value of a series. If the series tends to vary around an average value, then seasonality is expressed in terms of that average (or a moving average); if trend is present, seasonality is expressed in terms of the trend value.

There are two different models of seasonality: additive and multiplicative. In the additive model, seasonality is expressed as a quantity (e.g., 20 units), which is added to or subtracted from the series average in order to incorporate seasonality. In the multiplicative model, seasonality is expressed as a percentage of the average (or trend) amount (e.g., 1.10), which is then used to multiply the value of a series to incorporate seasonality. Figure 3.6 illustrates the two models for a linear trend line. In practice, businesses use the multiplicative model much more widely than the additive model, because it tends to be more representative of actual experience, so we will focus exclusively on the multiplicative model.

image

The seasonal percentages in the multiplicative model are referred to as seasonal relatives or seasonal indexes. Suppose that the seasonal relative for the quantity of toys sold in May at a store is 1.20. This indicates that toy sales for that month are 20 percent above the monthly average. A seasonal relative of .90 for July indicates that July sales are 90 percent of the monthly average.

Knowledge of seasonal variations is an important factor in retail planning and scheduling. Moreover, seasonality can be an important factor in capacity planning for systems that must be designed to handle peak loads (e.g., public transportation, electric power plants, highways, and bridges). Knowledge of the extent of seasonality in a time series can enable one to remove seasonality from the data (i.e., to seasonally adjust data) in order to discern other patterns page 95or the lack of patterns in the series. Thus, one frequently reads or hears about “seasonally adjusted unemployment” and “seasonally adjusted personal income.”

The next section briefly describes how seasonal relatives are used.

Using Seasonal Relatives Seasonal relatives are used in two different ways in forecasting. One way is to deseasonalize data; the other way is to incorporate seasonality in a forecast.

To deseasonalize data is to remove the seasonal component from the data in order to get a clearer picture of the nonseasonal (e.g., trend) components. Deseasonalizing data is accomplished by dividing each data point by its corresponding seasonal relative (e.g., divide November demand by the November relative, divide December demand by the December relative, and so on).

Incorporating seasonality in a forecast is useful when demand has both trend (or average) and seasonal components. Incorporating seasonality can be accomplished in this way:

  1. Obtain trend estimates for desired periods using a trend equation.

  2. Add seasonality to the trend estimates by multiplying (assuming a multiplicative model is appropriate) these trend estimates by the corresponding seasonal relative (e.g., multiply the November trend estimate by the November seasonal relative, multiply the December trend estimate by the December seasonal relative, and so on).

Example 4 illustrates these two techniques.

page 96 

Computing Seasonal Relatives A widely used method for computing seasonal relatives involves the use of a centered moving average . This approach effectively accounts for any trend (linear or curvilinear) that might be present in the data. For example, Figure 3.7 illustrates how a three-period centered moving average closely tracks the data originally shown in Figure 3.3.

image

Manual computation of seasonal relatives using the centered moving average method is a bit cumbersome, so the use of software is recommended. Manual computation is illustrated in Solved Problem 4 at the end of the chapter. The Excel template (on the website) is a simple and convenient way to obtain values of seasonal relatives (indexes). Example 5 illustrates this approach.

For practical purposes, you can round the relatives to two decimal places. Thus, the seasonal (standard) index values are:

Day

Index

Tues

0.87

Wed

1.05

Thurs

1.20

Fri

1.37

Sat

1.24

Sun

0.53

Mon

0.75

Computing Seasonal Relatives Using the Simple Average Method The simple average (SA) method is an alternative way to compute seasonal relatives. Each seasonal relative is the average for that season divided by the average of all seasons. This method is illustrated in Example 5, where the seasons are days. Note that there is no need to standardize the relatives when using the SA method.

page 97 

page 98 

The obvious advantage of the SA method compared to the centered MA method is the simplicity of computations. When the data have a stationary mean (i.e., variation around an average), the SA method works quite well, providing values of relatives that are quite close to those obtained using the centered MA method, which is generally accepted as accurate. Conventional wisdom is that the SA method should not be used when linear trend is present in the data. However, it can be used to obtain fairly good values of seasonal relatives as long as the ratio of the intercept to the slope is large, or when variations are large relative to the slope, shown as follows. Also, the larger the ratio, the smaller the error. The general relationship is illustrated in the following figure.

Techniques for Cycles

Cycles are up-and-down movements similar to seasonal variations but of longer duration—say, two to six years between peaks. When cycles occur in time-series data, their frequent irregularity makes it difficult or impossible to project them from past data because turning points are difficult to identify. A short moving average or a naive approach may be of some value, although both will produce forecasts that lag cyclical movements by one or several periods.

The most commonly used approach is explanatory: Search for another variable that relates to, and leads, the variable of interest. For example, the number of housing starts (i.e., permits to build houses) in a given month often is an indicator of demand a few months later for products and services directly tied to construction of new homes (landscaping; sales of washers and dryers, carpeting, and furniture; new demands for shopping, transportation, schools). Thus, if an organization is able to establish a high correlation with such a leading variable (i.e., changes in the variable precede changes in the variable of interest), it can develop an equation that describes the relationship, enabling forecasts to be made. It is important that a persistent relationship exists between the two variables. Moreover, the higher the correlation, the better the chances that the forecast will be on target.

3.9 ASSOCIATIVE FORECASTING TECHNIQUES

Associative techniques rely on identification of related variables that can be used to predict values of the variable of interest. For example, sales of beef may be related to the price per pound charged for beef and the prices of substitutes such as chicken, pork, and lamb; real estate prices are usually related to property location and square footage; and crop yields are related to soil conditions and the amounts and timing of water and fertilizer applications.

The essence of associative techniques is the development of an equation that summarizes the effects of predictor variables . The primary method of analysis is known as regression . A brief overview of regression should suffice to place this approach into perspective relative to the other forecasting approaches described in this chapter.

Simple Linear Regression

The simplest and most widely used form of regression involves a linear relationship between two variables. A plot of the values might appear like that in Figure 3.8. The object in linear regression is to obtain an equation of a straight line that minimizes the sum of squared vertical page 99deviations of data points from the line (i.e., the least squares criterion). This least squares line has the equation

image

(3–9)

where

( Note: It is conventional to represent values of the predicted variable on the y axis and values of the predictor variable on the x axis.) Figure 3.9 is a general graph of a linear regression line.

image

The coefficients a and b of the line are based on the following two equations:

(3–10)

(3–11)

where

page 100 

image

TABLE 3.3

Using the Excel template for linear regression

Source: Microsoft

One indication of how accurate a prediction might be for a linear regression line is the amount of scatter of the data points around the line. If the data points tend to be relatively close to the line, predictions using the linear equation will tend to be more accurate than if the data points are widely scattered. The scatter can be summarized using the standard error of estimate . It can be computed by finding the vertical difference between each data point and the page 101computed value of the regression equation for that value of x, squaring each difference, adding the squared differences, dividing by n − 2, and then finding the square root of that value.

(3–12)

where

For the data given in Table 3.3, the error column shows the yy c differences. Squaring each error and summing the squares yields .01659. Hence, the standard error of estimate is

One application of regression in forecasting relates to the use of indicators. These are uncontrollable variables that tend to lead or precede changes in a variable of interest. For example, changes in the Federal Reserve Board’s discount rate may influence certain business activities. Similarly, an increase in energy costs can lead to price increases for a wide range of products and services. Careful identification and analysis of indicators may yield insight into possible future demand in some situations. There are numerous published indexes and websites from which to choose. 2 These include:

Net change in inventories on hand and on order

Interest rates for commercial loans

Industrial output

Consumer price index (CPI)

The wholesale price index

Stock market prices

page 102 

Other potential indicators are population shifts, local political climates, and activities of other firms (e.g., the opening of a shopping center may result in increased sales for nearby businesses). Three conditions are required for an indicator to be valid:

  1. The relationship between movements of an indicator and movements of the variable should have a logical explanation.

  2. Movements of the indicator must precede movements of the dependent variable by enough time so that the forecast isn’t outdated before it can be acted upon.

  3. A fairly high correlation should exist between the two variables.

Correlation measures the strength and direction of relationship between two variables. Correlation can range from −1.00 to +1.00. A correlation of +1.00 indicates that changes in one variable are always matched by changes in the other; a correlation of −1.00 indicates that increases in one variable are matched by decreases in the other; and a correlation close to zero indicates little linear relationship between two variables. The correlation between two variables can be computed using the equation

(3–13)

The square of the correlation coefficient, r 2, provides a measure of the percentage of variability in the values of y that is “explained” by the independent variable. The possible values of r 2 range from 0 to 1.00. The closer r 2 is to 1.00, the greater the percentage of explained variation. A high value of r 2, say .80 or more, would indicate that the independent variable is a good predictor of values of the dependent variable. A low value, say .25 or less, would indicate a poor predictor, and a value between .25 and .80 would indicate a moderate predictor.

Comments on the Use of Linear Regression Analysis

Use of simple regression analysis implies that certain assumptions have been satisfied. Basically, these are as follows:

  • Variations around the line are random. If they are random, no patterns such as cycles or trends should be apparent when the line and data are plotted.

  • Deviations around the average value (i.e., the line) should be normally distributed. A concentration of values close to the line with a small proportion of larger deviations supports the assumption of normality.

  • Predictions are being made only within the range of observed values.

If the assumptions are satisfied, regression analysis can be a powerful tool. To obtain the best results, observe the following:

  • Always plot the data to verify that a linear relationship is appropriate.

  • The data may be time-dependent. Check this by plotting the dependent variable versus time; if patterns appear, use analysis of time series instead of regression, or use time as an independent variable as part of a multiple regression analysis.

  • A small correlation may imply that other variables are important.

In addition, note these weaknesses of regression:

  • Simple linear regression applies only to linear relationships with one independent variable.

  • One needs a considerable amount of data to establish the relationship—in practice, 20 or more observations.

  • All observations are weighted equally.

page 103 

page 104 

Nonlinear and Multiple Regression Analysis

Simple linear regression may prove inadequate to handle certain problems because a linear model is inappropriate or because more than one predictor variable is involved. When nonlinear relationships are present, you should employ nonlinear regression; models that involve more than one predictor require the use of multiple regression analysis. While these analyses are beyond the scope of this text, you should be aware that they are often used. Multiple regression forecasting substantially increases data requirements.

3.10 FORECAST ACCURACY

Accuracy and control of forecasts is a vital aspect of forecasting, so forecasters want to minimize forecast errors. However, the complex nature of most real-world variables makes it almost impossible to correctly predict future values of those variables on a regular basis. Moreover, because random variation is always present, there will always be some residual page 105error, even if all other factors have been accounted for. Consequently, it is important to include an indication of the extent to which the forecast might deviate from the value of the variable that actually occurs. This will provide the forecast user with a better perspective on how far off a forecast might be.

Decision makers will want to include accuracy as a factor when choosing among different techniques, along with cost. Accurate forecasts are necessary for the success of daily activities of every business organization. Forecasts are the basis for an organization’s schedules, and unless the forecasts are accurate, schedules will be generated that may provide for too few or too many resources, too little or too much output, the wrong output, or the wrong timing of output, all of which can lead to additional costs, dissatisfied customers, and headaches for managers.

Some forecasting applications involve a series of forecasts (e.g., weekly revenues), whereas others involve a single forecast that will be used for a one-time decision (e.g., the size of a power plant). When making periodic forecasts, it is important to monitor forecast errors to determine if the errors are within reasonable bounds. If they are not, it will be necessary to take corrective action.

Forecast error is the difference between the value that occurs and the value that was predicted for a given time period. Hence, Error = Actual − Forecast:

(3–14)

where

Positive errors result when the forecast is too low, while negative errors occur when the forecast is too high. For example, if actual demand for a week is 100 units, and forecast demand was 90 units, the forecast was too low. The error is 100 − 90 = +10.

Forecast errors influence decisions in two somewhat different ways. One is in making a choice between various forecasting alternatives, and the other is in evaluating the success or failure of a technique in use. We shall begin by examining ways to summarize forecast error over time, and see how that information can be applied to compare forecasting alternatives.

page 106 

Summarizing Forecast Accuracy

Forecast accuracy is a significant factor when deciding among forecasting alternatives. Accuracy is based on the historical error performance of a forecast.

Three commonly used measures for summarizing historical errors are the mean absolute deviation (MAD) , the mean squared error (MSE) , and the mean absolute percent error (MAPE) . MAD is the average absolute error, MSE is the average of squared errors, and MAPE is the average absolute percent error. The formulas used to compute MAD, 3 MSE, and MAPE are as follows:

(3–15)

(3–16)

(3–17)

Example 9 illustrates the computation of MAD, MSE, and MAPE.

page 107 

From a computational standpoint, the difference between these measures is that MAD weights all errors evenly, MSE weights errors according to their squared values, and MAPE weights according to relative error.

One use for these measures is to compare the accuracy of alternative forecasting methods. For instance, a manager could compare the results to determine which one yields the lowest MAD, MSE, or MAPE for a given set of data. Another use is to track error performance over time to decide if attention is needed. Is error performance getting better or worse, or is it staying about the same?

In some instances, historical error performance is secondary to the ability of a forecast to respond to changes in data patterns. Choice among alternative methods would then focus on the cost of not responding quickly to a change relative to the cost of responding to changes that are not really there (i.e., random fluctuations).

Overall, the operations manager must settle on the relative importance of historical performance versus responsiveness and whether to use MAD, MSE, or MAPE to measure historical performance. MAD is the easiest to compute, but weights errors linearly. MSE squares errors, thereby giving more weight to larger errors, which typically cause more problems. MAPE should be used when there is a need to put errors in perspective. For example, an error of 10 in a forecast of 15 is huge. Conversely, an error of 10 in a forecast of 10,000 is insignificant. Hence, to put large errors in perspective, MAPE would be used. Another use of MAPE is when there is a need to compare forecast errors for different products or services. One example would be forecasts for store brands versus national brands.

3.11 MONITORING FORECAST ERROR

Many forecasts are made at regular intervals (e.g., weekly, monthly, quarterly). Because forecast errors are the rule rather than the exception, there will be a succession of forecast errors. Tracking the forecast errors and analyzing them can provide useful insight on whether forecasts are performing satisfactorily.

There are a variety of possible sources of forecast errors, including the following:

  1. The model may be inadequate due to ( a) the omission of an important variable, ( b) a change or shift in the variable that the model cannot deal with (e.g., the sudden appearance of a trend or cycle), or ( c) the appearance of a new variable (e.g., new competitor).

  2. Irregular variations may occur due to severe weather or other natural phenomena, temporary shortages or breakdowns, catastrophes, or similar events.

  3. Random variations. Randomness is the inherent variation that remains in the data after all causes of variation have been accounted for. There are always random variations.

A forecast is generally deemed to perform adequately when the errors exhibit only random variations. Hence, the key to judging when to reexamine the validity of a particular forecasting technique is whether forecast errors are random. If they are not random, it is necessary to investigate to determine which of the other sources is present and how to correct the problem.

A very useful tool for detecting nonrandomness in errors is a control chart . Errors are plotted on a control chart in the order that they occur, such as the one depicted in Figure 3.11. The center line of the chart represents an error of zero. Note the two other lines, one above page 108and one below the center line. They are called the upper and lower control limits because they represent the upper and lower ends of the range of acceptable variation for the errors.

image

In order for the forecast errors to be judged “in control” (i.e., random), two things are necessary. One is that all errors are within the control limits. The other is that no patterns (e.g., trends, cycles, noncentered data) are present. Both can be accomplished by inspection. Figure 3.12 illustrates some examples of nonrandom errors.

image

Technically speaking, one could determine if any values exceeded either control limit without actually plotting the errors, but the visual detection of patterns generally requires plotting the errors, so it is best to construct a control chart and plot the errors on the chart.

To construct a control chart, first compute the MSE. The square root of MSE is used in practice as an estimate of the standard deviation of the distribution of errors. 4 That is,

(3–18)

Control charts are based on the assumption that when errors are random, they will be distributed according to a normal distribution around a mean of zero. Recall that for a normal distribution, approximately 95.5 percent of the values (errors in this case) can be expected to fall within limits of 0 ± 2 S (i.e., 0 ± 2 standard deviations), and approximately 99.7 percent of the values can be expected to fall within ± 3 s of zero. With that in mind, the following formulas can be used to obtain the upper control limit (UCL) and the lower control limit (LCL):

where

Combining these two formulas, we obtain the following expression for the control limits:

(3–19)

page 109 

Another method is the tracking signal . It relates the cumulative forecast error to the average absolute error (i.e., MAD). The intent is to detect any bias in errors over time (i.e., a tendency for a sequence of errors to be positive or negative). The tracking signal is computed period by period using the following formula:

(3–20)

Values can be positive or negative. A value of zero would be ideal; limits of ± 4 or ± 5 are often used for a range of acceptable values of the tracking signal. If a value outside the acceptable range occurs, that would be taken as a signal that there is bias in the forecast, and that corrective action is needed.

After an initial value of MAD has been determined, the value of MAD can be updated and smoothed (SMAD) using exponential smoothing:

(3–21)

page 111 

A plot helps you to visualize the process and enables you to check for possible patterns (i.e., nonrandomness) within the limits that suggest an improved forecast is possible. 5

Like the tracking signal, a control chart focuses attention on deviations that lie outside predetermined limits. With either approach, however, it is desirable to check for possible patterns in the errors, even if all errors are within the limits.

If nonrandomness is found, corrective action is needed. That will result in less variability in forecast errors, and, thus, in narrower control limits. (Revised control limits must be computed using the resulting forecast errors.) Figure 3.13 illustrates the impact on control limits due to decreased error variability.

image

Comment The control chart approach is generally superior to the tracking signal approach. A major weakness of the tracking signal approach is its use of cumulative errors: Individual errors can be obscured so that large positive and negative values cancel each other. Conversely, with control charts, every error is judged individually. Thus, it can be misleading to rely on a tracking signal approach to monitor errors. In fact, the historical roots of the tracking signal approach date from before the first use of computers in business. At that time, it was much more difficult to compute standard deviations than to compute average deviations; for that reason, the concept of a tracking signal was developed. Now computers and calculators can easily provide standard deviations. Nonetheless, the use of tracking signals has persisted, probably because users are unaware of the superiority of the control chart approach.

3.12 CHOOSING A FORECASTING TECHNIQUE

Many different kinds of forecasting techniques are available, and no single technique works best in every situation. When selecting a technique, the manager or analyst must take a number of factors into consideration.

The two most important factors are cost and accuracy. How much money is budgeted for generating the forecast? What are the possible costs of errors, and what are the benefits that might accrue from an accurate forecast? Generally speaking, the higher the accuracy, the higher the cost, so it is important to weigh cost–accuracy trade-offs carefully. The best forecast is not necessarily the most accurate or the least costly; rather, it is some combination of accuracy and cost deemed best by management.

Other factors to consider in selecting a forecasting technique include the availability of historical data; the availability of computer software; and the time needed to gather and analyze data and to prepare the forecast. The forecast horizon is important because some techniques are more suited to long-range forecasts while others work best for the short range. For example, moving averages and exponential smoothing are essentially short-range techniques, because they produce forecasts for the next period. Trend equations can be used to project over much longer time periods. When using time-series data, plotting the data can be very helpful in choosing an appropriate method. Several of the qualitative techniques are well-suited to long-range forecasts because they do not require historical data. The Delphi method and executive opinion methods are often used for long-range planning. New products and services lack historical data, so forecasts for them must be based on subjective estimates. In many cases, page 112experience with similar items is relevant. Table 3.4 provides a guide for selecting a forecasting method. Table 3.5 provides additional perspectives on forecasts in terms of the time horizon.

TABLE 3.4

A guide to selecting an appropriate forecasting method

Source: Adapted from J. Holton Wilson and Deborah Allison-Koerber, “Combining Subjective and Objective Forecasts Improves Results,” Journal of Business Forecasting, Fall 1992, p. 4. Institute of Business Forecasting.

TABLE 3.5

Forecast factors, by range of forecast

Factor

Short Range

Intermediate Range

Long Range

1. Frequency

Often

Occasional

Infrequent

2. Level of aggregation

Item

Product family

Total output

Type of product/service

3. Type of model

Smoothing Projection Regression

Projection Seasonal Regression

Managerial judgment

4. Degree of management involvement

Low

Moderate

High

5. Cost per forecast

Low

Moderate

High

In some instances, a manager might use more than one forecasting technique to obtain independent forecasts. If the different techniques produced approximately the same predictions, that would give increased confidence in the results; disagreement among the forecasts would indicate that additional analysis may be needed. Another possibility is combining the results of two techniques. Still another possibility is to use several techniques on recent data and then use the one with the least error to make the actual forecast, but keep the others, and then use the one with the least error to make the next forecast, and so on. Then, if one technique consistently performs better than the others, that technique would emerge as the favorite.

3.13 USING FORECAST INFORMATION

A manager can take a reactive or a proactive approach to a forecast. A reactive approach views forecasts as probable future demand, and a manager reacts to meet that demand (e.g., adjusts production rates, inventories, the workforce). Conversely, a proactive approach seeks to actively influence demand (e.g., by means of advertising, pricing, or product/service changes).

page 113 

Generally speaking, a proactive approach requires either an explanatory model (e.g., regression) or a subjective assessment of the influence on demand. A manager might make two forecasts—one to predict what will happen under the status quo and a second one based on a “what if clear” approach, if the results of the status quo forecast are unacceptable.

3.14 COMPUTER SOFTWARE IN FORECASTING

Computers play an important role in preparing forecasts based on quantitative data. Their use allows managers to develop and revise forecasts quickly, and without the burden of manual computations. There is a wide range of software packages available for forecasting. The Excel templates on the text website are an example of a spreadsheet approach. There are templates for moving averages, exponential smoothing, linear trend equation, trend-adjusted exponential smoothing, and simple linear regression. Some templates are illustrated in the Solved Problems section at the end of the chapter.

3.15 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

Forecasts are the basis for many decisions and an essential input for matching supply and demand. Clearly, the more accurate an organization’s forecasts, the better prepared it will be to take advantage of future opportunities and reduce potential risks. A worthwhile strategy can be to work to improve short-term forecasts. Better short-term forecasts will not only enhance profits through lower inventory levels, fewer shortages, and improved customer service, they also will enhance forecasting credibility throughout the organization: If short-term forecasts are inaccurate, why should other areas of the organization put faith in long-term forecasts? Also, the sense of confidence that accurate short-term forecasts would generate would allow allocating more resources to strategic and medium- to longer-term planning and less on short-term, tactical activities.

Maintaining accurate, up-to-date information on prices, demand, and other variables can have a significant impact on forecast accuracy. An organization also can do other things to improve forecasts. These do not involve searching for improved techniques but relate to the inverse relation of accuracy to the forecast horizon: Forecasts that cover shorter time frames tend to be more accurate than longer-term forecasts. Recognizing this, management might choose to devote efforts to shortening the time horizon that forecasts must cover. Essentially, this means shortening the lead time needed to respond to a forecast. This might involve building flexibility into operations to permit rapid response to changing demands for products and services, or to changing volumes in quantities demanded; shortening the lead time required to obtain supplies, equipment, and raw materials, or the time needed to train or retrain employees; or shortening the time needed to develop new products and services.

Lean systems are demand driven; goods are produced to fulfill orders rather than to hold in inventory until demand arises. Consequently, they are far less dependent on short-term forecasts than more traditional systems.

In certain situations, forecasting can be very difficult when orders have to be placed far in advance. This is the case, for example, when demand is sensitive to weather conditions, such as the arrival of spring, and there is a narrow window for demand. Orders for products or services that relate to this (e.g., garden materials, advertising space) often have to be placed many months in advance—far beyond the ability of forecasters to accurately predict weather conditions and, hence, the timing of demand. In such cases, there may be pressures from salespeople who want low quotas and from financial people who don’t want to have to deal with the cost of excess inventory to have conservative forecasts. Conversely, operations people may want more optimistic forecasts to reduce the risk of being blamed for possible shortages.

Sharing forecasts or demand data throughout the supply chain can improve forecast quality in the supply chain, resulting in lower costs and shorter lead times. For example, both Hewlett-Packard and IBM require resellers to include such information in their contracts.

The following reading provides additional insights on forecasting and supply chains.

page 114 

1 See, for example, Bernard T. Smith and Virginia Brice, Focus Forecasting: Computer Techniques for Inventory Control Revised for the Twenty-First Century (Essex Junction, VT: Oliver Wight, 1984).

2 See, for example, The National Bureau of Economic Research, The Survey of Current Business, The Monthly Labor Review, and Business Conditions Digest.

3 The absolute value, represented by the two vertical lines in Formula 3–2, ignores minus signs; all data are treated as positive values. For example, −2 becomes +2.

4 The actual value could be computed as image.

5 The theory and application of control charts and the various methods for detecting patterns in the data are covered in more detail in Chapter 10, on quality control.

page 138 

page 139 

4.1 INTRODUCTION

This section discusses what product and service designers do, the reasons for design (or redesign), and key questions that management must address.

What Does Product and Service Design Do?

The primary focus of product or service design should be on customer satisfaction. The various activities and responsibilities of product and service design include the following (functional interactions are shown in parentheses):

  1. Translate customer wants and needs into product and service requirements (marketing, operations)

  2. Refine existing products and services (marketing)

  3. Develop new products and/or services (marketing, operations)

  4. Formulate quality goals (marketing, operations)

  5. Formulate cost targets (accounting, finance, operations)

  6. Construct and test prototypes (operations, marketing, engineering)

  7. Document specifications

  8. Translate product and service specifications into process specifications (engineering, operations)

Product and service design involves or affects nearly every functional area of an organization. However, marketing and operations have major involvement.

page 141 

Objectives of Product and Service Design

Primary consideration: Customer satisfaction.

Secondary considerations: Cost or profit, quality, ability to produce a product or provide a service, ethics/safety, and sustainability.

Key Questions

From a buyer’s standpoint, most purchasing decisions entail two fundamental considerations; one is cost and the other is quality or performance. From the organization’s standpoint, the key questions are:

  1. Is there demand for it? What is the potential size of the market, and what is the expected demand profile (will demand be long term or short term, will it grow slowly or quickly)?

  2. Can we do it? Do we have the necessary knowledge, skills, equipment, capacity, and supply chain capability? For products, this is known as manufacturability ; for services, this is known as serviceability . Also, is outsourcing some or all of the work an option?

  1. What level of quality is appropriate? What do customers expect? What level of quality do competitors provide for similar items? How would it fit with our current offerings?

  2. Does it make sense from an economic standpoint? What are the potential liability issues, ethical considerations, sustainability issues, costs, and profits? For nonprofits, is the cost within budget?

Reasons for Product and Service Design or Redesign

Product and service design typically has strategic implications for the success and prosperity of an organization. Consequently, decisions in this area are some of the most fundamental that managers must make. Product and service design or redesign should be closely tied to an organization’s strategy.

Organizations become involved in product and service design or redesign for a variety of reasons. The main forces that initiate design or redesign are market opportunities and threats. The factors that give rise to market opportunities and threats can be one or more changes:

  • Economic (e.g., low demand, excessive warranty claims, the need to reduce costs)

  • Social and demographic (e.g., aging baby boomers, population shifts)

  • Political, liability, or legal (e.g., government changes, safety issues, new regulations)

  • Competitive (e.g., new or changed products or services, new advertising/promotions)

  • Cost or availability (e.g., of raw materials, components, labor, water, energy)

  • Technological (e.g., in product components, processes)

While each of these factors may seem obvious, let’s reflect a bit on technological changes, which can create a need for product or service design changes in several different ways. An obvious way is new technology that can be used directly in a product or service (e.g., a faster, smaller microprocessor that spawns a new generation of smartphones). Technology also can indirectly affect product and service design: Advances in processing technology may require altering an existing design to make it compatible with the new processing technology. Still another way that technology can impact product design is illustrated by digital recording technology that allows television viewers to skip commercials when they view a recorded program. This means that advertisers (who support a television program) can’t get their message to viewers. To overcome this, some advertisers have adopted a strategy of making their products an integral part of a television program, say by having their products prominently displayed and/or mentioned by the actors as a way to call viewers’ attention to their products without the need for commercials.

The following reading suggests another potential benefit of product redesign.

page 142 

4.2 IDEA GENERATION

Ideas for new or redesigned products or services can come from a variety of sources, including customers, the supply chain, competitors, employees, and research. Customer input can come from surveys, focus groups, complaints, and unsolicited suggestions for improvement. Input from suppliers, distributors, and employees can be obtained from interviews, direct or indirect suggestions, and complaints.

One of the strongest motivators for new and improved products or services is competitors’ products and services. By studying a competitor’s products or services and how the competitor operates (pricing policies, return policies, warranties, location strategies, etc.), an organization can glean many ideas. Beyond that, some companies purchase a competitor’s product and then carefully dismantle and inspect it, searching for ways to improve their own product. This is called reverse engineering . Automotive companies use this tactic in developing new models. They examine competitors’ vehicles, searching for best-in-class components (e.g., best hood release, best dashboard display, best door handle). Sometimes, reverse engineering can enable a company to leapfrog the competition by developing an even better product. However, some forms of reverse engineering are illegal under the Digital Millennium Copyright Act.

page 143 

Suppliers are still another source of ideas, and with increased emphasis on supply chains and supplier partnerships, suppliers are becoming an important source of ideas.

Research is another source of ideas for new or improved products or services. Research and development (R&D) refers to organized efforts that are directed toward increasing scientific knowledge and product or process innovation. Most of the advances in semiconductors, medicine, communications, and space technology can be attributed to R&D efforts at colleges and universities, research foundations, government agencies, and private enterprises.

R&D efforts may involve basic research, applied research, or development.

Basic research has the objective of advancing the state of knowledge about a subject, without any near-term expectation of commercial applications.

Applied research has the objective of achieving commercial applications.

Development converts the results of applied research into useful commercial applications.

Basic research, because it does not lead to near-term commercial applications, is generally underwritten by the government and large corporations. Conversely, applied research and development, because of the potential for commercial applications, appeals to a wide spectrum of business organizations.

The benefits of successful R&D can be tremendous. Some research leads to patents, with the potential of licensing and royalties. However, many discoveries are not patentable, or companies don’t wish to divulge details of their ideas so they avoid the patent route. Even so, the first organization to bring a new product or service to the market generally stands to profit from it before the others can catch up. Early products may be priced higher because a temporary monopoly exists until competitors bring their versions out.

The costs of R&D can be high. Some companies spend more than $1 million a day on R&D. Large companies in the automotive, computer, communications, and pharmaceutical industries spend even more. For example, IBM spends about $6 billion a year, and Hewlett-Packard Enterprises about $2 billion a year. Even so, critics say that many U.S. companies spend too little on R&D, a factor often cited in the loss of competitive advantage.

It is interesting to note that some companies are now shifting from a focus primarily on products to a more balanced approach that explores both product and process R&D. page 144Also, there is increasing recognition that technologies often go through life cycles, the same way that many products do. This can impact R&D efforts on two fronts. Sustained economic growth requires constant attention to competitive factors over a life cycle, and it also requires planning to be able to participate in the next-generation technology.

In certain instances, however, research may not be the best approach. The preceding reading illustrates a research success.

4.3 LEGAL AND ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS

Designers must be careful to take into account a wide array of legal and ethical considerations. Generally, they are mandatory. Moreover, if there is a potential to harm the environment, then those issues also become important. Most organizations are subject to numerous government agencies that regulate them. Among the more familiar federal agencies are the Food and Drug Administration, the Occupational Health and Safety Administration, the Environmental Protection Agency, and various state and local agencies. Bans on cyclamates, red food dye, phosphates, and asbestos have sent designers scurrying back to their drawing boards to find alternative designs that were acceptable to both government regulators and customers. Similarly, automobile pollution standards and safety features, such as seat belts, air bags, safety glass, and energy-absorbing bumpers and frames, have had a substantial impact on automotive design. Much attention also has been directed toward toy design to remove sharp edges, small pieces that can cause choking, and toxic materials. The government further regulates construction, requiring the use of lead-free paint, safety glass in entranceways, access to public buildings for individuals with disabilities, and standards for insulation, electrical wiring, and plumbing.

Product liability can be a strong incentive for design improvements. Product liability is the responsibility of a manufacturer for any injuries or damages caused by a faulty product because of poor workmanship or design. Many business firms have faced lawsuits related to their products, including Firestone Tire & Rubber, Ford Motor Company, General Motors, tobacco companies, and toy manufacturers. Manufacturers also are faced with the implied warranties created by state laws under the Uniform Commercial Code , which says that products carry an implication of merchantability and fitness; that is, a product must be usable for its intended purposes.

The suits and potential suits have led to increased legal and insurance costs, expensive settlements with injured parties, and costly recalls. Moreover, increasing customer awareness of product safety can adversely affect product image and subsequent demand for a product.

Thus, it is extremely important to design products that are reasonably free of hazards. When hazards do exist, it is necessary to install safety guards or other devices for reducing accident potential, and to provide adequate warning notices of risks. Consumer groups, business firms, and various government agencies often work together to develop industrywide standards that help avoid some of the hazards.

Ethical issues often arise in the design of products and services; it is important for managers to be aware of these issues and for designers to adhere to ethical standards. Designers are often under pressure to speed up the design process and to cut costs. These pressures often require them to make trade-off decisions, many of which involve ethical considerations. One example of what can happen is “vaporware,” when a software company doesn’t issue a release of software as scheduled because it is struggling with production problems or bugs in the software. The company faces the dilemma of releasing the software right away or waiting until most of the bugs have been removed—knowing that the longer it waits, the more time will be needed before it receives revenues and the greater the risk of damage to its reputation.

Organizations generally want designers to adhere to guidelines such as the following:

  • Produce designs that are consistent with the goals of the organization. For instance, if the company has a goal of high quality, don’t cut corners to save on costs, even in areas where it won’t be apparent to the customer.

page 145 

  • Give customers the value they expect.

  • Make health and safety a primary concern. At risk are employees who will produce goods or deliver services, workers who will transport the products, customers who will use the products or receive the services, and the general public, which might be endangered by the products or services.

4.4 HUMAN FACTORS

Human factor issues often arise in the design of consumer products. Safety and liability are two critical issues in many instances, and they must be carefully considered. For example, the crashworthiness of vehicles is of much interest to consumers, insurance companies, automobile producers, and the government.

Another issue for designers to take into account is adding new features to their products or services. Companies in certain businesses may seek a competitive edge by adding new features. Although this can have obvious benefits, it can sometimes be “too much of a good thing,” and be a source of customer dissatisfaction. This “creeping featurism” is particularly evident in electronic products such as handheld devices that continue to offer new features, and more complexity, even while they are shrinking in size. This may result in low consumer ratings in terms of “ease of use.”

4.5 CULTURAL FACTORS

Product designers in companies that operate globally also must take into account any cultural differences of different countries or regions related to the product. This can result in different designs for different countries or regions, as illustrated by the following reading.

page 146 

4.6 GLOBAL PRODUCT AND SERVICE DESIGN

Traditionally, product design has been conducted by members of the design team who are located in one facility or a few nearby facilities. However, organizations that operate globally are discovering advantages in global product design, which uses the combined efforts of a team of designers who work in different countries and even on different continents. Such virtual teams can provide a range of comparative advantages over traditional teams such as engaging the best human resources from around the world without the need to assemble them all in one place, and operating on a 24-hour basis, thereby decreasing the time-to-market. The use of global teams also allows for customer needs assessment to be done in more than one country with local resources, opportunities, and constraints to be taken into account. Global product design can provide design outcomes that increase the marketability and utility of a product. The diversity of an international team may yield different points of view and also ideas and information to enrich the design process. However, care must be taken in managing the diversity, because if it is mismanaged, it can lead to conflicts and miscommunications.

Advances in information technology have played a key role in the viability of global product design teams by enabling team members to maintain continual contact with each other and to instantaneously share designs and progress, and to transmit engineering changes and other necessary information.

4.7 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS: SUSTAINABILITY

Product and service design is a focal point in the quest for sustainability. Key aspects include cradle-to-grave assessment, end-of-life programs, reduction of costs and materials used, reuse of parts of returned products, and recycling.

Cradle-to-Grave Assessment

Cradle-to-grave assessment , also known as life cycle analysis, is the assessment of the environmental impact of a product or service throughout its useful life, focusing on such factors as global warming (the amount of carbon dioxide released into the atmosphere), smog formation, oxygen depletion, and solid waste generation. For products, cradle-to-grave analysis takes into account impacts in every phase of a product’s life cycle, from raw material extraction from the earth, or the growing and harvesting of plant materials, through fabrication of parts and assembly operations, page 147or other processes used to create products, as well as the use or consumption of the product, and final disposal at the end of a product’s useful life. It also considers energy consumption, pollution and waste, and transportation in all phases. Although services generally involve less use of materials, cradle-to-grave assessment of services is nonetheless important, because services consume energy and involve many of the same or similar processes that products involve.

The goal of cradle-to-grave assessment is to choose products and services that have the least environmental impact, while still taking into account economic considerations. The procedures of cradle-to-grave assessment are part of the ISO 14000 environmental management standards, which are discussed in Chapter 9.

End-of-Life Programs

End-of-life (EOL) programs deal with products that have reached the end of their useful lives. The products include both consumer products and business equipment. The purpose of these programs is to reduce the dumping of products, particularly electronic equipment, in landfills or third-world countries, as has been the common practice, or incineration, which converts materials into hazardous air and water emissions and generates toxic ash. Although the programs are not limited to electronic equipment, that equipment poses problems because it typically contains toxic materials such as lead, cadmium, chromium, and other heavy metals. IBM provides a good example of the potential of EOL programs. Over the last 15 years, it has collected about 2 billion pounds of product and product waste.

The Three Rs: Reduce, Reuse, and Recycle

Designers often reflect on three particular aspects of potential cost savings and reducing environmental impact: reducing the use of materials through value analysis; refurbishing and then reselling returned goods that are deemed to have additional useful life, which is referred to as remanufacturing; and reclaiming parts of unusable products for recycling.

Reduce: Value Analysis

Value analysis refers to an examination of the function of parts and materials in an effort to reduce the cost and/or improve the performance of a product. Typical questions that would be asked as part of the analysis include: Could a cheaper part or material be used? Is the function necessary? Can the function of two or more parts or components be performed by a single part for a lower cost? Can a part be simplified? Could product specifications be relaxed, and would this result in a lower price? Could standard parts be substituted for nonstandard parts? Table 4.1 provides a checklist of questions that can guide a value analysis.

TABLE 4.1

Overview of value analysis

  1. Select an item that has a high annual dollar volume. This can be material, a purchased item, or a service.

  2. Identify the function of the item.

  3. Obtain answers to these kinds of questions:

    1. Is the item necessary and have value, or can it be eliminated?

    2. Are there alternative sources for the item?

    3. Can the item be provided internally?

    4. What are the advantages of the present arrangement?

    5. What are the disadvantages of the present arrangement?

    6. Could another material, part, or service be used instead?

    7. Can specifications be less stringent to save cost or time?

    8. Can two or more parts be combined?

    9. Can more/less processing be done on the item to save cost or time?

    10. Do suppliers/providers have suggestions for improvements?

    11. Do employees have suggestions for improvements?

    12. Can packaging be improved or made less costly?

  4. Analyze the answers obtained above, as well as the answers to other questions that arise, and then make recommendations.

The following reading describes how Kraft Foods is working to reduce water and energy use, CO 2 and plant waste, and packaging.

page 148 

Reuse: Remanufacturing

An emerging concept in manufacturing is the remanufacturing of products. Remanufacturing refers to refurbishing used products by replacing worn-out or defective components, and reselling the products. This can be done by the original manufacturer, or another company. Among the products that have remanufactured components are automobiles, printers, copiers, cameras, computers, and telephones.

There are a number of important reasons for doing this. One is that a remanufactured product can be sold for about 50 percent of the cost of a new product. Another is that the process requires mostly unskilled and semiskilled workers. Also, in the global market, European lawmakers are increasingly requiring manufacturers to take back used products, because this means fewer products end up in landfills and there is less depletion of natural resources, such as raw materials and fuel.

page 149 

Designing products so they can be more easily taken apart has given rise to yet another design consideration: Design for disassembly (DFD) .

Recycle

Recycling is sometimes an important consideration for designers. Recycling means recovering materials for future use. This applies not only to manufactured parts but also to materials used during production, such as lubricants and solvents. Reclaimed metal or plastic parts may be melted down and used to make different products. (See readings above and on next page.)

Companies recycle for a variety of reasons, including

  1. Cost savings

  2. Environment concerns

  3. Environmental regulations

An interesting note: Companies that want to do business in the European Union must show that a specified proportion of their products are recyclable.

The pressure to recycle has given rise to the term design for recycling (DFR) , referring to product design that takes into account the ability to disassemble a used product to recover the recyclable parts.

page 150 

4.8 OTHER DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

Aside from legal, ethical, environmental, and human considerations, designers must also take into account product or service life cycles, how much standardization to incorporate, product or service reliability, and the range of operating conditions under which a product or service must function. These topics are discussed in this section. We begin with life cycles.

Strategies for Product or Service Life Stages

Most, but not all, products and services go through a series of stages over their useful life, sometimes referred to as their life cycle, as shown in Figure 4.1. Demand typically varies by phase. Different phases call for different strategies. In every phase, forecasts of demand and cash flow are key inputs for strategy.

image

When a product or service is introduced, it may be treated as a curiosity item. Many potential buyers may suspect that all the bugs haven’t been worked out and that the price may drop after the introductory period. Strategically, companies must carefully weigh the trade-offs in getting all the bugs out versus getting a leap on the competition, as well as getting to market at an advantageous time. For example, introducing new high-tech products or features during peak back-to-school buying periods or holiday buying periods can be highly desirable.

It is important to have a reasonable forecast of initial demand so an adequate supply of product or an adequate service capacity is in place.

Over time, design improvements and increasing demand yield higher reliability and lower costs, leading the growth in demand. In the growth phase, it is important to obtain accurate projections of the demand growth rate and how long that will persist, and then to ensure that capacity increases coincide with increasing demand.

In the next phase, the product or service reaches maturity, and demand levels off. Few, if any, design changes are needed. Generally, costs are low and productivity is high. New uses for products or services can extend their life and increase the market size. Examples include baking soda, duct tape, and vinegar. The maker of LEGOs has found a way to grow its market, as described in the following reading.

In the decline phase, decisions must be made about whether to discontinue a product or service and replace it with new ones or abandon the market, or to attempt to find new uses or new users for the existing product or service. For example, duct tape and baking page 152soda are two products that have been employed well beyond their original uses of taping heating and cooling ducts and cooking. The advantages of keeping existing products or services can be tremendous. The same workers can produce the product or provide the service using much of the same equipment, the same supply chain, and perhaps the same distribution channels. Consequently, costs tend to be very low, and additional resource needs and training needs are low.

page 153 

Some products do not exhibit life cycles: wooden pencils; paper clips; nails; knives, forks, and spoons; drinking glasses; and similar items. However, most new products do.

Some service life cycles are related to the life cycles of products. For example, as older products are phased out, services such as installation and repair of the older products also phase out.

Wide variations exist in the amount of time a particular product or service takes to pass through a given phase of its life cycle: Some pass through various stages in a relatively short period; others take considerably longer. Often, it is a matter of the basic need for the item and the rate of technological change. Some toys, novelty items, and style items have a life cycle of less than one year, whereas other, more useful items, such as clothes washers and dryers, may last for many years before yielding to technological change.

Product Life Cycle Management

Product life cycle management (PLM) is a systematic approach to managing the series of changes a product goes through, from its conception, design, and development, through production and any redesign, to its end of life. PLM incorporates everything related to a particular product. That includes data pertaining to production processes, business processes, people, and anything else related to the product.

PLM software can be used to automate the management of product-related data and integrate the data with other business processes, such as enterprise resource planning (discussed in Chapter 12). A goal of PLM is to eliminate waste and improve efficiency. For example, PLM is considered to be an integral part of lean production (discussed in Chapter 14).

There are three phases of PLM application:

  • Beginning of life, which involves design and development;

  • Middle of life, which involves working with suppliers, managing product information and warranties; and

  • End of life, which involves strategies for product discontinuance, disposal, or recycling.

Although PLM is generally associated with manufacturing, the same management structure can be applied to software development and services.

Degree of Standardization

An important issue that often arises in both product/service design and process design is the degree of standardization. Standardization refers to the extent to which there is absence of variety in a product, service, or process. Standardized products are made in large quantities of identical items; calculators, computers, and 2 percent milk are examples. Standardized service implies that every customer or item processed receives essentially the same service. An automatic car wash is a good example: Each car, regardless of how clean or dirty it is, receives the same service. Standardized processes deliver standardized service or produce standardized goods.

Standardization carries a number of important benefits, as well as certain disadvantages. Standardized products are immediately available to customers. Standardized products mean interchangeable parts, which greatly lower the cost of production while increasing productivity and making replacement or repair relatively easy compared with that of customized parts. Design costs are generally lower. For example, automobile producers standardize key components of automobiles across product lines; components such as brakes, electrical systems, and other “under-the-skin” parts would be the same for all car models. By reducing variety, companies save time and money while increasing the quality and reliability of their products.

Another benefit of standardization is reduced time and cost to train employees and reduced time to design jobs. Similarly, the scheduling of work, inventory handling, and purchasing and accounting activities become much more routine, and quality is more consistent.

Lack of standardization can at times lead to serious difficulties and competitive struggles. For example, the use of the English system of measurement by U.S. manufacturers, while most of the rest of the world’s manufacturers use the metric system, has led to problems page 154in selling U.S. goods in foreign countries and in buying foreign machines for use in the United States. This may make it more difficult for U.S. firms to compete in the European Union.

Standardization also has disadvantages. A major one relates to the reduction in variety. This can limit the range of customers to whom a product or service appeals. And that creates a risk that a competitor will introduce a better product or greater variety and realize a competitive advantage. Another disadvantage is that a manufacturer may freeze (standardize) a design prematurely and, once the design is frozen, find compelling reasons to resist modification.

Obviously, designers must consider important issues related to standardization when making choices. The major advantages and disadvantages of standardization are summarized in Table 4.2.

TABLE 4.2

Advantages and disadvantages of standardization

Advantages

  1. Fewer parts to deal with in inventory and in manufacturing.

  2. Reduced training costs and time.

  3. More routine purchasing, handling, and inspection procedures.

  4. Orders fillable from inventory.

  5. Opportunities for long production runs and automation.

  6. Need for fewer parts justifies increased expenditures on perfecting designs and improving quality control procedures.

Disadvantages

  1. Designs may be frozen with too many imperfections remaining.

  2. High cost of design changes increases resistance to improvements.

  3. Decreased variety results in less consumer appeal.

Designing for Mass Customization

Companies like standardization because it enables them to produce high volumes of relatively low-cost products, albeit products with little variety. Customers, on the other hand, typically prefer more variety, although they like the low cost. The question for producers is how to resolve these issues without (1) losing the benefits of standardization, and (2) incurring a host of problems that are often linked to variety. These include increasing the resources needed to achieve design variety; increasing variety in the production process, which would add to the skills necessary to produce products, causing a decrease in productivity; creating an additional inventory burden during and after production, by having to carry replacement parts for the increased variety of parts; and adding to the difficulty of diagnosing and repairing product failures. The answer, at least for some companies, is mass customization , a strategy of producing standardized goods or services, but incorporating some degree of customization in the final product or service. Several tactics make this possible. One is delayed differentiation, and another is modular design. (See reading on following page.)

Delayed differentiation is a postponement tactic: the process of producing, but not quite completing, a product or service, postponing completion until customer preferences or specifications are known. There are a number of variations of this. In the case of goods, almost-finished units might be held in inventory until customer orders are received, at which time customized features are incorporated, according to customer requests. For example, furniture makers can produce dining room sets, but not apply stain, allowing customers a choice of stains. Once the choice is made, the stain can be applied in a relatively short time, thus eliminating a long wait for customers, giving the seller a competitive advantage. Similarly, various e-mail or internet services can be delivered to customers as standardized packages, which can then be modified according to the customer’s preferences. HP printers that are made in the United States but intended for foreign markets are mostly completed in domestic assembly plants and then finalized closer to the country of use. The result of delayed differentiation is a product or service with customized features that can be quickly produced, appealing to the customers’ desire for variety and speed of delivery, and yet one that for the most part is standardized, enabling the producer to realize the benefits of standardized production. This technique is not new. Manufacturers of men’s clothing, for example, produce suits with pants that have legs that are unfinished, allowing customers to tailor choices as to the exact length and whether to have cuffs or no cuffs. What is new is the extent to which business organizations are finding ways to incorporate this concept into a broad range of products and services.

page 155 

Modular design is a form of standardization. Modules represent groupings of component parts into subassemblies, usually to the point where the individual parts lose their separate identity. One familiar example of modular design is computers, which have modular parts that can be replaced if they become defective. By arranging modules in different configurations, different computer capabilities can be obtained. For mass customization, modular design enables producers to quickly assemble products with modules to achieve a customized configuration for an individual customer, avoiding the long customer wait that would occur if individual parts had to be assembled. Dell Computers has successfully used this concept to become a dominant force in the PC industry by offering consumers the opportunity to configure modules according to their own specifications. Many other computer manufacturers now use a similar approach. Modular design also is found in the construction industry. One firm in Rochester, New York, makes prefabricated motel rooms complete with wiring, plumbing, and even room decorations in its factory and then moves the complete rooms by rail to the construction site, where they are integrated into the structure.

One advantage of modular design of equipment compared with nonmodular design is that failures are often easier to diagnose and remedy because there are fewer pieces to investigate. Similar advantages are found in the ease of repair and replacement; the faulty module is page 156conveniently removed and replaced with a good one. The manufacture and assembly of modules generally involve simplifications: Fewer parts are involved, so purchasing and inventory control become more routine, fabrication and assembly operations become more standardized, and training costs often are relatively low.

The main disadvantages of modular design stem from the decrease in variety: The number of possible configurations of modules is much less than the number of possible configurations based on individual components. Another disadvantage that is sometimes encountered is the inability to disassemble a module in order to replace a faulty part; the entire module must be scrapped—usually at a higher cost.

Reliability

Reliability is a measure of the ability of a product, a part, a service, or an entire system to perform its intended function under a prescribed set of conditions. The importance of reliability is underscored by its use by prospective buyers in comparing alternatives, and by sellers as one determinant of price. Reliability also can have an impact on repeat sales, reflect on the product’s image, and, if it is too low, create legal implications. Reliability is also a consideration for sustainability: The higher the reliability of a product, the fewer the resources that will be needed to maintain it, and the less frequently it will involve the three Rs.

The term failure is used to describe a situation in which an item does not perform as intended. This includes not only instances in which the item does not function at all, but also instances in which the item’s performance is substandard or it functions in a way not intended. For example, a smoke alarm might fail to respond to the presence of smoke (not operate at all), it might sound an alarm that is too faint to provide an adequate warning (substandard performance), or it might sound an alarm even though no smoke is present (unintended response).

Reliabilities are always specified with respect to certain conditions, called normal operating conditions . These can include load, temperature, and humidity ranges, as well as operating procedures and maintenance schedules. Failure of users to heed these conditions often results in premature failure of parts or complete systems. For example, using a passenger car to tow heavy loads will cause excess wear and tear on the drive train; driving over potholes or curbs often results in untimely tire failure; and using a calculator to drive nails might have a marked impact on its usefulness for performing mathematical operations.

Improving Reliability Reliability can be improved in a number of ways, some of which are listed in Table 4.3.

TABLE 4.3

Potential ways to improve reliability

  1. Improve component design.

  2. Improve production and/or assembly techniques.

  3. Improve testing.

  4. Use backups.

  5. Improve preventive maintenance procedures.

  6. Improve user education.

  7. Improve system design.

Because overall system reliability is a function of the reliability of individual components, improvements in their reliability can increase system reliability. Unfortunately, inadequate production or assembly procedures can negate even the best of designs, and this is often a source of failures. System reliability can be increased by the use of backup components. Failures in actual use often can be reduced by upgrading user education and refining maintenance recommendations or procedures. Finally, it may be possible to increase the overall reliability of the system by simplifying the system (thereby reducing the number of components that could cause the system to fail) or altering component relationships (e.g., increasing the reliability of interfaces).

A fundamental question concerning improving reliability is: How much reliability is needed? Obviously, the reliability needed for a household light bulb isn’t in the same category page 157as the reliability needed for an airplane. So the answer to the question depends on the potential benefits of improvements and on the cost of those improvements. Generally speaking, reliability improvements become increasingly costly. Thus, although benefits initially may increase at a much faster rate than costs, the opposite eventually becomes true. The optimal level of reliability is the point where the incremental benefit received equals the incremental cost of obtaining it. In the short term, this trade-off is made in the context of relatively fixed parameters (e.g., costs). However, in the longer term, efforts to improve reliability and reduce costs can lead to higher optimal levels of reliability.

Robust Design

Some products or services will function as designed only within a narrow range of conditions, while others will perform as designed over a much broader range of conditions. The latter have robust design . Consider a pair of fine leather boots—obviously not made for trekking through mud or snow. Now consider a pair of heavy rubber boots—just the thing for mud or snow. The rubber boots have a design that is more robust than that of the fine leather boots.

The more robust a product or service, the less likely it will fail due to a change in the environment in which it is used or in which it is performed. Hence, the more designers can build robustness into the product or service, the better it should hold up, resulting in a higher level of customer satisfaction.

A similar argument can be made for robust design as it pertains to the production process. Environmental factors can have a negative effect on the quality of a product or service. The more resistant a design is to those influences, the less likely is a negative effect. For example, many products go through a heating process: food products, ceramics, steel, petroleum products, and pharmaceutical products. Furnaces often do not heat uniformly; heat may vary either by position in an oven or over an extended period of production. One approach to this problem might be to develop a superior oven; another might be to design a system that moves the product during heating to achieve uniformity. A robust-design approach would develop a product that is unaffected by minor variations in temperature during processing.

Taguchi’s Approach Japanese engineer Genichi Taguchi’s approach is based on the concept of robust design. His premise is that it is often easier to design a product that is insensitive to environmental factors, either in manufacturing or in use, than to control the environmental factors.

The central feature of Taguchi’s approach—and the feature used most often by U.S. companies—is parameter design. This involves determining the specification settings for both the product and the process that will result in robust design in terms of manufacturing variations, product deterioration, and conditions during use.

The Taguchi approach modifies the conventional statistical methods of experimental design. Consider this example. Suppose a company will use 12 chemicals in a new product it intends to produce. There are two suppliers for these chemicals, but the chemical concentrations vary slightly between the two suppliers. Classical design of experiments would require 2 12 = 4,096 test runs to determine which combination of chemicals would be optimum. Taguchi’s approach would involve only testing a portion of the possible combinations. Relying on experts to identify the variables that would be most likely to affect important performance, the number of combinations would be dramatically reduced, perhaps to, say, 32. Identifying the best combination in the smaller sample might be a near-optimal combination instead of the optimal combination. The value of this approach is its ability to achieve major advances in product or process design fairly quickly, using a relatively small number of experiments.

Critics charge that Taguchi’s methods are inefficient and incorrect, and often lead to non-optimal solutions. Nonetheless, his methods are widely used and have been credited with helping to achieve major improvements in U.S. products and manufacturing processes.

page 158 

Degree of Newness

Product or service design change can range from the modification of an existing product or service to an entirely new product or service:

  1. Modification of an existing product or service

  2. Expansion of an existing product line or service offering

  3. Clone of a competitor’s product or service

  4. New product or service

The degree of change affects the newness to the organization and the newness to the market. For the organization, a low level of newness can mean a fairly quick and easy transition to producing the new product, while a high level of newness would likely mean a slower and more difficult, and therefore more costly, transition. For the market, a low level of newness would mean little difficulty with market acceptance, but possibly low profit potential. Even in instances of low profit potential, organizations might use this strategy to maintain market share. A high level of newness, on the other hand, might mean more difficulty with acceptance, or it might mean a rapid gain in market share with a high potential for profits. Unfortunately, there is no way around these issues. It is important to carefully assess the risks and potential benefits of any design change, taking into account clearly identified customer wants.

Quality Function Deployment

Obtaining input from customers is essential to assure that they will want what is offered for sale. Although obtaining input can be informal through discussions with customers, there is a formal way to document customer wants. Quality function deployment (QFD) is a structured approach for integrating the “voice of the customer” into both the product and service development process. The purpose is to ensure that customer requirements are factored into every aspect of the process. Listening to and understanding the customer is the central feature of QFD. Requirements often take the form of a general statement such as, “It should be easy to adjust the cutting height of the lawn mower.” Once the requirements are known, they must be translated into technical terms related to the product or service. For example, a statement about changing the height of the lawn mower may relate to the mechanism used to accomplish that, its position, instructions for use, tightness of the spring that controls the mechanism, or materials needed. For manufacturing purposes, these must be related to the materials, dimensions, and equipment used for processing.

The structure of QFD is based on a set of matrices. The main matrix relates customer requirements (what) and their corresponding technical requirements (how). This matrix is illustrated in Figure 4.2. The matrix provides a structure for data collection.

image

Source: Ernst and Young Consulting Group, Total Quality (Homewood, IL: Dow-Jones Irwin, 1991), p. 121.

page 159 

Additional features are usually added to the basic matrix to broaden the scope of analysis. Typical additional features include importance weightings and competitive evaluations. A correlational matrix is usually constructed for technical requirements; this can reveal conflicting technical requirements. With these additional features, the set of matrices has the form illustrated in Figure 4.3. It is often referred to as the house of quality because of its house-like appearance.

image

An analysis using this format is shown in Figure 4.4. The data relate to a commercial printer (customer) and the company that supplies the paper. At first glance, the display appears complex. It contains a considerable amount of information for product and process planning. Therefore, let’s break it up into separate parts and consider them one at a time. To start, a key part is the list of customer requirements on the left side of the figure. Next, note the technical requirements, listed vertically near the top. The key relationships and their degree of importance are shown in the center of the figure. The circle with a dot inside indicates the strongest positive relationship; that is, it denotes the most important technical requirements for satisfying customer requirements. Now look at the “importance to customer” numbers that are shown next to each customer requirement (3 is the most important). Designers will take into account the importance values and the strength of correlation in determining where to focus the greatest effort.

image

Next, consider the correlation matrix at the top of the “house.” Of special interest is the strong negative correlation between “paper thickness” and “roll roundness.” Designers will have to find some way to overcome that or make a trade-off decision.

On the right side of the figure is a competitive evaluation comparing the supplier’s performance on the customer requirements with each of the two key competitors (A and B). For example, the supplier (X) is worst on the first customer requirement and best on the third customer requirement. The line connects the X performances. Ideally, design will cause all of the Xs to be in the highest positions.

Across the bottom of Figure 4.4 are importance weightings, target values, and technical evaluations. The technical evaluations can be interpreted in a manner similar to that of the competitive evaluations (note the line connecting the Xs). The target values typically contain technical specifications, which we will not discuss. The importance weightings are the sums of values assigned to the relationships (see the lower right-hand key for relationship weights). The 3 in the first column is the product of the importance to the customer, 3, and the small (Δ) weight, 1. The importance weightings and target evaluations help designers focus on desired results. In this example, the first technical requirement has the lowest importance weighting, while the next four technical requirements all have relatively high importance weightings.

page 160 

The house of quality approach involves a sequence of “houses,” beginning with design characteristics, which leads to specific components, then production processes, and finally, a quality plan. The sequence is illustrated in Figure 4.5. Although the details of each house are beyond the scope of this text, Figure 4.5 provides a conceptual understanding of the progression involved.

image

The Kano Model

The Kano model is a theory of product and service design developed by Dr. Noriaki Kano, a Japanese professor, who offered a perspective on customer perceptions of quality different from the traditional view that “more is better.” Instead, he proposed different categories of quality and posited that understanding them would better position designers to assess and address quality needs. His model provides insights into the attributes that are perceived to be page 161important to customers. The model employs three definitions of quality: basic, performance, and excitement.

Basic quality refers to customer requirements that have only a limited effect on customer satisfaction if present, but lead to dissatisfaction if not present. For example, putting a very short cord on an electrical appliance will likely result in customer dissatisfaction, but beyond a certain length (e.g., 4 feet), adding more cord will not lead to increased levels of customer satisfaction. Performance quality refers to customer requirements that generate satisfaction or dissatisfaction in proportion to their level of functionality and appeal. For example, increasing the tread life of a tire or the amount of time house paint will last will add to customer satisfaction. Excitement quality refers to a feature or attribute that was unexpected by the customer and causes excitement (the “wow” factor), such as a voucher for dinner for two at the hotel restaurant when checking in. Figure 4.6A portrays how the three definitions of quality influence customer satisfaction or dissatisfaction relative to the degree of implementation. Note that features that are perceived by customers as basic quality result in dissatisfaction if they are missing or at low levels, but do not result in customer satisfaction if they are present, even at high levels. Performance factors can result in satisfaction or dissatisfaction, depending on the degree to which they are present. Excitement factors, because they are unexpected, do not result in dissatisfaction when they are absent or at low levels, but have the potential for disproportionate levels of satisfaction if they are present.

image

Over time, features that excited become performance features, and performance features soon become basic quality features, as illustrated in Figure 4.6B. The rates at which various design elements are migrating is an important input from marketing that will enable designers to continue to satisfy and delight customers and not waste efforts on improving what have become basic quality features.

image

The lesson of the Kano model is that design elements that fall into each aspect of quality must first be determined. Once basic needs have been met, additional efforts in those areas should not be pursued. For performance features, cost–benefit analysis comes into play, and these features should be included as long as the benefit exceeds the cost. Excitement features pose somewhat of a challenge. Customers are not likely to indicate excitement factors in surveys because they don’t know that they want them. However, small increases in such factors produce disproportional increases in customer satisfaction and generally increase brand loyalty, so it is important for companies to strive to identify and include these features when economically feasible.

The Kano model can be used in conjunction with QFD, as well as in Six Sigma projects (see Chapter 9 for a discussion of Six Sigma).

page 162 

4.9 PHASES IN PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT

Product design and development generally proceeds in a series of phases (see Table 4.4).

TABLE 4.4

Phases in the product development process

  1. Feasibility analysis

  2. Product specifications

  3. Process specifications

  4. Prototype development

  5. Design review

  6. Market test

  7. Product introduction

  8. Follow-up evaluation

Feasibility analysis. Feasibility analysis entails market analysis (demand), economic analysis (development cost and production cost, profit potential), and technical analysis (capacity requirements and availability, and the skills needed). Also, it is necessary to answer the question: Does it fit with the mission? It requires collaboration among marketing, finance, accounting, engineering, and operations.

Product specifications. This involves detailed descriptions of what is needed to meet (or exceed) customer wants, and requires collaboration between legal, marketing, and operations.

page 163 

Process specifications. Once product specifications have been set, attention turns to specifications for the process that will be needed to produce the product. Alternatives must be weighed in terms of cost, availability of resources, profit potential, and quality. This involves collaboration between accounting and operations.

Prototype development. With product and process specifications complete, one (or a few) units are made to see if there are any problems with the product or process specifications.

Design review. At this stage, any necessary changes are made or the project is abandoned. Marketing, finance, engineering, design, and operations collaborate to determine whether to proceed or abandon.

Market test. A market test is used to determine the extent of consumer acceptance. If unsuccessful, the product returns to the design review phase. This phase is handled by marketing.

Product introduction. The new product is promoted. This phase is handled by marketing.

Follow-up evaluation. Based on user feedback, changes may be made or forecasts refined. This phase is handled by marketing.

4.10 DESIGNING FOR PRODUCTION

In this section, you will learn about design techniques that have greater applicability for the design of products than the design of services. Even so, you will see that they do have some relevance for service design. The topics include concurrent engineering, computer-assisted design, designing for assembly and disassembly, and the use of components for similar products.

Concurrent Engineering

To achieve a smoother transition from product design to production, and to decrease product development time, many companies are using simultaneous development, or concurrent engineering. In its narrowest sense, concurrent engineering means bringing design and manufacturing engineering people together early in the design phase to simultaneously develop the product and the processes for creating the product. More recently, this concept has been enlarged to include manufacturing personnel (e.g., materials specialists) and marketing and purchasing personnel in loosely integrated, cross-functional teams. In addition, the views of suppliers and customers are frequently sought. The purpose, of course, is to achieve product designs that reflect customer wants, as well as manufacturing capabilities.

Traditionally, designers developed a new product without any input from manufacturing, and then turned over the design to manufacturing, which would then have to develop a process for making the new product. This “over-the-wall” approach created tremendous challenges for manufacturing, generating numerous conflicts and greatly increasing the time needed to successfully produce a new product. It also contributed to an “us versus them” mentality.

For these and similar reasons, the simultaneous development approach has great appeal. Among the key advantages of this approach are the following:

  1. Manufacturing personnel are able to identify production capabilities and capacities. Very often, they have some latitude in design in terms of selecting suitable materials and processes. Knowledge of production capabilities can help in the selection process. In addition, cost and quality considerations can be greatly influenced by design, and conflicts during production can be greatly reduced.

  2. Design or procurement of critical tooling, some of which might have long lead times, can occur early in the process. This can result in a major shortening of the product development process, which could be a key competitive advantage.

  3. The technical feasibility of a particular design or a portion of a design can be assessed early on. Again, this can avoid serious problems during production.

  4. The emphasis can be on problem resolution instead of conflict resolution.

page 164 

However, despite the advantages of concurrent engineering, a number of potential difficulties exist in this co-development approach. Two key ones are the following:

  • Long-standing boundaries between design and manufacturing can be difficult to overcome. Simply bringing a group of people together and thinking they will be able to work together effectively is probably naive.

  • There must be extra communication and flexibility if the process is to work, and these can be difficult to achieve.

Hence, managers should plan to devote special attention if this approach is to work.

Computer-Aided Design (CAD)

Computers are increasingly used for product design. Computer-aided design (CAD) uses computer graphics for product design. The designer can modify an existing design or create a new one on a monitor by means of a light pen, a keyboard, a joystick, or a similar device. Once the design is entered into the computer, the designer can maneuver it on the screen: It can be rotated to provide the designer with different perspectives, it can be split apart to give the designer a view of the inside, and a portion of it can be enlarged for closer examination. The designer can obtain a printed version of the completed design and file it electronically, making it accessible to people in the firm who need this information (e.g., marketing, operations).

A growing number of products are being designed in this way, including transformers, automobile parts, aircraft parts, integrated circuits, and electric motors.

A major benefit of CAD is the increased productivity of designers. No longer is it necessary to laboriously prepare mechanical drawings of products or parts and revise them repeatedly to correct errors or incorporate revisions. A rough estimate is that CAD increases the productivity of designers from 3 to 10 times. A second major benefit of CAD is the creation of a database for manufacturing that can supply needed information on product geometry and dimensions, tolerances, material specifications, and so on. It should be noted, however, that CAD needs this database to function and that this entails a considerable amount of effort.

page 165 

Some CAD systems allow the designer to perform engineering and cost analyses on proposed designs. For instance, the computer can determine the weight and volume of a part and do stress analysis as well. When there are a number of alternative designs, the computer can quickly go through the possibilities and identify the best one, given the designer’s criteria. CAD that includes finite element analysis (FEA) capability can greatly shorten the time to market of new products. It enables developers to perform simulations that aid in the design, analysis, and commercialization of new products. Designers in industries such as aeronautics, biomechanics, and automotives use FEA.

Production Requirements

As noted earlier in the chapter, designers must take into account production capabilities. Design needs to clearly understand the capabilities of production (e.g., equipment, skills, types of materials, schedules, technologies, special abilities). This helps in choosing designs that match capabilities. When opportunities and capabilities do not match, management must consider the potential for expanding or changing capabilities to take advantage of those opportunities.

Forecasts of future demand can be very useful, supplying information on the timing and volume of demand, and information on demands for new products and services.

Manufacturability is a key concern for manufactured goods: Ease of fabrication and/or assembly is important for cost, productivity, and quality. With services, ease of providing the service, cost, productivity, and quality are of great concern.

The term design for manufacturing (DFM) is used to indicate the designing of products that are compatible with an organization’s capabilities. A related concept in manufacturing is design for assembly (DFA) . A good design must take into account not only how a product will be fabricated, but also how it will be assembled. Design for assembly focuses on reducing the number of parts in an assembly, as well as on the assembly methods and sequence that will be employed. Another, more general term, manufacturability , is sometimes used when referring to the ease with which products can be fabricated and/or assembled.

Component Commonality

Companies often have multiple products or services to offer customers. Often, these products or services have a high degree of similarity of features and components. This is particularly true of product families, but it is also true of many services. Companies can realize significant benefits when a part can be used in multiple products. For example, car manufacturers employ this tactic by using internal components such as water pumps, engines, and transmissions on several automobile nameplates. In addition to the savings in design time, companies reap benefits through standard training for assembly and installation, increased opportunities for savings by buying in bulk from suppliers, and commonality of parts for repair, which reduces the inventory that dealers and auto parts stores must carry. Similar benefits accrue in services. For example, in automobile repair, component commonality means less training is needed because the variety of jobs is reduced. The same applies to appliance repair, where commonality and substitutability of parts are typical. Multiple-use forms in financial and medical services are other examples. Computer software often comprises a number of modules that are commonly used for similar applications, thereby saving the time and cost to write the code for major portions of the software. Tool manufacturers use a design that allows tool users to attach different power tools to a common power source. Similarly, HP has a universal power source that can be used with a variety of computer hardware.

4.11 SERVICE DESIGN

There are many similarities between product and service design. However, there are some important differences as well, owing to the nature of services. One major difference is that unlike manufacturing, where production and delivery are usually separated in time, services are usually created and delivered simultaneously.

page 166 

Service refers to an act, something that is done to or for a customer (client, patient, etc.). It is provided by a service delivery system , which includes the facilities, processes, and skills needed to provide the service. Many services are not pure services, but part of a product bundle —the combination of goods and services provided to a customer. The service component in products is increasing. The ability to create and deliver reliable customer-oriented service is often a key competitive differentiator. Successful companies combine customer-oriented service with their products.

System design involves development or refinement of the overall service package : 1

  1. The physical resources needed.

  2. The accompanying goods that are purchased or consumed by the customer, or provided with the service.

  3. Explicit services (the essential/core features of a service, such as tax preparation).

  4. Implicit services (ancillary/extra features, such as friendliness, courtesy).

Overview of Service Design

Service design begins with the choice of a service strategy, which determines the nature and focus of the service, and the target market. This requires an assessment by top management of the potential market and profitability (or need, in the case of a nonprofit organization) of a particular service, and an assessment of the organization’s ability to provide the service. Once decisions on the focus of the service and the target market have been made, the customer requirements and expectations of the target market must be determined.

Two key issues in service design are the degree of variation in service requirements and the degree of customer contact and customer involvement in the delivery system. These have an impact on the degree to which service can be standardized or must be customized. The lower the degree of customer contact and service requirement variability, the more standardized the service can be. Service design with no contact and little or no processing variability is very much like product design. Conversely, high variability and high customer contact generally mean the service must be highly customized. A related consideration in service design is the opportunity for selling: The greater the degree of customer contact, the greater the opportunities for selling.

Differences between Service Design and Product Design

Service operations managers must contend with issues that may be insignificant or nonexistent for managers in a production setting. These include the following:

  1. Products are generally tangible; services are generally intangible. Consequently, service design often focuses more on intangible factors (e.g., peace of mind, ambiance) than does product design.

  2. In many instances, services are created and delivered at the same time (e.g., a haircut, a car wash). In such instances, there is less latitude in finding and correcting errors before the customer has a chance to discover them. Consequently, training, process design, and customer relations are particularly important.

  3. Services cannot be inventoried. This poses restrictions on flexibility and makes capacity issues very important.

  4. Services that are highly visible to consumers and must be designed with that in mind; this adds an extra dimension to process design, one that usually is not present in product design.

  5. Some services have low barriers to entry and exit. This places additional pressures on service design to be innovative and cost-effective.

  6. Location is often important to service design, with convenience as a major factor. Hence, design of services and choice of location are often closely linked.

    page 167 

  7. Service systems range from those with little or no customer contact to those that have a very high degree of customer contact. Here are some examples of those different types:

    Insulated technical core; little or no customer contact (e.g., software development)

    Production line; little or no customer contact (e.g., automatic car wash)

    Personalized service (e.g., haircut, medical service)

    Consumer participation (e.g., diet program, dance lessons)

    Self-service (e.g., supermarket)

    If there is little or no customer contact, service system design is like product system design.

  8. Demand variability alternately creates customer waiting times, which sometimes leads to lost sales, or idle service resources.

When demand variability is a factor, designers may approach service design from one of two perspectives. One is a cost and efficiency perspective, and the other is a customer perspective. Waiting line analysis (see Chapter 18) can be especially useful in this regard.

Basing design objectives on cost and efficiency is essentially a “product design approach” to service design. Because customer participation makes both quality and demand variability more difficult to manage, designers may opt to limit customer participation in the process where possible. Alternatively, designers may use staff flexibility as a means of dealing with demand variability.

In services, a significant aspect of perceived quality relates to the intangibles that are part of the service package. Designers must proceed with caution because attempts to achieve a high level of efficiency tend to depersonalize service and to create the risk of negatively altering the customer’s perception of quality. Such attempts may involve the following:

  • Reducing consumer choices makes service more efficient, but it can be both frustrating and irritating for the customer. An example would be a cable company that bundles channels, rather than allowing customers to pick only the channels they want.

  • Standardizing or simplifying certain elements of service can reduce the cost of providing a service, but it risks eliminating features that some customers value, such as personal attention.

  • Incorporating flexibility in capacity management by employing part-time or temporary staff may involve the use of less-skilled or less-interested people, and service quality may suffer.

Design objectives based on customer perspective require understanding the customer experience, and focusing on how to maintain control over service delivery to achieve customer satisfaction. The customer-oriented approach involves determining consumer wants and needs in order to understand relationships between service delivery and perceived quality. This enables designers to make enlightened choices in designing the delivery system.

Of course, designers must keep in mind that while depersonalizing service delivery for the sake of efficiency can negatively impact perceived quality, customers may not want or be willing to pay for highly personalized service either, so trade-offs may have to be made.

Phases in the Service Design Process

Table 4.5 lists the phases in the service design process. As you can see, they are quite similar to the phases of product design, except that the delivery system also must be designed.

TABLE 4.5

Phases in service design process

1. Conceptualize.

Idea generation

Assessment of customer wants/needs (marketing)

Assessment of demand potential (marketing)

2. Identify service package components needed (operations and marketing).

3. Determine performance specifications (operations and marketing).

4. Translate performance specifications into design specifications.

5. Translate design specifications into delivery specifications.

page 168 

Service Blueprinting

A useful tool for conceptualizing a service delivery system is the service blueprint , which is a method for describing and analyzing a service process. A service blueprint is much like an architectural drawing, but instead of showing building dimensions and other construction features, a service blueprint shows the basic customer and service actions involved in a service operation. Figure 4.7 illustrates a simple service blueprint for a restaurant. At the top of the figure are the customer actions, and just below are the related actions of the direct contact service people. Next are what are sometimes referred to as “backstage contacts”—in this example, the kitchen staff—and below those are the support, or “backroom,” operations. In this example, support operations include the reservation system, ordering of food and supplies, cashier, and the outsourcing of laundry service. Figure 4.7 is a simplified illustration—typically, time estimates for actions and operations would be included.

image

The major steps in service blueprinting are as follows:

  1. Establish boundaries for the service and decide on the level of detail needed.

  2. Identify and determine the sequence of customer and service actions and interactions. A flowchart can be a useful tool for this.

  3. Develop time estimates for each phase of the process, as well as time variability.

  4. Identify potential failure points and develop a plan to prevent or minimize them, as well as a plan to respond to service errors.

Characteristics of Well-Designed Service Systems

There are a number of characteristics of well-designed service systems. They can serve as guidelines in developing a service system. They include the following:

  • Being consistent with the organization’s mission.

  • Being user-friendly.

  • Being robust if variability is a factor.

    page 169 

  • Being easy to sustain.

  • Being cost-effective.

  • Having value that is obvious to customers.

  • Having effective linkages between back-of-the-house operations (i.e., no contact with the customer) and front-of-the-house operations (i.e., direct contact with customers). Front operations should focus on customer service, while back operations should focus on speed and efficiency.

  • Having a single, unifying theme, such as convenience or speed.

  • Having design features and checks that will ensure service that is reliable and of high quality.

Challenges of Service Design

Variability is a major concern in most aspects of business operations, and it is particularly so in the design of service systems. Requirements tend to be variable, both in terms of differences in what customers want or need, and in terms of the timing of customer requests. Because services generally cannot be stored, there is the additional challenge of balancing supply and demand. This is less of a problem for systems in which the timing of services can be scheduled (e.g., doctor’s appointment), but not so in others (e.g., emergency room visit).

Another challenge is that services can be difficult to describe precisely and are dynamic in nature, especially when there is a direct encounter with the customer (e.g., personal services), due to the large number of variables.

Guidelines for Successful Service Design

  1. Define the service package in detail. A service blueprint may be helpful for this.

  2. Focus on the operation from the customer’s perspective. Consider how customer expectations and perceptions are managed during and after the service.

  3. Consider the image that the service package will present both to customers and to prospective customers.

  4. Recognize that designers’ familiarity with the system may give them quite a different perspective than that of the customer, and take steps to overcome this.

  5. Make sure that managers are involved and will support the design once it is implemented.

  6. Define quality for both tangibles and intangibles. Intangible standards are more difficult to define, but they must be addressed.

  7. Make sure that recruitment, training, and reward policies are consistent with service expectations.

    page 170 

  8. Establish procedures to handle both predictable and unpredictable events.

  9. Establish systems to monitor, maintain, and improve service.

4.12 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

Product and service design is a fertile area for achieving competitive advantage and/or increasing customer satisfaction. Potential sources of such benefits include the following:

  • Packaging products and ancillary services to increase sales. Examples include selling laptops at a reduced cost with a two-year internet access sign-up agreement, offering extended warranties on products, offering installation and service, and offering training with computer software.

  • Using multiple-use platforms. Auto manufacturers use the same platform (basic chassis, say) for several nameplates (e.g., Jaguar S type, Lincoln LS, and Ford Thunderbird have shared the same platform). There are two basic computer platforms, PC and Mac, with many variations of computers using a particular platform.

  • Implementing tactics that will achieve the benefits of high volume while satisfying customer needs for variety, such as mass customization.

  • Continually monitoring products and services for small improvements rather than the “big bang” approach. Often, the “little” things can have a positive, long-lasting effect on consumer attitudes and buying behavior.

  • Shortening the time it takes to get new or redesigned goods and services to market.

A key competitive advantage of some companies is their ability to bring new products to market more quickly than their competitors. Companies using this “first-to-market” approach are able to enter markets ahead of their competitors, allowing them to set higher selling prices than otherwise due to absence of competition. Such a strategy is also a defense against competition from cheaper “clones” because the competitors always have to play “catch up.”

From a design standpoint, reducing the time to market involves:

  • Using standardized components to create new but reliable products.

  • Using technology such as computer-aided design (CAD) equipment to rapidly design new or modified products.

  • Concurrent engineering to shorten engineering time.

page 175 

page 176 

4S.1 INTRODUCTION

Reliability is a measure of the ability of a product, service, part, or system to perform its intended function under a prescribed set of conditions, and often over a designated time interval or life span. In effect, reliability is a probability.

Suppose that an item has a reliability of .90. This means it has a 90 percent probability of functioning as intended, either when needed (e.g., a security warning system) or over its life span (e.g., a vehicle). The probability it will fail is 1 − .90 = .10, or 10 percent. Hence, it is expected that, on average, 1 in every 10 such items will fail or, equivalently, that the item will fail, on average, once in every 10 trials. Similarly, a reliability of .985 implies 15 failures per 1,000 parts or trials.

4S.2 QUANTIFYING RELIABILITY

Engineers and designers have a number of techniques at their disposal for assessing reliability. A discussion of those techniques is not within the scope of this text. Instead, let us turn to the issue of quantifying overall product or system reliability. Probability is used in two ways:

  1. The probability that the product or system will function when activated.

  2. The probability that the product or system will function for a given length of time.

The first of these focuses on one point in time and is often used when a system must operate for one time or a relatively few number of times. The second of these focuses on the length of service. The distinction will become more apparent as each of these approaches is described in more detail.

page 177 

Finding the Probability of Functioning When Activated

The probability that a system or a product will operate as planned is an important concept in system and product design. Determining that probability when the product or system consists of a number of independent components requires the use of the rules of probability for independent events. Independent events have no relation to the occurrence or nonoccurrence of each other. What follows are three examples illustrating the use of probability rules to determine whether a given system will operate successfully.

Rule 1. If two or more events are independent and success is defined as the probability that all of the events occur, then the probability of success is equal to the product of the probabilities of the events.

Example Suppose a room has two lamps, but to have adequate light both lamps must work (success) when turned on. One lamp has a probability of working of .90, and the other has a probability of working of .80. The probability that both will work is .90 × .80 = .72. Note that the order of multiplication is unimportant: .80 × .90 = .72. Also note that if the room had three lamps, three probabilities would have been multiplied.

This system can be represented by the following diagram:

Even though the individual components of a system might have high reliabilities, the system as a whole can have considerably less reliability because all components that are in series (as are the ones in the preceding example) must function. As the number of components in a series increases, the system reliability decreases. For example, a system that has eight components in a series, each with a reliability of .99, has a reliability of only .99 8 = .923.

Obviously, many products and systems have a large number of component parts that must all operate, and some way to increase overall reliability is needed. One approach is to use redundancy in the design. This involves providing backup parts for some items.

Rule 2. If two events are independent and success is defined as the probability that at least one of the events will occur, the probability of success is equal to the probability of either one plus 1.00 minus that probability multiplied by the other probability.

Example There are two lamps in a room. When turned on, one has a probability of working of .90 and the other has a probability of working of .80. Only a single lamp is needed to light for success. If one fails to light when turned on, the other lamp is turned on. Hence, one of the lamps is a backup in case the other one fails. Either lamp can be treated as the backup; the probability of success will be the same. The probability of success is .90 + (1 − .90) × .80 = .98. If the .80 light is first, the computation would be .80 + (1 − .80) × .90 = .98.

This system can be represented by the following diagram:

Rule 3. If two or more events are involved and success is defined as the probability that at least one of them occurs, the probability of success is 1 − p (all fail).

page 178 

Example Three lamps have probabilities of .90, .80, and .70 of lighting when turned on. Only one lighted lamp is needed for success; hence, two of the lamps are considered to be backups. The probability of success is

1 − [(1 − .90) × (1 − .80) × (1 − .70)] = .994

Note: It is assumed that the switch that activates each lamp has a reliability of 100%. To see how to incorporate a switch with less than 100% reliability, consider that the second “lamp” is actually a switch with a probability of operating equal to .80, and the third lamp is the only backup (i.e., the second lamp). Thus, the problem would be solved in exactly the same way.

This system can be represented by the following diagram:

Finding the Probability of Functioning for a Specified Length of Time

The second way of looking at reliability considers the incorporation of a time dimension: Probabilities are determined relative to a specified length of time. This approach is commonly used in product warranties, which pertain to a given period of time after purchase of a product.

A typical profile of product failure rate over time is illustrated in Figure 4S.1. Because of its shape, it is sometimes referred to as a bathtub curve. Frequently, a number of products fail shortly after they are put into service, not because they wear out, but because they are defective to begin with. The rate of failures decreases rapidly once the truly defective items are weeded out. During the second phase, there are fewer failures because most of the defective items have been eliminated, and it is too soon to encounter items that fail because they have worn out. In some cases, this phase covers a relatively long time. In the third phase, failures occur because the products are worn out, and the failure rate increases.

image

Information on the distribution and length of each phase requires the collection of historical data and analysis of those data. It often turns out that the mean time between failures (MTBF) page 179in the infant mortality phase can be modeled by a negative exponential distribution, such as that depicted in Figure 4S.2. Equipment failures, as well as product failures, may occur in this pattern. In such cases, the exponential distribution can be used to determine various probabilities of interest. The probability that equipment or a product put into service at time 0 will fail before some specified time, T, is equal to the area under the curve between 0 and T. Reliability is specified as the probability that a product will last at least until time  T; reliability is equal to the area under the curve beyond T. (Note that the total area under the curve in each phase is treated as 100 percent for computational purposes.) Observe that, as the specified length of service increases, the area under the curve to the right of that point (i.e., the reliability) decreases.

image

Determining values for the area under a curve to the right of a given point, T, becomes a relatively simple matter using a table of exponential values. An exponential distribution is completely described using a single parameter, the distribution mean, which reliability engineers often refer to as the mean time between failures. Using the symbol T to represent length of service, the probability that failure will not occur before time T (i.e., the area in the right tail) is easily determined:

P(no failure before T) = e T/MTBF

where

image

The probability that failure will occur before time T is:

P(failure before T) = 1 − e T/MTBF

Selected values of e T/MTBF are listed in Table 4S.1.

page 180 

TABLE 4S.1

Values of e T/MTBF

page 181 

page 182 

Product failure due to wear-out can sometimes be modeled by a normal distribution. Obtaining probabilities involves the use of a table (refer to Appendix Table B.2). The table provides areas under a normal curve from (essentially) the left end of the curve to a specified point z , where z is a standardized value computed using the formula

image

Thus, to work with the normal distribution, it is necessary to know the mean of the distribution and its standard deviation. A normal distribution is illustrated in Figure 4S.3. Appendix Table B.2 contains normal probabilities (i.e., the area that lies to the left of z). To obtain a probability that service life will not exceed some value T, compute z and refer to the table. To find the reliability for time T, subtract this probability from 100 percent. To obtain the value of T that will provide a given probability, locate the nearest probability under the curve to the left in Appendix Table B.2. Then, use the corresponding z in the preceding formula and solve for T.

image

4S.3 AVAILABILITY

A related measure of importance to customers, and hence to designers, is availability . It measures the fraction of time a piece of equipment is expected to be operational (as opposed to being down for repairs). Availability can range from zero (never available) to 1.00 (always available). Companies that can offer equipment with a high availability factor have a competitive advantage over companies that offer equipment with lower availability values. Availability is a function of both the mean time between failures and the mean time to repair. The availability factor can be computed using the following formula:

image

where

MTBF = Mean time between failures

 MTR = Mean time to repair, including waiting time

page 190 

page 191 

5.1 INTRODUCTION

Hospitals that not too long ago had what could be described as “facility oversupply” are now experiencing what might be called a “capacity crisis” in some areas. The way hospitals plan for capacity is critical to their future success. The same applies to all sorts of organizations, at all levels of these organizations. Capacity refers to an upper limit or ceiling on the load that an operating unit can handle. The load might be in terms of the number of physical units produced (e.g., bicycles assembled per hour) or the number of services performed (e.g., computers upgraded per hour). The operating unit might be a plant, department, machine, store, or worker. Capacity needs include equipment, space, and employee skills.

page 192 

The goal of strategic capacity planning is to achieve a match between the long-term supply capabilities of an organization and the predicted level of long-term demand. Organizations become involved in capacity planning for various reasons. Among the chief reasons are changes in demand, changes in technology, changes in the environment, and perceived threats or opportunities. A gap between current and desired capacity will result in capacity that is out of balance. Overcapacity (i.e., excess capacity) causes operating costs that are too high, while undercapacity (i.e., not enough capacity to meet demand) causes strained resources and a possible loss of customers.

The key questions in capacity planning are the following:

  1. What kind of capacity is needed?

  2. How much is needed to match demand?

  3. When is it needed?

The question of what kind of capacity is needed depends on the products and services that management intends to produce or provide. Hence, in a very real sense, capacity planning is governed by those choices.

Forecasts are key inputs used to answer the questions of how much capacity is needed and when is it needed.

Related questions include:

  1. How much will it cost, how will it be funded, and what is the expected return?

  2. What are the potential benefits and risks? These involve the degree of uncertainty related to forecasts of the amount of demand and the rate of change in demand, as well as costs, profits, and the time to implement capacity changes. The degree of accuracy that can be attached to forecasts is an important consideration. The likelihood and impact of wrong decisions also need to be assessed.

  3. Are there sustainability issues that need to be addressed?

  4. Should capacity be changed all at once, or through several (or more) small changes?

  5. Can the supply chain handle the necessary changes? Before an organization commits to ramping up its input, it is essential to confirm that its supply chain will be able to handle related requirements. And different issues occur for the supply chain when output decreases.

Because of uncertainties, some organizations prefer to delay capacity investment until demand materializes. However, such strategies often inhibit growth because adding capacity takes time and customers won’t usually wait. Conversely, organizations that add capacity in anticipation of growth often discover that the new capacity actually attracts growth. Some organizations “hedge their bets” by making a series of small changes and then evaluating the results before committing to the next change.

In some instances, capacity choices are made very infrequently; in others, they are made regularly, as part of an ongoing process. Generally, the factors that influence this frequency are the stability of demand, the rate of technological change in equipment and product design, page 193and competitive factors. Other factors relate to the type of product or service and whether style changes are important (e.g., automobiles and clothing). In any case, management must review product and service choices periodically to ensure that the company makes capacity changes when they are needed for cost, competitive effectiveness, or other reasons.

5.2 CAPACITY DECISIONS ARE STRATEGIC

For a number of reasons, capacity decisions are among the most fundamental of all the design decisions that managers must make. In fact, capacity decisions can be critical for an organization.

  1. Capacity decisions have a real impact on the ability of the organization to meet future demands for products and services; capacity essentially limits the rate of output possible. Having capacity to satisfy demand can often allow a company to take advantage of tremendous benefits. When Microsoft introduced its new Xbox, there were insufficient supplies, resulting in lost sales and unhappy customers. Similarly, shortages of flu vaccine in some years due to production problems affected capacity, limiting the availability of the vaccine.

  2. Capacity decisions affect operating costs. Ideally, capacity and demand requirements will be matched, which will tend to minimize operating costs. In practice, this is not always achieved because actual demand differs from expected demand or tends to vary (e.g., cyclically). In such cases, a decision might be made to attempt to balance the costs of over- and undercapacity.

  3. Capacity is usually a major determinant of initial cost. Typically, the greater the capacity of a productive unit, the greater its cost. This does not necessarily imply a one-for-one relationship; larger units tend to cost proportionately less than smaller units.

  4. Capacity decisions often involve a long-term commitment of resources, and once they are implemented, those decisions may be difficult or impossible to modify without incurring major costs.

  5. Capacity decisions can affect competitiveness. If a firm has excess capacity, or can quickly add capacity, that fact may serve as a barrier to entry by other firms. Then, too, capacity can affect delivery speed, which can be a competitive advantage.

  6. Capacity affects the ease of management; having appropriate capacity makes management easier than when capacity is mismatched.

  7. Globalization has increased the importance and the complexity of capacity decisions. Far-flung supply chains and distant markets add to the uncertainty about capacity needs.

page 194 

  1. Because capacity decisions often involve substantial financial and other resources, it is necessary to plan for them far in advance. For example, it may take years for a new power-generating plant to be constructed and become operational. However, this increases the risk that the designated amount of capacity will not match actual demand or reserve requirements when the capacity becomes available.

5.3 DEFINING AND MEASURING CAPACITY

Capacity often refers to an upper limit on the rate of output. Even though this seems simple enough, there are subtle difficulties in actually measuring capacity in certain cases. These difficulties arise because of different interpretations of the term capacity and problems with identifying suitable measures for a specific situation.

In selecting a measure of capacity, it is important to choose one that does not require updating. For example, dollar amounts are often a poor measure of capacity (e.g., a capacity of $30 million a year), because price changes necessitate updating of that measure.

Where only one product or service is involved, the capacity of the productive unit may be expressed in terms of that item. However, when multiple products or services are involved, as is often the case, using a simple measure of capacity based on units of output can be misleading. An appliance manufacturer may produce both refrigerators and freezers. If the output rates for these two products are different, it would not make sense to simply state capacity in units without reference to either refrigerators or freezers. The problem is compounded if the firm has other products. One possible solution is to state capacities in terms of each product. Thus, the firm may be able to produce 100 refrigerators per day or 80 freezers per day. Sometimes this approach is helpful, sometimes not. For instance, if an organization has many different products or services, it may not be practical to list all of the relevant capacities. This is especially true if there are frequent changes in the mix of output, because this would necessitate a frequently changing composite index of capacity. The preferred alternative in such cases is to use a measure of capacity that refers to availability of inputs. Thus, a hospital has a certain number of beds, a factory has a certain number of machine hours available, and a bus has a certain number of seats and a certain amount of standing room.

No single measure of capacity will be appropriate in every situation. Rather, the measure of capacity must be tailored to the situation. Table 5.1 provides some examples of commonly used measures of capacity.

TABLE 5.1

Measures of capacity

Business

Inputs

Outputs

Auto manufacturing

Labor hours, machine hours

Number of cars per shift

Steel mill

Furnace size

Tons of steel per day

Oil refinery

Refinery size

Gallons of fuel per day

Farming

Number of acres, number of cows

Bushels of grain per acre per year, gallons of milk per day

Restaurant

Number of tables, seating capacity

Number of meals served per day

Theater

Number of seats

Number of tickets sold per performance

Retail sales

Square feet of floor space

Revenue generated per day

Up to this point, we have been using a general definition of capacity. Although it is functional, it can be refined into two useful definitions of capacity:

  1. Design capacity : The maximum output rate or service capacity an operation, process, or facility is designed for.

  2. Effective capacity : Design capacity minus allowances such as personal time, and preventive maintenance.

page 195 

Design capacity is the maximum rate of output achieved under ideal conditions. Effective capacity is always less than design capacity, owing to realities of changing product mix, the need for periodic maintenance of equipment, lunch breaks, coffee breaks, problems in scheduling and balancing operations, and similar circumstances. Actual output cannot exceed effective capacity and is often less because of machine breakdowns, absenteeism, shortages of materials, and quality problems, as well as factors that are outside the control of the operations managers.

These different measures of capacity are useful in defining two measures of system effectiveness: efficiency and utilization. Efficiency is the ratio of actual output to effective capacity. Capacity utilization is the ratio of actual output to design capacity.

image

(5–1)

image

(5–2)

Both measures are expressed as percentages.

It is not unusual for managers to focus exclusively on efficiency, but in many instances this emphasis can be misleading. This happens when effective capacity is low compared to design capacity. In those cases, high efficiency would seem to indicate an effective use of resources, when in fact it does not. The following example illustrates this point.

Compared to the effective capacity of 40 units per day, 36 units per day looks pretty good. However, compared to the design capacity of 50 units per day, 36 units per day is much less impressive, although probably more meaningful.

Because effective capacity acts as a lid on actual output, the real key to improving capacity utilization is to increase effective capacity by correcting quality problems, maintaining equipment in good operating condition, fully training employees, and improving bottleneck operations that constrain output. Eliminating waste, which is a key aspect of lean operation (discussed in Chapter 14), can also help to improve effective capacity.

Hence, increasing utilization depends on being able to increase effective capacity, and this requires a knowledge of what is constraining effective capacity.

The following section explores some of the main determinants of effective capacity. It is important to recognize that the benefits of high utilization are realized only in instances where there is demand for the output. When demand is not there, focusing exclusively on utilization can be counterproductive, because the excess output not only results in additional variable costs but also generates the costs of having to carry the output as inventory. Another disadvantage of high utilization is that operating costs may increase because of increasing waiting time due to bottleneck conditions.

page 196 

5.4 DETERMINANTS OF EFFECTIVE CAPACITY

Many decisions about system design have an impact on capacity. The same is true for many operating decisions. This section briefly describes some of these factors, which are then elaborated on elsewhere in the book. The main factors relate to facilities, products or services, processes, human considerations, operational factors, the supply chain, and external forces.

Facilities The design of facilities, including size and provision for expansion, is key. Locational factors, such as transportation costs, distance to market, labor supply, energy sources, and room for expansion, are also important. Likewise, layout of the work area often determines how smoothly work can be performed, and environmental factors such as heating, lighting, and ventilation also play a significant role in determining whether personnel can perform effectively or whether they must struggle to overcome poor design characteristics.

Product and Service Factors Product or service design can have a tremendous influence on capacity. For example, when items are similar, the ability of the system to produce those items is generally much greater than when successive items differ. Thus, a restaurant that offers a limited menu can usually prepare and serve meals at a faster rate than a restaurant with an extensive menu. Generally speaking, the more uniform the output, the more opportunities there are for standardization of methods and materials, which leads to greater capacity. The particular mix of products or services rendered must also be considered, because different items will have different rates of output.

Process Factors The quantity capability of a process is an obvious determinant of capacity. A more subtle determinant is the influence of output quality. For instance, if quality of output does not meet standards, the rate of output will be slowed by the need for inspection and rework activities. Productivity also affects capacity. Process improvements that increase quality and productivity can result in increased capacity. Also, if multiple products or multiple services are processed in batches, the time to change equipment settings must be taken into account.

page 197 

Human Factors The tasks that make up a job, the variety of activities involved, and the training, skill, and experience required to perform a job all have an impact on the potential and actual output. In addition, employee motivation has a very basic relationship to capacity, as do absenteeism and labor turnover.

Policy Factors Management policy can affect capacity by allowing or not allowing capacity options such as overtime or second or third shifts.

Operational Factors Scheduling problems may occur when an organization has differences in equipment capabilities among alternative pieces of equipment or differences in job requirements. Inventory stocking decisions, late deliveries, purchasing requirements, acceptability of purchased materials and parts, and quality inspection and control procedures also can have an impact on effective capacity.

Inventory shortages of even one component of an assembled item (e.g., computers, refrigerators, automobiles) can cause a temporary halt to assembly operations until the components become available. This can have a major impact on effective capacity. Thus, insufficient capacity in one area can affect overall capacity.

Supply Chain Factors Supply chain factors must be taken into account in capacity planning if substantial capacity changes are involved. Key questions include: What impact will the changes have on suppliers, warehousing, transportation, and distributors? If capacity will be increased, will these elements of the supply chain be able to handle the increase? Conversely, if capacity is to be decreased, what impact will the loss of business have on these elements of the supply chain?

External Factors Product standards, especially minimum quality and performance standards, can restrict management’s options for increasing and using capacity. Thus, pollution standards on products and equipment often reduce effective capacity, as does paperwork required by government regulatory agencies by engaging employees in nonproductive activities. A similar effect occurs when a union contract limits the number of hours and type of work an employee may do.

Table 5.2 summarizes these factors. In addition, inadequate planning can be a major limiting determinant of effective capacity.

TABLE 5.2

Factors that determine effective capacity

  1. Facilities

    1. Design

    2. Location

    3. Layout

    4. Environment

  2. Product/service

    1. Design

    2. Product or service mix

  3. Process

    1. Quantity capabilities

    2. Quality capabilities

  4. Human factors

    1. Job content

    2. Job design

    3. Training and experience

    4. Motivation

    5. Compensation

    6. Learning rates

    7. Absenteeism and labor turnover

  5. Policy

  6. Operational

    1. Scheduling

    2. Materials management

    3. Quality assurance

    4. Maintenance policies

    5. Equipment breakdowns

  7. Supply chain

  8. External factors

    1. Product standards

    2. Safety regulations

    3. Unions

    4. Pollution control standards

5.5 STRATEGY FORMULATION

The three primary strategies are leading, following, and tracking. A leading capacity strategy builds capacity in anticipation of future demand increases. If capacity increases involve a long lead time, this strategy may be the best option. A following strategy builds capacity when demand exceeds current capacity. A tracking page 198strategy is similar to a following strategy, but it adds capacity in relatively small increments to keep pace with increasing demand.

An organization typically bases its capacity strategy on assumptions and predictions about long-term demand patterns, technological changes, and the behavior of its competitors. These typically involve (1) the growth rate and variability of demand, (2) the costs of building and operating facilities of various sizes, (3) the rate and direction of technological innovation, (4) the likely behavior of competitors, and (5) availability of capital and other inputs.

In some instances, a decision may be made to incorporate a capacity cushion , which is an amount of capacity in excess of expected demand when there is some uncertainty about demand. Capacity cushion = capacity − expected demand. Typically, the greater the degree of demand uncertainty, the greater the amount of cushion used. Organizations that have standard products or services generally have smaller capacity cushions. Cost and competitive priorities are also key factors.

Steps in the Capacity Planning Process

  1. Estimate future capacity requirements.

  2. Evaluate existing capacity and facilities and identify gaps.

  3. Identify alternatives for meeting requirements.

  4. Conduct financial analyses of each alternative.

  5. Assess key qualitative issues for each alternative.

  6. Select the alternative to pursue that will be best in the long term.

  7. Implement the selected alternative.

  8. Monitor results.

Capacity planning can be difficult at times due to the complex influence of market forces and technology.

5.6 FORECASTING CAPACITY REQUIREMENTS

Capacity planning decisions involve both long-term and short-term considerations. Long-term considerations relate to overall level of capacity, such as facility size, whereas short-term considerations relate to probable variations in capacity requirements created by such things as seasonal, random, and irregular fluctuations in demand. Because the time intervals covered by each of these categories can vary significantly from industry to industry, it would be misleading to put times on the intervals. However, the distinction will serve as a framework within which to discuss capacity planning.

Long-term capacity needs require forecasting demand over a time horizon and then converting those forecasts into capacity requirements. Figure 5.1 illustrates some basic demand patterns that might be identified by a forecast. In addition to basic patterns, there are more complex patterns, such as a combination of cycles and trends.

image

When trends are identified, the fundamental issues are (1) how long the trend might persist, because few things last forever, and (2) the slope of the trend. If cycles are identified, interest focuses on (1) the approximate length of the cycles and (2) the amplitude of the cycles (i.e., deviation from average).

Short-term capacity needs are less concerned with cycles or trends than with seasonal variations and other variations from average. These deviations are particularly important because they can place a severe strain on a system’s ability to satisfy demand at some times and yet result in idle capacity at other times.

An organization can identify seasonal patterns using standard forecasting techniques. Although commonly thought of as annual fluctuations, seasonal variations are also reflected in monthly, weekly, and even daily capacity requirements. Table 5.3 provides some examples of items that tend to exhibit seasonal demand patterns.

TABLE 5.3

Examples of seasonal demand patterns

Period

Items

Year

Beer sales, toy sales, airline traffic, clothing, vacations, tourism, power usage, gasoline consumption, sports and recreation, education, power usage

Month

Welfare and Social Security payments, bank transactions

Week

Retail sales, restaurant meals, automobile traffic, automotive rentals, hotel registrations

Day

Power usage, automotive traffic, public transportation, classroom use, retail sales, restaurant meals

page 199 

When time intervals are too short to have seasonal variations in demand, the analysis can often describe the variations by probability distributions such as a normal, uniform, or Poisson distribution. For example, we might describe the amount of coffee served during the midday meal at a luncheonette by a normal distribution with a certain mean and standard deviation. The number of customers who enter a bank branch on Monday mornings might be described by a Poisson distribution with a certain mean. It does not follow, however, that every instance of random variability will lend itself to description by a standard statistical distribution. Service systems, in particular, may experience a considerable amount of variability in capacity requirements unless requests for service can be scheduled. Manufacturing systems, because of their typical isolation from customers and the more uniform nature of production, are likely to experience fewer variations. Waiting-line models and simulation models can be useful when analyzing service systems. These models are described in Chapter 18.

Irregular variations are perhaps the most troublesome, because they are difficult or impossible to predict. They are created by such diverse forces as major equipment breakdowns, freak storms that disrupt normal routines, foreign political turmoil that causes oil shortages, discovery of health hazards (nuclear accidents, unsafe chemical dumping grounds, carcinogens in food and drink), and so on.

The link between marketing and operations is crucial to a realistic determination of capacity requirements. Through customer contracts, demographic analyses, and forecasts, marketing can supply vital information to operations for ascertaining capacity needs for both the long term and the short term.

Calculating Processing Requirements

A necessary piece of information is the capacity requirements of products that will be processed. To get this information, one must have reasonably accurate demand forecasts for each product and know the standard processing time per unit for each product, the number of workdays per year, and the number of shifts that will be used.

page 200 

The task of determining capacity requirements should not be taken lightly. Substantial losses can occur when there are misjudgments on capacity needs. One key reason for those misjudgments can be overly optimistic projections of demand and growth. Marketing personnel are generally optimistic in their outlook, which isn’t necessarily a bad thing. But care must be taken so that that optimism doesn’t lead to overcapacity, because the resulting underutilized capacity will create an additional cost burden. Another key reason for misjudgments may be focusing exclusively on sales and revenue potential, and not taking into account the product mix that will be needed to generate those sales and revenues. To avoid that, marketing and operations personnel must work closely to determine the optimal product mix needed and the resulting cost and profit.

A reasonable approach to determining capacity requirements is to obtain a forecast of future demand, translate demand into both the quantity and the timing of capacity requirements, and then decide what capacity changes (increased, decreased, or no changes) are needed.

Long-term capacity alternatives include the expansion or contraction of an existing facility, opening or closing branch facilities, and the relocation of existing operations. At this point, a decision must be made about whether to make or buy a good, or provide or buy a service.

5.7 ADDITIONAL CHALLENGES OF PLANNING SERVICE CAPACITY

While the foregoing discussion relates generally to capacity planning for both goods and services, it is important to note that capacity planning for services can present special challenges due to the nature of services. Three very important factors in planning service capacity are (1) there may be a need to be near customers, (2) the inability to store services, and (3) the degree of volatility of demand.

Convenience for customers is often an important aspect of service. Generally, a service must be located near customers. For example, hotel rooms must be where customers want to stay; having a vacant room in another city won’t help. Thus, capacity and location are closely tied.

Capacity also must be matched with the timing of demand. Unlike goods, services cannot be produced in one period and stored for use in a later period. Thus, an unsold seat on an airplane, train, or bus cannot be stored for use on a later trip. Similarly, inventories of goods page 201allow customers to immediately satisfy wants, whereas a customer who wants a service may have to wait. This can result in a variety of negatives for an organization that provides the service. Thus, speed of delivery, or customer waiting time, becomes a major concern in service capacity planning. For example, deciding on the number of police officers and fire trucks to have on duty at any given time affects the speed of response and brings into issue the cost of maintaining that capacity. Some of these issues are addressed in the chapter on waiting lines.

Demand volatility presents problems for capacity planners. It tends to be higher for services than for goods, not only in the timing of demand, but also in the amount of time required to service individual customers. For example, banks tend to experience higher volumes of demand on certain days of the week, and the number and nature of transactions tend to vary substantially for different individuals. Then, too, a wide range of social, cultural, and even weather factors can cause major peaks and valleys in demand. The fact that services can’t be stored means service systems cannot turn to inventory to smooth demand requirements on the system the way goods-producing systems are able to. Instead, service planners have to devise other methods of coping with demand volatility and cyclical demand. For example, to cope with peak demand periods, planners might consider hiring extra workers, hiring temporary workers, outsourcing some or all of a service, or using pricing and promotion to shift some demand to slower periods.

In some instances, demand management strategies can be used to offset capacity limitations. Pricing, promotions, discounts, and similar tactics can help to shift some demand away from peak periods and into slow periods, allowing organizations to achieve a closer match in supply and demand.

5.8 DO IT IN-HOUSE OR OUTSOURCE IT?

Once capacity requirements have been determined, the organization must decide whether to produce a good or provide a service itself, or to outsource from another organization. Many organizations buy parts or contract out services, for a variety of reasons. Among those factors are:

  • Available capacity. If an organization has available the equipment, necessary skills, and time, it often makes sense to produce an item or perform a service in-house. The additional costs would be relatively small compared with those required to buy items or subcontract services. On the other hand, outsourcing can increase capacity and flexibility.

  • Expertise. If a firm lacks the expertise to do a job satisfactorily, buying might be a reasonable alternative.

  • Quality considerations. Firms that specialize can usually offer higher quality than an organization can attain itself. Conversely, unique quality requirements or the desire to closely monitor quality may cause an organization to perform a job itself.

  • The nature of demand. When demand for an item is high and steady, the organization is often better off doing the work itself. However, wide fluctuations in demand or small orders are usually better handled by specialists who are able to combine orders from multiple sources, which results in higher volume and tends to offset individual buyer fluctuations.

  • Cost. Any cost savings achieved from buying or making must be weighed against the preceding factors. Cost savings might come from the item itself or from transportation cost savings. If there are fixed costs associated with making an item that cannot be reallocated if the service or product is outsourced, that has to be recognized in the analysis. Conversely, outsourcing may help a firm avoid incurring fixed costs.

  • Risks. Buying goods or services may entail considerable risks. Loss of direct control over operations, knowledge sharing, and the possible need to disclose proprietary information are three risks. Liability can also be a tremendous risk if the products or services of other companies cause harm to customers or the environment, as well as damage to an organization’s reputation. Reputation can also be damaged if the public discovers that a supplier operates with substandard working conditions.

page 202 

In some cases, a firm might choose to perform part of the work itself and let others handle the rest in order to maintain flexibility and to hedge against loss of a subcontractor. If part or all of the work will be done in-house, capacity alternatives will need to be developed.

Outsourcing brings with it a host of supply chain considerations. These are described in Chapter 15.

The reading above describes outsourcing that might surprise you.

5.9 DEVELOPING CAPACITY STRATEGIES

There are a number of ways to enhance development of capacity strategies:

1. Design flexibility into systems. The long-term nature of many capacity decisions and the risks inherent in long-term forecasts suggest potential benefits from designing flexible systems. For example, provision for future expansion in the original design of a structure frequently can be obtained at a small price compared to what it would cost to remodel an existing structure that did not have such a provision. Hence, if future expansion of a restaurant seems likely, water lines, power hookups, and waste disposal lines can be put in place initially so that if expansion becomes a reality, modification to the existing structure can be minimized. Similarly, a new golf course may start as a 9-hole operation, but if provision is made for future expansion by obtaining options on adjacent land, it may progress to a larger (18-hole) course. Other considerations in flexible design involve the layout of equipment, location, equipment selection, production planning, scheduling, and inventory policies, which will be discussed in later chapters.

2. Take stage of life cycle into account. Capacity requirements are often closely linked to the stage of the life cycle that a product or service is in. At the introduction phase, it can be difficult to determine both the size of the market and the organization’s eventual share of that market. Therefore, organizations should be cautious in making large and/or inflexible capacity investments.

In the growth phase, the overall market may experience rapid growth. However, the real issue is the rate at which the organization’s market share grows, which may be more or less than the market rate, depending on the success of the organization’s strategies. Organizations generally regard growth as a good thing. They want growth in the overall market for their products or services, and in their share of the market, because they see this as a way of increasing volume, and thus, increasing profits. However, there can also be a downside to this because increasing output levels will require increasing capacity, and that means increasing investment and increasing complexity. In addition, decision makers should take into account page 203possible similar moves by competitors, which would increase the risk of overcapacity in the market, and result in higher unit costs of the output. Another strategy would be to compete on some nonprice attribute of the product by investing in technology and process improvements to make differentiation a competitive advantage.

In the maturity phase, the size of the market levels off, and organizations tend to have stable market shares. Organizations may still be able to increase profitability by reducing costs and making full use of capacity. However, some organizations may still try to increase profitability by increasing capacity if they believe this stage will be fairly long, or the cost to increase capacity is relatively small.

In the decline phase, an organization is faced with underutilization of capacity due to declining demand. Organizations may eliminate the excess capacity by selling it, or by introducing new products or services. An option that is sometimes used in manufacturing is to transfer capacity to a location that has lower labor costs, which allows the organization to continue to make a profit on the product for a while longer.

3. Take a “big-picture” (i.e., systems) approach to capacity changes. When developing capacity alternatives, it is important to consider how parts of the system interrelate. For example, when making a decision to increase the number of rooms in a motel, one should also take into account probable increased demands for parking, entertainment and food, and housekeeping. Also, will suppliers be able to handle the increased volume?

Capacity changes inevitably affect an organization’s supply chain. Suppliers may need time to adjust to their capacity, so collaborating with supply chain partners on plans for capacity increases is essential. That includes not only suppliers, but also distributors and transporters.

The risk in not taking a big-picture approach is that the system will be unbalanced. Evidence of an unbalanced system is the existence of a bottleneck operation. A bottleneck operation is an operation in a sequence of operations whose capacity is lower than the capacities of other operations in the sequence. As a consequence, the capacity of the bottleneck operation limits the system capacity; the capacity of the system is reduced to the capacity of the bottleneck operation. Figure 5.2 illustrates this concept: Four operations generate work that must then be processed by a fifth operation. The four different operations each have a capacity of 10 units per hour, for a total capacity of 40 units per hour. However, the fifth operation can only process 30 units per hour. Consequently, the output of the system will only be 30 units per hour. If the other operations operate at capacity, a line of units waiting to be processed by the bottleneck operation will build up at the rate of 10 per hour.

image

page 204 

Here is another perspective. The following diagram illustrates a three-step process, with capacities of each step shown. However, the middle process, because its capacity is lower than that of the others, constrains the system to its capacity of 10 units per hour. Hence, it is a bottleneck. In order to increase the capacity of the entire process, it would be necessary to increase the capacity of this bottleneck operation. Note, though, that the potential for increasing the capacity of the process is only 5 units, to 15 units per hour. Beyond that, Operation 3’s capacity would limit process capacity to 15 units per hour.

4. Prepare to deal with capacity “chunks.” Capacity increases are often acquired in fairly large chunks rather than smooth increments, making it difficult to achieve a match between desired capacity and feasible capacity. For instance, the desired capacity of a certain operation may be 55 units per hour, but suppose that machines used for this operation are able to produce 40 units per hour each. One machine by itself would cause capacity to be 15 units per hour short of what is needed, but two machines would result in an excess capacity of 25 units per hour. The illustration becomes even more extreme if we shift the topic—to open-hearth furnaces or to the number of airplanes needed to provide a desired level of capacity.

5. Attempt to smooth out capacity requirements. Unevenness in capacity requirements also can create certain problems. For instance, during periods of inclement weather, public transportation ridership tends to increase substantially relative to periods of pleasant weather. Consequently, the system tends to alternate between underutilization and overutilization. Increasing the number of buses or subway cars will reduce the burden during periods of heavy demand, but this will aggravate the problem of overcapacity at other times and certainly add to the cost of operating the system.

We can trace the unevenness in demand for products and services to a variety of sources. The bus ridership problem is weather related to a certain extent, but demand could be considered to be partly random (i.e., varying because of chance factors). Still another source of varying demand is seasonality. Seasonal variations are generally easier to cope with than random variations because they are predictable. Consequently, management can make allowances in planning and scheduling activities and inventories. However, seasonal variations can still pose problems because of their uneven demands on the system: At certain times the page 205system will tend to be overloaded, while at other times it will tend to be underloaded. One possible approach to this problem is to identify products or services that have complementary demand patterns—that is, patterns that tend to offset each other. For instance, demand for snow skis and demand for water skis might complement each other: Demand for water skis is greater in the spring and summer months, and demand for snow skis is greater in the fall and winter months. The same might apply to heating and air-conditioning equipment. The ideal case is one in which products or services with complementary demand patterns involve the use of the same resources but at different times, so that overall capacity requirements remain fairly stable and inventory levels are minimized. Figure 5.3 illustrates complementary demand patterns.

image

Variability in demand can pose a problem for managers. Simply adding capacity by increasing the size of the operation (e.g., increasing the size of the facility, the workforce, or the amount of processing equipment) is not always the best approach, because that reduces flexibility and adds to fixed costs. Consequently, managers often choose to respond to higher than normal demand in other ways. One way is through the use of overtime work. Another way is to subcontract some of the work. A third way is to draw down finished goods inventories during periods of high demand and replenish them during periods of slow demand. These options and others are discussed in detail in the chapter on aggregate planning.

6. Identify the optimal operating level. Production units typically have an ideal or optimal level of operation in terms of unit cost of output. At the ideal level, cost per unit is the lowest for that production unit. If the output rate is less than the optimal level, increasing the output rate will result in decreasing average unit costs. This is known as economies of scale . However, if output is increased beyond the optimal level, average unit costs will become increasingly larger. This is known as diseconomies of scale . Figure 5.4 illustrates these concepts.

image

page 206 

Reasons for economies of scale include the following:

  • Fixed costs are spread over more units, reducing the fixed cost per unit.

  • Construction costs increase at a decreasing rate with respect to the size of the facility to be built.

  • Processing costs decrease as output rates increase because operations become more standardized, which reduces unit costs.

Reasons for diseconomies of scale include the following:

  • Distribution costs increase due to traffic congestion and shipping from one large centralized facility instead of several smaller, decentralized facilities.

  • Complexity increases costs; control and communication become more problematic.

  • Inflexibility can be an issue.

  • Additional levels of bureaucracy exist, slowing decision making and approvals for changes.

The explanation for the shape of the cost curve is that at low levels of output, the costs of facilities and equipment must be absorbed (paid for) by very few units. Hence, the cost per unit is high. As output is increased, there are more units to absorb the “fixed” cost of facilities and equipment, so unit costs decrease. However, beyond a certain point, unit costs will start to rise. To be sure, the fixed costs are spread over even more units, so that does not account for the increase, but other factors now become important: worker fatigue; equipment breakdowns; the loss of flexibility, which leaves less of a margin for error; and, generally, greater difficulty in coordinating operations.

Both optimal operating rate and the amount of the minimum cost tend to be a function of the general capacity of the operating unit. For example, as the general capacity of a plant increases, the optimal output rate increases and the minimum cost for the optimal rate decreases. Thus, larger plants tend to have higher optimal output rates and lower minimum costs than smaller plants. Figure 5.5 illustrates these points.

image

In choosing the capacity of an operating unit, management must take these relationships into account along with the availability of financial and other resources and forecasts of expected demand. To do this, it is necessary to determine enough points for each size facility to be able to make a comparison among different sizes. In some instances, facility sizes are givens, whereas in others, facility size is a continuous variable (i.e., any size can be selected). In the latter case, an ideal facility size can be selected. Usually, management must make a choice from given sizes, and none may have a minimum at the desired rate of output.

7. Choose a strategy if expansion is involved. Consider whether incremental expansion or single step is more appropriate. Factors include competitive pressures, market opportunities, costs and availability of funds, disruption of operations, and training requirements. Also, decide whether to lead or follow competitors. Leading is more risky, but it may have greater potential for rewards.

page 207 

5.10 CONSTRAINT MANAGEMENT

A constraint is something that limits the performance of a process or system in achieving its goals. Constraint management is often based on the work of Eli Goldratt ( The Theory of Constraints), and Eli Schragenheim and H. William Dettmer ( Manufacturing at Warp Speed). There are seven categories of constraints:

Market: Insufficient demand

Resource: Too little of one or more resources (e.g., workers, equipment, and space), as illustrated in Figure 5.2

Material: Too little of one or more materials

Financial: Insufficient funds

Supplier: Unreliable, long lead time, substandard quality

Knowledge or competency: Needed knowledge or skills missing or incomplete

Policy: Laws or regulations interfere

There may only be a few constraints, or there may be more than a few. Constraint issues can be resolved by using the following five steps: 1

  1. Identify the most pressing constraint. If it can easily be overcome, do so, and return to Step 1 for the next constraint. Otherwise, proceed to Step 2.

  2. Change the operation to achieve the maximum benefit, given the constraint. This may be a short-term solution.

  3. Make sure other portions of the process are supportive of the constraint (e.g., bottleneck operation).

  4. Explore and evaluate ways to overcome the constraint. This will depend on the type of constraint. For example, if demand is too low, advertising or price change may be an option. If capacity is the issue, working overtime, purchasing new equipment, and outsourcing are possible options. If additional funds are needed, working to improve cash flow, borrowing, and issuing stocks or bonds may be options. If suppliers are a problem, work with them, find more desirable suppliers, or do things in-house. If knowledge or skills are needed, seek training or consultants, or outsource. If laws or regulations are the issue, working with lawmakers or regulators may be an option.

  5. Repeat the process until the level of constraints is acceptable.

5.11 EVALUATING ALTERNATIVES

An organization needs to examine alternatives for future capacity from a number of different perspectives. Most obvious are economic considerations: Will an alternative be economically feasible? How much will it cost? How soon can we have it? What will operating and maintenance costs be? What will its useful life be? Will it be compatible with present personnel and present operations?

Less obvious, but nonetheless important, is possible negative public opinion. For instance, the decision to build a new power plant is almost sure to stir up reaction, whether the plant is gas-fired, hydroelectric, or nuclear. Any option that could disrupt lives and property is bound to generate hostile reactions. Construction of new facilities may necessitate moving personnel to a new location. Embracing a new technology may mean retraining some people and terminating some jobs. Relocation can cause unfavorable reactions, particularly if a town is about to lose a major employer. Conversely, community pressure in a new location may arise if the presence of the company is viewed unfavorably (noise, traffic, pollution).

page 208 

A number of techniques are useful for evaluating capacity alternatives from an economic standpoint. Some of the more common are cost–volume analysis, financial analysis, decision theory, and waiting-line analysis. Cost–volume analysis is described in this section. Financial analysis is mentioned briefly, decision analysis is described in the chapter supplement, and waiting-line analysis is described in Chapter 18.

Cost–Volume Analysis

Cost–volume analysis focuses on relationships between cost, revenue, and volume of output. The purpose of cost–volume analysis is to estimate the income of an organization under different operating conditions. It is particularly useful as a tool for comparing capacity alternatives.

Use of the technique requires identification of all costs related to the production of a given product. These costs are then designated as fixed costs or variable costs. Fixed costs tend to remain constant regardless of volume of output. Examples include rental costs, property taxes, equipment costs, heating and cooling expenses, and certain administrative costs. Variable costs vary directly with volume of output. The major components of variable costs are generally materials and labor costs. We will assume that variable cost per unit remains the same regardless of volume of output, and that all output can be sold.

Table 5.4 summarizes the symbols used in the cost–volume formulas.

TABLE 5.4

Cost–volume symbols

FC = Fixed cost

VC = Total variable cost

v = Variable cost per unit

TC = Total cost

TR = Total revenue

R = Revenue per unit

Q = Quantity or volume of output

Q BEP = Break-even quantity

P = Profit

The total cost associated with a given volume of output is equal to the sum of the fixed cost and the variable cost per unit times volume:

image

(5–4)

image

(5–5)

where v = variable cost per unit. Figure 5.6A shows the relationship between volume of output and fixed costs, total variable costs, and total (fixed plus variable) costs.

image

Revenue per unit, like variable cost per unit, is assumed to be the same regardless of quantity of output. Total revenue will have a linear relationship to output, as illustrated in Figure 5.6B. The total revenue associated with a given quantity of output, Q, is

image

(5–6)

Figure 5.6C describes the relationship between profit—which is the difference between total revenue and total (i.e., fixed plus variable) cost—and volume of output. The volume at which total cost and total revenue are equal is referred to as the break-even point (BEP) . When volume is less than the break-even point, there is a loss; when volume is greater than the break-even point, there is a profit. The greater the deviation from this point, the greater the profit or loss. Figure 5.6D shows total profit or loss relative to the break-even point. Figure 5.6D can be obtained from Figure 5.6C by drawing a horizontal line through the point where the total cost and total revenue lines intersect. Total profit can be computed using the formula

image

Rearranging terms, we have

image

(5–7)

The difference between revenue per unit and variable cost per unit, Rv, is known as the contribution margin.

The required volume, Q, needed to generate a specified profit is

image

(5–8)

A special case of this is the volume of output needed for total revenue to equal total cost. This is the break-even point, computed using the formula

page 209 

image

(5–9)

Different alternatives can be compared by plotting the profit lines for the alternatives, as shown in Figure 5.6E.

Figure 5.6E illustrates the concept of an indifference point : the quantity at which a decision maker would be indifferent between two competing alternatives. In this illustration, a quantity less than the point of indifference would favor choosing alternative B because its profit is higher in that range, while a quantity greater than the point of indifference would favor choosing alternative A.

Capacity alternatives may involve step costs, which are costs that increase stepwise as potential volume increases. For example, a firm may have the option of purchasing one, two, or three machines, with each additional machine increasing the fixed cost, although perhaps not linearly. (See Figure 5.7A.) Then, fixed costs and potential volume would depend on the number of machines purchased. The implication is that multiple break-even quantities may occur, possibly one for each range. Note, however, that the total revenue line might not intersect the fixed-cost line in a particular range, meaning that there would be no break-even point in that range. This possibility is illustrated in Figure 5.7B, where there is no break-even point in the first range. In order to decide how many machines to purchase, a manager must consider projected annual demand (volume) relative to the multiple break-even points and choose the most appropriate number of machines, as Example 4 shows.

image

Cost–volume analysis can be a valuable tool for comparing capacity alternatives if certain assumptions are satisfied:

  • One product is involved.

  • Everything produced can be sold.

  • The variable cost per unit is the same regardless of the volume.

  • Fixed costs do not change with volume changes, or they are step changes.

  • The revenue per unit is the same regardless of volume.

  • Revenue per unit exceeds variable cost per unit.

As with any quantitative tool, it is important to verify that the assumptions on which the technique is based are reasonably satisfied for a particular situation. For example, revenue per unit or variable cost per unit is not always constant. In addition, fixed costs may not be constant over the range of possible output. If demand is subject to random variations, one must take that into account in the analysis. Also, cost–volume analysis requires that fixed and variable costs can be separated, and this is sometimes exceedingly difficult to accomplish. Cost–volume analysis works best with one product or a few products that have the same cost characteristics.

A notable benefit of cost–volume considerations is the conceptual framework it provides for integrating cost, revenue, and profit estimates into capacity decisions. If a proposal looks attractive using cost–volume analysis, the next step would be to develop cash flow models to see how it fares with the addition of time and more flexible cost functions.

Financial Analysis

Operations personnel need to have the ability to do financial analysis. A problem that is universally encountered by managers is how to allocate scarce funds. A common approach is to use financial analysis to rank investment proposals, taking into account the time value of money.

Two important terms in financial analysis are cash flow and present value:

Cash flow refers to the difference between the cash received from sales (of goods or services) and other sources (e.g., sale of old equipment) and the cash outflow for labor, materials, overhead, and taxes.

Present value expresses in current value the sum of all future cash flows of an investment proposal.

The three most commonly used methods of financial analysis are payback, present value, and internal rate of return.

page 212 

Payback is a crude but widely used method that focuses on the length of time it will take for an investment to return its original cost. For example, an investment with an original cost of $6,000 and a monthly net cash flow of $1,000 has a payback period of six months.

Payback doesn’t take into account the time value of money. Its use is easier to rationalize for short-term paybacks than for long-term paybacks. The present value (PV) method does take the time value of money into account. It summarizes the initial cost of an investment, its estimated annual cash flows, and any expected salvage value in a single value called the equivalent current value, taking into account the time value of money (i.e., interest rates).

The internal rate of return (IRR) summarizes the initial cost, expected annual cash flows, and estimated future salvage value of an investment proposal in an equivalent interest rate. In other words, this method identifies the rate of return that equates the estimated future returns and the initial cost.

These techniques are appropriate when there is a high degree of certainty associated with estimates of future cash flows. In many instances, however, operations managers and other managers must deal with situations better described as risky or uncertain. When conditions of risk or uncertainty are present, decision theory is often applied.

Decision Theory

Decision theory is a helpful tool for financial comparison of alternatives under conditions of risk or uncertainty. It is suited to capacity decisions and to a wide range of other decisions managers must make. It involves identifying a set of possible future conditions that could influence results, listing alternative courses of action, and developing a financial outcome for each alternative–future condition combination. Decision theory is described in the supplement to this chapter.

Waiting-Line Analysis

Analysis of lines is often useful for designing or modifying service systems. Waiting lines have a tendency to form in a wide variety of service systems (e.g., airport ticket counters, telephone calls to a cable television company, hospital emergency rooms). The lines are symptoms of bottleneck operations. Analysis is useful in helping managers choose a capacity level that will be cost-effective through balancing the cost of having customers wait with the cost of providing additional capacity. It can aid in the determination of expected costs for various levels of service capacity.

This topic is described in Chapter 18.

Simulation

Simulation can be a useful tool in evaluating what-if scenarios, and is described on this book’s website.

page 213 

5.12 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

The strategic implications of capacity decisions can be enormous, impacting all areas of the organization. From an operations management standpoint, capacity decisions establish a set of conditions within which operations will be required to function. Hence, it is extremely important to include input from operations management people in making capacity decisions.

Flexibility can be a key issue in capacity decisions, although flexibility is not always an option, particularly in capital-intensive industries. However, where possible, flexibility allows an organization to be agile—that is, responsive to changes in the marketplace. Also, it reduces to a certain extent the dependence on long-range forecasts to accurately predict demand. And flexibility makes it easier for organizations to take advantage of technological and other innovations. Maintaining excess capacity (a capacity cushion) may provide a degree of flexibility, albeit at added cost.

Some organizations use a strategy of maintaining a capacity cushion for the purpose of blocking entry into the market by new competitors. The excess capacity enables them to produce at costs lower than what new competitors can. However, such a strategy means higher-than-necessary unit costs, and it makes it more difficult to cut back if demand slows, or to shift to new product or service offerings.

Efficiency improvements and utilization improvements can provide capacity increases. Such improvements can be achieved by streamlining operations and reducing waste. The chapter on lean operations describes ways for achieving those improvements.

Bottleneck management can be a way to increase effective capacity, by scheduling non-bottleneck operations to achieve maximum utilization of bottleneck operations.

In cases where capacity expansion will be undertaken, there are two strategies for determining the timing and degree of capacity expansion. One is the expand-early strategy (i.e., before demand materializes). The intent might be to achieve economies of scale, to expand market share, or to preempt competitors from expanding. The risks of this strategy include an oversupply that would drive prices down, and underutilized equipment that would result in higher unit costs.

The other approach is the wait-and-see strategy (i.e., to expand capacity only after demand materializes, perhaps incrementally). Its advantages include a lower chance of oversupply due to more accurate matching of supply and demand, and higher capacity utilization. The key risks are loss of market share and the inability to meet demand if expansion requires a long lead time.

In cases where capacity contraction will be undertaken, capacity disposal strategies become important. This can be the result of the need to replace aging equipment with newer equipment. It can also be the result of outsourcing and downsizing operations. The cost or benefit of asset disposal should be taken into account when contemplating these actions.

page 222 

5S.1 INTRODUCTION

Decision theory represents a general approach to decision making. It is suitable for a wide range of operations management decisions. Among them are capacity planning, product and service design, equipment selection, and location planning. Decisions that lend themselves to a decision theory approach tend to be characterized by the following elements:

  • A set of possible future conditions that will have a bearing on the results of the decision.

  • A list of alternatives for the manager to choose from.

  • A known payoff for each alternative under each possible future condition.

To use this approach, a decision maker would employ this process:

  1. Identify the possible future conditions (e.g., demand will be low, medium, or high; the competitor will or will not introduce a new product). These are called states of nature.

  2. Develop a list of possible alternatives, one of which may be to do nothing.

  3. Determine or estimate the payoff associated with each alternative for every possible future condition.

  4. If possible, estimate the likelihood of each possible future condition.

  5. Evaluate alternatives according to some decision criterion (e.g., maximize expected profit), and select the best alternative.

page 223 

The information for a decision is often summarized in a payoff table , which shows the expected payoffs for each alternative under the various possible states of nature. These tables are helpful in choosing among alternatives because they facilitate comparison of alternatives. Consider the following payoff table, which illustrates a capacity planning problem.

POssIBLE FUTURE DEMAND

Alternatives

Low

Moderate

High

Small facility

$10 *

$10

$10

Medium facility

 7

 12

 12

Large facility

(4)

  2

 16

*Present value in $ millions.

The payoffs are shown in the body of the table. In this instance, the payoffs are in terms of present values, which represent equivalent current dollar values of expected future income less costs. This is a convenient measure because it places all alternatives on a comparable basis. If a small facility is built, the payoff will be the same for all three possible states of nature. For a medium facility, low demand will have a present value of $7 million, whereas both moderate and high demand will have present values of $12 million. A large facility will have a loss of $4 million if demand is low, a present value of $2 million if demand is moderate, and a present value of $16 million if demand is high.

The problem for the decision maker is to select one of the alternatives, taking the present value into account.

Evaluation of the alternatives differs according to the degree of certainty associated with the possible future conditions.

5S.2 THE DECISION PROCESS AND CAUSES OF POOR DECISIONS

Despite the best efforts of a manager, a decision occasionally turns out poorly due to unforeseeable circumstances. Luckily, such occurrences are not common. Often, failures can be traced to a combination of mistakes in the decision process, to bounded rationality, or to  suboptimization.

The decision process consists of these steps:

  1. Identify the problem.

  2. Specify objectives and criteria for a solution.

  3. Develop suitable alternatives.

  4. Analyze and compare alternatives.

  5. Select the best alternative.

  6. Implement the solution.

  7. Monitor to see that the desired result is achieved.

In many cases, managers fail to appreciate the importance of each step in the decision-making process. They may skip a step or not devote enough effort to completing it before jumping to the next step. Sometimes this happens owing to a manager’s style of making quick decisions or a failure to recognize the consequences of a poor decision. The manager’s ego can be a factor. This sometimes happens when the manager has experienced a series of successes—important decisions that turned out right. Some managers then get the impression that they can do no wrong. But they soon run into trouble, which is usually enough to bring them back down to earth. Other managers seem oblivious to negative results and continue the process they associate with their previous successes, not recognizing that some of that success may have been due more to luck than to any special abilities of their own. A part of the page 224problem may be the manager’s unwillingness to admit a mistake. Yet other managers demonstrate an inability to make a decision; they stall long past the time when the decision should have been rendered.

Of course, not all managers fall into these traps—it seems safe to say that the majority do not. Even so, this does not necessarily mean that every decision works out as expected. Another factor with which managers must contend is bounded rationality , or the limits imposed on decision making by costs, human abilities, time, technology, and the availability of information. Because of these limitations, managers cannot always expect to reach decisions that are optimal in the sense of providing the best possible outcome (e.g., highest profit, least cost). Instead, they must often resort to achieving a satisfactory solution.

Still another cause of poor decisions is that organizations typically departmentalize decisions. Naturally, there is a great deal of justification for the use of departments in terms of overcoming span-of-control problems and human limitations. However, suboptimization can occur. This is a result of different departments’ attempts to reach a solution that is optimum for each. Unfortunately, what is optimal for one department may not be optimal for the organization as a whole. If you are familiar with the theory of constraints (see Chapter 16), suboptimization and local optima are conceptually the same, with the same negative consequences.

5S.3 DECISION ENVIRONMENTS

Operations management decision environments are classified according to the degree of certainty present. There are three basic categories: certainty, risk, and uncertainty.

Certainty means that relevant parameters—such as costs, capacity, and demand—have known values.

Risk means that certain parameters have probabilistic outcomes.

Uncertainty means that it is impossible to assess the likelihood of various possible future events.

Consider these situations:

  1. Profit per unit is $5. You have an order for 200 units. How much profit will you make? (This is an example of certainty because unit profits and total demand are known.)

  2. Profit is $5 per unit. Based on previous experience, there is a 50 percent chance of an order for 100 units and a 50 percent chance of an order for 200 units. What is expected profit? (This is an example of risk because demand outcomes are probabilistic.)

  3. Profit is $5 per unit. The probabilities of potential demands are unknown. (This is an example of uncertainty.)

The importance of these different decision environments is that they require different analysis techniques. Some techniques are better suited for one category than for others.

5S.4 DECISION MAKING UNDER CERTAINTY

When it is known for certain which of the possible future conditions will actually happen, the decision is usually relatively straightforward: Simply choose the alternative that has the best payoff under that state of nature. Example 5S–1 illustrates this.

5S.5 DECISION MAKING UNDER UNCERTAINTY

At the opposite extreme is complete uncertainty: No information is available on how likely the various states of nature are. Under those conditions, four possible decision criteria are maximin, maximax, Laplace, and minimax regret. These approaches can be defined as follows:

Maximin —Determine the worst possible payoff for each alternative, and choose the alternative that has the “best worst.” The maximin approach is essentially a pessimistic one because it takes into account only the worst possible outcome for each alternative. The actual outcome may not be as bad as that, but this approach establishes a “guaranteed minimum.”

Maximax —Determine the best possible payoff, and choose the alternative with that payoff. The maximax approach is an optimistic, “go for it” strategy; it does not take into account any payoff other than the best.

Laplace —Determine the average payoff for each alternative, and choose the alternative with the best average. The Laplace approach treats the states of nature as equally likely.

Minimax regret —Determine the worst regret for each alternative, and choose the alternative with the “best worst.” This approach seeks to minimize the difference between the payoff that is realized and the best payoff for each state of nature.

The next two examples illustrate these decision criteria.

Solved Problem 6 at the end of this supplement illustrates decision making under uncertainty when the payoffs represent costs.

The main weakness of these approaches (except for Laplace) is that they do not take into account all of the payoffs. Instead, they focus on the worst or best, and so they lose some information. Still, for a given set of circumstances, each has certain merits that can be helpful to a decision maker.

page 227 

5S.6 DECISION MAKING UNDER RISK

Between the two extremes of certainty and uncertainty lies the case of risk: The probability of occurrence for each state of nature is known. (Note that because the states are mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive, these probabilities must add to 1.00.) A widely used approach under such circumstances is the expected monetary value criterion. The expected value is computed for each alternative, and the one with the best expected value is selected. The expected value is the sum of the payoffs for an alternative where each payoff is weighted by the probability for the relevant state of nature. Thus, the approach is:

Expected monetary value (EMV) criterion— Determine the expected payoff of each alternative, and choose the alternative that has the best expected payoff.

The expected monetary value approach is most appropriate when a decision maker is neither risk averse nor risk seeking, but is risk neutral. Typically, well-established organizations with numerous decisions of this nature tend to use expected value because it provides an indication of the long-run, average payoff. That is, the expected-value amount (e.g., $10.5 million in the last example) is not an actual payoff but an expected or average amount that would be approximated if a large number of identical decisions were to be made. Hence, if a decision maker applies this criterion to a large number of similar decisions, the expected payoff for the total will approximate the sum of the individual expected payoffs.

5S.7 DECISION TREES

In health care, the array of treatment options and medical costs makes tools such as decision trees particularly valuable in diagnosing and prescribing treatment plans. For example, if a 20-year-old and a 50-year-old both are brought into an emergency room complaining of chest pains, the attending physician, after asking each some questions on family history, patient history, general health, and recent events and activities, will use a decision tree to sort through the options to arrive at the appropriate decision for each patient.

Decision trees are tools that have many practical applications, not only in health care but also in legal cases and a wide array of management decision making, including credit card fraud; loan, credit, and insurance risk analysis; decisions on new product or service development; and location analysis.

A decision tree is a schematic representation of the alternatives available to a decision maker and their possible consequences. The term gets its name from the treelike appearance of the diagram (see Figure 5S.1). Although tree diagrams can be used in place of a payoff table, they are particularly useful for analyzing situations that involve sequential decisions. page 228For instance, a manager may initially decide to build a small facility only to discover that demand is much higher than anticipated. In this case, the manager may then be called upon to make a subsequent decision on whether to expand or build an additional facility.

A decision tree is composed of a number of nodes that have branches emanating from them (see Figure 5S.1). Square nodes denote decision points, and circular nodes denote chance events. Read the tree from left to right. Branches leaving square nodes represent alternatives; branches leaving circular nodes represent chance events (i.e., the possible states of nature).

image

After the tree has been drawn, it is analyzed from right to left; that is, starting with the last decision that might be made. For each decision, choose the alternative that will yield the greatest return (or the lowest cost). If chance events follow a decision, choose the alternative that has the highest expected monetary value (or lowest expected cost).

5S.8 EXPECTED VALUE OF PERFECT INFORMATION

In certain situations, it is possible to ascertain which state of nature will actually occur in the future. For instance, the choice of location for a restaurant may weigh heavily on whether a new highway will be constructed or whether a zoning permit will be issued. A decision maker may have probabilities for these states of nature; however, it may be possible to delay a decision until it is clear which state of nature will occur. This might involve taking an option to buy the land. If the state of nature is favorable, the option can be exercised; if it is unfavorable, the option can be allowed to expire. The question to consider is whether the cost of the option will be less than the expected gain due to delaying the decision (i.e., the expected payoff above the expected value). The expected gain is the expected value of perfect information (EVPI) .

Other possible ways of obtaining perfect information depend somewhat on the nature of the decision being made. Information about consumer preferences might come from market research, additional information about a product could come from product testing, or legal experts might be called on.

There are two ways to determine the EVPI. One is to compute the expected payoff under certainty and subtract the expected payoff under risk. That is,

image

(5S-1)

page 230 

A second approach is to use the regret table to compute the EVPI. To do this, find the expected regret for each alternative. The minimum expected regret is equal to the EVPI.

5S.9 SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS

Generally speaking, both the payoffs and the probabilities in this kind of a decision problem are estimated values. Consequently, it can be useful for the decision maker to have some indication of how sensitive the choice of an alternative is to changes in one or more of these values. Unfortunately, it is impossible to consider all possible combinations of every variable in a typical problem. Nevertheless, there are certain things a decision maker can do to judge the sensitivity of probability estimates.

Sensitivity analysis provides a range of probability over which the choice of alternatives would remain the same. The approach illustrated here is useful when there are page 231two states of nature. It involves constructing a graph and then using algebra to determine a range of probabilities for which a given solution is best. In effect, the graph provides a visual indication of the range of probability over which the various alternatives are optimal, and the algebra provides exact values of the endpoints of the ranges. Example 5S–8 illustrates the procedure.

The graph shows the range of values of P(2) over which each alternative is optimal. Thus, for low values of P(2) [and thus high values of P(1), since P(1) + P(2) = 1.0], alternative B will have the highest expected value; for intermediate values of P(2), alternative C is best; and for higher values of P(2), alternative A is best.

To find exact values of the ranges, determine where the upper parts of the lines intersect. Note that at the intersections, the two alternatives represented by the lines would be equivalent in terms of expected value. Hence, the decision maker would be indifferent between the two at that point. To determine the intersections, you must obtain the equation of each line. This is relatively simple to do. Because these are straight lines, they have the form y = a + bx, where a is the y-intercept value at the left axis, b is the slope of the line, and x is P(2). Slope is defined as the change in y for a one-unit change in x. In this type of page 232problem, the distance between the two vertical axes is 1.0. Consequently, the slope of each line is equal to the right-hand value minus the left-hand value. The slopes and equations are as follows:

From the graph, we can see that alternative B is best from P(2) = 0 to the point where that straight line intersects the straight line of alternative C, and that begins the region where C is better. To find that point, solve for the value of P(2) at their intersection. This requires setting the two equations equal to each other and solving for P(2). Thus,

image

Rearranging terms yields

image

Solving yields P(2) = .40. Thus, alternative B is best from P(2) = 0 up to P(2) = .40. B and C are equivalent at P(2) = .40.

Alternative C is best from that point until its line intersects alternative A’s line. To find that intersection, set those two equations equal and solve for P(2). Thus,

image

Rearranging terms results in

image

Solving yields P(2) = .67. Thus, alternative C is best from P(2) > .40 up to P(2) = .67, where A and C are equivalent. For values of P(2) greater than .67 up to P(2) = 1.0, A is best.

Note: If a problem calls for ranges with respect to P(1), find the P(2) ranges as above, and then subtract each P(2) from 1.00 (e.g., .40 becomes .60, and .67 becomes .33).

page 244 

page 245 

page 246 

6.1 INTRODUCTION

Process selection refers to deciding on the way production of goods or services will be organized. It has major implications for capacity planning, layout of facilities, equipment, and design of work systems. Process selection occurs as a matter of course when new products or services are being planned. However, it also occurs periodically due to technological changes in products or equipment, as well as competitive pressures. Figure 6.1 provides an overview of where process selection and capacity planning fit into system design. Forecasts, product and service design, and technological considerations all influence capacity planning and process selection. Moreover, capacity and process selection are interrelated, and are often done in concert. They, in turn, affect facility and equipment choices, layout, and work design.

image

How an organization approaches process selection is determined by the organization’s process strategy. Key aspects include:

  • Capital intensity: The mix of equipment and labor that will be used by the organization.

  • Process flexibility: The degree to which the system can be adjusted to changes in processing requirements due to such factors as changes in product or service design, changes in volume processed, and changes in technology.

6.2 PROCESS SELECTION

Process choice is demand-driven. The two key questions in process selection are:

  1. How much variety will the process need to be able to handle?

  2. How much volume will the process need to be able to handle?

Answers to these questions will serve as a guide to selecting an appropriate process. Usually, volume and variety are inversely related; a higher level of one means a lower level of the other. However, the need for flexibility of personnel and equipment is directly related to the level of variety the process will need to handle: The lower the variety, the less the need for flexibility, while the higher the variety, the greater the need for flexibility. For example, if a worker’s job in a bakery is to make cakes, both the equipment and the worker will do the same thing day after day, with little need for flexibility. But if the worker has to make cakes, pies, cookies, brownies, and croissants, both the worker and the equipment must have the flexibility to be able to handle the different requirements of each type of product.

There is another aspect of variety that is important. Variety means either having dedicated operations for each different product or service, or if not, having to get equipment ready every time there is the need to change the product being produced or the service being provided.

page 247 

Process Types

There are five basic process types: job shop, batch, repetitive, continuous, and project.

Job Shop. A job shop usually operates on a relatively small scale. It is used when a low volume of high-variety goods or services will be needed. Processing is intermittent; work includes small jobs, each with somewhat different processing requirements. High flexibility using general-purpose equipment and skilled workers are important characteristics of a job shop. A manufacturing example of a job shop is a tool and die shop that is able to produce one-of-a-kind tools. A service example is a veterinarian’s office, which is able to process many types of animals and a variety of injuries and diseases.

Batch. Batch processing is used when a moderate volume of goods or services is desired, and it can handle a moderate variety in products or services. The equipment need not be as flexible as in a job shop, but processing is still intermittent. The skill level of workers doesn’t need to be as high as in a job shop because there is less variety in the jobs being processed. Examples of batch systems include bakeries, which make bread, cakes, or cookies in batches; movie theaters, which show movies to groups (batches) of people; and airlines, which carry planeloads (batches) of people from airport to airport. Other examples of products that lend themselves to batch production are paint, ice cream, soft drinks, beer, magazines, and books. Other examples of services include plays, concerts, music videos, radio and television programs, and public address announcements.

page 248 

Repetitive. When higher volumes of more standardized goods or services are needed, repetitive processing is used. The standardized output means only slight flexibility of equipment is needed. Skill of workers is generally low. Examples of this type of system include production lines and assembly lines. Sometimes these terms are used interchangeably, although assembly lines generally involve the last stages of an assembled product. Familiar products made by these systems include automobiles, television sets, smartphones, and computers. An example of a service system is an automatic carwash. Other examples of service include cafeteria lines and ticket collectors at sports events and concerts. Also, mass customization is an option.

Continuous. When a very high volume of nondiscrete, highly standardized output is desired, a continuous system is used. These systems have almost no variety in output and, hence, no need for equipment flexibility. Workers’ skill requirements can range from low to high, depending on the complexity of the system and the expertise that workers need. Generally, if equipment is highly specialized, worker skills can be lower. Examples of nondiscrete products made in continuous systems include petroleum products, steel, sugar, flour, and salt. Continuous services include air monitoring, supplying electricity to homes and businesses, and the internet.

These process types are found in a wide range of manufacturing and service settings. The ideal is to have process capabilities match product or service requirements. Failure to do so can result in inefficiencies and higher costs than are necessary, perhaps creating a competitive disadvantage. Table 6.1 provides a brief description of each process type, along with the advantages and disadvantages of each.

TABLE 6.1

Types of processing

Figure 6.2 provides an overview of these four process types in the form of a matrix, with an example for each process type. Note that job variety, process flexibility, and unit cost are highest for a job shop and get progressively lower moving from job shop to continuous processing. Conversely, volume of output is lowest for a job shop and gets progressively higher moving from job shop to continuous processing. Note, too, that the examples fall along the diagonal. The implication is that the diagonal represents the ideal choice of processing system for a given set of circumstances. For example, if the goal is to be able to process a small volume of jobs that will involve high variety, job shop processing is most appropriate. For less variety and a higher volume, a batch system would be most appropriate, and so on. Note that combinations far from the diagonal would not even be considered, such as using a job shop for high-volume, low-variety jobs, or continuous processing for low-volume, high-variety jobs, because that would result in either higher than necessary costs or lost opportunities.

image

Another consideration is that products and services often go through life cycles that begin with low volume, which increases as products or services become better known. When that happens, a manager must know when to shift from one type of process (e.g., job shop) to the next (e.g., batch). Of course, some operations remain at a certain level (e.g., magazine publishing), while others increase (or decrease as markets become saturated) over time. Again, it is important for a manager to assess his or her products and services and make a judgment on whether to plan for changes in processing over time.

All of these process types (job shop, batch, repetitive, and continuous) are typically ongoing operations. However, some situations are not ongoing but instead are of limited duration. In such instances, the work is often organized as a project.

page 249 

Project. A project is used for work that is nonroutine, with a unique set of objectives to be accomplished in a limited time frame. Examples range from simple to complicated, including such things as putting on a play, consulting, making a motion picture, launching a new product or service, publishing a book, building a dam, and building a bridge. Equipment flexibility and worker skills can range from low to high.

The type of process or processes used by an organization influences a great many activities of the organization. Table 6.2 briefly describes some of those influences.

TABLE 6.2

Process choice affects numerous activities/functions

Process type also impacts supply chain requirements. Repetitive and continuous processes require steady inputs of high-volume goods and services. Delivery reliability in terms of quality and timing is essential. Job shop and batch processing may mean that suppliers have to be able to deal with varying order quantities and timing of orders. In some instances, seasonality is a factor, so suppliers must be able to handle periodic large demand.

The processes discussed do not always exist in their “pure” forms. It is not unusual to find hybrid processes—processes that have elements of other process types embedded in them. For instance, companies that operate primarily in a repetitive mode, or a continuous mode, will often have repair shops (i.e., job shops) to fix or make new parts for equipment that fails. Also, if volume increases for some items, an operation that began, say, in a job shop or as a batch mode may evolve into a batch or repetitive operation. This may result in having some operations in a job shop or batch mode, and others in a repetitive mode.

page 250 

Product and Service Profiling

Process selection can involve substantial investment in equipment and have a very specific influence on the layout of facilities, which also require heavy investment. Moreover, mismatches between operations capabilities and market demand and pricing or cost strategies can have a significant negative impact on the ability of the organization to compete or, in government agencies, to effectively service clients. Therefore, it is highly desirable to assess the page 252degree of correlation between various process choices and market conditions before making process choices in order to achieve an appropriate matching.

Product or service profiling can be used to avoid any inconsistencies by identifying key product or service dimensions and then selecting appropriate processes. Key dimensions often relate to the range of products or services that will be processed, expected order sizes, pricing strategies, expected frequency of schedule changes, and order-winning requirements.

Sustainable Production of Goods and Services

Business organizations are facing increasing pressure from a variety of sources to operate sustainable production processes. According to the Lowell Center for Sustainable Production ( http://sustainableproduction.org), “Sustainable Production is the creation of goods and services using processes and systems that are: non-polluting; conserving of energy and natural resources; economically efficient; safe and healthful for workers, communities, and consumers; and socially and creatively rewarding for all working people.” To achieve this, the Lowell Center advocates designing and operating processes in ways that:

  • “wastes and ecologically incompatible byproducts are reduced, eliminated or recycled on-site;

  • chemical substances or physical agents and conditions that present hazards to human health or the environment are eliminated;

  • energy and materials are conserved, and the forms of energy and materials used are most appropriate for the desired ends; and

  • work spaces are designed to minimize or eliminate chemical, ergonomic and physical hazard.”

To achieve these goals, business organizations must focus on a number of factors that include energy use and efficiency, CO 2 (carbon footprint) and toxic emissions, waste generation, lighting, heating, cooling, ventilation, noise and vibration, and worker health and safety.

Lean Process Design

Lean process design is guided by general principles that are discussed more fully in a later chapter. One principle of particular interest here is waste reduction, which relates to sustainability objectives. Lean design also focuses on variance reduction in workload over the entire process to achieve level production and thereby improve process flow. Successful lean design results in reduced inventory and floor space; quicker response times and shorter lead times; reduced defects, rework, and scrap; and increased productivity. Lean design is often translated into practice using cellular layouts, which are discussed later in this chapter.

Lean process design has broad applications in seemingly diverse areas such as health care delivery systems, manufacturing, construction projects, and process reengineering.

6.3 TECHNOLOGY

Technology and technological innovation often have a major influence on business processes. Technological innovation refers to the discovery and development of new or improved products, services, or processes for producing or providing them. Technology refers to applications of scientific knowledge to the development and improvement of goods and services and/or the processes that produce or provide them. The term high technology refers to the most advanced and developed equipment and/or methods.

Process technology and information technology can have a major impact on costs, productivity, and competitiveness. Process technology includes methods, procedures, and equipment used to produce goods and provide services. This not only involves processes within an organization, it also extends to supply chain processes. Information technology (IT) is the science and use of computers and other electronic equipment to store, process, and send information. IT is page 253heavily ingrained in today’s business operations. This includes electronic data processing, the use of bar codes and radio frequency tags to identify and track goods, devices used to obtain point-of-sale information, data transmission, the internet, e-commerce, e-mail, and more.

With radio frequency (RFID) tags, items can be tracked during production and in inventory. For outbound goods, readers at a packing station can verify that the proper items and quantities were picked before shipping the goods to a customer or a distribution center. In a hospital setting, RFID tags can be used in several ways. One is to facilitate keeping accurate track of hospital garments, automating the process by which clean garments are inventoried and disbursed. An RFID tag can be worn by each hospital employee. The tag contains a unique ID number which is associated with each wearer. When an employee comes to the counter to pick up garments, the employee’s tag is scanned and software generates data regarding garment, type, size, location on racks, and availability for that employee. The garments are then picked from the specified racks, their RFID tag is read by a nearby scanner and processed, and the database is automatically updated.

Technological innovation in processing technology can produce tremendous benefits for organizations by increasing quality, lowering costs, increasing productivity, and expanding processing capabilities. Among the examples are laser technology used in surgery and laser measuring devices, advances in medical diagnostic equipment, high-speed internet connections, high-definition television, online banking, information retrieval systems, and high-speed search engines. Processing technologies often come through acquisition rather than through internal efforts of an organization.

While process technology can have enormous benefits, it also carries substantial risk unless a significant effort is made to fully understand both the downside and the upside of a particular technology. It is essential to understand what the technology will and won’t do. Also, there are economic considerations (initial cost, space, cash flow, maintenance, consultants), integration considerations (cost, time, resources), and human considerations (training, safety, job loss).

Automation

An increasingly asked question in process design is whether to automate. Automation is machinery that has sensing and control devices that enable it to operate automatically. If a company decides to automate, the next question is how much. Automation can range from factories that are completely automated to a single automated operation.

Automated services are becoming increasingly important. Examples range from automated teller machines (ATMs) to automated heating and air conditioning and include automated inspection, automated storage and retrieval systems, package sorting, mail processing, e-mail, online banking, and E-Z pass.

Automation offers a number of advantages over human labor. It has low variability, whereas it is difficult for a human to perform a task in exactly the same way, in the same amount of time, and on a repetitive basis. In a production setting, variability is detrimental to quality and to meeting schedules. Moreover, machines do not get bored or distracted, nor do they go on strike, ask for higher wages, or file labor grievances. Still another advantage of automation is the reduction of variable costs. In order for automated processing to be an option, job-processing requirements must be standardized (i.e., have very little or no variety).

Both manufacturing and service organizations are increasing their use of automation as a way to reduce costs, increase productivity, and improve quality and consistency.

Automation is frequently touted as a strategy necessary for competitiveness. However, automation also has certain disadvantages and limitations compared to human labor. To begin with, it can be costly. Technology is expensive; usually it requires high volumes of output to offset high costs. In addition, automation is much less flexible than human labor. Once a process has been automated, there are substantial reasons for not changing it. Moreover, workers sometimes fear automation because it might cause them to lose their jobs. This can have an adverse effect on morale and productivity.

Decision makers must carefully examine the issue of whether to automate, or the degree to which to automate, so they clearly understand all the ramifications. Also, much thought and page 254careful planning are necessary to successfully integrate automation into a production system. Otherwise, it can lead to major problems. Automation has important implications not only for cost and flexibility, but also for the fit with overall strategic priorities. If the decision is made to automate, care must be taken to remove waste from the system prior to automating, to avoid building the waste into the automated system. Table 6.3 has a list of questions for organizations that are considering automation.

TABLE 6.3

Automation questions

  1. What level of automation is appropriate? (Some operations are more suited to being automated than others, so partial automation can be an option.)

  2. How would automation affect the flexibility of an operation system?

  3. How can automation projects be justified?

  4. How should changes be managed?

  5. What are the risks of automating?

  6. What are some of the likely effects of implementing automation on market share, costs, quality, customer satisfaction, labor relations, and ongoing operations?

Generally speaking, there are three kinds of automation: fixed, programmable, and flexible.

Fixed automation is the least flexible. It uses high-cost, specialized equipment for a fixed sequence of operations. Low cost and high volume are its primary advantages; minimal variety and the high cost of making major changes in either product or process are its primary limitations.

Programmable automation involves the use of high-cost, general-purpose equipment controlled by a computer program that provides both the sequence of operations and specific details about each operation. This type of automation has the capability of economically producing a fairly wide variety of low-volume products in small batches. Numerically controlled (N/C) machines and some robots are applications of programmable automation.

Computer-aided manufacturing (CAM) refers to the use of computers in process control, ranging from robots to automated quality control. Numerically controlled (N/C) machines are programmed to follow a set of processing instructions based on mathematical relationships that tell the machine the details of the operations to be performed. The instructions are stored on a device such as a microprocessor. Although N/C machines have been used for many years, they are an important part of new approaches to manufacturing. Individual machines often have their own computer; this is referred to as computerized numerical control (CNC). Or one computer may control a number of N/C machines, which is referred to as direct numerical control (DNC).

N/C machines are best used in cases where parts are processed frequently and in small batches, where part geometry is complex, close tolerances are required, mistakes are costly, and there is the possibility of frequent changes in design. The main limitations of N/C page 255machines are the higher skill levels needed to program the machines and their inability to detect tool wear and material variation.

The use of robots in manufacturing is sometimes an option. Robots can handle a wide variety of tasks, including welding, assembly, loading and unloading of machines, painting, and testing. They relieve humans from heavy or dirty work and often eliminate drudgery tasks.

Some uses of robots are fairly simple, others are much more complex. At the lowest level are robots that follow a fixed set of instructions. Next are programmable robots, which can repeat a set of movements after being led through the sequence. These robots “play back” a mechanical sequence much as a video recorder plays back a visual sequence. At the next level up are robots that follow instructions from a computer. Below are robots that can recognize objects and make certain simple decisions.

Still another form of robots are collaborative robots (also known as cobots) that are designed to work collaboratively with humans. The collaborative application of robotics enables humans and robots to work together safely and effectively, augmenting the capabilities of their human counterparts, achieving results neither could do alone. Cobots are designed with multiple advanced sensors, software, and end of arm tooling that help them quickly and easily sense and adapt to anything that comes into their work space. They also have the ability to detect any abnormal force applied to their joints while in motion. These robots can be programmed to respond immediately by stopping or reversing positions when they come into contact with a human.

Flexible automation evolved from programmable automation. It uses equipment that is more customized than that of programmable automation. A key difference between the two is that flexible automation requires significantly less changeover time. This permits almost continuous operation of equipment and product variety without the need to produce in batches.

In practice, flexible automation is used in several different formats.

A flexible manufacturing system (FMS) is a group of machines that include supervisory computer control, automatic material handling, and robots or other automated processing equipment. Reprogrammable controllers enable these systems to produce a variety of similar products. Systems may range from three or four machines to more than a dozen. They are designed to handle intermittent processing requirements with some of the benefits of automation and some of the flexibility of individual, or stand-alone, machines (e.g., N/C machines). Flexible manufacturing systems offer reduced labor costs and more consistent quality when compared with more traditional manufacturing methods, lower capital investment and higher page 256flexibility than “hard” automation, and relatively quick changeover time. Flexible manufacturing systems often appeal to managers who hope to achieve both the flexibility of job shop processing and the productivity of repetitive processing systems.

Although these are important benefits, an FMS also has certain limitations. One is that this type of system can handle a relatively narrow range of part variety, so it must be used for a family of similar parts, which all require similar machining. Also, an FMS requires longer planning and development times than more conventional processing equipment because of its increased complexity and cost. Furthermore, companies sometimes prefer a gradual approach to automation, and FMS represents a sizable chunk of technology.

Computer-integrated manufacturing (CIM) is a system that uses an integrating computer system to link a broad range of manufacturing activities, including engineering design, flexible manufacturing systems, purchasing, order processing, and production planning and control. Not all elements are absolutely necessary. For instance, CIM might be as simple as linking two or more FMSs by a host computer. More encompassing systems can link scheduling, purchasing, inventory control, shop control, and distribution. In effect, a CIM system integrates information from other areas of an organization with manufacturing.

The overall goal of using CIM is to link various parts of an organization to achieve rapid response to customer orders and/or product changes, to allow rapid production, and to reduce indirect labor costs.

A shining example of how process choices can lead to competitive advantages can be found at Allen-Bradley’s computer-integrated manufacturing process in Milwaukee, Wisconsin. The company converted a portion of its factory to a fully automated “factory within a factory” to assemble contacts and relays for electrical motors. A handful of humans operate the factory, although once an order has been entered into the system, the machines do virtually all the work, including packaging and shipping, and quality control. Any defective items are removed from the line, and replacement parts are automatically ordered and scheduled to compensate for the defective items. The humans program the machines, monitor operations, and attend to any problems signaled by a system of warning lights.

page 257 

As orders come into the plant, computers determine production requirements and schedules and order the necessary parts. Bar-coded labels that contain processing instructions are automatically placed on individual parts. As the parts approach a machine, a sensing device reads the bar code and communicates the processing instructions to the machine. The factory can produce 600 units an hour.

The company has realized substantial competitive advantages from the system. Orders can be completed and shipped within 24 hours of entry into the system, indirect labor costs and inventory costs have been greatly reduced, and quality is very high.

The Internet of Things (IoT). The internet of things is the extension of internet connectivity into devices such as cell phones, vehicles, audio and video device, and much more, some of which you are probably familiar with. These devices can send and receive information with others over the internet. Industrial use of the IoT will have a major impact on manufacturing and the global economy with intelligence that augments human capabilities. Applications involve AI (artificial intelligence) machine learning, quality and productivity improvement, and predictive maintenance.

3D Printing

A 3D printer is a type of industrial robot that is controlled using computer-assisted design (CAD). 3D printing , also known as additive manufacturing, involves processes that create three-dimensional objects by applying successive layers of materials to create the objects. The objects can be of almost any size or shape. These processes are different than many familiar processes that use subtractive manufacturing to create objects: Material is removed by methods such as cutting, grinding, sanding, drilling, and milling. Also, producing an object using 3D printing is generally much slower than the time needed using more conventional techniques in a factory setting.

In early applications, material was deposited onto a powder bed using inkjet printer heads—hence, the name 3D printing. Today, the term 3D printing refers to a wide range of techniques such as extrusion (the deformation of either metal or plastic forced under pressure through a die to create a shape) and sintering (using heat or pressure or both to form a solid material from powder without causing it to liquefy).

page 258 

3D printers come in a wide variety of sizes and shapes. Some printers look very much like a microwave oven, while others look completely different.

The use of 3D scanning technologies allows the replication of objects without the use of molds. That can be beneficial in cases where molding techniques are difficult or costly, or where contact with substances used in molding processes could harm the original item. 3D objects can also be created from photographs of an existing object. That involves taking a series of photographs of the object (usually about 20) from various angles in order to capture adequate detail of the object for reproduction.

It is possible that in the long term, 3D printing technologies could have a significant impact on where and how production occurs and on supply chains.

Applications. Commercial applications of 3D printing are occurring in a wide array of businesses, and also have a few consumer applications, some of which are shown in Table 6.4.

TABLE 6.4

Some examples of applications of 3D technology

Industrial Applications

Mass customization: Customers can create unique designs for standard goods (e.g., cell phone cases)

Distributed manufacturing: Local 3D printing centers that can produce goods on demand for pickup

Computers: Computers, motherboards, other parts

Robots: Robots and robot parts

Rapid prototyping: Rapid fabrication of a scale model of a physical part or assembly

Rapid manufacturing: Inexpensive production of one or a small number of items

Medical devices: Prosthetics

Dental: Crowns, implants

Pharmaceutical: Pills and medicines

Food products: Candy, chocolate, crackers, and pasta

Apparel: Custom-designed footwear, eyeglass frames

Space exploration: Tools and parts can be made on the international space station as needed instead of incurring the cost and time needed to transport them from earth

Vehicles: Automotive parts, and replacement parts at repair shops; airplane parts and spare parts; also, combine multiple parts into a single part

Construction: Architectural scale models

Consumer Applications

Hobbyists: Models, parts, and replacement parts (e.g., for drones)

Appliances and tools: Replacement parts

Benefits. Although 3D printing is unlikely to replace more widespread forms of high-volume production in the foreseeable future, it does offer an alternate form of production that provides value in a wide range of applications, even in high-volume systems. In some of those applications, manufacturers have been able to substantially reduce the cost and/or time needed to develop or produce items. Among the examples is production of replacement parts in the case of equipment failure when no spare parts are available. Replacement occurs much faster than the time it would take to receive the part from a supplier, thereby avoiding costly production delays. Other examples include economical production of small quantities of items, and the avoidance of shipping costs and time when the application is not near a supplier.

Advances in 3D printing and reduced costs have fueled a growth in on-demand and micro-manufacturing. On-demand production is not only attractive to customers who want page 259customization, it also reduces inventory needs, and hence, storage space and costs. Additional benefits are increased agility and a reduction in the need for end-item forecasts.

3D printing will become even more useful through development in three areas: printers and printing methods, software to design and print, and materials used in printing.

Drones

Drones are unmanned aircraft, usually small, and remotely controlled or programmed to fly to a specific location. An important benefit is providing an “eye-in-the sky” to obtain visual detail in places that are hazardous to humans or that are not readily accessible. For example, drones are proving to be very helpful in assessing storm and earthquake damage, especially in situations where access by vehicles or on foot is difficult or impossible due to the terrain, debris, or where roads or bridges are impassible. They are also useful for assessing crop damage, monitoring forest fires, and inspecting pipelines, cell towers, railroad tracks, and power lines. In addition, when medicines and medical supplies are urgently needed in remote areas, drones can be used to deliver them. Despite these many benefits, the use of drones poses a number of issues. There is the possibility of collisions with other drones, power lines, birds, or other objects, as well as mechanical failure or operator error, any of which can result in failure to accomplish the intended task. In addition, crashes have the potential to injure nearby humans or cause damage to property.

page 260 

6.4 PROCESS STRATEGY

Throughout this book, the importance of flexibility as a competitive strategy is stressed. However, flexibility does not always offer the best choice in processing decisions. Flexible systems and equipment are often more expensive and not as efficient as less flexible alternatives. In certain instances, flexibility is unnecessary because products are in mature stages, requiring few design changes, and there is a steady volume of output. Ordinarily, this type of situation calls for specialized processing equipment, with no need for flexibility. The implication is clear: Flexibility should be adopted with great care; its applications should be matched with situations in which a need for flexibility clearly exists.

In practice, decision makers choose flexible systems for either of two reasons: Demand variety or uncertainty exists about demand. The second reason can be overcome through improved forecasting.

6.5 STRATEGIC RESOURCE ORGANIZATION: FACILITIES LAYOUT

Layout refers to the configuration of departments, work centers, and equipment, with particular emphasis on movement of work (customers or materials) through the system. This section describes the main types of layout designs and the models used to evaluate design alternatives.

As in other areas of system design, layout decisions are important for three basic reasons: (1) they require substantial investments of money and effort; (2) they involve long-term commitments, which makes mistakes difficult to overcome; and (3) they have a significant impact on the cost and efficiency of operations.

The need for layout planning arises both in the process of designing new facilities and in redesigning existing facilities. The most common reasons for redesign of layouts include inefficient operations (e.g., high cost, bottlenecks), accidents or safety hazards, changes in the design of products or services, introduction of new products or services, changes in the volume of output or mix of outputs, changes in methods or equipment, changes in environmental or other legal requirements, and morale problems (e.g., lack of face-to-face contact).

Poor layout design can adversely affect system performance. For example, a change in the layout at the Minneapolis–St. Paul International Airport solved a problem that had plagued travelers. In the former layout, security checkpoints were located in the boarding area. That meant that arriving passengers who were simply changing planes had to pass through a security checkpoint before being able to board their connecting flight, along with other passengers whose journeys were originating at Minneapolis–St. Paul. This created excessive waiting times for both sets of passengers. The new layout relocated the security checkpoints, moving them from the boarding area to a position close to the ticket counters. Thus, the need for passengers who were making connecting flights to pass through security was eliminated, and in the process, the waiting time for passengers departing from Minneapolis–St. Paul was considerably reduced. 1

The basic objective of layout design is to facilitate a smooth flow of work, material, and information through the system. Supporting objectives generally involve the following:

  • To facilitate attainment of product or service quality.

  • To use workers and space efficiently.

  • To avoid bottlenecks.

  • To minimize material handling costs.

  • To eliminate unnecessary movements of workers or materials.

  • To minimize production time or customer service time.

  • To design for safety.

page 261 

The three basic types of layout are product, process, and fixed-position. Product layouts are most conducive to repetitive processing, process layouts are used for intermittent processing, and fixed-position layouts are used when projects require layouts. The characteristics, advantages, and disadvantages of each layout type are described in this section, along with hybrid layouts, which are combinations of these pure types. These include cellular layouts and flexible manufacturing systems.

Repetitive and Continuous Processing: Product Layouts

Product layouts are used to achieve a smooth and rapid flow of large volumes of goods or customers through a system. This is made possible by highly standardized goods or services that allow highly standardized, repetitive processing. The work is divided into a series of standardized tasks, permitting specialization of equipment and division of labor. The large volumes handled by these systems usually make it economical to invest substantial sums of money in equipment and job design. Because only one or a few very similar items are involved, it is feasible to arrange an entire layout to correspond to the technological processing requirements of the product or service. For instance, if a portion of a manufacturing operation required the sequence of cutting, sanding, and painting, the appropriate pieces of equipment would be arranged in that same sequence. And because each item follows the same sequence of operations, it is often possible to utilize fixed-path material-handling equipment, such as conveyors to transport items between operations. The resulting arrangement forms a line like the one depicted in Figure 6.3. In manufacturing environments, the lines are referred to as production lines or assembly lines , depending on the type of activity involved. In service processes, the term line may or may not be used. It is common to refer to a cafeteria line as such but not a car wash, although from a conceptual standpoint the two are nearly identical. Figure 6.4 illustrates the layout of a typical cafeteria serving line. Examples of this type of layout are less plentiful in service environments because processing requirements usually exhibit too much variability to make standardization feasible. Without high standardization, many of the benefits of repetitive processing are lost. When lines are used, certain compromises may be made. For instance, an automatic car wash provides equal treatment to all cars—the same amount of soap, water, and scrubbing for a given type of wash (e.g., basic wash) —even though cars may differ considerably in cleaning needs.

image image

Product layouts achieve a high degree of labor and equipment utilization, which tends to offset their high equipment costs. Because items move quickly from operation to operation, the amount of work-in-process is often minimal. Consequently, operations are so closely tied to each other that the entire system is highly vulnerable to being shut down because of mechanical failure or high absenteeism. Maintenance procedures are geared to this. Preventive maintenance—periodic inspection and replacement of worn parts or those with high failure rates—reduces the probability of breakdowns during the operations. Of course, no amount of preventive activity can completely eliminate failures, so management must take measures to page 262provide quick repair. These include maintaining an inventory of spare parts and having repair personnel available to quickly restore equipment to normal operation. These procedures are fairly expensive. Because of the specialized nature of equipment, problems become more difficult to diagnose and resolve, and spare-part inventories can be extensive.

Repetitive processing can be machine-paced (e.g., automatic car wash, automobile assembly), worker-paced (e.g., fast-food restaurants such as McDonald’s, Burger King), or even customer-paced (e.g., cafeteria line).

The main advantages of product layouts are:

  • A high rate of output.

  • Low unit cost due to high volume. The high cost of specialized equipment is spread over many units.

  • Labor specialization, which reduces training costs and time, and results in a wide span of supervision.

  • Low material-handling cost per unit. Material handling is simplified because units follow the same sequence of operations. Material handling is often automated.

  • A high utilization of labor and equipment.

  • The establishment of routing and scheduling in the initial design of the system. These activities do not require much attention once the system is operating.

  • Fairly routine accounting, purchasing, and inventory control.

The primary disadvantages of product layouts include the following:

  • The intensive division of labor usually creates dull, repetitive jobs that provide little opportunity for advancement and may lead to morale problems and to repetitive stress injuries.

  • Poorly skilled workers may exhibit little interest in maintaining equipment or in the quality of output.

  • The system is fairly inflexible in response to changes in the volume of output or changes in product or process design.

  • The system is highly susceptible to shutdowns caused by equipment breakdowns or excessive absenteeism because workstations are highly interdependent.

    page 263 

  • Preventive maintenance, the capacity for quick repairs, and spare-parts inventories are necessary expenses.

  • Incentive plans tied to individual output are impractical because they would cause variations among outputs of individual workers, which would adversely affect the smooth flow of work through the system.

U-Shaped Layouts. Although a straight production line may have intuitive appeal, a U-shaped line (see Figure 6.5) has a number of advantages that make it worthy of consideration. One disadvantage of a long, straight line is that it interferes with cross-travel of workers and vehicles. A U-shaped line is more compact; it often requires approximately half the length of a straight production line. In addition, a U-shaped line permits increased communication among workers on the line because workers are clustered, thus facilitating teamwork. Flexibility in work assignments is increased because workers can handle not only adjacent stations but also stations on opposite sides of the line. Moreover, if materials enter the plant at the same point that finished products leave it, a U-shaped line minimizes material handling.

image

Of course, not all situations lend themselves to U-shaped layouts: On highly automated lines, there is less need for teamwork and communication, and entry and exit points may be on opposite sides of the building. Also, operations may need to be separated because of noise or contamination factors.

Intermittent Processing: Process Layouts

Process layouts (functional layouts) are designed to process items or provide services that involve a variety of processing requirements. The variety of jobs that are processed requires frequent adjustments to equipment. This causes a discontinuous work flow, which is referred to as intermittent processing . The layouts feature departments or other functional groupings in which similar kinds of activities are performed. A manufacturing example of a process layout is the machine shop, which has separate departments for milling, grinding, drilling, and so on. Items that require those operations are frequently moved in lots or batches to the departments in a sequence that varies from job to job. Consequently, variable-path material-handling equipment (forklift trucks, jeeps, tote boxes) is needed to handle the variety of routes and items. The use of general-purpose equipment provides the flexibility necessary to handle a wide range of processing requirements. Workers who operate the equipment are usually skilled or semiskilled. Figure 6.6 illustrates the departmental arrangement typical of a process layout.

image

page 264 

Process layouts are quite common in service environments. Examples include hospitals, colleges and universities, banks, auto repair shops, airlines, and public libraries. For instance, hospitals have departments or other units that specifically handle surgery, maternity, pediatrics, psychiatric, emergency, and geriatric care. And universities have separate schools or departments that concentrate on one area of study such as business, engineering, science, or math.

Because equipment in a process layout is arranged by type rather than by processing sequence, the system is much less vulnerable to shutdown caused by mechanical failure or absenteeism. In manufacturing systems especially, idle equipment is usually available to replace machines that are temporarily out of service. Moreover, because items are often processed in lots (batches), there is considerably less interdependence between successive operations than with a product layout. Maintenance costs tend to be lower because the equipment is less specialized than that of product layouts, and the grouping of machinery permits repair personnel to become skilled in handling that type of equipment. Machine similarity reduces the necessary investment in spare parts. On the negative side, routing and scheduling must be done on a continual basis to accommodate the variety of processing demands typically imposed on these systems. Material handling is inefficient, and unit handling costs are generally much higher than in product layouts. In-process inventories can be substantial due to batch processing and capacity mismatches. Furthermore, it is not uncommon for such systems to have equipment utilization rates under 50 percent because of routing and scheduling complexities related to the variety of processing demands being handled.

In sum, process layouts have both advantages and disadvantages. The advantages of process layouts include the following:

  • The systems can handle a variety of processing requirements.

  • The systems are not particularly vulnerable to equipment failures.

  • General-purpose equipment is often less costly than the specialized equipment used in product layouts and is easier and less costly to maintain.

  • It is possible to use individual incentive systems.

The disadvantages of process layouts include the following:

  • In-process inventory costs can be high if batch processing is used in manufacturing systems.

  • Routing and scheduling pose continual challenges.

  • Equipment utilization rates are low.

  • Material handling is slow and inefficient, and more costly per unit than in product layouts.

  • Job complexities often reduce the span of supervision and result in higher supervisory costs than with product layouts.

  • Special attention necessary for each product or customer (e.g., routing, scheduling, machine setups) and low volumes result in higher unit costs than with product layouts.

  • Accounting, inventory control, and purchasing are much more involved than with product layouts.

Fixed-Position Layouts

In fixed-position layouts , the item being worked on remains stationary, and workers, materials, and equipment are moved about as needed. This is in marked contrast to product and process layouts. Almost always, the nature of the product dictates this kind of arrangement: Weight, size, bulk, or some other factor makes it undesirable or extremely difficult to move the product. Fixed-position layouts are used in large construction projects (buildings, power plants, dams), shipbuilding, and production of large aircraft and space mission rockets. In those instances, attention is focused on timing of material and equipment deliveries so as not to clog up the work site and to avoid having to relocate materials and equipment around the work site. Lack of storage space can present significant problems, for example, at construction sites in crowded urban locations. Because of the many diverse activities carried out on large projects and because of the wide range of skills required, special efforts are needed to page 265coordinate the activities, and the span of control can be quite narrow. For these reasons, the administrative burden is often much higher than it would be under either of the other layout types. Material handling may or may not be a factor; in many cases, there is no tangible product involved (e.g., designing a computerized inventory system). When goods and materials are involved, material handling often resembles process-type, variable-path, general-purpose equipment. Projects might require use of earth-moving equipment and trucks to haul materials to, from, and around the work site, for example.

Fixed-position layouts are widely used in farming, firefighting, road building, home building, remodeling and repair, and drilling for oil. In each case, compelling reasons bring workers, materials, and equipment to the product’s location instead of the other way around.

Combination Layouts

The three basic layout types are ideal models, which may be altered to satisfy the needs of a particular situation. It is not hard to find layouts that represent some combination of these pure types. For instance, supermarket layouts are essentially process layouts, yet we find that most use fixed-path material-handling devices such as roller-type conveyors in the stockroom and belt-type conveyors at the cash registers. Hospitals also use the basic process arrangement, although frequently patient care involves more of a fixed-position approach, in which nurses, doctors, medicines, and special equipment are brought to the patient. By the same token, faulty parts made in a product layout may require off-line reworking, which involves customized processing. Moreover, conveyors are frequently observed in both farming and construction activities.

page 266 

Process layouts and product layouts represent two ends of a continuum from small jobs to continuous production. Process layouts are conducive to the production of a wider range of products or services than product layouts, which is desirable from a customer standpoint where customized products are often in demand. However, process layouts tend to be less efficient and have higher unit production costs than product layouts. Some manufacturers are moving away from process layouts in an effort to capture some of the benefits of product layouts. Ideally, a system is flexible and yet efficient, with low unit production costs. Cellular manufacturing, group technology, and flexible manufacturing systems represent efforts to move toward this ideal.

Cellular Layouts

Cellular Production. Cellular production is a type of layout in which workstations are grouped into what is referred to as a cell. Groupings are determined by the operations needed to perform work for a set of similar items, or part families, that require similar processing. The cells become, in effect, miniature versions of product layouts. The cells may have no conveyorized movement of parts between machines, or they may have a flow line connected by a conveyor (automatic transfer). All parts follow the same route, although minor variations (e.g., skipping an operation) are possible. In contrast, the functional layout involves multiple paths for parts. Moreover, there is little effort or need to identify part families.

Cellular manufacturing enables companies to produce a variety of products with as little waste as possible. A cell layout provides a smooth flow of work through the process with minimal transport or delay. Benefits frequently associated with cellular manufacturing include minimal work in process, reduced space requirements and lead times, productivity and quality improvement, and increased flexibility.

Figure 6.7 provides a comparison between a traditional process layout (6.7A) and a cellular layout (6.7B). To get a sense of the advantage of the cellular layout, trace the movement of an order in the traditional layout (6.7A) that is depicted by the path of the arrow. Begin on the bottom left at Shipping/Receiving, and then follow the arrow to Warehouse, where a batch of raw material is released for production. Follow the path (shown by the arrows) that the batch takes as it moves through the system to Shipping/Receiving and then to the Customer. Now turn to Figure 6.7B. Note the simple path the order takes as it moves through the system.

image

Several techniques facilitate effective cellular layout design. Among them are the following two:

Single-minute exchange of die (SMED) enables an organization to quickly convert a machine or process to produce a different (but similar) product type. Thus, a single cell can produce a variety of products without the time-consuming equipment changeover associated with large batch processes, enabling the organization to quickly respond to changes in customer demand.

Right-sized equipment is often smaller than equipment used in traditional process layouts, and is mobile, so it can quickly be reconfigured into a different cellular layout in a different location.

Table 6.5 lists the benefits of cellular layouts compared to functional layouts.

TABLE 6.5

A comparison of functional (process) layouts and cellular layouts

Dimension

Functional

Cellular

Number of moves between departments

Many

Few

Travel distances

Longer

Shorter

Travel paths

Variable

Fixed

Job waiting time

Greater

Shorter

Throughput time

Higher

Lower

Amount of work in process

Higher

Lower

Supervision difficulty

Higher

Lower

Scheduling complexity

Higher

Lower

Equipment utilization

Lower

Higher

The biggest challenges of implementing cellular manufacturing involve issues of equipment and layout and issues of workers and management. Equipment and layout issues relate to design and cost. The costs of work stoppages during implementation can be considerable, as can the costs of new or modified equipment and the rearrangement of the layout. The costs to implement cellular manufacturing must be weighed against the cost savings that can be expected from using cells. Also, the implementation of cell manufacturing often requires employee training and the redefinition of jobs. Each of the workers in each cell should ideally be able to complete the entire range of tasks required in that cell, and often this means being more multiskilled than they were previously. In addition, cells are often expected to be self-managing, and therefore workers will have to be able to work effectively in teams. Managers have to learn to be less involved than with more traditional work methods.

page 267 

Group Technology. Effective cellular manufacturing must have groups of identified items with similar processing characteristics. This strategy for product and process design is known as group technology and involves identifying items with similarities in either design characteristics or manufacturing characteristics, and grouping them into part families. Design characteristics include size, shape, and function; manufacturing or processing characteristics involve the type and sequence of operations required. In many cases, design and processing characteristics are correlated, although this is not always the case. Thus, design families may be different from processing families. Figure 6.8 illustrates a group of parts with similar processing characteristics but different design characteristics.

page 268 

image

Once similar items have been identified, items can be classified according to their families. Then, a system can be developed that facilitates retrieval from a database for purposes of design and manufacturing. For instance, a designer can use the system to determine if there is an existing part similar or identical to one that needs to be designed. It may happen that an existing part, with some modification, is satisfactory. This greatly enhances the productivity of design. Similarly, planning the manufacturing of a new part can include matching it with one of the part families in existence, thereby alleviating much of the burden of specific processing details.

The conversion to group technology and cellular production requires a systematic analysis of parts to identify the part families. This is often a major undertaking; it is a time-consuming job that involves the analysis of a considerable amount of data. Three primary methods for accomplishing this are visual inspection, examination of design and production data, and production flow analysis.

Visual inspection is the least accurate of the three but also the least costly and the simplest to perform. Examination of design and production data is more accurate but much more time-consuming. It is perhaps the most commonly used method of analysis. Production flow analysis has a manufacturing perspective and not a design perspective, because it examines operations sequences and machine routings to uncover similarities. Moreover, the operation sequences and routings are taken as givens. In reality, the existing procedures may be far from optimal.

Conversion to cellular production can involve costly realignment of equipment. Consequently, a manager must weigh the benefits of a switch from a process layout to a cellular one against the cost of moving equipment, as well as the cost and time needed for grouping parts.

Flexible manufacturing systems, discussed earlier, are more fully automated versions of cellular manufacturing.

Service Layouts

As is the case with manufacturing, service layouts can often be categorized as product, process, or fixed-position layouts. In a fixed-position service layout (e.g., appliance repair, roofing, landscaping, home remodeling, copier service), materials, labor, and equipment are brought to the customer’s residence or office. Process layouts are common in services due mainly to the high degree of variety in customer processing requirements. Examples include hospitals, supermarkets and department stores, vehicle repair centers, and banks. If the service is organized sequentially, with all customers or work following the same or similar sequence, as it is in a car wash or a cafeteria line, a product layout is used.

page 269 

However, service layout requirements are somewhat different from manufacturing layout requirements. The degree of customer contact and the degree of customization are two key factors in service layout design. If contact and customization are both high, as in health care and personal care, the service environment is a job shop, usually with high labor content and flexible equipment, and a layout that supports this. If customization is high but contact low page 270(e.g., picture framing, tailoring), the layout can be arranged to facilitate workers and equipment. If contact is high but customization is low (e.g., supermarkets, gas stations), self-service is a possibility, in which case layout must take into account the ease of obtaining the service, as well as customer safety. If the degree of contact and the need for customization are low, the core service and the customer can be separated, making it easier to achieve a high degree of efficiency in operations. Highly standardized services may lend themselves to automation (e.g., web services, online banking, ATM machines).

Let’s consider some of these layouts.

Warehouse and Storage Layouts. The design of storage facilities presents a different set of factors than the design of factory layouts. Frequency of order is an important consideration. Items that are ordered frequently should be placed near the entrance to the facility, and those ordered infrequently should be placed toward the rear of the facility. Any correlations between items are also significant (i.e., item A is usually ordered with item B), suggesting that placing those two items close together would reduce the cost and time of picking (retrieving) those items. Other considerations include the number and widths of aisles, the height of storage racks, rail and/or truck loading and unloading, and the need to periodically make a physical count of stored items.

Retail Layouts. The objectives that guide design of manufacturing layouts often pertain to cost minimization and product flow. However, with retail layouts such as department stores, supermarkets, and specialty stores, designers must take into account the presence of customers and the opportunity to influence sales volume and customer attitudes through carefully designed layouts. Traffic patterns and traffic flow are important factors to consider. Some large retail chains use standard layouts for all or most of their stores. This has several advantages. Most obvious is the ability to save time and money by using one layout instead of page 271custom designing one for each store. Another advantage is to avoid confusing consumers who visit more than one store. In the case of service retail outlets, especially small ones such as dry cleaners, shoe repair, and auto service centers, layout design is much simpler.

Office Layouts. Office layouts are undergoing transformations as the flow of paperwork is replaced with the increasing use of electronic communications. This lessens the need to place office workers in a layout that optimizes the physical transfer of information or paperwork. Another trend is to create an image of openness; office walls are giving way to low-rise partitions, which also facilitate communication among workers.

Restaurant Layouts. There are many different types of restaurants, ranging from food trucks to posh establishments. Many belong to chains, and some of those are franchises. That type of restaurant typically adheres to a floor plan established by the company. Independent restaurants and bars have their own floor plans. Some have what could be considered very good designs, while others do not. Ed Norman of MVP Services Group, Inc., in Dubuque, Iowa, offers this valuable observation: “The single most important element is process workflow. Food and non-food products should transition easily through the operation from the receiving door to the customer with all phases of storage, pre-preparation, cooking, holding, and service, unimpaired or minimized due to good design.”

Hospital Layouts. Key elements of hospital layout design are patient care and safety, with easy access to critical resources such as X-ray, CAT scan, and MRI equipment. General layout of the hospital is one aspect of layout, while layout of patient rooms is another. The following reading illustrates a safe hospital room of the future.

Automation in Services. One way to improve productivity and reduce costs in services is to remove the customer from the process as much as possible. Automated services is one increasingly used alternative. For example, financial services use ATMs, automated call answering, online banking, and electronic funds transfers; retail stores use optical scanning to process sales; and the travel industry uses electronic reservation systems. Other examples of automated services include shipping, mail processing, communication, and health care services.

page 272 

Automating services means more-standardized services and less need to involve the customer directly. However, service standardization brings trade-offs. Generally, costs are reduced and productivity increases, but the lack of customization and the inability to deal with a real person raise the risk of customer dissatisfaction.

6.6 DESIGNING PRODUCT LAYOUTS: LINE BALANCING

The goal of a product layout is to arrange workers or machines in the sequence that operations need to be performed. The sequence is referred to as a production line or an assembly line. These lines range from fairly short, with just a few operations, to long lines that have a large number of operations. Automobile assembly lines are examples of long lines. At the assembly line for Ford Mustangs, a Mustang travels about nine miles from start to finish!

Because it is difficult and costly to change a product layout that is inefficient, design is a critical issue. Many of the benefits of a product layout relate to the ability to divide required work into a series of elemental tasks (e.g., “assemble parts C and D”) that can be performed quickly and routinely by low-skilled workers or specialized equipment. The durations of these elemental tasks typically range from a few seconds to 15 minutes or more. Most time requirements are so brief that it would be impractical to assign only one task to each worker. For one thing, most workers would quickly become bored by the limited job scope. For another, the number of workers required to complete even a simple product or service would be enormous. Instead, tasks are usually grouped into manageable bundles and assigned to workstations staffed by one or two operators.

The process of deciding how to assign tasks to workstations is referred to as line balancing . The goal of line balancing is to obtain task groupings that represent approximately equal time requirements. This minimizes the idle time along the line and results in a high utilization of labor and equipment. Idle time occurs if task times are not equal among workstations; some stations are capable of producing at higher rates than others. These “fast” stations will experience periodic waits for the output from slower stations or else be forced into idleness to avoid buildups of work between stations. Unbalanced lines are undesirable in terms of inefficient utilization of labor and equipment and because they may create morale problems at the slower stations for workers who must work continuously.

Lines that are perfectly balanced will have a smooth flow of work as activities along the line are synchronized to achieve maximum utilization of labor and equipment. The major obstacle to attaining a perfectly balanced line is the difficulty of forming task bundles that have the same duration. One cause of this is that it may not be feasible to combine certain activities into the same bundle, either because of differences in equipment requirements or because the activities are not compatible (e.g., risk of contamination of paint from sanding). Another cause of difficulty is that differences among elemental task lengths cannot always be overcome by grouping tasks. A third cause of an inability to perfectly balance a line is that a required technological sequence may prohibit otherwise desirable task combinations. Consider a series of three operations that have durations of two minutes, four minutes, and two minutes, as shown in the following diagram. Ideally, the first and third operations could be combined at one workstation and have a total time equal to that of the second operation. However, it may not be possible to combine the first and third operations. In the case of an automatic car wash, scrubbing and drying operations could not realistically be combined at the same workstation due to the need to rinse cars between the two operations.

page 273 

Line balancing involves assigning tasks to workstations. Usually, each workstation has one worker who handles all of the tasks at that station, although an option is to have several workers at a single workstation. For purposes of illustration, however, all of the examples and problems in this chapter have workstations with one worker. A manager could decide to use anywhere from one to five workstations to handle five tasks. With one workstation, all tasks would be done at that station; with five stations, for example, one task would be assigned to each station. If two, three, or four workstations are used, some or all of the stations will have multiple tasks assigned to them. How does a manager decide how many stations to use?

The primary determinant is what the line’s cycle time will be. The cycle time is the maximum time allowed at each workstation to perform assigned tasks before the work moves on. The cycle time also establishes the output rate of a line. For instance, if the cycle time is two minutes, units will come off the end of the line at the rate of one every two minutes. Hence, the line’s capacity is a function of its cycle time.

We can gain some insight into task groupings and cycle time by considering a simple example.

Suppose that the work required to fabricate a certain product can be divided up into five elemental tasks, with the task times and precedence relationships, as shown in the following diagram:

The task times govern the range of possible cycle times. The minimum cycle time is equal to the longest task time (1.0 minute), and the maximum cycle time is equal to the sum of the task times (0.1 + 0.7 + 1.0 + 0.5 + 0.2 = 2.5 minutes). The minimum cycle time would apply if there were five workstations. The maximum cycle time would apply if all tasks were performed at a single workstation. The minimum and maximum cycle times are important because they establish the potential range of output for the line, which we can compute using the following formula:

(6–1)

Assume that the line will operate for eight hours per day (480 minutes). With a cycle time of 1.0 minute, output would be

With a cycle time of 2.5 minutes, the output would be

Assuming that no parallel activities are to be employed (e.g., two lines), the output selected for the line must fall in the range of 192 units per day to 480 units per day.

As a general rule, the cycle time is determined by the desired output; that is, a desired output rate is selected, and the cycle time is computed. If the cycle time does not fall between the maximum and minimum bounds, the desired output rate must be revised. We can compute the cycle time using this equation:

(6–2)

page 274 

For example, suppose that the desired output rate is 480 units. Using Formula 6–2, the necessary cycle time is

The number of workstations that will be needed is a function of both the desired output rate and our ability to combine elemental tasks into workstations. We can determine the theoretical minimum number of stations necessary to provide a specified rate of output as follows:

(6–3)

where

Suppose the desired rate of output is the maximum of 480 units per day. 2 (This will require a cycle time of 1.0 minute.) The minimum number of stations required to achieve this goal is

Because 2.5 stations is not feasible, it is necessary to round up (because 2.5 is the minimum) to three stations. Thus, the actual number of stations used will equal or exceed three, depending on how successfully the tasks can be grouped into workstations.

A very useful tool in line balancing is a precedence diagram . Figure 6.9 illustrates a simple precedence diagram. It visually portrays the tasks to be performed, along with the sequential requirements—that is, the order in which tasks must be performed. The diagram is read from left to right, so the initial task(s) are on the left and the final task is on the right. In terms of precedence requirements, we can see from the diagram, for example, that the only requirement to begin task b is that task a must be finished. However, in order to begin task d, tasks b and c must both be finished. Note that the elemental tasks are the same ones we have been using.

image

Now let’s see how a line is balanced. This involves assigning tasks to workstations. Generally, no techniques are available that guarantee an optimal set of assignments. Instead, managers employ heuristic (intuitive) rules, which provide good and sometimes optimal sets of assignments. A number of line-balancing heuristics are in use, two of which are described here for purposes of illustration:

  1. Assign tasks in order of most following tasks.

  2. Assign tasks in order of greatest positional weight. Positional weight is the sum of each task’s time and the times of all following tasks.

page 275 

Example 1 has been made purposely simple to illustrate the basic procedure. Later examples will illustrate tiebreaking, constructing precedence diagrams, and the positional weight method. Before considering those examples, let us first consider some measures of effectiveness that can be used for evaluating a given set of assignments.

Two widely used measures of effectiveness are

  1. The percentage of idle time of the line. This is sometimes referred to as the balance delay . It can be computed as follows:

    (6–4)

    where

page 276 

For the preceding example, the value is

In effect, this is the average idle time divided by the cycle time, multiplied by 100. Note that cycle time refers to the actual cycle time that is achieved. When the calculated cycle time in Formula 6–2 and the actual bottleneck station time differ, the actual bottleneck station time should be used in all idle time, efficiency, and output (throughput) calculations. The actual bottleneck time dictates the actual pace of the line, whereas the calculated cycle time is just an upper limit on the amount of time that can be loaded into any station.

  1. The efficiency of the line. This is computed as follows:

    (6–5a)

    Here, Efficiency = 100% − 16.7% = 83.3%. Alternatively, efficiency could be computed using Formula 6–5b:

    (6–5b)

Now let’s consider the question of whether the selected level of output should equal the maximum output possible. The minimum number of workstations needed is a function of the desired output rate and, therefore, the cycle time. Thus, a lower rate of output (hence, a longer cycle time) may result in a need for fewer stations. Hence, the manager must consider whether the potential savings realized by having fewer workstations would be greater than the decrease in profit resulting from producing fewer units.

The preceding examples serve to illustrate some of the fundamental concepts of line balancing. They are rather simple, but in most real-life situations, the number of branches and tasks is often much greater. Consequently, the job of line balancing can be a good deal more complex. In many instances, the number of alternatives for grouping tasks is so great that it is virtually impossible to conduct an exhaustive review of all possibilities. For this reason, many real-life problems of any magnitude are solved using heuristic approaches. The purpose of a heuristic approach is to reduce the number of alternatives that must be considered, but it does not guarantee an optimal solution.

Some Guidelines for Line Balancing

In balancing an assembly line, tasks are assigned one at a time to the line, starting at the first workstation. At each step, the unassigned tasks are checked to determine which are eligible for assignment. Next, the eligible tasks are checked to see which of them will fit in the workstation being loaded. A heuristic is used to select one of the tasks that will fit, and the task is assigned. This process is repeated until there are no eligible tasks that will fit. Then, the next workstation can be loaded. This continues until all tasks are assigned. The objective is to minimize the idle time for the line subject to technological and output constraints.

Technological constraints tell us which elemental tasks are eligible to be assigned at a particular position on the line. Technological constraints can result from the precedence or ordering relationships among the tasks. The precedence relationships require that certain tasks must be performed before others (and so they must be assigned to workstations before others). Thus, in a car wash, the rinsing operation must be performed before the drying operation. The drying operation is not eligible for assignment until the rinsing operation has been assigned. Technological constraints may also result from two tasks being incompatible (e.g., space restrictions or the nature of the operations may prevent their being placed in the same work center). For example, sanding and painting operations would not be assigned to the same work center because dust particles from the sanding operation could contaminate the paint.

Output constraints, on the other hand, determine the maximum amount of work that a manager can assign to each workstation, and this determines whether an eligible task will fit at a workstation. The desired output rate determines the cycle time, and the sum of the task page 277times assigned to any workstation must not exceed the cycle time. If a task can be assigned to a workstation without exceeding the cycle time, then the task will fit.

Once it is known which tasks are eligible and will fit, the manager can select the task to be assigned (if there is more than one to choose from). This is where the heuristic rules help us decide which task to assign from among those that are eligible and will fit.

To clarify the terminology, following tasks are all tasks that you would encounter by following all paths from the task in question through the precedence diagram. Preceding tasks are all tasks you would encounter by tracing all paths backward from the task in question. In the following precedence diagram, tasks b, d, e, and f are followers of task a. Tasks a, b, and c are preceding tasks for e.

The positional weight for a task is the sum of the task times for itself and all its following tasks.

Neither of the heuristics guarantees the best solution, or even a good solution to the line-balancing problem, but they do provide guidelines for developing a solution. It may be useful to apply several different heuristics to the same problem and pick the best (least idle time) solution out of those developed.

Other Factors

The preceding discussion on line balancing presents a relatively straightforward approach to approximating a balanced line. In practice, the ability to do this usually involves additional considerations, some of which are technical.

Technical considerations include skill requirements of different tasks. If skill requirements of tasks are quite different, it may not be feasible to place the tasks in the same workstation. Similarly, if the tasks themselves are incompatible (e.g., the use of fire and flammable liquids), it may not be feasible even to place them in stations that are near each other.

Developing a workable plan for balancing a line may also require consideration of human factors as well as equipment and space limitations.

Although it is convenient to treat assembly operations as if they occur at the same rate time after time, it is more realistic to assume that whenever humans are involved, task completion times will be variable. The reasons for the variations are numerous, including fatigue, boredom, and failure to concentrate on the task at hand. Absenteeism also can affect line balance. Minor variability can be dealt with by allowing some slack along the line. However, if more variability is inherent in even a few tasks, that will severely impact the ability to achieve a balanced line.

For these reasons, lines that involve human tasks are more of an ideal than a reality. In practice, lines are rarely perfectly balanced. However, this is not entirely bad, because some unbalance means that slack exists at points along the line, which can reduce the impact of brief stoppages at some workstations. Also, workstations that have slack can be used for new workers who may not be “up to speed.”

Other Approaches

Companies use a number of other approaches to achieve a smooth flow of production. One approach is to use parallel workstations. These are beneficial for bottleneck operations which would otherwise disrupt the flow of product as it moves down the line. The bottlenecks may be the result of difficult or very long tasks. Parallel workstations increase the work flow and provide flexibility.

page 280 

Consider this example. 3 A job has four tasks; task times are 1 minute, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 1 minute. The cycle time for the line would be 2 minutes, and the output rate would be 30 units per hour:

Using parallel stations for the third task would result in a cycle time of 1 minute because the output rate at the parallel stations would be equal to that of a single station and allow an output rate for the line of 60 units per hour:

Another approach to achieving a balanced line is to cross-train workers so that they are able to perform more than one task. Then, when bottlenecks occur, the workers with temporarily increased idle time can assist other workers who are temporarily overburdened, thereby maintaining an even flow of work along the line. This is sometimes referred to as dynamic line balancing, and it is used most often in lean production systems.

Still another approach is to design a line to handle more than one product on the same line. This is referred to as a mixed model line. Naturally, the products have to be fairly similar, so that the tasks involved are pretty much the same for all products. This approach offers great flexibility in varying the amount of output of the products. The reading above describes one such line.

page 281 

6.7 DESIGNING PROCESS LAYOUTS

The main issue in designing process layouts concerns the relative positioning of the departments involved. As illustrated in Figure 6.10, departments must be assigned to locations. The problem is to develop a reasonably good layout; some combinations will be more desirable than others. For example, some departments may benefit from adjacent locations, whereas others should be separated. A lab with delicate equipment would not be located near a department that had equipment with strong vibrations. Conversely, two departments that share some of the same equipment would benefit from being close together.

image

Layouts can also be influenced by external factors such as the location of entrances, loading docks, elevators, windows, and areas of reinforced flooring. Also important are noise levels, safety, and the size and locations of restrooms.

In some instances (e.g., the layouts of supermarkets, gas stations, and fast-food chains), a sufficient number of installations having similar characteristics justify the development of standardized layouts. For example, the use of the same basic patterns in McDonald’s fast-food locations facilitates construction of new structures and employee training. Food preparation, order taking, and customer service follow the same pattern throughout the chain. Installation and service of equipment are also standardized. This same concept has been successfully employed in computer software products such as Microsoft Windows and the Macintosh Operating System. Different applications are designed with certain basic features in common, so that a user familiar with one application can readily use other applications without having to start from scratch with each new application.

The majority of layout problems involve single rather than multiple locations, and they present unique combinations of factors that do not lend themselves to a standardized approach. Consequently, these layouts require customized designs.

A major obstacle to finding the most efficient layout of departments is the large number of possible assignments. For example, there are more than 87 billion different ways that 14 departments can be assigned to 14 locations if the locations form a single line. Different location configurations (e.g., 14 departments in a 2 × 7 grid) often reduce the number of possibilities, as do special requirements (e.g., the stamping department may have to be assigned to a location with reinforced flooring). Still, the remaining number of layout possibilities is quite large. Unfortunately, no algorithms exist to identify the best layout arrangement under all circumstances. Often, planners must rely on heuristic rules to guide trial-and-error efforts for a satisfactory solution to each problem.

Measures of Effectiveness

One advantage of process layouts is their ability to satisfy a variety of processing requirements. Customers or materials in these systems require different operations and different sequences of operations, which cause them to follow different paths through the system. Material-oriented systems necessitate the use of variable-path material-handling equipment to move materials from work center to work center. In customer-oriented systems, people must travel or be transported from work center to work center. In both cases, transportation costs or time can be significant. Because of this factor, one of the major objectives in process layout is to minimize transportation cost, distance, or time. This is usually accomplished by locating departments with relatively high interdepartmental work flow as close together as possible.

page 282 

Other concerns in choosing among alternative layouts include initial costs in setting up the layout, expected operating costs, the amount of effective capacity created, and the ease of modifying the system.

In situations that call for improvement of an existing layout, costs of relocating any work center must be weighed against the potential benefits of the move.

Information Requirements

The design of process layouts requires the following information:

  • A list of departments or work centers to be arranged, their approximate dimensions, and the dimensions of the building or buildings that will house the departments.

  • A projection of future work flows between the various work centers.

  • The distance between locations and the cost per unit of distance to move loads between locations.

  • The amount of money to be invested in the layout.

  • A list of any special considerations (e.g., operations that must be close to each other or operations that must be separated).

  • The location of key utilities, access and exit points, loading docks, and so on, in existing buildings.

The ideal situation is to first develop a layout and then design the physical structure around it, thus permitting maximum flexibility in design. This procedure is commonly followed when new facilities are constructed. Nonetheless, many layouts must be developed in existing structures where floor space, the dimensions of the building, location of entrances and elevators, and other similar factors must be carefully weighed in designing the layout. Note that multilevel structures pose special problems for layout planners.

Minimizing Transportation Costs or Distances

The most common goals in designing process layouts are minimization of transportation costs or distances traveled. In such cases, it can be very helpful to summarize the necessary data in from-to charts like those illustrated in Tables 6.6 and 6.7. Table 6.6 indicates the distance between each of the locations, and Table 6.7 indicates actual or projected work flow between each pair. For instance, the distance chart reveals that a trip from location A to location B will involve a distance of 20 meters. (Distances are often measured between department centers.) Oddly enough, the length of a trip between locations A and B may differ depending on the direction of the trip—due to one-way routes, elevators, or other factors. To simplify the discussion, assume a constant distance between any two locations regardless of direction. However, it is not realistic to assume that interdepartmental work flows are equal—there is no reason to suspect that department 1 will send as much work to department 2 as department 2 sends to 1. For example, several departments may send goods to packaging, but packaging may send only to the shipping department.

TABLE 6.6

Distance between locations (meters)

TABLE 6.7

Interdepartmental work flow (loads per day)

Transportation costs can also be summarized in from-to charts, but we shall avoid that complexity, assuming instead that costs are a direct, linear function of distance.

page 283 

At $1 per load meter, the cost for this plan is $7,600 per day. Even though it might appear that this arrangement yields the lowest transportation cost, you cannot be absolutely positive of that without actually computing the total cost for every alternative and comparing it to this one. Instead, rely on the choice of reasonable heuristic rules, such as those demonstrated previously to arrive at a satisfactory, if not optimal, solution.

page 284 

Closeness Ratings

Although the preceding approach is widely used, it suffers from the limitation of focusing on only one objective, and many situations involve multiple criteria. Richard Muther developed a more general approach to the problem, which allows for subjective input from analysis or managers to indicate the relative importance of each combination of department pairs. 4 That information is then summarized in a grid like that shown in Figure 6.12. Read the grid in the same way as you would read a mileage chart on a road map, except that letters rather than distances appear at the intersections. The letters represent the importance of closeness for each department pair, with A being the most important and X being an undesirable pairing. Thus, in the grid it is “absolutely necessary” to locate 1 and 2 close to each other because there is an A at the intersection of those departments on the grid. On the other hand, 1 and 4 should not be close together because their intersection has an X. In practice, the letters on the grid are often accompanied by numbers that indicate the reason for each assignment (they are omitted here to simplify the illustration). Muther suggests the following list:

image
  • They use the same equipment or facilities.

  • They share the same personnel or records.

  • Required sequence of work flow.

  • Needed for ease of communication.

  • Would create unsafe or unpleasant conditions.

  • Similar work is performed.

page 285 

Next, form a cluster of A links, beginning with the department that appears most frequently in the A list (in this case, 6). For instance:

Take the remaining A links in order, and add them to this main cluster where possible, rearranging the cluster as necessary. Form separate clusters for departments that do not link with the main cluster. In this case, all link with the main cluster.

Next, graphically portray the X links:

Observe that, as it stands, the cluster of A links also satisfies the X separations. It is a fairly simple exercise to fit the cluster into a 2 × 3 arrangement:

Note that the lower-level ratings have also been satisfied with this arrangement, even though no attempt was made to explicitly consider the E and I ratings. Naturally, not every problem will yield the same results, so it may be necessary to do some additional adjusting to see if improvements can be made, keeping in mind that the A and X assignments deserve the greatest consideration.

Note that departments are considered close not only when they touch side to side but also when they touch corner to corner.

The value of this rating approach is that it permits the use of multiple objectives and subjective inputs. Its limitations relate to the use of subjective inputs in general: They are imprecise and unreliable.

1 Based on “Airport Checkpoints Moved to Help Speed Travelers on Their Way,” Minneapolis—St. Paul Star Tribune, January 13, 1995, p. 1B.

2 At first glance, it might seem that the desired output would logically be the maximum possible output. However, you will see why that is not always the best alternative.

3 Adapted from Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Aided Manufacturing, 2nd ed. 1987. Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ.

4 Richard Muther and John Wheeler, “Simplified Systematic Layout Planning.” Factory 120, nos. 8, 9, and 10 (August, September, October 1962), pp. 68–77, 111–119, 101–113, respectively.

page 300 

page 301 

7.1 INTRODUCTION

The importance of work design is underscored by an organization’s dependence on human efforts (i.e., work) to accomplish its goals. Furthermore, many of the topics in this chapter are especially relevant for productivity improvement and continuous improvement.

7.2 JOB DESIGN

Job design involves specifying the content and methods of jobs. Job designers focus on what will be done in a job, who will do the job, how the job will be done, and where the job will be done. The objectives of job design include productivity, safety, and quality of work life.

page 302 

Current practice in job design contains elements of two basic schools of thought. One might be called the efficiency school because it emphasizes a systematic, logical approach to job design; the other is called the behavioral school because it emphasizes satisfaction of wants and needs.

The efficiency approach, a refinement of Frederick Winslow Taylor’s scientific management concepts, received considerable emphasis in the past. The behavioral approach followed and has continued to make inroads into many aspects of job design. It is noteworthy that specialization is a primary issue of disagreement between the efficiency and behavioral approaches.

Specialization

The term specialization describes jobs that have a very narrow scope. Examples range from assembly lines to medical specialties. College professors often specialize in teaching certain courses, some auto mechanics specialize in transmission repair, and some bakers specialize in wedding cakes. The main rationale for specialization is the ability to concentrate one’s efforts and thereby become proficient at that type of work.

Sometimes the amount of knowledge or training required of a specialist and the complexity of the work suggest that individuals who choose such work are very happy with their jobs. This seems to be especially true in the “professions” (e.g., doctors, lawyers, professors). At the other end of the scale are assembly-line workers, who are also specialists, although much less glamorous. The advantage of these highly specialized jobs is that they yield high productivity and relatively low unit costs, and they are largely responsible for the high standard of living that exists today in industrialized nations.

Unfortunately, many of the lower-level jobs can be described as monotonous or downright boring, and are the source of much of the dissatisfaction among many industrial workers. While some workers undoubtedly prefer a job with limited requirements and responsibility for making decisions, others are not capable of handling jobs with greater scopes. Nonetheless, many workers are frustrated, and this manifests itself in turnover and absenteeism. In the automotive industry, for example, absenteeism runs as high as 20 percent. Workers may also take out their frustrations through disruptive tactics such as deliberate slowdowns.

The seriousness of these problems caused job designers and others to seek ways of alleviating them. Some of those approaches are discussed in the following sections. Before we turn to them, note that the advantages and disadvantages of specialization are summarized in Table 7.1.

page 303 

TABLE 7.1

Major advantages and disadvantages of specialization in business

Advantages

 

For management:

  • Simplifies training

  • High productivity

  • Low wage costs

For employees:

  • Low education and skill requirements

  • Minimum responsibilities

  • Little mental effort needed

Disadvantages

 

For management:

  • Difficult to motivate quality

  • Worker dissatisfaction, possibly resulting in absenteeism, high turnover, disruptive tactics, poor attention to quality

For employees:

  • Monotonous work

  • Limited opportunities for advancement

  • Little control over work

  • Little opportunity for self-fulfillment

Behavioral Approaches to Job Design

In an effort to make jobs more interesting and meaningful, job designers frequently consider job enlargement, job rotation, job enrichment, and increased use of mechanization.

Job enlargement means giving a worker a larger portion of the total task. This constitutes horizontal loading—the additional work is on the same level of skill and responsibility as the original job. The goal is to make the job more interesting by increasing the variety of skills required and by providing the worker with a more recognizable contribution to the overall output. For example, a production worker’s job might be expanded so that he or she is responsible for a sequence of activities instead of only one activity.

Job rotation means having workers periodically exchange jobs. This allows workers to broaden their learning experience and enables them to fill in for others in the event of sickness or absenteeism.

Job enrichment involves an increase in the level of responsibility for planning and coordination tasks. It is sometimes referred to as vertical loading. An example of this is to have stock clerks in supermarkets handle the reordering of goods, thus increasing their responsibilities. The job enrichment approach focuses on the motivating potential of worker satisfaction.

Job enlargement and job enrichment are also used in lean operations (covered in Chapter 14), where workers are cross-trained to be able to perform a wider variety of tasks and given more authority to manage their jobs.

The importance of these approaches to job design is that they have the potential to increase the motivational power of jobs by increasing worker satisfaction through improvement in the quality of work life.

Motivation

Motivation is a key factor in many aspects of work life. Not only can it influence quality and productivity, it also contributes to the work environment. People work for a variety of reasons in addition to compensation. Other reasons include socialization, self-actualization, status, the physiological aspects of work, and a sense of purpose and accomplishment. Awareness of these factors can help management to develop a motivational framework that encourages workers to respond in a positive manner to the goals of the organization. A detailed discussion of motivation is beyond the scope of this book, but its importance to work design should be obvious.

Another factor that influences motivation, productivity, and employee–management relations is trust. In an ideal work environment, there is a high level of trust between workers and managers. When managers trust employees, there is a greater tendency to give employees added responsibilities. When employees trust management, they are more likely to respond positively. Conversely, when they do not trust management, they are more likely to respond in less desirable ways.

Teams

The efforts of business organizations to become more productive, competitive, and customer-oriented have caused them to rethink how work is accomplished. Significant changes in the structure of some work environments have been the increasing use of teams and the way workers are paid, particularly in lean production systems.

page 304 

In the past, nonroutine job assignments, such as dealing with customer complaints or improving a process, were typically given to one individual or to several individuals who reported to the same manager. More recently, nonroutine assignments are being given to teams who develop and implement solutions to problems.

There are a number of different forms of teams. One is a short-term team formed to collaborate on a topic such as quality improvement, product or service design, or solving a problem. Team members may be drawn from the same functional area or from several functional areas, depending on the scope of the problem. Other teams are more long term. One form of long-term team that is increasingly being used, especially in lean production settings, is the self-directed team.

Self-directed teams , sometimes referred to as self-managed teams, are designed to achieve a higher level of teamwork and employee involvement. Although such teams are not given absolute authority to make all decisions, they are typically empowered to make changes in the work processes under their control. The underlying concept is that the workers, who are close to the process and have the best knowledge of it, are better suited than management to make the most effective changes to improve the process. Moreover, because they have a vested interest and personal involvement in the changes, they tend to work harder to ensure that the desired results are achieved than they would if management had implemented the changes. For these teams to function properly, team members must be trained in quality, process improvement, and teamwork. Self-directed teams have a number of benefits. One is that fewer managers are necessary; very often one manager can handle several teams. Also, self-directed teams can provide improved responsiveness to problems, they have a personal stake in making the process work, and they require less time to implement improvements.

Generally, the benefits of teams include higher quality, higher productivity, and greater worker satisfaction. Moreover, higher levels of employee satisfaction can lead to less turnover and absenteeism, resulting in lower costs to train new workers and less need to fill in for absent employees. This does not mean that organizations will have no difficulties in applying the team concept. Managers, particularly middle managers, often feel threatened as teams assume more of the traditional functions of managers.

Moreover, among the leading problems of teams are conflicts between team members, which can have a detrimental impact on the effectiveness of a team.

page 305 

Expert Robert Bacal has a list of requirements for successful team building: 1

  1. Clearly stated and commonly held vision and goals.

  2. Talent and skills required to meet goals.

  3. Clear understanding of team members’ roles and functions.

  4. Efficient and shared understanding of procedures and norms.

  5. Effective and skilled interpersonal relations.

  6. A system of reinforcement and celebration.

  7. Clear understanding of the team’s relationship to the greater organization.

Ergonomics

Ergonomics (or human factors) is the scientific discipline concerned with the understanding of interactions among humans and other elements of a system, and the profession that applies theory, principles, data, and methods to design in order to optimize human well-being and overall system performance. “Ergonomists contribute to the design and evaluation of tasks, jobs, products, environments and systems in order to make them compatible with the needs, abilities and limitations of people.” 2 In the work environment, ergonomics also helps to increase productivity by reducing worker discomfort and fatigue.

The International Ergonomics Association organizes ergonomics into three domains: physical (e.g., repetitive movements, layout, health, and safety); cognitive (mental workload, decision making, human–computer interaction, and work stress); and organizational (e.g., communication, teamwork, work design, and telework). 1

Many examples of ergonomics applications can be found in operations management. In the early 1900s, Frederick Winslow Taylor, known as the father of scientific management, found that the amount of coal that workers could shovel could be increased substantially by reducing the size and weight of the shovels. Frank and Lillian Gilbreth expanded Taylor’s work, developing a set of motion study principles intended to improve worker efficiency and reduce injury and fatigue. In the years since then, technological changes have broadened the scope of ergonomics, as hand–eye coordination and decision making became more important in the workplace. More recently, the increasing level of human–computer interfacing has again broadened the scope of the field of ergonomics, not only in job design, but also in electronics product design.

Poor posture can lead to fatigue, low productivity, and injuries to the back, neck, and arm. Good posture can help avoid or minimize these problems. Figure 7.1 illustrates good posture when using a computer.

page 306 

image

7.3 QUALITY OF WORK LIFE

People work for a variety of reasons. Generally, people work to earn a living. Also, they may be seeking self-realization, status, physical and mental stimulation, and socialization. Quality of work life affects not only workers’ overall sense of well-being and contentment, but also worker productivity. Quality of work life has several key aspects. Getting along well with coworkers and having good managers can contribute greatly to the quality of work life. Leadership style is particularly important. Also important are working conditions and compensation, which are addressed here.

Working Conditions

Working conditions are an important aspect of job design. Physical factors such as temperature, humidity, ventilation, illumination, and noise can have a significant impact on worker performance in terms of productivity, quality of output, and accidents. In many instances, government regulations apply.

Temperature and Humidity. Although human beings can function under a fairly wide range of temperatures and humidity, work performance tends to be adversely affected if temperatures or humidities are outside a very narrow comfort band. That comfort band depends on how strenuous the work is; the more strenuous the work, the lower the comfort range.

Ventilation. Unpleasant and noxious odors can be distracting and dangerous to workers. Moreover, unless smoke and dust are periodically removed, the air can quickly become stale and annoying.

Illumination. The amount of illumination required depends largely on the type of work being performed; the more detailed the work, the higher the level of illumination needed for adequate performance. Other important considerations are the amount of glare and contrast.

From a safety standpoint, good lighting in halls, stairways, and other dangerous points is important.

Noise and Vibrations. Noise is unwanted sound. It is caused by both equipment and humans. Noise can be annoying or distracting, leading to errors and accidents. It also can damage or impair hearing if it is loud enough. Figure 7.2 illustrates loudness levels of some typical sounds.

page 307 

image

Vibrations can be a factor in job design even without a noise component, so merely eliminating sound may not be sufficient in every case. Vibrations can come from tools, machines, vehicles, human activity, air-conditioning systems, pumps, and other sources. Corrective measures include padding, stabilizers, shock absorbers, cushioning, and rubber mountings.

Work Time and Work Breaks. Reasonable (and sometimes flexible) work hours can provide a sense of freedom and control over one’s work. This is useful in situations where the emphasis is on completing work on a timely basis and meeting performance objectives rather than being “on duty” for a given time interval, as is the case for most retail and manufacturing operations.

Work breaks are also important. Long work intervals tend to generate boredom and fatigue. Productivity and quality can both deteriorate. Similarly, periodic vacation breaks can give workers something to look forward to, a change of pace, and a chance to recharge themselves.

Occupational Health Care. Good worker health contributes to productivity, minimizes health care costs, and enhances workers’ sense of well-being. Many organizations have exercise and healthy-eating programs designed to improve or maintain employees’ fitness and general health.

Safety. Worker safety is one of the most basic issues in job design. This area needs constant attention from management, employees, and designers. Workers cannot be effectively motivated if they feel they are in physical danger.

From an employer standpoint, accidents are undesirable because workers can be injured, they are expensive (insurance and compensation); they usually involve damage to equipment and/or products; they require hiring, training, and makeup work; and they generally interrupt work. From a worker standpoint, accidents that result in injury can lead to mental anguish, possible loss of earnings, and disruption of the work routine.

The two basic causes of accidents are worker carelessness and accident hazards. Under the heading of carelessness come unsafe acts. Examples include failing to use protective equipment, overriding safety controls (e.g., taping control buttons down), disregarding safety procedures, using tools and equipment improperly, and failing to use reasonable caution in danger zones. Unsafe conditions include unprotected pulleys, chains, material-handling page 308equipment, machinery, and so on. Also, poorly lit walkways, stairs, and loading docks constitute hazards. Toxic wastes, gases and vapors, and radiation hazards must be contained. Protection against hazards involves use of proper lighting, clearly marked danger zones, use of protective equipment (hardhats, goggles, earmuffs, gloves, heavy shoes and clothing), safety devices (machine guards, dual control switches that require an operator to use both hands), emergency equipment (emergency showers, fire extinguishers, fire escapes), and thorough instruction in safety procedures and use of regular and emergency equipment. Housekeeping (clean floors, open aisles, waste removal) is another important safety factor.

An effective program of safety and accident control requires the cooperation of both workers and management. Workers must be trained in proper procedures and attitudes, and they can contribute to a reduction in hazards by pointing out hazards to management. Management must enforce safety procedures and the use of safety equipment. If supervisors allow workers to ignore safety procedures or look the other way when they see violations, workers will be less likely to take proper precautions. Some firms use contests that compare departmental safety records. However, accidents cannot be completely eliminated, and a freak accident may seriously affect worker morale and might even contribute to additional accidents. Posters can be effective, particularly if they communicate in specific terms how to avoid accidents. For example, the admonition “Be careful” is not nearly as effective as “Wear hardhats,” “Walk, don’t run,” or “Hold on to rail.”

The enactment of the Occupational Safety and Health Act in 1970, and the creation of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) , emphasized the importance of safety considerations in systems design. The law was intended to ensure that workers in all organizations have healthy and safe working conditions. It provides specific safety regulations with inspectors to see that they are adhered to. Inspections are carried out both at random and to investigate complaints of unsafe conditions. OSHA officials are empowered to issue warnings, impose fines, and even to invoke court-ordered shutdowns for unsafe conditions.

OSHA must be regarded as a major influence on operations management decisions in all areas relating to worker safety. OSHA has promoted the welfare and safety of workers in its role as a catalyst, spurring companies to make changes that they knew were needed but “hadn’t gotten around to making.”

Ethical Issues. Ethical issues affect operations through work methods, working conditions and employee safety, accurate record keeping, unbiased performance appraisals, fair compensation, and opportunities for advancement.

Compensation

Compensation is a significant issue for the design of work systems. It is important for organizations to develop suitable compensation plans for their employees. If wages are too low, organizations may find it difficult to attract and hold competent workers and managers. If wages are too high, the increased costs may result in lower profits, or may force the organization to increase its prices, which might adversely affect demand for the organization’s products or services.

Organizations use a variety of approaches to compensate employees, including time-based systems, output-based systems, and knowledge-based systems. Time-based systems , also known as hourly and measured daywork systems, compensate employees for the time the employee has worked during a pay period. Salaried workers also represent a form of time-based compensation. Output-based (incentive) systems compensate employees according to the amount of output they produce during a pay period, thereby tying pay directly to performance.

Time-based systems are more widely used than incentive systems, particularly for office, administrative, and managerial employees, but also for blue-collar workers. One reason for this is that computation of wages is straightforward and managers can readily estimate labor costs for a given employee level. Employees often prefer time-based systems because the pay is steady and they know how much compensation they will receive for each pay period. In addition, employees may resent the pressures of an output-based system.

Another reason for using time-based systems is that many jobs do not lend themselves to the use of incentives. In some cases, it may be difficult or impossible to measure output. For example, jobs that require creative or mental work cannot be easily measured on an output basis. Other jobs may include irregular activities or have so many different forms of output that measuring output and determining pay are fairly complex. In the case of assembly lines, the use of individual incentives could disrupt the even flow of work; however, group incentives are sometimes used successfully in such cases. Finally, quality considerations may be as important as quantity considerations. In health care, for example, emphasis is generally placed on both the quality of patient care and the number of patients processed.

page 309 

On the other hand, situations exist where incentives are desirable. Incentives reward workers for their output, presumably causing some workers to produce more than they might under a time-based system. The advantage is that certain (fixed) costs do not vary with increases in output, so the overall cost per unit decreases if output increases. Workers may prefer incentive systems because they see a relationship between their efforts and their pay: An incentive system presents an opportunity for them to earn more money.

On the negative side, incentive systems involve a considerable amount of paperwork, computation of wages is more difficult than under time-based systems, output has to be measured and standards set, cost-of-living increases are difficult to incorporate into incentive plans, and contingency arrangements for unavoidable delays have to be developed.

Table 7.2 lists the main advantages and disadvantages of time-based and output-based plans.

TABLE 7.2

Comparison of time-based and output-based pay systems

 

Management

Worker

TIME-BASED

 

 

Advantages

  • Stable labor costs

  • Easy to administer

  • Simple to compute pay

  • Stable output

  • Stable pay

  • Less pressure to produce than under output system

Disadvantages

  • No incentive for workers to increase output

  • Extra efforts not rewarded

OUTPUT-BASED

 

 

Advantages

  • Lower cost per unit

  • Greater output

  • Pay related to efforts

  • Opportunity to earn more

Disadvantages

  • Wage computation more difficult

  • Need to measure output

  • Quality may suffer

  • Difficult to incorporate wage increases

  • Increased problems with scheduling

  • Pay fluctuates

  • Workers may be penalized because of factors beyond their control (e.g., machine breakdown)

In order to obtain maximum benefit from an incentive plan, the plan should be accurate, easy to understand and apply, and be fair and consistent. In addition, there should be an obvious relationship between effort and reward, and no limit on earnings.

Incentive systems may focus on the output of each individual or a group.

Individual Incentive Plans. Individual incentive plans take a variety of forms. The simplest plan is straight piecework. Under this plan, a worker’s pay is a direct linear function of his or her output. In the past, piecework plans were fairly popular. Now minimum wage legislation makes them somewhat impractical. Even so, many of the plans currently in use represent variations of the straight piecework plan. They typically incorporate a base rate that serves as a floor: Workers are guaranteed that amount as a minimum, regardless of output. The base rate is tied to an output standard; a worker who produces less than the standard will be paid at the base rate. This protects workers from pay loss due to delays, breakdowns, and similar problems. In most cases, incentives are paid for output above standard, and the pay is referred to as a bonus.

Group Incentive Plans. A variety of group incentive plans, which stress sharing of productivity gains with employees, are in use. Some focus exclusively on output, while others reward employees for output and for reductions in material and other costs.

page 310 

One form of group incentive is the team approach, which many companies are now using for problem solving and continuous improvement. The emphasis is on team, not individual, performance.

Knowledge-Based Pay Systems. As companies shift toward lean production, a number of changes have had a direct impact on the work environment. One is that many of the buffers that previously existed are gone. Another is that fewer managers are present. Still another is increased emphasis on quality, productivity, and flexibility. Consequently, workers who can perform a variety of tasks are particularly valuable. Organizations are increasingly recognizing this, and they are setting up pay systems to reward workers who undergo training that increases their skill levels. This is sometimes referred to as knowledge-based pay . It is a portion of a worker’s pay that is based on the knowledge and skill that the worker possesses. Knowledge-based pay has three dimensions: Horizontal skills reflect the variety of tasks the worker is capable of performing; vertical skills reflect managerial tasks the worker is capable of; and depth skills reflect quality and productivity results.

Management Compensation. Many organizations that traditionally rewarded managers and senior executives on the basis of output are now seriously reconsidering that approach. With the new emphasis on customer service and quality, reward systems are being restructured to reflect new dimensions of performance. In addition, executive pay in many companies is being more closely tied to the success of the company or division that the executive is responsible for. Even so, there have been news reports of companies increasing the compensation of top executives even as workers were being laid off and the company was losing large amounts of money!

Recent Trends. Many organizations are moving toward compensation systems that emphasize flexibility and performance objectives, with variable pay based on performance. Some are using profit-sharing plans, or bonuses based on achieving profit or cost goals. In addition, the increasing cost of employee health benefits is causing organizations to rethink their overall compensation packages. Some are placing more emphasis on quality of work life. An ideal compensation package is one that balances motivation, profitability, and retention of good employees.

7.4 METHODS ANALYSIS

Methods analysis focuses on how a job is done. Job design often begins with an analysis of the overall operation. It then moves from general to specific details of the job, concentrating on arrangement of the workplace and movements of materials and/or workers. Methods analysis can also be a good source of productivity improvements.

page 311 

The need for methods analysis can come from a number of different sources: Changes in tools and equipment, changes in product design or introduction of new products, changes in materials or procedures, government regulations or contractual agreements, and incidents such as accidents and quality problems.

Methods analysis is done for both existing jobs and new jobs. For a new job, it is needed to establish a method. For an existing job, the procedure usually is to have the analyst observe the job as it is currently being performed and then devise improvements. For a new job, the analyst must rely on a job description and an ability to visualize the operation.

The basic procedure in methods analysis is as follows:

  1. Identify the operation to be studied, and gather all pertinent facts about tools, equipment, materials, and so on.

  2. For existing jobs, discuss the job with the operator and supervisor to get their input.

  3. Study and document the present method of an existing job using process charts. For new jobs, develop charts based on information about the activities involved.

  4. Analyze the job.

  5. Propose new methods.

  6. Install the new methods.

  7. Follow up implementation to assure that improvements have been achieved.

page 312 

Selecting an Operation to Study. Sometimes a foreman or supervisor will request that a certain operation be studied. At other times, methods analysis will be part of an overall program to increase productivity and reduce costs. Some general guidelines for selecting a job to study are to consider jobs that:

  • Have a high labor content

  • Are done frequently

  • Are unsafe, tiring, unpleasant, and/or noisy

  • Are designated as problems (e.g., quality problems, processing bottlenecks)

Documenting the Current Method. Use charts, graphs, and verbal descriptions of the way the job is now being performed. This will provide a clear understanding of the job and serve as a basis of comparison against which revisions can be judged.

Analyzing the Job and Proposing New Methods. Job analysis requires careful thought about the what, why, when, where, and who of the job. Often, simply going through these questions will clarify the review process by encouraging the analyst to take a devil’s advocate attitude toward both present and proposed methods.

Analyzing and improving methods is facilitated by the use of various charts such as flow process charts and worker-machine charts.

Flow process charts are used to review and critically examine the overall sequence of an operation by focusing on the movements of the operator or the flow of materials. These charts are helpful in identifying nonproductive parts of the process (e.g., delays, temporary storages, distances traveled). Figure 7.3 describes the symbols used in constructing a flow process chart, and Figure 7.4 illustrates a flow process chart.

image image

The uses for flow process charts include studying the flow of material through a department, studying the sequence that documents or forms take, analyzing the movement and care of surgical patients, studying the layout of department and grocery stores, and handling mail.

Experienced analysts usually develop a checklist of questions they ask themselves to generate ideas for improvements. The following are some representative questions:

  • Why is there a delay or storage at this point?

  • How can travel distances be shortened or avoided?

  • Can materials handling be reduced?

    page 313 

  • Would a rearrangement of the workplace result in greater efficiency?

  • Can similar activities be grouped?

  • Would the use of additional or improved equipment be helpful?

  • Does the worker have any ideas for improvements?

A worker-machine chart is helpful in visualizing the portions of a work cycle during which an operator and equipment are busy or idle. The analyst can easily see when the operator and machine are working independently and when their work overlaps or is interdependent. One use of this type of chart is to determine how many machines or how much equipment the operator can manage. Figure 7.5 presents an example of a worker-machine chart, where the “worker” is actually a customer weighing a purchase in the bulk-foods section of a supermarket. Among other things, the chart highlights worker and machine utilization.

page 314 

image

Installing the Improved Method. Successful implementation of proposed method changes requires convincing management of the desirability of the new method and obtaining the cooperation of workers. If workers have been consulted throughout the process and have made suggestions that are incorporated in the proposed changes, this part of the task will be considerably easier than if the analyst has assumed sole responsibility for the development of the proposal.

If the proposed method constitutes a major change from the way the job has been performed in the past, workers may have to undergo a certain amount of retraining, and full implementation may take some time to achieve.

The Follow-Up. In order to ensure that changes have been made and that the proposed method is functioning as expected, the analyst should review the operation after a reasonable period and consult again with the operator.

page 315 

7.5 MOTION STUDY

Motion study is the systematic study of the human motions used to perform an operation. The purpose is to eliminate unnecessary motions and to identify the best sequence of motions for maximum efficiency. Hence, motion study can be an important avenue for productivity improvements. Present practice evolved from the work of Frank Gilbreth, who originated the concepts in the bricklaying trade in the early 20th century. Through the use of motion study techniques, Gilbreth is generally credited with increasing the average number of bricks laid per hour by a factor of 3, even though he was not a bricklayer by trade. When you stop to realize that bricklaying had been carried on for centuries, Gilbreth’s accomplishment is even more remarkable.

There are a number of different techniques that motion study analysts can use to develop efficient procedures. The most-used techniques are the following:

  • Motion study principles

  • Analysis of therbligs

  • Micromotion study

  • Charts

Gilbreth’s work laid the foundation for the development of motion study principles , which are guidelines for designing motion-efficient work procedures. The guidelines are divided into three categories: principles for use of the body, principles for arrangement of the workplace, and principles for the design of tools and equipment. Table 7.3 lists some examples of the principles.

TABLE 7.3

Motion study principles

  1. The use of the human body. Examples:

    • Both hands should begin and end their basic divisions of accomplishment simultaneously and should not be idle at the same instant, except during rest periods.

    • The motions made by the hands should be made symmetrically.

    • Continuous curved motions are preferable to straight-line motions involving sudden and sharp changes in direction.

  2. The arrangement and conditions of the workplace. Examples:

    • Fixed locations for all tools and material should be located to permit the best sequence and to eliminate or reduce the therbligs’ search and select.

    • Gravity bins and drop delivery should reduce reach and move times; wherever possible, ejectors should remove finished parts automatically.

  3. The design of tools and equipment. Examples:

    • All levers, handles, wheels, and other control devices should be readily accessible to the operator and be designed to give the best possible mechanical advantage and to utilize the strongest available muscle group.

    • Parts should be held in position by fixtures.

Source: Adapted from Benjamin W. Niebel, Motion and Time Study, 8th ed. Copyright © 1988 Richard D. Irwin, Inc. pp. 206–207.

In developing work methods that are motion efficient, the analyst tries to:

  • Eliminate unnecessary motions

  • Combine activities

  • Reduce fatigue

  • Improve the arrangement of the workplace

  • Improve the design of tools and equipment

Therbligs are basic elemental motions. The term therblig is Gilbreth spelled backward (except for the th). The approach is to break jobs down into basic elements and base improvements on an analysis of these basic elements by eliminating, combining, or rearranging them.

page 316 

Although a complete description of therbligs is outside the scope of this text, a list of some common ones will illustrate the nature of these basic elemental motions:

Search implies hunting for an item with the hands and/or the eyes.

Select means to choose from a group of objects.

Grasp means to take hold of an object.

Hold refers to retention of an object after it has been grasped.

Transport load means movement of an object after hold.

Release load means to deposit the object.

Some other therbligs are inspect, position, plan, rest, and delay.

Describing a job using therbligs often takes a substantial amount of work. However, for short, repetitive jobs, therbligs analysis may be justified.

Frank Gilbreth and his wife, Lillian, an industrial psychologist, were also responsible for introducing motion pictures for studying motions, called micromotion study . This approach is applied not only in industry but also in many other areas of human endeavor, such as sports and health care. Use of the camera and slow-motion replay enables analysts to study motions that would otherwise be too rapid to see. In addition, the resulting films provide a permanent record that can be referred to, not only for training workers and analysts but also for settling job disputes involving work methods.

The cost of micromotion study limits its use to repetitive activities, where even minor improvements can yield substantial savings, owing to the number of times an operation is repeated, or where other considerations justify its use (e.g., surgical procedures).

Motion study analysts often use charts as tools for analyzing and recording motion studies. Activity charts and process charts, such as those described earlier, can be quite helpful. In addition, analysts may use a simo chart (see Figure 7.6) to study simultaneous motions of the hands. These charts are invaluable in studying operations such as data entry, sewing, surgical and dental procedures, and certain assembly operations.

image

7.6 WORK MEASUREMENT

Job design determines the content of a job, and methods analysis determines how a job is to be performed. Work measurement is concerned with determining the length of time it should take to complete the job. Job times are vital inputs for capacity planning, workforce planning, estimating labor costs, scheduling, budgeting, and designing incentive systems. Moreover, from the workers’ standpoint, time standards reflect the amount of time it should take to do a given job working under typical conditions. The standards include expected activity time plus allowances for probable delays.

A standard time is the amount of time it should take a qualified worker to complete a specified task, working at a sustainable rate, using given methods, tools and equipment, raw material inputs, and workplace arrangement. Whenever a time standard is developed for a job, it is essential to provide a complete description of the parameters of the job because the actual time to do the job is sensitive to all of these factors; changes in any one of the factors can materially affect time requirements. For instance, changes in product design or changes in job performance brought about by a methods study should trigger a new time study to update the standard time. As a practical matter, though, minor changes are occasionally made that do not justify the expense of restudying the job. Consequently, the standards for many jobs may be slightly inaccurate. Periodic time studies may be used to update the standards.

Organizations develop time standards in a number of different ways. Although some small manufacturers and service organizations rely on subjective estimates of job times, the most commonly used methods of work measurement are (1) stopwatch time study, (2) historical times, (3) predetermined data, and (4) work sampling. The following pages describe each of these techniques in some detail.

page 317 

Stopwatch Time Study

Stopwatch time study was first introduced over a hundred years ago by Frederick Winslow Taylor to set times for manufacturing and construction activities. It was met with much resistance from workers, who felt they were being taken advantage of. Nonetheless, over time, this measurement tool gained acceptance, and it is now a common practice to conduct time studies on a wide range of activities in distribution and warehousing, janitorial services, waste management, call centers, hospitals, data processing, retail operations, sales, and service and repair operations. It is especially appropriate for short, repetitive tasks.

page 318 

Stopwatch time study is used to develop a time standard based on observations of one worker taken over a number of cycles. That is then applied to the work of all others in the organization who perform the same task. The basic steps in a time study are the following:

  1. Define the task to be studied, and inform the worker who will be studied.

  2. Determine the number of cycles to observe.

  3. Time the job and rate the worker’s performance.

  4. Compute the standard time.

The analyst who studies the job should be thoroughly familiar with it, because it is not unusual for workers to attempt to include extra motions during the study in hope of gaining a standard that allows more time per piece (i.e., the worker will be able to work at a slower pace and still meet the standard). Furthermore, the analyst will need to check that the job is being performed efficiently before setting the time standard.

In most instances, an analyst will break all but very short jobs down into basic elemental motions (e.g., reach, grasp) and obtain times for each element. There are several reasons for this: One is that some elements are not performed in every cycle, and the breakdown enables the analyst to get a better perspective on them. Another is that the worker’s proficiency may not be the same for all elements of the job. A third reason is to build a file of elemental times that can be used to set times for other jobs. This use will be described later.

Workers sometimes feel uneasy about being studied and fear changes that might result. The analyst should make an attempt to discuss these things with the worker prior to studying an operation to allay such fears and to enlist the cooperation of the worker.

The number of cycles that must be timed is a function of three things: (1) the variability of observed times, (2) the desired accuracy, and (3) the desired level of confidence for the estimated job time. Very often, the desired accuracy is expressed as a percentage of the mean of the observed times. For example, the goal of a time study may be to achieve an estimate that is within 10 percent of the actual mean. The sample size needed to achieve that goal can be determined using this formula:

(7–1)

where

Typical values of z used in this computation are: 4

Desired Confidence (%)

z Value

90

1.65

95

1.96

  95.5

2.00

98

2.33

99

2.58

Of course, the value of z for any desired confidence can be obtained from the normal table in Appendix B, Table A.

page 319 

An alternate formula used when the desired accuracy, e, is stated as an amount (e.g., within one minute of the true mean) instead of a percentage is

(7–2)

where

To make a preliminary estimate of sample size, it is typical to take a small number of observations (i.e., 10 to 20) and compute values of image and s to use in the formula for n. Toward the end of the study, the analyst may want to recompute n using revised estimates of image and s based on the increased data available.

Note: These formulas may or may not be used in practice, depending on the person doing the time study. Often, an experienced analyst will rely on his or her judgment in deciding on the number of cycles to time.

Development of a time standard involves computation of three times: the observed time (OT), the normal time (NT), and the standard time (ST).

Observed Time. The observed time is simply the average of the recorded times. Thus,

(7–3)

where

Note: If a job element does not occur each cycle, its average time should be determined separately and that amount should be included in the observed time, OT.

page 320 

Normal Time. The normal time is the observed time adjusted for worker performance. It is computed by multiplying the observed time by a performance rating. That is,

(7–4)

where

This assumes that a single performance rating has been made for the entire job. If ratings are made on an element-by-element basis, the normal time is obtained by multiplying each element’s average time by its performance rating and summing those values:

(7–5)

where

The reason for including this adjustment factor is that the worker being observed may be working at a rate different from a “normal” rate, either to deliberately slow the pace or because his or her natural abilities differ from the norm. For this reason, the observer assigns a performance rating, to adjust the observed times to an “average” pace. A normal rating is 1.00. A performance rating of .9 indicates a pace that is 90 percent of normal, whereas a rating of 1.05 indicates a pace that is slightly faster than normal. For long jobs, each element may be rated; for short jobs, a single rating may be made for an entire cycle. Machine segments of a job are typically given a rating of 1.00.

When assessing performance, the analyst must compare the observed performance to his or her concept of normal. Obviously, there is room for debate about what constitutes normal performance, and performance ratings are sometimes the source of considerable conflict between labor and management. Although no one has been able to suggest a way around these subjective evaluations, sufficient training and periodic recalibration of analysts using training films can provide a high degree of consistency in the ratings of different analysts. To avoid any bias, a second analyst may be called in to also do performance ratings. In fact, union shops may require this.

Standard Time. The normal time does not take into account such factors as personal delays (worker fatigue, getting a drink of water or going to the restroom), unavoidable delays (machine adjustments and repairs, talking to a supervisor, waiting for materials), or breaks. The standard time for a job is the normal time multiplied by an allowance factor for these delays.

The standard time is

(7–6)

where

Allowances can be based on either job time or time worked (e.g., a workday). If allowances are based on the job time, the allowance factor is computed using the following formula:

(7–7)

This is used when different jobs have different allowances. If allowances are based on a amount of the time worked (i.e., the workday), the appropriate formula is

(7–8)

This is used when jobs are the same or similar and have the same allowance factors.

page 321 

Table 7.4 illustrates some typical allowances. In practice, allowances may be based on the judgment of the time study analyst, work sampling (described later in the chapter), or negotiations between labor and management.

TABLE 7.4

Typical allowance percentages for working conditions

Percent

  1. Constant allowances:

    1. Personal allowance 6

    2. Basic fatigue allowances 4

  2. Variable allowances:

    1. Standing allowance 2

    2. Abnormal position allowance:

      1. Slightly awkward 0

      2. Awkward (bending 2

      3. Very awkward (lying, stretching) 7

  3. Use of force or muscular energy (lifting, pulling, or pushing): Weight lifted (in pounds):

     5 0

    10 1

    15 2

    20 3

    25 4

    30 5

    35 7

    40 9

    45 11

    50 13

    60 17

    70 22

  1. Bad light:

    1. Slightly below recommended 0

    2. Well below 2

    3. Very inadequate 5

  2. Atmospheric conditions (heat and humidity)—variable 0–10

  3. Close attention:

    1. Fairly fine work 0

    2. Fine or exacting 2

    3. Very fine or very exacting 5

  4. Noise level:

    1. Continuous 0

    2. Intermittent—loud 2

    3. Intermittent—very loud 5

    4. High-pitched—loud 5

  5. Mental strain:

    1. Fairly complex process 1

    2. Complex or wide span of attention 4

    3. Very complex 8

  6. Monotony:

    1. Low 0

    2. Medium 1

    3. High 4

  7. Tediousness:

    1. Rather tedious 0

    2. Tedious 2

    3. Very tedious 5

Source: From Benjamin W. Niebel, Motion and Time Study, 8th ed. Richard D. Irwin, Inc. p. 416. 1988.

Example 3 illustrates the time study process from observed times to the standard time.

Note: If an abnormally short time has been recorded, it typically would be assumed to be the result of observational error and thus discarded. If one of the observations in Example 3 had been .10, it would have been discarded. However, if an abnormally long time has been recorded, the analyst would want to investigate that observation to determine whether some irregularly occurring aspect of the task (e.g., retrieving a dropped tool or part) exists, which should legitimately be factored into the job time.

Despite the obvious benefits that can be derived from work measurement using time study, some limitations also must be mentioned. One limitation is the fact that only those jobs that can be observed can be studied. This precludes most managerial and creative jobs, because these involve mental as well as physical aspects. Also, the cost of the study rules out its use for irregular operations and infrequently occurring jobs. Finally, it disrupts the normal work routine, and workers resent it in many cases.

page 322 

Standard Elemental Times

Standard elemental times are derived from a firm’s own historical time study data. Over the years, a time study department can accumulate a file of elemental times that are common to many jobs. After a while, many elemental times can be simply retrieved from the file, eliminating the need for analysts to go through a complete time study to obtain them.

The procedure for using standard elemental times consists of the following steps:

  1. Analyze the job to identify the standard elements.

  2. Check the file for elements that have historical times, and record them. Use time study to obtain others, if necessary.

  3. Modify the file times if necessary (explained as follows).

  4. Sum the elemental times to obtain the normal time, and factor in allowances to obtain the standard time.

In some cases, the file times may not pertain exactly to a specific task. For instance, standard elemental times might be on file for “move the tool 3 centimeters” and “move the tool 9 centimeters,” when the task in question involves a move of 6 centimeters. However, it is often possible to interpolate between values on file to obtain the desired time estimate.

One obvious advantage of this approach is the potential savings in cost and effort created by not having to conduct a complete time study for each job. A second advantage is that there is less disruption of work, again because the analyst does not have to time the worker. A third advantage is that performance ratings do not have to be done; they are generally averaged in the file times. The main disadvantage of this approach is that times page 323may not exist for enough standard elements to make it worthwhile, and the file times may be biased or inaccurate.

The method described in the following section is a variation of this approach, which helps avoid some of these problems.

Predetermined Time Standards

Predetermined time standards involve the use of published data on standard elemental times. A commonly used system is methods-time measurement (MTM), which was developed by the Methods Engineering Council. The MTM tables are based on extensive research of basic elemental motions and times. To use this approach, the analyst must divide the job into its basic elements (reach, move, turn, disengage), measure the distances involved (if applicable), rate the difficulty of the element, and then refer to the appropriate table of data to obtain the time for that element. The standard time for the job is obtained by adding the times for all of the basic elements. One minute of work may cover quite a few basic elements; a typical job may involve several hundred or more of these basic elements. The analyst needs a considerable amount of skill to adequately describe the operation and develop realistic time estimates. Analysts generally take training or certification courses to develop the necessary skills to do this kind of work.

Among the advantages of predetermined time standards are the following:

  • They are based on large numbers of workers under controlled conditions.

  • The analyst is not required to rate performance in developing the standard.

  • There is no disruption of the operation.

  • Standards can be established even before a job is done.

Although proponents of predetermined standards claim that the approach provides much better accuracy than stopwatch studies, not everyone agrees with that claim. Some argue that many activity times are too specific to a given operation to be generalized from published data. Others argue that different analysts perceive elemental activity breakdowns in different ways, and that this adversely affects the development of times and produces varying time estimates among analysts. Still others claim that analysts differ on the degree of difficulty they assign a given task and thereby obtain different time standards.

Work Sampling

Work sampling is a technique for estimating the proportion of time that a worker or machine spends on various activities and in idle time.

Unlike time study, work sampling does not require timing an activity, nor does it even involve continuous observation of the activity. Instead, an observer makes brief observations of a worker or machine at random intervals and simply notes the nature of the activity. For example, a machine may be busy or idle; a secretary may be typing, filing, talking on the telephone, and so on; and a carpenter may be carrying supplies, taking measurements, cutting wood, and so on. The resulting data are counts of the number of times each category of activity or nonactivity was observed.

Although work sampling is occasionally used to set time standards, its two primary uses are in (1) ratio-delay studies, which concern the percentage of a worker’s time that involves unavoidable delays or the proportion of time a machine is idle, and (2) analysis of nonrepetitive jobs. In a ratio-delay study, a hospital administrator, for example, might want to estimate the percentage of time that a certain piece of X-ray equipment is not in use. In a nonrepetitive job, such as secretarial work or maintenance, it can be important to establish the percentage of time an employee spends doing various tasks.

Nonrepetitive jobs typically involve a broader range of skills than repetitive jobs, and workers in these jobs are often paid on the basis of the highest skill involved. Therefore, it is important to determine the proportion of time spent on the high-skill level. For example, a secretary may do word processing, file, answer the telephone, and do other routine office work. page 324If the secretary spends a high percentage of time filing instead of doing word processing, the compensation will be lower than for a secretary who spends a high percentage of time doing word processing. Work sampling can be used to verify those percentages and can therefore be an important tool in developing the job description. In addition, work sampling can be part of a program for validation of job content that is needed for “bona fide occupational qualifications”—that is, advertised jobs requiring the skills that are specified.

Work sampling estimates include some degree of error. Hence, it is important to treat work sampling estimates as approximations of the actual proportion of time devoted to a given activity. The goal of work sampling is to obtain an estimate that provides a specified confidence of not differing from the true value by more than a specified error. For example, a hospital administrator might request an estimate of X-ray idle time that will provide a 95 percent confidence of being within 4 percent of the actual percentage. Hence, work sampling is designed to produce a value, image, which estimates the true proportion, p, within some allowable error, image. The variability associated with sample estimates of p tends to be approximately normal for large sample sizes. The amount of maximum probable error is a function of both the sample size and the desired level of confidence.

For large samples, the maximum error percent e can be computed using the following formula:

(7–9)

where

In most instances, management will specify the desired confidence level and amount of allowable error, and the analyst will be required to determine a sample size sufficient to obtain these results. The appropriate value for n can be determined by solving Formula 7–9 for n, which yields

(7–10)

Determining the sample size is only one part of work sampling. The overall procedure consists of the following steps:

  1. Clearly identify the worker(s) or machine(s) to be studied.

  2. Notify the workers and supervisors of the purpose of the study to avoid arousing suspicions.

  3. Compute an initial estimate of sample size using a preliminary estimate of p, if available (e.g., from analyst experience or past data). Otherwise, use image.

  4. Develop a random observation schedule.

  5. Begin taking observations. Recompute the required sample size several times during the study.

  6. Determine the estimated proportion of time spent on the specified activity.

Careful problem definition can prevent mistakes such as observing the wrong worker or wrong activity. It is also important to take observations randomly in order to get valid results.

Observations must be spread out over a period of time so that a true indication of variability is obtained. If observations are bunched too closely in time, the behaviors observed during that time may not genuinely reflect typical performance.

Determination of a random observation schedule involves the use of a random number table (see Table 7.5), which consists of unordered sequences of numbers (i.e., random). Use of these tables enables the analyst to incorporate randomness into the observation schedule. Numbers obtained from the table can be used to identify observation times for a study. Any size number (i.e., any number of digits read as one number) can be obtained from the table. The digits are in groups of four for convenience only. The basic idea is to obtain numbers from the table and to convert each one so it corresponds to an observation time. There are a number of ways to accomplish this. In the approach used here, we will obtain three sets of numbers from the table for each observation: The first set will correspond to the day, the second to the hour, and the third to the minute when the observation is to be made. The number of digits necessary for any set will relate to the number of days in the study, the number of hours per day, and minutes per hour. For instance, if the study covers 47 days, a two-digit number will be needed; if the activity is performed for eight hours per day, a one-digit number will be needed for hours. Of course, because each hour has 60 minutes, a two-digit number will be needed for minutes. Thus, we need a two-digit number for the day, a one-digit number for the hour, and a two-digit number for minutes. A study requiring observations over a page 326seven-day period in an office that works nine hours per day needs one-digit numbers for days, one-digit numbers for hours, and two-digit numbers for minutes.

TABLE 7.5

Portion of a random number table

Suppose that three observations will be made in the last case (i.e., seven days, nine hours, 60 minutes). We might begin by determining the days on which observations will be made, then the hours, and finally the minutes. Let’s begin with the first row in the random number table and read across: The first number is 6, which indicates day 6. The second number is 9. Because it exceeds the number of days in the study, it is simply ignored. The third number is 1, indicating day 1, and the next is 2, indicating day 2. Hence, observations will be made on days 6, 1, and 2. Next, we determine the hours. Suppose we read the second row of column 1, again obtaining one-digit numbers. We find

Moving to the next row and reading two-digit numbers, we find

Combining these results yields the following:

Day

Hour

Minute

6

3

47

1

4

15

2

9

24

This means that on day 6 of the study an observation is to be made during the 47th minute of the 3rd hour; on day 1, during the 15th minute of the 4th hour; and on day 2, during the 24th minute of the 9th hour. For simplicity, these times can be put in chronological order by day. Thus,

Day

Hour

Minute

1

4

15

2

9

24

6

3

47

page 327 

A complete schedule of observations might appear as follows, after all numbers have been arranged in chronological order, assuming 10 observations per day for two days:

The general procedure for using a random number table is to read the numbers in some sequence (across rows, down or up columns), discarding any that lack correspondence. It is important to vary the starting point from one study to the next to avoid taking observations at the same times, because workers will quickly learn the times that observations are made, and the random feature will be lost. One way to choose a starting point is to use the serial number on a dollar bill to select a starting point.

In sum, the procedure for identifying random times at which to make work sampling observations involves the following steps:

  1. Determine the number of days in the study and the number of hours per day. This will indicate the required number of digits for days and hours.

  2. Obtain the necessary number of sets for days, ignoring any sets that exceed the number of days.

  3. Repeat step 2 for hours.

  4. Repeat step 2 for minutes.

  5. Link the days, hours, and minutes in the order they were obtained.

  6. Place the observation times in chronological order.

Table 7.6 presents a comparison of work sampling and time study. It suggests that a work sampling approach to determining job times is less formal and less detailed, and best suited to nonrepetitive jobs.

TABLE 7.6

Using work sampling instead of stopwatch time study

Advantages

  • Observations are spread out over a period of time, making results less susceptible to short-term fluctuations.

  • There is little or no disruption of work.

  • Workers are less resentful.

  • Studies are less costly and less time-consuming, and the skill requirements of the analyst are much less.

  • Studies can be interrupted without affecting the results.

  • Many different studies can be conducted simultaneously.

  • No timing device is required.

  • It is well-suited for nonrepetitive tasks.

Disadvantages

  • There is much less detail on the elements of a job.

  • Workers may alter their work patterns when they spot the observer, thereby invalidating the results.

  • In many cases, there is no record of the method used by the worker.

  • Observers may fail to adhere to a random schedule of observations.

  • It is not well-suited to short, repetitive tasks.

  • Much time may be required to move from one workplace to another and back to satisfy the randomness requirement.

7.7 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

It is important for management to make the design of work systems a key element of its operations strategy. Despite the major advances in computers and operations technology, people are still the heart of a business. They can make or break it, regardless of the technology used. Technology is important, of course, but technology alone is not enough.

The topics described in this chapter all have an impact on productivity. Although they lack the glamour of high tech, they are essential to the fundamentals of work design.

Workers can be a valuable source of insight and creativity because they actually perform the jobs and are closest to the problems that arise. All too often, managers overlook contributions and potential contributions of employees, sometimes from ignorance and sometimes from a false sense of pride. Union–management differences are also a factor. More and more, though, companies are attempting to develop a spirit of cooperation between employees and managers.

page 328 

In the same vein, an increasing number of companies are focusing attention on improving the quality of work life and instilling pride and respect among workers. Many organizations are reaping surprising gains through worker empowerment, giving workers more say over their jobs.

The design of work systems involves quality of work life considerations as well as job design, methods analysis, and work measurement.

1 Robert Bacal, “The Six Deadly Sins of Team-Building.” www.performance-appraisals.org

2 The International Ergonomics Association ( www.iea.cc).

3 Ibid.

4 Theoretically, a t rather than a z value should be used because the population standard deviation is unknown. However, the use of z is simpler and provides reasonable results when the number of observations is 30 or more, as it generally is. In practice, z is used almost exclusively.

page 336 

7S.1 THE CONCEPT OF LEARNING CURVES

Human performance of activities typically shows improvement when the activities are done on a repetitive basis: The time required to perform a task decreases with increasing repetitions. Learning curves summarize this phenomenon. The degree of improvement and the number of tasks needed to realize the major portion of the improvement is a function of the task being done. If the task is short and somewhat routine, only a modest amount of improvement is likely to occur, and it generally occurs during the first few repetitions. If the task is fairly complex and has a longer duration, improvements will occur over a longer interval (i.e., a larger number of repetitions). Therefore, learning factors have little relevance for planning or scheduling routine activities, but they do have relevance for new or complex repetitive activities, including bidding on contracts that involve complex repetitive work.

Figure 7S.1 illustrates the basic relationship between increasing repetitions and a decreasing time per repetition. It should be noted that the curve will never touch the horizontal axis; that is, the time per unit will never be zero.

image

The general relationship is alternatively referred to as an experience curve, a progress function, or an improvement function. Experts agree that the learning effect is the result of page 337other factors in addition to actual worker learning. Some of the improvement can be traced to preproduction factors, such as selection of tooling and equipment, product design, methods analysis, and, in general, the amount of effort expended prior to the start of the work. Other contributing factors may involve changes after production has begun, such as changes in methods, tooling, and design. In addition, management input can be an important factor through improvements in planning, scheduling, motivation, and control.

Changes that are made once production is under way can cause a temporary increase in time per unit until workers adjust to the change, even though they eventually lead to an increased output rate. If a number of changes are made during production, the learning curve would be more realistically described by a series of scallops instead of a smooth curve, as illustrated in Figure 7S.2. Nonetheless, it is convenient to work with a smooth curve, which can be interpreted as the average effect.

image

From an organizational standpoint, what makes the learning effect more than an interesting curiosity is its predictability, which becomes readily apparent if the relationship is plotted on a log-log scale (see Figure 7S.3). The straight line that results reflects a constant learning percentage, which is the basis of learning curve estimates: Empirical evidence shows that every doubling of repetitions results in a constant percentage decrease in the time per repetition. This applies both to the average and to the unit time. Typical decreases range from 10 percent to 30 percent (i.e., learning percentages that range between 90 percent and 70 percent). By convention, learning curves are referred to in terms of the complements of their improvement rates. For example, an 80 percent learning curve denotes a 20 percent decrease in unit (or average) time with each doubling of repetitions, and a 90 percent curve denotes a 10 percent improvement rate. Note that a 100 percent curve would imply no improvement at all.

image

Although the doubling effect is not a practical method for estimating activity times because it doesn’t yield time estimates for units that aren’t in the doubling pattern, it does provide insight on the concept of reduction in unit times that occur as the number of repetitions increases.

The following example illustrates the decrease in unit times with the doubling effect for a learning rate of 80 percent, which is .80. The symbol LR represents the learning rate, and the symbol T n represents the time for unit n (e.g., T 1 is the time for unit 1, T 2 is the time for unit 2).

page 338 

Example 7S–1 illustrates an important point and also raises an interesting question. The point is that the time reduction per unit becomes less and less as the number of repetitions increases. For example, the second unit required two hours less time than the first, and the improvement from the 8th to the 16th unit was only slightly more than one hour. The question raised is: How are times computed for values such as three, five, six, seven, and other units that don’t fall into this pattern?

There are two ways to obtain the times. One is to use a formula; the other is to use a table of values.

First consider the formula approach. The formula is based on the existence of a linear relationship between the time per unit and the number of units when these two variables are expressed in logarithms.

The unit time (i.e., the number of direct labor hours required) for the nth unit can be computed using the following formula:

image

(7S–1)

where

image

To use the formula, you need to know the time for the first unit and the learning percentage. For example, for an 80 percent curve with T 1 = 10 hours, the time for the third unit would be computed as

image

Note: log can be used instead of ln.

The second approach is to use a “learning factor” obtained from a table such as Table 7S.1. The table shows two things for some selected learning percentages. One is a unit value for the number of repetitions (unit number). This enables you to easily determine how long any unit will take to produce. The other is a cumulative value, which enables you to compute the total number of hours needed to complete any given number of repetitions. The computation for both is a relatively simple operation: Multiply the table value by the time required for the first unit.

page 339 

TABLE 7S.1

Learning curve coefficients

To find the time for an individual unit (e.g., the 10th unit), use the formula

image

(7S–2)

Thus, for an 85 percent curve, with T 1 = 4 hours, the time for the 10th unit would be 4 × .583 = 2.33 hours. To find the time for all units up to a specified unit (e.g., the first 10 units), use the following formula:

image

(7S–3)

Thus, for an 85 percent curve, with T 1 = 4 hours, the total time for all 10 units (including the time for unit 1) would be 4 × 7.116 = 28.464 hours.

page 340 

Use of Table 7S.1 requires a time for the first unit. If for some reason the completion time of the first unit is not available, or if the manager believes the completion time for some later unit is more reliable, the table can be used to obtain an estimate of the initial time.

7S.2 APPLICATIONS OF LEARNING CURVES

Learning curve theory has found useful applications in a number of areas, including:

  • Manpower planning and scheduling

  • Negotiated purchasing

  • Pricing new products

  • Budgeting, purchasing, and inventory planning

  • Capacity planning

Knowledge of output projections in learning situations can help managers make better decisions about how many workers they will need than they could determine from decisions based on initial output rates. Of course, managers obviously recognize that improvement will occur. What the learning curve contributes is a method for quantifying expected future improvements.

Negotiated purchasing often involves contracting for specialized items that may have a high degree of complexity. Examples include aircraft, computers, and special-purpose equipment. The direct labor cost per unit of such items can be expected to decrease as the size of the order increases. Hence, negotiators first settle on the number of units and then negotiate price on that basis. The government requires learning curve data on contracts that involve large, complex items. For contracts that are terminated before delivery of all units, suppliers page 341can use learning curve data to argue for an increase in the unit price for the smaller number of units. Conversely, the government can use that information to negotiate a lower price per unit on follow-on orders on the basis of projected additional learning gains.

Managers must establish prices for their new products and services, often on the basis of production of a few units. Generalizing from the cost of the first few units would result in a much higher price than can be expected after a greater number of units have been produced. Actually, the manager needs to use the learning curve to avoid underpricing as well as overpricing. The manager may project initial costs by using the learning progression known to represent an organization’s past experience, or else do a regression analysis of the initial results.

The learning curve projections help managers to plan costs and labor, purchasing, and inventory needs. For example, initial cost per unit will be high and output will be fairly low, so purchasing and inventory decisions can reflect this. As productivity increases, purchasing and/or inventory actions must allow for increased usage of raw materials and purchased parts to keep pace with output. Because of learning effects, the usage rate will increase over time. Hence, failure to refer to a learning curve would lead to substantial overestimates of labor needs and underestimates of the rate of material usage.

The learning principles can sometimes be used to evaluate new workers during training periods. This is accomplished by measuring each worker’s performance, graphing the results, and comparing them to an expected rate of learning. The comparison reveals which workers are underqualified, qualified, and overqualified for a given type of work (see Figure 7S.4). Moreover, measuring a worker’s progress can help predict whether the worker will make a quota within a required period of time.

image

Boeing uses learning curves to estimate weight reduction in new aircraft designs. Weight is a major factor in winning contracts because it is directly related to fuel economy.

7S.3 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

Learning curves often have strategic implications for market entry, when an organization hopes to rapidly gain market share. The use of time-based strategies can contribute to this. An increase in market share creates additional volume, enabling operations to quickly move down the learning curve, thereby decreasing costs and, in the process, gaining a competitive advantage. In some instances, the volumes are sufficiently large that operations will shift from batch mode to repetitive operation, which can lead to further cost reductions.

Learning curve projections can be useful for capacity planning. Having realistic time estimates based on learning curve theory, managers can translate that information into actual capacity needs, and plan on that basis.

7S.4 CAUTIONS AND CRITICISMS

Managers using learning curves should be aware of their limitations and pitfalls. This section briefly outlines some of the major cautions and criticisms of learning curves.

  1. Learning rates may differ from organization to organization and by type of work. Therefore, it is best to base learning rates on empirical studies rather than assumed rates where possible.

  2. Projections based on learning curves should be regarded as approximations of actual times and treated accordingly.

  3. Because time estimates are based on the time for the first unit, considerable care should be taken to ensure that the time is valid. It may be desirable to revise the base time as later times become available. Because it is often necessary to estimate the time for the first unit prior to production, this caution is very important.

  4. It is possible that at some point the curve might level off or even tip upward, especially near the end of a job. The potential for savings at that point is so slight that most jobs do not justify the attention or interest to sustain improvements. Then, too, some of the workers or other resources may be shifted into new jobs that are starting up.

    page 343 

  5. Some of the improvements may be more apparent than real: Improvements in times may be due in part to increases in indirect labor costs such as supervision, maintenance, and material handling personnel.

  6. In mass production situations, learning curves may be of initial use in predicting how long it will take before the process stabilizes. For the most part, however, the concept does not apply to mass production because the decrease in time per unit is imperceptible for all practical purposes (see Figure 7S.5). Also, the learning curve wouldn’t apply to machine-paced operations.

  7. Users of learning curves sometimes fail to include carryover effects; previous experience with similar activities can reduce activity times, although it should be noted that the learning rate remains the same.

  8. Shorter product life cycles, flexible manufacturing, and cross-functional workers can affect the ways in which learning curves may be applied.

image

page 348 

page 349 

page 350 

8.1 THE NEED FOR LOCATION DECISIONS

Existing organizations may need to make location decisions for a variety of reasons. Firms such as banks, fast-food chains, supermarkets, and retail stores view locations as part of marketing strategy, and they look for locations that will help them to expand their markets. Conversely, when a chain decides to close some of its stores, the question becomes which ones to keep.

When an organization experiences a growth in demand for its products or services that cannot be satisfied by expansion at an existing location, the addition of a new location to complement an existing system is often a realistic alternative.

Some firms face location decisions through depletion of basic inputs. For example, logging operations are often forced to relocate due to the temporary exhaustion of trees at a given location. Fishing operations can be affected by seasons as well as government limits on the amount of fish. Mining and petroleum operations face the same sort of situation, although usually with a longer time horizon.

For other firms, a shift in markets causes them to consider relocation, or the costs of doing business at a particular location reach a point where other locations begin to look more attractive.

8.2 THE NATURE OF LOCATION DECISIONS

Location decisions for many types of businesses are made infrequently, but they tend to have a significant impact on the organization. In this section, we look at the importance of location decisions, the usual objectives managers have when making location choices, and some of the options available to them.

Strategic Importance of Location Decisions

Location decisions are closely tied to an organization’s strategies. For example, a strategy of being a low-cost producer might result in locating where labor or material costs are low, or locating near markets or raw materials to reduce transportation costs. A strategy of increasing profits by increasing market share might result in locating in high-traffic areas, and a strategy that emphasizes convenience for the customer might result in having many locations where page 351customers can transact their business or make purchases (e.g., branch banks, ATMs, service stations, fast-food outlets).

Location choices can impact capacity and flexibility. Certain locations may be subject to space constraints that limit future expansion options. Moreover, local restrictions may restrict the types of products or services that can be offered, thus limiting future options for new products or services. In some situations, locating near a highway or expressway or a rail line can have benefits for shipping.

Location decisions are strategically important for other reasons as well. One is that they entail a long-term commitment, which makes mistakes difficult to overcome. Another is that location decisions often have an impact on investment requirements, operating costs and revenues, and operations. A poor choice of location might result in excessive transportation costs, a shortage of qualified labor, loss of competitive advantage, inadequate supplies of raw materials, or some similar condition that is detrimental to operations. For services, a poor location could result in lack of customers and/or high operating costs. For both manufacturing and services, location decisions can have a significant impact on competitive advantage. Another reason for the importance of location decisions is their strategic importance to supply chains.

Objectives of Location Decisions

As a general rule, profit-oriented organizations base their decisions on profit potential, whereas nonprofit organizations strive to achieve a balance between cost and the level of customer service they provide. It would seem to follow that all organizations attempt to identify the “best” location available. However, this is not necessarily the case.

In many instances, no single location may be significantly better than the others. There may be numerous acceptable locations from which to choose, as shown by the wide variety of locations where successful organizations can be found. Furthermore, the number of possible locations that would have to be examined to find the best location may be too large to make an exhaustive search practical. Consequently, most organizations do not set out with the intention of identifying the one best location; rather, they hope to find a number of acceptable locations from which to choose.

Some Internet-based retail businesses are much less dependent on location decisions such as Netflix; they can exist just about anywhere, while others that rely heavily on shipping, such as Amazon, must carefully consider where certain facilities such as warehouses are.

Supply Chain Considerations

Location criteria can depend on where a business is in the supply chain. For instance, at the retail end of a chain, site selection tends to focus more on accessibility, consumer demographics (population density, age distribution, average buyer income), traffic patterns, and local customs. Businesses at the beginning of a supply chain, if they are involved in supplying raw materials, are often located near the source of the raw materials. Businesses in the middle of the chain may locate near suppliers or near their markets, depending on a variety of circumstances. For example, businesses involved in storing and distributing goods often choose a central location to minimize distribution costs.

Supply chain management must address supply chain configuration. This includes determining the number and location of suppliers, production facilities, warehouses, and distribution centers. The location of these facilities can involve a long-term commitment of resources, so known risks and benefits should be considered carefully. A related issue is whether to have centralized or decentralized distribution. Centralized distribution generally yields scale economies as well as tighter control than decentralized distribution, but it sometimes incurs higher transportation costs. Decentralized distribution tends to be more responsive to local needs.

The importance of these decisions is underscored by the fact that they reflect the basic strategy for accessing customer markets, and the decisions will have a significant impact on costs, revenues, and responsiveness.

The quantitative techniques described in this chapter can be helpful in evaluating alternative supply chain configurations. Also, Chapter 15, Supply Chain Management, provides additional insights.

page 352 

Location Options

Managers of existing companies generally consider four options in location planning.

Expand an existing facility. This option can be attractive if there is adequate room for expansion, especially if the location has desirable features that are not readily available elsewhere. Expansion costs are often less than those of other alternatives.

Add new locations while retaining existing ones. This is done in many retail operations. In such cases, it is essential to take into account what the impact will be on the total system. Opening a new store in a shopping mall may simply draw customers who already patronize an existing store in the same chain, rather than expand the market. On the other hand, adding locations can be a defensive strategy designed to maintain a market share or to prevent competitors from entering a market.

Shut down at one location and move to another. An organization must weigh the costs of a move and the resulting benefits against the costs and benefits of remaining in an existing location. A shift in markets, exhaustion of raw materials, and the cost of operations often cause firms to consider this option seriously.

Do nothing. If a detailed analysis of potential locations fails to uncover benefits that make one of the previous three alternatives attractive, a firm may decide to maintain the status quo, at least for the time being.

8.3 GLOBAL LOCATIONS

Globalization has opened new markets, and it has meant increasing dispersion of manufacturing and service operations around the world. In addition, many companies are outsourcing operations to other companies in foreign locations. In the past, companies tended to operate from a “home base” that was located in a single country. Now, companies are finding strategic and tactical reasons to globalize their operations. As they do, some companies are profiting from their efforts, while others are finding the going tough, and all must contend with issues involved in managing global operations.

In this section, we examine some of the reasons for globalization, the benefits, disadvantages, risks, and issues related to managing global operations.

Facilitating Factors

A number of factors have made globalization attractive and feasible for business organizations. Two key factors are trade agreements and technological advances.

Trade Agreements. Barriers to international trade such as tariffs and quotas can have a detrimental effect on trade, while trade agreements that are fair to all sides can help trade to flourish. The European Union has dropped many trade barriers, and the World Trade Organization is helping to facilitate free trade.

Technology. Technological advances in communication and information sharing have been very helpful. These include texting, e-mail, cell phones, teleconferencing, and the internet.

Benefits

Companies are discovering a wide range of benefits in globalizing their operations. The following is a list of some of the benefits, although it is important to recognize that not all benefits apply to every situation.

Markets. Companies often seek opportunities for expanding markets for their goods and services, as well as better serving existing customers by being more attuned to local needs and having a quicker response time when problems occur.

Cost savings. Among the areas for potential cost savings are transportation costs, labor costs, raw material costs, and taxes. High production costs in Germany have contributed page 353to a number of German companies locating some of their production facilities in lower-cost countries. Among them are the following: industrial products giant Siemens; AG (a semiconductor plant in Britain); drug makers Bayer AG (a plant in Texas) and Hoechst AG (a plant in China); and automakers Mercedes (plants in Spain, France, and Alabama) and BMW (a plant in Spartanburg, South Carolina).

Legal and regulatory. There may be more favorable liability and labor laws, and less-restrictive environmental and other regulations.

Financial. Companies can avoid the impact of currency changes and tariffs that can occur when goods are produced in one country and sold in other countries. Also, a variety of incentives may be offered by national, regional, or local governments to attract businesses that will create jobs and boost the local economy. For example, state incentives, and workforce and land availability and cost, helped convince Nissan to build a huge assembly plant in Canton, Mississippi, and Mercedes to build an assembly plant in Vance, Alabama. An added benefit came when suppliers for these plants also set up facilities in the region.

Other. Globalization may provide new sources of ideas for products and services, new perspectives on operations, and solutions to problems.

Disadvantages

There are a number of disadvantages of having global operations. These can include the following:

Transportation costs. High transportation costs can occur due to poor infrastructure or having to ship over great distances, and the resulting costs can offset savings in labor and materials costs.

Security costs. Increased security risks and theft can increase costs. Also, security at international borders can slow shipments to other countries.

Unskilled labor. Low labor skills may negatively impact quality and productivity, and the work ethic may differ from that in the home country. Additional employee training may be required.

Import restrictions. Some countries place restrictions on the importation of manufactured goods, thus having local suppliers avoids those issues.

page 354 

Criticisms. Critics may argue that cost savings are being generated through unfair practices such as using sweatshops, in which employees are paid low wages and made to work in poor conditions; using child labor; and operating in countries that have less stringent environmental requirements.

Productivity. Low labor productivity may offset low labor costs or other advantages.

Risks

Risks with global operations can be substantial. Among the most troublesome are the following:

Protecting intellectual property rights. Companies that outsource production to foreign countries need to have assurance that intellectual property rights will be preserved. There are many instances in some countries of not doing so, and that enables others in those countries to produce similar or identical goods with no benefit to the original company, and instead, are able to produce products that compete with the original company using intellectual property gained from that company.

Political. Political instability and political unrest can create risks for personnel safety and the safety of assets. Moreover, a government might decide to nationalize facilities, taking them over.

Terrorism. Terrorism continues to be a threat in many parts of the world, putting personnel and assets at risk and decreasing the willingness of domestic personnel to travel to or work in certain areas.

Economic. Economic instability might create inflation or deflation, either of which can negatively impact profitability.

Legal. Laws and regulations may change, reducing or eliminating what may have been key benefits.

Ethical. Corruption and bribery, common in some countries, may be illegal in a company’s home country. This poses a number of issues. One is how to maintain operations without resorting to bribery. Another is how to prevent employees from doing this, especially when they may be of local origin and used to transacting business in this way.

Cultural. Cultural differences may be more real than apparent. Walmart discovered that fact when it opened stores in Japan. Although Walmart has thrived in many countries on its reputation for low-cost items, Japanese consumers associated low cost with low quality, so Walmart had to rethink its strategy for the Japanese market.

Quality. Lax quality controls can lead to recalls and liability issues.

Managing Global Operations

Although global operations offer many benefits, these operations often create new issues for management to deal with. For example, language and cultural differences increase the risk of miscommunication and may also interfere with developing trust that is important in business relationships. Management styles may be quite different, so tactics that work well in one country may not work in another. Increased travel distances and related travel times and costs may result in a decreased tendency for face-to-face meetings and management site visits. Also, coordination of far-flung operations can be more difficult. Managers may have to deal with corruption and bribery, as well as differences in work ethic. The level of technology may be lower, and the resistance to technological change may be higher than expected, making the integration of new technologies more difficult. Domestic personnel may resist relocating, even temporarily.

Automation

Automation is having a major influence on the decision of where to produce goods, particularly if the main markets are domestic. Low labor costs in foreign locations have long been cited as a key reason for using foreign locations for production. However, rising labor costs in page 355some developing countries and poor safety records, the benefits of short transportation times with domestic locations, and advances in automation are causing many companies to take a new look at the question of where production should be done.

8.4 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR MAKING LOCATION DECISIONS

The way an organization approaches location decisions often depends on its size and the nature or scope of its operations. New or small organizations tend to adopt a rather informal approach to location decisions. New firms typically locate in a certain area simply because the owner lives there. Similarly, managers of small firms often want to keep operations in their backyard, so they tend to focus almost exclusively on local alternatives. Large established companies, page 356particularly those that already operate in more than one location, tend to take a more formal approach. Moreover, they usually consider a wider range of geographic locations. The discussion here pertains mainly to a formal approach to location decisions.

The general procedure for making location decisions usually consists of the following steps:

  1. Decide on the criteria to use for evaluating location alternatives, such as increased revenues, decreased cost, or community service.

  2. Identify important factors, such as the location of markets or raw materials. The factors will differ depending on the type of facility. For example, retail, manufacturing, distribution, health care, and transportation all have differing factors that guide their location decisions.

  3. Develop location alternatives:

    1. Identify a country or countries for a location.

    2. Identify the general region for a location.

    3. Identify a small number of community alternatives.

    4. Identify site alternatives among the community alternatives.

  4. Evaluate the alternatives and make a selection.

Step 1 is simply a matter of managerial preference. Steps 2 through 4 are discussed on the following pages.

8.5 IDENTIFYING A COUNTRY, REGION, COMMUNITY, AND SITE

Many factors influence location decisions. However, it often happens that one or a few factors are so important that they dominate the decision. For example, in manufacturing, the potentially dominating factors usually include availability of an abundant energy and water supply and proximity to raw materials. Thus, nuclear reactors require large amounts of water page 357for cooling and inexpensive land, heavy industries such as steel and aluminum production need large amounts of electricity, and so on. Transportation costs can be a major factor. In service organizations, possible dominating factors are market related and include traffic patterns, convenience, and competitors’ locations, as well as proximity to the market. For example, car rental agencies locate near airports and midcity, where their customers are. Note, too, that many of the factors discussed pertain to supply chain facilities as well as operations facilities.

Once an organization has determined the most important factors, it will try to narrow the search for suitable alternatives to one geographic region. Then, a small number of community-site alternatives are identified and subjected to detailed analysis. Human factors can be very important, as the following reading reveals. These might include the “culture shock” that is often experienced when employees are transferred to an environment that differs significantly from the current location—for instance, a move from a large city to a rural area, or from a rural area to a large city, or a move to an area that has a dramatically different climate.

Identifying a Country

Each country carries its own set of potential benefits and risks, and decision makers need to be absolutely clear on what those benefits and risks are, as well as their likelihood of occurrence so they can make an informed judgment on whether locating in that country is desirable. Some important issues have been noted in the previous section on global operations. Table 8.1 provides a listing of factors to consider.

TABLE 8.1

Factors relating to foreign locations

Government

  1. Policies on foreign ownership of production facilities

    Local content requirements

    Import restrictions

    Currency restrictions

    Environmental regulations

    Local product standards

    Liability laws

  2. Stability issues

Cultural differences

Living circumstances for foreign workers and their dependents

Ways of doing business

Religious holidays/traditions

Customer preferences

Possible “buy locally” sentiment

Labor

Level of training and education of workers

Wage rates

Labor productivity

Work ethic

Possible regulations limiting number of foreign employees

Language differences

Resources

Availability and quality of raw materials, energy, transportation infrastructure

Financial

Financial incentives, tax rates, inflation rates, interest rates

Technological

Rate of technological change, rate of innovations

Market

Market potential, competition

Safety

Crime, terrorism threat

In a report by the Council on Competitiveness and Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu that surveyed 400 global CEOs on their views on manufacturing competitiveness, the top three factors in determining where to locate manufacturing facilities were talent, labor costs, and energy costs. 1 And, in fact, many companies have outsourced some of their operations to foreign suppliers to take advantage of relatively low wage rates. Some U.S. manufacturing companies set up foreign subsidiaries to not only take advantage of low labor rates but also to avoid or delay paying taxes on their profits. With foreign-based subsidiaries, manufacturing page 358companies can ship their products to the United States and pay low tariffs. Furthermore, they can avoid taxes altogether by recording the profits overseas and not returning the earnings to the United States. They can do this through transfer pricing rules that allow U.S. companies to establish a price for transfer into the United States that keeps most of the profit in the foreign subsidiary. Those earnings are not subject to U.S. taxes unless or until they are returned as dividends to the U.S. parent corporation.

It is important to take all factors into account when contemplating the advantage of low labor costs. Other costs may negate that advantage. For example, low wage rates may also be accompanied by low labor productivity, resulting in a net cost per unit that is actually higher than what could be achieved domestically. Another consideration is transportation costs, which are generally higher for longer distances. Again, that could offset some or all of the low wage benefit. Then, too, longer transport time results in increased supply chain inventory, risk of losses or delays during shipping (e.g., weather issues, dock workers, strikes), and hence, reduced agility. Also, companies are increasingly taking sustainability factors in a country into account, both with respect to workers and to the environment.

Another factor to consider is the currency and exchange rate risk that occurs when producing in one country and buying or selling in another country. Companies must transact business in the currency of the country they are involved in. However, because the value of a country’s currency fluctuates, exchange rates fluctuate, affecting the cost of supplies and the profits of sales in other countries when converting back to the country the company is located in.

Companies can obtain information about countries of interest from a variety of sources. The following are two useful websites:

CIAhttps://www.cia.gov/library/publications/the-world-factbook/index.html

World Bankhttps://www.worldbank.org/

Identifying a Region

The primary regional factors involve raw materials, markets, and labor considerations.

Location of Raw Materials. Firms locate near or at the source of raw materials for three primary reasons: necessity, perishability, and transportation costs. Mining operations, farming, forestry, and fishing fall under necessity. Obviously, such operations must locate close to the raw materials. Firms involved in canning or freezing of fresh fruits and vegetables, processing of dairy products, baking, and so on, must take into account perishability when considering location. Transportation costs are important in industries where processing eliminates much of the bulk connected with a raw material, making it much less expensive to transport the product or material after processing. Examples include aluminum reduction, cheese making, and paper production. When inputs come from different locations, some firms choose to locate near the geographic center of the sources. For instance, steel producers sometimes use large quantities of both coal and iron ore, and many are located somewhere between the Appalachian coal fields and iron ore mines. Transportation costs are often the reason that vendors locate near their major customers. Moreover, regional warehouses are used by supermarkets and other retail operations to supply multiple outlets. Often, the choice of new locations and additional warehouses reflects the locations of existing warehouses or retail outlets.

Location of Markets. Profit-oriented firms frequently locate near the markets they intend to serve as part of their competitive strategy, whereas nonprofit organizations choose locations relative to the needs of the users of their services. Other factors include distribution costs or the perishability of a finished product.

Competitive pressures for retail operations can be extremely vital factors. In some cases, a market served by a particular location may be too small to justify two or more competitors (e.g., one hamburger franchise per block), so that a search for potential locations tends to concentrate on locations without competitors. The opposite also might be true; it could be desirable to locate near competitors. Large department stores often locate near each other, and small stores like to locate in shopping centers that have large department stores as anchors. page 359The large stores attract large numbers of shoppers who become potential customers in the smaller stores or in the other large stores.

Some firms must locate close to their markets because of the perishability of their products. Examples include bakeries, flower shops, and fresh seafood stores. For other types of firms, distribution costs are the main factor in closeness to market. For example, sand and gravel dealers usually serve a limited area because of the high distribution costs associated with their products. Still other firms require close customer contact, so they too tend to locate within the area they expect to serve. Typical examples are tailor shops, home remodelers, home repair services, cabinetmakers, rug cleaners, and lawn and garden services.

Locations of many government services are near the markets they are designed to serve. Hence, post offices are typically scattered throughout large metropolitan areas. Police and emergency health care locations are frequently selected on the basis of client needs. For instance, police patrols often concentrate on high crime areas, and emergency health care facilities are usually found in central locations to provide ready access from all directions.

Many foreign manufacturing companies have located manufacturing operations in the United States, because it is a major market for their products. Chief among them are automobile manufacturers, most notably Japanese, but other nations are also represented. Another possible reason that Japanese producers decided to locate in the United States was to offset possible negative consumer sentiment related to job losses of U.S. workers. Thousands of U.S. autoworkers are now employed in U.S. manufacturing plants of Japanese and other foreign companies.

Labor Factors. Primary labor considerations are the cost and availability of labor, wage rates in an area, labor productivity and attitudes toward work, and whether unions are a serious potential problem.

Labor costs are very important for labor-intensive organizations. The shift of the textile industry from the New England states to southern states was due partly to labor costs.

Skills of potential employees may be a factor, although some companies prefer to train new employees rather than rely solely on previous experience. Increasing specialization in many industries makes this possibility even more likely than in the past. Although most companies concentrate on the supply of blue-collar workers, some firms are more interested in scientific and technical people as potential employees, and they look for areas with high concentrations of those types of workers.

Worker attitudes toward turnover, absenteeism, and similar factors may differ among potential locations—workers in large urban centers may exhibit different attitudes than workers in small towns or rural areas. Furthermore, worker attitudes in different parts of the country or in different countries may be markedly different.

Some companies offer their current employees jobs if they move to a new location. However, in many instances, employees are reluctant to move, especially when it means leaving families and friends. Furthermore, in families with two wage earners, relocation would require that one wage earner give up a job and then attempt to find another job in the new location.

Other Factors. Climate and taxes sometimes play a role in location decisions. For example, a string of unusually severe winters in northern states may cause some firms to seriously consider moving to a milder climate, especially if delayed deliveries and work disruptions caused by inability of employees to get to work have been frequent. Similarly, the business and personal income taxes in some states reduce their attractiveness to companies seeking new locations. Many companies have been attracted to some Sun Belt states by ample supplies of low-cost energy or labor, the climate, and tax considerations. Also, tax and monetary incentives are major factors in attracting or keeping professional sports franchises.

Identifying a Community

Many communities actively try to attract new businesses, offering financial and other incentives, because they are viewed as potential sources of future tax revenues and new job opportunities. However, communities do not, as a rule, want firms that will create pollution page 360problems or otherwise lessen the quality of life in the community. Local groups may actively seek to exclude certain companies on such grounds, and a company may have to go to great lengths to convince local officials that it will be a “responsible citizen.” Furthermore, some organizations discover that even though overall community attitude is favorable, there may still be considerable opposition to specific sites from nearby residents who object to possible increased levels of noise, traffic, or pollution. Examples of this include community resistance to airport expansion, changes in zoning, construction of nuclear facilities, and highway construction.

From a company standpoint, a number of factors determine the desirability of a community as a place for its workers and managers to live. They include facilities for education, shopping, recreation, transportation, religious worship, and entertainment; the quality of police, fire, and medical services; local attitudes toward the company; and the size of the community. Community size can be particularly important if a firm will be a major employer in the community; a future decision to terminate or reduce operations in that location could have a serious impact on the economy of a small community.

Other community-related factors are the cost and availability of utilities, environmental regulations, taxes (state and local, direct and indirect), and often a laundry list of enticements offered by state or local governments that can include bond issues, tax abatements, low-cost loans, grants, and worker training.

Another trend is just-in-time manufacturing techniques (see Chapter 14), which encourage suppliers to locate near their customers to reduce supplier lead times. For this reason, some U.S. firms are reconsidering decisions to locate offshore. Moreover, in light manufacturing (e.g., electronics), low-cost labor is becoming less important than nearness to markets; users of electronics components want suppliers that are close to their manufacturing facilities. One offshoot of this is the possibility that the future will see a trend toward smaller factories located close to markets. In some industries, small, automated microfactories with narrow product focuses will be located near major markets to reduce response time.

It is likely that advances in information technology will enhance the ability of manufacturing firms to gather, track, and distribute information that links purchasing, marketing, and distribution with design, engineering, and manufacturing. This will reduce the need for these functions to be located close together, thereby permitting a strategy of locating production facilities near major markets.

Ethical Issues. Ethical issues can arise during location searches, so it is important for companies and governments to have policies in place before that happens, and to keep ethical aspects of decisions in mind while negotiating favorable treatment. For example, governments may offer a variety of incentives to companies to locate in their area, usually to obtain promised benefits from the companies. Companies should be careful to not promise more (e.g., jobs, longevity) or less (e.g., noise, traffic) than they can reasonably expect to deliver. Similarly, government negotiators should strive for an agreement that will ultimately benefit taxpayers, and use extreme caution in negotiating long-term arrangements that risk leaving taxpayers “holding the bag.” Also at issue are behind-the-scenes payments or favors to make a decision that would otherwise not be rated as highly.

Identifying a Site

The primary considerations related to sites are land, transportation, and zoning or other restrictions.

page 361 

Evaluation of potential sites may require consulting with engineers or architects, especially in the case of heavy manufacturing or the erection of large buildings or facilities with special requirements. Soil conditions, load factors, and drainage rates can be critical and often necessitate certain kinds of expertise in evaluation.

Because of the long-term commitment usually required, land costs may be secondary to other site-related factors, such as room for future expansion, current utility and sewer capacities—and any limitations on these that could hinder future growth—and sufficient parking space for employees and customers. In addition, for many firms, access roads for trucks or rail spurs are important.

Industrial parks may be worthy alternatives for firms involved in light manufacturing or assembly, warehouse operations, and customer service facilities. Typically, the land is already developed—power, water, and sewer hookups have been attended to, and zoning restrictions do not require special attention. On the negative side, industrial parks may place restrictions on the kinds of activities a company can conduct, which can limit options for future development of a firm’s products and services, as well as the processes it may consider. Sometimes stringent regulations governing the size, shape, and architectural features of buildings limit managerial choice in these matters. Also, there may not be an adequate allowance for possible future expansion.

For firms with executives who travel frequently, the size and proximity of the airport or train station, as well as travel connections, can be important, although schedules and connections are subject to change.

Table 8.2 provides a summary of the factors that affect location decisions.

TABLE 8.2

Factors affecting location decisions

Level

Factors

Considerations

Regional

Location of raw materials or supplies

Proximity, modes and costs of transportation, quantity available

 

Location of markets

Proximity, distribution costs, target market, trade practices/restrictions

 

Labor

Availability (general and for specific skills), age distribution of workforce, work attitudes, union or nonunion, productivity, wage scales, unemployment compensation laws

Community

Quality of life

Schools, churches, shopping, housing, transportation, entertainment, recreation, cost of living

 

Services

Medical, fire, and police

 

Attitudes

Pro/con

 

Taxes

State/local, direct and indirect

 

Environmental regulations

State/local

 

Utilities

Cost and availability

 

Development support

Bond issues, tax abatement, low-cost loans, grants

Site

Land

Cost, degree of development required, soil characteristics and drainage, room for expansion, parking

 

Transportation

Type (access roads, rail spurs, air freight)

 

Environmental/legal

Zoning restrictions

Multiple Plant Manufacturing Strategies

When companies have multiple manufacturing facilities, they can organize operations in several ways. One is to assign different product lines to different plants. Another is to assign different market areas to different plants. And a third is to assign different processes to different plants. Each strategy carries certain cost and managerial implications, as well as competitive advantages.

page 362 

Product Plant Strategy. With this strategy, entire products or product lines are produced in separate plants, and each plant usually supplies the entire domestic market. This is essentially a decentralized approach, with each plant focusing on a narrow set of requirements that entails specialization of labor, materials, and equipment along product lines. Specialization often results in economies of scale and, compared with multipurpose plants, lower operating costs. Plant locations may be widely scattered or clustered relatively close to one another.

Market Area Plant Strategy. With this strategy, plants are designed to serve a particular geographic segment of a market (e.g., the West Coast, the Northeast). Individual plants produce most if not all of a company’s products and supply a limited geographical area. Although operating costs tend to be higher than those of product plants, significant savings on shipping costs for comparable products can be made. This arrangement is particularly desirable when shipping costs are high due to volume, weight, or other factors. Such arrangements have the added benefit of rapid delivery and response to local needs. This approach requires centralized coordination of decisions to add or delete plants, or to expand or downsize current plants due to changing market conditions.

Process Plant Strategy. With this strategy, different plants concentrate on different aspects of a process. Automobile manufacturers often use this approach, with different plants for engines, transmissions, body stamping, and even radiators. This approach is best suited to products that have numerous components; separating the production of components results in less confusion than if all production were carried out at the same location.

When an organization uses process plants, coordination of production throughout the system becomes a major issue and requires a highly informed, centralized administration to achieve effective operation. A key benefit is that individual plants are highly specialized and generate volumes that yield economies of scale. However, this approach usually involves additional shipping costs.

General-Purpose Plant Strategy. With this strategy, plants are flexible and capable of handling a range of products. This allows for quick response to product or market changes, although it can be less productive than a more focused approach.

Multiple plants have an additional benefit: the increase in learning opportunities that occurs when similar operations are being done in different plants. Similar problems tend to arise, and solutions to those problems, as well as improvements in general in products and processes, made at one plant can be shared with other plants.

Geographic Information Systems

A geographic information system (GIS) is a computer-based tool for collecting, storing, retrieving, and displaying demographic data on maps. A GIS relies on an integrated system of computer hardware, software, data, and trained personnel to make available a wide range of geographically referenced information. Internet mapping programs used to obtain travel directions are an example of a GIS.

Many countries have an abundance of GIS data that can be accessed. For location analysis, a GIS makes it relatively easy to obtain detailed information on factors such as population density, age, incomes, ethnicity, traffic patterns, competitor locations, educational institutions, shopping centers, crime statistics, transportation resources, utilities, recreational facilities, maps and images, and a wealth of other information associated with a given location. Local governments use a GIS to organize, analyze, plan, and communicate information about community resources. And job seekers can use GISes for their searches.

The following are some ways businesses use geographic information systems:

  • Logistics companies use GIS data to plan fleet activities such as routes and schedules based on the locations of their customers.

  • Publishers of magazines and newspapers use a GIS to analyze circulation and attract advertisers.

  • Real estate companies rely heavily on a GIS to make maps available online to prospective home and business buyers.

  • Banks use a GIS to help decide where to locate branch banks and to understand the composition and needs of different market segments.

  • Insurance companies use a GIS to determine premiums based on population distribution, crime figures, and the likelihood of natural disasters, such as flooding in various locations, and to manage risk.

  • Retailers are able to link information about sales, customers, and demographics to geographic locations in planning locations. They also use a GIS to develop marketing strategies and for customer mapping, site selection, sales projections, promotions, and other store portfolio management applications.

  • Utility companies use a GIS to balance supply and demand, and identify problem areas.

  • Emergency services use a GIS to allocate resources to locations to provide adequate coverage where they are needed.

page 363 

8.6 SERVICE AND RETAIL LOCATIONS

Service and retail are typically governed by somewhat different considerations than manufacturing organizations in making location decisions. For one thing, nearness to raw materials is usually not a factor, nor is concern about processing requirements. Customer access is sometimes a prime consideration, as it is with banks and supermarkets, but not a consideration in others, such as call centers, catalog sales, and online services. Manufacturers tend to be cost-focused, concerned with labor, energy, and material costs and availability, as well as distribution costs. Service and retail businesses tend to be profit or revenue focused, concerned with demographics such as age, income, and education, population/drawing area, competition, traffic volume/patterns, and customer access/parking.

Retail sales and services are usually found near the center of the markets they serve. Examples include fast-food restaurants, service stations, dry cleaners, and supermarkets. Quite often, their products and those of their competitors are so similar that they rely on convenience to attract customers. Hence, these businesses seek locations with high population densities or high traffic. The competition/convenience factor is also important in locating banks, hotels and motels, auto repair shops, drugstores, newspaper kiosks, and shopping centers. Similarly, doctors, dentists, lawyers, barbers, and beauticians typically serve clients who reside within a limited area.

Retail and service organizations typically place traffic volume and convenience high on the list of important factors. Specific types of retail or service businesses may pay more attention to certain factors due to the nature of their business or their customers. If a business is unique, and has its own drawing power, nearness to competitors may not be a factor. However, retail businesses generally prefer locations that are near other retailers because of the higher traffic volumes and convenience to customers. For example, automobile dealerships often tend to locate near each other, and restaurants and specialty stores often locate in and around malls. When businesses locate near similar businesses, it is referred to as clustering .

Medical services are often located near hospitals for the convenience of patients. Doctors’ offices may be located near hospitals, or grouped in other, centralized areas with other doctors’ offices. Available public transportation is often a consideration.

Good transportation and/or parking facilities can be vital to retail establishments. Downtown areas have a competitive disadvantage in attracting shoppers compared to malls because malls offer ample free parking and nearness to residential areas.

Customer safety and security can be key factors, particularly in urban settings, for all types of services that involve customers coming to the service location (as opposed, say, to in-home services such as home repair and rug cleaning).

page 364 

Many retail firms have multiple outlets (locations). Among the questions that should be considered in such cases are the following:

  • How can sales, market share, and profit be optimized for the entire set of locations? Solutions might include some combination of upgrading facilities, expanding some sites, adding new outlets, and closing or changing the locations of some outlets.

  • What are the potential sales to be realized from each potential solution?

  • Where should outlets be located to maximize market share, sales, and profits without negatively impacting other outlets? This can be a key cause of friction between the operator of a franchise store and the franchising company.

  • What probable effects would there be on market share, sales, and profits if a competitor located nearby?

A recent trend for online retailers is to locate warehouses close to the market to facilitate rapid deliveries. This is especially true for apparel ordered online.

Table 8.3 briefly compares service/retail site selection criteria with manufacturing criteria.

TABLE 8.3

A comparison of service/retail considerations and manufacturing considerations

Source: Kerry Pipes, Franchising.com

Manufacturing/Distribution

Service/Retail

Cost focus

Revenue focus

Transportation modes/costs

Demographics: age, income, education

Energy availability/costs

Population/drawing area

Labor cost/availability/skills

Competition

Building/leasing costs

Traffic volume/patterns

 

Customer access/parking

8.7 EVALUATING LOCATION ALTERNATIVES

A number of techniques are helpful in evaluating location alternatives, such as locational cost-profit-volume analysis, factor rating, and the center-of-gravity method.

Locational Cost-Profit-Volume Analysis

The economic comparison of location alternatives is facilitated by the use of cost-profit-volume analysis. The analysis can be done numerically or graphically. The graphical approach will be demonstrated here because it enhances understanding of the concept and indicates the ranges over which one of the alternatives is superior to the others.

The procedure for locational cost-profit-volume analysis involves these steps:

  1. Determine the fixed and variable costs associated with each location alternative.

  2. Plot the total-cost lines for all location alternatives on the same graph.

  3. Determine which location will have the lowest total cost for the expected level of output. Alternatively, determine which location will have the highest profit.

This method assumes the following:

  • Fixed costs are constant for the range of probable output.

  • Variable costs are linear for the range of probable output.

  • The required level of output can be closely estimated.

  • Only one product is involved.

page 365 

For a cost analysis, compute the total cost for each location:

(8–1)

where

For a profit analysis, compute the total profit for each location:

(8–2)

where

Solved Problem 2 at the end of the chapter illustrates profit analysis.

Where the expected level of output is close to the middle of the range over which one alternative is superior, the choice is readily apparent. If the expected level of output is very close to the edge of a range, it means the two alternatives will yield comparable annual costs, so management would be indifferent in choosing between the two in terms of total cost. However, it is important to recognize that, in most situations, other factors besides cost must also be considered. Later in this section, a general scheme for including a broad range of factors is described. First, let’s look at another kind of cost often considered in location decisions: transportation costs.

The Transportation Model

Transportation costs sometimes play an important role in location decisions. These can stem from the movement of either raw materials or finished goods. If a facility will be the sole source or destination of shipments, the company can include the transportation costs in a locational cost–volume analysis by incorporating the transportation cost per unit being shipped into the variable cost per unit. (If raw materials are involved, the transportation cost must be converted into cost per unit of output in order to correspond to other variable costs.)

When a problem involves the shipment of goods from multiple sending points to multiple receiving points, and a new location (sending or receiving point) is to be added to the system, the company should undertake a separate analysis of transportation. In such instances the transportation model of linear programming is very helpful. It is a special-purpose algorithm used to determine the minimum transportation cost that would result if a potential new location were to be added to an existing system. It also can be used if a number of new facilities are to be added or if an entire new system is being developed. The model is used to analyze each of the configurations considered, and it reveals the minimum costs each would provide. This information can then be included in the evaluation of location alternatives. Solved Problem 1 illustrates how the results of a transportation analysis can be combined with the results of a locational cost–volume analysis.

The website for this book contains a module that provides complete coverage of the transportation model, including methods such as northwest corner, steppingstone, and Vogel’s aproximation method.

page 367 

Factor Rating

Factor rating is a technique that can be applied to a wide range of decisions ranging from personal (buying a car, deciding where to live) to professional (choosing a career, choosing among job offers). Here it is used for location analysis.

A typical location decision involves both qualitative and quantitative inputs, which tend to vary from situation to situation depending on the needs of each organization. Factor rating is a general approach that is useful for evaluating a given alternative and comparing alternatives. The value of factor rating is that it provides a rational basis for evaluation and facilitates comparison among alternatives by establishing a composite value for each alternative that summarizes all related factors. Factor rating enables decision makers to incorporate their personal opinions and quantitative information in the decision process.

The following procedure is used to develop a factor rating:

  1. Determine which factors are relevant (e.g., location of market, water supply, parking facilities, revenue potential).

  2. Assign a weight to each factor that indicates its relative importance compared with all other factors.

  3. Decide on a common scale for all factors (e.g., 1 to 100), and set a minimum acceptable score if necessary. Note that an undesirable factor such as a high crime rate could be assigned a negative score. Conversely, lack of crime could be assigned a high score while a high crime rate could be assigned a low score.

  4. Score each location alternative.

  5. Multiply the factor weight by the score for each factor, and sum the results for each location alternative.

  6. Choose the alternative that has the highest composite score, unless it fails to meet the minimum acceptable score.

This procedure is illustrated in Example 2.

page 368 

The Center-of-Gravity Method

The center-of-gravity method is a method to determine the location of a facility that will minimize shipping costs or travel time to various destinations. For example, community planners use the method to determine the location of fire and public safety centers, schools, community centers, and such, taking into consideration locations of hospitals, senior living centers, population density, highways, airports, and retail businesses. The goal for police and firefighters is often to minimize travel time to answer emergency calls. The center-of-gravity method is also used for location planning for distribution centers, where the goal is typically to minimize distribution costs. The method treats distribution cost as a linear function of the distance and the quantity shipped. The quantity to be shipped to each destination is assumed to be fixed (i.e., will not change over time). An acceptable variation is that quantities are allowed to change, as long as their relative amounts remain the same (e.g., seasonal variations).

The method includes the use of a map that shows the locations of destinations. The map must be accurate and drawn to scale. A coordinate system is overlaid on the map to determine relative locations. The location of the (0,0) point of the coordinate system, and its scale, is unimportant. Once the coordinate system is in place, you can determine the coordinates of each destination. (See Figure 8.1, parts A and B.)

image

If the quantities to be shipped to every location are equal, you can obtain the coordinates of the center of gravity (i.e., the location of the distribution center) by finding the average of the x coordinates and the average of the y coordinates (see Figure 8.1). These averages can be easily determined using the following formulas:

(8–1)

where

When the number of units to be shipped is not the same for all destinations (which is usually the case), a weighted average must be used to determine the center of gravity, with the weights being the quantities to be shipped. In some cases, the number of trips can be more important than quantities, so that metric would be used instead of quantities.

page 369 

The appropriate formulas are:

(8–4)

where

See Figure 8.3 for a graph of the solution to Example 4. The problem can also be solved using the appropriate Excel template that is available on the text website.

image

1 Newsweek, July 19, 2010, p. 15.

page 378 

9.1 INTRODUCTION

Broadly defined, quality refers to the ability of a product or service to consistently meet or exceed customer requirements or expectations. However, different customers will have different requirements, so a working definition of quality is customer-dependent.

For a decade or so, quality was an important focal point in business. But after a while, the emphasis on quality began to fade, and quality took a backseat to other concerns. However, there page 380has been an upsurge recently in the need for attention to quality. Much of this has been driven by recent experience with costs and adverse publicity associated with wide-ranging recalls that have included automobiles, ground meat, toys, produce, dog food, and pharmaceuticals.

9.2 THE EVOLUTION OF QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Prior to the Industrial Revolution, skilled craftsmen performed all stages of production. Pride of workmanship and reputation often provided the motivation to see that a job was done right. Lengthy guild apprenticeships caused this attitude to carry over to new workers. Moreover, one person or a small group of people were responsible for an entire product.

A division of labor accompanied the Industrial Revolution; each worker was then responsible for only a small portion of each product. Pride of workmanship became less meaningful because workers could no longer identify readily with the final product. The responsibility for quality shifted to the foremen. Inspection was either nonexistent or haphazard, although in some instances 100 percent inspection was used.

Frederick Winslow Taylor, the “Father of Scientific Management,” gave new emphasis to quality by including product inspection and gauging in his list of fundamental areas of manufacturing management. G. S. Radford improved Taylor’s methods. Two of his most significant contributions were the notions of involving quality considerations early in the product design stage and making connections among high quality, increased productivity, and lower costs.

In 1924, Bell Telephone Laboratories introduced statistical control charts that could be used to monitor production. Around 1930, H. F. Dodge and H. G. Romig, also of Bell Labs, introduced tables for sampling. Nevertheless, statistical quality control procedures were not widely used until World War II, when the U.S. government began to require vendors to use them.

World War II caused a dramatic increase in emphasis on quality control. The U.S. Army refined sampling techniques for dealing with large shipments of arms from many suppliers. By the end of the 1940s, the U.S. Army, Bell Labs, and major universities were training engineers in other industries in the use of statistical sampling techniques. About the same time, professional quality organizations were emerging throughout the country. One of these organizations was the American Society for Quality Control (ASQC, now known as ASQ). Over the years, the society has promoted quality with its publications, seminars and conferences, and training programs.

During the 1950s, the quality movement evolved into quality assurance. In the mid-1950s, total quality control efforts enlarged the realm of quality efforts from its primary focus on manufacturing to include product design and incoming raw materials. One important feature of this work was greater involvement of upper management in quality.

During the 1960s, the concept of “zero defects” gained favor. This approach focused on employee motivation and awareness, and the expectation of perfection from each employee. It evolved from the success of the Martin Company in producing a “perfect” missile for the U.S. Army.

In the 1970s, quality assurance methods gained increasing emphasis in services including government operations, health care, banking, and the travel industry.

Something else happened in the 1970s that had a global impact on quality. An embargo on oil sales instituted by the Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC) caused an increase in energy costs, and automobile buyers became more interested in fuel-efficient, lower-cost vehicles. Japanese auto producers, who had been improving their products, were poised to take advantage of these changes, and they captured an increased share of the automobile market. The quality of their automobiles enhanced the reputation of Japanese producers, opening the door for a wide array of Japanese-produced goods.

American producers, alarmed by their loss of market share, spent much of the late 1970s and the 1980s trying to improve the quality of their goods while lowering their costs.

The evolution of quality took a dramatic shift from quality assurance to a strategic approach to quality in the late 1970s. Up until that time, the main emphasis had been on finding and page 381correcting defective products before they reached the market. It was still a reactive approach. The strategic approach is proactive, focusing on preventing mistakes from occurring in the first place. The idea is to design quality into products, rather than to find and correct defects after the fact. This approach has now expanded to include processes and services. Quality and profits are more closely linked. This approach also places greater emphasis on customer satisfaction, and it involves all levels of management, as well as workers, in a continuing effort to increase quality.

9.3 THE FOUNDATIONS OF MODERN QUALITY MANAGEMENT: THE GURUS

A core of quality pioneers shaped current thinking and practice. This section describes some of their key contributions to the field.

Walter Shewhart. Walter Shewhart was a genuine pioneer in the field of quality control, and he became known as the “father of statistical quality control.” He developed control charts for analyzing the output of processes to determine when corrective action was necessary. Shewhart had a strong influence on the thinking of two other gurus, W. Edwards Deming and Joseph Juran.

W. Edwards Deming. Deming, a statistics professor at New York University in the 1940s, went to Japan after World War II to assist the Japanese in improving quality and productivity. The Union of Japanese Scientists, who had invited Deming, were so impressed that in 1951, after a series of lectures presented by Deming, they established the Deming Prize , which is awarded annually to firms that distinguish themselves with quality management programs and to individuals who lead such efforts.

Although the Japanese revered Deming, he was largely unknown to business leaders in the United States. In fact, he worked with the Japanese for almost 30 years before he gained recognition in his own country. Before his death in 1993, U.S. companies turned their attention to Deming, embraced his philosophy, and requested his assistance in setting up quality improvement programs.

Deming compiled a famous list of 14 points he believed were the prescription needed to achieve quality in an organization (see Table 9.1). His message was that the cause of inefficiency and poor quality is the system, not the employees. Deming felt that it was management’s page 382responsibility to correct the system to achieve the desired results. In addition to the 14 points, Deming stressed the need to reduce variation in output (deviation from a standard), which can be accomplished by distinguishing between special causes of variation (i.e., correctable) and common causes of variation (i.e., random). Deming’s concept of profound knowledge incorporates the beliefs and values about learning that guided Japan’s rise to a world economic power.

Table 9.1

Deming’s 14 points

  1. Create constancy of purpose for improving products and services.

  2. Adopt the new philosophy.

  3. Cease dependence on inspection to achieve quality.

  4. End the practice of awarding business on price alone; instead, minimize total cost by working with a single supplier.

  5. Improve constantly and forever every process for planning, production and service.

  6. Institute training on the job.

  7. Adopt and institute leadership.

  8. Drive out fear.

  9. Break down barriers between staff areas.

  10. Eliminate slogans, exhortations and targets for the workforce.

  11. Eliminate numerical quotas for the workforce and numerical goals for management.

  12. Remove barriers that rob people of pride of workmanship, and eliminate the annual rating or merit system.

  13. Institute a vigorous program of education and self-improvement for everyone.

  14. Put everybody in the company to work accomplishing the transformation.

Source: Adapted from W. Edwards Deming, Out of the Crisis, pp. 23 and 24. 2000. MIT Press

Joseph M. Juran. Juran, like Deming, taught Japanese manufacturers how to improve the quality of their goods, and he, too, can be regarded as a major force in Japan’s success in quality.

Juran viewed quality as fitness-for-use. He also believed that roughly 80 percent of quality defects are management controllable; thus, management has the responsibility to correct this deficiency. He described quality management in terms of a trilogy consisting of quality planning, quality control, and quality improvement. According to Juran, quality planning is necessary to establish processes that are capable of meeting quality standards; quality control is necessary in order to know when corrective action is needed; and quality improvement will help to find better ways of doing things. A key element of Juran’s philosophy is the commitment of management to continual improvement.

Juran is credited as one of the first to measure the cost of quality, and he demonstrated the potential for increased profits that would result if the costs of poor quality could be reduced.

Armand Feigenbaum. Feigenbaum was instrumental in advancing the “cost of nonconformance” approach as a reason for management to commit to quality. He recognized that quality was not simply a collection of tools and techniques, but a “total field.” According to Feigenbaum, it is the customer who defines quality.

Philip B. Crosby. Crosby developed the concept of zero defects and popularized the phrase “Do it right the first time.” He stressed prevention, and he argued against the idea that “there will always be some level of defectives.” The quality-is-free concept presented in his book, Quality Is Free, is that the costs of poor quality are much greater than traditionally defined. According to Crosby, these costs are so great that rather than viewing quality efforts as costs, organizations should view them as a way to reduce costs, because the improvements generated by quality efforts will more than pay for themselves.

Crosby believes that any level of defects is too high and that achieving quality can be relatively easy, as explained in his book Quality Without Tears: The Art of Hassle-Free Management.

Kaoru Ishikawa. The late Japanese expert on quality was strongly influenced by both Deming and Juran, although he made significant contributions of his own to quality management. Among his key contributions were the development of the cause-and-effect diagram (also known as a fishbone diagram) for problem solving and the implementation of quality circles, which involve workers in quality improvement. He was the first quality expert to call attention to the internal customer—the next person in the process, the next operation, within the organization.

Genichi Taguchi. Taguchi is best known for the Taguchi loss function, which involves a formula for determining the cost of poor quality. The idea is that the deviation of a part from a standard causes a loss, and the combined effect of deviations of all parts from their standards can be large, even though each individual deviation is small. An important part of his philosophy is the cost to society of poor quality.

Taiichi Ohno and Shigeo Shingo. Taiichi Ohno and Shigeo Shingo both developed the philosophy and methods of kaizen, a Japanese term for continuous improvement (defined more fully later in this chapter), at Toyota. Continuous improvement is one of the hallmarks of successful quality management.

Table 9.2 provides a summary of the important contributions of the gurus to modern quality management.

TABLE 9.2

A summary of key contributors to quality management

Contributor

Key Contributions

Shewhart

Control charts; variance reduction

Deming

14 points; special versus common causes of variation

Juran

Quality is fitness-for-use; quality trilogy

Feigenbaum

Quality is a total field; the customer defines quality

Crosby

Quality is free; zero defects

Ishikawa

Cause-and-effect diagrams; quality circles

Taguchi

Taguchi loss function

Ohno and Shingo

Continuous improvement

page 383 

9.4 INSIGHTS ON QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Successful management of quality requires that managers have insights on various aspects of quality. These include defining quality in operational terms, understanding the costs and benefits of quality, recognizing the consequences of poor quality, and recognizing the need for ethical behavior. We begin with defining quality.

Defining Quality: The Dimensions of Quality

One way to think about quality is the degree to which performance of a product or service meets or exceeds customer expectations. The difference between these two, that is Performance–Expectations, is of great interest. If these two measures are equal, the difference is zero, and expectations have been met. If the difference is negative, expectations have not been met, whereas if the difference is positive, performance has exceeded customer expectations.

Customer expectations can be broken down into a number of categories, or dimensions, that customers use to judge the quality of a product or service. Understanding these helps organizations in their efforts to meet or exceed customer expectations. The dimensions used for goods are somewhat different from those used for services.

Product Quality. Product quality is often judged on nine dimensions of quality: 1

Performance—main characteristics of the product

Aesthetics—appearance, feel, smell, taste

Special features—extra characteristics

Conformance—how well a product corresponds to design specifications

Reliability—dependable performance

Durability—ability to perform over time

Perceived quality—indirect evaluation of quality (e.g., reputation)

Serviceability—handling of complaints or repairs

Consistency—quality doesn’t vary

These dimensions are further described by the examples presented in Table 9.3 regarding an automobile. When referring to any product, however, a customer sometimes judges the first four dimensions by its fitness for use.

Table 9.3

Examples of product quality for a car

Dimensions

Examples

1. Performance

Everything works: fit and finish, ride, handling, acceleration

2. Aesthetics

Exterior and interior design

3. Features

Convenience: placement of gauges

High-tech: GPS system

Safety: anti-skid, airbags

4. Conformance

Car matches manufacturer’s specifications

5. Reliability

Infrequent need for repairs

6. Durability

Useful life in miles, resistance to rust

7. Perceived quality

Top-rated

8. Serviceability

Ease of repair

9. Consistency

Quality doesn’t vary from car to car

Notice in the table below that price is not a dimension of quality.

page 384 

Service Quality. The dimensions of product quality don’t adequately describe service quality. Instead, service quality is often described using the following dimensions: 2

Convenience—the availability and accessibility of the service

Reliability—the ability to perform a service dependably, consistently, and accurately

Responsiveness—the willingness of service providers to help customers in unusual situations and to deal with problems

Time—the speed with which service is delivered

Assurance—the knowledge exhibited by personnel who come into contact with a customer and their ability to convey trust and confidence

Courtesy—the way customers are treated by employees who come into contact with them

Tangibles—the physical appearance of facilities, equipment, personnel, and communication materials

Consistency—the ability to provide the same level of good quality repeatedly

Expectations—meet (or exceed) customer expectations

Table 9.4 illustrates how the dimensions of service quality might apply to having an automobile repaired.

Table 9.4

Examples of service quality dimensions for having a car repaired

Dimension

Examples

1. Convenience

Was the service center conveniently located?

2. Reliability

Was the problem fixed and will the “fix” last?

3. Responsiveness

Were customer service personnel willing and able to answer questions?

4. Time

How long did the customer have to wait?

5. Assurance

Did the customer service personnel seem knowledgeable about the repair?

6. Courtesy

Were customer service personnel and the cashier friendly and courteous?

7. Tangibles

Were the facilities clean? Were personnel neat?

8. Consistency

Was the service quality good, and was it consistent with previous visits?

9. Expectations

Were customer expectations met?

page 385 

The dimensions of both product and service quality establish a conceptual framework for thinking about quality, but even they are too abstract to be applied operationally for purposes of product or service design, or actually producing a product or delivering a service. They must be stated in terms of specific, measurable characteristics. For example, when buying a car, a customer would naturally be interested in the car’s performance. But what does that mean? In more specific terms, it might refer to a car’s estimated miles per gallon, how quickly it can go from 0 to 60 miles per hour, or its stopping distance when traveling at 60 mph. Each of these can be stated in measurable terms (e.g., estimated miles per gallon: city = 25, highway = 30). Similar measurable characteristics can often be identified for each of the other product dimensions, as well as for the service dimensions. This is the sort of detailed information that is needed to both design and produce high-quality goods and services.

Information on customer wants in service can sometimes be difficult to pin down, creating challenges for designing and managing service quality. For example, customers may use words such as friendly, considerate, and professional to describe what they expect from service providers. These and similar descriptors are often difficult to translate into exact service specifications. Moreover, in many instances, customer wants are often industry specific. Thus, the expectations would be quite different for health care versus dry cleaning. Furthermore, customer complaints may be due in part to unrelated factors (e.g., customer’s mood or general health, the weather).

Other challenges with service quality include the reality that customer expectations often change over time and that different customers tend to have different expectations, so what one customer might view as good service quality, another customer might not be satisfied with at all. Couple these with the fact that each contact with a customer is a “moment of truth” in which service quality is instantly judged, and you begin to understand some of the challenges of achieving a consistently high perception of service quality.

If customers participate in a service system (i.e., self-service), there can be increased potential for a negative perception of quality. Consequently, adequate care must be taken to make the necessary customer acts simple and safe, especially because customers cannot be trained. So error prevention must be designed into the system.

It should also be noted that in most instances, some quality dimensions of a product or service will be more important than others, so it is important to identify customer priorities, especially when it is likely that trade-off decisions will be made at various points in design and production. Quality function deployment (described in Chapter 4) is a tool that can be helpful for that purpose.

Assessing Service Quality

A widely used tool for assessing service quality is SERVQUAL, 3 an instrument designed to obtain feedback on an organization’s ability to provide quality service to customers. It focuses on five of the previously mentioned service dimensions that influence customers’ perceptions of service quality: tangibles, reliability, responsiveness, assurance, and empathy. The results of this service quality audit help management identify service strengths and weaknesses. Of particular interest are any gaps or discrepancies in service quality. There may be discrepancies between:

  • Actual customer expectations and management perceptions of those expectations

  • Management perceptions of customer expectations and service-quality specifications

  • Service quality and the service actually delivered

  • The service actually delivered and what is communicated about the service to customers

  • Customers’ expectations of the service provider and their perceptions of provider delivery

If gaps are found, they can be related to tangibles or other service quality dimensions to address the discrepancies.

page 386 

The Determinants of Quality

The degree to which a product or a service successfully satisfies its intended purpose has four primary determinants:

  • Design

  • How well the product or service conforms to the design

  • Ease of use

  • Service after delivery

The design phase is the starting point for the level of quality eventually achieved. Design involves decisions about the specific characteristics of a product or service such as size, shape, and location. Quality of design refers to the intention of designers to include or exclude certain features in a product or service. For example, many different models of automobiles are on the market today. They differ in size, appearance, roominess, fuel economy, comfort, and materials used. These differences reflect choices made by designers that determine the quality of design. Design decisions must take into account customer wants, production or service capabilities, safety and liability (both during production and after delivery), costs, and other similar considerations.

Designers may determine customer wants from information provided by marketing, perhaps through the use of consumer surveys or other market research. Marketing may organize focus groups of consumers to express their views on a product or service (what they like and don’t like, and what they would like to have).

Designers must work closely with representatives of operations to ascertain that designs can be produced; that is, that production or service has the equipment, capacity, and skills necessary to produce or provide a particular design.

A poor design can result in difficulties in production or service. For example, materials might be difficult to obtain, specifications difficult to meet, or procedures difficult to follow. Moreover, if a design is inadequate or inappropriate for the circumstances, the best workmanship in the world may not be enough to achieve the desired quality. Also, we cannot expect a worker to achieve good results if the given tools or procedures are inadequate. Similarly, a superior design usually cannot offset poor workmanship.

The determination of quality does not stop once the product or service has been sold or delivered. Ease of use and user instructions are important. They increase the chances, but do page 387not guarantee, that a product will be used for its intended purposes and in such a way that it will continue to function properly and safely. (When faced with liability litigation, companies often argue that injuries and damages occurred because the user misused the product.) Much of the same reasoning can be applied to services. Customers, patients, clients, or other users must be clearly informed on what they should or should not do; otherwise, there is the danger they will take some action that will adversely affect quality. Some examples include the doctor who fails to specify that a medication should be taken before meals and not with orange juice and the attorney who neglects to inform a client of a deadline for filing a claim.

Much consumer education takes the form of printed instructions and labeling. Thus, manufacturers must ensure that directions for unpacking, assembling, using, maintaining, and adjusting the product—and what to do if something goes wrong (e.g., flush eyes with water, call a physician, induce vomiting, do not induce vomiting, disconnect set immediately)—are clearly visible and easily understood.

For a variety of reasons, products do not always perform as expected, and services do not always yield the desired results. Whatever the reason, it is important from a quality standpoint to remedy the situation—through recall and repair of the product, adjustment, replacement or buyback, or reevaluation of a service—and do whatever is necessary to bring the product or service up to standard.

Responsibility for Quality

It is true that all members of an organization are in some way responsible for quality, but certain parts of an organization have key areas of responsibility:

Top management. Top management is ultimately responsible for quality. While establishing strategies for quality, top management must institute programs to improve quality; guide, direct, and motivate managers and workers; and set an example by being involved in quality initiatives. Examples include taking training in quality, issuing periodic reports on quality, and attending meetings on quality.

Design. Quality products and services begin with design. This includes not only features of the product or service, it also includes attention to the processes that will be required to produce the products and/or services necessary to deliver the service to customers.

page 388 

Procurement. The procurement department is responsible for obtaining goods and services that will not detract from the quality of the organization’s goods and services.

Production/operations. Production/operations is responsible for ensuring that processes yield products and services that conform to design specifications. Monitoring processes and finding and correcting root causes of problems are important aspects of this responsibility.

Quality assurance. Quality assurance is responsible for gathering and analyzing data on problems and working with operations to solve problems.

Packaging and shipping. This department must ensure that goods are not damaged in transit, that packages are clearly labeled, that instructions are included, that all parts are included, and that shipping occurs in a timely manner.

Marketing and sales. This department is responsible for determining customers’ needs and communicating them to appropriate areas of the organization. In addition, it must report any problems with products or services to the company.

Customer service. Customer service is often the first department to learn of problems. It is responsible for communicating that information to appropriate departments, dealing in a reasonable manner with customers, working to resolve problems, and following up to confirm that the situation has been effectively remedied.

Poor quality increases certain costs incurred by the organization. The following section provides further detail on costs associated with quality.

Benefits of Good Quality

Business organizations with good or excellent quality typically benefit in a variety of ways: an enhanced reputation for quality, the ability to command premium prices, an increased market share, greater customer loyalty, lower liability costs, and fewer production or service problems—which yields higher productivity, fewer complaints from customers, lower production costs, and higher profits. Annual studies by the National Institute of Standards indicate that winners of the Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award, described later in this chapter, outperform the S&P 500 Index by a significant amount. 4

The Consequences of Poor Quality

It is important for management to recognize the different ways in which the quality of a firm’s products or services can affect the organization, and to take these into account in developing and maintaining a quality assurance program. Some of the major areas affected by quality are:

  • Loss of business

  • Liability

  • Productivity

  • Costs

Poor designs or defective products or services can result in loss of business. Failure to devote adequate attention to quality can damage a profit-oriented organization’s reputation and lead to a decreased share of the market, or it can lead to increased criticism and/or controls for a government agency or nonprofit organization.

In the retail sector, managers might not be fully aware of poor product or service quality because customers do not always report their dissatisfaction. Even so, dissatisfied customers do tend to voice their dissatisfaction, especially on social media, which can have negative implications for customer perceptions and future business.

Organizations must pay special attention to their potential liability due to damages or injuries resulting from either faulty design or poor workmanship. This applies to both products and services. Thus, a poorly designed steering arm on a car might cause the driver to lose control page 389of the car, but so could improper assembly of the steering arm. Whatever the cause, the net result is the same. Similarly, a tree surgeon might be called to cable a tree limb. If the limb later falls and causes damage to a neighbor’s car, the accident might be traced to a poorly designed procedure for cabling or to improper workmanship. Liability for poor quality has been well established in the courts. An organization’s liability costs can often be substantial, especially if large numbers of items are involved, as in the automobile industry, or if potentially widespread injury or damage is involved (e.g., an accident at a nuclear power plant). Express written warranties, as well as implied warranties, generally guarantee the product as safe when used as intended. The courts have tended to extend this to foreseeable uses, even if these uses were not intended by the producer. In the health care field, medical malpractice claims and insurance costs are contributing to skyrocketing costs and have become a major issue nationwide. It’s been estimated that medical mistakes result in about 98,000 deaths annually in the United States. Surprisingly, this number has remained fairly steady for more than a few years. If medical errors were classified as a disease, they would rank about sixth on the list of major causes of death.

Productivity and quality are often closely related. Poor quality can adversely affect productivity during the manufacturing process if parts are defective and have to be reworked, or if an assembler has to try a number of parts before finding one that fits properly. Also, poor quality in tools and equipment can lead to injuries and defective output, which must be reworked or scrapped, thereby reducing the amount of usable output for a given amount of input. Similarly, poor service can mean having to redo the service and reduce service productivity.

The cost to remedy a problem is a major consideration in quality management. The earlier a problem is identified in the process, the cheaper the cost to fix it. The cost to fix a problem at the customer end has been estimated to be about five times the cost to fix a problem at the design or production stages.

The Costs of Quality

Any serious attempt to deal with quality issues must take into account the costs associated with quality. Those costs can be classified into four categories: appraisal, prevention, internal failures, and external failures. The first three reflect costs incurred before customers receive the product (or sometimes the service), while the last occurs after customers receive the product or service. These costs are explained in the following paragraphs, and summarized in Table 9.5.

Table 9.5

Summary of quality costs

Category

Description

Examples

Appraisal costs

Costs related to measuring, evaluating, and auditing materials, parts, products, and services to assess conformance with quality standards

Inspection equipment, testing, labs, inspectors, and the interruption of production to take samples

Prevention costs

Costs related to reducing the potential for quality problems

Quality improvement programs, training, monitoring, data collection and analysis, and design costs

Internal failure costs

Costs related to defective products or services before they are delivered to customers

Rework costs, problem solving, material and product losses, scrap, and downtime

External failure costs

Costs related to delivering substandard products or services to customers

Returned goods, reworking costs, warranty costs, loss of goodwill, liability claims, and penalties

Appraisal costs relate to inspection, testing, and other activities intended to uncover defective products or services, or to assure that there are none. They include the cost of inspectors, testing, test equipment, labs, quality audits, and field testing.

Prevention costs relate to attempts to prevent defects from occurring. They include costs such as planning and administration systems, working with vendors, training, quality control procedures, and extra attention in both the design and production phases to decrease the probability of defective workmanship.

Failure costs are incurred by defective parts or products, or by faulty services. Internal failures are those discovered during the production process, whereas external failures are those discovered after delivery to the customer. Internal failures occur for a variety of reasons, including defective material from vendors, incorrect machine settings, faulty equipment, incorrect methods, incorrect processing, carelessness, and faulty or improper page 390material handling procedures. The costs of internal failures include lost production time, scrap and rework, investigation costs, possible equipment damage, and possible employee injury. Rework costs involve the salaries of workers and the additional resources needed to perform the rework (e.g., equipment, energy, raw materials). Beyond those costs are items such as inspection of reworked parts, disruption of schedules, the added costs of parts and materials in inventory waiting for reworked parts, and the paperwork needed to keep track of the items until they can be reintegrated into the process. External failures are defective products or poor service that go undetected by the producer. Resulting costs include warranty work, handling of complaints, replacements, liability/litigation, payments to customers or discounts used to offset the inferior quality, loss of customer goodwill, and opportunity costs related to lost sales.

External failure costs are typically much greater than internal failure costs on a per-unit basis. Table 9.5 summarizes quality costs.

Internal and external failure costs represent costs related to poor quality, whereas appraisal and prevention costs represent investments for achieving good quality.

An important issue in quality management is the value received from expenditures on prevention. There are two schools of thought on this. One is that prevention costs will be outweighed by savings in appraisal and failure costs. This is espoused by such people as Crosby and Juran, who are discussed in further detail later in this chapter. They believe that as the costs of defect prevention are increased, the costs of appraisal and failure decrease by much more. What this means, if true, is that the net result is lower total costs, and, thus, as Crosby suggests, quality is free. On the other hand, some managers believe that by attempting to go beyond a certain point, such expenditures on quality reduce the funds available for other objectives, such as reducing product development times and upgrading technology. The return on quality (ROQ) approach focuses on the economics of quality efforts. In this approach, quality improvement projects are viewed as investments, and as such, they are evaluated like any other investment, using metrics related to return on investment (ROI).

Ethics and Quality Management

All members of an organization have an obligation to perform their duties in an ethical manner. Ethical behavior comes into play in many situations that involve quality. One major category is substandard work, including defective products and substandard service, poor designs, shoddy workmanship, and substandard parts and raw materials. Having knowledge of this and failing to correct and report it in a timely manner is unethical and can have a number of negative consequences. These can include increased costs for organizations in terms of decreased productivity, an increase in the accident rate among employees, inconveniences and injuries to customers, and increased liability costs.

A related issue is how an organization chooses to deal with information about quality problems in products that are already in service. For example, automakers and tire makers in page 391recent years have been accused of withholding information about actual or potential quality problems. They failed to issue product recalls, or failed to divulge information, choosing instead to handle any complaints that arose on an individual basis.

9.5 QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE EXCELLENCE AWARDS

In the late 1980s and 1990s, quality awards were established to generate improvement in quality. The Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award and the European Quality Award, given annually to organizations in all sectors of the economy, have evolved from an early focus on quality management to a focus on overall organizational excellence. The Deming Prize recognizes firms that have integrated quality management into their operations.

The Baldrige Award

Named after the late Malcolm Baldrige, an industrialist and former secretary of commerce, the annual Baldrige Award is administered by the Baldrige Performance Excellence Program at the National Institute of Standards and Technology. The purpose of the award is to identify and recognize role-model organizations, establish criteria for evaluating improvement efforts (known as the Baldrige Excellence Framework), and disseminate and share best practices.

When the award was first presented in 1988, the award categories were manufacturing and small business. A few years later, a service category was added. Categories for education, health care, and nonprofit/government organizations were subsequently added. The earliest winners included Motorola, Globe Metallurgical, Xerox Corporation, and Milliken & Company. Since then, many organizations have been added to the list. For a complete listing of current and former winners, go to www.nist.gov/baldrige/award-recipients.

As the drivers of long-term success have evolved, so, too, have the award and the Baldrige Excellence Framework. Today, the Baldrige Award recognizes U.S. organizations that are role models for organization-wide excellence. Applicants’ approaches are evaluated in seven main areas: leadership; strategy; customers; measurement, analysis, and knowledge management; workforce; operations; and results.

Examiners check the extent to which organizations ensure continuous improvement in overall performance in delivering products and/or services, and provide an approach for satisfying and responding to customers and stakeholders. They examine results in five key areas: product and process outcomes, customer outcomes, workforce outcomes, leadership and governance outcomes, and financial and market outcomes. Even organizations that don’t receive the award benefit from applying: All applicants receive a written summary of strengths and opportunities for improvement in their processes and results.

Most states are served by performance excellence programs (under the umbrella of the Alliance for Performance Excellence, www.baldrigealliance.org) based on the Baldrige Framework. These award programs can serve as an entry point for organizations that want to improve their performance or eventually apply for the national award.

For more information, visit www.nist.gov/baldrige.

The European Quality Award

The European Quality Award is Europe’s most prestigious award for organizational excellence. The European Quality Award sits at the top of regional and national quality awards, and applicants have often won one or more of those awards prior to applying for the European Quality Award.

The Deming Prize

The Deming Prize, named in honor of the late W. Edwards Deming, is Japan’s highly coveted award recognizing successful quality efforts. It is given annually to any company that meets the award’s standards. Although often given to Japanese companies, companies in other countries have also received the award. The award is also given to individuals.

page 392 

The major focus of the judging is on statistical quality control, making it much narrower in scope than the Baldrige Award, which focuses more on customer satisfaction. Companies that win the Deming Prize tend to have quality programs that are detailed and well-communicated throughout the company. Their quality improvement programs also reflect the involvement of senior management and employees, customer satisfaction, and training.

9.6 QUALITY CERTIFICATION

Many firms that do business internationally recognize the importance of quality certification.

ISO 9000, 14000, and 24700

The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) promotes worldwide standards for the improvement of quality, productivity, and operating efficiency through a series of standards and guidelines. Used by industrial and business organizations, regulatory agencies, governments, and trade organizations, the standards have important economic and social benefits. Not only are they tremendously important for designers, manufacturers, suppliers, service providers, and customers, but the standards make a tremendous contribution to society in general: They increase the levels of quality and reliability, productivity, and safety, while making products and services affordable. The standards help facilitate international trade. They provide governments with a basis for health, safety, and environmental legislation. And they aid in transferring technology to developing countries.

Two of the most well-known of these are ISO 9000 and ISO 14000. ISO 9000 pertains to quality management. It concerns what an organization does to ensure its products or services conform to its customers’ requirements. ISO 14000 concerns what an organization does to minimize harmful effects to the environment caused by its operations. Both ISO 9000 and ISO 14000 relate to an organization’s processes rather than its products and services, and both stress continual improvement. Moreover, the standards are meant to be generic; no matter what the organization’s business, if it wants to establish a quality management system or an environmental management system, the system must have the essential elements contained in ISO 9000 or in ISO 14000. The ISO 9000 standards are critical for companies doing business internationally, particularly in Europe. They must go through a process that involves documenting quality procedures and on-site assessment. The process often takes 12 to 18 months. With certification comes registration in an ISO directory that companies seeking suppliers can refer to for a list of certified companies. They are generally given preference over unregistered companies. More than 40,000 companies are registered worldwide, and three-fourths of them are located in Europe.

A key requirement for registration is that a company review, refine, and map functions such as process control, inspection, purchasing, training, packaging, and delivery. Similar to the Baldrige Award, the review process involves considerable self-appraisal, resulting in problem identification and improvement. Unlike the Baldrige Award, registered companies face an ongoing series of audits, and they must be re-registered every three years.

In addition to the obvious benefits of certification for companies that want to deal with the European Union, the ISO 9000 certification and registration process is particularly helpful for companies that do not currently have a quality management system. It provides guidelines for establishing the system and making it effective.

Eight quality management principles form the basis of the latest version of ISO 9000:

  1. A customer focus

  2. Leadership

  3. Involvement of people

  4. A process approach

  5. A system approach to management

  6. Continual improvement

  7. Use of a factual approach to decision making

  8. Mutually beneficial supplier relationships

page 393 

The standards for ISO 14000 certification bear upon three major areas:

Management systems—systems development and integration of environmental responsibilities into business planning

Operations—consumption of natural resources and energy

Environmental systems—measuring, assessing, and managing emissions, effluents, and other waste streams

ISO 24700 pertains to the quality and performance of office equipment that contains reused components. ISO/IEC 24700 specifies product characteristics for use in an original equipment manufacturer’s or authorized third-party’s declaration of conformity to demonstrate that a marketed product that contains reused components performs equivalent to being new, meeting equivalent-to-new component specifications and performance criteria, and continues to meet all the safety and environmental criteria required by responsibly built products. It is relevant to marketed products whose manufacturing and recovery processes result in the reuse of components.

If you’d like to learn more about ISO standards, visit the International Organization for Standardization website at www.ISO.org/ISO/en/ISOonline.frontpage or the American Society for Quality website at www.asq.org.

9.7 QUALITY AND THE SUPPLY CHAIN

Business leaders are increasingly recognizing the importance of their supply chains in achieving their quality goals. Achievement requires measuring customer perceptions of quality, identifying problem areas, and correcting those problems.

When dealing with supplier quality in global supply chains, companies are finding a wide range in the degree of sophistication concerning quality assurance. Although developed countries often have a fair level of sophistication, little or no awareness of modern quality practices may be found in some less-developed countries. This poses important liability issues for companies that outsource to those areas.

An interesting situation is outsourcing in the pharmaceutical industry. Offshore suppliers offer low prices that domestic producers can’t match. However, the cost advantage of offshore producers is not based solely on lower labor costs; a significant “advantage” is the fact page 394that domestic producers undergo strict and costly government quality regulations and unannounced inspections that offshore producers are not subject to. While this lowers the costs to importers, it also increases their liability risks.

Increasingly, the emphasis in supply chain quality management is on reducing outsourcing risk, as well as product or service variation and overhead. Risk comes from the use of substandard materials or work methods, which can lead to inferior product quality and potential product liability. Tighter control of vendors and worker training can reduce these risks. Variation results from processes that are not in control; it can be reduced through statistical quality control. Overhead can be reduced by assigning quality assurance responsibility to vendors, while customers operate in a quality audit mode, with some monitoring of vendor quality efforts.

Supply chain quality management can benefit from a collaborative relationship with suppliers that includes helping suppliers with quality assurance efforts, as well as information sharing on quality-related matters. Ideally, improving supply chain quality can become part of an organization’s continuous improvement efforts.

9.8 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

A primary role of management is to lead an organization in its daily operation and to maintain it as a viable entity into the future. Quality has become an important factor in both of these objectives.

The term total quality management (TQM) refers to a quest for quality in an organization. There are three key philosophies in this approach. One is a never-ending push to improve, which is referred to as continuous improvement; the second is the involvement of everyone in the organization; and the third is a goal of customer satisfaction, which means meeting or exceeding customer expectations. TQM expands the traditional view of quality—looking only at the quality of the final product or services—to looking at the quality of every aspect of the process that produces the product or service. TQM systems are intended to prevent poor quality from occurring.

We can describe the TQM approach as follows:

  1. Find out what customers want. This might involve the use of surveys, focus groups, interviews, or some other technique that integrates the customer’s voice in the decision-making process. Be sure to include the internal customer (the next person in the process), as well as the external customer (the final customer).

  2. Design a product or service that will meet (or exceed) what customers want. Make it easy to use and easy to produce.

  3. Design processes that facilitate doing the job right the first time. Determine where mistakes are likely to occur and try to prevent them. When mistakes do occur, find out why so they are less likely to occur again. Strive to make the process “mistake-proof.” This is sometimes referred to as a fail-safing : Elements are incorporated in product or service design that make it virtually impossible for an employee (or sometimes a customer) to do something incorrectly. The Japanese term for this is pokayoke. Another term sometimes used is mistake-proofing. Examples include parts that fit together one way only and appliance plugs that can be inserted into a wall outlet the correct way only. A term that is sometimes used for this is foolproofing, but this term may be taken to imply that employees (or customers) are fools—not a wise choice!

  4. Keep track of results, and use them to guide improvement in the system. Never stop trying to improve.

  5. Extend these concepts throughout the supply chain.

  6. Top management must be involved and committed. Otherwise, TQM will just be another fad that fails and fades away.

Many companies have successfully implemented TQM programs. Successful TQM programs are built through the dedication and combined efforts of everyone in the organization.

page 395 

The preceding description provides a good idea of what TQM is all about, but it doesn’t tell the whole story. A number of other elements of TQM are important:

  1. Continuous improvement. The philosophy that seeks to improve all factors related to the process of converting inputs into outputs on an ongoing basis is called continuous improvement . It covers equipment, methods, materials, and people. Under continuous improvement, the old adage “If it ain’t broke, don’t fix it” gets transformed into “Just because it isn’t broke doesn’t mean it can’t be improved.”

    The concept of continuous improvement was not new, but it did not receive much interest in the United States for a while, even though it originated here. However, many Japanese companies used it for years, and it became a cornerstone of the Japanese approach to production. The Japanese use the term kaizen to refer to continuous improvement. The successes of Japanese companies caused other companies to reexamine many of their approaches. This resulted in a strong interest in the continuous improvement approach.

  2. Competitive benchmarking. This involves identifying other organizations that are the best at something and studying how they do it to learn how to improve your operation. The company need not be in the same line of business. For example, Xerox used the mail-order company L.L. Bean to benchmark order filling.

  3. Employee empowerment. Giving workers the responsibility for improvements and the authority to make changes to accomplish them provides strong motivation for employees. This puts decision making into the hands of those who are closest to the job and have considerable insight into problems and solutions.

  4. Team approach. The use of teams for problem solving and to achieve consensus takes advantage of group synergy, gets people involved, and promotes a spirit of cooperation and shared values among employees.

  5. Decisions based on facts rather than opinions. Management gathers and analyzes data as a basis for decision making.

  6. Knowledge of tools. Employees and managers are trained in the use of quality tools.

  7. Supplier quality. Suppliers must be included in quality assurance and quality improvement efforts so their processes are capable of delivering quality parts and materials in a timely manner.

  8. Champion. A TQM champion’s job is to promote the value and importance of TQM principles throughout the company.

  9. Quality at the source. Quality at the source refers to the philosophy of making each worker responsible for the quality of his or her work. The idea is to “Do it right the first time.” Workers are expected to provide goods or services that meet specifications and to find and correct mistakes that occur. In effect, each worker becomes a quality inspector for his or her work. When the work is passed on to the next operation in the process (the internal customer) or, if that step is the last in the process, to the ultimate customer, the worker is “certifying” that it meets quality standards.

    This accomplishes a number of things: (a) it places direct responsibility for quality on the person(s) who directly affect it; (b) it removes the adversarial relationship that often exists between quality control inspectors and production workers; and (c) it motivates workers by giving them control over their work, as well as pride in it.

  10. Suppliers are partners in the process, and long-term relationships are encouraged. This gives suppliers a vital stake in providing quality goods and services. Suppliers, too, are expected to provide quality at the source, thereby reducing or eliminating the need to inspect deliveries from suppliers.

It would be incorrect to think of TQM as merely a collection of techniques. Rather, TQM reflects a whole new attitude toward quality. It is about the culture of an organization. To truly reap the benefits of TQM, the organization must change its culture.

page 396 

Table 9.6 illustrates the differences between cultures of a TQM organization and a more traditional organization.

Table 9.6

Comparing the cultures of TQM and traditional organizations

Aspect

Traditional

TQM

Overall mission

Maximize return on investment

Meet or exceed customer expectations

Objectives

Emphasis on short term

Balance of long term and short term

Management

Not always open; sometimes inconsistent objectives

Open; encourages employee input; consistent objectives

Role of manager

Issue orders; enforce

Coach; remove barriers; build trust

Customer requirements

Not highest priority; may be unclear

Highest priority; important to identify and understand

Problems

Assign blame; punish

Identify and resolve

Problem solving

Not systematic; individuals

Systematic; teams

Improvement

Erratic

Continuous

Suppliers

Adversarial

Partners

Jobs

Narrow, specialized; much individual effort

Broad, more general; much team effort

Focus

Product oriented

Process oriented

Obstacles to Implementing TQM

Companies have had varying success in implementing TQM. Some have been quite successful, but others have struggled. Part of the difficulty may be with the process by which it is implemented rather than with the principles of TQM. Among the factors cited in the literature are the following:

  • Lack of a companywide definition of quality: Efforts aren’t coordinated; people are working at cross-purposes, addressing different issues, and using different measures of success.

    page 397 

  • Lack of a strategic plan for change: Without such a plan the chance of success is lessened and the need to address strategic implications of change is ignored.

  • Lack of a customer focus: Without a customer focus, there is a risk of customer dissatisfaction.

  • Poor intraorganizational communication: The left hand doesn’t know what the right hand is doing; frustration, waste, and confusion ensue.

  • Lack of employee empowerment: Not empowering employees gives the impression of not trusting employees to fix problems, adds red tape, and delays solutions.

  • View of quality as a “quick fix”: Quality needs to be a long-term, continuing effort.

  • Emphasis on short-term financial results: “Duct-tape” solutions often treat symptoms; spend a little now—a lot more later.

  • Inordinate presence of internal politics and “turf ” issues: These can sap the energy of an organization and derail the best of ideas.

  • Lack of strong motivation: Managers need to make sure employees are motivated.

  • Lack of time to devote to quality initiatives: Don’t add more work without adding additional resources.

  • Lack of leadership: Managers need to be leaders. 5

This list of potential problems can serve as a guideline for organizations contemplating implementing TQM or as a checklist for those having trouble implementing it.

Criticisms of TQM

TQM programs are touted as a way for companies to improve their competitiveness, which is a very worthwhile objective. Nonetheless, TQM programs are not without criticism. The following are some of the major criticisms:

  • Overzealous advocates may pursue TQM programs blindly, focusing attention on quality even though other priorities may be more important (e.g., responding quickly to a competitor’s advances).

  • Programs may not be linked to the strategies of the organization in a meaningful way.

  • Quality-related decisions may not be tied to market performance. For instance, customer satisfaction may be emphasized to the extent that its cost far exceeds any direct or indirect benefit of doing so.

  • Failure to carefully plan a program before embarking on it can lead to false starts, employee confusion, and meaningless results.

  • Organizations sometimes pursue continuous improvement (i.e., incremental improvement) when dramatic improvement is needed.

  • Quality efforts may not be tied to results.

Note that there is nothing inherently wrong with TQM; the problem is how some individuals or organizations misuse it. Let’s turn our attention to problem solving and process improvement.

page 398 

9.9 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PROCEss IMPROVEMENT

Problem solving is one of the basic procedures of TQM. In order to be successful, problem-solving efforts should follow a standard approach. Table 9.7 describes the basic steps in the TQM problem-solving process.

Table 9.7

Basic steps in problem solving

Step 1

Define the problem and establish an improvement goal.

Give problem definition careful consideration; don’t rush through this step because this will serve as the focal point of problem-solving efforts.

Step 2

Develop performance measures and collect data.

The solution must be based on facts. Possible tools include check sheet, scatter diagram, histogram, run chart, and control chart.

Step 3

Analyze the problem.

Possible tools include Pareto chart, cause-and-effect diagram.

Step 4

Generate potential solutions.

Methods include brainstorming, interviewing, and surveying.

Step 5

Choose a solution.

Identify the criteria for choosing a solution. (Refer to the goal established in Step 1.) Apply criteria to potential solutions and select the best one.

Step 6

Implement the solution.

Keep everyone informed.

Step 7

Monitor the solution to see if it accomplishes the goal.

If not, modify the solution, or return to Step 1. Possible tools include control chart and run chart.

An important aspect of problem solving in the TQM approach is eliminating the cause so that the problem does not recur. This is why users of the TQM approach often like to think of problems as “opportunities for improvement.”

The Plan-Do-Study-Act Cycle

The plan-do-study-act (PDSA) cycle , also referred to as either the Shewhart cycle or the Deming wheel, is the conceptual basis for problem-solving activities. The cycle is illustrated in Figure 9.1. Representing the process with a circle underscores its continuing nature. There are four basic steps in the cycle:

image

Source: Figure from Donna Summers, Quality, 2nd ed., p. 67. 2000. Prentice Hall, Inc. Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ.

Plan. Begin by studying the current process. Document that process, and then collect data on the process or problem. Next, analyze the data and develop a plan for improvement. Specify measures for evaluating the plan.

Do. Implement the plan, on a small scale if possible. Document any changes made during this phase. Collect data systematically for evaluation.

Study. Evaluate the data collection during the do phase. Check how closely the results match the original goals of the plan phase.

Act. If the results are successful, standardize the new method and communicate the new method to all people associated with the process. Implement training for the new method. If the results are unsuccessful, revise the plan and repeat the process or cease this project.

Employing this sequence of steps provides a systematic approach to continuous improvement.

Process improvement is a systematic approach to improving a process. It involves documentation, measurement, and analysis for the purpose of improving the functioning of a process. page 399Typical goals of process improvement include increasing customer satisfaction, achieving higher quality, reducing waste, reducing cost, increasing productivity, and reducing processing time.

Table 9.8 provides an overview of process improvement.

Table 9.8

Overview of process improvement

  1. Map the process

    1. Collect information about the process; identify each step in the process. For each step, determine:

      The inputs and outputs.

      The people involved.

      The decisions that are made.

      Document such measures as time, cost, space used, waste, employee morale and any employee turnover, accidents and/or safety hazards, working conditions, revenues and/or profits, quality, and customer satisfaction, as appropriate.

    2. Prepare a flowchart that accurately depicts the process. Make sure key activities and decisions are represented.

  2. Analyze the process

    1. Ask these questions about the process:

      Is the flow logical?

      Are any steps or activities missing?

      Are there any duplications?

    2. Ask these questions about each step:

      Could it be eliminated?

      Does the step add value?

      Does any waste occur at this step?

      Could the time be shortened?

      Could the cost to perform the step be reduced?

      Could two (or more) steps be combined?

  3. Redesign the process

    Using the results of the analysis, redesign the process. Document the improvements; potential measures include reductions in time, cost, space, waste, employee turnover, accidents, safety hazards, and increases/ improvements in employee morale, working conditions, revenues/profits, quality, and customer satisfaction.

page 400 

Six Sigma

The term Six Sigma has several meanings. Statistically, Six Sigma means having no more than 3.4 defects per million opportunities in any process, product, or service. Conceptually, the term is much broader, referring to a program designed to reduce the occurrence of defects to achieve lower costs and improved customer satisfaction. It is based on the application of certain tools and techniques to selected projects to achieve strategic business results. In the business world, Six-Sigma programs have become a key way to improve quality, save time, cut costs, and improve customer satisfaction. Six-Sigma programs can be employed in design, production, service, inventory management, and delivery. It is important for Six-Sigma projects to be aligned with organization strategy.

Motorola pioneered the concept of a Six-Sigma program in the 1980s and actually trade-marked the term. Today, Six-Sigma concepts are widely used by businesses, governments, consultants, and even the military as a business performance methodology.

There are management and technical components of Six-Sigma programs. The management component involves providing strong leadership, defining performance metrics, selecting projects likely to achieve business results, and selecting and training appropriate people. The technical component involves improving process performance, reducing variation, utilizing statistical methods, and designing a structured improvement strategy, which involves definition, measurement, analysis, improvement, and control.

For Six Sigma to succeed in any organization, buy-in at the top is essential. Top management must formulate and communicate the company’s overall objectives and lead the program for a successful deployment. Other key players in Six-Sigma programs are program champions, “master black belts,” “black belts,” and “green belts.” Champions identify and rank potential projects, help select and evaluate candidates, manage program resources, and serve as advocates for the program. Master black belts have extensive training in statistics and use of quality tools. They are teachers and mentors of black belts. Black belts are project team leaders responsible for implementing process improvement projects. They have typically completed four weeks of Six-Sigma training and have demonstrated mastery of the subject matter through an exam and successful completion of one or more projects. Green belts are members of project teams.

Black belts play a pivotal role in the success of Six-Sigma programs. They influence change, facilitate teamwork, provide leadership in applying tools and techniques, and convey knowledge and skills to green belts. Black belt candidates generally have a proven strength in either a technical discipline such as engineering or a business discipline. Candidates also must have strong “people skills” and be able to facilitate change. In addition, they must be proficient in applying continuous improvement, as well as statistical methods and tools. A black belt must understand the technical aspects of process improvement, and also the expected business results (time, money, and quality improvement).

Six Sigma is based on these guiding principles:

  • Reduction of variation is an important goal.

  • The methodology is data driven; it requires valid measurements.

  • Outputs are determined by inputs; focus on modifying and/or controlling inputs to improve outputs.

  • Only a critical few inputs have a significant impact on outputs (the Pareto effect); concentrate on those.

DMAIC (define-measure-analyze-improve-control) is a formalized problem-solving process of Six Sigma. It is composed of five steps that can be applied to any process to improve its effectiveness. The steps are:

  1. Define: Set the context and objectives for improvement.

  2. Measure: Determine the baseline performance and capability of the process.

  3. Analyze: Use data and tools to understand the cause-and-effect relationships of the process.

  4. Improve: Develop the modifications that lead to a validated improvement in the process.

  5. Control: Establish plans and procedures to ensure that improvements are sustained.

page 401 

9.10 QUALITY TOOLS

An organization can use a number of tools for problem solving and process improvement. This section describes eight of these tools, which aid in data collection and interpretation, and provide the basis for decision making.

The first seven tools are often referred to as the seven basic quality tools. Figure 9.2 provides a quick overview of the seven tools.

Flowcharts. A flowchart is a visual representation of a process. As a problem-solving tool, a flowchart can help investigators identify possible points in a process where problems occur. Figure 9.3 illustrates a flowchart for catalog telephone orders in which potential failure points are highlighted.

The diamond shapes in the flowchart represent decision points in the process, and the rectangular shapes denote procedures. The arrows show the direction of “flow” of the steps in the process.

To construct a simple flowchart, begin by listing the steps in a process. Then, classify each step as either a procedure or a decision (or check) point. Try not to make the flowchart too detailed or it may be overwhelming, but be careful not to omit any key steps either.

Check sheets. A check sheet is a simple tool frequently used for problem identification. Check sheets provide a format that enables users to record and organize data in a way that facilitates collection and analysis. This format might be one of simple checkmarks. Check sheets are designed on the basis of what the users are attempting to learn by collecting data.

Many different formats can be used for a check sheet, and there are many different types of sheets. One frequently used form of check sheet deals with type of defect, another with location of defects. These are illustrated in Figures 9.4 and 9.5

Figure 9.4 shows tallies that denote the type of defect and the time of day each occurred. Problems with missing labels tend to occur early in the day and smeared print tends to occur late in the day, whereas off-center labels are found throughout the day. Identifying types of defects and when they occur can help pinpoint causes of the defects.

Figure 9.5 makes it easy to see where defects on the product—in this case, a glove—are occurring. Defects seem to be occurring on the tips of the thumb and first finger, in the finger valleys (especially between the thumb and first finger), and in the center of the gloves. Again, this may help determine why the defects occur and lead to a solution.

Histograms. A histogram can be useful in getting a sense of the distribution of observed values. Among other things, one can see if the distribution is symmetrical, what the range of values is, and if there are any unusual values. Figure 9.6 illustrates a histogram. Note the two peaks. This suggests the possibility of two distributions with different centers. Possible causes might be two workers or two suppliers with different quality.

Pareto Analysis. Pareto analysis is a technique for focusing attention on the most important problem areas. The Pareto concept, named after the 19th-century Italian economist Vilfredo Pareto, is that a relatively few factors generally account for a large percentage of the total cases (e.g., complaints, defects, problems). The idea is to classify the cases according to degree of importance and focus on resolving the most important, leaving the less important. Often referred to as the 80–20 rule, the Pareto concept states that approximately 80 percent of the problems come from 20 percent of the items. For instance, 80 percent of machine breakdowns come from 20 percent of the machines, and 80 percent of the product defects come from 20 percent of the causes of defects.

Often, it is useful to prepare a chart that shows the number of occurrences by category, arranged in order of frequency. Figure 9.7 illustrates such a chart corresponding to the check sheet shown in Figure 9.4. The dominance of the problem with off-center labels becomes apparent. Presumably, the manager and employees would focus on trying to resolve this problem. Once they accomplished that, they could address the remaining defects in similar fashion; “smeared print” would be the next major category to be resolved, and so on. Additional check sheets would be used to collect data to verify that the defects in these categories have been eliminated or greatly reduced. Hence, in later Pareto diagrams, categories such as “off-center” may still appear but would be much less prominent.

page 402 

image

page 403 

image image image

page 404 

image image

Scatter Diagrams. A scatter diagram can be useful in deciding if there is a correlation between the values of two variables. A correlation may point to a cause of a problem. Figure 9.8 shows an example of a scatter diagram. In this particular diagram, there is a positive (upward-sloping) relationship between the humidity and the number of errors per hour. High values of humidity correspond to high numbers of errors, and vice versa. On the other hand, a negative (downward-sloping) relationship would mean that when values of one variable are low, values of the other variable are high, and vice versa.

image

The higher the correlation between the two variables, the less scatter in the points; the points will tend to line up. Conversely, if there were little or no relationship between two variables, the points would be completely scattered. In Figure 9.8, the correlation between humidity and errors seems strong because the points appear to scatter along an imaginary line.

Control Charts. A control chart can be used to monitor a process to see if the process output is random. It can help detect the presence of correctable causes of variation. Figure 9.9 illustrates a control chart. Control charts also can indicate when a problem occurred and give page 405insight into what caused the problem. Control charts were introduced in Chapter 3, and are described in detail in Chapter 10.

image

Cause-and-Effect Diagrams. A cause-and-effect diagram offers a structured approach to the search for the possible cause(s) of a problem. It is also known as a fishbone diagram because of its shape, or an Ishikawa diagram, after the Japanese professor who developed the approach to aid workers overwhelmed by the number of possible sources of problems when problem solving. This tool helps to organize problem-solving efforts by identifying categories of factors that might be causing problems. This tool is often used after brainstorming sessions to organize the ideas generated. Figure 9.10 illustrates one form of a cause-and-effect diagram.

image

Some errors are more likely causes than others, depending on the nature of the errors. If the cause is still not obvious at this point, additional investigation into the root cause may be necessary, involving a more in-depth analysis. Often, more detailed information can be obtained by asking who, what, where, when, why, and how questions about factors that appear to be the most likely sources of problems.

page 406 

Run Charts. A run chart can be used to track the values of a variable over time. This can aid in identifying trends or other patterns that may be occurring. Figure 9.11 provides an example of a run chart showing a decreasing trend in accident frequency over time. Important advantages of run charts are ease of construction and ease of interpretation.

image

Illustrations of the Use of Graphical Tools

This section presents some illustrations of the use of graphical tools in process or product improvement. Figure 9.12 begins with a check sheet that can be used to develop a Pareto chart of the types of errors found. That leads to a more focused analysis of the most frequently occurring type of error using a cause-and-effect diagram. Additional cause-and-effect diagrams, such as errors by location, might also be used.

image

Figure 9.13 shows how Pareto charts measure the amount of improvement achieved in a before-and-after scenario of errors.

image

Figure 9.14 illustrates how control charts track two phases of improvement in a process that was initially out of control.

image

page 407 

Methods for Generating Ideas

Some additional tools that are useful for problem solving and/or for process improvement are brainstorming, quality circles, and benchmarking.

Brainstorming. Brainstorming is a technique in which a group of people share thoughts and ideas on problems in a relaxed atmosphere that encourages unrestrained collective thinking. The goal is to generate a free flow of ideas on identifying problems, and finding causes, solutions, and ways to implement solutions. In successful brainstorming, criticism is absent, no single member is allowed to dominate sessions, and all ideas are welcomed. Structured brainstorming is an approach to assure that everyone participates.

Quality Circles. One way companies have tapped employees for ideas concerning quality improvement is through quality circles . The circles comprise a number of workers who get together periodically to discuss ways of improving products and processes. Not only are quality circles a valuable source of worker input, they also can motivate workers, if handled properly, by demonstrating management interest in worker ideas. Quality circles are usually less structured and more informal than teams involved in continuous improvement, but in some organizations quality circles have evolved into continuous improvement teams. Perhaps a major distinction between quality circles and teams is the amount of authority given to the teams.

Typically, quality circles have had very little authority to implement any but minor changes; continuous improvement teams are sometimes given a great deal of authority. Consequently, continuous improvement teams have the added motivation generated by empowerment.

page 408 

Benchmarking. Benchmarking is an approach that can inject new energy into improvement efforts. Summarized in Table 9.9, benchmarking is the process of measuring an organization’s performance on a key customer requirement against the best in the industry, or against the best in any industry. Its purpose is to establish a standard against which performance is judged, and to identify a model for learning how to improve. A benchmark demonstrates the degree to which customers of other organizations are satisfied.

Table 9.9

The benchmarking approach

  1. What organizations do it the best?

  2. How do they do it?

  3. How do we do it now?

  4. How can we change to match or exceed the best?

Once a benchmark has been identified, the goal is to meet or exceed that standard through improvements in appropriate processes. The benchmarking process usually involves these steps:

  1. Identify a critical process that needs improvement (e.g., order entry, distribution, service after sale).

  2. Identify an organization that excels in the process, preferably the best.

  3. Contact the benchmark organization, visit it, and study the benchmark activity.

  4. Analyze the data.

  5. Improve the critical process at your own organization.

Selecting an industry leader provides insight into what competitors are doing, but competitors may be reluctant to share this information. Several organizations are responding to this difficulty by conducting benchmarking studies and providing that information to other organizations without revealing the sources of the data. Selecting organizations that are world leaders in different industries is another alternative.

page 409 

9.11 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

All customers are concerned with the quality of goods or services they receive. For this reason alone, business organizations have a vital, strategic interest in achieving and maintaining high quality standards. Moreover, there is a positive link between quality and productivity, giving an additional incentive for achieving high quality and being able to present that image to current and potential customers.

The best business organizations view quality as a never-ending journey. That is, they strive for continual improvement with the attitude that no matter how good quality is, it can always be improved, and there are benefits for doing so.

In order for total quality management to be successful, it is essential that a majority of those in an organization buy in to the idea. Otherwise, there is a risk that a significant portion of the benefits of the approach will not be realized. Therefore, it is important to give this sufficient attention, and to confirm that concordance exists before plunging ahead. A key aspect of this is a top-down approach: Top management needs to be visibly involved and needs to be supportive, both financially and emotionally. Also important is educating managers and workers in the concepts, tools, and procedures of quality. Again, if education is incomplete, there is the risk that TQM will not produce the desired benefits.

And here’s a note of caution: Although customer retention rates can have a dramatic impact on profitability, customer satisfaction does not always guarantee customer loyalty. Consequently, organizations may need to develop a retention strategy to deal with this possibility.

It is not enough for an organization to incorporate quality into its operations; the entire supply chain must be involved. Problems such as defects in purchased parts, long lead times, and late or missed deliveries of goods or services all negatively impact an organization’s ability to satisfy its customers. So it is essential to incorporate quality throughout the supply chain.

1 Adapted from David Garvin, “Competing on the Eight Dimensions of Quality.” Harvard Business Review 65, no. 6 (1987). Copyright © 1987 by the Harvard Business School Publishing Corporation; all rights reserved.

2 Adapted from Valerie A. Zeithaml, A. Parasuraman, and Leonard L. Berry, Delivering Quality Service and Balancing Customer Expectations (New York: The Free Press, 1990); and J. R. Evans and W. M. Lindsey, The Management and Control of Quality, 3rd ed. (St. Paul, MN: West Publishing, 1996).

3 Valarie A. Zeithaml, A. Parasuraman, and Leonard L. Berry, Delivering Quality Service: Balancing Customer Perceptions and Expectations (New York: The Free Press, 1990), p 26.

4 “Baldrige Index Outperforms S&P 500 by Almost 5 to 1,” press release, available at www.quality.nist.gov.

5 Excerpt from Gary Salegna and Farzaneh Fazel, “Obstacles to Implementing Quality.” Quality Progress, July 2000, p. 53.

page 418 

page 419 

10.1 INTRODUCTION

Quality assurance that relies primarily on inspection of lots (batches) of previously produced items is referred to as acceptance sampling. It is described in the chapter supplement which is on the book’s website. Quality control efforts that occur during production are referred to as statistical process control, and these we examine in the following sections.

The best companies emphasize designing quality into the process, thereby greatly reducing the need for inspection or control efforts. As you might expect, different business organizations page 420are in different stages of this evolutionary process: Some rely heavily on inspection. However, inspection alone is generally not sufficient to achieve a reasonable level of quality. Many occupy a middle ground that involves some inspection and a great deal of process control. Figure 10.1 illustrates these phases of quality assurance.

image

10.2 INSPECTION

Inspection is an appraisal activity that compares goods or services to a standard. Inspection is a vital but often unappreciated aspect of quality control. Although for well-designed processes little inspection is necessary, inspection cannot be completely eliminated. And with increased outsourcing of products and services, inspection has taken on a new level of significance. In lean organizations, inspection is less of an issue than it is for other organizations because lean organizations place extra emphasis on quality in the design of both products and processes. Moreover, in lean operations, workers are responsible for quality (quality at the source). However, many organizations do not operate in a lean mode, so inspection is important for them. This is particularly true of service operations, where quality continues to be a challenge for management.

Inspection can occur at three points: before production, during production, and after production. The logic of checking conformance before production is to make sure that inputs are acceptable. The logic of checking conformance during production is to make sure the conversion of inputs into outputs is proceeding in an acceptable manner. The logic of checking conformance of output is to make a final verification of conformance before passing goods on to customers.

Inspection before and after production often involves acceptance sampling procedures; monitoring during the production process is referred to as process control. Figure 10.2 gives an overview of where these two procedures are applied in the production process.

image

To determine whether a process is functioning as intended or to verify that a batch or lot of raw materials or final products does not contain more than a specified percentage of defective goods, it is necessary to physically examine at least some of the items in question. The purpose of inspection is to provide information on the degree to which items conform to a standard. The basic issues are:

  • How much to inspect and how often

  • At what points in the process inspection should occur

  • Whether to inspect in a centralized or on-site location

  • Whether to inspect attributes (i.e., count the number of times something occurs) or variables (i.e., measure the value of a characteristic)

page 421 

Consider, for example, inspection at an intermediate step in the manufacture of laptop computers. Because inspection costs are often significant, questions naturally arise about whether one needs to inspect every computer or whether a small sample of computers will suffice. Moreover, although inspections could be made at numerous points in the production process, it is not generally cost-effective to make inspections at every point. Hence, the question comes up of which point(s) should be designated for inspections. Once the point(s) have been identified, a manager must decide whether to remove the computers from the line and take them to a lab, where specialized equipment might be available to perform certain tests, or to test them where they are being made. We will examine these options in the following sections.

How Much to Inspect and How Often

The amount of inspection can range from no inspection whatsoever to inspection of each item numerous times. Low-cost, high-volume items such as paper clips, roofing nails, and wooden pencils often require little inspection because (1) the cost associated with passing defective items is quite low and (2) the processes that produce these items are usually highly reliable, so defects are rare. Conversely, high-cost, low-volume items that have large costs associated with passing defective products often require more intensive inspections. Thus, critical components of a manned-flight space vehicle are closely scrutinized because of the risk to human safety and the high cost of mission failure. In high-volume systems, automated inspection is one option that may be employed.

The majority of quality control applications lie somewhere between the two extremes. Most require some inspection, but it is neither possible nor economically feasible to critically examine every part of a product or every aspect of a service for control purposes. The cost of inspection, resulting in interruptions of a process or delays caused by inspection, and the manner of testing, typically outweigh the benefits of 100 percent inspection, unless automatic inspection with sensors or cameras is possible and cost effective. Note that for manual inspection, even 100 percent inspection does not guarantee that all defects will be found and removed. Inspection is a process, and hence, subject to variation. Boredom and fatigue are factors that cause inspection mistakes. Moreover, when destructive testing is involved (items are destroyed by testing), that must be taken into account. However, the cost of letting undetected defects slip through is sufficiently high enough that inspection cannot be completely ignored. page 422The amount of inspection needed is governed by the costs of inspection and the expected costs of passing defective items. As illustrated in Figure 10.3, if inspection activities increase, inspection costs increase, but the costs of undetected defects decrease. The traditional goal was to minimize the sum of these two costs. In other words, it may not pay to attempt to catch every defect, particularly if the cost of inspection exceeds the penalties associated with letting some defects get through. Every reduction in defective output reduces costs and increases customer satisfaction.

image

As a rule, operations with a high proportion of human involvement necessitate more inspection effort than mechanical operations, which tend to be more reliable.

The frequency of inspection depends largely on the rate at which a process may go out of control or on the number of lots being inspected. A stable process will require only infrequent checks, whereas an unstable one or one that has recently given trouble will require more frequent checks. Likewise, many small lots will require more samples than a few large lots because it is important to obtain sample data from each lot. For high-volume, repetitive operations, computerized automatic inspections at critical points in a process are cost-effective.

Where to Inspect in the Process

Many operations have numerous possible inspection points. Because each inspection adds to the cost of the product or service, it is important to restrict inspection efforts to the points where they can do the most good. In manufacturing, some of the typical inspection points are:

  • Raw materials and purchased parts. There is little sense in paying for goods that do not meet quality standards and in expending time and effort on material that is bad to begin with. Supplier certification programs can reduce or eliminate the need for inspection.

  • Finished products. Customer satisfaction and the firm’s image are at stake here, and repairing or replacing products in the field is usually much more costly than doing it at the factory. Likewise, the seller is usually responsible for shipping costs on returns, and payments for goods or service may be held up pending delivery of satisfactory goods or remedial service. Well-designed processes, products and services, quality at the source, and process monitoring can reduce or eliminate the need for inspection.

  • Before a costly operation. The point is to not waste costly labor or machine time on items that are already defective.

  • Before an irreversible process. In many cases, items can be reworked up to a certain point; beyond that point they cannot. For example, pottery can be reworked prior to firing. After that, defective pottery must be discarded or sold as seconds at a lower price.

  • Before a covering process. Painting, plating, and assemblies often mask defects.

page 423 

Inspection can be used as part of an effort to improve process yield. One measure of process yield is the ratio of output of good product to the total output. Inspection at key points can help guide process improvement efforts to reduce the scrap rate and improve the overall process yield, and reduce or eliminate the need for inspection.

In the service sector, inspection points are incoming purchased materials and supplies, personnel, service interfaces (e.g., service counter), and outgoing completed work (e.g., repaired appliances). Table 10.1 illustrates a number of examples.

TABLE 10.1

Examples of inspection points in service organizations

Type of Business

Inspection Points

Characteristics

Fast food

Cashier

Accuracy

Counter area

Appearance, productivity

Eating area

Cleanliness, no loitering

Building and grounds

Appearance, safety hazards

Kitchen

Cleanliness, purity of food, food storage, health regulations

Parking lot

Safety, good lighting

Hotel/motel

Accounting/billing

Accuracy, timeliness

Building and grounds

Appearance and safety

Main desk

Appearance, waiting times, accuracy of bills

Maid service

Completeness, productivity

Personnel

Appearance, manners, productivity

Reservations/occupancy

Over/underbooking, percent occupancy

Restaurants

Kitchen, menus, meals, bills

Room service

Waiting time, quality of food

Supplies

Ordering, receiving, inventories

Supermarket

Cashiers

Accuracy, courtesy, productivity

Deliveries

Quality, quantity

Produce

Freshness, ample stock

Aisles and stockrooms

Uncluttered layout

Inventory control

Stock-outs

Shelf stock

Ample supply, rotation of perishables

Shelf displays

Appearance

Checkouts

Waiting time

Shopping carts

Good working condition, ample supply, theft/vandalism

Parking lot

Safety, good lighting

Personnel

Appearance, productivity

Doctor’s office

Waiting room

Appearance, comfortable

Examination room

Clean, temperature controlled

Doctor

Neat, friendly, concerned, skillful, knowledgeable

Doctor’s assistant

Neat, friendly, concerned, skillful

Patient records

Accurate, up-to-date

Billing

Accurate

Other

Waiting time minimal, adequate time with doctor

page 424 

Off-Site versus On-Site Inspection

Some situations require that inspections be performed on site. For example, inspecting the hull of a ship for cracks requires inspectors to visit the ship. At other times, specialized tests can best be performed in a lab (e.g., performing medical tests, analyzing food samples, testing metals for hardness, running viscosity tests on lubricants).

The central issue in the decision concerning on-site or lab inspections is whether the advantages of specialized lab tests are worth the time and interruption needed to obtain the results. Reasons favoring on-site inspection include quicker decisions and avoidance of introduction of extraneous factors (e.g., damage or other alteration of samples during transportation to the lab). On the other hand, specialized equipment and a more favorable test environment page 425(less noise and confusion, lack of vibrations, absence of dust, and no workers “helping” with inspections) offer strong arguments for using a lab.

Some companies rely on self-inspections by operators if errors can be traced back to specific operators. This places responsibility for errors at their source ( quality at the source).

10.3 STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL

Quality control is concerned with the quality of conformance of a process: Does the output of a process conform to the intent of design? Variations in characteristics of process output provide the rationale for process control. Statistical process control (SPC) is used to evaluate process output to decide if a process is “in control” or if corrective action is needed.

Process Variability

All processes generate output that exhibits some degree of variability. The issue is whether the output variations are within an acceptable range. The issue is addressed by answering two basic questions about the process variations:

  • Are the variations random? If nonrandom variations are present, the process is considered to be unstable. Corrective action will need to be taken to improve the process by eliminating the causes of nonrandomness to achieve a stable process.

  • Given a stable process, is the inherent variability of process output within a range that conforms to performance criteria? This involves assessment of a process’s capability to meet standards. If a process is not capable, that situation will need to be addressed.

The natural or inherent process variations in process output are referred to as chance or random variations . Such variations are due to the combined influences of countless minor factors, each one so unimportant that even if it could be eliminated, the impact on process variations would be negligible. In Deming’s terms, this is referred to as common variability. The amount of inherent variability differs from process to process. For instance, older machines generally exhibit a higher degree of natural variability than newer machines, partly because of worn parts and partly because new machines may incorporate design improvements that lessen the variability in their output.

A second kind of variability in process output is called assignable variation , or non-random variation. In Deming’s terms, this is referred to as special variation. Unlike natural variation, the main sources of assignable variation can usually be identified (assigned to a specific cause) and eliminated. Tool wear, equipment that needs adjustment, defective materials, human factors (carelessness, fatigue, noise and other distractions, failure to follow correct procedures, and so on), and problems with measuring devices are typical sources of assignable variation.

Sampling and Sampling Distributions

In statistical process control, periodic samples of process output are taken, and sample statistics, such as sample means or the number of occurrences of a certain type of outcome, are determined. The sample statistics can be used to judge randomness of process variations. The sample statistics exhibit variation, just as processes do. The variability of sample statistics can be described by its sampling distribution , a theoretical distribution that describes the random variability of sample statistics. For a variety of reasons, the most frequently used distribution is the normal distribution.

Figure 10.4A illustrates a sampling distribution and a process distribution (i.e., the distribution of process variations). Note three important things in Figure 10.4A: (1) both distributions have the same mean; (2) the variability of the sampling distribution is less than the variability of the process; and (3) the sampling distribution is normal. This is true even if the process distribution is not normal as long as the sample size isn’t very small.

image

page 426 

In the case of sample means, the central limit theorem states that as the sample size increases, the distribution of sample averages approaches a normal distribution regardless of the shape of the sampled population. This tends to be the case even for fairly small sample sizes. For other sample statistics, the normal distribution serves as a reasonable approximation to the shape of the actual sampling distribution.

Figure 10.4B illustrates what happens to the shape of the sampling distribution relative to the sample size. The larger the sample size, the narrower the sampling distribution. This means that the likelihood that a sample statistic is close to the true value in the population is higher for large samples than for small samples.

image

A sampling distribution serves as the theoretical basis for distinguishing between random and nonrandom values of a sampling statistic. Very simply, limits are selected within which most values of a sample statistic should fall if its variations are random. The limits are stated in terms of number of standard deviations from the distribution mean. Typical limits are ±2 standard deviations or ±3 standard deviations. Figure 10.5 illustrates these possible limits and the probability that a sample statistic would fall within those limits if only random variations are present. Conversely, if the value of a sample statistic falls outside those limits, there is only a small probability (1 − 99.74 = .0026 for ±3 limits, and 1 − 95.44 = .0456 for ±2 limits) that the value reflects randomness. Instead, such a value would suggest nonrandomness.

image

The Control Process

Sampling and corrective action are only a part of the control process. Effective control requires the following steps:

Define. The first step is to define in sufficient detail what is to be controlled. It is not enough, for example, to simply refer to a painted surface. The paint can have a number page 427of important characteristics, such as its thickness, hardness, and resistance to fading or chipping. Different characteristics may require different approaches for control purposes.

Measure. Only those characteristics that can be counted or measured are candidates for control. Thus, it is important to consider how measurement will be accomplished.

Compare. There must be a standard of comparison that can be used to evaluate the measurements. This will relate to the level of quality being sought.

Evaluate. Management must establish a definition of out of control. Even a process that is functioning as it should will not yield output that conforms exactly to a standard, simply because of the natural (i.e., random) variations inherent in all processes, manual or mechanical—a certain amount of variation is inevitable. The main task of quality control is to distinguish random from nonrandom variability, because nonrandom variability means that a process is out of control.

Correct. When a process is judged to be out of control, corrective action must be taken. This involves uncovering the cause of nonrandom variability (e.g., worn equipment, incorrect methods, failure to follow specified procedures) and correcting it.

Monitor results. To ensure that corrective action is effective, the output of a process must be monitored for a sufficient period of time to verify that the problem has been eliminated.

In sum, control is achieved by checking a portion of the goods or services, comparing the results to a predetermined standard, evaluating departures from the standard, taking corrective action when necessary, and following up to ensure that problems have been corrected.

page 428 

Control Charts: The Voice of the Process

An important tool in statistical process control is the control chart, which was developed by Walter Shewhart. A control chart is a time-ordered plot of sample statistics (e.g., sample means). It is used to monitor sample statics (e.g., sample means) to determine if the variability exhibited reflects random variation. It has upper and lower limits, called control limits, that define the range of acceptable (i.e., random) variation for the sample statistic. A control chart is illustrated in Figure 10.6. The purpose of a control chart is to determine if there are nonrandom variations in the sample statistics. A necessary (but not sufficient) condition for a process to be deemed “in control,” or stable, is for all the data points to fall between the upper and lower control limits. Conversely, a data point that falls on or outside of either limit would be taken as evidence that the process output may be nonrandom and, therefore, not “in control.” If that happens, the process would be halted to find and correct the cause of the nonrandom variation. The essence of statistical process control is to assure that the output of a process is random so that future output will be random.

image

The basis for the control chart is the sampling distribution, which essentially describes random variability. There is, however, one minor difficulty relating to the use of a normal sampling distribution. The theoretical distribution extends in either direction to infinity. Therefore, any value is theoretically possible, even one that is a considerable distance from the mean of the distribution. However, as a practical matter, we know that, say, 99.7 percent of the values will be within ±3 standard deviations of the mean of the distribution. Therefore, we could decide to set the limit, so to speak, at values that represent ±3 standard deviations from the mean, and conclude that any value that was farther away than these limits was a nonrandom variation.

In effect, these limits are control limits : the dividing lines between what will be designated as random deviations from the mean of the distribution and what will be designated as nonrandom deviations from the mean of the distribution. Figure 10.7 illustrates how control limits are based on the sampling distribution.

image

Control charts have two limits that separate random variation and nonrandom variation. The larger value is the upper control limit (UCL), and the smaller value is the lower control limit (LCL). A sample statistic that falls between these two limits suggests (but does not prove) randomness, while a value outside or on either limit suggests (but does not prove) nonrandomness.

page 429 

It is important to recognize that because any limits will leave some area in the tails of the distribution, there is a small probability that a value will fall outside the limits even though only random variations are present. For example, if ±2 sigma (standard deviation) limits are used, they would include 95.5 percent of the values. Consequently, the complement of that number (100 percent = 95.5 percent = 4.5 percent) would not be included. That percentage (or probability) is sometimes referred to as the probability of a Type I error , where the “error” is concluding that nonrandomness is present when only randomness is present. It is also referred to as an alpha risk, where alpha ( α) is the sum of the probabilities in the two tails. Figure 10.8 illustrates this concept.

image

Using wider limits (e.g., ±3 sigma limits) reduces the probability of a Type I error because it decreases the area in the tails. However, wider limits make it more difficult to detect nonrandom variations if they are present. For example, the mean of the process might shift (an assignable cause of variation) enough to be detected by two-sigma limits, but not enough to be readily apparent using three-sigma limits. That could lead to a second kind of error, known as a Type II error , which is concluding that a process is in control when it is really out of control (i.e., concluding nonrandom variations are not present, when they are). In theory, the costs of making each error should be balanced by their probabilities. However, in practice, two-sigma limits and three-sigma limits are commonly used without specifically referring to the probability of a Type II error.

Table 10.2 illustrates how Type I and Type II errors occur.

TABLE 10.2

Type I and Type II errors

Each sample is represented by a single value (e.g., the sample mean) on a control chart. Moreover, each value is compared to the extremes of the sampling distribution (the control limits) to judge if it is within the acceptable (random) range. Figure 10.9 illustrates this concept.

image

page 430 

There are four commonly used control charts. Two are used for variables , and two are used for attributes . Attribute data are counted (e.g., the number of defective parts in a sample, the number of calls per day); variables data are measured, usually on a continuous scale (e.g., amount of time needed to complete a task, length or width of a part).

The two control charts for variables data are described in the next section, and the two control charts for attribute data are described in the section following that.

Control Charts for Variables

Mean and range charts are used to monitor variables. Control charts for means monitor the central tendency of a process, and range charts monitor the dispersion of a process.

Mean Charts. A mean control chart , sometimes referred to as an image (“ x-bar”) chart, is based on a normal distribution. It can be constructed in one of two ways. The choice depends on what information is available. Although the value of the standard deviation of a process, σ, is often unknown, if a reasonable estimate is available, one can compute control limits using these formulas:

(10–1)

where

The following example illustrates the use of these formulas.

If an observation on a control chart is on or outside of either control limit, the process is stopped to investigate the cause of that value, such as operator error, machine out of adjustment, or similar assignable cause of variation. If no source of error is found, the value could simply be due to chance, and the process will be restarted. However, the output should then be monitored to see if additional values occur that are beyond the control limits, in which case a more thorough investigation would be needed to uncover the source of the problem so it can be corrected.

If the standard deviation of the process is unknown, another approach is to use the sample range as a measure of process variability. The appropriate formulas for control limits are

(10–2)

where

TABLE 10.3

Factors for three-sigma control limits for image and R charts

Source: Adapted from Eugene Grant and Richard Leavenworth, Statistical Quality Control, 5th ed. 1980 McGraw-Hill Education.

FACTORS FOR R CHARTS

Number of Observations in Sample, n

Factor for Chart, A 2

Lower Control Limit, D 3

Upper Control Limit, D 4

 2

1.88

0  

3.27

 3

1.02

0  

2.57

 4

0.73

0  

2.28

 5

0.58

0  

2.11

 6

0.48

0  

2.00

 7

0.42

0.08

1.92

 8

0.37

0.14

1.86

 9

0.34

0.18

1.82

10

0.31

0.22

1.78

11

0.29

0.26

1.74

12

0.27

0.28

1.72

13

0.25

0.31

1.69

14

0.24

0.33

1.67

15

0.22

0.35

1.65

16

0.21

0.36

1.64

17

0.20

0.38

1.62

18

0.19

0.39

1.61

19

0.19

0.40

1.60

20

0.18

0.41

1.59

Range Charts. Range control charts ( R-charts) are used to monitor process dispersion; they are sensitive to changes in process dispersion. Although the underlying sampling distribution is not normal, the concepts for the use of range charts are much the same as those for the use of mean charts. Control limits for range charts are found using the average sample range in conjunction with these formulas:

(10–3)

where values of D 3 and D 4 are obtained from Table 10.3. 1

Using Mean and Range Charts. Mean control charts and range control charts provide different perspectives on a process. As we have seen, mean charts are sensitive to shifts in the process mean, whereas range charts are sensitive to changes in process dispersion. Because of this difference in perspective, both types of charts might be used to monitor the same process. The logic of using both is readily apparent in Figure 10.10. In Figure 10.10A, the mean chart picks up the shift in the process mean, but because the dispersion is not changing, the range chart fails to indicate a problem. Conversely, in Figure 10.10B, a change in process dispersion is less apt page 433to be detected by the mean chart than by the range chart. Thus, use of both charts provides more complete information than either chart alone. Even so, a single chart may suffice in some cases. For example, a process may be more susceptible to changes in the process mean than to changes in dispersion, so it might be unnecessary to monitor dispersion. Because of the time and cost of constructing control charts, gathering the necessary data, and evaluating the results, only those aspects of a process that tend to cause problems should be monitored.

image

Once control charts have been set up, they can serve as a basis for deciding when to interrupt a process and search for assignable causes of variation. To determine initial control limits, one can use the following procedure:

  1. Obtain 20 to 25 samples. Compute the appropriate sample statistic(s) for each sample (e.g., mean).

  2. Establish preliminary control limits using the formulas.

  3. Determine if any points fall outside the control limits.

  4. Plot the data on the control chart and check for patterns.

  5. If no out-of-control signs are found, assume that the process is in control. If any out-of-control signals are found, investigate and correct causes of variation. Then, resume the process and collect another set of observations upon which control limits can be based.

page 434 

Control Charts for Attributes

Control charts for attributes are used when the process characteristic is counted rather than measured. For example, the number of defective items in a sample is counted, whereas the length of each item is measured. There are two types of attribute control charts, one for the fraction of defective items in a sample (a p-chart) and one for the number of defects per unit (a c-chart). A p-chart is appropriate when the data consist of two categories of items. For instance, if glass bottles are inspected for chipping and cracking, both the good bottles and the defective ones can be counted. However, one can count the number of accidents that occur during a given period of time but not the number of accidents that did not occur. Similarly, one can count the number of scratches on a polished surface, the number of bacteria present in a water sample, and the number of crimes committed during the month of August, but one cannot count the number of non-occurrences. In such cases, a c-chart is appropriate. See Table 10.4.

TABLE 10.4

p-chart or c-chart?

The following tips should help you select the type of control chart, a p-chart or a c-chart, that is appropriate for a particular application:

Use a p-chart:

  1. When observations can be placed into one of two categories. Examples include items (observations) that can be classified as

    1. Good or bad

    2. Pass or fail

    3. Operate or don’t operate

  2. When the data consist of multiple samples of n observations each (e.g., 15 samples of n = 20 observations each).

Use a c-chart:

When only the number of occurrences per unit of measure can be counted; non-occurrences cannot be counted. Examples of occurrences and units of measure include

  1. Scratches, chips, dents, or errors per item

  2. Cracks or faults per unit of distance (e.g., meters, miles)

  3. Breaks or tears, per unit of area (e.g., square yard, square meter)

  4. Bacteria or pollutants per unit of volume (e.g., gallon, cubic foot, cubic yard)

  5. Calls, complaints, failures, equipment breakdowns, or crimes per unit of time (e.g., hour, day, month, year)

p -Chart. A p-chart is used to monitor the proportion of defective items generated by a process. The theoretical basis for a p-chart is the binomial distribution, although for large sample sizes, the normal distribution provides a good approximation to it. Conceptually, a p-chart is constructed and used in much the same way as a mean chart.

The centerline on a p-chart is the average fraction defective in the population, p. The standard deviation of the sampling distribution when p is known is

page 435 

Control limits are computed using the formulas

(10–4)

If p is unknown, which is generally the case, it can be estimated from samples. That estimate, image, replaces p in the preceding formulas, and image p replaces σ p , as illustrated in Example 4.

Note: Because the formula is an approximation, it sometimes happens that the computed LCL is negative. In those instances, zero is used as the lower limit because the proportion of defective items cannot be less than zero.

c–Chart. When the goal is to control the number of occurrences (e.g., defects) per unit, a c-chart is used. Units might be automobiles, hotel rooms, typed pages, or rolls of carpet. The underlying sampling distribution is the Poisson distribution. Use of the Poisson distribution assumes that defects occur over some continuous region and that the probability of more than one defect at any particular point is negligible. The mean number of defects per unit is c and the standard deviation is image. For practical reasons, the normal approximation to the Poisson is used. The control limits are

(10–5)

page 437 

If the value of c is unknown, as is generally the case, the sample estimate, image, is used in place of c, using image = Number of defects ÷ Number of samples.

When the computed lower control limit is negative, the effective lower limit is zero. In such cases, if a control chart point is zero, it should not be deemed to be out of control. The calculation sometimes produces a negative lower limit due to the use of the normal distribution to approximate the Poisson distribution: The normal is symmetrical, whereas the Poisson is not symmetrical when c is close to zero.

Note that if an observation falls below the lower control limit on a p-chart or a c-chart, the cause should be investigated, just as it would be for a mean or range chart, even though such a point would imply that the process is exhibiting better-than-expected quality. It may turn out to be the result of an undesirable overuse of resources. On the other hand, it may lead to a discovery that can improve the quality of the process.

Managerial Considerations Concerning Control Charts

Using control charts adds to the cost and time needed to obtain output. Ideally, a process is so good that the desired level of quality could be achieved without the use of any control charts. The best organizations strive to reach this level, but many are not yet there, so they page 438employ control charts at various points in their processes. In those organizations, managers must make a number of important decisions about the use of control charts:

  • At what points in the process to use control charts

  • What size samples to take

  • What type of control chart to use (i.e., variables or attribute)

  • How often should samples be taken

The decision about where to use control charts should focus on those aspects of the process that (1) have a tendency to go out of control and (2) are critical to the successful operation of the product or service (i.e., variables that affect product or service characteristics).

Sample size is important for two reasons. One is that cost and time are functions of sample size; the greater the sample size, the greater the cost to inspect those items (and the greater the lost product if destructive testing is involved) and the longer the process must be held up while waiting for the results of sampling. The second reason is that smaller samples are more likely to reveal a change in the process than larger samples because a change is more likely to take place within the large sample than between small samples. Consequently, a sample statistic such as the sample mean in the large sample could combine both “before-change” and “after-change” observations, whereas in two smaller samples, the first could contain “before” observations and the second “after” observations, making detection of the change more likely.

In some instances, a manager can choose between using a control chart for variables (a mean chart) and a control chart for attributes (a p-chart). If the manager is monitoring the diameter of a drive shaft, either the diameter could be measured and a mean chart used for control, or the shafts could be inspected using a go, no-go gauge—which simply indicates whether a particular shaft is within specification without giving its exact dimensions—and a p-chart could be used. Measuring is more costly and time-consuming per unit than the yes-no inspection using a go, no-go gauge, but because measuring supplies more information than merely counting items as good or bad, one needs a much smaller sample size for a mean chart than a p-chart. Hence, a manager must weigh the time and cost of sampling against the information provided.

Sampling frequency can be a function of the stability of a process and the cost to sample.

Run Tests

Control charts test for points that are too extreme to be considered random (e.g., points that are outside of the control limits). However, even if all points are within the control limits, the data may still not reflect a random process. In fact, any sort of pattern in the data would suggest a nonrandom process. Figure 10.11 illustrates some patterns that might be present.

image

Analysts often supplement control charts with a run test , which checks for patterns in a sequence of observations. This enables an analyst to do a better job of detecting abnormalities in a process and provides insights into correcting a process that is out of control. A variety of run tests are available. This section describes two that are widely used.

When a process is stable or in statistical control, the output it generates will exhibit random variability over a period of time. The presence of patterns, such as trends, cycles, or bias in the output indicates that assignable, or nonrandom, causes of variation exist. Hence, a process that produces output with such patterns is not in a state of statistical control. This is true even though all points on a control chart may be within the control limits. For this reason, it is usually prudent to subject control chart data to run tests to determine whether patterns can be detected.

A run is defined as a sequence of observations with a certain characteristic, followed by one or more observations with a different characteristic. The characteristic can be anything that is observable. For example, in the series A A A B, there are two runs: a run of three A’s page 439followed by a run of one B. Underlining each run helps in counting them. In the series AA BBB A, the underlining indicates three runs.

Two useful run tests involve examination of the number of runs up and down and runs above and below the median. 2 In order to count these runs, the data are transformed into a series of U’s and D’s (for up and down) and into a series of A’s and B’s (for above and below the median). Consider the following sequence, which has a median of 36.5. The first two values are below the median, the next two are above it, the next to last is below, and the last is above. Thus, there are four runs:

In terms of up and down, there are three runs in the same data. The second value is up from the first value, the third is up from the second, the fourth is down from the third, and so on:

(The first value does not receive either a U or a D because nothing precedes it.)

If a plot is available, the runs can be easily counted directly from the plot, as illustrated in Figures 10.12 and 10.13.

image image

page 440 

To determine whether any patterns are present in control chart data, one must transform the data into both A’s and B’s and U’s and D’s, and then count the number of runs in each case. These numbers must then be compared with the number of runs that would be expected in a completely random series. For both the median and the up/down run tests, the expected number of runs is a function of the number of observations in the series. The formulas are

(10–6a)

(10–7a)

where N is the number of observations or data points, and E( r) is the expected number of runs.

The actual number of runs in any given set of observations will vary from the expected number, due to chance and any patterns that might be present. Chance variability is measured by the standard deviation of runs. The formulas are

(10–6b)

(10–7b)

Distinguishing chance variability from patterns requires use of the sampling distributions for median runs and up/down runs. Both distributions are approximately normal. Thus, for example, 95.5 percent of the time a random process will produce an observed number of runs within two standard deviations of the expected number. If the observed number of runs falls in that range, there are probably no nonrandom patterns; for observed numbers of runs beyond such limits, we begin to suspect that patterns are present. Too few or too many runs can be an indication of nonrandomness.

In practice, it is often easiest to compute the number of standard deviations, z, by which an observed number of runs differs from the expected number. This z value would then be compared to the value ±2 (z for 95.5 percent) or some other desired value (e.g., ±1.96 for 95 percent, ±2.33 for 98 percent). A test z that exceeds the desired limits indicates patterns might be present. (See Figure 10.14.) The computation of z takes the form.

image

page 441 

For the median and up/down tests, one can find z using these formulas:

(10–8)

(10–9)

where

It is desirable to apply both run tests to any given set of observations, because each test is different in terms of the types of patterns it can detect. Sometimes both tests will pick up a certain pattern, but sometimes only one will detect nonrandomness. If either does, the implication is that some sort of nonrandomness is present in the data.

Using Control Charts and Run Tests Together

Although for instructional purposes most of the examples, solved problems, and problems focus on either control charts or run tests, ideally both control charts and run tests should be used to analyze process output, along with a plot of the data. The procedure involves the following three steps:

  1. Compute control limits for the process output.

    1. Determine which type of control chart is appropriate (see Figure 10.18 in the chapter summary).

    2. Compute control limits using the appropriate formulas. If no probability is given, use a value of z = 2.00 to compute the control limits.

    3. If any sample statistics fall outside of the control limits, the process is not in control. If all values are within the control limits, proceed to Step 2.

  2. Conduct median and up/down run tests. Use z = ±2.00 for comparing the test scores. If either or both test scores are not within z = ±2.00, the output is probably not random. If both test scores are within z = ±2.00, proceed to Step 3.

  3. Note: If you are at this point, there is no indication so far that the process output is nonrandom. Plot the sample data and visually check for patterns (e.g., cycling). If you see a pattern, the output is probably not random. Otherwise, conclude the output is random and that the process is in control.

page 443 

What Happens When a Process Exhibits Possible Nonrandom Variation?

Nonrandom variation is indicated when a point is observed that is outside the control limits, or a run test produces a large z-value (e.g., greater than ±1.96). Managers should have response plans in place to investigate the cause. It may be a false alarm (i.e., a Type I error), or it may be a real indication of the presence of an assignable cause of variation. If it appears to be a false alarm, resume the process but monitor it for a while to confirm this. If an assignable cause can be found, it needs to be addressed. If it is a good result (e.g., an observation below the lower control limit of a p-chart, a c-chart, or a range chart would indicate unusually good quality), it may be possible to change the process to achieve similar results on an ongoing basis. The more typical case is that there is a problem that needs to be corrected. Operators can be trained to handle simple problems, while teams may be needed to handle more complex problems. Problem solving often requires the use of various tools, described in Chapter 9, to find the root cause of the problem. Once the cause has been found, changes can be made to reduce the chance of recurrence.

10.4 PROCESS CAPABILITY

Once the stability of a process has been established (i.e., no nonrandom variations are present), it is necessary to determine if the process is capable of producing output that is within an acceptable range. The variability of a process becomes the focal point of the analysis.

Three commonly used terms refer to the variability of process output. Each term relates to a slightly different aspect of that variability, so it is important to differentiate these terms.

Specifications or tolerances are established by engineering design or customer requirements. They indicate a range of values in which individual units of output must fall in order to be acceptable.

Control limits are statistical limits that reflect the extent to which sample statistics such as means and ranges can vary due to randomness alone.

Process variability reflects the natural or inherent (i.e., random) variability in a process. It is measured in terms of the process standard deviation.

page 444 

Control limits and process variability are directly related: Control limits are based on sampling variability, and sampling variability is a function of process variability. On the other hand, there is no direct link between specifications and either control limits or process variability. They are specified in terms of the output of a product or service, not in terms of the process by which the output is generated. Hence, in a given instance, the output of a process may or may not conform to specifications, even though the process may be statistically in control. That is why it is also necessary to take into account the capability of a process. The term process capability refers to the inherent variability of process output relative to the variation allowed by the design specifications. The following section describes capability analysis.

Capability Analysis

Capability analysis is performed on a process that is in control (i.e., the process exhibits only random variation) for the purpose of determining if the range of variation is within design specifications that would make the output acceptable for its intended use. If it is within the specifications, the process is said to be “capable.” If it is not, the manager must decide how to correct the situation.

Consider the three cases illustrated in Figure 10.15. In the first case, process capability and output specifications are well matched, so that nearly all of the process output can be expected to meet the specifications. In the second case, the process variability is much less than what is called for, so that virtually 100 percent of the output should be well within tolerance. In the third case, however, the specifications are tighter than what the process is capable of, so that even when the process is functioning as it should, a sizable percentage of the output will fail to meet the specifications. In other words, the process could be in control and still generate unacceptable output. Thus, we cannot automatically assume that a process that is in control will provide the desired output. Instead, we must specifically check whether a process is capable of meeting specifications and not simply set up a control chart to monitor it. A process should be both in control and within specifications before production begins—in essence, “Set the toaster correctly at the start. Don’t burn the toast and then scrape it!”

image

In instances such as case C in Figure 10.15, a manager might consider a range of possible solutions: (1) redesign the process so it can achieve the desired output, (2) use an alternative process that can achieve the desired output, (3) retain the current process but attempt to eliminate unacceptable output using 100 percent inspection, and (4) examine the specifications to see whether they are necessary or could be relaxed without adversely affecting customer satisfaction.

It is also worthwhile to note that different categories of customers (e.g., consumer versus industrial) might have different sets of specifications due to differing applications.

Obviously, process variability is the key factor in process capability. It is measured in terms of the process standard deviation. To determine whether the process is capable, compare ±3 standard deviations (i.e., 6 standard deviations) of the process to the specifications for the process. For example, suppose the ideal length of time to perform a service is 10 minutes, and an acceptable range of variation around this time is ±1 minute. If the process has a standard deviation of .5 minute, it would not be capable because ±3 standard deviations would be ±1.5 minutes, exceeding the specification of ±1 minute.

page 445 

C p

To assess the capability of a machine or process, a capability index can be computed using the following formula:

(10–10)

The widely accepted standard for a process to be deemed to be capable is to have a capability index of at least 1.33. Although an index of 1.00 might seem that the process is just capable, even a slight deviation in the process for any reason would cause the process not to be capable. Using an index of at least 1.33 allows some leeway. Because it is not unusual for some processes to “wobble” a bit from time to time, an index of 1.33 provides a cushion.

An index of 1.00 implies about 2,700 parts per million (ppm) can be expected to not be within the specifications, while an index of 1.33 implies only about 30 ppm won’t be within specs. Moreover, the greater the capability index, the greater the probability that the output of a process will fall within design specifications.

page 446 

For processes that are not capable, several options might be considered, such as performing 100 percent inspection to weed out unacceptable items, improving the process to reduce variability, switching to a capable process, outsourcing, and so forth.

The Motorola Corporation is well known for its use of the term S ix Sigma, which refers to its goal of achieving a process variability so small that the design specifications represent six standard deviations above and below the process mean. That means a process capability index equal to 2.00, resulting in an extremely small probability of getting any output not within the design specifications. This is illustrated in Figure 10.16.

image

To get an idea of how a capability index of 2.00 compares to an index of, say, 1.00, in terms of defective items, consider that if the U.S. Postal Service had a capability index of 1.00 for delivery errors of first-class mail, this would translate into about 10,000 misdelivered pieces per day; if the capability index was 2.00, that number would drop to about 1,000 pieces a day.

Care must be taken when interpreting the C p index, because its computation does not involve the process mean. Unless the target value (i.e., process mean) is centered between the upper and lower specifications, the C p index can be misleading. For example, suppose the specifications are 10 and 11, and the standard deviation of the process is equal to .10. The C p would seem to be very favorable:

However, suppose that the process mean is 12, with a standard deviation of .10; ±3 standard deviations would be 11.70 to 12.30, so it is very unlikely that any of the output would be within the specifications of 10 to 11!

There are situations in which the target value is not centered between the specifications, either intentionally or unavoidably. In such instances, a more appropriate measure of process capability is the C pk index, because it does take the process mean into account.

C pk

If a process is not centered, a slightly different measure is used to compute its capability. This index is represented by the symbol C pk. It is computed by finding the difference between each of the specification limits and the mean, identifying the smaller difference, and dividing that difference by three standard deviations of the process. Thus, C pk is equal to the smaller of

(10–11)

and

You might be wondering why a process wouldn’t be centered as a matter of course. One reason is that only a range of acceptable values, not a target value, may be specified. A more compelling reason is that the cost of nonconformance is greater for one specification limit than it is for nonconformance for the other specification limit. In that case, it would page 447make sense to have the target value be closer to the spec that has the lower cost of nonconformance. This would result in a noncentered process.

Improving Process Capability

Improving process capability requires reducing the process variability that is inherent in a process. This might involve simplifying, standardizing, making the process mistake-proof, upgrading equipment, or automating. See Table 10.5 for examples.

TABLE 10.5

Process capability improvement

Method

Examples

Simplify

Eliminate steps, reduce the number of parts, use modular design

Standardize

Use standard parts, standard procedures

Make mistake-proof

Design parts that can only be assembled the correct way; have simple checks to verify a procedure has been performed correctly

Upgrade equipment

Replace worn-out equipment; take advantage of technological improvements

Automate

Substitute automated processing for manual processing

Improved process capability means less need for inspection, lower warranty costs, fewer complaints about service, and higher productivity. For process control purposes, it means narrower control limits.

Taguchi Loss Function

Genichi Taguchi, a Japanese quality expert, holds a nontraditional view of what constitutes poor quality, and hence the cost of poor quality. The traditional view is that as long as output is within specifications, there is no cost. Taguchi believes that any deviation from the target value represents poor quality, and that the farther away from the target a deviation is, the greater the cost. Figure 10.17 illustrates the two views. The implication for Taguchi is that reducing the variation inherent in a process (i.e., increasing its capability ratio) will result in lowering the cost of poor quality, and consequently, the loss to society.

image

Limitations of Capability Indexes

There are several risks of using a capability index:

  • The process may not be stable, in which case a capability index is meaningless.

  • The process output may not be normally distributed, in which case inferences about the fraction of output that isn’t acceptable will be incorrect.

  • The process is not centered, but the C p index is used, giving a misleading result.

page 448 

10.5 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

Quality is a major consideration for virtually all customers, so achieving and maintaining quality standards is of strategic importance to all business organizations. Quality assurance and product and service design are two vital links in the process. Organizations should continually seek to increase the capability of the processes they use, so they can move from a position of using inspection or extensive use of control charts to achieve desired levels of quality to one where quality is built into products and processes, so that little or no effort is needed to assure quality. Processes that exhibit evidence of nonrandomness, or processes that are deemed to not be capable, should be viewed as opportunities for continuous process improvement.

page 449 

1 If the process standard deviation is known, control limits for a range chart can be calculated using values from Table 10.3:

2 The median and mean are approximately equal for control charts. The use of the median depends on its ease of determination; use the mean instead of the median if it is given.

page 464 

page 465 

11.1 INTRODUCTION

Intermediate Planning in Perspective

Organizations make capacity decisions on three levels: long term, intermediate term, and short term. Long-term decisions relate to product and service selection (i.e., determining which products or services to offer), facility size and location, equipment decisions, and layout of facilities. These long-term decisions essentially establish the capacity constraints within which intermediate planning must function. Intermediate decisions, as noted previously, relate to general levels of employment, output, and inventories, which in turn establish boundaries within which short-range capacity decisions must be made. Thus, short-term decisions essentially consist of deciding the best way to achieve desired results within the constraints resulting from long-term and intermediate-term decisions. Short-term decisions involve scheduling jobs, workers and equipment, and the like. The three levels of capacity decisions are depicted in Table 11.1. Long-term capacity decisions were covered in Chapter 5, and scheduling and related matters are covered in Chapter 16. This chapter covers intermediate capacity decisions.

page 467 

TABLE 11.1

Overview of planning levels (chapter numbers are shown)

Many business organizations develop a business plan that encompasses both long-term and intermediate-term planning. The business plan establishes guidelines for the organization, taking into account the organization’s strategies and policies; forecasts of overall demand for the organization’s products or services; and economic, competitive, and political conditions. A key objective in business planning is to coordinate the intermediate plans of various organization functions, such as marketing, operations, and finance. In manufacturing companies, coordination also includes engineering and materials management. Consequently, all of these functional areas must work together to formulate the aggregate plan. Aggregate planning decisions are strategic decisions that define the framework within which operating decisions will be made. They are the starting point for scheduling and production control systems. They provide input for financial plans; they involve forecasting input and demand management, and they may require changes in employment levels. If the organization is involved in time-based competition, it is important to incorporate some flexibility in the aggregate plan to be able to handle changing requirements promptly. As noted, the plans must fit into the framework established by the organization’s long-term goals and strategies, and the limitations established by long-term facility and capital budget decisions. The aggregate plan will guide the more detailed planning that eventually leads to a master schedule. Figure 11.1 illustrates the planning sequence.

image

Aggregate planning also can serve as an important input to other strategic decisions; for example, management may decide to add capacity when aggregate planning alternatives for temporarily increasing capacity, such as working overtime and subcontracting, are too costly.

page 468 

The Concept of Aggregation

Aggregate planning is essentially a “big-picture” approach to planning. Planners usually try to avoid focusing on individual products or services—unless the organization has only one major product or service. Instead, they focus on a group of similar products or services, or sometimes an entire product or service line. For example, planners in a company producing ultra high-definition televisions would not concern themselves with the different size televisions the company offers. Instead, planners would lump all models together and deal with them as though they were a single product, hence the term aggregate planning. Thus, when fast-food companies such as McDonald’s, Burger King, or Wendy’s plan employment and output levels, they don’t try to determine how demand will be broken down into the various menu options they offer; they focus on overall demand and the overall capacity they want to provide. Aggregating generally provides a more accurate forecast than what would be achieved by focusing on individual items.

Now consider how aggregate planning might work in a large department store. Space allocation is often an aggregate decision. That is, a manager might decide to allocate 20 percent of the available space in the clothing department to women’s sportswear, 30 percent to juniors, and so on, without regard for what brand names will be offered or how much of juniors will be jeans. The aggregate measure might be square feet of space or racks of clothing.

For purposes of aggregate planning, it is often convenient to think of capacity in terms of labor hours or machine hours per period, or output rates (barrels per period, units per period), without worrying about how much of a particular item will actually be involved. This approach frees planners to make general decisions about the use of resources without having to get into the complexities of individual product or service requirements. Product groupings make the problem of obtaining an acceptable unit of aggregation easier because product groupings may lend themselves to the same aggregate measures.

Why do organizations need to do aggregate planning? The answer is twofold. One part is related to planning: It takes time to implement plans. For instance, if plans call for hiring (and training) new workers, that will take time. The second part is strategic: Aggregation is important because it is not possible to predict with any degree of accuracy the timing and volume of demand for individual items. So if an organization were to “lock in” on individual items, it would lose the flexibility to respond to the market.

Generally speaking, aggregate planning is connected to the budgeting process. Most organizations plan their financial requirements annually on a department-by-department basis.

Finally, aggregate planning is important because it can help synchronize flow throughout the supply chain. It affects costs, equipment utilization, employment levels, and customer satisfaction.

A key issue in aggregate planning is how to handle variations.

Dealing with Variations

As in other areas of business management, variations in either supply or demand can occur. Minor variations are usually not a problem, but large variations generally have a major impact on the ability to match supply and demand, so they must be dealt with. Most organizations use rolling 3-, 6-, 9-, and 12-month forecasts—forecasts that are updated periodically—rather than relying on a once-a-year forecast. This allows planners to take into account any changes in either expected demand or expected supply and to develop revised plans.

Some businesses tend to exhibit a fair degree of stability, whereas in others, variations are more the norm. In those instances, a number of strategies are used to counter variations. One is to maintain a certain amount of excess capacity to handle increases in demand. This strategy makes sense when the opportunity cost of lost revenue greatly exceeds the cost of maintaining excess capacity. Another strategy is to maintain a degree of flexibility in dealing with changes. That might involve hiring temporary workers and/or working overtime when needed. Organizations that experience seasonal demands typically use this approach. Some of the design strategies mentioned in Chapter 4, such as delayed differentiation and modular design, may also be options. Still another strategy is to wait as long as possible before committing to a certain level of supply capability. This might involve scheduling products or services page 469with known demands first, which allows some time to pass, shortening the time horizon, and perhaps enabling demands for the remaining products or services to become less uncertain.

An Overview of Aggregate Planning

Aggregate planning begins with a forecast of aggregate demand for the intermediate range. This is followed by a general plan to meet demand requirements by setting output, employment, and finished-goods inventory levels or service capacities. Managers might consider a number of plans, each of which must be examined in light of feasibility and cost. If a plan is reasonably good but has minor difficulties, it may be reworked. Conversely, a poor plan should be discarded, and alternative plans considered until an acceptable one is uncovered. An aggregate production plan is essentially the output of aggregate planning.

Aggregate plans are updated periodically, often monthly, to take into account updated forecasts and other changes. This results in a rolling planning horizon (i.e., the aggregate plan always covers the next 12 to 18 months).

Demand and Supply. Aggregate planners are concerned with the quantity and the timing of expected demand. If total expected demand for the planning period is much different from available capacity over that same period, the major approach of planners will be to try to achieve a balance by altering capacity, demand, or both. On the other hand, even if capacity and demand are approximately equal for the planning horizon as a whole, planners may still be faced with the problem of dealing with uneven demand within the planning interval. In some periods, expected demand may exceed projected capacity; in others, expected demand may be less than projected capacity, and in some periods the two may be equal. The task of aggregate planners is to achieve rough equality of demand and capacity over the entire planning horizon. Moreover, planners are usually concerned with minimizing the cost of the aggregate plan, although cost is not the only consideration.

Inputs to Aggregate Planning. Effective aggregate planning requires good information. First, the available resources over the planning period must be known. Then, a forecast of expected demand must be available. Finally, planners must take into account any policies regarding changes in employment levels (e.g., some organizations view layoffs as extremely undesirable, so they would use that only as a last resort).

Table 11.2 lists the major inputs to aggregate planning.

TABLE 11.2

Aggregate planning inputs and outputs

Inputs

Outputs

Resources

Workforce/production rates

Facilities and equipment

Demand forecast

Policies on workforce changes

Subcontracting

Overtime

Inventory levels/changes

Back orders

Costs

Inventory carrying cost

Back orders

Hiring/firing

Overtime

Inventory changes

Subcontracting

Total cost of a plan

Projected levels of

Inventory

Output

Employment

Subcontracting

Backordering

Companies in the travel industry and some other industries often experience duplicate orders from customers who make multiple reservations but only intend to keep at most one of them. This makes capacity planning all the more difficult.

page 470 

Aggregate Planning and the Supply Chain

It is essential to take supply chain capabilities into account when doing aggregate planning, to assure that there are no quantity or timing issues that need to be resolved. While this is particularly true if new or changed goods or services are involved, it is also true even when no changes are planned. Supply chain partners should be consulted during the planning stage so that any issues or advice they may have can be taken into account, and they should be informed when plans have been finalized.

Demand and Supply Options

Aggregate planning strategies can pertain to demand, capacity, or both. Demand strategies are intended to alter demand so that it matches capacity. Capacity strategies involve altering capacity so it matches demand. Mixed strategies involve both of these approaches.

Demand Options. Demand options include pricing, promotions, using back orders (delaying order filling), and creating new demand.

  1. Pricing. Pricing differentials are commonly used to shift demand from peak periods to off-peak periods. Some hotels, for example, offer lower rates for weekend stays, and some airlines offer lower fares for night travel. Movie theaters may offer reduced rates for matinees, and some restaurants offer “early bird specials” in an attempt to shift some of the heavier dinner demand to an earlier time that traditionally has less traffic. Some restaurants also offer smaller portions at reduced rates, and most have smaller portions and prices for children. To the extent that pricing is effective, demand will be shifted so it corresponds more closely to capacity, albeit for an opportunity cost that represents the lost profit stemming from capacity insufficient to meet demand during certain periods.

    An important factor to consider is the degree of price elasticity for the product or service: The more the elasticity, the more effective pricing will be in influencing demand patterns.

  2. Promotion. Advertising and other forms of promotion, such as displays and direct marketing, can sometimes be very effective in shifting demand so it conforms more closely to capacity. Obviously, timing of these efforts and knowledge of response rates and response patterns will be needed to achieve the desired results. Unlike pricing policy, there is much less control over the timing of demand, so there is the risk that promotion can worsen the condition it was intended to improve, by bringing in demand at the wrong time, further stressing capacity.

    page 471 

  3. Back orders. An organization can shift demand fulfillment to other periods by allowing back orders. That is, orders are taken in one period and deliveries promised for a later period. The success of this approach depends on how willing customers are to wait for delivery. Moreover, the costs associated with back orders can be difficult to pin down because they would include lost sales, annoyed or disappointed customers, and perhaps additional paperwork.

  4. New demand. Many organizations are faced with the problem of having to provide products or services for peak demand in situations where demand is very uneven. For instance, demand for bus transportation tends to be more intense during the morning and late afternoon rush hours but much lighter at other times. Creating new demand for buses at other times (e.g., trips by schools, clubs, and senior citizen groups) would make use of the excess capacity during those slack times. Similarly, many fast-food restaurants are open for breakfast to use their capacities more fully, and some landscaping firms in northern climates use their equipment during the winter months for snow removal. Manufacturing firms that experience seasonal demands for certain products (e.g., snowblowers) are sometimes able to develop a demand for a complementary product (e.g., lawn mowers, garden equipment) that makes use of the same production processes. They thereby achieve a more consistent use of labor, equipment, and facilities. Another option may be “insourcing” work from another organization.

Supply Options. Supply options include hiring/laying off workers, overtime/slack time, part-time or temporary workers, inventories, and subcontractors.

  1. Hire and lay off workers. The extent to which operations are labor intensive determines the impact that changes in the workforce level will have on capacity. The resource requirements of each worker also can be a factor. For instance, if a supermarket usually has 10 of 14 checkout lines operating, an additional four checkout workers could be added. Hence, the ability to add workers is constrained at some point by other resources needed to support the workers. Conversely, there may be a lower limit on the number of workers needed to maintain a viable operation (e.g., a skeleton crew).

    Union contracts may restrict the amount of hiring and laying off a company can do. Moreover, because laying off can present serious problems for workers, some firms have policies that either prohibit or limit downward adjustments to a workforce. On the other hand, hiring presumes an available supply of workers. This may change from time to time and, at times of low supply, have an impact on the ability of an organization to pursue this approach.

    Another consideration is the skill level of workers. Highly skilled workers are generally more difficult to find than lower-skilled workers, and recruiting them involves greater costs. So the usefulness of this option may be limited by the need for highly skilled workers.

    The use of hiring and laying off entails certain costs. Hiring costs include recruitment, screening, and training to bring new workers “up to speed.” And quality may suffer. Some savings may occur if workers who have recently been laid off are rehired. Layoff costs include severance pay, unemployment costs, the cost of realigning the page 472remaining workforce, potential bad feelings toward the firm on the part of workers who have been laid off, and some loss of morale for workers who are retained (i.e., despite company assurances, some workers will believe that in time they too will be laid off).

    An increasing number of organizations view workers as assets rather than as variable costs, and would not consider this approach. Instead, they might use slack time for other purposes.

  2. Overtime/slack time. Use of overtime or slack time is a less severe method for changing capacity than hiring and laying off workers, and it can be used across the board or selectively as needed. It also can be implemented more quickly than hiring and laying off and allows the firm to maintain a steady base of employees. The use of overtime can be especially attractive in dealing with seasonal demand peaks by reducing the need to hire and train people who will have to be laid off during the off-season. Overtime also permits the company to maintain a skilled workforce and employees to increase earnings, and companies may save money because fringe and other benefits are generally fixed. Moreover, in situations with crews, it is often necessary to use a full crew rather than to hire one or two additional people. Thus, having the entire crew work overtime would be preferable to hiring extra people.

    It should be noted that some union contracts allow workers to refuse overtime. In those cases, it may be difficult to muster a full crew to work overtime or to get an entire production line into operation after regular hours. Although workers often like the additional income overtime can generate, they may not appreciate having to work on short notice or the fluctuations in income that result. Still other considerations relate to the fact that overtime often results in lower productivity, poorer quality, more accidents, and increased payroll costs, whereas idle time results in less efficient use of machines and other fixed assets.

    The use of slack when demand is less than capacity can be an important consideration. Some organizations use this time for training. It also can give workers time for problem solving and process improvement, while retraining skilled workers.

  3. Part-time workers. In certain instances, the use of part-time workers is a viable option—much depends on the nature of the work, the training and skills needed, and union agreements. Seasonal work requiring low-to-moderate job skills lends itself to part-time workers, who generally cost less than regular workers in hourly wages and fringe benefits. However, unions may regard such workers unfavorably because they typically do not pay union dues and may lessen the power of unions. Department stores, restaurants, and supermarkets make use of part-time workers. So do parks and recreation departments, resorts, travel agencies, hotels, and other service organizations with seasonal demands. In order to be successful, these organizations must be able to hire part-time employees when they are needed.

    Some companies use contract workers, also called independent contractors, or “gig” workers, to fill certain needs. Although they are not regular employees, often they work alongside regular workers. In addition to having different pay scales and no benefits, they can be added or subtracted from the workforce with greater ease than regular workers, giving companies great flexibility in adjusting the size of the workforce.

  4. Inventories. The use of finished-goods inventories allows firms to produce goods in one period and sell or ship them in another period, although this involves holding or carrying those goods as inventory until they are needed. The cost includes not only storage costs and the cost of money tied up that could be invested elsewhere, but also the cost of insurance, obsolescence, deterioration, spoilage, breakage, and so on. In essence, inventories can be built up during periods when production capacity exceeds demand and drawn down in periods when demand exceeds production capacity.

    This method is more amenable to manufacturing than to service industries because manufactured goods can be stored, whereas services generally cannot. However, an analogous approach used by services is to make efforts to streamline services (e.g., standard forms) or otherwise do a portion of the service during slack periods (e.g., organize the workplace). In spite of these possibilities, services tend not to make much use of inventories to alter capacity requirements.

    page 473 

  5. Subcontracting. Subcontracting enables planners to acquire temporary capacity, although it affords less control over the output and may lead to higher costs and quality problems. The question of whether to make or buy (i.e., in manufacturing) or to perform a service or hire someone else to do the work generally depends on factors such as available capacity, relative expertise, quality considerations, cost, and the amount and stability of demand.

    Conversely, in periods of excess capacity, an organization may subcontract in—that is, conduct work for another organization. As an alternative to subcontracting, an organization might consider outsourcing: contracting with another organization to supply some portion of the goods or services on a regular basis.

11.2 BASIC STRATEGIES FOR MEETING UNEVEN DEMAND

As you see, managers have a wide range of decision options they can consider for achieving a balance of demand and capacity in aggregate planning. Because the options most suited to influencing demand fall more in the realm of marketing than in operations (with the exception of backlogging), we shall concentrate on the capacity options, which are in the realm of operations but include the use of back orders.

Aggregate planners might adopt a number of strategies. Some of the more prominent ones are the following:

  • Maintain a level workforce (level capacity)

  • Maintain a steady output rate (level capacity)

  • Match demand period by period (chase demand)

  • Use a combination of decision variables

While other strategies might be considered, these will suffice to give you a sense of how aggregate planning operates in a vast number of organizations. The first three strategies are “pure” strategies because each has a single focal point; the last strategy is “mixed” because page 474it lacks the single focus. Under a level capacity strategy , variations in demand are met by using some combination of inventories, overtime, part-time workers, subcontracting, and back orders, while maintaining a steady rate of output. Matching capacity to demand implies a chase demand strategy ; the planned output for any period would be equal to the expected demand for that period.

Many organizations regard a level workforce as very appealing. Because workforce changes through hiring and laying off can have a major impact on the lives and morale of employees and can be disruptive for managers, organizations often prefer to handle uneven demand in other ways. Moreover, changes in workforce size can be very costly, and there is always the risk that there will not be a sufficient pool of workers with the appropriate skills when needed. Aside from these considerations, such changes can involve a significant amount of paperwork. Unions tend to favor a level workforce because the freedom to hire and lay off workers diminishes union strengths.

To maintain a constant level of output and still satisfy varying demand, an organization must resort to some combination of subcontracting, backlogging, and use of inventories to absorb fluctuations. Subcontracting requires an investment in evaluating sources of supply, as well as possible increased costs, less control over output, and perhaps quality considerations. Backlogs can lead to lost sales, increased record keeping, and lower levels of customer service. Allowing inventories to absorb fluctuations can entail substantial costs by having money tied up in inventories, having to maintain relatively large storage facilities, and incurring other costs related to inventories. Furthermore, inventories are not usually an alternative for service-oriented organizations. However, there are certain advantages, such as minimum costs of recruitment and training, minimum overtime and idle-time costs, fewer morale problems, and stable use of equipment and facilities.

A chase demand strategy presupposes a great deal of ability and willingness on the part of managers to be flexible in adjusting to demand. A major advantage of this approach is that inventories can be kept relatively low, which can yield substantial savings for an organization. A major disadvantage is the lack of stability in operations—the atmosphere is one of dancing to demand’s tune. Also, when forecast and reality differ, morale can suffer, because it quickly becomes obvious to workers and managers that efforts have been wasted. Figure 11.2 provides a comparison of the two strategies, using a varying demand pattern to highlight the differences in the two approaches. The same demand pattern is used for each approach. In the upper portion of the figure the pattern is shown. Notice that there are three situations: (1) demand and capacity are equal; (2) demand is less than capacity; and (3) demand exceeds capacity.

image

The middle portion of the figure illustrates what happens with a chase approach. When normal capacity would exceed demand, capacity is cut back to match demand. Then, when demand exceeds normal capacity, the chase approach is to temporarily increase capacity to match demand.

The bottom portion of the figure illustrates the level-output strategy. When demand is less than capacity, output continues at normal capacity, and the excess output is put into inventory in anticipation of the time when demand exceeds capacity. When demand exceeds capacity, inventory is used to offset the shortfall in output.

Organizations may opt for a strategy that involves some combination of the pure strategies. This allows managers greater flexibility in dealing with uneven demand and perhaps in experimenting with a wide variety of approaches. However, the absence of a clear focus may lead to an erratic approach and confusion on the part of employees.

Choosing a Strategy

Whatever strategy an organization is considering, factors such as company policy, flexibility, and costs are important. Company policy may set constraints on the available options or the extent to which they can page 475be used. For instance, company policy may discourage layoffs except under extreme conditions. Subcontracting may not be a viable alternative due to the desire to maintain secrecy about some aspect of the manufacturing of the product (e.g., a secret formula or blending process). Union agreements often impose restrictions. For example, a union contract may specify both minimum and maximum numbers of hours part-time workers can be used. The degree of flexibility needed to use the chase approach may not be present for companies designed for high, steady output, such as refineries and auto assembly plants.

It is important to align plans with an organization’s strategies. For example, if an organization’s strategy includes excellent customer service, having a backlog of orders that results in making customers wait would not be good. Or, if an organization prides itself on how it treats employees, hiring/firing would not be high on its lists of options. And the option of building inventories during slow times must involve taking into account available storage space, as well as the costs related to having inventory on hand (heat, light, security, theft, product deterioration, and the opportunity costs associated with the money tied up in inventory), money that could be used for other purposes.

As a rule, aggregate planners seek to match supply and demand within the constraints imposed on them by policies or agreements and at minimum cost. They usually evaluate alternatives in terms of their overall costs. Table 11.3 compares reactive strategies. In the next section, a number of techniques for aggregate planning are described and presented with some examples of cost evaluation of alternative plans.

TABLE 11.3

Comparison of reactive strategies

Chase approach

Capacities (workforce levels, output rates, etc.) are adjusted to match demand requirements over the planning horizon. A chase strategy works best when inventory carrying costs are high and costs of changing capacity are low.

Advantages:

Investment in inventory is low.

Labor utilization is kept high.

Disadvantage:

The cost of adjusting output rates and/or workforce levels.

Level approach

Capacities (workforce levels, output rates, etc.) are kept constant over the planning horizon. A level strategy works best when inventory carrying costs and backlog costs are relatively low.

Advantage:

Stable output rates and workforce levels.

Disadvantages:

Greater inventory costs.

Increased overtime and idle time.

Resource utilizations that vary over time.

page 476 

11.3 TECHNIQUES FOR AGGREGATE PLANNING

Numerous techniques are available to help with the task of aggregate planning. Generally, they fall into one of two categories: informal trial-and-error techniques and mathematical techniques. In practice, informal techniques are more frequently used. However, a considerable amount of research has been devoted to mathematical techniques, and even though they are not as widely used, they often serve as a basis for comparing the effectiveness of alternative techniques for aggregate planning. Thus, it will be instructive to briefly examine them as well as the informal techniques.

A general procedure for aggregate planning consists of the following steps:

  1. Determine demand for each period.

  2. Determine capacities (regular time, overtime, subcontracting) for each period.

  3. Identify company or departmental policies that are pertinent (e.g., maintain a safety stock of 5 percent of demand, maintain a reasonably stable workforce).

  4. Determine unit costs for regular time, overtime, subcontracting, holding inventories, back orders, layoffs, and other relevant costs.

  5. Develop alternative plans and compute the cost for each.

  6. If satisfactory plans emerge, select the one that best satisfies objectives. Otherwise, return to step 5.

It can be helpful to use a worksheet or spreadsheet, such as the one illustrated in Table 11.4, to summarize demand, capacity, and cost for each plan. In addition, graphs can be used to guide the development of alternatives.

TABLE 11.4

Worksheet/spreadsheet

Trial-and-Error Techniques Using Graphs and Spreadsheets

Trial-and-error approaches consist of developing simple tables or graphs that enable planners to visually compare projected demand requirements with existing capacity. Alternatives are usually evaluated in terms of their overall costs. The chief disadvantage of such techniques is that they do not necessarily result in the optimal aggregate plan.

Two examples illustrate the development and comparison of aggregate plans. page 477In the first example, regular output is held steady, with inventory absorbing demand variations. In the second example, a lower rate of regular output is used, supplemented by the use of overtime. In both examples, some backlogs are allowed to build up.

These examples and other examples and problems in this chapter are based on the following assumptions:

  • The regular output capacity is the same in all periods. No allowance is made for holidays, different numbers of workdays in different months, and so on. This assumption simplifies computations.

  • Cost (back order, inventory, subcontracting, etc.) is a linear function composed of unit cost and number of units. This often has a reasonable approximation to reality, although there may be only narrow ranges over which this is true. Cost is sometimes more of a step function.

  • Plans are feasible; that is, sufficient inventory capacity exists to accommodate a plan, subcontractors with appropriate quality and capacity are standing by, and changes in output can be made as needed.

  • All costs associated with a decision option can be represented by a lump sum or by unit costs that are independent of the quantity involved. Again, a step function may be more realistic; but for purposes of illustration and simplicity, this assumption is appropriate.

  • Cost figures can be reasonably estimated and are constant for the planning horizon.

  • Inventories are built up and drawn down at a uniform rate, and output occurs at a uniform rate throughout each period. However, backlogs are treated as if they exist for an entire period, even though in periods where they initially appear, they would tend to build up toward the end of the period. Hence, this assumption is a bit unrealistic for some periods, but it simplifies computations.

In the examples and problems in this chapter, we use the following relationships to determine the number of workers, the amount of inventory, and the cost of a particular plan.

page 478 

The number of workers available in any period is calculated as follows:

Note: An organization would not hire and lay off simultaneously, so at least one of the last two terms will equal zero.

The amount of inventory at the end of a given period is calculated as follows:

The average inventory for a period is equal to

The cost of a particular plan for a given period can be determined by summing the appropriate costs:

The appropriate costs are calculated as follows:

Type of Cost

How to Calculate

Output

 

Regular

Regular cost per unit × Quantity of regular output

Overtime

Overtime cost per unit × Overtime quantity

Subcontract

Subcontract cost per unit × Subcontract quantity

Hire/layoff

Hire

Cost per hire × Number hired

Layoff

Cost per layoff × Number laid off

Inventory

Carrying cost per unit × Average inventory

Back order

Backorder cost per unit × Number of backorder units

The following examples are only two of many possible options that could be tried. Perhaps some of the others would result in a lower cost. With trial and error, you can never be completely sure you have identified the lowest-cost alternative unless every possible alternative is evaluated. Of course, the purpose of these examples is to illustrate the process of developing and evaluating an aggregate plan rather than to find the lowest-cost plan. Problems at the end of the chapter cover still other alternatives.

In practice, successful achievement of a good plan depends on the resourcefulness and persistence of the planner. Computer software such as the Excel templates that accompany this book can eliminate the computational burden of trial-and-error techniques.

Note that the total regular-time output of 1,800 units equals the total expected demand. Ending inventory equals beginning inventory plus or minus the quantity Output – Forecast. If Output – Forecast is negative, inventory is decreased in that period by that amount. If insufficient inventory exists, a backlog equal to the shortage amount appears, as in period 5. This is taken care of using the excess output in period 6.

The costs were computed as follows: Regular cost in each period equals 300 units × $20 per unit or $6,000. Inventory cost equals average inventory × $1 per unit. Backorder cost is $5 per unit. The total cost for this plan is $37,100.

Note that the first two quantities in each column are givens. The remaining quantities in the upper portion of the table were determined working down each column, beginning with the first column. The costs were then computed based on the quantities in the upper part of the table.

Very often, graphs can be used to guide the development of alternatives. Some planners prefer cumulative graphs, while others prefer to see a period-by-period breakdown of a plan. For instance, Figure 11.3 shows a cumulative graph for a plan with steady output (the slope of the dashed line represents the production rate) and inventory absorption of demand variations. Figure 11.2 is an example of a period-by-period graph. The obvious advantage of a graph is that it provides a visual portrayal of a plan. The preference of the planner determines which of these two types of graphs is chosen.

image

The amount of overtime that must be scheduled has to make up for a lost output of 20 units per period for six periods, which is 120. This is scheduled toward the center of the planning horizon because that is where the bulk of demand occurs. Although other amounts and time periods could be used as long as the total equals 120, scheduling it earlier would increase inventory carrying costs; scheduling it later would increase the backlog cost.

Overall, the total cost for this plan is $4,640, which is $60 less than the previous plan. Regular-time production cost and inventory cost are down, but there is overtime cost. However, this plan achieves savings in backorder cost, making it somewhat less costly overall than the plan in Example 1.

Mathematical Techniques

A number of mathematical techniques have been developed to handle aggregate planning. They range from mathematical programming models to heuristic and computer search models. This section briefly describes some of the better-known techniques.

page 481 

Linear Programming. Linear programming (LP) models are methods for obtaining optimal solutions to problems involving the allocation of scarce resources in terms of cost minimization or profit maximization. With aggregate planning, the goal is usually to minimize the sum of costs related to regular labor time, overtime, subcontracting, carrying inventory, and costs associated with changing the size of the workforce. Constraints involve the capacities of the workforce, inventories, and subcontracting.

The problem can be formulated as a transportation-type programming model so as to obtain aggregate plans that would match capacities with demand requirements and minimize costs. In order to use this approach, planners must identify capacity (supply) of regular time, overtime, subcontracting, and inventory on a period-by-period basis, as well as related costs of each variable.

Table 11.5 shows the notation and setup of a transportation table. Note the systematic way that costs change as you move across a row from left to right. Regular cost, overtime cost, and subcontracting cost are at their lowest when the output is consumed (i.e., delivered, etc.) in the same period it is produced (at the intersection of the period 1 row and the column for regular cost, at the intersection of the period 2 row and the column for regular cost, and so on). If goods are made available in one period but then carried over to later periods (i.e., moving across a row), holding costs are incurred at the rate of h per period. Thus, holding goods for two periods results in a unit cost of 2 h, whether or not the goods came from regular production, overtime, or subcontracting. Conversely, with back orders, the unit cost increases as you move across a row from right to left, beginning at the intersection of a row and column for the same period (e.g., period 3). For instance, if some goods are produced in period 3 to satisfy back orders from period 2, a unit backorder cost of b is incurred. And if goods in period 3 are used to satisfy back orders two periods earlier (e.g., from period 1), a unit cost of 2 b is incurred. Unused capacity is generally given a unit cost of 0, although it is certainly possible to insert an actual cost if that is relevant. Finally, beginning inventory is given a unit cost of 0 if it is used to satisfy demand in period 1. However, if it is held over for use in later periods, a holding cost of h per unit is added for each period. If the inventory is to be held for the entire planning horizon, a total unit cost of h times the number of periods, n, will be incurred.

TABLE 11.5

Transportation notation for aggregate planning

page 482 

Example 3 illustrates the setup and final solution of a transportation model of an aggregate planning problem.

Where backlogs are not permitted, the cell costs for the backlog positions can be made prohibitively high so that no backlogs will appear in the solution.

The main limitations of LP models are the assumptions of linear relationships among variables, the inability to continuously adjust output rates, and the need to specify a single objective (e.g., minimize costs) instead of using multiple objectives (e.g., minimize cost while stabilizing the workforce).

Simulation Models. A number of simulation models have been developed for aggregate planning. (An introduction to simulation is available on the textbook website.) The essence of simulation is the development of computerized models that can be tested under a variety of conditions in an attempt to identify reasonably acceptable (although not always optimal) solutions to problems.

page 483 

Table 11.7 summarizes planning techniques.

TABLE 11.7

Summary of planning techniques

Technique

Solution Approach

Characteristics

Spreadsheet

Heuristic (trial and error)

Intuitively appealing, easy to understand; solution not necessarily optimal

Linear programming

Optimizing

Computerized; linear assumptions not always valid

Simulation

Heuristic (trial and error)

Computerized models can be examined under a variety of conditions

Aggregate planning techniques other than trial and error do not appear to be widely used. Instead, in the majority of organizations, aggregate planning seems to be accomplished more on the basis of experience along with trial-and-error methods. It is difficult to say exactly why some of the mathematical techniques mentioned are not used to any great extent. Perhaps the level of mathematical sophistication discourages greater use, or the assumptions required in certain models appear unrealistic, or the models may be too narrow in scope. Whatever the reasons, none of the techniques to date have captured the attention of aggregate planners on a broad scale. Simulation is one technique that seems to be gaining favor. Research on improved approaches to aggregate planning is continuing.

page 484 

11.4 AGGREGATE PLANNING IN SERVICES

Aggregate planning for services takes into account projected customer demands, equipment capacities, and labor capabilities. The resulting plan is a time-phased projection of service staff requirements.

The following are examples of service organizations that use aggregate planning.

Hospitals: Hospitals use aggregate planning to allocate funds, staff, and supplies to meet the demands of patients for their medical services. For example, plans for bed capacity, medications, surgical supplies, and personnel needs are based on patient load forecasts.

Airlines: Aggregate planning in the airline industry is fairly complex due to the need to take into account a wide range of factors (planes, flight personnel, ground personnel) and multiple routes and landing/departure sites. Also, capacity decisions must take into account the percentage of seats to be allocated to various fare classes in order to maximize profit or yield.

Restaurants: Aggregate planning in the case of a high-volume product output business such as a restaurant is directed toward smoothing the service rate, determining the size of the workforce, and managing demand to match a fixed kitchen and eating capacity. The general approach usually involves adjusting the number of staff according to the time of day and the day of the week.

Other services: Financial, hospitality, transportation, and recreation services provide a high-volume, intangible output. Aggregate planning for these and similar services involves managing demand and planning for human resource requirements. The main goals are to accommodate peak demand and to find ways to effectively use labor resources during periods of low demand.

Aggregate planning for manufacturing and aggregate planning for services share similarities in some respects, but there are some important differences—related in general to the differences between manufacturing and services:

  1. Demand for service can be difficult to predict. The volume of demand for services is often quite variable. In some situations, customers may need prompt service (e.g., police, fire, medical emergency), while in others, they simply want prompt service and may be willing to go elsewhere if their wants are not met. These factors place a greater burden on service providers to anticipate demand. Consequently, service providers must pay careful attention to planned capacity levels.

    page 485 

  2. Capacity availability can be difficult to predict. Processing requirements for services can sometimes be quite variable, similar to the variability of work in a job shop setting. Moreover, the variety of tasks required of servers can be great, again similar to the variety of tasks in a job shop. However, in services, the types of variety are more pervasive than they are in manufacturing. This makes it more difficult to establish simple measures of capacity. For example, what would be the capacity of a person who paints interiors of houses? The number of rooms per day or the number of square feet per hour are possible measures, but rooms come in many different sizes, and because the level of detail (and, thus, the painting implements that can be used) vary tremendously, a suitable measure for planning purposes can be quite difficult to arrive at. Similarly, bank tellers are called upon to handle a wide variety of transactions and requests for information, again making it difficult to establish a suitable measure of their capacity.

  3. Labor flexibility can be an advantage in services. Labor often comprises a significant portion of service compared to manufacturing. That, coupled with the fact that service providers are often able to handle a fairly wide variety of service requirements, means that to some extent, planning is easier than it is in manufacturing. Of course, manufacturers recognize this advantage, and many are cross-training their employees to achieve the same flexibility. Moreover, in both manufacturing and service systems, the use of part-time workers can be an important option (e.g., Uber eats). Note that in self-service systems, the (customer) labor automatically adjusts to changes in demand!

  4. Services occur when they are rendered. Unlike manufacturing output, most services can’t be inventoried. Services such as financial planning, tax counseling, and oil changes can’t be stockpiled. This removes the option of building up inventories during a slow period in anticipation of future demand. Moreover, service capacity that goes unused is essentially wasted. Consequently, it becomes even more important to be able to match capacity and demand.

Because service capacity is perishable (e.g., an empty seat on an airplane flight can’t be saved for use on another flight), aggregate planners need to take that into account when deciding how to match supply and demand. Yield management is an approach that seeks to maximize revenue by using a strategy of variable pricing; prices are set relative to capacity availability. Thus, during periods of low demand, price discounts are offered to attract a wider population. Conversely, during peak periods, higher prices are posted to take advantage of limited supply relative to demand. Uber refers to it as surge pricing. Users of yield management include airlines, restaurants, theaters, hotels, resorts, cruise lines, and parking lots.

11.5 DISAGGREGATING THE AGGREGATE PLAN

For the production plan to be translated into meaningful terms for production, it is necessary to disaggregate the aggregate plan. This means breaking down the aggregate plan into specific product requirements in order to determine labor requirements (skills, size of workforce), materials, and inventory requirements.

Working with aggregate units facilitates intermediate planning. However, to put the production plan into operation, one must convert, or disaggregate, those aggregate units into units of actual page 486products or services to be produced or offered. For example, an appliance manufacturer might produce refrigerators, freezers, clothes washers, clothes dryers, and dishwashers. The aggregate plans would have to be broken down into quantities or each of these products. Similarly, a lawn mower manufacturer may have an aggregate plan that calls for 200 riding mowers in January, 300 in February, and 400 in March. That company may produce three different models of riding mowers. Although all the mowers probably contain some of the same parts and involve some similar or identical operations for fabrication and assembly, there would be some differences in the materials, parts, and operations that each type requires. Hence, the 200, 300, and 400 aggregate lawn mowers to be produced during those three months must be translated into specific numbers of mowers of each model prior to actually purchasing the appropriate materials and parts, scheduling operations, and planning inventory requirements.

The result of disaggregating the aggregate plan is a master production schedule (MPS) , or simply master schedule, showing the quantity and timing of specific end items for a scheduled horizon, which often covers about six to eight weeks ahead. A master schedule shows the planned output for individual products rather than an entire product group, along with the timing of production. The master schedule contains important information for marketing as well as for production. It reveals when orders are scheduled for production and when completed orders are to be shipped.

Figure 11.4 shows an overview of the context of disaggregation.

image

Figure 11.5 illustrates disaggregating the aggregate plan. The illustration makes a simple assumption in order to clearly show the concept of disaggregation: The totals of the aggregate and the disaggregated units are equal. In reality, that is not always true. As a consequence, disaggregating the aggregate plan may require considerable effort.

image

Figure 11.5 shows the aggregate plan broken down by units. However, it also can be useful to show the breakdown in percentages for different products or product families.

11.6 MASTER SCHEDULING

The master schedule is the heart of production planning and control. It determines the quantities needed to meet demand from all sources, and governs key decisions and activities throughout the organization.

The master schedule interfaces with marketing, capacity planning, production planning, and distribution planning: It enables marketing to make valid delivery commitments to warehouses and final customers; it enables production to evaluate capacity requirements; it provides the necessary information for production and marketing to negotiate when customer requests cannot be met by normal capacity; and it provides senior management with the opportunity to determine whether the business plan and its strategic objectives will be achieved. The master schedule also drives the material requirements planning (MRP) system that will be discussed in the next chapter.

The capacities used for master scheduling are based on decisions made during aggregate planning. Note that there is a time lapse between the time the aggregate plan is made and the development of a master schedule. Consequently, the outputs shown in a master schedule will not necessarily be identical to those of the aggregate plan, for the simple reason that more up-to-date demand information might be available, which the master schedule would take into account.

The central person in the master scheduling process is the master scheduler.

page 487 

The Master Scheduler

Most manufacturing organizations have (or should have) a master scheduler. The duties of the master scheduler generally include:

  1. Evaluating the impact of new orders

  2. Providing delivery dates for orders

  3. Dealing with problems:

    1. Evaluating the impact of production delays or late deliveries of purchased goods

    2. Revising the master schedule when necessary because of insufficient supplies or capacity

    3. Bringing instances of insufficient capacity to the attention of production and marketing personnel so they can participate in resolving conflicts

11.7 THE MASTER SCHEDULING PROCESS

A master schedule indicates the quantity and timing (i.e., delivery times) for a product, or a group of products, but it does not show planned production. For instance, a master schedule may call for delivery of 50 cases of cranberry-apple juice to be delivered on May 1. But this may not require any production; there may be 200 cases in inventory. Or it may require some production: If there were 40 cases in inventory, an additional 10 cases would be needed to achieve the specified delivery amount. Or it may involve production of 50 or more cases: In some instances, it is more economical to produce large amounts rather than small amounts, with the excess temporarily placed in inventory until needed. Thus, the production lot size might be 70 cases, so if additional cases were needed (e.g., 50 cases), a run of 70 cases would be made.

The master production schedule is one of the primary outputs of the master scheduling process, as illustrated in Figure 11.6.

image

Once a tentative master schedule has been developed, it must be validated. This is an extremely important step. Validation is referred to as rough-cut capacity planning (RCCP) . It involves testing the feasibility of a proposed master schedule relative to available capacities, to assure that no obvious capacity constraints exist. This means checking capacities of production and warehouse facilities, labor, and vendors to ensure no gross deficiencies exist that will render the master schedule unworkable. The master production schedule then serves as the basis for short-range planning. It should be noted that, whereas the aggregate plan covers an interval of, say, 12 months, the master schedule covers only a portion of this. In other words, the aggregate plan is disaggregated in stages, or phases, that may cover a few weeks to two or three months. Moreover, the master schedule may be updated monthly, even though it covers two or three months. For instance, the lawn mower master schedule would probably be updated at the end of January to include any revisions in planned output for February and March, as well as new information on planned output for April.

Time Fences

Changes to a master schedule can be disruptive, particularly changes to the early, or near, portions of the schedule. Typically, the further out in the future a change is, the less the tendency to cause problems.

High-performance organizations have an effective master scheduling process. A key component of effective scheduling is the use of time fences to facilitate order promising and the entry of orders into the system. Time fences divide a scheduling time horizon into three sections or phases, sometimes referred to as frozen, slushy, and liquid, in reference to the firmness of the schedule (see Figure 11.7).

page 488 

image

Frozen is the near-term phase that is so soon that delivery of a new order would be impossible, or only possible using very costly or extraordinary options such as delaying another order. Authority for new-order entry in this phase usually lies with the VP of manufacturing. The length of the frozen phase is often a function of the total time needed to produce a product, from procuring materials to shipping the order. There is a high degree of confidence in order-promise dates.

Slushy is the next phase, and its time fence is usually a few periods beyond the frozen phase. Order entry in this phase necessitates trade-offs, but is less costly or disruptive than in the frozen phase. Authority for order entry usually lies with the master scheduler. There is relative confidence in order-promise dates, and capacity planning becomes very specific.

Liquid is the farthest out on the time horizon. New orders or cancellations can be entered with ease. Order promise dates are tentative, and will be firmed up with the passage of time when orders are in the firm phase of the schedule horizon.

A key element in the success of the master scheduling process is strict adherence to time fence policies and rules. It is essential that they be adhered to and communicated throughout the organization.

Inputs

The master schedule has three inputs: the beginning inventory, which is the actual quantity on hand from the preceding period; actual forecasts for each period of the schedule; and customer orders, which are quantities already committed to customers. Other factors that might need to be taken into consideration include any hiring or firing restrictions imposed by HR, skill levels, limits on inventory such as available space, whether items are perishable, and whether there are some market lifetime (e.g., seasonal or obsolescence) considerations.

Outputs

The master scheduling process uses this information on a period-by-period basis to determine the projected inventory, production requirements, and the resulting uncommitted inventory, which is referred to as available-to-promise (ATP) inventory . Knowledge of the uncommitted inventory can enable marketing to make realistic promises to customers about deliveries of new orders.

The master scheduling process begins with a preliminary calculation of projected on-hand inventory. This reveals when additional inventory (i.e., production) will be needed. Consider the following example. A company that makes industrial pumps wants to prepare a master production schedule for June and July. Marketing has forecasted demand of 120 pumps for June and 160 pumps for July. These have been evenly distributed over the four weeks in each month: 30 per week in June and 40 per week in July, as illustrated in Figure 11.8A.

image

Now, suppose there are currently 64 pumps in inventory (i.e., beginning inventory is 64 pumps), and there are customer orders that have been committed (booked) and must be filled (see Figure 11.8B).

image

Figure 11.8B contains the three primary inputs to the master scheduling process: the beginning inventory, the forecast, and the customer orders that have been booked or committed. This information is necessary to determine three quantities: the projected on-hand inventory, the master production schedule, and the uncommitted (ATP) inventory. The first page 489step is to calculate the projected on-hand inventory, one week at a time, until it falls below a specified limit. In this example, the specified limit will be zero. Hence, we will continue until the projected on-hand ending inventory becomes negative.

The projected on-hand inventory is calculated as follows:

(11–1)

where the current week’s requirements are the larger of forecast and customer orders (committed).

For the first week, projected on-hand inventory equals beginning inventory minus the larger of forecast and customer orders. Because customer orders (33) are larger than the forecast (30), the customer orders amount is used. Thus, for the first week, we obtain

Projected on-hand inventories are shown in Figure 11.9 for the first three weeks (i.e., until the projected on-hand amount becomes negative).

image

page 490 

When the projected on-hand inventory becomes negative, this is a signal that production will be needed to replenish inventory. Hence, a negative projected on-hand inventory will require planned production. Suppose a production lot size of 70 pumps is used, so that whenever production is called for, 70 pumps will be produced. (The determination of lot size is described in Chapter 13.) Hence, the negative projected on-hand inventory in the third week will require production of 70 pumps, which will meet the projected shortfall of 29 pumps and leave 41 (i.e., 70 − 29 = 41) pumps for future demand.

These calculations continue for the entire schedule. Every time projected inventory becomes negative, another production lot of 70 pumps is added to the schedule. Figure 11.10 illustrates the calculations. The result is the master schedule and projected on-hand inventory for each week of the schedule. These can now be added to the master schedule (see Figure 11.11).

image image

It is now possible to determine the amount of inventory that is uncommitted and, hence, available to promise. Several methods are used in practice. The one we will employ involves a “look-ahead” procedure: Sum booked customer orders week by week until (but not including) a week in which there is an MPS amount. For example, in the first week, this procedure results in summing customer orders of 33 (week 1) and 20 (week 2) to obtain 53. In the first week, this amount is subtracted from the beginning inventory of 64 pumps plus the MPS (zero in this example) to obtain the amount that is available to promise. Thus,

This inventory is uncommitted, and it can be delivered in either week 1 or 2, or part can be delivered in week 1 and part in week 2. (Note that the ATP quantity is only calculated for the first week and for other weeks in which there is an MPS quantity. Hence, it is calculated for weeks 1, 3, 5, 7, 8.) See Figure 11.12.

image

page 491 

For weeks other than the first week, the beginning inventory drops out of the computation, and ATP is the look-ahead quantity subtracted from the MPS quantity.

Thus, for week 3, the promised amounts are 10 + 4 = 14, and the ATP is 70 − 14 = 56.

For week 5, customer orders are 2 (future orders have not yet been booked). The ATP is 70 − 2 = 68.

For weeks 7 and 8, there are no customer orders, so for the present, all of the MPS amount is available to promise.

As additional orders are booked, these would be entered in the schedule, and the ATP amounts would be updated to reflect those orders. Marketing can use the ATP amounts to provide realistic delivery dates to customers.

page 502 

page 503 

12.1 INTRODUCTION

An inventory is a stock or store of goods. Firms typically stock hundreds or even thousands of items in inventory, ranging from small things such as pencils, paper clips, screws, nuts, and bolts to large items such as machines, trucks, construction equipment, and airplanes. Naturally, many of the items a firm carries in inventory relate to the kind of business it engages in. Thus, manufacturing firms carry supplies of raw materials, purchased parts, partially finished items, and finished goods, as well as spare parts for machines, tools, and other supplies. Department stores carry clothing, furniture, carpeting, stationery, cosmetics, gifts, cards, and toys. Some also stock sporting goods, paints, and tools. Hospitals stock drugs, surgical supplies, life-monitoring equipment, sheets and pillow cases, and more. Supermarkets stock fresh and canned foods, packaged and frozen foods, household supplies, magazines, baked goods, dairy products, produce, and other items.

page 504 

The inventory models described in this chapter relate primarily to what are referred to as independent-demand items—that is, items that are ready to be sold or used. Thus, a computer would be an independent-demand item, whereas the components used to assemble a computer would be dependent-demand items.

12.2 THE NATURE AND IMPORTANCE OF INVENTORIES

Inventories are a vital part of business. Not only are they necessary for operations, but they also contribute to customer satisfaction. To get a sense of the significance of inventories, consider the following: Some very large firms have tremendous amounts of inventory. For example, General Motors was at one point reported to have as much as $40 billion worth of materials, parts, and components such as engines in its supply chain! Although the amounts and dollar values of inventories carried by different types of firms vary widely, a typical firm probably has about 30 percent of its current assets and perhaps as much as 90 percent of its working capital invested in inventory. One widely used measure of managerial performance relates to return on investment (ROI), which is profit after taxes divided by total assets. Because inventories may represent a significant portion of total assets, a reduction of inventories can result in a significant increase in ROI, although that benefit has to be weighed against a possible risk of a decrease in customer service. It is interesting to note that the ratio of inventories to sales in the manufacturing, wholesale, and retail sectors is one measure that is used to gauge the health of the U.S. economy.

Inventory decisions in service organizations can range from annoying to critical. Hospitals, for example, carry an array of drugs and blood supplies that might be needed on short notice. Being out of stock on some of these could imperil the well-being of a patient. However, many of these items have a limited shelf life, so carrying large quantities would mean having to dispose of unused, costly supplies. On-site repair services for computers, printers, copiers, and fax machines also have to carefully consider which parts to bring to the site to avoid having to make an extra trip to obtain parts. The same goes for home repair services such as electricians, appliance repairers, and plumbers.

The major source of revenues for retail and wholesale businesses is the sale of merchandise (i.e., inventory). In fact, in terms of dollars, the inventory of goods held for sale is one of the largest assets of a merchandising business. Retail stores that sell clothing wrestle with decisions about which styles to carry, and how much of each to carry, knowing full well that fast-selling items will mean greater profits than having to heavily discount goods that didn’t sell.

page 505 

Types of inventories include the following:

  • Raw materials and purchased parts

  • Partially completed goods, called work-in-process (WIP)

  • Finished-goods inventories (manufacturing firms) or merchandise (retail stores)

  • Tools and supplies

  • Maintenance and repairs (MRO) inventory

  • Goods-in-transit to warehouses, distributors, or customers (pipeline inventory)

Both manufacturing and service organizations have to take into consideration the space requirements of inventory. In some cases, space limitations may pose restrictions on inventory storage capability, thereby adding another dimension to inventory decisions.

To understand why firms have inventories at all, you need to be aware of the various functions of inventory.

Functions of Inventory

Inventories serve a number of functions. Among the most important are the following.

  • To meet anticipated customer demand. A customer can be a person who walks in off the street to buy a new smartphone, a mechanic who requests a tool at a tool crib, or a coffee shop that stocks coffee for expected demand. These inventories are referred to as anticipation stocks because they are held to satisfy expected (i.e., average) demand.

  • To smooth production requirements. Firms that experience variation in product demand often use inventory to achieve constant output during times of demand increases, and use inventory to “soak up” output that exceeds demand. Analogously, firms that experience seasonal patterns in demand often build up inventories during preseason periods to meet overly high requirements during seasonal periods. These inventories are aptly named seasonal inventories. Stores that sell greeting cards, or winter or summer recreational equipment, have seasonal inventories.

    page 506 

  • To decouple operations. Companies can use inventories as buffers between successive operations to maintain continuity of production that would otherwise be disrupted by events such as breakdowns of equipment and accidents that cause a portion of the operation to shut down temporarily. The buffers permit other operations to continue temporarily while the problem is resolved. Similarly, firms have used buffers of raw materials to insulate production from disruptions in deliveries from suppliers, and finished goods inventory to buffer sales operations from manufacturing disruptions. More recently, companies have taken a closer look at buffer inventories, recognizing the cost and space they require, and realizing that finding and eliminating sources of disruptions can greatly decrease the need for decoupling operations.

    Inventory buffers are also important in supply chains. Careful analysis can reveal points where buffers would be most useful, as well as points where they would merely increase costs without adding value.

  • To reduce the risk of stockouts. Delayed deliveries and unexpected increases in demand increase the risk of shortages. Delays can occur because of weather conditions, supplier stockouts, deliveries of wrong materials, quality problems, and so on. The risk of shortages can be reduced by holding safety stocks, which are stocks in excess of expected demand to compensate for variabilities in demand and lead time.

  • To take advantage of order cycles. To minimize purchasing and inventory costs, a firm often buys in quantities that exceed immediate requirements. This necessitates storing some or all of the purchased amount for later use. Similarly, it is usually economical to produce in large rather than small quantities. Again, the excess output must be stored for later use. Thus, inventory storage enables a firm to buy and produce in economic lot sizes without having to try to match purchases or production with demand requirements in the short run. This results in periodic orders or order cycles.

  • To hedge against price increases. If a firm anticipates a substantial price increase is about to occur, it might decide to purchase a larger-than-normal amount to beat the increase.

  • To permit operations. The fact that production operations take a certain amount of time (i.e., they are not instantaneous) means there will generally be some work-in-process inventory. In addition, intermediate stocking of goods—including raw materials, semifinished items, and finished goods at production sites, as well as goods stored in warehouses—leads to pipeline inventories throughout a production-distribution system. Little’s Law can be useful in quantifying pipeline inventory. It states that the average amount of inventory in a system is equal to the product of the average rate at which inventory units leave the system (i.e., the average demand rate) and the average time a unit is in the system. Thus, if units are in the system for an average of 10 days, and the demand rate is 5 units per day, the average inventory is 50 units: 5 units/day × 10 days = 50 units.

  • To take advantage of quantity discounts. Suppliers may give discounts on large orders, opening the possibility of saving money by purchasing goods in large quantities.

Objective of Inventory Management

Inadequate control of inventories can result in both under- and overstocking of items. Understocking results in missed deliveries, lost sales, dissatisfied customers, and production bottlenecks; overstocking unnecessarily takes up space and ties up funds that might be more productive elsewhere. Although overstocking may appear to be the lesser of the two evils, the price tag for excessive overstocking can be staggering when inventory holding costs are high, and matters can easily get out of hand.

The overall objective of inventory management is to achieve satisfactory levels of customer service, while keeping inventory costs within reasonable bounds. The two basic issues (decisions) for inventory management are when to order and how much to order. The greater part of this chapter is devoted to models that can be applied to assist in making those decisions.

page 507 

Managers have a number of performance measures they can use to judge the effectiveness of inventory management. The most obvious, of course, are costs and customer satisfaction, which they might measure by the number and quantity of backorders and/or customer complaints. A widely used measure is inventory turns, or inventory turnover , which is the ratio of annual cost of goods sold to average inventory investment. The turnover ratio indicates how many times a year the inventory is sold. Generally, the higher the ratio, the better, because that implies more efficient use of inventories. However, the desirable number of turns depends on the industry and what the profit margins are. The higher the profit margins, the lower the acceptable number of inventory turns, and vice versa. Also, a product that takes a long time to manufacture, or a long time to sell, will have a low turnover rate. This is often the case with high-end retailers (high profit margins). Conversely, supermarkets (low profit margins) have a fairly high turnover rate. Note, though, that there should be a balance between inventory investment and maintaining good customer service. Managers often use inventory turnover to evaluate inventory management performance. Monitoring this metric over time can yield insights into changes in performance.

Another useful measure is days of inventory on hand, a number that indicates the expected number of days of sales that can be supplied from existing inventory. Here, a balance is desirable: A high number of days might imply excess inventory, while a low number might imply a risk of running out of stock.

12.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR EFFECTIVE INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Management has two basic functions concerning inventory. One is to establish a system to keep track of items in inventory, and the other is to make decisions about how much and when to order. To be effective, management must have the following:

  1. A system to keep track of the inventory on hand and on order.

  2. A reliable forecast of demand that includes an indication of possible forecast error.

  3. Knowledge of lead times and lead time variability.

  4. Reasonable estimates of inventory holding costs, ordering costs, and shortage costs.

  5. A classification system for inventory items.

Let’s take a closer look at each of these requirements.

Inventory Counting Systems

Inventory counting systems can be periodic or perpetual. Under a periodic system , a physical count of items in inventory is made at periodic, fixed intervals (e.g., weekly, monthly) in order to decide how much to order of each item. Then, the manager estimates how much will be demanded prior to the next delivery period and bases the order quantity on that information. An advantage of this type of system is that orders for many items occur at the same time, which can result in economies in processing and shipping orders. There are also several disadvantages of periodic reviews. One is a lack of control between reviews. Another is the need to protect against shortages between review periods by carrying extra stock.

A perpetual inventory system (also known as a continuous review system) keeps track of removals from inventory on a continuous basis, so the system can provide information on the current level of inventory for each item. When the amount on hand reaches a predetermined minimum, a fixed quantity, Q, is ordered. An obvious advantage of this system is the control provided by the continuous monitoring of inventory withdrawals. Another advantage is the fixed-order quantity; management can determine an optimal order quantity. One disadvantage of this approach is the added cost of record keeping. Moreover, a physical count of inventories must still be performed periodically to verify records because of possible errors, pilferage, spoilage, and other factors that can reduce the effective amount of inventory. Bank transactions such as customer deposits and withdrawals are examples of continuous recording of inventory changes.

page 508 

Perpetual systems range from very simple to very sophisticated. A two-bin system , a very elementary system, uses two containers for inventory. Items are withdrawn from the first bin until its contents are exhausted. It is then time to reorder. Sometimes an order card is placed at the bottom of the first bin. The second bin contains enough stock to satisfy expected demand until the order is filled, plus an extra cushion of stock that will reduce the chance of a stockout if the order is late or if usage is greater than expected. The advantage of this system is that there is no need to record each withdrawal from inventory; the disadvantage is that the reorder card may not be turned in for a variety of reasons (e.g., misplaced, the person responsible forgets to turn it in).

Supermarkets, discount stores, and department stores have always been major users of periodic counting systems. Today, most have switched to computerized checkout systems using a laser scanning device that reads a universal product code (UPC) , or bar code, printed on an item tag or on packaging. A typical grocery product code is illustrated here:

The zero on the left of the bar code identifies this as a grocery item, the first five numbers (14800) indicate the manufacturer (Mott’s), and the last five numbers (23208) indicate the specific item (natural-style applesauce). Items in small packages, such as candy and gum, use a six-digit number.

Point-of-sale (POS) systems electronically record actual sales. Knowledge of actual sales can greatly enhance forecasting and inventory management: By relaying information about actual demand in real time, these systems enable management to make any necessary changes to restocking decisions. These systems are being increasingly emphasized as an important input to effective supply chain management by making this information available to suppliers.

UPC scanners represent major benefits to supermarkets. In addition to their increase in speed and accuracy, these systems give managers continuous information on inventories, reduce the need for periodic review and order-size determinations, and improve the level of customer service by indicating the price and quantity of each item on the customer’s receipt.

page 509 

Bar coding is important for other sectors of business besides retailing. Manufacturing and service industries benefit from the simplified production and inventory control it provides. In manufacturing, bar codes attached to parts, subassemblies, and finished goods greatly facilitate counting and monitoring activities. Automatic routing, scheduling, sorting, and packaging can also be done using bar codes. In health care, the use of bar codes can help to reduce drug-dispensing errors.

Stock keeping units (SKUs) are particularly helpful in retail businesses to track inventory items and sales. Unlike UPC codes, which are universal, SKUs are alphanumeric codes unique to each business. They can be used to identify a product’s traits such as brand, size, color, price, and customer type (e.g., adult, child, gender). Each symbol in the code represents a product characteristic. Typically, the symbols are arranged from highest priority to lowest, relative to what customers want. So if brand is most important, the symbol representing that would appear first in the sequence.

Radio frequency identification (RFID) tags are also used to keep track of inventory in certain applications.

Demand Forecasts and Lead-Time Information

Inventories are used to satisfy demand requirements, so it is essential to have reliable estimates of the amount and timing of demand. Similarly, it is essential to know how long it will take for orders to be delivered. In addition, managers need to know the extent to which demand and lead time (the time between submitting an order and receiving it) might vary; the greater the potential variability, the greater the need for additional stock to reduce the risk of a shortage between deliveries. Thus, there is a crucial link between forecasting and inventory management.

Inventory Costs

Four basic costs are associated with inventories: purchase, holding, ordering, and shortage costs.

Purchase cost is the amount paid to a vendor or supplier to buy the inventory. It can include shipping cost. Purchase cost is typically the largest of all inventory costs.

Holding, or carrying, costs relate to physically having items in storage. Costs include interest, insurance, taxes (in some states), depreciation, obsolescence, deterioration, spoilage, pilferage, breakage, tracking, picking items from inventory, and warehousing costs (heat, light, rent, workers, equipment, security). They also include opportunity costs associated with having funds that could be used elsewhere tied up in inventory. Note that it is the variable portion of these costs that is pertinent.

page 510 

The significance of the various components of holding cost depends on the type of item involved, although taxes, interest, and insurance are generally based on the dollar value of an inventory. Items that are easily concealed (e.g., smartphones, calculators) or fairly expensive (cars, TVs) are prone to theft. Fresh seafood, meats and poultry, produce, and baked goods are subject to rapid deterioration and spoilage. Dairy products, salad dressings, medicines, and batteries also have limited shelf lives.

Holding costs are stated in either of two ways: as a percentage of unit price or as a dollar amount per unit. Typical annual holding costs range from 20 to 40 percent or more of the value of an item. In other words, to hold a $100 item in inventory for one year could cost from $20 to $40.

Ordering costs are the costs of ordering and receiving inventory. They are the costs that occur with the actual placement of an order. They include determining how much is needed, preparing invoices, inspecting goods upon arrival for quality and quantity, and moving the goods to temporary storage. Ordering costs are generally expressed as a fixed dollar amount per order, regardless of order size.

When a firm produces its own inventory instead of ordering it from a supplier, machine setup costs (e.g., preparing equipment for the job by adjusting the machine, changing cutting tools) are analogous to ordering costs; that is, they are expressed as a fixed charge per production run, regardless of the size of the run.

Shortage costs result when demand exceeds the supply of inventory on hand. These costs can include the opportunity cost of not making a sale, loss of customer goodwill, late charges, backorder costs, and similar costs. Furthermore, if the shortage occurs in an item carried for internal use (e.g., to supply an assembly line), the cost of lost production or downtime is considered a shortage cost. Such costs can easily run into hundreds of dollars a minute or more. Shortage costs are sometimes difficult to measure, and they may be subjectively estimated.

Classification System

An important aspect of inventory management is that items held in inventory are not of equal importance in terms of dollars invested, profit potential, sales or usage volume, or stockout penalties. Therefore, it would be unrealistic to devote equal attention to each of these items. Instead, a more reasonable approach would be to allocate control efforts according to the relative importance of various items in inventory.

The A-B-C approach classifies inventory items according to some measure of importance, usually annual dollar value (i.e., dollar value per unit multiplied by annual usage rate), and then allocates control efforts accordingly. Typically, three classes of items are used: A (very important), B (moderately important), and C (least important). However, the actual number of categories may vary from organization to organization, depending on the extent to which a firm wants to differentiate control efforts. With three classes of items, A items generally only account for about 10 to 20 percent of the number of items in inventory, but about 60 to 70 percent of the annual dollar value. At the other end of the scale, C items might account for about 50 to 60 percent of the number of items but only about 10 to 15 percent of the dollar value of an inventory. These percentages vary from firm to firm, but in most instances a page 511relatively small number of items will account for a large share of the value or cost associated with an inventory, and these items should receive a relatively greater share of control efforts. For instance, A items should receive close attention through frequent reviews of amounts on hand and control over withdrawals, where possible, to make sure that customer service levels are attained. The C items should receive only loose control (two-bin system, bulk orders), and the B items should have controls that lie between the two extremes.

Note that C items are not necessarily unimportant; incurring a stockout of C items such as the nuts and bolts used to assemble manufactured goods can result in a costly shutdown of an assembly line. However, due to the low annual dollar value of C items, there may not be much additional cost incurred by ordering larger quantities of some items, or ordering them a bit earlier.

Figure 12.1 illustrates the A-B-C concept.

image

page 512 

To conduct an A-B-C analysis, follow these steps:

  1. For each item, multiply annual volume by unit price to get the annual dollar value.

  2. Arrange annual dollar values in descending order.

  3. The few (10 to 15 percent) with the highest annual dollar value are A items. The most (about 50 percent) with the lowest annual dollar value are C items. Those in between (about 35 percent) are B items.

Although annual dollar value may be the primary factor in classifying inventory items, a manager may take other factors into account in making exceptions for certain items (e.g., changing the classification of a B item to an A item). Factors may include the risk of obsolescence, the risk of a stockout, the distance of a supplier, and so on.

page 513 

Managers use the A-B-C concept in many different settings to improve operations. One key use occurs in customer service, where a manager can focus attention on the most important aspects of customer service by categorizing different aspects as very important, important, or of only minor importance. The point is to not overemphasize minor aspects of customer service at the expense of major aspects.

Another application of the A-B-C concept is as a guide to cycle counting , which is a physical count of items in inventory. One purpose of cycle counting is to reduce discrepancies between the amounts indicated by inventory records and the actual quantities of inventory on hand. Accuracy is important because inaccurate records can lead to disruptions in operations, poor customer service, and unnecessarily high inventory carrying costs. Another purpose of cycle counting is to uncover and correct the causes of inventory discrepancies. Counts conducted more frequently than once a year can reduce the costs of inaccuracies compared to only doing an annual count, by allowing for investigation and correction of the causes of inaccuracies. Causes might involve theft (customers and employees), poor record keeping, or failure to note discrepancies in supplier deliveries.

The key questions concerning cycle counting for management are the following:

  • How much accuracy is needed?

  • When should cycle counting be performed?

  • Who should do it?

APICS recommends the following guidelines for inventory record accuracy: within ±0.2 percent for A items, ±1.0 percent for B items, and ±5.0 percent for C items. A items are counted frequently, B items are counted less frequently, and C items are counted the least frequently.

Some companies use certain events to trigger cycle counting, whereas others do it on a periodic (scheduled) basis. Events that can trigger a physical count of inventory include an out-of-stock report written on an item indicated by inventory records to be in stock, an inventory report that indicates a low or zero balance of an item, and a specified level of activity (e.g., every 2,000 units sold).

Some companies use regular stockroom personnel to do cycle counting during periods of slow activity, while others contract with outside firms to do it on a periodic basis. Use of an outside firm provides an independent check on inventory and may reduce the risk of problems created by dishonest employees. Still other firms maintain full-time personnel to do cycle counting.

12.4 INVENTORY ORDERING POLICIES

Inventory ordering policies address the two basic issues of inventory management:

  • How much to order

  • When to order

In the following sections, a number of models are described that are used for these issues. The discussion begins with the issue of how much to order.

page 514 

12.5 HOW MUCH TO ORDER: ECONOMIC ORDER QUANTITY MODELS

The question of how much to order can be determined by using an economic order quantity (EOQ) model. EOQ models identify the optimal order quantity by minimizing the sum of certain annual costs that vary with order size and order frequency. Three order-size models are described here:

  • The basic economic order quantity model

  • The economic production quantity model

  • The quantity discount model

Basic Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) Model

The basic EOQ model is the simplest of the three models. It is used to identify a fixed order size that will minimize the sum of the annual costs of holding inventory and ordering inventory. The unit purchase price of items in inventory is not generally included in the total cost because the unit cost is unaffected by the order size unless quantity discounts are a factor. If holding costs are specified as a percentage of unit cost, then unit cost is indirectly included in the total cost as a part of holding costs.

The basic model involves a number of assumptions. They are listed in Table 12.1.

TABLE 12.1

Assumptions of the basic EOQ model

  • Only one product is involved.

  • Annual demand requirements are known.

  • Demand is spread evenly throughout the year so that the demand rate is reasonably constant.

  • Lead time is known and constant.

  • Each order is received in a single delivery.

  • There are no quantity discounts.

Inventory ordering and usage occur in cycles. Figure 12.2 illustrates several inventory cycles. A cycle begins with receipt of an order of Q units, which are withdrawn at a constant rate over time. When the quantity on hand is just sufficient to satisfy demand during lead time, an order for Q units is submitted to the supplier. Because it is assumed that both the usage rate and the lead time do not vary, the order will be received at the precise instant that the inventory on hand falls to zero. Thus, orders are timed to avoid both excess stock and stockouts.

page 515 

image

The optimal order quantity reflects a balance between carrying costs and ordering costs: As order size varies, one type of cost will increase while the other decreases. For example, if the order size is relatively small, the average inventory will be low, resulting in low carrying costs. However, a small order size will necessitate frequent orders, which will drive up annual ordering costs. Conversely, ordering large quantities at infrequent intervals can hold down annual ordering costs, but that would result in higher average inventory levels and therefore increased carrying costs. Figure 12.3 illustrates these two extremes.

image

Thus, the ideal solution is an order size that causes neither a few very large orders nor many small orders, but one that lies somewhere between. The exact amount to order will depend on the relative magnitudes of carrying and ordering costs.

Annual carrying cost is computed by multiplying the average amount of inventory on hand by the cost to carry one unit for one year, even though any given unit would not necessarily be held for a year. The average inventory is simply half of the order quantity: The amount on hand decreases steadily from Q units to 0, for an average of image. Using the symbol H to represent the average annual carrying cost per unit, the total annual carrying cost is

where

Carrying cost is thus a linear function of Q: Carrying costs increase or decrease in direct proportion to changes in the order quantity Q, as Figure 12.4A illustrates.

image

On the other hand, annual ordering cost will decrease as order size increases because, for a given annual demand, the larger the order size, the fewer the number of orders needed. For instance, if annual demand is 12,000 units and the order size is 1,000 units per order, there must be 12 orders over the year. But if Q = 2,000 units, only six orders will be needed; if Q = 3,000 units, only four orders will be needed. In general, the number of orders per year will be D/Q, page 516where D = Annual demand and Q = Order size. Unlike carrying costs, ordering costs are relatively insensitive to order size; regardless of the amount of an order, certain activities must be done, such as determining how much is needed, periodically evaluating sources of supply, and preparing the invoice. Even inspection of the shipment to verify quality and quantity characteristics is not strongly influenced by order size because large shipments are sampled rather than completely inspected. Hence, ordering cost is treated as a constant. Annual ordering cost is a function of the number of orders per year and the ordering cost per order:

where

Because the number of orders per year, D/ Q, decreases as Q increases, annual ordering cost is inversely related to order size, as Figure 12.4B illustrates.

The total annual cost (TC) associated with carrying and ordering inventory when Q units are ordered each time is

(12–1)

(Note that D and H must be in the same units, e.g., months, years.) Figure 12.4C reveals that the total-cost curve is U-shaped (i.e., convex, with one minimum) and that it reaches its minimum at the quantity where carrying and ordering costs are equal. An expression for the optimal order quantity, Q 0, can be obtained using calculus. 1 The result is the formula

(12–2)

Thus, given annual demand, the ordering cost per order, and the annual carrying cost per unit, one can compute the optimal (economic) order quantity. The minimum total cost is then found by substituting Q 0 for Q in Formula 12–1.

The length of an order cycle (i.e., the time between orders) is

(12–3)

page 517 

Carrying cost is sometimes stated as a percentage of the price of an item rather than as a dollar amount per unit. However, as long as the percentage is converted into a dollar amount, the EOQ formula is still appropriate.

page 518 

Comment: Holding and ordering costs, and annual demand, are typically estimated values rather than values that can be precisely determined, say, from accounting records. Holding costs are sometimes designated by management rather than computed. Consequently, the EOQ should be regarded as an approximate quantity rather than an exact quantity. Thus, rounding the calculated value (to a whole number) is perfectly acceptable; stating a value to several decimal places would tend to give an unrealistic impression of the precision involved. In fact, businesses often round to the nearest case size, pallet size, or to a standard shipping size. An obvious question is: How good is this “approximate” EOQ in terms of minimizing cost? The answer is that the EOQ is fairly robust; the total cost curve is relatively flat near the EOQ. In other words, even if the order quantity differs from the actual EOQ, total costs will not increase much at all. This is particularly true for quantities larger than the real EOQ, because the total cost curve rises very slowly to the right of the EOQ. (See Figure 12.5.)

image

Because the total cost curve is relatively flat around the EOQ, there can be some flexibility to modify the order quantity a bit from the EOQ (say, to achieve a round lot or full truckload) without incurring much of an increase in total cost.

Economic Production Quantity (EPQ)

The batch mode is widely used in production. Even in assembly operations, portions of the work are done in batches. The reason for this is that in certain instances, the capacity to produce a part exceeds the part’s usage or demand rate. As long as production continues, inventory will continue to grow. In such instances, it makes sense to periodically produce such items in batches, or lots, instead of producing continually.

The assumptions of the EPQ model are similar to those of the EOQ model, except that instead of orders received in a single delivery, units are received incrementally during production. The assumptions are:

  • Only one product is involved.

  • Annual demand is known.

  • The usage rate is constant.

  • Usage occurs continually, but production occurs periodically.

  • The production rate is constant when production is occurring.

  • Lead time is known and constant.

  • There are no quantity discounts.

Figure 12.6 illustrates how inventory is affected by periodically producing a batch of a particular item.

image

During the production phase of the cycle, inventory builds up at a rate equal to the difference between production and usage rates. For example, if the daily production rate is 20 units and the daily usage rate is 5 units, inventory will build up at the rate of 20 − 5 = 15 units per day. As long as production occurs, the inventory level will continue to build; when production ceases, the inventory level will begin to decrease. Hence, the inventory level will be maximum at the point where production ceases. Inventory will then decrease at the constant usage rate. When the amount of inventory on hand is exhausted, production is resumed, and the cycle repeats itself.

page 519 

Because the company makes the product itself, there are no ordering costs as such. Nonetheless, with every production run (batch) there are setup costs—the costs required to prepare the equipment for the job, such as cleaning, adjusting, and changing tools and fixtures. Setup costs are analogous to ordering costs because they are independent of the lot (run) size. They are treated in the formula in exactly the same way. The larger the run size, the fewer the number of runs needed and, therefore, the lower the annual setup cost. The number of runs or batches per year is D/Q, and the annual setup cost is equal to the number of runs per year times the setup cost, S, per run: (D/Q)S.

The total cost is

(12–4)

where

Unlike the EOQ case, where the entire quantity, Q, goes into inventory, in this case usage continually draws off some of the output, and what’s left goes into inventory. So the inventory level will never be at the run size, Q 0. You can see that in Figure 12.6.

The economic run quantity is

(12–5)

where

Note: p and u must be in the same units (e.g., both in units per day, or units per week).

The cycle time (the time between setups of consecutive runs) for the economic run size model is a function of the run size and usage (demand) rate:

(12–6)

Similarly, the run time (the production phase of the cycle) is a function of the run (lot) size and the production rate:

(12–7)

The maximum and average inventory levels are

(12–8)

page 520 

Quantity Discounts

Quantity discounts are price reductions for larger orders offered to customers to induce them to buy in large quantities. For example, a Chicago surgical supply company publishes the price list shown in Table 12.2 for boxes of gauze strips. Notice how the price per box decreases as order quantity increases.

TABLE 12.2

Price list for extra-wide gauze strips

Order Quantity

Price per Box

  1 to 44

$2.00

 45 to 69

 1.70

70 or more

 1.40

page 521 

When quantity discounts are available, there are a number of questions that must be addressed to decide whether to take advantage of a discount. These include:

  • Will storage space be available for the additional items?

  • Will obsolescence or deterioration be an issue?

  • Can we afford to tie up extra funds in inventory?

If the decision is made to take advantage of a quantity discount, the goal is to select the order quantity that will minimize total cost, where total cost is the sum of carrying cost, ordering cost, and purchasing (i.e., product) cost:

(12–9)

where

Recall that in the basic EOQ model, determination of order size does not involve the purchasing cost. The rationale for not including unit price is that under the assumption of no quantity discounts, price per unit is the same for all order sizes. Inclusion of unit price in the total-cost computation in that case would merely increase the total cost by the amount P times D. A graph of total annual purchase cost versus quantity would be a horizontal line. Hence, including purchasing costs would merely raise the total-cost curve by the same amount ( PD) at every point. That would not change the EOQ. (See Figure 12.7.)

image

When quantity discounts are offered, there is a separate U-shaped total-cost curve for each unit price. Again, including unit prices merely raises each curve by a constant amount. However, because the unit prices are all different, each curve is raised by a different amount: Smaller unit prices will raise a total-cost curve less than larger unit prices. Note that no one curve applies to the entire range of quantities; each curve applies to only a portion of the range. (See Figure 12.8.) Hence, the applicable or feasible total cost is initially on the curve with the highest unit price and then drops down, curve by curve, at the price breaks, which are the minimum quantities needed to obtain the discounts. Thus, in Table 12.2, the price breaks for gauze strips are at 45 and 70 boxes. The result is a total-cost curve with steps at the price breaks.

image

page 522 

Even though each curve has a minimum, those points are not necessarily feasible. For example, the minimum point for the $1.40 curve in Figure 12.8 appears to be about 65 units. However, the price list shown in Table 12.2 indicates that an order size of 65 boxes will involve a unit price of $1.70. The actual total-cost curve is denoted by the solid lines; only those price–quantity combinations are feasible. The objective of the quantity discount model is to identify the order quantity that will represent the lowest total cost for the entire set of curves.

Analysis of quantity discount problems differs slightly, depending on whether holding costs are independent of unit price (i.e., constant), or whether they are a percentage of unit price. The following table illustrates the two ways, using 20 percent to illustrate holding costs that are a percentage of unit price.

Order Quality

Unit Price

H constant @ $4

H 20% of Unit Price

1 to 99

$10

4

.20(10) = 2.00

100 to 299

 9

4

 .20(9) = 1.80

300 or more

 8

4

 .20(8) = 1.60

When carrying costs are constant, there will be a single minimum point. All curves will have their minimum point at the same quantity. Consequently, the total-cost curves line up vertically, differing only in that the lower unit prices are reflected by lower total-cost curves as shown in Figure 12.9A. (For purposes of illustration, the horizontal purchasing cost lines have been omitted.)

image

A. When carrying costs are constant, all curves have their minimum points at the same quantity.

When carrying costs are specified as a percentage of unit price, each curve will have a different minimum point. Because carrying costs are a percentage of price, lower prices will mean lower carrying costs and larger minimum points. Thus, as price decreases, each curve’s minimum point will be to the right of the next higher curve’s minimum point. (See Figure 12.9B.)

The procedure for determining the overall EOQ differs slightly, depending on which of these two cases is relevant. For carrying costs that are constant, the procedure is as follows:

  1. Compute the common minimum point, and then identify the price range in which the minimum point is feasible.

    page 523 

    1. If the minimum point is feasible in the lowest cost price range, that is the optimal order quantity.

    2. If the minimum point is in a higher cost range, compute the total cost for the feasible minimum point and for the price break quantity (i.e., small quantity to buy for that unit price), being sure to include the purchase cost.; the quantity (minimum point or price break quantity) that yields the lowest total cost is the optimal order quantity.

When carrying costs are expressed as a percentage of price, determine the best purchase quantity with the following procedure:

  1. Beginning with the lowest unit price, compute the minimum points for each price range until you find a feasible minimum point (i.e., until a minimum point falls in the quantity range for its price).

  2. If the minimum point for the lowest unit price is feasible, it is the optimal order quantity. If the minimum point is not feasible in the lowest price range, compare the total cost at the price break for all lower price ranges with the total cost of the feasible minimum point. The quantity that yields the lowest total cost is the optimum.

12.6 REORDER POINT ORDERING

EOQ models answer the question of how much to order, but not the question of when to order. The latter is the function of models that identify the reorder point (ROP) in terms of a quantity: The reorder point occurs when the quantity on hand drops to a predetermined amount. That amount generally includes expected demand during lead time and perhaps an extra cushion of stock, which serves to reduce the probability of experiencing a stockout during lead time. Note that in order to know when the reorder point has been reached, perpetual (i.e., continual) monitoring of inventory is required.

Inventory that is intended to meet expected demand is known as cycle stock , while inventory that is held to reduce the probability of experiencing a stockout (i.e., running out of stock) due to demand and/or lead time variability is known as safety stock .

The goal in ordering is to place an order when the amount of inventory on hand is sufficient to satisfy demand during the time it takes to receive that order (i.e., lead time). There are four determinants of the reorder point quantity:

  • The rate of demand (usually based on a forecast)

  • The lead time

  • The extent of demand and/or lead time variability

  • The degree of stockout risk acceptable to management

page 526 

If demand and lead time are both constant, the reorder point is simply

(12–10)

where

Note: Demand and lead time must be expressed in the same time units.

When variability is present in demand or lead time, it creates the possibility that actual demand will exceed expected (average) demand. Consequently, it becomes desirable to carry additional inventory, called safety stock, to reduce the risk of running out of inventory (a stockout) during lead time. The reorder point then increases by the amount of the safety stock:

(12–11)

For example, if expected demand during lead time is 100 units, and the desired amount of safety stock is 10 units, the ROP would be 110 units.

Figure 12.12 illustrates how safety stock can reduce the risk of a stockout during lead time (LT). Note that stockout protection is needed only during lead time. If there is a sudden surge at any point during the cycle, that will trigger another order. Once that order is received, the danger of an imminent stockout is negligible.

image

Because it costs money to hold safety stock, a manager must carefully weigh the cost of carrying safety stock against the reduction in stockout risk it provides. The customer service level increases as the risk of stockout decreases. Order cycle service level can be defined as the probability that demand will not exceed supply during lead time (i.e., that the amount of stock on hand will be sufficient to meet demand). Hence, a service level of 95 percent implies a probability of 95 percent that demand will not exceed supply during lead time. An equivalent statement that demand will be satisfied in 95 percent of such instances does not mean that 95 percent of demand will be satisfied. The risk of a stockout is the complement of service level; a customer service level of 95 percent implies a stockout risk of 5 percent. That is,

Service level = 100 percent – Stockout risk

Later, you will see how the order cycle service level relates to the annual service level.

Consider for a moment the importance of stockouts. When a stockout occurs, demand cannot be satisfied at that time. In manufacturing operations, stockouts mean that jobs will be delayed and additional costs will be incurred. If the stockout involves parts for an assembly line, or spare parts for a machine or conveyor belt on the line, the line will have to shut down, typically at a very high cost per hour, until parts can be obtained. For service operations, stockouts mean that services cannot be completed on time. Aside from the added cost that results from the time delay, there is not only the matter of customer dissatisfaction but also the fact that schedules will be disrupted, sometimes creating a “domino effect” on following jobs. In the retail sector, stockouts create a competitive disadvantage that can result in customer dissatisfaction and, ultimately, the loss of customers.

page 527 

The amount of safety stock that is appropriate for a given situation depends on the following factors:

  • The average demand rate and average lead time

  • Demand and lead time variability

  • The desired service level

For a given order cycle service level, the greater the variability in either demand rate or lead time, the greater the amount of safety stock that will be needed to achieve that service level. Similarly, for a given amount of variation in demand rate or lead time, achieving an increase in the service level will require increasing the amount of safety stock. Selection of a service level may reflect stockout costs (e.g., lost sales, customer dissatisfaction) or it might simply be a policy variable (e.g., the manager wants to achieve a specified service level for a certain item).

Let us look at several models that can be used in cases when variability is present. The first model can be used if an estimate of expected demand during lead time and its standard deviation are available. The formula is

(12–12)

where

The models generally assume that any variability in demand rate or lead time can be adequately described by a normal distribution. However, this is not a strict requirement; the models provide approximate reorder points even where actual distributions depart from normal.

The value of z (see Figure 12.13) used in a particular instance depends on the stockout risk that the manager is willing to accept. Generally, the smaller the risk the manager is willing to accept, the greater the value of z. Note that the concern is only with the right tail of the normal distribution. Use Appendix B, Table B, to obtain the value of z, given a desired service level for lead time.

page 528 

image

When data on lead time demand are not readily available, Formula 12–12 cannot be used. Nevertheless, data are generally available on daily or weekly demand, and on the length of lead time. Using those data, a manager can determine whether demand and/or lead time is variable, if variability exists in one or both, and the related standard deviation(s). For those situations, one of the following formulas can be used:

If only demand is variable, then image and the reorder point is

(12–13)

where

page 529 

If only lead time is variable, then image and the reorder point is

(12–14)

where

If both demand and lead time are variable, then

and the reorder point is

(12–15)

Note: Each of these models assumes that demand and lead time are independent.

Note that a two-bin ordering system (see p. 508) involves ROP reordering: The quantity in the second bin is equal to the ROP.

The logic of the three formulas for the reorder point may not be immediately obvious. The first part of each formula is the expected demand, which is the product of daily (or weekly) demand and the number of days (or weeks) of lead time. The second part of the formula is z times the standard deviation of lead time demand. For the formula in which only demand is variable, daily (or weekly) demand is assumed to be normally distributed and has the same mean and standard deviation (see Figure 12.14). The standard deviation of demand for the entire lead time is found by summing the variances of daily (or weekly) demands, and then finding the square root of that number because, unlike variances, standard deviations are not additive. Hence, if the daily standard deviation is image, the variance is image, and if lead time is four days, the variance of lead time demand will equal the sum of the four variances, which is image. The standard deviation of lead time demand will be the square root of this, which is equal to image In general, this becomes image and, hence, the last part of Formula 12–13.

page 530 

image

When only lead time is variable, the explanation is much simpler. The standard deviation of lead time demand is equal to the constant daily demand multiplied by the standard deviation of lead time.

When both demand and lead time are variable, the formula appears truly impressive. However, it is merely the result of squaring the standard deviations of the two previous formulas to obtain their variances, summing them, and then taking the square root.

It is sometimes convenient to think of service level in annual terms. One definition of annual service level is the percentage of demand filled directly from inventory. This is also known as the fill rate . Thus, if D = 1,000, and 990 units were filled directly from inventory (shortages totaling 10 units over the year were recorded), the annual service level (fill rate) would be 990/1,000 = 99 percent.

12.7 HOW MUCH TO ORDER: FIXED-ORDER-INTERVAL MODEL

The fixed-order-interval (FOI) model is used when orders must be placed at fixed time intervals (weekly, twice a month, etc.): The timing of orders is set. The question, then, at each order point, is how much to order. Fixed-interval ordering systems are widely used by retail businesses, especially small retail businesses. If demand is variable, the order size will tend to vary from cycle to cycle. This is quite different from an EOQ/ROP approach in which the order size generally remains fixed from cycle to cycle, while the length of the cycle varies (shorter if demand is above average, and longer if demand is below average).

Reasons for Using the Fixed-Order-Interval Model

In some cases, a supplier’s policy might encourage orders at fixed intervals. Even when that is not the case, grouping orders for items from the same supplier can produce savings in shipping costs. Furthermore, some situations do not readily lend themselves to continuous monitoring of inventory levels. Many retail operations (e.g., drugstores, small grocery stores) fall into this category. The alternative for them is to use fixed-interval ordering, which requires only periodic checks of inventory levels.

Determining the Amount to Order

If both the demand rate and lead time are constant, the fixed-interval model and the fixed-quantity model function identically. The differences in the two models become apparent only when examined under conditions of variability. Like the ROP model, the fixed-interval model can have variations in demand only, in lead time only, or in both demand and lead time. However, for the sake of simplicity and because it is perhaps the most frequently encountered situation, the discussion here will focus only on variable demand and constant lead time.

page 531 

Figure 12.15 provides a comparison of the fixed-quantity and fixed-interval systems. In the fixed-quantity arrangement, orders are triggered by a quantity (ROP), whereas in the fixed-interval arrangement, orders are triggered by a time. Therefore, the fixed-interval system must have stockout protection for lead time plus the next order cycle, but the fixed-quantity system needs protection only during lead time because additional orders can be placed at any time and will be received shortly (lead time) thereafter. Consequently, there is a greater need for safety stock in the fixed-interval model than in the fixed-quantity model. Note, for example, the large dip into safety stock during the second order cycle with the fixed-interval model.

image

Both models are sensitive to demand experience just prior to reordering, but in somewhat different ways. In the fixed-quantity model, a higher-than-normal demand causes a shorter time between orders, whereas in the fixed-interval model, the result is a larger order size. Another difference is that the fixed-quantity model requires close monitoring of inventory levels in order to know when the amount on hand has reached the reorder point. The fixed-interval model requires only a periodic review (i.e., physical count) of inventory levels just prior to placing an order to determine how much is needed.

page 532 

Order size in the fixed-interval model is determined by the following computation:

(12–16)

where

As in previous models, we assume that demand during the protection interval is normally distributed.

An issue related to fixed-interval ordering is the risk of a stockout. A stockout could occur at any point during the order cycle (refer to Figure 12.15). Another point is at the end of the cycle, while waiting to receive the next order.

To find the initial risk of a stockout, assuming no stockout has occurred before ordering, use the ROP formula (12–13), setting ROP equal to the quantity on hand when the order is placed, and solve for z, then obtain the service level for that value of z from Appendix B, Table B, and subtract it from 1.0000 to get the risk of a stockout.

To find the risk of a stockout at the end of the order cycle, use the fixed-interval formula (12–16) and solve for z. Then, obtain the service level for that value of z from Appendix B, Table B, and subtract it from 1.0000 to get the risk of a stockout.

Let’s look at an example.

Benefits and Disadvantages

The fixed-interval system results in tight control. In addition, when multiple items come from the same supplier, grouping orders can yield savings in ordering, packing, and shipping costs. Moreover, it may be the only practical approach if inventory withdrawals cannot be closely monitored.

On the negative side, the fixed-interval system necessitates a larger amount of safety stock for a given risk of stockout because of the need to protect against shortages during an entire order interval plus lead time (instead of lead time only), and this increases the carrying cost. Also, there are the costs of the periodic reviews.

12.8 THE SINGLE-PERIOD MODEL

The single-period model (sometimes referred to as the newsboy problem) is used to handle the ordering of perishables (fresh fruits, vegetables, seafood, cut flowers) and items that have a limited useful life (newspapers, magazines, spare parts for specialized equipment). The period for spare parts is the life of the equipment, assuming that the parts cannot be used for other equipment. What sets unsold or unused goods apart is that they are not typically carried over from one period to the next, at least not without penalty. Day-old baked goods, for instance, are often sold at reduced prices; leftover seafood may be discarded; and out-of-date magazines may be offered to used book stores at bargain rates. There may even be some cost associated with disposal of leftover goods.

Analysis of single-period situations generally focuses on two costs: shortage and excess. Shortage cost may include a charge for loss of customer goodwill, as well as the opportunity cost of lost sales. Generally, shortage cost is simply unrealized profit per unit. That is,

If a shortage or stockout relates to an item used in production or to a spare part for a machine, then shortage cost refers to the actual cost of lost production.

Excess cost pertains to items left over at the end of the period. In effect, excess cost is the difference between purchase cost and salvage value. That is,

If there is cost associated with disposing of excess items, the salvage will be negative and will therefore increase the excess cost per unit.

The goal of the single-period model is to identify the order quantity, or stocking level, that will minimize the long-run excess and shortage costs.

There are two general categories of problems that we will consider: those for which demand can be approximated using a continuous distribution (perhaps a theoretical one such as a uniform or normal distribution), and those for which demand can be approximated using a discrete distribution (say, historical frequencies or a theoretical distribution such as the Poisson). The kind of inventory can indicate which type of model might be appropriate. page 534For example, demand for petroleum, liquids, and gases tends to vary over some continuous scale, thus lending itself to description by a continuous distribution. Demand for tractors, cars, and computers is expressed in terms of the number of units demanded and lends itself to description by a discrete distribution.

Continuous Stocking Levels

The concept of identifying an optimal stocking level is perhaps easiest to visualize when demand is uniform. Choosing the stocking level is similar to balancing a seesaw, but instead of a person on each end of the seesaw, we have excess cost per unit ( C e ) on one end of the distribution and shortage cost per unit ( C s ) on the other. The optimal stocking level is analogous to the fulcrum of the seesaw; the stocking level equalizes the cost weights, as illustrated in Figure 12.16.

image

The service level is the probability that demand will not exceed the stocking level, and computation of the service level is the key to determining the optimal stocking level, S o .

(12–17)

where

If actual demand exceeds S o , there is a shortage; hence, C s is on the right end of the distribution. Similarly, if demand is less than S o , there is an excess, so C e is on the left end of the distribution. When C e = C s , the optimal stocking level is halfway between the endpoints of the distribution. If one cost is greater than the other, S o will be closer to the larger cost.

A similar approach applies when demand is normally distributed.

Discrete Stocking Levels

When stocking levels are discrete rather than continuous, the service level computed using the ratio C s /( C s + C e ) usually does not coincide with a feasible stocking level (e.g., the optimal amount may be between five and six units). The solution is to stock at the next higher level (e.g., six units). In other words, choose the stocking level so that the desired service level is equaled or exceeded. Figure 12.17 illustrates this concept.

image

Example 14 illustrates the use of an empirical distribution.

The logic behind Formula 12−17 can be seen by solving the problem using a decision table approach. Table 12.3 illustrates this approach. The table enumerates the expected cost of each combination of stocking level and demand. For instance, if the stocking level is three, and demand turns out to be zero (see the blue-shaded cell), that would result in an excess of three units, at a cost of $800 each. The probability of a demand of zero units is .20, so the expected cost of that cell is .20(3)($800) = $480. Similarly, if no units are stocked and demand is two (see the yellow-shaded cell), the expected cost is the probability of demand being two (i.e., .30) multiplied by two units multiplied by the shortage cost per unit. Thus, the expected cost is .30(2)($4,200) = $2,520. For the cases in which the demand and stocking level are the same (the green-shaded cells), supply = demand, so there is neither a shortage nor an excess, and thus the cost is $0.

TABLE 12.3

Expected cost for each possible outcome

The lowest expected cost is $1,060, which occurs for a stocking level of two units, so two is the optimal stocking level, which agrees with the ratio approach.

page 537 

Example 15 illustrates how to solve a problem when demand is described by a Poisson distribution.

One final point about discrete stocking levels: If the computed service level is exactly equal to the cumulative probability associated with one of the stocking levels, there are two equivalent stocking levels in terms of minimizing long-run cost—the one with equal probability and the next higher one. In the preceding example, if the ratio had been equal to .629, we would be indifferent between stocking four dozen and stocking five dozen roses each day.

page 538 

12.9 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

Inventories often represent a substantial investment. Improving inventory processes can offer significant benefits in terms of cost reduction and customer satisfaction. Among the areas that have potential are the following:

Record keeping. It is important to have inventory records that are accurate and up-to-date, so that inventory decisions are based on correct information. Estimates of holding, ordering, and setup costs, as well as demand and lead times, should be reviewed periodically and updated when necessary.

Variation reduction. Lead time variations and forecast errors are two key factors that impact inventory management, and variation reduction in these areas can yield significant improvement in inventory management and cost reduction.

Lean operation. Lean systems are demand-driven, which means that goods are pulled through the system to match demand instead of being pushed through without a direct link to demand. Moreover, lean systems feature smaller lot sizes than more traditional systems, based in part on the belief that holding costs are higher than those assigned by traditional systems, and partly as a deliberate effort to reduce ordering and setup costs by simplifying and standardizing necessary activities. With low ordering and setup costs, inventory ordering starts to resemble a “just-in-time” system (see Chapter 14 for more information). An obvious benefit of low inventory is a decrease in average inventory on hand and, hence, lower carrying costs. Other benefits include fewer disruptions of work flow, reduction in space needs, an enhanced ability to spot problems, and increased feasibility to place machines and workers closer together, which allows more opportunities for socialization, communication, and cooperation.

Supply chain management. Working more closely with suppliers to coordinate shipments, reduce lead times, and reduce supply chain inventories can reduce the size and frequency of stockouts while lowering inventory carrying costs. Blanket orders and vendor-managed inventories can reduce transaction costs. Storage costs can sometimes be reduced by using cross-docking, whereby inbound trucks with goods arriving at distributor warehouses from suppliers are directly loaded onto outbound trucks for store or dealer delivery, avoiding warehouse handling and storage costs.

1 We can find the minimum point of the total-cost curve by differentiating TC with respect to Q, setting the result equal to zero, and solving for Q. Thus,

Note that the second derivative is positive, which indicates a minimum has been obtained.

page 560 

page 561 

13.1 INTRODUCTION

A major distinction in the way inventories are managed results from the nature of demand for those items. When demand for items is derived from plans to make certain products, as it is with raw materials, parts, and assemblies used in producing a finished product, those items are said to have dependent demand . The parts and materials that go into the production of cars are examples of dependent demand because the total quantity of parts and raw materials needed during any time period depends on the number of cars that will be produced. Conversely, demand for the finished cars is independent—a car is not a component of another item.

page 562 

13.2 AN OVERVIEW OF MRP

Material requirements planning (MRP) is a methodology used for planning the production of assembled products such as smartphones, automobiles, kitchen tables, and a whole host of other products that are assembled. Some items are produced repetitively, while others are produced in batches. The process begins with a master schedule. The master schedule designates the quantity and completion time of an assembled product, often referred to as the end item. Materials requirements planning then generates a production plan for the end item that indicates the quantities and timing of the subassemblies, component parts, and raw materials required for assembly of that end item. This sequence is depicted in Figure 13.1.

image

MRP is designed to answer three questions: What is needed? How much is needed? And when is it needed?

The primary inputs of MRP are a bill of materials, which tells the composition of a finished product; a master schedule, which tells how much finished product is desired and when; and an inventory records file, which tells how much inventory is on hand or on order. The planner processes this information to determine the net requirements for each period of the planning horizon.

Outputs from the process include planned-order schedules, order releases, changes, performance-control reports, planning reports, and exception reports. These topics are discussed in more detail in subsequent sections. (See Figure 13.2.)

image

page 563 

13.3 MRP INPUTS

An MRP system has three major sources of information: a master schedule, a bill-of-materials file, and an inventory records file (see Figure 13.2). Let’s consider each of these inputs.

The Master Schedule

The master schedule , also referred to as the master production schedule, states which end items are to be produced, when they are needed, and in what quantities. (In Chapter 11, Aggregate Planning, there was a discussion of how the master schedule was developed by disaggregating the aggregate plan.) Figure 13.3 illustrates a portion of a master schedule that shows planned output for end item X for the planning horizon. The schedule indicates that 100 units of X will be needed (e.g., for shipments to customers) at the start of week 4, and that another 150 units will be needed at the start of week 8.

image

The quantities in a master schedule come from a number of different sources, including customer orders, forecasts, and orders from warehouses to build up seasonal inventories.

The master schedule separates the planning horizon into a series of time periods or time buckets, which are often expressed in weeks. However, the time buckets need not be of equal length. In fact, the near-term portion of a master schedule may be in weeks, but later portions may be in months or quarters. Usually, plans for those more distant time periods are more tentative than near-term requirements.

Although a master production schedule has no set time period that it must cover, most managers like to plan far enough into the future so they have some general idea of probable upcoming demands for the near term. It is important, though, that the master schedule cover the stacked or cumulative lead time necessary to produce the end items. This amounts to the sum of the lead times that sequential phases of the production or assembly process require, as illustrated in Figure 13.4, where a total of nine weeks of lead time is needed from ordering parts and raw materials until final assembly is completed. Note that lead times include move and wait times in addition to setup and run times.

image

The Bill of Materials

A bill of materials (BOM) contains a listing of all of the assemblies, subassemblies, parts, part costs, and raw materials needed to produce one unit of a finished product. Thus, each finished product has its own bill of materials.

The listing in the bill of materials is hierarchical; it shows the quantity of each item needed to complete one unit of its parent item. The nature of this aspect of a bill of materials is clear when you consider a product structure tree , which provides a visual depiction of the subassemblies and components needed to assemble a product. Figure 13.5 shows an assembly diagram for a chair and a simple product structure tree for page 564the chair. The end item (in this case, the chair, the finished product) is shown at the top of the tree. Just beneath it are the subassemblies, or major components, that must be put together to make up the end item. Beneath each major component are the necessary lesser components. At each stage moving down the tree are the components (parts, materials) needed to make one unit of the next higher item in the tree.

image

A product structure tree is useful in illustrating how the bill of materials is used to determine the quantities of each of the ingredients (requirements) needed to obtain a desired number of end items. Items at the lowest levels of a tree might be raw materials or purchased parts, while items at higher levels are typically assemblies or subassemblies. Product-structure trees for items at the lowest levels are the concerns of suppliers.

Let’s consider the product structure tree shown in Figure 13.6. End item X is composed of two Bs and one C. Moreover, each B requires three Ds and one E, and each D requires four Es. Similarly, each C is made up of two Es and two Fs. These requirements are listed by level, beginning with 0 for the end item, then 1 for the next level, and so on. The items at each level are components of the next level up and, as in a family tree, are parents of their respective components. Note that the quantities of each item in the product structure tree refer only to the amounts needed to complete the assembly at the next higher level.

image

page 565 

page 566 

Determining total requirements is usually more complicated than Example 1 might suggest. For one thing, many products have considerably more components. For another, the issue of timing is essential (i.e., when must the components be ordered or made) and must be included in the analysis. Finally, for a variety of reasons, some of the components/subassemblies may be on hand (i.e., currently in inventory). Consequently, in determining total requirements, the amounts on hand must be netted out (i.e., subtracted from the apparent requirements) to determine the true requirements as illustrated in Example 1.

When an MRP system calculates requirements, the computer scans a bill of materials by level. When a component such as E in Figure 13.6 appears on more than one level, low-level coding is used so that all occurrences of that component appear on the lowest level at which the component appears. In Figure 13.6, conceptually that would be equivalent to lengthening the vertical line for the two appearances of E at level 2 so that all three occurrences line up at level 3 in the tree.

Note, it is extremely important that the bill of materials accurately reflects the composition of a product, particularly because errors at one level become magnified by the multiplication process used to determine quantity requirements. As obvious as this might seem, many companies find themselves with incorrect bill-of-material records. These make it impossible to effectively determine material requirements; moreover, the task of correcting these records can be complex and time-consuming. Accurate records are a prerequisite for effective MRP.

The Inventory Records

Inventory records refer to stored information on the status of each item by time period, called time buckets. This includes quantities-on-hand quantities ordered. It also includes other details for each item, such as supplier, lead time, and lot size policy. Changes due to stock receipts and withdrawals, canceled orders, and similar events also are recorded in this file.

Like the bill of materials, inventory records must be accurate. Erroneous information on requirements or lead times can have a detrimental impact on MRP and create turmoil when incorrect quantities are on hand or expected delivery times are not met.

13.4 MRP PROCESSING

MRP processing takes the end item requirements specified by the master schedule and “explodes” them into time-phased requirements for assemblies, parts, and raw materials using the bill of materials offset by lead times. You can see the time-phasing of requirements in the assembly time chart in Figure 13.7. For example, raw materials D, F, and I must be ordered at the start of week 2; part C at the start of week 4; and part H at the start of week 5 in order to be available for delivery as planned.

page 567 

image

MRP processing combines the time phasing and “explosion” into a sequence of spreadsheet sections, where each section has the following format:

The terms in the spreadsheet are defined as follows.

Gross requirements : The total expected demand for an item or raw material during each time period without regard to the amount on hand. For end items, these quantities are shown in the master schedule; for components, these quantities are derived from the planned-order releases of their immediate “parents.”

Scheduled receipts : Open orders (orders that have been placed and are scheduled to arrive from vendors or elsewhere in the pipeline by the beginning of a period).

Projected on hand : The expected amount of inventory that will be on hand at the beginning of each time period—scheduled receipts plus available inventory from last period. Note that the ending inventory for a period becomes the beginning inventory for the following period.

Net requirements : The actual amount needed in each time period.

page 568 

Planned-order receipts : The quantity expected to be received by the beginning of the period in which it is shown. Under lot-for-lot ordering, this quantity will equal net requirements. Under lot-size ordering, this quantity may exceed net requirements.

Any excess is added to available inventory in the next time period for simplicity, although in reality it would be available in that period.

Planned-order releases : Indicates a planned amount to order in each time period; equals planned-order receipts offset by lead time. This amount generates gross requirements at the next level in the assembly or production chain. In practice, when an order is executed, it is removed from “planned-order releases” and entered under “scheduled receipts.”

The quantities generated by exploding the bill of materials are gross requirements; they do not take into account any inventory that is currently on hand or due to be received.

(13–1)

The materials that a firm must actually acquire to meet the demand generated by the master schedule are the net material requirements.

The determination of the net requirements (netting) is the core of MRP processing. One accomplishes it by subtracting from gross requirements the sum of inventory on hand and any scheduled receipts.

(13–2)

(Negative results for equations 13–1 or 13–2 should be rounded up to zero.) Projected on-hand inventory includes scheduled receipts, which are executed orders for components that are scheduled to be completed in-house or received from suppliers.

The timing and sizes of orders (i.e., materials ordered from suppliers or work started within the firm) are determined by planned-order releases. The timing of the receipts of these quantities is indicated by planned-order receipts. Depending on ordering policy, the planned-order releases may be multiples of a specified quantity (e.g., 50 units), or they may be equal to the quantity needed at that time (referred to as lot-for-lot ordering). Although there are other possibilities, these two seem to be the most widely used. Example 2 illustrates the difference between these two ordering policies, as well as the general concepts of time-phasing material requirements in MRP.

Development of a material requirements plan is based on the product structure tree diagram. Requirements are determined level by level, beginning with the end item (the top of the tree) and working down the tree, because the timing and quantity of each “parent” item become the basis for determining the timing and quantities of the “children” items directly below it. The children items then become the parent items for the next level, and so on.

MRP provides plans for the end item and each of its subassemblies and components. Conceptually, this amounts to what is depicted in Figure 13.10. Practically speaking, however, the number of components in even a relatively simple product would make the width of the resulting spreadsheet far too wide to handle. Consequently, the plans for the individual components are stacked, as illustrated in the preceding example. Because of this, it is important to refer to the product tree in order to track relationships between components.

image

Example 2 is useful for describing some of the main features of MRP processing, but it understates the enormity of the task of keeping track of material requirements, especially in situations where the same subassemblies, parts, or raw materials are used in a number of different page 572products. Differences in the timing of demands and quantities needed, revisions caused by late deliveries, high scrap rates, and canceled orders all have an impact on processing.

Consider the two product structure trees shown in Figure 13.11. Note that both products have D as a component. Suppose we want to develop a material requirements plan for D given this additional information: There is a beginning inventory of 110 units of D on hand, and all items have lead times of one week. The master schedule calls for 80 units of A in week 4 and 50 units of C in week 5. The plan is shown in Figure 13.12. Note that requirements for B and F are not shown because they are not related to (i.e., neither a “parent” nor a “child” of) D.

image image

The term pegging denotes working this process in reverse—that is, identifying the parent items that have generated a given set of material requirements for some item such as D. Although the process may appear simple enough given the product trees and schedules shown in this chapter, when multiple products are involved, the process is more complex. Pegging enables managers to determine which product(s) will be affected if orders are late due to late deliveries, quality problems, or other problems.

The importance of the computer becomes evident when you consider that a typical firm would have not one but many end items for which it needs to develop material requirements plans, each with its own set of components. Inventories on hand and on order, schedules, order releases, and so on must all be updated as changes and rescheduling occur. Without the aid of a computer, the task would be almost hopeless; with the computer, planners can accomplish all of these things with much less difficulty.

Updating the System

A material requirements plan is not a static document. As time passes, some orders will have been completed, other orders will be nearing completion, and new orders will have been entered. In addition, there may have been changes to orders, such as changes in quantity, delays, missed deliveries of parts or raw materials, and so on. Hence, a material requirements plan is a “living” document, one that changes over time. And what we refer to as “Period 1” (i.e., the current period) is continually moving ahead; so what is now Period 2 will soon be Period 1. In a sense, schedules such as these have a rolling horizon, which means that plans are updated and revised so they reflect the moving horizon over time.

The two basic systems used to update MRP records are regenerative and net change. A regenerative system is updated periodically; a net-change system is continuously updated.

A regenerative system is essentially a batch-type system, which compiles all changes (e.g., new orders, receipts) that occur within the time interval (e.g., day) and periodically updates the system. Using that information, a revised production plan is developed in the same way that the original plan was developed (e.g., exploding the bill of materials, level by level).

In a net-change system, the production plan is modified to reflect changes as they occur. If some defective purchased parts had to be returned to a vendor, the manager can enter this information into the system as soon as it becomes known. Only the changes are exploded through the system, level by level; the entire plan would not be regenerated.

The regenerative system is best suited to fairly stable systems, whereas the net-change system is best suited to systems that have frequent changes. The obvious disadvantage of a regenerative system is the potential amount of lag between the time information becomes available and the time it can be incorporated into the material requirements plan. On the other hand, processing costs are typically less using regenerative systems; changes that occur in a given time period could ultimately cancel each other out, thereby avoiding the need to modify and then remodify the plan. The disadvantages of the net-change system relate to the costs involved in continuously updating the system and the constant state of flux in a system caused page 573by many small changes. One way around this is to enter minor changes periodically and major changes immediately. The primary advantage of the net-change system is that management can have up-to-date information for planning and control purposes.

13.5 MRP OUTPUTS

MRP systems have the ability to provide management with a fairly broad range of outputs. These are often classified as primary reports, which are the main reports, and secondary reports, which are optional outputs.

page 574 

Primary Reports. Production and inventory planning and control are part of primary reports. These reports normally include the following:

  1. Planned orders , a schedule indicating the amount and timing of future orders.

  2. Order releases , authorizing the execution of planned orders.

  3. Changes to planned orders, including revisions of due dates or order quantities and cancellations of orders.

Secondary Reports. Performance control, planning, and exceptions belong to secondary reports.

  1. Performance-control reports evaluate system operation. They aid managers by measuring deviations from plans, including missed deliveries and stockouts, and by providing information that can be used to assess cost performance.

  2. Planning reports are useful in forecasting future inventory requirements. They include purchase commitments and other data that can be used to assess future material requirements.

  3. Exception reports call attention to major discrepancies such as late and overdue orders, excessive scrap rates, reporting errors, and requirements for nonexistent parts.

    The wide range of outputs generally permits users to tailor MRP to their particular needs.

13.6 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS

Aside from the main details of inputs, outputs, and processing, managers must be knowledgeable about a number of other aspects of MRP. These include the holding of safety stock, lot-sizing choices, and the possible use of MRP for unfinished products.

Safety Stock

Theoretically, inventory systems with dependent demand should not require safety stock below the end item level. This is one of the main advantages of an MRP approach. Supposedly, safety stock is not needed because the manager can project precise usage quantities once the master schedule has been established because demand is not variable. Practically, however, there may be exceptions. For example, a bottleneck process or one with varying scrap rates can cause shortages in downstream operations. Furthermore, shortages may occur if orders are late or fabrication or assembly times are longer than expected. On the surface, these conditions lend themselves to the use of safety stock to maintain smooth operations, but the problem becomes more complicated when dealing with multiechelon items (i.e., multiple-level arenas such as assembled products) because a shortage of any component will prevent manufacture of the final assembly. However, a major advantage of MRP is lost by holding safety stock for all lower-level items.

MRP systems deal with these problems in several ways. The manager’s first step is to identify activities or operations that are subject to variability and to determine the extent of that variability. When lead times are variable, the concept of safety time instead of safety stock is often used. This results in scheduling orders for arrival or completion sufficiently ahead of the time they are needed in order to eliminate or substantially reduce the element of chance in waiting for those items. When quantities tend to vary, some safety stock may be called for, but the manager must carefully weigh the need and cost of carrying extra stock. Frequently, managers elect to carry safety stock for end items, which are subject to random demand, and for selected lower-level operations when safety time is not feasible.

It is important in general to make sure that lead times are accurate, particularly when the objective is to have incoming shipments of parts and materials arrive shortly before they are needed. Early arrivals increase on-hand inventory and carrying costs, but late arrivals can raise havoc, possibly delaying all following operations. Knowing this, managers may inflate lead times (i.e., use safety time) and cause early arrivals, defeating the objective of matching the arrival of orders with production schedules.

page 575 

If safety stock is needed, planned-order release amounts can be increased by the safety stock quantities for the designated components.

Lot Sizing

Determining a lot size to order or to produce is an important issue in inventory management for both independent- and dependent-demand items. This is called lot sizing. For independent-demand items, managers often use economic order sizes and economic production quantities. For dependent-demand systems, however, a much wider variety of plans is used to determine lot sizes, mainly because no single plan has a clear advantage over the others. Some of the most popular plans for lot sizing are described in this section.

A primary goal of inventory management for both independent- and dependent-demand systems is to minimize the sum of ordering cost (or setup cost) and holding cost. With independent demand, that demand is frequently distributed uniformly throughout the planning horizon (e.g., six months, year). In some cases, demand tends to be lumpy and the planning horizon shorter (e.g., three months), so that economic lot sizes are usually much more difficult to identify. Consider the situation depicted in Figure 13.13. Period demands vary from 1 to 80 units, and no demand size repeats over the horizon shown.

image

Managers can realize economies by grouping orders. This would be the case if the additional cost incurred by holding the extra units until they were used led to a savings in setup or ordering cost. This determination can be very complex at times, for several reasons. First, combining period demands into a single order, particularly for middle-level or end items, has a cascading effect down through the product tree: To achieve this grouping, it becomes necessary to also group items at lower levels in the tree and incorporate their setup and holding costs into the decision. Second, the uneven period demand and the relatively short planning horizon require a continual recalculation and updating of lot sizes. Not surprisingly, the methods used to handle lot sizing range from the complex, which attempt to include all relevant costs, to the very simple, which are easy to use and understand. In certain cases, the simple models seem to approach cost minimization although generalizations are difficult. Let’s consider some of these models.

Lot-for-Lot Ordering. Perhaps the simplest of all the methods is lot-for-lot ordering. The order or run size for each period is set equal to demand for that period. Example 2 demonstrated this method. Not only is the order size obvious, it also virtually eliminates holding costs for parts carried over to other periods. Hence, lot-for-lot ordering minimizes investment in inventory. Its two chief drawbacks are that it usually involves many different order sizes and thus cannot take advantage of the economies of fixed order size (e.g., standard containers and other standardized procedures), and it requires a new setup for each production run. If setup costs can be significantly reduced, this method may approximate a minimum-cost lot size.

Economic Order Quantity Model. Sometimes economic order quantity (EOQ) models are used. They can lead to minimum costs if usage is fairly uniform. This is sometimes the case for lower-level items that are common to different parents and for raw materials. However, the more lumpy demand is, the less appropriate such an approach is, because the mismatch in supply and demand results in leftover inventories.

Fixed-Period Ordering. This type of ordering provides coverage for some predetermined number of periods (e.g., two or three). In some instances, the span is simply arbitrary; in other cases, a review of historical demand patterns may lead to a more rational designation of a fixed period length. A simple rule is: Order to cover a two-period interval. The rule can be page 576modified when common sense suggests a better way. For example, take a look at the demands shown in Figure 13.13. Using a two-period rule, an order size of 120 units would cover the first two periods. The next two periods would be covered by an order size of 81 units. However, the demands in periods 3 and 5 are so small, it would make sense to combine them both with the 80 units and order 85 units.

Other Models. There are other models, such as the part-period model and the Wagner-Whitin model, which are used for lot sizing, but these are beyond the scope of this book.

13.7 MRP IN SERVICES

MRP has applications in services, as well as in manufacturing. These applications may involve material goods that form a part of the product–service package, or they may involve mainly service components. Service might involve reconfiguring a workplace or modifying software that controls equipment to handle different processing requirements.

An example of a product–service package is a food catering service, particularly in instances that require preparing and serving meals for large numbers of people. To estimate the quantities and costs of an order, the food manager would have to determine the quantities of the ingredients for each recipe on the menu (i.e., a bill of materials), which would then be combined with the number of each meal to be prepared to obtain a material requirements plan for the event.

Similar examples occur for renovations, such as motel rooms, where there will be multiple repetitions of activities and related materials that must be “exploded” into their components for purposes of cost estimation and scheduling.

13.8 BENEFITS AND REQUIREMENTS OF MRP

Benefits

MRP enables managers to easily determine the quantities of every component for a given order size, to know when to release orders for each component, and to be alerted when items need attention. Still other benefits include the following:

  • Low levels of in-process inventories, due to an exact matching of supply to demand.

  • The ability to keep track of material requirements.

  • The ability to evaluate capacity requirements generated by a given master schedule.

  • A means of allocating production time.

  • The ability to easily determine inventory usage by backflushing.

Backflushing is a procedure in which an end item’s bill of materials (BOM) is periodically exploded to determine the quantities of the various components that were used to make the item, eliminating the need to collect detailed usage information on the production floor.

A range of people in a typical manufacturing company are important users of the information provided by an MRP system. Production planners are obvious users of MRP. Production managers, who must balance workloads across departments and make decisions about scheduling work, and plant foremen, who are responsible for issuing work orders and maintaining production schedules, also rely heavily on MRP output. Other users include customer service representatives, who must be able to supply customers with projected delivery dates; purchasing managers; and inventory managers. The benefits of MRP depend in large measure on the use of a computer to maintain up-to-date information on material requirements.

page 577 

Requirements

In order to implement and operate an effective MRP system, it is necessary to have:

  • A computer and the necessary software programs to handle computations and maintain records

  • Accurate and up-to-date:

    1. Master schedules

    2. Bills of materials

    3. Inventory records

  • Integrity of file data

Accuracy is absolutely essential for a successful MRP system. Inaccuracies in inventory record files or bill-of-material files can lead to unpleasant surprises, ranging from missing parts to ordering too many of some items and too few of others, and failure to stay on schedule, all of which contribute to an inefficient use of resources, missed delivery dates, and poor customer service. Companies also need to exert scheduling discipline and have in place standard procedures for maintaining and updating bills of material.

Other common problems associated with using MRP include those due to the assumption of constant lead times, products being produced differently from the bill of materials, and failure to alter a bill of materials when customizing a product.

Similarly, inaccurate forecasts can have serious consequences for producers of assembled items. If forecasts are overly optimistic, companies will experience relatively high holding costs, considering the excess inventory represented by the components and raw materials. Conversely, forecasts that are too low will result in shortages of component parts and will require long lead times to acquire the needed components and assemble the products to alleviate the shortages.

13.9 MRP II

MRP was developed as a way for manufacturing companies to calculate more precisely what materials were needed to produce a product, and when and how much of those materials were needed. Manufacturing resources planning (MRP II) evolved from MRP because manufacturers recognized additional needs. MRP II expanded the scope of materials planning to include capacity requirements planning, and to involve other functional areas of the organization such as marketing and finance in the planning process.

Material requirements planning is at the heart of the process (see Figure 13.14). The process begins with an aggregation of demand from all sources (e.g., firm orders, forecasts, safety stock requirements). Production, marketing, and finance personnel work toward developing a master schedule. Although manufacturing people will have a major input in determining that schedule and a major responsibility for making it work, marketing and finance will also have important inputs and responsibilities. The rationale for having these functional areas work together is the increased likelihood of developing a plan that works and with which everyone can live. Moreover, because each of these functional areas has been involved in formulating the plan, they will have reasonably good knowledge of the plan and more reason to work toward achieving it.

image

In addition to the obvious manufacturing resources needed to support the plan, financing resources will be needed and must be planned for, both in amount and timing. Similarly, marketing resources also will be needed in varying degrees throughout the process. In order for the plan to work, the firm must have all of the necessary resources available as needed. Often, an initial plan must be revised based on an assessment of the availability of various resources. Once these have been decided, the master production schedule can be firmed up.

At this point, material requirements planning comes into play, generating material and schedule requirements. Next, management must make more detailed capacity requirements planning page 578to determine whether these more specific capacity requirements can be met. Again, some adjustments in the master production schedule may be required.

As the schedule unfolds and actual work begins, a variety of reports help managers to monitor the process and to make any necessary adjustments to keep operations on track.

In effect, this is a continuing process, where the master production schedule is updated and revised as necessary to achieve corporate goals. The business plan that governs the entire process usually undergoes changes too, although these tend to be less frequent than the changes made at lower levels (i.e., the master production schedule).

Most MRP II systems have the capability of performing simulations, enabling managers to answer a variety of what-if questions so they can gain a better appreciation of available options and their consequences.

Closed-Loop MRP

When MRP was introduced, it did not have the capability to assess the feasibility of a proposed plan (i.e., if sufficient capacity existed at every level to achieve the plan). Thus, there was no way of knowing before executing a proposed plan if it could be achieved, or after executing the plan if it had been achieved. Consequently, a new plan had to be developed each week. When MRP II systems began to include feedback loops, they were referred to as closed-loop MRP. Closed-loop MRP systems evaluate a proposed material plan relative to available capacity. If a proposed plan is not feasible, it must be revised. The evaluation is referred to as capacity requirements planning.

page 579 

13.10 CAPACITY REQUIREMENTS PLANNING

One of the most important features of MRP II is its ability to aid managers in capacity planning.

Capacity requirements planning is the process of determining short-range capacity requirements. The necessary inputs include planned-order releases for MRP, the current shop load, routing information, and job times. Key outputs include load reports for each work center. When variances (underloads or overloads) are projected, managers might consider remedies such as alternative routings, changing or eliminating of lot sizing or safety stock requirements, and lot splitting. Moving production forward or backward can be extremely challenging because of precedence requirements and the availability of components.

A firm usually generates a master schedule initially in terms of what is needed but not what is possible. The initial schedule may or may not be feasible given the limits of the production system and availability of materials when end items are translated into requirements for procurement, fabrication, and assembly. Consequently, it is often necessary to run a proposed master schedule through MRP processing in order to obtain a clearer picture of actual requirements, which can then be compared to available capacity and materials. If it turns out that the current master schedule is not feasible, management may make a decision to increase capacity (e.g., through overtime or subcontracting) or to revise the master schedule. In the latter case, this may entail several revisions, each of which is run through the system until a feasible plan is obtained. At that point, the master schedule is frozen, at least for the near term, thus establishing a firm schedule from which to plan requirements.

Stability in short-term production plans is very important; without it, changes in order quantity and/or timing can render material requirements plans almost useless. The term system nervousness describes the way a system might react to changes. The reaction can sometimes be greater than the original change. For example, a small change near the top of a product tree can reverberate throughout much of the lower parts of the tree, causing major changes to order quantities and production schedules of many components. That, in turn, might cause queues to form at various portions of the system, leading to late orders, increased work in process, and added carrying costs.

To minimize such problems, many firms establish a series of time intervals, called time fences , during which changes can be made to orders. For example, a firm might specify time fences of 4, 8, and 12 weeks, with the nearest fence being the most restrictive and the farthest fence being the least restrictive. Beyond 12 weeks, changes are expected; from 8 to 12 weeks, substitutions of one end item for another may be permitted as long as the components are available and the production plan is not compromised; from 4 to 8 weeks, the plan is fixed, but small changes may be allowed; and the plan is frozen out to the 4-week fence.

Some companies use two fences: One is a near-term demand fence, and the other is a long-term planning fence. For example, the demand fence might be 4 weeks from the present time, while the planning fence might be 10 weeks away. In the near term, customer orders receive precedence over the forecast. The time beyond the planning fence is available for inserting new orders into the master schedule. Between the demand fence and the planning fence, management must make trade-offs when changes are introduced unless excess capacity is expected to be available.

In establishing time fences, a manager must weigh the benefits of stability in the production plan against the possible negative impact on the competitive advantage of being able to quickly respond to new orders.

The capacity planning process begins with a proposed or tentative master production schedule that must be tested for feasibility and possibly adjusted before it becomes permanent. The proposed schedule is processed using MRP to ascertain the material requirements the schedule would generate. These are then translated into resource (i.e., capacity) requirements, often in the form of a series of load reports for each department or work center, which compares known and expected future capacity requirements with projected capacity availability. Figure 13.15 illustrates the nature of a load report. It shows expected resource requirements (i.e., usage) for jobs currently being worked on, planned orders, and expected orders for the planning horizon. Given this sort of information, the manager can more easily determine whether capacity is sufficient to satisfy these requirements. If there is enough capacity, he or she can freeze the portion of the master production schedule that generates these requirements. In the load profile illustrated in Figure 13.15, planned-order releases in time period 4 will cause an overload. However, it appears possible to accommodate demand by slightly shifting some orders to adjacent periods. Similarly, an overload appears likely in period 11, but that too can be handled by shifting some jobs to adjacent time periods. In cases where capacity is insufficient, a manager may be able to increase capacity (by scheduling overtime, transferring personnel from other areas, or subcontracting some of the work) if this is possible and economical, or else revise the master production schedule and repeat the process until an acceptable production schedule is obtained.

page 580 

image

If the master production schedule must be revised, this generally means that the manager must assign priorities to orders, if some orders will be finished later than originally planned.

One note of caution is in order concerning capacity load reports. Often, the load reports are only approximations, and they may not give a true picture because the loading does not take into account scheduling and queuing delays. Consequently, it is possible to experience system backups even though a load report implies sufficient capacity to handle projected loads.

An important aspect of capacity requirements planning is the conversion of quantity requirements into labor and machine requirements. One accomplishes this by multiplying each period’s quantity requirements by standard labor and/or machine requirements per unit. For instance, if 100 units of product A are scheduled in the fabrication department, and each unit has a labor standard time of 2 hours and a machine standard time of 1.5 hours, then 100 units of A convert into the following capacity requirements:

One can then compare these capacity requirements with available department capacity to determine the extent to which this product utilizes capacity. For example, if the department has 200 labor hours and 200 machine hours available, labor utilization will be 100 percent because all of the labor capacity will be required by this product. However, machine capacity will be underutilized.

Underutilization may mean that unused capacity can be used for other jobs; overutilization indicates that available capacity is insufficient to handle requirements. To compensate, production may have to be rescheduled or overtime may be needed.

Distribution Resource Planning for the Supply Chain

Distribution resource planning (DRP) , also referred to as distribution requirements planning, is a method used for planning orders in a supply chain. It extends MRP concepts, enabling a planner to compute time-phased inventory requirements for a supply chain. The goal is to achieve a balance of supply and demand throughout the supply chain.

page 581 

It begins with a forecast of demand plus actual orders for future periods at the distribution end (e.g., retail) of a supply chain. Other information needed includes the quantity and timing of scheduled receipts at various points in the supply chain, as well as on-hand inventories, and any safety stock requirements. Some versions of DRP also include projections for labor, material handling facilities, and storage space that will be needed.

In a procedure similar to MRP, the planned-order release quantities at each level in the supply chain become the gross requirements one level back, as illustrated in Figure 13.16. In effect, the process pulls inventory shipment through the supply chain based on demand.

image

13.11 ERP

Business organizations are complex systems in which various functions such as purchasing, production, distribution, sales, human resources, finance, and accounting must work together to achieve the goals of the organization. However, in the functional structure used by many business organizations, information flows freely within each function, but not so between functions. That makes information sharing among functional areas burdensome.

Enterprise resource planning (ERP) is a computerized system designed to connect all parts of a business organization as well as key portions of its supply chain to a single database for the purpose of information sharing. Some of the key connections are depicted in Figure 13.17. SAP and PeopleSoft are major vendors, although there are many others.

page 582 

image

ERP software provides a system to capture and make data available in real time to decision makers and other users throughout an organization. It also provides a set of tools for planning and monitoring various business processes to achieve the goals of the organization. ERP systems are composed of a collection of integrated modules. There are many modules to choose from, and different software vendors offer different but similar lists of modules. Some are industry specific, and others are general purpose. The modules relate to the functional areas of business organizations. For example, there are modules for accounting and finance, HR, product planning, purchasing, inventory management, distribution, order tracking, finance, accounting, and marketing. Organizations can select the modules that best serve their needs and budgets. Table 13.1 provides an overview of some widely used modules.

TABLE 13.1

An overview of some ERP software modules

Module

Brief Description

Accounting/Finance

A central component of most ERP systems. It provides a range of financial reports, including general ledger, accounts payable, accounts receivable, payroll, income statements, and balance sheets.

Marketing

Supports lead generation, target marketing, direct mail, and sales.

Human Resources

Maintains a complete database of employee information such as date of hire, salary, contact information, performance evaluations, and other pertinent information.

Purchasing

Facilitates vendor selection, price negotiation, making purchasing decisions, and bill payment.

Production Planning

Integrates information on forecasts, orders, production capacity, on-hand inventory quantities, bills of material, work in process, schedules, and production lead times.

Inventory Management

Identifies inventory requirements, inventory availability, replenishment rules, and inventory tracking.

Distribution

Contains information on third-party shippers, shipping and delivery schedules, delivery tracking.

Sales

Information on orders, invoices, order tracking, and shipping.

Supply Chain Management

Facilitates supplier and customer management, supply chain visibility, and event management.

Customer Relationship Management

Contact information, buying behavior, shipping preferences, contracts, payment terms, and credit history.

page 583 

An important feature of the modules is that data entered in one module is automatically routed to other modules, so all data are immediately updated and available to all functional areas.

It should be noted that implementations are costly and time consuming, often lasting many years, and require extensive employee training throughout the organization.

The following reading provides additional insight into ERP.

ERP in Services

Although ERP was initially developed for manufacturing, it now has a long list of service applications. These include professional services, postal services, retail, banking, health care, higher education, engineering and construction services, logistics services, and real estate management.

In a manufacturing environment, ERP systems generally encompass the major functions, such as production planning and scheduling, inventory management, product costing, and distribution. In a service environment, the major functions can differ from one service organization to another. For example, many universities employ ERP systems; they typically are used to integrate and access student information, course prerequisites, course schedules, room schedules, human resources, accounting, and financial information. Hospitals’ ERP systems include patient records, medication data, treatment plans, and scheduling information (e.g., rooms, equipment, surgery), as well as human resources information.

ERP is now about enterprise applications integration, an issue that generally arises with any major technology acquisition. The following reading underscores this point.

Conversion to an ERP system from a traditional operation is a major undertaking that requires a project approach to manage the process.

13.12 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

Acquisition of technology on the order of ERP has strategic implications. Among the considerations are a high initial cost, a high cost to maintain, the need for future upgrades, and the intensive training required. An ERP team is an excellent example of the value of a cross-functional team. Purchasing, which will ultimately place the order, typically does not have the technical expertise to select the best vendor. Information technology can assess various technical requirements, but won’t be the user. Various functional users (marketing, operations, and accounting) will be in the best position to evaluate inputs and outputs, and finance must evaluate the effect on the organization’s bottom line. Also, it is important to have a member of the purchasing staff involved from the beginning of negotiations on ERP acquisition because this will have major implications for purchasing.

The real-time aspect of ERP makes it valuable as a strategic planning tool. For example, it can improve supply chain management, with stronger links between their customers and their suppliers, and make the organizations more capable of satisfying changing customer requirements.

Because ERP tracks the flow of information and materials through a company, it offers opportunities for collecting information on waste and environmental costs and, hence, opportunities for process improvement.

page 610 

page 611 

14.1 INTRODUCTION

Lean operations began as lean manufacturing in the mid-1900s. It was developed by the Japanese automobile manufacturer Toyota. The development in Japan was influenced by the limited resources available at the time. Not surprisingly, the Japanese were very sensitive to waste and inefficiency. Widespread interest in lean manufacturing occurred after a book about automobile production, The Machine That Changed the World, by James Womack, Daniel Jones, and Daniel Roos, was published in 1990. As described in the book, Toyota’s focus was on the elimination of all waste from every aspect of the process. Waste was defined as anything that interfered with, or did not add value to, the process of producing automobiles.

A stunning example of the potential of lean manufacturing was illustrated by the successful adoption of lean methods in the mid-1980s in a Fremont, California, auto plant. The plant was originally operated by General Motors (GM). However, GM closed the plant in 1982 because of its low productivity and high absenteeism. A few years later, the plant was reopened as a joint venture of Toyota and GM, called NUMMI (New United Motor Manufacturing, Inc.). About 80 percent of the former plant workers were rehired, but the white-collar jobs were shifted from directing to supporting workers, and small teams were formed and trained to design, measure, and improve their performance. The result? By 1985 productivity and quality improved dramatically, exceeding all other GM plants, and absenteeism was negligible.

As other North American companies attempted to adopt the lean approach, they began to realize that in order to be successful, they needed to make major organizational and cultural changes. They also recognized that mass production, which emphasizes the efficiency of individual operations and leads to unbalanced systems and large inventories, was outmoded. Instead, they discovered that lean methods involve demand-based operations, flexible operations with rapid changeover capability, effective worker behaviors, and continuous improvement efforts.

Characteristics of Lean Systems

A number of characteristics are commonly found in lean systems. An overview of these will provide a better understanding of lean systems.

Waste reduction—A hallmark of lean systems

Continuous improvement—Another hallmark; never-ending efforts to improve

Use of teams—Cross-functional teams, especially for process improvement

Work cells—Along with cellular layouts, they allow for better communication and use of people

Visual controls—Simple signals that enable efficient flow and quick assessment of operations

High quality—In suppliers’ parts, in processes, and in output

Minimal inventory—Excess inventory is viewed as a waste

Output tied to demand—Throughout the entire system; referred to as “demand pull”

Quick changeovers—Enables equipment flexibility and output variety without disruption

Small lot sizes—Enables variety for batch production

Lean culture—The entire organization embraces lean concepts and strives to achieve them

page 613 

Five principles embody the way lean systems function. Note the connections to the preceding characteristics.

  • Identify customer values.

  • Focus on processes that create value.

  • Eliminate waste to create “flow.”

  • Produce only according to customer demand.

  • Strive for perfection.

Benefits and Risks of Lean Systems

Lean systems offer numerous benefits, but carry some risks. The key benefits include:

  • Reduced waste due to emphasis on waste reduction.

  • Lower costs due to reduced waste and lower inventories.

  • Increased quality motivated by customer focus and the need for high-quality processes.

  • Reduced cycle time due to elimination of non-value-added operations.

  • Increased flexibility due to quick changeovers and small lot sizes.

  • Increased productivity due to elimination of non-value-added processes.

Certain risks also often accompany lean operations, such as:

  • Increased stress on workers due to increased responsibilities for equipment changeovers, problem solving, and process and quality improvement.

  • Fewer resources (e.g., inventory, people, time) available if problems occur.

  • Supply chain disruptions can halt operations due to minimal inventory or time buffers.

John Deere, the well-known tractor supply company, bolstered profits during a recession by using a JIT approach to reduce inventory levels. However, when demand picked up as the economy strengthened, a shortage of parts led to stretched-out delivery dates. Long lead times to replenish parts meant that, in some cases, harvesting equipment that farmers wanted wouldn’t be available until after harvest time! As a result, some farmers turned to Deere’s competitors to purchase needed equipment.

The Toyota Approach

Many of the methods common to lean operations were developed as part of Japanese car maker Toyota’s approach to manufacturing. Toyota’s system came to be known as the Toyota Production System (TPS), and it has served as a model for many implementations of lean systems, particularly in manufacturing. Many of the terms Toyota employed are now commonly used in conjunction with lean operations, especially the following.

  • Muda : Waste and inefficiency. Perhaps the driving philosophy. Waste and inefficiency can be minimized by using the following tactics.

  • Kanban : A manual system used for controlling the movement of parts and materials that responds to signals of the need (i.e., demand) for delivery of parts or materials. This applies both to delivery to the factory and delivery to each workstation. The result is the delivery of a steady stream of containers of parts throughout the workday. Each container holds a small supply of parts or materials. New containers are delivered to replace empty containers.

  • Heijunka : Variations in production volume lead to waste. The workload must be leveled; volume and variety must be averaged to achieve a steady flow of work.

  • Kaizen : Continuous improvement of the system. There is always room for improvement, so this effort must be ongoing.

  • Jidoka : Quality at the source. A machine automatically stops when it detects a bad part. A worker then stops the line. Also known as autonomation.

page 614 

In some respects, the just-in-time concept was operational over 60 years ago at Henry Ford’s great industrial complex in River Rouge, Michigan.

Toyota learned a great deal from studying Ford’s operations and based its lean approach on what it saw. However, Toyota was able to accomplish something that Ford couldn’t—a system that could handle some variety.

A widely held view of JIT/lean production is that it is simply a system for scheduling production that results in low levels of work-in-process and inventory. But in its truest sense, JIT/lean production represents a philosophy that encompasses every aspect of the process, from design to after the sale of a product. The philosophy is to pursue a system that functions well with minimal levels of inventories, minimal waste, minimal space, and minimal transactions. Truly, a lean system. As such, it must be a system that is not prone to disruptions and is flexible in terms of the product variety and range of volume it can handle.

In lean systems, quality is ingrained in both the product and the process. Companies that use lean operations have achieved a level of quality that enables them to function with small batch sizes and tight schedules. Lean systems have high reliability; major sources of inefficiency and disruption have been eliminated, and workers have been trained not only to function in the system but also to continuously improve it.

The ultimate goal of a lean operation is to achieve a system that matches supply to customer demand; supply is synchronized to meet customer demand in a smooth, uninterrupted flow. Figure 14.1 provides an overview of the goals and building blocks of a lean production system. The following pages provide more details about the supporting goals and building blocks.

page 615 

image

Source: Adapted from Thomas E. Vollmann, William L. Berry, and D. Clay Whybark, Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems, 5th ed. Copyright 2005 Irwin/ McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Used with permission.

14.2 SUPPORTING GOALS

The ultimate goal of lean is a balanced system—that is, one that achieves a smooth, rapid flow of materials and/or work through the system. The idea is to make the process time as short as possible by using resources in the best possible way. The degree to which the overall goal is achieved depends on how well certain supporting goals are achieved. Those goals are to:

  • Eliminate disruptions

  • Make the system flexible

  • Eliminate waste, especially excess inventory

Disruptions have a negative influence on the system by upsetting the smooth flow of products through the system, and they should be eliminated. Disruptions are caused by a variety of factors, such as poor quality, equipment breakdowns, changes to the schedule, and late deliveries. Quality problems are particularly disruptive because in lean systems there is no extra inventory that can be used to replace defective items. All disruptions should be eliminated where possible. This will reduce the uncertainty that the system must deal with.

A flexible system is one that is robust enough to handle a mix of products, often on a daily basis, and to handle changes in the level of output while still maintaining balance and throughput speed. This enables the system to deal with some uncertainty. Long setup times and long lead times negatively impact the flexibility of the system. Hence, reduction of setup and lead times is very important in a lean system.

Waste represents unproductive resources; eliminating waste can free up resources and enhance production. Inventory is an idle resource, taking up space and adding cost to the system. It should be minimized as much as possible. In the lean philosophy, there are eight wastes ( muda):

  1. Excess inventory—Beyond minimal quantities, an idle resource takes up floor space and adds to cost

    page 616 

  2. Overproduction—Involves excessive use of manufacturing resources

  3. Waiting time—Requires space, adds no value

  4. Unnecessary transporting—Increases handling, increases work-in-process inventory

  5. Processing waste—Makes unnecessary production steps, scrap

  6. Inefficient work methods—Reduce productivity, increase scrap, increase work-in-process inventory

  7. Product defects—Require rework costs and possible lost sales due to customer dissatisfaction

  8. Underused people—Relates to mental and creative abilities, as well as physical abilities

The existence of these wastes is an indication that improvement is possible. The list of wastes also can identify potential targets for continuous improvement efforts.

The kaizen philosophy for eliminating waste is based on the following tenets: 1

  1. Waste is the enemy, and to eliminate waste it is sometimes necessary to get “hands dirty.”

  2. Improvement should be done gradually and continuously; the goal is not big improvements done intermittently.

  3. Everyone should be involved—top managers, middle managers, and workers.

  4. Kaizen is built on a cheap strategy, and it does not require spending great sums on technology or consultants.

  5. It can be applied anywhere.

  6. It is supported by a visual system: a total transparency of procedures, processes, and values, making problems and wastes visible to all.

  7. It focuses attention where value is created.

  8. It is process oriented.

  9. It stresses that the main effort of improvement should come from new thinking and a new work style.

  10. The essence of organizational learning is to learn while doing.

14.3 BUILDING BLOCKS

The design and operation of a lean system provide the foundation for accomplishing the aforementioned goals. As shown in Figure 14.1, the building blocks are:

  • Product design

  • Process design

  • Personnel/organizational elements

  • Manufacturing planning and control

Speed and simplicity are two common threads that run through these building blocks.

Product Design

Four elements of product design are important for a lean production system:

  • Standard parts

  • Modular design

  • Highly capable production systems with quality built in

  • Concurrent engineering

The first two elements relate to speed and simplicity.

page 617 

The use of standard parts means that workers have fewer parts to deal with, and training times and costs are reduced. Purchasing, handling, and checking quality are more routine and lend themselves to continual improvement. Another important benefit is the ability to use standard processing.

Modular design is an extension of standard parts. Modules are clusters of parts treated as a single unit. This greatly reduces the number of parts to deal with, simplifying assembly, purchasing, handling, training, and so on. Standardization has the added benefit of reducing the number of different parts contained in the bill of materials for various products, thereby simplifying them.

Lean requires highly capable production systems. Quality is the sine qua non (“without which not”) of lean. It is crucial to lean systems because poor quality can create major disruptions. Quality must be embedded in goods and processes. The systems are geared to a smooth flow of work; the occurrence of problems due to poor quality creates disruption in this flow. Because of small lot sizes and the absence of buffer stock, production must cease when problems occur, and it cannot resume until the problems have been resolved. Obviously, shutting down an entire process is costly and cuts into planned output levels, so it becomes imperative to try to avoid shutdowns and to quickly resolve problems when they do appear.

Lean systems use a comprehensive approach to quality. Quality is designed into the product and the production process. High quality levels can occur because lean systems produce standardized products that lead to standardized job methods, employ workers who are very familiar with their jobs, and use standardized equipment. Moreover, the cost of product design quality (i.e., building quality in at the design stage) can be spread over many units, yielding a low cost per unit. It is also important to choose appropriate quality levels in terms of the final customer and of manufacturing capability. Thus, product design and process design must go hand in hand.

Engineering changes can be very disruptive to smooth operations. Concurrent engineering practices (described in Chapter 4) can substantially reduce these disruptions.

Process Design

Eight aspects of process design are particularly important for lean production systems:

  1. Small lot sizes

  2. Setup time reduction

  3. Manufacturing cells

  4. Quality improvement

  5. Production flexibility

  6. A balanced system

  7. Little inventory storage

  8. Fail-safe methods

Small Lot Sizes. In the lean philosophy, the ideal lot size is one unit, a quantity that may not always be realistic owing to practical considerations requiring minimum lot sizes (e.g., machines that process multiple items simultaneously, heat-treating equipment that processes multiple items simultaneously, and machines with very long setup times). Nevertheless, the goal is still to reduce the lot size as much as possible. Small lot sizes in both the production process and deliveries from suppliers yield a number of benefits that enable lean systems to operate effectively. First, with small lots moving through the system, in-process inventory is considerably less than it is with large lots. This reduces carrying costs, space requirements, and clutter in the workplace. Second, inspection and rework costs are less when problems with quality occur, because there are fewer items in a lot to inspect and rework.

Small lots also permit greater flexibility in scheduling. Repetitive systems typically produce a small variety of products. In traditional systems, this usually means long production runs of each product, one after the other. Although this spreads the setup cost for a run over many items, it also results in long cycles over the entire range of products. For instance, suppose a firm has three product versions, A, B, and C. In a traditional system, there would be a long run of version A (e.g., covering two or three days or more), then a long run of version B, page 618followed by a long run of version C before the sequence would repeat. In contrast, a lean system, using small lots, would frequently shift from producing A to producing B and C. This flexibility enables lean systems to respond more quickly to changing customer demands for output: Lean systems can produce just what is needed, when it is needed. The contrast between small and large lot sizes is illustrated in Figure 14.2. A summary of the benefits of small lot sizes is presented in Table 14.1.

image

TABLE 14.1

Benefits of small lot sizes

Reduced inventory, lower carrying costs

Less space required to store inventory

Less rework if defects occur

Less inventory to “work off” before implementing product improvements

Increased visibility of problems

Increased production flexibility

Increased ease of balancing operations

It is important to note that the use of small lot sizes is not in conflict with the economic order quantity (EOQ) approach. Space is at a premium in Japan, making warehousing costs and the cost of space to store extra inventory near manufacturing very high. Also, on-site inventory increases the space between operations, which decreases communications, increases cycle time, and reduces visibility. All of these add to the burden of carrying inventory. So in an EOQ computation, using higher carrying cost, with carrying cost in the denominator, lot sizes naturally end up being smaller, and in some cases, much smaller.

Setup Time Reduction. Small lots and changing product mixes require frequent setups. Unless these are quick and relatively inexpensive, the time and cost to accomplish them can be prohibitive. Moreover, long setup times require holding more inventory than with short setup times. Hence, there is strong emphasis on reducing setup times. In JIT, workers are often trained to do their own setups. Moreover, programs to reduce setup time and cost are used to achieve the desired results; a deliberate effort is required, and workers are usually a valuable part of the process.

Shigeo Shingo made a very significant contribution to lean operation with the development of what is called the single-minute exchange of die (SMED) system for reducing changeover time. It involves first categorizing changeover activities as either “internal” or “external” activities. Internal activities are those that can only be done while a machine is stopped (i.e., not running). Hence, they contribute to long changeover times. External activities are those that do not involve stopping the machine; they can be done before or after the changeover.

Hence, they do not affect changeover time. After activities have been categorized, a simple approach to achieving quick changeovers is to convert as many internal activities as possible to external activities and then streamline the remaining internal activities.

The potential benefits that can be achieved using the SMED system were impressively illustrated in 1982 at Toyota, when the changeover time for a machine was reduced from 100 minutes to 3 minutes! The principles of the SMED system can be applied to any changeover operation.

Setup tools and equipment and setup procedures must be simple and standardized. Multipurpose equipment or attachments can help to reduce setup time. For instance, a machine with page 619multiple spindles that can easily be rotated into place for different job requirements can drastically reduce job changeover time. Moreover, group technology (described in Chapter 6) may be used to reduce setup cost and time by capitalizing on similarities in recurring operations. For instance, parts that are similar in shape, materials, and so on, may require very similar setups. Processing them in sequence on the same equipment can reduce the need to completely change a setup; only minor adjustments may be necessary.

Manufacturing Cells. One characteristic of lean production systems is multiple manufacturing cells. The cells contain the machines and tools needed to process families of parts having similar processing requirements. In essence, the cells are highly specialized and efficient production centers. Among the important benefits of manufacturing cells are reduced changeover times, high utilization of equipment, and ease of cross-training operators.

Quality Improvement. The occurrence of quality defects during the process can disrupt the orderly flow of work. Consequently, problem solving is important when defects occur. Moreover, there is a never-ending quest for quality improvement, which often focuses on finding and eliminating the causes of problems so they do not continually crop up.

Lean production systems sometimes minimize defects through the use of autonomation (note the extra syllable on in the middle of the word). Also referred to as jidoka, it involves the automatic detection of defects during production. It can be used with machines or manual operations. It consists of two mechanisms: one for detecting defects when they occur, and another for a human stopping production to correct the cause of the defects. Thus, the halting of production forces immediate attention to the problem, after which an investigation of the problem is conducted, and corrective action is taken to resolve the problem.

page 620 

Production Flexibility. Overall goal of a lean system is to achieve the ability to process a mix of products or services in a smooth flow. One potential obstacle to this goal is bottlenecks that occur when portions of the system become overloaded. The existence of bottlenecks reflects inflexibilities in a system. Process design can increase production flexibility and reduce bottlenecks in a variety of ways. Table 14.2 lists some of the techniques used for this purpose.

TABLE 14.2

Guidelines for increasing production flexibility

  1. Reduce downtime due to changeovers by reducing changeover time.

  2. Use preventive maintenance on key equipment to reduce breakdowns and downtime.

  3. Cross-train workers so they can help when bottlenecks occur or other workers are absent. Train workers to handle equipment adjustments and minor repairs.

  4. Use many small units of capacity; many small cells make it easier to shift capacity temporarily and to add or subtract capacity than a few units of large capacity.

  5. Use offline buffers. Store infrequently used safety stock away from the production area to decrease congestion and to avoid continually turning it over.

  6. Reserve capacity for important customers.

Source: Adapted from Edward M. Knod, jr. and Richard J. Schonberger, Operations Management: Meeting Customers’ Demands, 7th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2001.

A Balanced System. Line balancing of production lines (i.e., distributing the workload evenly among workstations) helps to achieve a rapid flow of work through the system. Time needed for work assigned to each workstation must be less than or equal to the cycle time. The cycle time is set equal to what is referred to as the takt time. ( Takt is the German word for musical meter.) Takt time is the cycle time needed in a production system to match the pace of production to the demand rate. It is sometimes said to be the heartbeat of a lean production system.

Takt time is often set for a work shift. The procedure for obtaining the takt time is:

  1. Determine the net time available per shift by subtracting any nonproductive time from total shift time.

  2. If there is more than one shift per day, multiply the net time per shift by the number of shifts to obtain the net available time per day.

  3. Compute takt time by dividing the net available time by demand.

page 621 

Once the takt time for the system has been determined, it can be used to determine the time that should be allotted to each workstation in the production process. Using the takt time results in minimizing work-in-process (WIP) inventory in instances where demand is stable and the system capacity matches demand. For unstable demand, additional inventory is needed to offset demand variability.

Little Inventory Storage. Lean systems are designed to minimize inventory storage. Recall that in the lean philosophy, inventory storage is a waste. Inventories are buffers that tend to cover up recurring problems that are never resolved, partly because they aren’t obvious and partly because the presence of inventory makes them seem less serious. When a machine breaks down, it won’t disrupt the system if there is a sufficient inventory of the machine’s output to feed into the next workstation. The use of inventory as the “solution” can lead to increasing amounts of inventory if breakdowns increase. A better solution is to investigate the causes of machine breakdowns and focus on eliminating them. Similar problems with quality, unreliable vendors, and scheduling also can be solved by having ample inventories to fall back on. However, carrying all that extra inventory creates a tremendous burden in cost and space and allows problems to go unresolved.

page 622 

The lean approach is to pare down inventories gradually in order to uncover the problems. Once they are uncovered and solved, the system removes more inventory, finds and solves additional problems, and so on. A useful analogy is a boat on a pond that has large, hidden rocks. (See Figure 14.3.) The rocks represent problems that can hinder production (the boat). The water in the pond that covers the rocks is the inventory in the system. As the water level is slowly lowered, the largest rocks are the first to appear (those problems are the first to be identified). At that point, efforts are undertaken to remove these rocks from the water (resolve these problems). Once that has been accomplished, additional water is removed from the pond, revealing the next layer of rocks, which are then worked on. As more rocks are removed, the need for water to cover them diminishes. Likewise, as more of the major production problems are solved, there is less need to rely on inventory or other buffers.

image

For instance: Carrying extra raw materials allows operation even though vendor deliveries are late or some quality is substandard; carrying extra work-in-process (WIP) can hide problems during production and late deliveries of parts from suppliers; and carrying extra finished goods can make up for poor forecasts.

Low inventories are the result of a process of successful problem solving, one that has occurred over time. Furthermore, because it is unlikely that all problems will be found and resolved, it is necessary to be able to deal quickly with problems when they do occur. Hence, there is a continuing need to identify and solve problems within a short time span to prevent new problems from disrupting the smooth flow of work through the system.

One way to minimize inventory storage in a lean system is to have deliveries from suppliers go directly to the production floor, which completely eliminates the need to store incoming parts and materials. At the other end of the process, completed units are shipped out as soon as they are ready, which minimizes storage of finished goods. Coupled with low work-in-process inventory, these features result in systems that operate with very little inventory.

Among the advantages of lower inventory are less carrying cost, less space needed, less tendency to rely on buffers, less rework if defects occur, and less need to “work off” current inventory before implementing design improvements. But carrying less inventory also has some risks: The primary one is that if problems arise, there is no safety net. Another is missed opportunities if the system is unable to respond quickly to them.

Fail-Safe Methods. Failsafing refers to building safeguards into a process to reduce or eliminate the potential for errors during a process. The term that was used initially was baka-yoke, which meant “foolproofing.” However, due to its offensive connotations, the term was changed to poka-yoke , which means “mistake proofing.” Some examples of failsafing include an alarm that sounds if the weight of a packaged item is too low, indicating missing components; putting assembly components in “egg cartons” to ensure that no parts are left out; and designing parts that can only be attached in the correct position. There are several everyday examples in vehicles, including signals that warn that the key is still in the ignition if the car door is opened, warn if a door is ajar, warn if seatbelts are not fastened, or warn if the fuel level is low. Other examples include an ATM signal if a card is left in a machine, detectors at department stores that signal if a monitoring tag hasn’t been removed from an item, electrical fuses and circuit breakers that interrupt electrical supply if a circuit is overloaded, computers and other devices that won’t operate if an incorrect password is used, and so on. Much of the credit for poka-yoke thinking is attributed to the work of Shigeo Shingo, who extensively promoted the use of failsafing in operations.

Personnel/Organizational Elements

Five elements of personnel and organization are particularly important for lean systems:

  1. Workers as assets

  2. Cross-trained workers

  3. Continuous improvement

  4. Cost accounting

  5. Leadership/project management

page 623 

Workers as Assets. A fundamental tenet of the lean philosophy is that workers are assets. Well-trained and motivated workers are the heart of a lean system. They are given more authority to make decisions than their counterparts in more traditional systems, but they are also expected to do more.

Cross-Trained Workers. Workers are cross-trained to perform several parts of a process and operate a variety of machines. This adds to system flexibility because workers are able to help one another when bottlenecks occur or when a coworker is absent. It also helps line balancing.

Continuous Improvement. Workers in a lean system have greater responsibility for quality than workers in traditional systems, and they are expected to be involved in problem solving and continuous improvement. Lean system workers receive extensive training in statistical process control, quality improvement, and problem solving.

Problem solving is a cornerstone of any lean system. Of interest are problems that interrupt, or have the potential to interrupt, the smooth flow of work through the system. When such problems surface, it becomes important to resolve them quickly. This may entail increasing inventory levels temporarily while the problem is investigated, but the intent of problem solving is to eliminate the problem, or at least greatly reduce the chances of it recurring.

Problems that occur during production must be dealt with quickly. Some companies use a light system to signal problems; in Japan, such a system is called andon . Each workstation is equipped with a set of three lights. A green light means no problems, an amber light means a worker is falling a little bit behind, and a red light indicates a serious problem. The purpose of the light system is to keep others in the system informed and to enable workers and supervisors to immediately see when and where problems are occurring.

Japanese companies have been very successful in forming teams composed of workers and managers who routinely work on problems. Moreover, workers are encouraged to report problems and potential problems to the teams.

It is important that all levels of management actively support and become involved in problem solving. This includes a willingness to provide financial support and to recognize achievements. It is desirable to formulate goals with the help of workers, publicize the goals, and carefully document accomplishments. Goals give workers something tangible to strive for, and recognition can help maintain worker interest and morale.

page 624 

A central theme of a true lean approach is to work toward continual improvement of the system—reducing inventories, reducing setup cost and time, improving quality, increasing the output rate, and generally cutting waste and inefficiency. Toward that end, problem solving becomes a way of life—a “culture” that must be assimilated into the thinking of management and workers alike. It becomes a never-ending quest for improving operations as all members of the organization strive to improve the system.

One challenge to continuous improvement is that once the “easy” improvements have been made, it becomes more difficult to keep workers motivated to continue to look for further improvements.

Workers in lean systems have more stress than their counterparts in more traditional systems. Stress comes not only from their added authority and responsibility but also from the high-paced system they work in, where there is little slack and a continual push to improve.

Cost Accounting. Another feature of some lean systems is the method of allocating overhead. Traditional accounting methods sometimes distort overhead allocation because they allocate it on the basis of direct labor hours. However, that approach does not always accurately reflect the consumption of overhead by different jobs. In addition, the number of direct labor hours in some industries has declined significantly over the years and now frequently accounts for a relatively small portion of the total cost. Conversely, other costs now represent a major portion of the total cost. Therefore, labor-intensive jobs (i.e., those that use relatively large proportions of direct labor) may be assigned a disproportionate share of overhead, one that does not truly reflect actual costs. That, in turn, can cause managers to make poor decisions. Furthermore, the need to track direct labor hours can itself involve considerable effort. One alternative method of allocating overhead is activity-based costing . This method is designed to more closely reflect the actual amount of overhead consumed by a particular job or activity. Activity-based costing first identifies traceable costs and then assigns those costs to various types of activities such as machine setups, inspection, machine hours, direct labor hours, and movement of materials. Specific jobs are then assigned overhead based on the percentage of activities they consume.

Leadership/Project Management. Another feature of lean systems relates to leadership. Managers are expected to be leaders and facilitators, not order givers. Lean encourages two-way communication between workers and managers.

Manufacturing Planning and Control

Seven elements of manufacturing planning and control are particularly important for lean systems:

  1. Level loading

  2. Pull systems

  3. Visual systems

  4. Limited work-in-process (WIP)

  5. Close vendor relationships

  6. Reduced transaction processing

  7. Preventive maintenance and housekeeping

Level Loading. Lean systems place a strong emphasis on achieving stable, level daily mix schedules. Toward that end, the master production schedule is developed to provide level capacity loading. That may entail a rate-based production schedule instead of the more familiar quantity-based schedule. Moreover, once established, production schedules are relatively fixed over a short time horizon, and this provides certainty to the system. Even so, some adjustments may be needed in day-to-day schedules to achieve level capacity requirements. Suppliers like level loading because it means smooth demand for them.

page 625 

A level production schedule requires smooth production. When a company produces different products or product models, it is desirable to produce in small lots (to minimize work-in-process inventory and to maintain flexibility) and to spread the production of the different products throughout the day to achieve smooth production. The extreme case would be to produce one unit of one product, then one of another, then one of another, and so on. While this approach would allow for maximum smoothness, it would generally not be practical because it would generate excessive setup costs.

Mixed-model sequencing begins with daily production requirements of each product or model. For instance, suppose a department produces three models, A, B, and C, with these daily requirements.

Three issues then need to be resolved. One is which sequence to use (C-B-A, A-C-B, etc.), another is how many times (i.e., cycles) the sequence should be repeated daily, and the third is how many units of each model to produce in each cycle.

Model

Daily Quantity

A

10

B

15

C

 5

The choice of sequence can depend on several factors, but the key one is usually the setup time or cost, which may vary depending on the sequence used. For instance, if two of the models, say A and C, are quite similar, the sequences A-C and C-A may involve only minimal setup changes, whereas the setup for model B may be more extensive. Choosing a sequence that has A-C or C-A will result in about 20 percent fewer setups over time than having B produced between A and C on every cycle.

The number of cycles per day depends on the daily production quantities. If every model is to be produced in every cycle, which is often the goal, determining the smallest integer that can be evenly divided into each model’s daily quantity will indicate the number of cycles. This will be the fewest number of cycles that will contain one unit of the model with the lowest quantity requirements. For models A, B, and C shown in the preceding table, there should be five cycles (five can be evenly divided into each quantity). High setup costs may cause a manager to use fewer cycles, trading off savings in setup costs and level production. If dividing by the smallest daily quantity does not yield an integer value for each model, a manager may opt for using the smallest production quantity to select a number of cycles, but then produce more of some items in some cycles to make up the difference.

Sometimes a manager determines the number of units of each model in each cycle by dividing each model’s daily production quantity by the number of cycles. Using five cycles per day would yield the following:

Model

Daily Quantity

Units per Cycle

A

10

10/5 = 2

B

15

15/5 = 3

C

 5

 5/5 = 1

These quantities may be unworkable due to restrictions on lot sizes. For example, model B may be packed four to a carton, so producing three units per cycle would mean that, at times, finished units (inventory) would have to wait until sufficient quantities were available to fill a crate. Similarly, there may be standard production lot sizes for some operations. A heat-treating process might involve a furnace that can handle six units at a time. If the different models require different furnace temperatures, they could not be grouped. What would be necessary here is an analysis of the trade-off between furnace lot size and the advantages of level production.

page 626 

Pull Systems. The terms push and pull are used to describe two different systems for moving work through a production process. In traditional production environments, a push system is used: When work is finished at a workstation, the output is pushed to the next station; or, in the case of the final operation, it is pushed on to final inventory. Conversely, in a pull system , control of moving the work rests with the following operation; each workstation pulls the output from the preceding station as it is needed; output of the final operation is pulled by customer demand or the master schedule. Thus, in a pull system, work moves on in response to demand from the next stage in the process, whereas in a push system, work moves on as it is completed, without regard to the next station’s readiness for the work. Consequently, work may pile up at workstations that fall behind schedule because of equipment failure or the detection of a problem with quality.

Communication moves backward through the system from station to station. Each workstation (i.e., customer) communicates its need for more work to the preceding workstation (i.e., supplier), thereby assuring that supply equals demand. Work moves “just in time” for the next operation; the flow of work is thereby coordinated, and the accumulation of excessive inventories between operations is avoided. Of course, some inventory is usually present because operations are not instantaneous. If a workstation waited until it received a request from the next workstation before starting its work, the next station would have to wait for the preceding station to perform its work. Therefore, by design, each workstation produces just enough output to meet the (anticipated) demand of the next station. This can be accomplished by having the succeeding workstation communicate its need for input sufficiently ahead of time to allow the preceding station to do the work. Or there can be a small buffer of stock between stations; when the buffer decreases to a certain level, this signals the preceding station to produce enough output to replenish the buffer supply. The size of the buffer supply page 627depends on the cycle time at the preceding workstation. If the cycle time is short, the station will need little or no buffer; if the cycle time is long, it will need a considerable amount of buffer. However, production occurs only in response to usage of the succeeding station; work is still pulled by the demand generated by the next operation.

Pull systems aren’t necessarily appropriate for all manufacturing operations because they require a fairly steady flow of repetitive work. Large variations in volume, product mix, or product design will undermine the system.

Visual Systems. In a pull system, work flow is dictated by “next-step demand.” A system can communicate such demand in a variety of ways, including a shout or a wave, but by far the most commonly used device is the kanban card. Kanban is a Japanese word meaning “signal” or “visible record.” When a worker needs materials or work from the preceding station, he or she uses a kanban card. In effect, the kanban card is the authorization to move or work on parts. In kanban systems, no part or lot can be moved or worked on without one of these cards.

There are two main types of kanbans:

  • Production kanban (p-kanban): signals the need to produce parts

  • Conveyance kanban (c-kanban): signals the need to deliver parts to the next work center

The system works this way: A kanban card is affixed to each container. When a workstation needs to replenish its supply of parts, a worker goes to the area where these parts are stored and withdraws one container of parts. Each container holds a predetermined quantity. The worker removes the kanban card from the container and posts it in a designated spot where it will be clearly visible, and the worker moves the container to the workstation. The posted kanban is then picked up by a stock person who replenishes the stock with another container, and so on down the line. Demand for parts triggers a replenishment, and parts are supplied as usage dictates. Similar withdrawals and replenishments—all controlled by kanbans—occur all the way up and down the line from vendors to finished-goods inventories. If supervisors decide the system is too loose because inventories are building up, they may decide to tighten the system and withdraw some kanbans. Conversely, if the system seems too tight, they may introduce additional kanbans to bring the system into balance. Vendors also can influence the number of containers. Moreover, trip times can affect the number: Longer trip times may lead to fewer but larger containers, while shorter trip times may involve a greater number of small containers.

page 628 

It is apparent that the number of kanban cards in use is an important variable. One can compute the ideal number of kanban cards using this formula:

image

(14–2)

where

image

Note that D and T must use the same units (e.g., minutes, days).

Although the goals of MRP and kanban are essentially the same (i.e., to improve customer service, reduce inventories, and increase productivity), their approaches are different. Neither MRP nor kanban is a stand-alone system—each exists within a larger framework. MRP is a computerized system, whereas kanban is a manual system that may be part of a lean system, although lean can exist without kanban.

Kanban is essentially a two-bin type of inventory: Supplies are replenished semiautomatically when they reach a predetermined level. MRP is more concerned with projecting requirements and with planning and scheduling operations.

A major benefit of the kanban system is its simplicity, whereas a major benefit of MRP is its ability to handle complex planning and scheduling. In addition, MRP II enables management to answer what-if questions for capacity planning.

The philosophies that underlie kanban systems are quite different from those traditionally held by manufacturers. Nonetheless, both approaches have their merits, so it probably would not make sense in most instances to switch from one method of operation to the other. Moreover, to do so would require a tremendous effort. It is noteworthy that at the same time that Western manufacturers are studying kanban systems, some Japanese manufacturers are studying MRP systems. This suggests the possibility that either system could be improved by page 629incorporating selected elements of the other. That would take careful analysis to determine which elements to incorporate, as well as careful implementation of selected elements, and close monitoring to assure that intended results were achieved.

Whether manufacturers should adopt the kanban method is debatable. Some form of it may be useful, but kanban is merely an information system; by itself it offers little in terms of helping manufacturers become more competitive or productive. By the same token, MRP alone will not achieve those results either. Instead, it is the overall approach to manufacturing that is crucial; it is the commitment and support of top management and the continuing efforts of all levels of management to find new ways to improve their manufacturing planning and control techniques, and to adapt those techniques to fit their particular circumstances, that will determine the degree of success.

Comment The use of either kanban or MRP does not preclude use of the other. In fact, it is not unusual to find the two systems used in the same production facility. Some Japanese manufacturers, for example, are turning to MRP systems to help them plan production. Both approaches have their advantages and limitations. MRP systems provide the capability to explode the bill of materials to project timing and material requirements that can then be used to plan production. But the MRP assumption of fixed lead times and infinite capacity can often result in significant problems. At the shop floor level, the discipline of a kanban system, with materials pull, can be very effective. But kanban works best when there is a uniform flow through the shop; a variable flow requires buffers, and this reduces the advantage of a pull system.

In effect, some situations are more conducive to a visual approach, others to an MRP approach. Still others can benefit from a hybrid of the two. Hybrid systems like kanban/MRP can be successful if MRP is used for planning and kanban is used as the execution system.

Limited Work-in-Process (WIP). Movement of materials and WIP in a lean system is carefully coordinated, so that they arrive at each step in a process just as they are needed. Controlling the amount of WIP in a production system can yield substantial benefits. One is lower carrying costs due to lower WIP inventory. Another is the increased flexibility that would be lost if there were large amounts of WIP in the system. In addition, low WIP aids scheduling and saves costs of rework and scrapping if there are design changes.

Controlling WIP also results in low cycle-time variability. WIP is determined by cycle time and the arrival rate of jobs. According to Little’s law, WIP = Cycle time × Arrival rate. If both WIP and the arrival rate of jobs are held constant, the cycle time will also be constant. In a push system, the arrival rate of jobs is not held constant, so there is the possibility of large WIP buildups, which results in high variability in cycle times. This forces companies to quote longer lead times to customers to allow for variable cycle times.

There are two general approaches to controlling WIP: One is kanban and the other is constant work-in-process (CONWIP). Kanban’s control of WIP focuses on individual workstations, while CONWIP’s focus is on the system as a whole. With CONWIP, when a job exits the system, a new job is allowed to enter. This results in a constant level of work-in-process.

Kanban works best in an environment that is stable and predictable. CONWIP offers an advantage if there is variability in a line, perhaps due to a breakdown in an operation or a quality problem. With kanban, upstream work is blocked and processing will stop fairly quickly, while with CONWIP upstream stations can continue to operate for a somewhat longer time. Then, after the reason for stoppage has been corrected, there will be less need to make up lost production than if the entire line had been shut down, as it would be under kanban. Also, in a mixed product environment, CONWIP can be easier than kanban because kanban focuses on specific part numbers whereas CONWIP does not.

Close Vendor Relationships. Lean systems typically have close relationships with vendors, who are expected to provide frequent small deliveries of high-quality goods. Traditionally, buyers have assumed the role of monitoring the quality of purchased goods, inspecting shipments for quality and quantity, and returning poor-quality goods to the vendor for rework. JIT page 630systems have little slack, so poor-quality goods cause a disruption in the smooth flow of work. Moreover, the inspection of incoming goods is viewed as inefficient because it does not add value to the product. For these reasons, the burden of ensuring quality shifts to the vendor. Buyers work with vendors to help them achieve the desired quality levels and to impress upon them the importance of consistent, high-quality goods. The ultimate goal of the buyer is to be able to certify a vendor as a producer of high-quality goods. The implication of certification is that a vendor can be relied on to deliver high-quality goods without the need for buyer inspection.

Suppliers also must be willing and able to ship in small lots on a regular basis. Ideally, suppliers themselves will be operating under JIT systems. Buyers can often help suppliers convert to JIT production based on their own experiences. In effect, the supplier becomes part of an extended JIT system that integrates the facilities of buyer and supplier. Integration is easier when a supplier is dedicated to only one or a few buyers. In practice, a supplier is likely to have many different buyers, some using traditional systems and others using JIT. Consequently, compromises may have to be made by both buyers and suppliers.

Traditionally, a spirit of cooperation between buyer and seller has not been present; buyers and vendors have had a somewhat adversarial relationship. Buyers have generally regarded price as a major determinant in sourcing, and they have typically used multiple-source purchasing, which means having a list of potential vendors and buying from several to avoid getting locked into a sole source. In this way, buyers play vendors off against each other to get better pricing arrangements or other concessions. The downside is that vendors cannot rely on a long-term relationship with a buyer, and they feel no loyalty to a particular buyer. Furthermore, vendors have often sought to protect themselves from losing a buyer by increasing the number of buyers they supply.

Under JIT purchasing, good vendor relationships are very important. Buyers take measures to reduce their lists of suppliers, concentrating on maintaining close working relationships with a few good ones. Because of the need for frequent, small deliveries, many buyers attempt to find local vendors to shorten the lead time for deliveries and to reduce lead time variability. An added advantage of having vendors nearby is quick response when problems arise.

JIT purchasing is enhanced by long-term relationships between buyers and vendors. Vendors are more willing to commit resources to the job of shipping according to a buyer’s JIT system given a long-term relationship. Moreover, price often becomes secondary to other aspects of the relationship (e.g., consistent high quality, flexibility, frequent small deliveries, and quick response to problems).

Supplier Tiers A key feature of many lean production systems is the relatively small number of suppliers used. In traditional production, companies often deal with hundreds or even thousands of suppliers in a highly centralized arrangement, not unlike a giant wheel with many spokes. The company is at the hub of the wheel, and the spokes radiate out to suppliers, each of whom must deal directly with the company. In traditional systems, a supplier does not know the other suppliers or what they are doing. Each supplier works to specifications provided by the buyer. Suppliers have very little basis (or motivation) for suggesting improvements. Moreover, as companies play one supplier off against others, the sharing of information is more risky than rewarding. In contrast, lean production companies may employ a tiered approach for suppliers: They use relatively few first-tier suppliers who work directly with the company or who supply major subassemblies. The first-tier suppliers are responsible for dealing with second-tier suppliers who provide components for the subassemblies, thereby relieving the final buyer from dealing with large numbers of suppliers.

The automotive industry provides a good example of this situation. Suppose a certain car model has an electric seat. The seat and motor together might entail 250 separate parts. A traditional producer might use more than 30 suppliers for the electric seat, but a lean producer might use a single (first-tier) supplier who has the responsibility for the entire seat unit. The company would provide specifications for the overall unit, but leave to the supplier the details of the motor, springs, and so on. The first-tier supplier, in turn, might subcontract the motor to a second-tier supplier, the track to another second-tier supplier, and the cushions and fabric to still another. The second-tier suppliers might subcontract some of their work to third-tier page 631suppliers, and so on. Each tier has only to deal with those just above it or just below it. Suppliers on each level are encouraged to work with each other, and they are motivated to do so because that increases the probability that the resulting item (the seat) will meet or exceed the final buyer’s expectations. In this “team of suppliers” approach, all suppliers benefit from a successful product, and each supplier bears full responsibility for the quality of its portion of the product. Figure 14.4 illustrates the difference between the traditional approach and the tiered approach.

image

Reduced Transaction Processing. Traditional manufacturing systems often have many built-in transactions that do not add value. In their classic article, “The Hidden Factory,” 2 Jeffrey G. Miller and Thomas Vollmann identify a laundry list of transaction processing that comprises a “hidden factory” in traditional manufacturing planning and control systems, and point out the tremendous cost burden that results. The transactions can be classified as logistical, balancing, quality, or change transactions.

Logistical transactions include ordering, execution, and confirmation of materials transported from one location to another. Related costs cover shipping and receiving personnel, expediting orders, data entry, and data processing.

Balancing transactions include forecasting, production planning, production control, procurement, scheduling, and order processing. Associated costs relate to the personnel involved in these and supporting activities.

Quality transactions include determining and communicating specifications, monitoring, recording, and follow-up activities. Costs relate to appraisal, prevention, internal failures (e.g., scrap, rework, retesting, delays, administration activities) and external failures (e.g., warranty costs, product liability, returns, potential loss of future business).

Change transactions primarily involve engineering changes and the ensuing changes generated in specifications, bills of material, scheduling, processing instructions, and so on. Engineering changes are among the most costly of all transactions.

Lean systems cut transaction costs by reducing the number and frequency of transactions. For example, suppliers deliver goods directly to the production floor, bypassing the storeroom entirely, thereby avoiding the transactions related to receiving the shipment into inventory storage and later moving the materials to the production floor. In addition, vendors are certified for quality, eliminating the need to inspect incoming shipments for quality. The unending quest for quality improvement that pervades lean systems eliminates many of the previously mentioned quality transactions and their related costs. The use of bar coding (not exclusive to lean systems) can reduce data entry transactions and increase data accuracy.

page 632 

Preventive Maintenance and Housekeeping. Because lean systems have very little in-process inventory, equipment breakdowns can be extremely disruptive. To minimize breakdowns, companies use preventive maintenance programs, which emphasize maintaining equipment in good operating condition and replacing parts that have a tendency to fail before they fail. Workers are often responsible for maintaining their own equipment.

Even with preventive maintenance, occasional equipment failures will occur. Companies must be prepared for this, so they can quickly return equipment to working order. This may mean maintaining supplies of critical spare parts and making other provisions for emergency situations, perhaps maintaining a small force of repair people or training workers to do certain repairs themselves. Note that when breakdowns do occur, they indicate potential opportunities to be exploited in a lean environment.

Housekeeping involves keeping the workplace clean, as well as keeping it free of any materials that are not needed for production, because those materials take up space and may cause disruptions to the work flow.

Housekeeping is part of what is often referred to as the five S’s, which are five behaviors intended to make the workplace effective:

  1. Sort. Decide which items are needed to accomplish the work, and keep only those items.

  2. Straighten. Organize the workplace so that the needed items can be accessed quickly and easily.

  3. Sweep. Keep the workplace clean and ready for work. Perform equipment maintenance regularly.

  4. Standardize. Use standard instructions and procedures for all work.

  5. Self-discipline. Make sure employees understand the need for an uncluttered workplace.

The five S’s are gaining increasing recognition as an important component of successful lean operations. Among the benefits of the five S’s are increased productivity, improved employee morale, decreased risk of accidents, and improved appearance for visitors. However, unless workers and managers appreciate the rationale for the five S’s, they may view them as unnecessary and a waste of time and effort.

Lean systems have been described and compared with traditional manufacturing systems in the preceding pages. Table 14.3 provides a brief overview of those comparisons.

TABLE 14.3

Comparison of lean and traditional production philosophies

Factor

Traditional

Lean

Inventory

Much, to offset forecast errors, late deliveries

Minimal necessary to operate

Deliveries

Few, large

Many, small

Lot sizes

Large

Small

Setups, runs

Few, long runs

Many, short runs

Vendors

Long-term relationships are unusual

Partners

Workers

Necessary to do the work

Assets

14.4 LEAN TOOLS

This section describes several tools used for process improvement in lean systems.

Value Stream Mapping

Value stream mapping is a visual tool to systematically examine the flow of materials and information involved in bringing a product or service to a consumer. The technique originated at Toyota, where it is referred to as “Material and Information Flow Mapping.”

page 633 

The map is a sketch of an entire process that typically ranges from incoming goods from suppliers to shipment of a product or delivery of a service to the customer. The map shows all processes in the value stream, from arrivals of supplies to the shipping of the product. The objective is to increase value to the customer, where value is typically defined in terms of quality, time, cost, or flexibility (e.g., rapid response or agility). Data collected during the mapping process might include times (e.g., cycle time, setup time, changeover time, touch time, lead time), distances traveled (e.g., by parts, workers, paperwork), mistakes (e.g., product defects, data entry errors), inefficient work methods (e.g., extra motions, excessive lifting or moving, repositioning), and waiting lines (e.g., workers waiting for parts or equipment repairs, orders waiting to be processed). Information flows are also included in the mapping process.

You can get a sense of value stream mapping from the following tips for developing an effective mapping of a value stream: 3

  1. Map the value stream in person.

  2. Begin with a quick walkthrough of the system from beginning to end to get a sense of the system.

  3. Then do a more thorough walkthrough following the actual pathway to collect current information on material or information flow.

  4. Record elements of the system such as cycle times, scrap rates, amounts of inventory, downtimes, number of operators, distances between processes, and transfer times.

Value improvement for a product or a service embodies the five lean principles described earlier and repeated here. It begins by specifying value from the customer’s standpoint. You can see where value stream mapping can help process improvement:

  1. Specify value from the standpoint of the end customer.

  2. Identify all the steps in the value stream and create a visual (map) of the value stream.

  3. Eliminate steps that do not create value or improve flow.

  4. Use next-customer-in-the-process demand to pull from each preceding process as needed to control the flow.

  5. Repeat this process as long as waste exists in the system.

Once a value stream map is completed, data analysis can uncover improvement opportunities by asking key questions, such as:

Where are the process bottlenecks?

Where do errors occur?

Which processes have to deal with the most variation?

Where does waste occur?

All business organizations, whether they are primarily engaged in service or manufacturing, can benefit by applying lean principles to their office operations. This includes purchasing, accounting, order entry, and other office functions. Office wastes might include:

  • Excess inventory—excess supplies and equipment

  • Overprocessing—excess paperwork and redundant approvals

  • Waiting times—orders waiting to be processed, requests for information awaiting answers

  • Unnecessary transportation—inefficient routing

  • Processing waste—using more resources than necessary to accomplish a task

  • Inefficient work methods—poor layout design, unnecessary steps, inadequate training

  • Mistakes—order entry errors, lost files, miscommunications

  • Underused people—not tapping all of the mental and creative capabilities of workers

page 634 

Process Improvement Using 5W2H

Asking certain questions about a process can lead to cost and waste reduction. The 5W2H approach (five questions that begin with w, and two questions that begin with h) is outlined in Table 14.4. This approach can be used by itself or in conjunction with value stream mapping.

TABLE 14.4

The 5W2H approach

Category

5W2H

Typical Questions

Goal

Subject

What?

What is being done?

Identify the focus of analysis.

Purpose

Why?

Why is this necessary?

Eliminate unnecessary tasks.

Location

Where?

Where is it being done?

Why is it done there?

Would it be better to do it someplace else?

Improve the location.

Sequence

When?

When is it done?

Would it be better to do it at another time?

Improve the sequence.

People

Who?

Who is doing it?

Could someone else do it better?

Improve the sequence or output.

Method

How?

How is it being done?

Is there a better way?

Simplify tasks, improve output.

Cost

How much?

How much does it cost now?

What would the new cost be?

Select an improved method.

Source: Adapted from Alan Robinson, ed., Continuous Improvement in Operations: A Systematic Approach to Waste Reduction, p. 246. Copyright © 1991 Productivity Press. www.productivitypress.com.

Lean and Six Sigma

Some believe that lean and Six Sigma are two alternate approaches for process improvement. However, another view is that the two approaches are complementary and, when used together, can lead to superior results.

Lean strives to eliminate non-value-added activities, using simple tools to find and eliminate them. It focuses on maximizing process velocity, and it employs tools to analyze and improve process flow. However, variation exists in all processes. Understanding and reducing variation are important for quality improvement. Lean principles alone cannot achieve statistical process control, and Six Sigma alone cannot achieve improved process speed and flow. Using the two approaches in combination integrates lean principles and Six Sigma statistical tools for variation reduction to achieve a system that has both a balanced flow and quality.

JIT Deliveries and the Supply Chain

Direct suppliers must be able to support frequent just-in-time deliveries of small batches of parts. That may lead to an increase in transportation costs if trucks carry partial loads, and perhaps to congestion at loading docks. Moreover, the JIT delivery requirement may extend to other portions of the supply chain, in which case close coordination among supply chain partners is critical. Also, JIT delivery results in pressure for on-time deliveries to avoid production interruptions due to stockouts.

Lean and ERP

Lean systems focus on pacing production and synchronizing delivery of incoming supply. SAP’s Lean Planning and Operations module extends ERP to lean operation by providing lean planning and scheduling capability linked to customer demand. It enables leveling of schedules and synchronization of supply chain activities with paced company operations.

page 635 

14.5 TRANSITIONING TO A LEAN SYSTEM

The success of lean systems in Japan and the United States has attracted keen interest among other traditional manufacturers.

Planning a Successful Conversion

To increase the probability of successful transition, companies should adopt a carefully planned approach that includes the following elements:

  1. Make sure top management is committed to the conversion and they know what will be required. Be sure management is involved in the process and knows what it will cost, how long it will take to complete the conversion, and what results can be expected.

  2. Study the operations carefully; decide which parts will need the most effort to convert.

  3. Obtain the support and cooperation of workers. Prepare training programs that include sessions in setups, maintenance of equipment, cross-training for multiple tasks, cooperation, and problem solving. Make sure workers are fully informed about what lean is and why it is desirable. Reassure workers that their jobs are secure.

  4. Begin by trying to reduce setup times while maintaining the current system. Enlist the aid of workers in identifying and eliminating existing problems (e.g., bottlenecks, poor quality).

  5. Gradually convert operations, beginning at the end of the process and working backward. At each stage, make sure the conversion has been relatively successful before moving on. Do not begin to reduce inventories until major problems have been resolved.

  6. As one of the last steps, convert suppliers to JIT and be prepared to work closely with them. Start by narrowing the list of vendors, identifying those who are willing to embrace the lean philosophy. Give preference to vendors who have long-term track page 636records of reliability. Use vendors located nearby if quick response time is important. Establish long-term commitments with vendors. Insist on high standards of quality and adherence to strict delivery schedules.

  7. Be prepared to encounter obstacles to conversion.

Obstacles to Conversion

Converting from a traditional system to a lean system may not be smooth. For example, cultures vary from organization to organization. Some cultures relate better to the lean philosophy than others. If a culture doesn’t relate, it can be difficult for an organization to change its culture within a short time. Also, manufacturers that operate with large amounts of inventory to handle varying customer demand may have difficulty acclimating themselves to less inventory.

Some other obstacles include the following:

  1. Management may not be totally committed or may be unwilling to devote the necessary resources to conversion. This is perhaps the most serious impediment because the conversion is probably doomed without serious commitment.

  2. Workers and/or management may not display a cooperative spirit. The system is predicated on cooperation. Managers may resist because lean shifts some of the responsibility from management to workers and gives workers more control over the work. Workers may resist because of the increased responsibility and stress.

  3. It can be very difficult to change the culture of the organization to one consistent with the lean philosophy.

  4. Suppliers may resist for several reasons:

    1. Buyers may not be willing to commit the resources necessary to help them adapt to the lean systems.

    2. They may be uneasy about long-term commitments to a buyer.

    3. Frequent, small deliveries may be difficult, especially if the supplier has other buyers who use large deliveries, or the supplier is not near.

    4. The burden of quality control will shift to the supplier.

    5. Frequent engineering changes may result from continuing lean improvements by the buyer.

A Cooperative Spirit

Lean systems require a cooperative spirit among workers, management, and vendors. Unless that is present, it is doubtful that a truly effective lean system can be achieved. The Japanese have been very successful in this regard, partly because respect and cooperation are ingrained in the Japanese culture. In Western cultures, workers, managers, and vendors have historically been strongly at odds with each other. Consequently, a major consideration in converting to a lean system is whether a spirit of mutual respect and cooperation can be achieved. This requires an appreciation of the importance of cooperation and a tenacious effort by management to instill and maintain that spirit.

Finally, it should be noted that not all organizations lend themselves to a lean approach. Lean is best used for repetitive operations under fairly stable demand.

Despite the many advantages of lean production systems, an organization must take into account a number of other considerations when planning a conversion.

The key considerations are the time and cost requirements for successful conversion, which can be substantial. But it is absolutely essential to eliminate the major sources of disruption in the system. Management must be prepared to commit the resources necessary to achieve a high level of quality and to function on a tight schedule. That means attention to even the page 637smallest of details during the design phase and substantial efforts to debug the system to the point where it runs smoothly. Beyond that, management must be capable of responding quickly when problems arise, and both management and workers must be committed to the continuous improvement of the system. Although each case is different, a general estimate of the time required for conversion is one to three years.

14.6 LEAN SERVICES

The discussion of lean systems has focused on manufacturing simply because that is where it was developed, and where it has been used most often. It is important to recognize that the full spectrum of lean benefits are more difficult to achieve in service operations. Nonetheless, services can and do benefit from many lean concepts. When just-in-time is used in the context of services, the focus is often on the time needed to perform a service—because speed is often an important order winner for services. Some services do have inventories of some sort, so inventory reduction is another aspect of lean that can apply to services. Examples of speedy delivery (“available when requested”) are Domino’s Pizza, FedEx and Express Mail, fast-food restaurants, and emergency services. Other examples include just-in-time publishing and work cells at fast-food restaurants.

In addition to speed, lean services emphasize consistent, high-quality, standard work methods; flexible workers; and close supplier relationships.

Process improvement and problem solving can contribute to streamlining a system, resulting in increased customer satisfaction and higher productivity. The following are the ways lean benefits can be achieved in services:

  • Eliminate disruptions. For example, try to avoid having workers who are servicing customers also answer telephones.

  • Make the system flexible. This can cause problems unless approached carefully. Often, it is desirable to standardize work because that can yield high productivity. On the other hand, being able to deal with variety in task requirements can be a competitive advantage. One approach might be to train workers so they can handle more variety. page 638Another might be to assign work according to specialties, with certain workers handling different types of work according to their specialty.

  • Reduce setup times and processing times. Have frequently used tools and spare parts readily available. Additionally, for service calls, try to estimate which parts and supplies might be needed so they will be on hand, and avoid carrying huge inventories.

  • Eliminate waste. This includes errors and duplicate work. Keep the emphasis on quality and uniform service.

  • Minimize work-in-process. Examples include orders waiting to be processed, calls waiting to be answered, packages waiting to be delivered, trucks waiting to be unloaded or loaded, applications waiting to be processed.

  • Simplify the process. This works especially well when customers are part of the system (self-service systems including retail operations, ATMs and vending machines, service stations, etc.).

JIT service can be a major competitive advantage for companies that can achieve it. An important key to JIT service is the ability to provide service when it is needed. That requires flexibility on the part of the provider, which generally means short setup times, and it requires clear communication on the part of the requester. If a requester can determine when it will need a particular service, a JIT server can schedule deliveries to correspond to those needs, eliminating the need for continual requests, and reducing the need for provider flexibility—and therefore probably reducing the cost of the JIT service.

Although lean concepts are applicable to service organizations, the challenge of implementing lean in service is that there are still relatively few lean service applications that service companies can reference to see how to apply the underlying lean principles. Consequently, it can be difficult to build a strong commitment among workers to achieve a lean service system.

14.7 JIT II

In some instances, companies allow suppliers to manage restocking of inventory obtained from the suppliers. A supplier representative works right in the company’s plant, making sure there is an appropriate supply on hand. The term JIT II is used to refer to this practice, and was popularized by the Bose Corporation. The concept is often referred to as vendor-managed inventory (VMI). You can read more about vendor-managed inventories in the supply chain management chapter ( Chapter 15).

14.8 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

The lean operation offers new perspectives on operations that must be given serious consideration by managers in repetitive and batch systems who wish to be competitive.

Potential adopters should carefully study the requirements and benefits of lean production systems, as well as the difficulties and strengths of their current systems, before making a decision on whether to convert. Careful estimates of time and cost to convert, and an assessment of how likely workers, managers, and suppliers will cooperate in such an approach, are essential.

The decision to convert can be sequential, giving management an opportunity to gain firsthand experience with portions of lean operations without wholly committing themselves. For instance, improving vendor relations, reducing setup times, improving quality, and reducing waste and inefficiency are desirable goals in themselves. Moreover, a level production schedule is a necessary element of a lean system, and achieving that will also be useful under a traditional system of operation.

page 639 

It is prudent to carefully weigh the risks and benefits of a just-in-time approach to inventories. A just-in-time approach can make companies and even countries vulnerable to disruptions in their supply chains. For example, low stockpiles of flu vaccine at hospitals lower their costs but leave the health system at risk if there is a flu outbreak. Also, severe weather such as hurricanes, floods, and tornadoes, and other natural disasters caused by earthquakes can cut off supply routes, leaving community services, as well as companies, desperately in need of supplies.

Supplier management is critical to a JIT operation. Generally, suppliers are located nearby to facilitate delivery on a daily or even hourly basis. Moreover, suppliers at every stage must gauge the ability of their production facilities to meet demand requirements that are subject to change.

Finally, the success of a lean system relies heavily on leadership commitment, involvement, and support, achieving a lean thinking “culture” that includes everyone in the organization, and having effective teamwork. Without these three elements, the full benefits of lean are not likely to be realized.

page 646 

14S.1 INTRODUCTION

The goal of maintenance is to keep the production system in good working order at minimal cost. There are several reasons for wanting to keep equipment and machines in good operating condition, such as to:

  • Avoid production or service disruptions

  • Not add to production or service costs

  • Maintain high quality

  • Avoid missed delivery dates

page 647 

When breakdowns occur, there are a number of potential adverse consequences:

  • Operations capacity is reduced, so processing is delayed or takes longer, keeping customers waiting.

  • Overhead continues, increasing the cost per unit.

  • There can be quality issues; output may be damaged.

  • There are safety issues; employees or customers may be injured.

Decision makers have two basic options with respect to maintenance. One option is reactive: It is to deal with breakdowns or other problems when they occur. This is referred to as breakdown maintenance . The other option is proactive: It is to reduce breakdowns through a program of lubrication, adjustment, cleaning, inspection, and replacement of worn parts. This is referred to as preventive maintenance .

Decision makers try to make a trade-off between these two basic options that will minimize their combined cost. With no preventive maintenance, breakdown and repair costs would be tremendous. Furthermore, hidden costs, such as lost output and the cost of wages while equipment is not in service, must be factored in. So must the cost of injuries or damage to other equipment and facilities or to other units in production. However, beyond a certain point, the cost of preventive maintenance activities exceeds the benefit.

As an example, if a person never had the oil changed in his or her car, and never had the brakes or tires inspected, but simply had repairs done when absolutely necessary, preventive costs would be negligible but repair costs would be quite high, considering the wide range of parts (engine, steering, transmission, tires, brakes, etc.) that could fail. In addition, property damage and injury costs might be incurred, plus there would be the uncertainty of when failure might occur (e.g., on the expressway during rush hour, or late at night). On the other hand, having the oil changed and the car lubricated every morning would obviously be excessive because automobiles are designed to perform for much longer periods without oil changes and lubrications. The best approach is to seek a balance between preventive maintenance and breakdown maintenance. The same concept applies to maintaining production systems: Strike a balance between prevention costs and breakdown costs. This concept is illustrated in Figure 14S.1.

image

The age and condition of facilities and equipment, the degree of technology involved, the type of production process, and similar factors enter into the decision of how much preventive maintenance is desirable. Thus, in the example of a new automobile, little preventive maintenance may be needed because there is only a slight risk of breakdowns. As the car ages and becomes worn through use, the desirability of preventive maintenance increases because the risk of breakdown increases. Thus, when tires and brakes begin to show signs of wear, page 648they should be replaced before they fail; dents and scratches should be periodically taken care of before they begin to rust; and the car should be lubricated and have its oil changed after exposure to high levels of dust and dirt. Also, inspection and replacement of critical parts that tend to fail suddenly should be performed before a road trip to avoid disruption of the trip and costly emergency repair bills.

14S.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The goal of preventive maintenance is to reduce the incidence of breakdowns or failures in the plant or equipment to avoid the associated costs. Those costs can include loss of output; idle workers; schedule disruptions; injuries; damage to other equipment, products, or facilities; and repairs, which may involve maintaining inventories of spare parts, repair tools and equipment, and repair specialists.

Preventive maintenance is periodic. It can be scheduled according to the availability of maintenance personnel and to avoid interference with operating schedules. Managers usually schedule preventive maintenance using some combination of the following:

  • The result of planned inspections that reveal a need for maintenance

  • According to the calendar (passage of time)

  • After a predetermined number of operating hours, or units produced

An important issue in preventive maintenance is the frequency of preventive maintenance. As the time between periodic maintenance episodes increases, the cost of preventive maintenance decreases, while the risk (and cost) of breakdowns increases. As noted, the goal is to strike a balance between the two costs (i.e., to minimize total cost).

Determining the amount of preventive maintenance to use is a function of the expected frequency of breakdown, the cost of a breakdown (including actual repair costs as well as potential damage or injury, lost production, and so on). The following two examples illustrate this.

page 649 

Ideally, preventive maintenance will be performed just prior to a breakdown or failure because this will result in the longest possible use of facilities or equipment without a breakdown. Predictive maintenance is an attempt to determine when to perform preventive maintenance activities. It is based on historical records and analysis of technical data to predict when a piece of equipment or part is about to fail. The better the predictions of failures are, the more effective preventive maintenance will be. A good preventive maintenance effort relies on complete records for each piece of equipment. Records must include information such as date of installation, operating hours, dates and types of insurance, and dates and types of repairs.

Some companies have workers perform preventive maintenance on the machines they operate, rather than use separate maintenance personnel for that task. Called total productive maintenance , this approach is consistent with JIT systems and lean operations, where employees are given greater responsibility for quality, productivity, and the general functioning of the system.

In the broadest sense, preventive maintenance extends back to the design and selection stage of equipment and facilities. Maintenance problems are sometimes designed into a system. For example, equipment may be designed in such a way that it needs frequent maintenance, or maintenance may be difficult to perform (e.g., the equipment has to be partially dismantled in order to perform routine maintenance). An extreme example of this was a certain car model that required the engine block to be lifted slightly to change the spark plugs! In such cases, maintenance is very likely to be performed less often than if its performance were less demanding. In other instances, poor design can cause equipment to wear out at an early age or experience a much higher than expected breakdown rate. Consumer Reports, for example, publishes annual breakdown data on automobiles. The data indicate that some models tend to break down with a much higher frequency than others.

One possible reason for maintenance problems being designed into a product is that designers have considered other aspects of design more important. Cost is one such aspect. Another is appearance; an attractive design may be chosen over a less attractive one even though it will be more demanding to maintain. Customers may contribute to this situation; the buying public probably has a greater tendency to select an attractive design over one that offers ease of maintenance.

Obviously, durability and ease of maintenance can have long-term implications for preventive maintenance programs. Training of employees in proper operating procedures and in how to keep equipment in good operating order—and providing the incentive to do so—are also important. More and more, U.S. organizations are taking a cue from the Japanese and transferring routine maintenance (e.g., cleaning, adjusting, inspecting) to the users of equipment, page 650in an effort to give them a sense of responsibility and awareness of the equipment they use and to cut down on abuse and misuse of the equipment.

14S.3 BREAKDOWN PROGRAMS

The risk of a breakdown can be greatly reduced by an effective preventive maintenance program. Nonetheless, occasional breakdowns still occur. Even firms with good preventive practices have some need for breakdown programs. Of course, organizations that rely less on preventive maintenance have an even greater need for effective ways of dealing with breakdowns.

Unlike preventive maintenance, management cannot schedule breakdowns but must deal with them on an irregular basis (i.e., as they occur). Among the major approaches used to deal with breakdowns are the following:

  • Standby or backup equipment that can be quickly pressed into service.

  • Inventories of spare parts that can be installed as needed, thereby avoiding lead times involved in ordering parts, and buffer inventories, so that other equipment will be less likely to be affected by short-term downtime of a particular piece of equipment.

  • Operators who are able to perform at least minor repairs on their equipment.

  • Repair people who are well trained and readily available to diagnose and correct problems with equipment.

The degree to which an organization pursues any or all of these approaches depends on how important a particular piece of equipment is to the overall operations system. At one extreme is equipment that is the focal point of a system (e.g., printing presses for a newspaper, or vital operating parts of a car, such as brakes, steering, transmission, ignition, and engine). At the other extreme is equipment that is seldom used, such as equipment needed for repairs, or equipment for which substitutes are readily available.

The implication is clear: Breakdown programs are most effective when they take into account the degree of importance a piece of equipment has in the operations system, and the ability of the system to do without it for a period of time. The Pareto phenomenon exists in such situations: A relatively few pieces of equipment will be extremely important to the functioning of the system, thereby justifying considerable effort and/or expense; some will require moderate effort or expense; and many will justify little effort or expense.

14S.4 REPLACEMENT

When breakdowns become frequent and/or costly, the manager is faced with a trade-off decision in which costs are an important consideration: What is the cost of replacement compared with the cost of continued maintenance? This question is sometimes difficult to resolve, especially if future breakdowns cannot be readily predicted. Historical records may help to project future experience. Another factor is technological change; newer equipment may have features that favor replacement over either preventive or breakdown maintenance. On the other hand, the removal of old equipment and the installation of new equipment may cause disruptions to the system, perhaps greater than the disruptions caused by breakdowns. Also, employees may have to be trained to operate the new equipment. Finally, forecasts of future demand for the use of the present or new equipment must be taken into account. The demand for the replacement equipment might differ because of the different features it has. For instance, demand for output of the current equipment might be two years, while demand for output of the replacement equipment might be much longer.

These decisions can be fairly complex, involving a number of different factors. Nevertheless, most of us are faced with a similar decision with our personal automobiles: When is it time for a replacement?

page 651 

page 653 

page 654 

page 655 

page 656 

15.1 INTRODUCTION

A supply chain is the sequence of organizations—their facilities, functions, and activities—that are involved in producing and delivering a product or service. The sequence begins with basic suppliers of raw materials and extends all the way to their final customers. Facilities include warehouses, factories, processing centers, distribution centers, retail outlets, and offices. Functions and activities include forecasting, purchasing, inventory management, information management, quality assurance, scheduling, production, distribution, delivery, and customer service.

Supply chain management is the strategic coordination of business functions within a business organization and throughout its supply chain for the purpose of integrating supply and demand management. Supply chain managers are people at various levels of the organization who are responsible for managing supply and demand both within and across business organizations. They are involved with planning and coordinating activities that include sourcing and procurement of materials and services, transformation activities, and logistics. The main actions are plan, source, make, and deliver. Note that for many services, make and deliver happen at the same time.

Logistics is the part of a supply chain involved with the forward and reverse flow of goods, services, cash, and information. Logistics management includes management of inbound and outbound transportation, material handling, warehousing, inventory, order fulfillment and distribution, third-party logistics, and reverse logistics (the return of goods from customers).

Every business organization is part of at least one supply chain, and many are part of multiple supply chains. Often, the number and type of organizations in a supply chain are determined by whether the supply chain is manufacturing or service oriented. Figure 15.1 illustrates several perspectives of supply chains. Figure 15.2 shows a more detailed version of the farm-to-market supply chain that was shown in Chapter 1, with key suppliers at each stage included.

image image

Supply chains are sometimes referred to as value chains, a term that reflects the concept that value is added as goods and services progress through the chain. Supply or value chains typically comprise separate business organizations, rather than just a single organization. Moreover, the supply or value chain has two components for each organization—a supply component and a demand component. The supply component starts at the beginning of the chain and ends with the internal operations of the organization. The demand component of the chain starts at the point where the organization’s output is delivered to its immediate customer and ends with the final customer in the chain. The demand chain is the sales and distribution portion of the value chain. The length of each component depends on where a particular organization is in the chain; the closer the organization is to the final customer, the shorter its demand component and the longer its supply component.

Supply chains are the lifeblood of any business organization. They connect suppliers, producers, and final customers in a network that is essential to the creation and delivery of goods and services. Managing the supply chain is the process of planning, implementing, and controlling supply chain operations. The basic components are strategy, procurement, supply management, demand management, and logistics. The goal of supply chain management is to match supply to demand as effectively and efficiently as possible. Key aspects relate to:

  • Determining the appropriate level of outsourcing

  • Managing procurement

  • Managing suppliers

  • Managing customer relationships

  • Being able to quickly identify problems and respond to them

An important aspect of supply chain management is flow management. The three types of flow that need to be managed are product and service flow, information flow, and financial flow. Product and service flow involves the movement of goods or services from suppliers to customers, as well as handling customer service needs and product returns. Information flow involves sharing forecast and sales data, transmitting orders, tracking shipments, and updating order status. Financial flow involves credit terms, payments, and consignment and title ownership arrangements. Technological advances have greatly enhanced the ability to effectively manage these flows. A dramatic decrease in the cost of transmitting and receiving information and the increased ease and speed of communication have facilitated the ability to coordinate supply chain activities and make timely decisions. In effect, a supply chain is a complex supply network.

page 657 

15.2 TRENDS IN SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Although different industries and different businesses vary widely in terms of where they are in the evolution of their supply chain management, many businesses emphasize the following:

  • Measuring supply chain ROI

  • “Greening” the supply chain

  • Reevaluating outsourcing

  • Integrating IT

    page 658 

  • Managing risks

  • Adopting lean principles

  • Being agile

  • Adopting blockchain technology

  • Establishing transparency

  • Adopting new delivery modes

Measuring supply chain ROI. enables managers to incorporate economics into outsourcing and other decisions, giving them a rational basis for managing their supply chains.

“Greening” the supply chain. is generating interest for a variety of reasons, including corporate responsibility, regulations, and public pressure. This may involve redesigning products and services; reducing packaging; near-sourcing to reduce pollution from transportation (one estimate is that marine shipping alone causes about 60,000 premature deaths annually worldwide due to lung cancer and cardiopulmonary disease); 1 choosing “green” suppliers; managing returns; and implementing end-of-life programs, particularly for appliances and electronic equipment.

Reevaluating outsourcing. Companies are taking a second look at outsourcing, especially global suppliers. Business organizations outsource for a variety of reasons. Often, decisions to outsource have been based on lower prices resulting from lower labor costs. Other potential benefits include the ability to focus on core strengths, converting fixed costs to variable costs, freeing up capital to devote to other needs, shifting some risks to suppliers, taking advantage of supplier expertise, and ease of expansion outside the home country. Some potential difficulties, depending on the nature of what is outsourced and the length of the supply chain, include inflexibility due to longer lead times for delivery of goods with distant suppliers, increased transportation costs, language and cultural differences, loss of jobs, loss of control, lower productivity, loss of ability to do the work internally and loss of business knowledge, knowledge transfer, concerns about intellectual property security, and increased effort needed to manage the supply chain.

page 659 

One example of where this is getting increased attention is the clothing industry. Rising wages in China and other countries where suppliers make most of the clothing for retail sales provide less of a cost benefit than previously, and long lead times eliminate agility in an industry where the market rewards it. Add in instances of late deliveries and substandard quality, and events like factory fires and building collapses, and the decision to change suppliers and sometimes to back-shore becomes more feasible.

Integrating IT. produces real-time data that can enhance strategic planning and help businesses to control costs, measure quality and productivity, respond quickly to problems, and improve supply chain operations. This is why ERP systems are so important for supply chain management.

Managing risks. For some businesses, the supply chain is a major source of risk, so it is essential to adopt procedures for managing risks. According to a Deloitte survey, 2 45 percent of supply chain leaders lack confidence in their risk management. The following section discusses sources of risk and actions businesses can take to reduce risks.

Adopting lean principles. Many businesses are turning to lean principles to improve the performance of their supply chains. In too many instances, traditional supply chains are a collection of loosely connected steps, and business processes are not linked to suppliers’ or customers’ needs. Applying lean principles to supply chains can overcome this weakness by eliminating non-value-added processes; improving product flow by using pull systems rather than push systems; using fewer suppliers and supplier certification programs, which can nearly eliminate the need for inspection of incoming goods; and adopting the lean attitude of never ceasing to improve the system.

Being agile. Being agile means that a supply chain is flexible enough to be able to respond fairly quickly to unpredictable changes or circumstances, such as supplier production or quality issues, weather disruptions, changing demand (volume of demand or customer preferences), transporting issues, and political issues.

Adopting blockchain technology. Blockchains are shared ledgers where all transactions are recorded securely in real-time and are incapable of being altered or deleted. A blockchain can connect ledgers across an organization’s supply chain (suppliers, shippers, producers, distributors, retailers, and final consumer) to improve the accuracy and efficiency of tracking products, eliminating a manual process that can take days into an automated process that takes seconds.

page 660 

Advances from AI to blockchains are fostering intelligent supply chains, autonomous systems that can streamline supply chain processes. Blockchains will provide greater transparency and trust among supply chain partners. Intelligent supply chains provide real-time visibility across the supply chain and manufacturing operations, facilitating collaboration and improving forecasts to better manage inventories and make matching supply and demand more efficient and less costly.

page 661 

Blockchains also enable companies to build anti-counterfeit databases, track stolen products, or track items with specific qualities, such as luxury products that rely on product authenticity. One promising application of blockchain is contract and document management by digitalizing them and moving the management of paper certificates, warranties, and contracts into a blockchain that can automatically update the documents as needed. Another application is in the food safety industry, where blockchains will soon allow food items to be tracked, so when a producer identifies a problem, such as a tainted batch of romaine lettuce, the problem can be contained by identifying the source and issuing a recall for only the affected products.

Establishing transparency. Buyers, especially consumers, are becoming increasingly interested in knowing where and how the goods they purchase are made.

Adopting new delivery modes. Adding to traditional shipping modes that include trucks, trains, boats, mail, and companies such as FedEx and UPS, self-driving vehicles and drones are now increasingly being used to deliver to individual customers. Robots deliver pizza and other fast-food items on some college campuses. Grubhub and Doordash deliver restaurant meals, and other services shop for and deliver groceries. This provides more options for shippers, but also more challenges. Risks and liability issues are among the challenges.

As a result of these current and possible future trends, organizations are likely to give serious thought to reconfiguring their supply chains to reduce risks, improve flow, reduce costs and increase profits, and generally increase customer satisfaction.

Risk Management and Resiliency

Risk management involves identifying risks, assessing their likelihood of occurring and their potential impact, and then developing strategies for addressing those risks. Strategies can pertain to risk avoidance, risk reduction, and risk sharing with supply chain partners. Risk avoidance may mean not dealing with suppliers in a certain area, risk reduction can mean replacing unreliable suppliers, and risk sharing can mean contractual arrangements with supply chain partners that spread the risk. Resiliency is the ability of a business to recover from an event that negatively impacts the supply chain. Recovery is a function of the severity of the impact and the plans that are in place to cope with the event. Businesses can reduce, but not eliminate, the need for resiliency by managing risks.

page 662 

The first step in risk management is to identify potential risks. Supply chain risks fall into several categories. One is disruptions, which can come from natural disasters—such as fires, flooding, hurricanes, and the like—that either disrupt shipping or that affect suppliers directly (by damaging production or storage facilities) or indirectly (by impacting access to facilities or impacting employees in other ways). Other disruptions can occur as a result of supplier issues such as labor strife, production problems, and supplier bankruptcy. Another source of risk is quality issues, which can disrupt supplies and may lead to product recalls, liability claims, and negative publicity. Still another risk is the potential for suppliers divulging sensitive information to competitors that weakens a competitive advantage.

Key elements of successful risk management include:

Knowing your suppliers. Mapping the supply chain can be helpful in grasping the scope of the supply chain, identifying suppliers, and seeing if there are any supplier concentrations in first or second tiers of suppliers, which can greatly amplify risk. This might also lead to the desirability of simplifying (shortening) the supply chain.

Providing supply chain visibility. Supply chain visibility means that a major trading partner can connect to any part of its supply chain to access data in real time on inventory levels, shipment status, and similar key information. This requires data sharing.

Developing event-response capability. Event-response capability is the ability to detect and respond to unplanned events such as delayed shipment or a warehouse running low on a certain item. An event management system should have four capabilities: monitoring the system; notifying when certain planned or unplanned events occur; simulating potential solutions when an unplanned event occurs; and measuring the long-term performance of suppliers, transporters, and other supply chain partners.

Event response can mean identifying alternate sources of supply. General operations should also include the ability to deal with unknown disruptions—that is, events that cannot generally be predicted, but which can, if they occur, have an impact on the supply chain. Because these are unknowns, the severity and length of such disruptions are impossible to predict. Consequently, it is important to recognize that unforeseen events could happen, and to have a plan for addressing them should they occur.

Shortening the Supply Chain

As businesses search for ways to reduce transportation time and cost, some are placing more emphasis on using nearby suppliers, storage facilities, and processing centers. Others are finding savings by consolidating their supply chains, as described in the Reading Box.

page 663 

15.3 GLOBAL SUPPLY CHAINS

As businesses increasingly make use of outsourcing and pursue opportunities beyond their domestic markets, their supply chains are becoming increasingly global. For example, product designs often use inputs from around the world, especially when products are sold globally.

As businesses recognize the strategic importance of effective supply chain management, they are also discovering that global supply chains have additional complexities that were either negligible or nonexistent in domestic operations. These complexities include language and cultural differences, currency fluctuations and tariffs, time differences in terms of discussions and travel, armed conflicts, increased transportation costs and lead times, and the increased need for trust and cooperation among supply chain partners. Furthermore, managers must be able to identify and analyze factors that differ from country to country, which can affect the success of the supply chain, including local capabilities; financial, transportation, and communication infrastructures; governmental, environmental, and regulatory issues; and political issues.

These and other factors have made risk management an important aspect of global supply chain management. To compensate for this, some firms have increased the amount of inventory at various points in their supply chains, thereby losing some of the benefits of global sourcing.

Risks can relate to supply (e.g., weather conditions, supplier failure, quality issues, sustainability issues, transportation issues, pirates, and terrorism), costs (e.g., increasing commodity costs), and demand (e.g., decreasing demand, demand volatility, and transportation issues). Still other risks can involve intellectual rights issues, contract compliance issues, competitive pressure, forecasting errors, and inventory management.

A positive factor of globalization has been the set of technological advances in communications: the ability to link operations around the world with real-time information exchange. Consequently, information technology has a key role in integrating operations across global supply chains. Unfortunately, there are some parts of the globe that are still not connected.

15.4 ERP AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Supply chain management that integrates ERP is a formal approach to effectively plan and manage all the resources of a business enterprise. Implementation of ERP involves establishing operating systems and operating performance measurements to enable them to manage business operations and meet business and financial objectives. ERP encompasses supply chain management activities such as planning for demand and managing supply, inventory replenishment, production, warehousing, and transportation. ERP software also plays a key role in centralizing transaction data.

ERP software can provide the ability to coordinate, monitor, and manage a supply chain. It is an integrated system that provides for systemwide visibility of key activities and events in areas such as supplier relationships, performance management, sales and order fulfillment, and customer relationships.

Supplier Relationship Management ERP integrates purchasing, receiving, information about vendor ratings and performance, lead times, quality, electronic funds disbursements, simplifying processes, and enabling analysis of those processes.

Performance Management This aspect of ERP pulls together information on costs and profits, productivity, quality performance, and customer satisfaction.

Sales and Order Fulfillment ERP includes the ability to provide inventory and quality management, track returns, and schedule and monitor production, packaging, and distribution. Reports can provide information on order and inventory status, delivery dates, and logistics performance.

page 664 

Customer Relationship Management An ERP system not only centralizes basic contact information, details on contracts, payment terms, credit history, and shipping preferences, it also provides information on purchasing patterns, service, and returns.

15.5 ETHICS AND THE SUPPLY CHAIN

There are many examples of unethical behavior involving supply chains. They include bribing government or company officials to secure permits or favorable status; “exporting smokestacks” to developing countries; claiming a “green” supply chain when in reality the level of “green” is only minimal; ignoring health, safety, and environmental standards; violating basic rights of workers (e.g., paying substandard wages; using sweatshops, forced labor, or child labor); mislabeling country of origin; and selling goods abroad that are banned at home.

Every company should develop an ethical supply chain code to guide behavior. A code should cover behaviors that involve customers, suppliers, suppliers’ behaviors, contract negotiation, recruiting, and the environmental issues.

A major risk of unethical behavior is that when such behavior is exposed in the media, consumers tend to blame the major company or brand in the supply chain associated with the ethical infractions that were actually committed by legally independent companies in the supply chain. The problem is particularly difficult to manage when supply chains are global, as they often are in manufacturing operations. Unfortunately, many companies lack the ability to quickly contact most or all of the companies in their supply chain, and communicate with suppliers on critical issues of ethics and compliance. Although monitoring of supply chain activities is essential, it is only one aspect of maintaining an ethical supply chain. With global manufacturing and distribution, supply chain scrutiny should include all supply chain activities from purchasing, manufacturing, assembly, and transportation, to service and repair operations, and eventually to the proper disposal of products at the end of their useful life.

Key steps companies can take to reduce the risk of damages due to unethical supplier behavior are to choose those that have a reputation for good ethical behavior; incorporate compliance with labor standards in supplier contracts; develop direct, long-term relationships with ethical suppliers; and address quickly any problems that occur.

An ethical and sustainable global supply chain has fair wages, good working conditions, gender equality, and does nothing to harm workers or the environment.

15.6 SMALL BUSINESSES

Small businesses do not always give adequate attention to their supply chains. However, there are many benefits to be had for small businesses by actively managing their supply chains, including increased efficiencies, reduced costs, reduced risks, and increased profits. And size can actually be a competitive advantage for small businesses because they frequently are more agile than larger companies, enabling them to make decisions and changes more quickly when the need arises.

Three aspects of supply chain management that are often of concern to small businesses are:

  • Inventory management

  • Reducing risks

  • International trade

Inventories can be an issue for small businesses. They may carry extra inventory as a way to avoid shortages due to supply chain interruptions. However, that can tie up capital and take up space. An alternative is to have backup suppliers for critical items. Similarly, having backups for delivery from suppliers and deliveries to customers can help overcome disruptions. page 665Because it can take a fair amount of time to set up accounts, it is prudent to have these systems in place before they are needed to maintain operations.

Another area that often needs attention is risk management. The key to reducing risks is managing suppliers. Important steps are:

  • Use only reliable suppliers

  • Determine which suppliers are critical; get to know them, and any challenges they have

  • Measure supplier performance (e.g., quality, reliability, flexibility)

  • Recognize warning signs of supplier issues (e.g., late deliveries, incomplete orders, quality problems)

  • Have plans in place to manage supply chain problems

Exporting can offer opportunities for small business producers to greatly expand their businesses, although they typically lack the knowledge to do so, which can cause unforeseen problems. For instance, exporting nonconforming goods or packaging can result in shipments being held up at a port of entry, which can be costly and time-consuming, and can lead to dissatisfied customers.

Importing can have benefits for small businesses. The Small Business Administration has some tips for using foreign suppliers: 3

  • Work with someone who has expertise to help oversee foreign suppliers, preferably someone who spends a good deal of time in that country. Also, a licensed customs broker can help with laws and regulations, necessary documents, and working with importers and exporters.

  • Describe your buying patterns and schedules to set expectations for demand and timing.

  • Don’t rely on a single supplier; a backup supplier can reduce risk and provide bargaining leverage.

  • Building goodwill can have benefits in negotiations and resolving problems when they arise.

  • Consider using domestic suppliers if the risks or other issues with foreign suppliers are formidable. Advantages can involve lower shipping times and costs, closer interactions with suppliers, and increased agility.

15.7 MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES

Generally speaking, corporate management responsibilities have legal, economic, and ethical aspects. Legal responsibilities include being knowledgeable about laws and regulations of the countries where supply chains exist, obeying the laws, and operating to conform to regulations. Economic responsibilities include supplying products and services to meet demand as efficiently as possible. Ethical responsibilities include conducting business in ways that are consistent with the moral standards of society.

page 666 

More specific areas of responsibility relate to organizational strategy, tactics, and operations.

Strategic Responsibilities

Top management has certain strategic responsibilities that have a major impact on the success not only of supply chain management but also of the business itself. These strategies include:

Supply chain strategy alignment: Aligning supply and distribution strategies with organizational strategy and deciding on the degree to which outsourcing will be employed.

Network configuration: Determining the number and location of suppliers, warehouses, production/operations facilities, and distribution centers.

Information technology: Integrating systems and processes throughout the supply chain to share information, including forecasts, inventory status, tracking of shipments, and events. This is often more difficult to achieve with small suppliers than with large suppliers..

Products and services: Making decisions on new product and services selection and design.

Capacity planning: Assessing long-term capacity needs, including when and how much will be needed and the degree of flexibility to incorporate.

Strategic partnerships: Partnership choices, level of partnering, and degree of formality.

Distribution strategy: Deciding whether to use centralized or decentralized distribution, and deciding whether to use the organization’s own facilities and equipment for distribution or to use third-party logistics providers.

Uncertainty and risk reduction: Identifying potential sources of risk and deciding the amount of risk that is acceptable.

Key Tactical and Operational Responsibilities

The key tactical and operational responsibilities are outlined in Table 15.1.

TABLE 15.1

Key tactical and operational responsibilities

Tactical Responsibilities

Forecasting: Prepare and evaluate forecasts.

Sourcing: Choose suppliers and some make-or-buy decisions.

Operations planning: Coordinate the external supply chain and internal operations.

Managing inventory: Jointly decide with suppliers where in the supply chain to store the various types of inventory (raw materials, semi-finished goods, finished goods).

Transportation planning: Match capacity with demand.

Collaborating: Work with supply chain partners to coordinate plans.

Operational Responsibilities

Scheduling: Short-term scheduling of operations and distribution.

Receiving: Management of inbound deliveries from suppliers.

Transforming: Conversion of inputs into outputs.

Order fulfilling: Linking production resources and/or inventory to specific customer orders.

Managing inventory: Maintenance and replenishment activities.

Shipping: Management of outbound deliveries to distribution centers and/or customers.

Information sharing: Exchange of information with supply chain partners.

Controlling: Control of quality, inventory, and other key variables and implementing corrective action, including variation reduction, when necessary.

page 667 

15.8 PROCUREMENT

The purchasing department of an organization is responsible for obtaining the materials, parts, supplies, and services needed to produce a product or provide a service. You can get some idea of the importance of purchasing when you consider that, in manufacturing, upwards of 60 percent of the cost of finished goods comes from purchased parts and materials. Furthermore, the percentages for purchased inventories are even higher for retail and wholesale companies, sometimes exceeding 90 percent. Nonetheless, the importance of purchasing is more than just the cost of goods purchased; other important factors include the quality of goods and services and the timing of deliveries of goods or services, both of which can have a significant impact on operations.

Among the duties of purchasing are identifying sources of supply, negotiating contracts, maintaining a database of suppliers, obtaining goods and services that meet or exceed operations requirements in a timely and cost-efficient manner, and managing suppliers.

Purchasing Interfaces

Purchasing has interfaces with a number of other functional areas, as well as with outside suppliers. It is the connecting link between the organization and its suppliers. In this capacity, it exchanges information with suppliers and functional areas. The interactions between purchasing and these other areas are briefly summarized in the following paragraphs.

Operations constitute the main source of requests for purchased materials, and close cooperation between these units and the purchasing department is vital if quality, quantity, and delivery goals are to be met. Cancellations, changes in specifications, or changes in quantity or delivery times must be communicated immediately for purchasing to be effective.

The purchasing department may require the assistance of the legal department in contract negotiations, in drawing up bid specifications for nonroutine purchases, and in helping interpret legislation on pricing, product liability, and contracts with suppliers.

Accounting is responsible for handling payments to suppliers and must be notified promptly when goods are received in order to take advantage of possible discounts. In many firms, data processing is handled by the accounting department, which keeps inventory records, checks invoices, and monitors vendor performance.

Design and engineering usually prepare material specifications, which must be communicated to purchasing. Because of its contacts with suppliers, purchasing is often in a position to pass information about new products and materials improvements on to design personnel. Also, design and purchasing people may work closely to determine whether changes in specifications, design, or materials can reduce the cost of purchased items (see the following section on value analysis).

Receiving checks incoming shipments of purchased items to determine whether quality, quantity, and timing objectives have been met, and it moves the goods to temporary storage. Purchasing must be notified when shipments are late; accounting must be notified when shipments are received so that payments can be made; and both purchasing and accounting must be apprised of current information on continuing vendor evaluation.

Suppliers or vendors work closely with purchasing to learn what materials will be purchased and what kinds of specifications will be required in terms of quality, quantity, and deliveries. Sometimes this involves new suppliers instead of existing suppliers. Purchasing must rate vendors on cost, reliability, and so on (see the later section on vendor analysis). Good supplier relations can be important on rush orders and changes, and vendors provide a good source of information on product and material improvements.

Figure 15.3 depicts the purchasing interfaces.

image

The Purchasing Cycle

The purchasing cycle begins with a request from within the organization to purchase material, equipment, supplies, or other items from outside the organization, and the cycle ends when the purchasing department is notified that a shipment has been received in satisfactory condition. The main steps in the cycle are these:

page 668 

  1. Purchasing receives the requisition. The requisition includes ( a) a description of the item or material desired, ( b) the quantity and quality necessary, ( c) desired delivery dates, and ( d) who is requesting the purchase.

  2. Purchasing selects a supplier. The purchasing department must identify suppliers who have the capability of supplying the desired goods. If no suppliers are currently listed in the files, new ones must be sought. Vendor ratings may be referred to in choosing among vendors, or perhaps rating information can be relayed to the vendor with the thought of upgrading future performance.

  3. Purchasing places the order with a vendor. If the order involves a large expenditure, particularly for a one-time purchase of equipment, for example, vendors will usually be asked to bid on the job, and operating and design personnel may be asked to assist in negotiations with a vendor. Large-volume, continuous-usage items may be covered by blanket purchase orders, which often involve annual negotiation of prices with deliveries subject to request throughout the year. Moderate-volume items may also have blanket purchase orders, or they may be handled on an individual basis. Small purchases may be handled directly between the operating unit requesting a purchased item and the supplier, although some control should be exercised over those purchases so they don’t get out of hand.

  4. Monitoring orders. Routine follow-up on orders, especially large orders or those with lengthy lead times, allows the purchasing department to project potential delays and relay that information to the operating units. Conversely, the purchasing department must communicate changes in quantities and delivery needs of the operating units to suppliers to allow them time to change their plans.

  5. Receiving orders. Receiving must check incoming shipments for quality and quantity. It must notify purchasing, accounting, and the operating unit that requested the goods. If the goods are not satisfactory, they may have to be returned to the supplier or subjected to further inspection.

Centralized versus Decentralized Purchasing

Purchasing can be centralized or decentralized. Centralized purchasing means that purchasing is handled by one special department. Decentralized purchasing means that individual departments or separate locations handle their own purchasing requirements.

page 669 

Centralized purchasing may be able to obtain lower prices than decentralized units if the higher volume created by combining orders enables it to take advantage of quantity discounts offered on large orders. Centralized purchasing may also be able to obtain better service and closer attention from suppliers. In addition, centralized purchasing often enables companies to assign certain categories of items to specialists, who tend to be more efficient because they are able to concentrate their efforts on relatively few items instead of spreading themselves across many items.

Decentralized purchasing has the advantage of awareness of differing “local” needs and being better able to respond to those needs. Decentralized purchasing usually can offer quicker response than centralized purchasing. Where locations are widely scattered, decentralized purchasing may be able to save on transportation costs by buying locally, which has the added attraction of creating goodwill in the community.

Some organizations manage to take advantage of both centralization and decentralization by permitting individual units to handle certain items while centralizing purchases of other items. For example, small orders and rush orders may be handled locally or by departments, while centralized purchases would be used for high-volume, high-value items for which discounts are applicable or specialists can provide better service than local buyers or departments.

Ethics in Purchasing

Ethical behavior is important in all aspects of business. This is certainly true in purchasing, where the temptations for unethical behavior can be enormous. Buyers often hold great power, and salespeople are often eager to make a sale. Unless both parties act in an ethical manner, the potential for abuse is very real. Furthermore, with increased globalization, the challenges are particularly great because a behavior regarded as customary in one country might be regarded as unethical in another country.

The National Association of Purchasing Management has established a set of guidelines for ethical behavior. (See Table 15.2.) This list offers some insight into the scope of ethics issues in purchasing.

TABLE 15.2

Guidelines for ethical behavior in purchasing

PRINCIPLES

Integrity in Your Decisions and Actions

Value for Your Employer

Loyalty to Your Profession

STANDARDS

  1. Perceived Impropriety. Prevent the intent and appearance of unethical or compromising conduct in relationships, actions, and communications.

  2. Conflicts of Interest. Ensure that any personal, business, or other activity does not conflict with the lawful interests of your employer.

  3. Issues of Influence. Avoid behaviors or actions that may negatively influence, or appear to influence, supply management decisions.

  4. Responsibilities to Your Employer. Uphold fiduciary and other responsibilities using reasonable care and granted authority to deliver value to your employer.

  5. Supplier and Customer Relationships. Promote positive supplier and customer relationships.

  6. Sustainability and Social Responsibility. Champion social responsibility and sustainability practices in supply management.

  7. Confidential and Proprietary Information. Protect confidential and proprietary information.

  8. Reciprocity. Avoid improper reciprocal agreements.

  9. Applicable Laws, Regulations, and Trade Agreements. Know and obey the letter and spirit of laws, regulations, and trade agreements applicable to supply management.

  10. Professional Competence. Develop skills, expand knowledge, and conduct business that demonstrates competence and promotes the supply management profession.

Source: Principles and Standards of Ethical Supply Management Conduct, The Institute of Supply Management, January 2012

page 670 

15.9 E-BUSINESS

E-business refers to the use of electronic technology to facilitate business transactions. E-business, or e-commerce, involves the interaction of different business organizations, as well as the interaction of individuals with business organizations. Applications include internet buying and selling, e-mail, order and shipment tracking, and electronic data interchange. In addition, companies use e-business to promote their products or services, and to provide information about them. Delivery firms have seen the demand for their services increase dramatically due to e-business. Among them are giants UPS and FedEx. In addition, some companies such as Amazon and Walmart are handling some of their own deliveries.

Table 15.3 lists some of the numerous advantages of e-business.

TABLE 15.3

Advantages of e-business

Companies and publishers have a global presence and the customer has global choices and easy access to information.

Companies can improve competitiveness and quality of service by allowing access to their services any place, any time. Companies also have the ability to monitor customers’ choices and requests electronically.

Companies can analyze the interest in various products based on the number of hits and requests for information.

Companies can collect detailed information about clients’ preferences, which enables mass customization and personalized products. An example is the purchase of PCs over the web, where the buyer specifies the final configuration.

Supply chain response times are shortened. The biggest impact is on products that can be delivered directly on the web, such as forms of publishing and software distribution.

The roles of the intermediary and sometimes the traditional retailer or service provider are reduced or eliminated entirely in a process called disintermediation. This process reduces costs and adds alternative purchasing options.

Substantial cost savings and substantial price reductions related to the reduction of transaction costs can be realized. Companies that provide purchasing and support through the web can save significant personnel costs.

E-commerce allows the creation of virtual companies that distribute only through the web, thus reducing costs. Amazon.com and other net vendors can afford to sell for a lower price because they do not need to maintain retail stores and, in many cases, warehouse space.

The playing field is leveled for small companies that lack significant resources to invest in infrastructure and marketing.

Source: Reprinted by permission from David Simchi-Levi, Philip Kaminsky, and Edith Simchi-Levi, Designing and Managing the Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies, and Case Studies (New York: Irwin/McGraw-Hill, 2000), p. 235.

There are two essential features of e-business: the website or an app, and order fulfillment. Companies may invest considerable time and effort in front-end design of a website, or employ apps, but the back end (order fulfillment) is at least as important. It involves order processing, billing, inventory management, warehousing, packing, shipping, and delivery.

Many of the problems that occur with internet selling are supply related. The ability to order quickly creates an expectation in customers that the remainder of the process will proceed smoothly and quickly. But the same capability that enables quick ordering also enables demand fluctuations that can inject a certain amount of chaos into the system, almost guaranteeing that there won’t be a smooth or quick delivery. Oftentimes, the rate at which orders come in via the internet greatly exceeds an organization’s ability to fulfill them, leading to customer dissatisfaction.

In the early days of internet selling, many organizations thought they could avoid bearing the costs of holding inventories by acting solely as intermediaries, having their suppliers ship directly to their customers. Although this approach worked for some companies, it failed for others, usually because suppliers ran out of certain items. This led some companies to rethink the strategy. Industry giants such as Amazon.com and Barnesandnoble.com built huge warehouses around the country so they could maintain greater control over their inventories. And Amazon handles much of this for smaller sellers. Still others are outsourcing fulfillment, turning over that portion of their business to third-party fulfillment operators such as former catalog fulfillment company Fingerhut, now a unit of Federated Department Stores.

page 671 

Using third-party fulfillment means losing control over fulfillment. It might also result in fulfillers substituting their standards for the company they are serving, and using the fulfiller’s shipping price structure. On the other hand, an e-commerce company may not have the resources or infrastructure to do the job itself. Another alternative might be to form a strategic partnership with a bricks-and-mortar company. This can be a quick way to jump-start an e-commerce business. In any case, somewhere in the supply chain there has to be a bricks-and-mortar facility.

A growing portion of e-business involves business-to-business (B2B) commerce. To facilitate business-to-business commerce, B2B marketplaces are created. Table 15.4 describes B2B marketplace enablers.

TABLE 15.4

B2B marketplace enablers

Type

Description

Financial

Provide financial and other resources for web-enhanced commerce.

Technology

Provide software, applications, and expertise necessary to create B2B marketplace.

Source: Adapted from Forbes, July 17, 2000.

B2B exchanges can improve supply chain visibility to trading partners from a single point of access, facilitating the development of common standards and data formats for schedules, product codes, location codes, and performance criteria. And e-businesses focusing on transportation services can benefit from having an efficient hub for collaboration between shippers and transportation providers, helping to translate customer shipment forecasts into more predictable demand for equipment, and enabling carriers to deploy their equipment more effectively.

15.10 SUPPLIER MANAGEMENT

Reliable and trustworthy suppliers are a vital link in an effective supply chain. Timely deliveries of goods or services and high quality are just two of the ways suppliers can contribute to effective operations. A purchasing manager may function as an “external operations manager,” working with suppliers to coordinate supplier operations and buyer needs.

In this section, various aspects of supplier management are described, including supplier audits, supplier certification, and supplier partnering. The section starts with an aspect that can have important ramifications for the entire organization: choosing suppliers.

Choosing Suppliers

In many respects, choosing a vendor involves taking into account many of the same factors associated with making a major purchase (e.g., a car or stereo system). A company considers price, quality, the supplier’s reputation, past experience with the supplier, and service after the sale. The main difference is that a company, because of the quantities it orders and operations requirements, often provides suppliers with detailed specifications of the materials or parts it wants instead of buying items off the shelf, although most organizations buy standard items that way. The main factors a company takes into account when it selects a vendor are outlined in Table 15.5.

TABLE 15.5

Choosing a supplier

Factor

Typical Questions

Quality and quality assurance

What procedures does the supplier have for quality control and quality assurance?

Are quality problems and corrective actions documented?

Flexibility

How flexible is the supplier in handling changes in delivery schedules, quantity, and product or service changes?

Location

Is the supplier nearby?

Price

Are prices reasonable given the entire package the supplier will provide?

Is the supplier willing to negotiate prices?

Is the supplier willing to cooperate to reduce costs?

Product or service changes

How much advance notification does the supplier require for product or service changes?

Reputation and financial stability

What is the reputation of the supplier?

How financially stable is the supplier?

Lead times and on-time delivery

What lead times can the supplier provide?

What procedures does the supplier have for assuring on-time deliveries?

What procedures does the supplier have for documenting and correcting problems?

Other accounts

Is the supplier heavily dependent on other customers, causing a risk of giving priority to those needs over ours?

Because different factors are important for different situations, purchasing must decide, with the help of operations, the importance of each factor (i.e., how much weight to give to each factor), and then rate potential vendors according to how well they can be expected to perform against this list. This process is called vendor analysis , and it is conducted periodically, or whenever there is a significant change in the weighting assigned to the various factors.

Supplier Audits

Periodic audits of suppliers are a means of keeping current on suppliers’ production (or service) capabilities, quality and delivery problems and resolutions, and suppliers’ performance on other criteria. If an audit reveals problem areas, a buyer can attempt to find a solution page 672before more serious problems develop. Among the factors typically covered by a supplier audit are management style, quality assurance, materials management, the design process used, process improvement policies, and procedures for corrective action and follow-up.

Supplier audits are also an important first step in supplier certification programs.

Supplier Certification

Supplier certification is a detailed examination of the policies and capabilities of a supplier. The certification process verifies that a supplier meets or exceeds the requirements of a buyer. This is generally important in supplier relationships, but it is particularly important when buyers are seeking to establish a long-term relationship with suppliers. Certified suppliers are sometimes referred to as world class suppliers. One advantage of using certified suppliers is that the buyer can eliminate much or all of the inspection and testing of delivered goods. And although problems with supplier goods or services might not be totally eliminated, there is much less risk than with noncertified suppliers.

Rather than develop their own certification programs, some companies rely on standard industry certifications such as ISO 9000, perhaps the most widely used international certification.

Supplier Relationship Management

Purchasing has the ultimate responsibility for establishing and maintaining good supplier relationships. The type of relationship is often related to the length of a contract between buyers and sellers. Short-term contracts involve competitive bidding. Companies post specifications and potential suppliers bid on the contracts. Suppliers are kept at arm’s length, and the relationship is minimal. Business may be conducted through computerized interaction. Medium-term contracts often involve ongoing relationships. Long-term contracts often evolve into partnerships, with buyers and sellers cooperating on various issues that tend to benefit both parties. Increasingly, business organizations are establishing long-term relationships with suppliers in certain situations that are based on strategic considerations.

Some business organizations use supplier forums to educate potential suppliers about the organization’s policies and requirements and to enhance opportunities for receiving contracts. page 673Others use supplier forums to share information, strengthen cooperation, and encourage joint thinking. And some organizations use a supplier code of conduct that requires suppliers to maintain safe working conditions, treat workers with respect and dignity, and have production processes that do not harm workers, customers, or the environment.

Business organizations are becoming increasingly aware of the importance of building good relationships with their suppliers. In the past, too many firms regarded their suppliers as adversaries and dealt with them on that basis. One lesson learned from the Japanese is that numerous benefits derive from good supplier relations, including supplier flexibility in terms of accepting changes in delivery schedules, quality, and quantities. Moreover, suppliers can often help identify problems and offer suggestions for solving them. Thus, simply choosing and switching suppliers on the basis of price is a very shortsighted approach to handling an ongoing need.

Keeping good relations with suppliers is increasingly recognized as an important factor in maintaining a competitive edge. Many companies are adopting a view of suppliers as partners. This viewpoint stresses a stable relationship with relatively few reliable suppliers who can provide high-quality supplies, maintain precise delivery schedules, and remain flexible relative to changes in productive specifications and delivery schedules. A comparison of the contrasting views of suppliers is provided in Table 15.6.

TABLE 15.6

Supplier as adversary versus supplier as partner

Aspect

Adversary

Partner

Number of suppliers

Many; play one off against the others

One or a few

Length of relationship

May be brief

Long-term

Low price

Major consideration

Moderately important

Reliability

May not be high

High

Openness

Low

High

Quality

May be unreliable; buyer inspects

At the source; vendor certified

Volume of business

May be low due to many suppliers

High

Flexibility

Relatively low

Relatively high

Location

Widely dispersed

Nearness is important for short lead times and quick service

Supplier Partnerships

More and more business organizations are seeking to establish partnerships with other organizations in their supply chains. This implies fewer suppliers, longer-term relationships, sharing of information (forecasts, sales data, problem alerts), and cooperation in planning. Among the possible benefits are higher quality, increased delivery speed and reliability, lower inventories, lower costs, higher profits, and, in general, improved operations.

There are a number of obstacles to supplier partnerships, not the least of which is that because many of the benefits go to the buyer, suppliers may be hesitant to enter into such relationships. Suppliers may have to increase their investment in equipment, which might put a strain on cash flow. Another possibility is that the cultures of the buyer and supplier might be quite different and not lend themselves to such an arrangement.

Strategic Partnering

Strategic partnering occurs when two or more business organizations that have complementary products or services that would strategically benefit the others agree to join so that each may realize a strategic benefit. One way this occurs is when a supplier agrees to hold inventory for a customer, thereby reducing the customer’s cost of holding the inventory, in exchange for the customer’s agreeing to a long-term commitment, thereby relieving the supplier of the costs that would be needed to continually find new customers, negotiate prices and services, and so on.

page 674 

Collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment (CPFR) is a contractual agreement used to achieve supply chain integration by cooperative management of inventory in the supply chain by major supply chain partners. It involves information sharing, forecasting, and joint decision making. If done well, it can lead to cost savings on inventory, logistics, and merchandising for the partners.

15.11 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Inventories are a key component of supply chains. Although inventory management is discussed in more detail in several other chapters, certain aspects of inventory management are particularly important for supply chain management. They relate to the location of inventories in the supply chain, the speed at which inventory moves through the supply chain, and dealing with the effect of demand variability on inventories.

The location of inventories is an important factor for effective material flow through the chain and for order fulfillment. Often, trade-offs must be made. One approach is to use centralized inventories, which generally results in lower overall inventory than there would be if decentralized inventories were used, because with decentralized inventories, one location may be understocked, while another location is overstocked. Conversely, decentralized locations can provide faster delivery and generally lower shipping costs.

The rate at which material moves through a supply chain is referred to as inventory velocity . The greater the velocity, the lower the inventory holding costs and the faster orders are filled and goods are turned into cash.

Without careful management, demand variations can easily cause inventory fluctuations to get out of control. Variations in demand at the consumer end of a supply chain tend to ripple backward through the chain. Moreover, periodic ordering and reaction to shortages can magnify variations, causing inventories to oscillate in increasingly larger swings. This is known as the bullwhip effect , because the pattern of demand variation is analogous to the motion of a bullwhip in response to a slight jerking of the handle. Consequently, shortages and surpluses occur throughout the chain, resulting in higher costs and lower customer satisfaction, unless preventive action is taken. The bullwhip effect is illustrated in Figure 15.4.

image

The causes of inventory variability can be not only demand variability but also factors such as quality problems, labor problems, unusual weather conditions, and delays in shipments of goods. Adding to this can be communication delays, incomplete communications, and lack of coordination of activities among organizations in the supply chain.

Still other factors can contribute to the bullwhip effect. They include forecast inaccuracies, overreaction to stockouts (customers often order more than they need after experiencing a shortage), order batching to save on ordering and transportation costs (e.g., full truckloads, economic lot sizes), sales incentives, promotions, and quantity discounts, and service and product mix changes, which can create uneven demand patterns and liberal return policies.

Good supply chain management can overcome the bullwhip effect by strategic buffering of inventory, information sharing, and inventory replenishment based on needs. An example of strategic buffering would be holding the bulk of retail inventory at a distribution center rather than at retail outlets. That way, inventories of specific retail outlets can be replenished as needed based on point-of-sale information from retail outlets, as well as information on retail outlet inventories.

page 675 

This is sometimes accomplished using vendor-managed inventory (VMI) . Vendors track goods shipped to distributors and retail outlets, and monitor retail supplies, enabling the vendors to replenish inventories when supplies are low. The practice is common in the retail sector, and is also used in other phases of supply chains. VMI lets companies reduce overhead by shifting responsibility for owning, managing, and replenishing inventory to vendors. Not only do assets decrease, the amount of working capital needed to operate a business also decreases.

15.12 ORDER FULFILLMENT

Order fulfillment refers to the processes involved in responding to customer orders. Fulfillment time can be an important criterion for customers. It is often a function of the degree of customization required. The following are some common approaches:

  • Engineer-to-Order (ETO). With this approach, products are designed and built according to customer specifications. This approach is frequently used for large-scale construction projects, custom homebuilding, home remodeling, and for products made in job shops. The fulfillment time can be relatively lengthy because of the nature of the project, as well as the presence of other jobs ahead of the new one.

  • Make-to-Order (MTO). With this approach, a standard product design is used, but production of the final product is linked to the final customer’s specifications. This approach is used by aircraft manufacturers such as Boeing. Fulfillment time is generally less than with ETO fulfillment, but still fairly long.

  • Assemble-to-Order (ATO). With this approach, products are assembled to customer specifications from a stock of standard and modular components. Computer manufacturers such as Dell operate using this approach. Fulfillment times are fairly short, often a week or less.

    page 676 

  • Make-to-Stock (MTS). With this approach, production is based on a forecast, and products are sold to the customer from finished goods stock. This approach is used in department stores and supermarkets. The order fulfillment time is immediate. A variation of this is e-commerce; although goods have already been produced, there is a lag in fulfillment to allow for shipping.

15.13 LOGISTICS

Logistics refers to the movement of materials, services, cash, and information in a supply chain. Materials include all of the physical items used in a production process. In addition to raw materials and work in process, there are support items such as fuels, equipment, parts, tools, lubricants, office supplies, and more. Logistics includes movement within a facility, overseeing incoming and outgoing shipments of goods and materials, and information flow throughout the supply chain.

Movement within a Facility

Movement of goods within a manufacturing facility is part of production control. Figure 15.5 shows the many steps where materials move within a manufacturing facility:

image
  1. From incoming vehicles to receiving

  2. From receiving to storage

  3. From storage to the point of use (e.g., a work center)

  4. From one work center to the next or to temporary storage

  5. From the last operation to final storage

  6. From storage to packaging/shipping

  7. From shipping to outgoing vehicles

page 677 

In some instances, the goods being moved are supplies; in other instances, the goods are actual products or partially completed products; and in still other instances, the goods are raw materials or purchased parts.

Movement of materials must be coordinated to arrive at the appropriate destinations at appropriate times. Workers and supervisors must take care so that items are not lost, stolen, or damaged during movement.

Incoming and Outgoing Shipments

Overseeing the shipment of incoming and outgoing goods comes under the heading of traffic management . This function handles schedules and decisions on shipping method and times, taking into account costs of various alternatives, government regulations, the needs of the organization relative to quantities and timing, and external factors such as potential shipping delays or disruptions (e.g., highway construction, truckers’ strikes).

Computer tracking of shipments often helps to maintain knowledge of the current status of shipments, as well as to provide other up-to-date information on costs and schedules.

Getting to the Right Location

GPS navigation continues to be a valuable asset for deliveries, both to customers and to businesses, guiding drivers or autonomous vehicles to the right location. And cloud-based software helps companies plan efficient routes and delivery schedules. The benefits include efficient routes with less driving time, a reduction in mileage and fuel costs, avoidance of traffic congestion and road closures, and the ability of companies to track their vehicles. Some even enable identifying aggressive driver behavior. GPS navigation is also a valuable asset to service technicians such as plumbers and electricians, emergency services, food delivery, and car services such as Uber and Lyft.

Tracking Goods: RFID

Advances in technology are revolutionizing the way businesses track goods in their supply chains. Radio frequency identification (RFID) is a technology that uses radio waves to identify objects, such as goods in supply chains. This is done through an RFID tag that is attached to an object. The tag has an integrated circuit and an antenna that project information or other data to network-connected RFID readers using radio waves. RFID tags can be attached to pallets, cases, or individual items. They provide unique identification, enabling businesses to identify, track, monitor, or locate practically any object in the supply chain that is within range of a tag reader. These tags are similar to bar codes, but they have the advantage of conveying much more information, and they do not require a line-of-sight for reading that bar codes must have. And unlike bar codes, which must be scanned individually and usually manually, multiple RFID tags can be read simultaneously and automatically. Furthermore, an RFID tag provides more precise information than a bar code: Tags contain detailed information on each object, whereas bar codes convey only an object’s classification, such as its stockkeeping unit (SKU). This enables management to know where every object is in the supply chain. RFID has the potential to fundamentally change the way companies track inventory and share information, and to dramatically improve the management of supply chains. This technology increases supply chain visibility, improves inventory management, improves quality control, and enhances relationships with suppliers and customers.

page 679 

RFID eliminates the need for manual counting and bar-code scanning of goods at receiving docks, in warehouses, and on retail shelves. This eliminates errors and greatly speeds up the process. Tags could reduce employee and customer theft by placing readers at building exits and in parking lots. Still other advantages include increased accuracy in warehouse “picking” of items for shipping or for use in assembly operations, increased accuracy in dispensing drugs to patients in hospitals, and reduced surgical errors.

RFID may enable small, agile businesses to compete with larger, more bureaucratic businesses that may be slow to adopt this new technology. Conversely, large businesses may be better able to afford the costs involved. These include the costs of the tags themselves, as well as the cost of affixing individual tags, the cost of readers, and the cost of computer hardware and software to transmit and analyze the data generated.

page 680 

The potential benefits for supply chain management are huge, and widespread adoption of RFID technology by retailers and manufacturers is predicted. In order to take advantage of RFID technology, businesses must first assess the capabilities of their existing information systems, then identify where RFID can have the greatest impact, estimate the time and resources that will be needed to implement the new system, estimate the risks and rewards of early versus late adoption, and then decide the best course of action. Important concerns at the retail level relate to privacy concerns if tags are not deactivated after items have been purchased and placement of tags so they do not hide important customer information on products.

Evaluating Shipping Alternatives

Evaluation of shipping alternatives is an important component of supply chain management. Considerations include not only shipping costs, but also coordination of shipments with other supply chain activities, flexibility, speed, and environmental issues. Shipping options can involve trains, trucks, planes, and boats. Relevant factors include cost, time, availability, materials being shipped, and sometimes environmental considerations. At times, options may be limited due to one or more of these factors. For example, heavy materials such as coal and iron ore would not be shipped by plane. High costs in some cases may rule out certain options. Also, time–cost trade-offs can be important. Organizations using a low-cost strategy often opt for slower, lower cost options, whereas organizations using a responsive strategy more often opt for quicker, higher-cost options.

A situation that often arises in some businesses is the need to make a choice between rapid (but more expensive) shipping alternatives, such as overnight or second-day air, and slower (but less expensive) alternatives. In some instances, an overriding factor justifies sending a shipment by the quickest means possible, so there is little or no choice involved. However, in other instances, urgency is not the primary consideration, so there is a choice. The decision in such cases often focuses on the cost savings of slower alternatives versus the incremental holding cost (here, the annual dollar amount that could be earned by the revenue from the item being shipped) that would result from using the slower alternative. An important assumption is that the seller gets paid upon receipt of the goods by the buyer (e.g., through electronic data interchange).

The incremental holding cost incurred by using the slower alternative is computed as

(15–1)

where

page 681 

3-PL

Third-party logistics (3-PL) is the term used to describe the outsourcing of logistics management. According to the website of the Council of Supply Chain Management Professionals, the legal definition of a 3PL is “A person who solely receives, holds, or otherwise transports a consumer product in the ordinary course of business but who does not take title to the product.”

This might involve part or even all of the logistics function. For example, some companies use third-party providers just for shipping, others include warehousing and distribution, and still others rely on third-party companies to manage most or all of their supply chains. Companies are turning over warehousing and distribution to companies that specialize in these areas. Among the potential benefits of this are taking advantage of specialists’ knowledge, their well-developed information system, and their ability to obtain more favorable shipping rates, and enabling the company to focus more on its core business.

15.14 CREATING AN EFFECTIVE SUPPLY CHAIN

Creating an effective supply chain requires a thorough analysis of all aspects of the supply chain. Strategic sourcing is a term sometimes used to describe the process. Strategic sourcing is a systematic process for analyzing the purchase of products and services to reduce costs by reducing waste and non-value-added activities, increase profits, reduce risks, and improve supplier performance. Strategic sourcing differs from more traditional sourcing in that it emphasizes total cost rather than purchase price. Total cost includes storage costs, repair costs, disposal costs, and sustainability costs in addition to purchase price. It also seeks to consolidate purchasing power to achieve lower prices, relies on fewer suppliers and collaborative relationships, works to eliminate redundancies, and employs cross-functional teams to help overcome traditional organizational barriers.

page 682 

Strategic sourcing looks at current procurement in terms of what is bought, where and from what suppliers it is bought, and what other sources of supply are available; a sourcing strategy then is designed to minimize a combination of costs and risks. The goal is to have a cooperative relationship among supply chain partners that will facilitate planning and coordination of activities. It is essential for major trading partners to trust each other and to feel confident that partners share similar goals and will take actions that are mutually beneficial. The process is repeated periodically. A system for tracking results and making changes when needed is also established.

The SCOR ® (Supply Chain Operations Reference) model ( www.supply-chain.org/SCOR) provides steps that can be used to create an effective supply chain:

  1. Plan. Develop a strategy for managing all the resources that go into meeting expected customer demand for a product or service, including a set of metrics to monitor the supply chain.

  2. Source. Select suppliers that will provide the goods and services needed to create products or support services. Also, develop a system for delivery, receiving, and verifying shipments or services. Structure payment along with metrics for monitoring and, if necessary, improving relationships.

  3. Make. Design the processes necessary for providing services or producing, testing, and packaging goods. Monitor quality, service levels or production output, and worker productivity.

  4. Deliver. Establish systems for coordinating receipt of shipments from vendors; develop a network of warehouses; select carriers to transport goods to customers; set up an invoicing system to receive payments; and devise a communication system for two-way flow of information among supply chain partners.

  5. Manage returns. Create a responsive and flexible network for receiving defective and excess products from customers.

Achieving an effective supply chain requires integration of all aspects of the supply chain. Three important aspects of this are effective communication, the speed with which information moves through the supply chain, and having performance metrics.

Effective communication. Effective supply chain communication requires integrated technology and standardized ways and means of communicating among partners.

Information velocity. Information velocity is important; the faster information flows (two-way), the better.

Performance metrics. Performance metrics are necessary to confirm that the supply chain is functioning as expected, or that there are problems that must be addressed. A variety of measures can be used, which relate to such things as late deliveries, inventory turnover, response time, quality issues, and so on. In the retail sector, the fill rate (the percentage of demand filled from stock on hand) is often very important.

Table 15.7 lists some other key performance measures.

TABLE 15.7

Supply chain performance measures

Financial

Operations

Order fulfillment

Return on assets

Cost

Cash flow

Profits

Productivity

Quality

Order accuracy

Time to fill orders

Percentage of incomplete orders shipped

Percentage of orders delivered on time

Suppliers

Inventory

Customers

Quality

On-time delivery

Cooperation

Flexibility

Average value

Turnover

Weeks of supply

Customer satisfaction

Percentage of customer complaints

page 683 

Managing Returns

Products are returned to companies or third-party handlers for a variety of reasons, and in a variety of conditions. Among them are the following:

  • Defective products

  • Recalled products

  • Obsolete products

  • Unsold products returned from retailers

  • Parts replaced in the field

  • Items for recycling

  • Waste

The importance of returns is underscored by the fact that in the United States, the annual value of returns is estimated to be in the neighborhood of $100 billion. In the past, most items—except unsold products—were typically discarded. More recently, companies are recognizing that substantial value can be reclaimed from returned items. For example, defective parts can be repaired or replaced, and products can be resold as reconditioned. Obsolete products may have usable parts or subassemblies, or they may have value in other markets. Parts replaced in the field may in fact not be defective at all; it is estimated that about a third of such parts are not defective and may be reusable as “reconditioned” replacement parts. Recyclable items can be sold to recyclers and might be usable for energy production; other waste and unusable products and parts might require disposal according to sometimes stringent guidelines. For example, governments, particularly in Europe, are increasingly enacting legislation making original manufacturers responsible for acquiring and disposing of their products at the end of their products’ useful lives.

To make a determination as to the appropriate disposition of returned items, the items must be sorted, inspected, or tested and directed to the appropriate destination for repair and reuse, recycling, or disposal. Often, transportation is required. Reverse logistics is the process of physically transporting returned items. This involves either retrieving items from the field or moving items from the point of return to a facility where they will be inspected and sorted and then transporting them to their final destination.

page 684 

Two key elements of managing returns are gatekeeping and avoidance. Gatekeeping oversees the acceptance of returned goods with the intent of reducing the cost of returns by screening returns at the point of entry into the system and refusing to accept goods that should not be returned, or goods that are returned to the wrong destination. Effective gatekeeping enables organizations to control the rate of returns without negatively impacting customer service. Avoidance refers to finding ways to minimize the number of items returned. It can involve product design and quality assurance. It may also involve monitoring forecasts during promotional programs to avoid overestimating demand to minimize returns of unsold product.

The condition of returned products, as well as the timing of returns, may vary, making it difficult to plan for the reverse flow. On the other hand, returns can provide valuable information, such as how and why failures occurred, which can improve product quality and/or product design and minimize future returns for that reason. They can also help identify some sources of customer dissatisfaction, which can have design benefits.

page 685 

It is likely that the importance of this aspect of supply chain management will grow due to shortened product life cycles, increasing returns from increasing internet commerce sales from dissatisfied customers, replacement of consumer electronics that are in working order as newer models become available, pressures on manufacturers to reduce costs, and increasing consumer and government environmental concerns. The term closed-loop supply chain is used to describe a situation where a manufacturer controls both the forward and reverse logistics.

Challenges

The often dynamic supply chain environment and the complexity of supply chains can make managing them very challenging.

Barriers to Integration of Separate Organizations. Organizations, and their functional areas, have traditionally had an inward focus. They set up buffers between themselves and their suppliers. Changing that attitude can be difficult. The objective of supply chain management is to be efficient across the entire supply chain.

One difficulty in achieving this objective is that different components of the supply chain often have conflicting objectives. For example, to reduce their inventory holding costs, some companies opt for frequent small deliveries of supplies. This can result in increased holding costs for suppliers, so the cost is merely transferred to suppliers. Similarly, within an organization, functional areas often make decisions with a narrow focus, doing things that “optimize” results under their control; in so doing, however, they may suboptimize results for the overall organization. To be effective, organizations must adopt a systems approach to both the internal and external portions of their supply chains, being careful to make decisions that are consistent with optimizing the supply chain.

Another difficulty is that for supply chain management to be successful, organizations in the chain must allow other organizations access to their data. There is a natural reluctance to do this in many cases. One reason can be lack of trust; another can be unwillingness to share proprietary information in general; and another can be that an organization, as a member of multiple chains, fears exposure of proprietary information to competitors.

Getting CEOs, Boards of Directors, Managers, and Employees “Onboard.” CEOs and boards of directors need to be convinced of the potential payoffs from supply chain management. And because much of supply chain management involves a change in the way business has been practiced for an extended period of time, getting managers and workers to adopt new attitudes and practices that are consistent with effective supply chain operations poses a real challenge.

Making the Supply Chain More Efficient.

  1. Large vs. small lot sizes. Compare the benefits and costs of large lots (quantity discounts and lower setup costs, but larger carrying costs) with the benefits and risks of small lots (agility, the possibility of shorter lead times from not needing to wait for production of larger lot quantities, and lower carrying costs, but increased risk of stockouts). Note, too, that use of large lots can contribute to the bullwhip effect.

  2. Saving cost and time by using cross-docking. Cross-docking is a technique whereby goods arriving at a warehouse from a supplier are unloaded from the supplier’s truck and immediately loaded on one or more outbound trucks, thereby avoiding storage at the warehouse completely. Walmart is among the companies that have used this technique successfully to reduce inventory holding costs and lead times.

  3. Increase the perception of variety while taking advantage of the benefits of low variety by using delayed differentiation. Delayed differentiation involves producing standard components and subassemblies, and then delaying until late in the process to add differentiating features. For example, an automobile producer may allow dealers to add (or subtract) certain features for customers, increasing the appeal of vehicles while reducing the need to maintain large inventories of vehicles to be able to satisfy different customer wants. Similarly, a bakery can produce “standard” cakes that can be decorated (e.g., Happy Birthday Baby!) according to a customer’s specifications.

    page 686 

  4. Ship directly to the customer to reduce waiting time. One approach to reducing the time customers must wait for their orders is to ship directly from a warehouse to the customer, bypassing a retail outlet. Another approach used by some supermarkets is to have employees do the shopping based on customer orders. This may include delivery to the customer, or provide for customer pickup of an order. When one or more steps in a supply chain are eliminated, that is referred to as disintermediation . Aside from reducing waiting time, storage costs are avoided, although delivery costs are higher. Allowing store pickups can reduce transportation costs.

Small Businesses. Small businesses may be reluctant to embrace supply chain management because it can involve specialized, complicated software, as well as sharing sensitive information with outside companies. Nonetheless, in order for them to survive, they may have to do so.

Variability and Uncertainty. Variations create uncertainty, thereby causing inefficiencies in a supply chain. Variations occur in incoming shipments from suppliers, internal operations, deliveries of products or services to customers, and customer demands. Increases in product and service variety add to uncertainty, because organizations have to deal with a broader range and frequent changes in operations. Hence, when deciding to increase variety, organizations should consider this trade-off.

Although variations exist throughout most supply chains, decision makers often treat the uncertainties as if they were certainties and make decisions on that basis. In fact, systems are often designed on the basis of certainty, so they may not be able to cope with uncertainty. Unfortunately, uncertainties are detrimental to effective management of supply chains because they result in various undesirable occurrences, such as inventory buildups, bottleneck delays, missed delivery dates, and frustration for employees and customers at all stages of a supply chain.

Response Time. Response time is an important issue in supply chain management. Long lead times impair the ability of a supply chain to quickly respond to changing conditions, such as changes in the quantity or timing of demand, changes in product or service design, and quality or logistics problems. Similarly, long delivery lead times can be a competitive disadvantage. Therefore, it is important to work to reduce long product lead times, long collaborative lead times, and long delivery lead times. Also, a plan should be in place to deal with problems when they arise.

15.15 STRATEGY

Effective supply chains are critical to the success of business organizations. Development of supply chains should be accorded strategic importance. Achieving an effective supply chain requires integration of all aspects of the chain. Supplier relationships are a critical component of supply chain management. Collaboration and joint planning and coordination are keys to supply chain success. In that regard, a systems view of the supply chain is essential.

Many businesses are employing principles of lean operations and six sigma methodology to improve supply chain performance. However, lean supply chains can increase supply chain risk and may necessitate increased inventories to offset those risks.

1 James J. Corbett, James J. Winebrake, Erin H. Green, Prasad Kasibhatla, Veronika Eyring, and Axel Lauer, “Mortality from Ship Emissions: A Global Assessment,” Environmental Science & Technology 41, no. 24 (December 15, 2007), pp. 8512–18.

2 Deloitte Survey: “Executives Face Growing Threats to Their Supply Chains.” New York: Press release, February 7, 2013.

3 U.S. Small Business Administration, “5 Tips for Managing an Efficient Global Supply Chain,” Small Business Operations, March 12, 2013.

page 692 

page 693 

Airline travel can be difficult when flights are delayed or canceled due to weather problems. And even though it may be clear and dry in some areas, flights in those places can still be affected by weather in other areas. Because of all the interdependencies, a problem in one area, especially around major hub airports like Chicago, Atlanta, and New York, has a cascading effect with impacts throughout the nation. This results in massive scheduling problems. Flight arrivals and departures have to be rescheduled, which then means flight crews, terminal gates, connections, and baggage and freight also must be rescheduled. Airline and air traffic control software scheduling systems include and optimize thousands of variables.

16.1 SCHEDULING OPERATIONS

Scheduling tasks are largely a function of the volume of system output for both production and service systems. High-volume systems require approaches substantially different from those required by job shops, and project scheduling requires still different approaches. In this chapter, we will consider scheduling for high-volume systems, intermediate-volume systems, and low-volume (job shop) scheduling. Project scheduling is discussed in Chapter 17.

Scheduling in High-Volume Systems

Scheduling encompasses allocating workloads to specific work centers and determining the sequence in which operations are to be performed. High-volume systems are characterized by standardized equipment and activities that provide identical or highly similar operations on customers or products as they pass through the system. The goal is to obtain a smooth rate of flow of goods or customers through the system in order to get a high utilization of labor and equipment. High-volume systems, where jobs follow the same sequence, are often referred to page 695as flow systems ; scheduling in these systems is referred to as flow-shop scheduling , although flow-shop scheduling also can be used in medium-volume systems. Examples of high-volume products include autos, smartphones, radios and televisions, office supplies, toys, and appliances. In process industries, examples include petroleum refining, sugar refining, mining, waste treatment, and the manufacturing of fertilizers. Examples of services include cafeteria lines, news broadcasts, and mass inoculations. Because of the highly repetitive nature of these systems, many of the loading and sequence decisions are determined during the design of the system. The use of highly specialized tools and equipment, arrangement of equipment, use of specialized material-handling equipment, and division of labor are all designed to enhance the flow of work through the system, because all items follow virtually the same sequence of operations.

A major aspect in the design of flow systems is line balancing, which concerns allocating the required tasks to workstations so that they satisfy technical (sequencing) constraints and are balanced with respect to equal work times among stations. Highly balanced systems result in the maximum utilization of equipment and personnel, as well as the highest possible rate of output. Line balancing was discussed in Chapter 6.

In setting up flow systems, designers must consider the potential discontent of workers in connection with the specialization of job tasks in these systems; high work rates are often achieved by dividing the work into a series of relatively simple tasks assigned to different workers. The resulting jobs tend to be boring and monotonous and may give rise to fatigue, absenteeism, turnover, and other problems, all of which tend to reduce productivity and disrupt the smooth flow of work. These problems and potential solutions were elaborated on in Chapter 7, which deals with the design of work systems.

In spite of the built-in attributes of flow systems related to scheduling, a number of scheduling problems remain. One stems from the fact that few flow systems are completely devoted to a single product or service; most must handle a variety of sizes and models. Thus, an automobile manufacturer will assemble many different combinations of cars—two-door and four-door models, some with air-conditioning and some not, some with deluxe trim and others with standard trim, some with CD players, some with tinted glass, and so on. The same can be said for producers of appliances, electronic equipment, and toys. Each change involves slightly different inputs of parts, materials, and processing requirements that must be scheduled into the line. If the line is to operate smoothly, a supervisor must coordinate the flow of materials and the work, which includes the inputs, processing, and outputs, as well as purchases. In addition to achieving a smooth flow, it is important to avoid excessive buildup of inventories. Again, each variation in size or model will tend to have somewhat different inventory requirements, so that additional scheduling efforts will be needed.

One source of scheduling concern is possible disruptions in the system that result in less than the desired output. These can be caused by equipment failures, material shortages, accidents, and absences. In practice, it is usually impossible to increase the rate of output to compensate for these factors, mainly because flow systems are designed to operate at a given rate. Instead, strategies involving subcontracting or overtime are often page 696required, although subcontracting on short notice is not always feasible. Sometimes work that is partly completed can be made up off the line.

The reverse situation can also impose scheduling problems, although these are less severe. This happens when the desired output is less than the usual rate. However, instead of slowing the ensuing rate of output, it is usually necessary to operate the system at the usual rate, but for fewer hours. For instance, a production line might operate temporarily for seven hours a day instead of eight.

High-volume systems usually require automated or specialized equipment for processing and handling. Moreover, they perform best with a high, uniform output. Shutdowns and startups are generally costly, and especially costly in process industries. Consequently, the following factors often determine the success of such a system:

  • Process and product design. Here, cost and manufacturability are important, as is achieving a smooth flow through the system.

  • Preventive maintenance. Keeping equipment in good operating order can minimize breakdowns that would disrupt the flow of work.

  • Rapid repair when breakdowns occur. This can require specialists, as well as stocks of critical spare parts.

  • Optimal product mixes. Techniques such as linear programming can be used to determine optimal blends of inputs to achieve desired outputs at minimal costs. This is particularly true in the manufacture of fertilizers, animal feeds, and diet foods.

  • Minimization of quality problems. Quality problems can be extremely disruptive, requiring shutdowns while problems are resolved. Moreover, when output fails to meet quality standards, not only is there the loss of output but also a waste of the labor, material, time, and other resources that went into it.

  • Reliability and timing of supplies. Shortages of supplies are an obvious source of disruption and must be avoided. On the other hand, if the solution is to stockpile supplies, that can lead to high carrying costs. Shortening supply lead times, developing reliable supply schedules, and carefully projecting needs are all useful.

Scheduling in Intermediate-Volume Systems

Intermediate-volume system outputs fall between the standardized type of output of the high-volume systems and made-to-order output of job shops. Like the high-volume systems, intermediate-volume systems typically produce standard outputs. If manufacturing is involved, the products may be for stock rather than for special order. However, the volume of output in such cases is not large enough to justify continuous production. Instead, it is more economical to process these items intermittently. Thus, intermediate-volume work centers periodically shift from one job to another. In contrast to a job shop, the run (batch) sizes are relatively large. Examples of products made in these systems include canned foods, baked goods, paint, and cosmetics.

The three basic issues in these systems are the run size of jobs, the timing of jobs, and the sequence in which jobs should be processed.

Sometimes, the issue of run size can be determined by using a model such as the economic run size model discussed in Chapter 12 on inventory management. The run size that would minimize setup and inventory costs is

(16–1)

Setup cost may be an important consideration. Setup costs may depend on the order in which jobs are processed; similar jobs may require less setup change between them. For example, jobs in a print shop may be sequenced by ink color to reduce the number of setups needed. This opens up the possibility of reducing setup cost and time by taking processing sequence into account. It also makes sequencing more complex, and it requires estimating job setup costs for every sequence combination.

page 697 

In another vein, companies are working to reduce setup times and, hence, experience less downtime for equipment changeover. Tactics include offline setups, snap-on parts, modular setups, and flexible equipment designed to handle a variety of processing requirements.

Another difficulty arises because usage is not always as smooth as assumed in the model. Some products will tend to be used up faster than expected and have to be replenished sooner. Also, because multiple products are to be processed, it is not always possible to schedule production to correspond with optimum run times.

Another approach frequently used is to base production on a master schedule developed from customer orders and forecasts of demand. Companies engaged in assembly operations would then use an MRP approach (described in Chapter 13) to determine the quantity and projected timing of jobs for components. The manager would then compare projected requirements with projected capacity and develop a feasible schedule from that information. Companies engaged in producing processed rather than assembled goods (e.g., food products, such as canned goods and beverages; publishing, such as magazines; paints and cleaning supplies) would use a somewhat different approach; the time-phasing information provided by MRP would not be an important factor.

16.2 SCHEDULING IN LOW-VOLUME SYSTEMS

The characteristics of low-volume systems (job shops) are considerably different from those of high- and intermediate-volume systems. Recall that job shops include hospital emergency rooms, repair shops, tool and die shops, and the like. Products are made to order, and services are performed according to need. Orders usually differ considerably in terms of processing requirements, materials needed, processing time, and processing sequence and setups. Because of these circumstances, job-shop scheduling can sometimes be fairly complex. This is compounded by the impossibility of establishing firm schedules prior to receiving the actual jobs.

Job-shop processing gives rise to two important issues for schedulers: how to distribute the workload among work centers and what job processing sequence to use.

Loading

Loading refers to the assignment of jobs to processing (work) centers. Loading decisions involve assigning specific jobs to work centers and to various machines in the work centers. In cases where a job can be processed only by a specific center, loading presents little difficulty. However, problems arise when two or more jobs are to be processed and there are a number of work centers capable of performing the required work. In such cases, the operations manager needs some way of assigning jobs to the centers.

When making assignments, managers often seek an arrangement that will minimize processing and setup costs, minimize idle time among work centers, or minimize job completion time, depending on the situation.

Gantt Charts. Visual aids called Gantt charts are used for a variety of purposes related to loading and scheduling. They derive their name from Henry Gantt, who pioneered the use of charts for industrial scheduling in the early 1900s. Gantt charts can be used in a number of different ways, two of which are illustrated in Figure 16.2, which shows scheduling classrooms for a university and scheduling hospital operating rooms for a day.

image

The purpose of Gantt charts is to organize and visually display the actual or intended use of resources in a time framework. In most cases, a time scale is represented horizontally, and resources to be scheduled are listed vertically. The use and idle times of resources are reflected in the chart.

Managers may use the charts for trial-and-error schedule development to get an idea of what different arrangements would involve. Thus, a tentative surgery schedule might reveal insufficient allowance for surgery that takes longer than expected and can be revised accordingly. Use of the chart for classroom scheduling would help avoid assigning two different classes to the same room at the same time.

There are a number of different types of Gantt charts. Two of the most commonly used are the load chart and the schedule chart.

page 698 

A load chart depicts the loading and idle times for a group of machines or a list of departments. Figure 16.3 illustrates a typical load chart. This chart indicates that work center 3 is completely loaded for the entire week, center 4 will be available from Tuesday to Friday, and the other two centers have idle time scattered throughout the week. This information can help a manager rework loading assignments to better utilize the centers. For instance, if all centers perform the same kind of work, the manager might want to free one center for a long job or a rush order. The chart also shows when certain jobs are scheduled to start and finish, and where to expect idle time.

image

Two different approaches are used to load work centers: infinite loading and finite loading. Infinite loading assigns jobs to work centers without regard to the capacity of the work center. As you can see in the diagram that follows, this can lead to overloads in some time periods and underloads in others. The priority sequencing rules described in this chapter use infinite loading. One possible result of infinite loading is the formation of queues in some (or all) work centers. That requires a second step to correct the imbalance. Finite loading projects actual job starting and stopping times at each work center, taking into account the capacities of each work center and the processing times of jobs, so that capacity is not exceeded. One output of finite loading is a detailed projection of hours each work center will operate. Schedules based on finite loading may have to be updated often, perhaps daily, due to processing delays at work centers and the addition of new jobs or cancellation of current jobs. The following diagram illustrates these two approaches.

page 699 

With infinite loading, a manager may need to make some response to overloaded work centers. Among the possible responses are shifting work to other periods or other centers, working overtime, or contracting out a portion of the work. Note that the last two options in effect increase capacity to meet the workload.

Finite loading may reflect a fixed upper limit on capacity. For example, a bus line will have only so many buses. Hence, the decision to place into service a particular number of buses fixes capacity. Similarly, a manufacturer might have one specialized machine that it operates around the clock. Thus, it is operated at the upper limit of its capacity, so finite loading would be called for.

There are two general approaches to scheduling—forward scheduling and backward scheduling. Forward scheduling means scheduling ahead from a point in time; backward scheduling means scheduling backward from a job’s due date. Forward scheduling is used if the issue is “How long will it take to complete this job?” Backward scheduling would be used if the issue is “When is the latest the job can be started and still be completed by the due date?” Forward scheduling enables the scheduler to determine the earliest possible completion time for each job and, thus, the amount of lateness or the amount of slack can be determined. That information can be combined with information from other jobs in setting up a schedule for all current jobs.

page 700 

A manager often uses a schedule chart to monitor the progress of jobs. The vertical axis on this type of Gantt chart shows the orders or jobs in progress, and the horizontal axis shows time. The chart indicates which jobs are on schedule and which are behind or ahead.

A typical schedule chart is illustrated in Figure 16.4. It shows the current status of a landscaping job with planned and actual starting and finishing times for the five stages of the job. The chart indicates that approval and the ordering of trees and shrubs was on schedule. The site preparation was a bit behind schedule. The trees were received earlier than expected, and planting is ahead of schedule. However, the shrubs have not yet been received. The chart indicates some slack between scheduled receipt of shrubs and shrub planting, so if the shrubs arrive by the end of the week, it appears the schedule can still be met.

image

Despite the obvious benefits of Gantt charts and the fact that they are widely used, they possess certain limitations, the chief one being the need to repeatedly update a chart to keep it current. In addition, a chart does not directly reveal costs associated with alternative loadings. Finally, a job’s processing time may vary depending on the work center; certain stations or work centers may be capable of processing some jobs faster than other stations. Again, that situation would increase the complexity of evaluating alternative schedules.

In addition to Gantt charts, managers often rely on input/output reports to manage work flow.

Input/Output Control. Input/output (I/O) control refers to monitoring the work flow and queue lengths at work centers. The purpose of I/O control is to manage work flow so that queues and waiting times are kept under control. Without I/O control, demand may exceed processing capacity, causing an overload at a center. Conversely, work may arrive slower than the rate a work center can handle, leaving the work center underutilized. Ideally, a balance can be struck between the input and output rates, thereby achieving effective use of work center capacities without experiencing excessive queues at the work centers. A simple example of I/O control is the use of stoplights on some expressway on-ramps. These regulate the flow of entering traffic according to the current volume of expressway traffic.

Figure 16.5 illustrates an input/output report for a work center. A key portion of the report is the backlog of work waiting to be processed. The report also reveals deviations-from-planned for both inputs and outputs, thereby enabling a manager to determine possible sources of problems.

image

The deviations in each period are determined by subtracting “planned” from “actual.” For example, in the first period, subtracting the planned input of 100 hours from the actual input of 120 hours produces a deviation of +20 hours. Similarly, in the first period, the planned and actual outputs are equal, producing a deviation of 0 hours.

The backlog for each period is determined by subtracting the “actual output” from the “actual input” and adjusting the backlog from the previous period by that amount. For example, in the second period, actual output exceeds actual input by 10 hours. Hence, the previous backlog of 50 hours is reduced by 10 hours to 40 hours.

Another approach that can be used to assign jobs to resources is the assignment method.

page 701 

Assignment Method of Linear Programming. The assignment model is a special-purpose linear programming model that is useful in situations that call for assigning tasks or other work requirements to resources. Typical examples include assigning jobs to machines or workers, territories to salespeople, and repair jobs to repair crews. The idea is to obtain an optimum matching of tasks and resources. Commonly used criteria include costs, profits, efficiency, and performance.

Table 16.1 illustrates a typical problem, where four jobs are to be assigned to four workers. The problem is arranged in a format that facilitates evaluation of assignments. The numbers in the body of the table represent the value or cost associated with each job-worker combination. In this case, the numbers represent costs. Thus, it would cost $8 for worker A to do job 1, $6 for worker B to do job 1, and so on. If the problem involved minimizing the cost for job 1 alone, it would clearly be assigned to worker C, because that combination has the lowest cost. However, that assignment does not take into account the other jobs and their costs, which is important because the lowest-cost assignment for any one job may not be consistent with a minimum-cost assignment when all jobs are considered.

TABLE 16.1

A typical assignment problem showing job times for each job/worker combination

If there are to be n matches, there are n! different possibilities. In this case, there are 4! = 24 different matches. One approach is to investigate each match and select the one with the lowest cost. However, if there are 12 jobs, there would be 479 million different matches! A much simpler approach is to use a procedure called the Hungarian method to identify the lowest-cost solution.

To be able to use the Hungarian method, a one-for-one matching is required. Each job, for example, must be assigned to only one worker. It is also assumed that every worker is capable of handling every job, and that the costs or values associated with each assignment combination are known and fixed (i.e., not subject to variation). The number of rows and columns must be the same. Solved Problem 1 at the end of the chapter shows what to do if they aren’t the same.

Once the relevant cost information has been acquired and arranged in tabular form, the basic procedure of the Hungarian method is as follows:

  1. Subtract the smallest number in each row from every number in the row. This is called a row reduction. Enter the results in a new table.

  2. Subtract the smallest number in each column of the new table from every number in the column. This is called a column reduction. Enter the results in another table.

  3. Test whether an optimum assignment can be made. You do this by determining the minimum number of lines (horizontal or vertical) needed to cross out (cover) all zeroes. If the number of lines equals the number of rows, an optimum assignment is possible. In that case, go to step 6. Otherwise, go on to step 4.

    page 702 

  4. If the number of lines is less than the number of rows, modify the table in this way:

    1. Subtract the smallest uncovered number from every uncovered number in the table.

    2. Add the smallest uncovered number to the numbers at intersections of cross-out lines.

    3. Numbers crossed out but not at intersections of cross-out lines carry over to the next table.

  5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until an optimal table is obtained.

  6. Make the assignments. Begin with rows or columns with only one zero. Match items that have zeroes, using only one match for each row and each column. Eliminate both the row and the column after the match.

page 704 

As you can see, the process is relatively simple. The simplicity of the Hungarian method belies its usefulness when the assumptions are met. Not only does it provide a rational method for making assignments, it guarantees an optimal solution, often without the use of a computer, which is necessary only for fairly large problems. When profits instead of costs are involved, the profits can be converted to relative costs by subtracting every number in the table from the largest number and then proceeding as in a minimization problem.

It is worth knowing that one extension of this technique can be used to prevent undesirable assignments. For example, union rules may prohibit one person’s assignment to a particular job, or a manager might wish to avoid assigning an unqualified person to a job. Whatever the reason, specific combinations can be avoided by assigning a relatively high cost to that combination. In the previous example, if we wish to avoid combination 1-A, assigning a cost of $50 to that combination will achieve the desired effect, because $50 is much greater than the other costs.

Sequencing

Although loading decisions determine the machines or work centers that will be used to process specific jobs, they do not indicate the order in which the jobs waiting at a given work center are to be processed. Sequencing is concerned with determining job processing order. Sequencing decisions determine both the order in which jobs are processed at various work centers and the order in which jobs are processed at individual workstations within the work centers.

If work centers are lightly loaded and if jobs all require the same amount of processing time, sequencing presents no particular difficulties. However, for heavily loaded work centers, especially in situations where relatively lengthy jobs are involved, the order of processing can be very important in terms of costs associated with jobs waiting for processing and in terms of idle time at the work centers. In this section, we will examine some of the ways in which jobs are sequenced.

Typically, a number of jobs will be waiting for processing. Priority rules are simple heuristics used to select the order in which the jobs will be processed. Some of the most common are listed in Table 16.3. The rules generally rest on the assumption that job setup cost and time are independent of processing sequence. In using these rules, job processing times and due dates are important pieces of information. Job time usually includes setup and processing times. Jobs that require similar setups can lead to reduced setup times if the sequencing rule takes this into account (the rules described here do not). Due dates may be the result of delivery times promised to customers, material requirements planning (MRP) processing, or managerial decisions. They are subject to revision and must be kept current to give meaning to sequencing choices. Also, it should be noted that due dates associated with all rules except slack per operation (S/O) and critical ratio (CR) are for the operation about to be performed; due dates for S/O and CR are typically final due dates for orders rather than intermediate, departmental deadlines.

TABLE 16.3

Possible priority rules

First come, first served (FCFS): Jobs are processed in the order in which they arrive at a machine or work center.

Shortest processing time (SPT): Jobs are processed according to processing time at a machine or work center, shortest job first.

Earliest due date (EDD): Jobs are processed according to due date, earliest due date first.

Critical ratio (CR): Jobs are processed according to smallest ratio of time remaining until due date to processing time remaining.

Slack per operation (S/O): Jobs are processed according to average slack time (time until due date minus remaining time to process). Compute by dividing slack time by number of remaining operations, including the current one.

Rush: Emergency or preferred customers first.

The priority rules can be classified as either local or global. Local priority rules take into account information pertaining only to a single workstation; global priority rules take into account information pertaining to multiple workstations. First come, first served (FCFS), shortest processing time (SPT), and earliest due date (EDD) are local rules; CR and S/O are global rules. Rush can be either local or global. As you might imagine, global rules require more effort than local rules. A major complication in global sequencing is that not all jobs require page 705the same processing or even the same order of processing. As a result, the set of jobs is different for different workstations. Local rules are particularly useful for bottleneck operations, but they are not limited to those situations.

A number of assumptions apply when using the priority rules; Table 16.4 lists them. In effect, the priority rules pertain to static sequencing: For simplicity, it is assumed there is no variability in either setup or processing times, or in the set of jobs. The assumptions make the scheduling problem manageable. In practice, jobs may be delayed or canceled, and new jobs may arrive, requiring schedule revisions.

TABLE 16.4

Assumptions of priority rules

The set of jobs is known; no new jobs arrive after processing begins; and no jobs are canceled.

Setup time is independent of processing sequence.

Setup time is deterministic.

Processing times are deterministic rather than variable.

There will be no interruptions in processing such as machine breakdowns, accidents, or worker illness.

The effectiveness of any given sequence is frequently judged in terms of one or more performance measures. The most frequently used performance measures follow:

  • Job flow time is the amount of time it takes from when a job arrives until it is complete. It includes not only actual processing time but also any time waiting to be processed, transportation time between operations, and any waiting time related to equipment breakdowns, unavailable parts, quality problems, and so on. The average flow time for a group of jobs is equal to the total flow time for the jobs divided by the number of jobs. Flow time is the cumulative sum of job times. It is a job’s time plus the sum of all preceding job times. Total flow time is equal to the sum of the cumulative job flow times. For example, if there are three jobs, each with a time of 10 minutes, the flow time of the first job is 10 minutes, the flow time of the second job is 10 + 10 = 20 minutes, and the flow time of the third job is 20 + 10 = 30 minutes. The total flow time for the three jobs is then 10 + 20 + 30 = 60 minutes.

  • Job lateness is the amount of time the job completion date is expected to exceed the date the job was due or promised to a customer. It is the difference between the actual completion time and the due date. If only differences for jobs with completion times that exceed due dates are recorded, and zeroes are assigned to jobs that are early, the term used is job tardiness.

  • Makespan is the total time needed to complete a group of jobs. It is the length of time between the start of the first job in the group and the completion of the last job in the group. If processing involves only one work center, makespan will be the same regardless of the priority rule being used.

  • Average number of jobs. Jobs that are in a shop are considered to be work-in-process inventory. The average work-in-process for a group of jobs can be computed using the following formula:

    If the jobs represent equal amounts of inventory, the average number of jobs will also reflect the average work-in-process inventory.

Of the priority rules, rush scheduling is quite simple and needs no explanation. The other rules and performance measures are illustrated in the following two examples.

TABLE 16.6

Comparison of the four rules for Example 2

Rule

Average Flow Time (days)

Average Tardiness (days)

Average Number of Jobs at the Work Center

FCFS

20.00

9.00

2.93

SPT

18.00

6.67

2.63

EDD

18.33

6.33

2.68

CR

22.17

9.67

3.24

In Example 2, the SPT rule was the best according to two of the measures of effectiveness and a little worse than the EDD rule on average tardiness. The CR rule was the worst in every case. For a different set of numbers, the EDD rule (or perhaps another rule not mentioned here) might prove superior to SPT in terms of average job tardiness or some other measure of effectiveness. However, SPT is always superior in terms of minimizing flow time and, hence, in terms of minimizing the average number of jobs at the work center and completion time. This results in faster job completion, which has the potential to generate more revenue.

Generally speaking, the FCFS rule and the CR rule turn out to be the least effective of the rules.

The primary limitation of the FCFS rule is that long jobs will tend to delay other jobs. If a process consists of work on a number of machines, machine idle time for downstream workstations will increase. However, for service systems in which customers are directly involved, the FCFS rule is by far the dominant priority rule, mainly because of the inherent fairness, but also because of the inability to obtain realistic estimates of processing time for individual jobs. The FCFS rule also has the advantage of simplicity. If other measures are important when there is high customer contact, companies may adopt the strategy of moving processing to the “backroom” so they don’t necessarily have to follow FCFS.

Because the SPT rule always results in the lowest (i.e., optimal) average completion (flow) time, it can result in lower in-process inventories. And because it often provides the lowest (optimal) average tardiness, it can result in better customer service levels. Finally, because it always involves a lower average number of jobs at the work center, there tends to be less congestion in the work area. SPT also minimizes downstream idle time. However, due dates are often uppermost in managers’ minds, so they may not use SPT because it doesn’t incorporate due dates.

The major disadvantage of the SPT rule is that it tends to make long jobs wait, perhaps for rather long times (especially if new, shorter jobs are continually added to the system). That can be troubling if long jobs are from the company’s best customers. Various modifications may be used in an effort to avoid this. For example, after waiting for a given time period, any remaining jobs are automatically moved to the head of the line. This is known as the truncated SPT rule.

page 710 

The EDD rule directly addresses due dates and minimizes lateness. Although it has intuitive appeal, its main limitation is that it does not take processing time into account. One possible consequence is that it can result in some jobs waiting a long time, which adds to both in-process inventories and shop congestion.

The CR rule is easy to use and has intuitive appeal. Although it had the poorest showing in Example 2 for all three measures, it usually does quite well in terms of minimizing job tardiness. Therefore, if job tardiness is important, the CR rule might be the best choice among the rules.

Let’s take a look now at the S/O (slack per operation) rule.

Using the S/O rule, the designated job sequence may change after any given operation, so if that happened, it would be necessary to reevaluate the sequence after each operation. Note that any of the previously mentioned priority rules could be used on a station-by-station basis for this situation; the only difference is that the S/O approach incorporates downstream information in arriving at a job sequence.

In reality, many priority rules are available to sequence jobs, and some other rule might provide superior results for a given set of circumstances. The purpose in examining these few rules is to provide insight into the nature of sequencing rules. Each shop or organization should consider carefully its own circumstances and the measures of effectiveness it feels are important, when selecting a rule to use.

The following section describes a special-purpose algorithm that can be used to sequence a set of jobs that must all be processed at the same two machines or work centers.

page 711 

Sequencing Jobs through Two Work Centers 1

Johnson’s rule is a technique that managers can use to minimize the makespan for a group of jobs to be processed on two machines or at two successive work centers (sometimes referred to as a two-machine flow shop). 2 It also minimizes the total idle time at the work centers. For the technique to work, several conditions must be satisfied:

  • Job time (including setup and processing) must be known and constant for each job at each work center.

  • Job times must be independent of the job sequence.

  • All jobs must follow the same two-step work sequence.

  • A job must be completed at the first work center before the job moves on to the second work center.

Application of Johnson’s rule begins with a listing of all jobs to be scheduled, and how much time will be required by each job at each workstation. The sequence is determined by following these steps:

  1. Select the job with the shortest time. If the shortest time is at the first work center, schedule that job first; if the time is at the second work center, schedule the job last. Break ties arbitrarily.

  2. Eliminate the job and its time from further consideration.

  3. Repeat steps 1 and 2, working toward the center of the sequence, until all jobs have been scheduled.

Successful application of these steps identifies the sequence with the minimum makespan, or when all work is completed as soon as possible. However, precisely when a certain job will be completed (its flow time) or when idle time will occur is not apparent by inspecting the sequence. To determine such detailed performance information, it is generally easiest to create a Gantt chart illustrating the finished sequence, as demonstrated in Example 4.

When significant idle time at the second work center occurs, job splitting at the first center just prior to the occurrence of idle time may alleviate some of it and also shorten throughput time. In Example 4, this is not a concern. The last solved problem at the end of this chapter illustrates the use of job splitting.

Sequencing Jobs When Setup Times Are Sequence-Dependent

The preceding discussion and examples assumed that machine setup times are independent of processing order, but in many instances that assumption is not true. Consequently, a manager may want to schedule jobs at a workstation taking those dependencies into account. The goal is to minimize total setup time.

Consider the following table, which shows workstation machine setup times based on job processing order. For example, if job A is followed by job B, the setup time for B will be six hours. Furthermore, if job A is completed first, followed by job B, job C will then follow job B and have a setup time of four hours. If a job is done first, its setup time will be the amount shown in the setup time column to the right of the job. Thus, if job A is done first, its setup time will be three hours.

The simplest way to determine which sequence will result in the lowest total setup time is to list each possible sequence and determine its total setup time. In general, the number of different alternatives is equal to n!, where n is the number of jobs. Here, n is 3, so n! = 3 × 2 × 1 = 6. The six alternatives and their total setup times are as follows:

Sequence

SetupTimes Total

A-B-C

3 + 6 + 4 = 13

A-C-B

3 + 2 + 3 = 8

B-A-C

2 + 1 + 2 = 5 (best)

B-C-A

2 + 4 + 5 = 11

C-A-B

2 + 5 + 6 = 13

C-B-A

2 + 3 + 1 = 6

Hence, to minimize total setup time, the manager would select sequence B-A-C.

This procedure is relatively simple to do manually when the number of jobs is two or three. However, as the number of jobs increases, the list of alternatives quickly becomes larger. For example, six jobs would have 720 alternatives. In such instances, a manager would employ a computer to generate the list and identify the best alternative(s). (Note that more than one alternative may be tied for the lowest setup time.)

Why Scheduling Can Be Difficult

Scheduling can be difficult for a number of reasons. One is that, in reality, an operation must deal with variability in setup times, processing times, interruptions, and changes in the set of jobs. Another major reason is that, except for small job sets, there is no method page 714for identifying the optimal schedule, and it would be virtually impossible to sort through the vast number of possible alternatives to obtain the best schedule. As a result, scheduling is far from an exact science and, in many instances, is an ongoing task for a manager.

Computer technology reduces the burden of scheduling and makes real-time scheduling possible.

Minimizing Scheduling Difficulties

There are a number of actions that managers can consider to minimize scheduling problems:

  • Setting realistic due dates.

  • Focusing on bottleneck operations: First, try to increase the capacity of the operations. If that is not possible or feasible, schedule the bottleneck operations first, and then schedule the nonbottleneck operations around the bottleneck operations.

  • Considering lot splitting for large jobs. This usually works best when there are relatively large differences in job times. Note that this doesn’t apply to single-unit jobs.

The Theory of Constraints

Another approach to scheduling was developed and promoted by Eli Goldratt. 3 He first described it in his book The Goal. Goldratt avoided much of the complexity often associated with scheduling problems by simply focusing on bottleneck operations (i.e., those for which there was insufficient capacity—in effect, a work center with zero idle time). He reasoned the output of the system was limited by the output of the bottleneck operation(s); therefore, it was essential to schedule the nonbottleneck operations in a way that minimized the idle time of the bottleneck operation(s). Thus, idle time of nonbottleneck operations was not a factor in overall productivity of the system, as long as the bottleneck operations were used effectively. These observations have been refined into a series of scheduling principles that include:

  • An hour lost at a bottleneck operation is an hour lost by the system. The bottleneck operation determines the overall capacity of the system.

  • Saving time through improvements of a nonbottleneck will not increase the ultimate output of the system.

  • Activation of a resource is not the same as utilization of a resource. Because a nonbottleneck operation is active does not necessarily mean it is being useful.

These principles are also the foundation of a specific scheduling technique for intermittent production systems, one that many firms have found simpler and less time-consuming to use than traditional analytical techniques. This technique uses a drum-buffer-rope conceptualization to manage the system. The “drum” is the schedule; it sets the pace of production. The goal is to schedule to make maximum use of bottleneck resources. The “buffer” refers to potentially constraining resources outside of the bottleneck. The role of the buffer is to keep a small amount of inventory ahead of the bottleneck operation to minimize the risk of having it be idle. The “rope” represents the synchronizing of the sequence of operations to ensure effective use of the bottleneck operations. The goal is to avoid costly and time-consuming multiple setups, particularly of capacity-constrained resources, so they do not become bottlenecks too.

page 715 

The drum-buffer-rope approach provides a basis for developing a schedule that achieves maximum output and shorter lead times while avoiding carrying excess inventory. Use of the drum-buffer-rope approach generally results in operations capable of consistent on-time delivery, reduced inventory, and shorter lead times, as well as a reduction in disruptions that require expediting.

Goldratt also developed a system of varying batch sizes to achieve the greatest output of bottleneck operations. He used the term process batch to denote the basic lot size for a job, and the term transfer batch to denote a portion of the basic lot that could be used during production to facilitate utilization of bottleneck operations. In effect, a lot could be split into two or more parts. Splitting a large lot at one or more operations preceding a bottleneck operation would reduce the waiting time of the bottleneck operation.

Traditional management has emphasized maximizing output of every operation. In contrast to that approach, the theory of constraints has as its goal maximizing flow through the entire system, which it does by emphasizing balancing the flow through the various operations. It begins with identifying the bottleneck operation. Next, there is a five-step procedure to improve the performance of the bottleneck operation:

  1. Determine what is constraining the operation.

  2. Exploit the constraint (i.e., make sure the constraining resource is used to its maximum).

  3. Subordinate everything to the constraint (i.e., focus on the constraint).

  4. Determine how to overcome (eliminate) the constraint.

  5. Repeat the process for the next highest constraint.

(Note the similarity to the plan-do-study-act [PDSA] approach discussed in Chapter 9.)

The goal, of course, is to make improvements. The theory of constraints uses three metrics to assess the effectiveness of improvements:

  • Throughput: The rate at which the system generates money through sales (i.e., the contribution margin, or sales revenue less variable costs; labor costs are considered to be part of operating expense)

  • Inventory: Inventory represents money tied up in goods and materials used in a process

  • Operating expense: All the money the system spends to convert inventory into throughput; this includes utilities, scrap, depreciation, and so on

Goldratt’s ideas are applicable to both manufacturing and service environments.

16.3 SCHEDULING SERVICES

Scheduling service systems presents certain problems not generally encountered in manufacturing systems. This is due primarily to (1) the inability to store or inventory services, (2) the random nature of customer requests for service, and (3) the fact that when waiting customers can observe the service, first-come-first served is used even though it isn’t the most efficient system. In some situations, the second difficulty can be moderated by using appointment or reservation systems, but the inability to store services in most cases is a fact of life that managers must contend with.

The approach used to schedule services generally depends on whether customer contact is involved. In back-office operations, where there is little or no customer contact—such as processing mail-order requests, loan approvals, and tax preparation—the same priority rules described in the preceding pages are used. The goal is to maximize worker efficiency, and work is often processed in batches. A key factor can be the due date, say for rush orders, orders where the customer has paid a premium for faster-than-normal delivery. That is similar to the situation that occurs in front-office operations, where there is a high degree of customer contact, and efficiency may become secondary to keeping customer waiting times to reasonable levels, so scheduling the workforce to meet demand becomes a priority. Having too few workers causes waiting lines to form, but having more workers than needed increases labor costs, which can have a substantial impact on profits, particularly in service systems where labor is the major cost involved.

page 716 

An ideal situation is one that has a smooth flow of customers through the system. This would occur if each new customer arrives at the precise instant that the preceding customer’s service is completed, as in a physician’s office, or in air travel if the demand just equals the number of available seats. In each of these situations, customer waiting time would be minimized, and the service system staff and equipment would be fully utilized. Unfortunately, the random nature of customer requests for service that generally prevails in service systems makes it nearly impossible to provide service capability that matches demand. Moreover, if service times are subject to variability—say, because of differing processing requirements—the inefficiency of the system is compounded. The inefficiencies can be reduced if arrivals can be scheduled (e.g., appointments), as in the case of doctors and dentists. However, in many situations, appointments are not possible (supermarkets, gas stations, theaters, hospital emergency rooms, repair of equipment breakdowns). Chapter 18, on waiting lines, focuses on those kinds of situations. There, the emphasis is on intermediate-term decisions related to service capacity. In this section, we will concern ourselves with short-term scheduling, in which much of the capacity of a system is essentially fixed, and the goal is to achieve a certain degree of customer service by efficient utilization of that capacity.

Scheduling in service systems may involve scheduling (1) customers, (2) the workforce, and (3) equipment. Scheduling customers often takes the form of appointment systems or reservation systems.

Appointment Systems

Appointment systems are intended to control the timing of customer arrivals in order to minimize customer waiting while achieving a high degree of capacity utilization. A doctor can use an appointment system to schedule patients’ office visits during the afternoon, leaving the mornings free for hospital duties. Similarly, an attorney can schedule client meetings around court appearances. Even with appointments, however, problems can still arise due to lack of punctuality on the part of patients or clients, no-shows, and the inability to completely control the length of contact time (e.g., a dentist might run into complications in filling a tooth and have to spend additional time with a patient, thus backing up later appointments). Some of this can be avoided by trying to match the time reserved for a patient or client with the specific needs of that case rather than setting appointments at regular intervals. Even with the problems of late arrivals and no-shows, the appointment system is a tremendous improvement over random arrivals.

Reservation Systems

Reservation systems are designed to enable service systems to formulate a fairly accurate estimate of the demand on the system for a given time period and to minimize customer disappointment generated by excessive waiting or an inability to obtain service. Reservation systems are widely used by resorts, hotels and motels, restaurants, and some modes of transportation (e.g., airlines, car rentals). In the case of restaurants, reservations enable management to spread out or group customers so that demand matches service capabilities. Late arrivals and no-shows can disrupt the system. One approach to the no-show problem is to use decision theory (described in the supplement to Chapter 5). The problem also can be viewed as a single-period inventory problem, as described in Chapter 12.

Yield Management

Many companies, especially in the travel and tourist industries, operate with fixed capacities. Examples include hotels and motels, which operate with a fixed number of rooms to rent each night; airlines, which operate with a fixed number of seats to sell on any given flight; and cruise lines, which operate with a fixed number of berths to sell for any given cruise. The number of rooms, seats, or berths can be thought of as perishable inventory. For example, unsold seats on a flight cannot be carried over to the next flight; they are lost. The same is true for hotel rooms and cruise ship cabins. Of course, that unsold inventory does not generate income, so companies with fixed capacities must develop strategies to deal with sales.

page 717 

Yield management is the application of pricing strategies to allocate capacity among various categories of demand with the goal of maximizing the revenue generated by the fixed capacity. Demand for fixed capacity usually consists of customers who make advance reservations and walk-ins. Customers who make advance reservations are typically price-sensitive, while walk-ins are often price-insensitive. Companies must decide on the percentage of their limited inventory to allocate to reservations, trading off lower revenue per unit for increased certainty of sales, and how much to allocate to walk-ins, where demand is less certain but revenue per unit is higher.

The ability to predict demand is critical to the success of yield management, so forecasting plays a key role in the process. Seasonal variations are generally important, so forecasts must incorporate seasonality and plans must also be somewhat flexible to allow for ever-present random variations.

Scheduling the Workforce

Scheduling customers is demand management. Scheduling the workforce is capacity management. This approach works best when demand can be predicted with reasonable accuracy. This is often true for restaurants, theaters, rush-hour traffic, and similar instances that have repeating patterns of intensity of customer arrivals. Scheduling hospital personnel, police, and delivery workers also come under this heading. An additional consideration is the extent to which variations in customer demands can be met with workforce flexibility. Thus, capacity can be adjusted by having cross-trained workers who can be temporarily assigned to help out on bottleneck operations during periods of peak demand.

Various constraints can affect workforce scheduling flexibility, including legal, behavioral, technical—such as workers’ qualifications to perform certain operations—and budget constraints. Union or federal work rules and vacations can make scheduling more complicated.

Cyclical Scheduling

In many services (e.g., hospitals, police departments, fire departments, restaurants, and supermarkets), the scheduling requirements are fairly similar: Employees must be assigned to work shifts or time slots, and have days off, on a repeating or cyclical basis. The following is a method for determining both a schedule and the minimum number of workers needed.

Generally, a basic work pattern is set (e.g., work five consecutive days, have two consecutive days off), and a list of staffing needs for the schedule cycle (usually one week) is given. For example:

A fairly simple but effective approach for determining the minimum number of workers needed is the following: Begin by repeating the staff needs for worker 1. Then,

  1. Make the first worker’s assignment such that the two days with the lowest need (i.e., lowest sum) are designated as days off. Here, Mon–Tues have the two lowest consecutive requirements. Circle those days. (Note, in some instances, Sun–Mon might yield the two lowest days.) In case of a tie, pick the pair with the lowest adjacent requirement day to the left or day to the right. If there is still a tie, pick arbitrarily.

    page 718 

  2. Subtract one from each day’s requirement, except for the circled days. Assign the next employee, again using the two lowest consecutive days as days off. Circle those days.

  3. Repeat the preceding step for each additional worker until all staffing requirements have been met. However, don’t subtract from a value of zero. Note the tie for worker 3: Mon–Tue and Sun–Mon have the lowest consecutive requirements; 4. The Mon–Tue two adjacents are Sun = 3 and Wed = 2, for a total of 5, which is less than the two adjacents for Sun–Mon (Sat = 3 and Tue = 3 for a total of 6). So, circle Mon–Tue requirements for worker 3. Worker 4 also has a tie, and adjacents Sat and Tue total 5, whereas Tue–Fri adjacents total 6, so circle Sun–Mon requirements.

    For Worker 7, circle Wed and Thu 0 0.

    To identify the days each worker is working, go across each worker’s row to find the nonzero values not circled, signifying that the worker is assigned for those days. Similarly, to find the workers assigned to work for any particular day, go down that day’s column to find the nonzero values not circled. Note: Worker 6 will only work three days, and worker 7 will only work one day.

Scheduling Multiple Resources

In some situations, it is necessary to coordinate the use of more than one resource. For example, hospitals must schedule surgeons, operating room staffs, recovery room staffs, admissions, special equipment, nursing staffs, and so on. Educational institutions must schedule faculty, classrooms, audiovisual equipment, and students. As you might guess, the greater the number of resources to be scheduled simultaneously, the greater the complexity and the less likely an optimum schedule can be achieved. The problem is further complicated by the variable nature of such systems. For example, educational institutions frequently change their course offerings, student enrollments change, and students exhibit different course-selection patterns.

Some schools and hospitals are using computer software to assist them in devising acceptable schedules, although many appear to be using intuitive approaches with varying degrees of success.

page 719 

Airlines are another example of service systems that require the scheduling of multiple resources. Flight crews, aircraft, baggage handling equipment, ticket counters, gate personnel, boarding ramps, food service, cleaning, and maintenance personnel all have to be coordinated. Furthermore, government regulations on the number of hours a pilot can spend flying place an additional restriction on the system. Another interesting variable is that, unlike most systems, the flight crews and the equipment do not remain in one location. Moreover, the crew and the equipment are not usually scheduled as a single unit. Flight crews are often scheduled so that they return to their base city every two days or more, and rest breaks must be considered. On the other hand, the aircraft may be in almost continuous use except for periodic maintenance and repairs. Consequently, flight crews commonly follow different trip patterns than that of the aircraft.

Service systems are prone to slowdowns when variability in demand for services causes bottlenecks. Part of the difficulty lies in predicting which operations will become bottlenecks. Moreover, bottlenecks may shift with the passage of time, so that different operations become bottleneck operations—further complicating the problem.

16.4 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

Scheduling can either help or hinder operations strategy. If scheduling is done well, goods or services can be made or delivered in a timely manner. Resources can be used to best advantage and customers will be satisfied. Scheduling not performed well will result in an inefficient use of resources and possibly dissatisfied customers.

The implication is clear: Management should not overlook the important role that scheduling plays in the success of an organization and the supply chain, giving a competitive advantage if done well or a disadvantage if done poorly. Time-based competition depends on good scheduling. Coordination of materials, equipment use, and employee time is an important function of operations management. It is not enough to have good design, superior quality, and the other elements of a well-run organization if scheduling is done poorly—just as it is not enough to own a well-designed and well-made car, with all the latest features for comfort and safety, if the owner doesn’t know how to drive it!

1 For a description of a heuristic that can be used for the case where a set of jobs is to be processed through more than two work centers, see Thomas Vollmann et al., Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems, 5th ed. (New York: Irwin/McGraw-Hill, 2004).

2 S. M. Johnson, “Optimal Two- and Three-Stage Production with Setup Times Included,” Naval Research Quarterly 1 (March 1954), pp. 61–68.

3 Eli Goldratt, The General Theory of Constraints (New Haven, CT: Avraham Y. Institute, 1989).

page 732 

page 733 

17.1 INTRODUCTION

Managers typically oversee a variety of operations. Some of these involve routine, repetitive activities, but others involve nonroutine activities. Under the latter heading are projects : unique, one-time operations designed to accomplish a set of objectives in a limited time frame. Examples of projects include constructing a shopping complex, merging two companies, putting on a play, and designing and running a political campaign. Examples of projects within business organizations include designing new products or services, designing advertising campaigns, designing information systems, reengineering a process, designing databases, software development, and designing web pages.

Projects may involve considerable cost. Some have a long time horizon, and some involve a large number of activities that must be carefully planned and coordinated. Most are expected to be completed based on time, cost, and performance targets. To accomplish this, goals must be established and priorities set. Tasks must be identified and time estimates made. Resource requirements also must be projected and budgets prepared. Once under way, progress must be monitored to assure that project goals and objectives will be achieved.

The project approach enables an organization to focus attention and concentrate efforts on accomplishing a narrow set of performance objectives within a limited time and budget framework. This can produce significant benefits compared with other approaches that might be considered. Even so, projects present managers with a host of problems that differ in many respects from those encountered with more routine activities. The problems of planning and coordinating project activities can be formidable for large projects, which typically have thousands of activities that must be carefully planned and monitored if the project is to proceed according to schedule and at a reasonable cost.

Projects can have strategic importance for organizations. For example, good project management can be instrumental in successfully implementing an enterprise resource planning (ERP) system or converting a traditional operation to a lean operation. And good project management is very important when virtual teams are used.

Table 17.1 provides an overview of project management.

TABLE 17.1

Overview of project management

What is project management? A team-based approach for managing projects.

How is it different from general operations management?

  • Limited time frame

  • Narrow focus; specific objectives

  • Less bureaucratic

When is it used?

  • When there are special needs that don’t lend themselves to functional management

  • When pressures exist for new or improved products or services, as well as cost reduction

What are the key metrics?

  • Time

  • Cost

  • Performance objectives

What are the key success factors?

  • Top-down commitment

  • A respected and capable project manager

  • Enough time to plan

  • Careful tracking and control

  • Good communications

What are the major administrative issues?

  • Executive responsibilities:

    1. Project selection

    2. Selection of a project manager

    3. Organizational structure (To whom will the project manager report?)

  • Organizational alternatives:

    1. Manage within functional unit

    2. Assign a coordinator

    3. Use a matrix organization with a project leader

What are the main tools?

  • Work breakdown structure: An initial planning tool that is needed to develop a list of activities, activity sequences, and a realistic budget

  • Network diagram: A “big picture” visual aid used to estimate project duration, identify activities critical for timely project completion, identify areas where slack time exists, and develop activity schedules

  • Gantt charts: A visual aid used to plan and monitor individual activities

  • Risk management: Analyses of potential failures or problems, assessment of their likelihood and consequences, and contingency plans

17.2 PROJECT LIFE CYCLE

The size, length, and scope of projects vary widely according to the nature and purpose of the project. Nevertheless, all projects have something in common: They go through a life cycle, which typically consists of five phases.

  1. Initiating. This begins the process by outlining the expected costs, benefits, and risks associated with a project. It includes defining the major project goals and choosing a project manager.

    page 735
  2. Planning. This phase provides details on deliverables, the scope of the project, the budget, schedule and milestones, performance objectives, resources needed, a quality plan, and a plan for handling risks. The accompanying documents generated in the planning phase will be used in the executing and monitoring phases to guide activities and monitor progress. Members of the project team are chosen.

  3. Executing. In this phase, the actual work of the project is carried out. The project is managed as activities are completed, resources are consumed, and milestones are reached. Management involves what the Project Management Institute ( www.pmi.org) refers to as the nine management areas: project integration, scope, human resources, communications, time, risk, quality, cost, and procurement.

  4. Monitoring and Controlling. This phase occurs at the same time as project execution. It involves comparing actual progress with planned progress and undertakes corrective action if needed, as well as monitoring any corrective action to make sure it achieves the desired effect.

  5. Closing. This phase ends the project. It involves handing off the project deliverables (assuming the project hasn’t been canceled), obtaining customer acceptance, documenting lessons learned, and releasing resources.

page 736 

It should be noted that the phases can overlap, so that one phase may not be fully complete before the next phase begins. This can reduce the time necessary to move through the life cycle, perhaps generating some competitive advantage and cost saving. Although subsequent decisions in an earlier phase may result in waste for some portion of the activity in a following phase, careful coordination of activities can minimize that risk.

Figure 17.1 illustrates the phases in a project life cycle.

image

Source: Adapted from Clifford F. Gray and Erik W. Larson , Project Management: The Managerial Process, 2nd ed., p. 6. Copyright © 2003 McGraw-Hill Education, Inc. Used with permission.

17.3 BEHAVIORAL ASPECTS OF PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Project management differs from management of more traditional activities mainly because of its limited time framework and the unique set of activities involved, which gives rise to a host of unique problems. This section describes more fully the nature of projects and their behavioral implications. Special attention is given to the role of the project manager.

The Nature of Projects

As projects go through their life cycle, a variety of skill requirements are involved. The circumstances are analogous to constructing a house. Initially, an idea is presented and its feasibility is assessed, then plans must be drawn up and approved by the owner and possibly a town building commission or other regulatory agency. Then, a succession of activities occurs, each with its own skill requirements, starting with the site preparation, then laying the foundation, erecting the frame, roofing, constructing exterior walls, wiring and plumbing, inspections of wiring and plumbing, installing kitchen and bathroom fixtures and appliances, interior finishing work, and painting and carpeting work. Similar sequences occur on construction projects, in R&D work, in the aerospace industry, and in virtually every other instance where projects are being carried out.

Projects typically bring together people with diverse knowledge and skills, most of whom remain associated with the project for less than its full life. Some people go from project to project as their contributions become needed, and others are “on loan,” either on a full-time or part-time basis, from their regular jobs. The latter is usually the case when a special project exists within the framework of a more traditional organization. However, some organizations are involved with projects on a regular basis; examples include consulting firms, architects, writers and publishers, and construction firms. In those organizations, it is not uncommon for some individuals to spend virtually all of their time on projects.

page 737 

Some organizations use a matrix organization that allows them to integrate the activities of a variety of specialists within a functional framework. For instance, they have certain people who prepare proposals, others who concentrate exclusively on engineering, others who devote their efforts to marketing, and so on.

In a matrix organization, functional and project managers share workers. Project managers negotiate with functional managers for people to work on a project. Those selected will be temporarily assigned to the project manager. However, they are still responsible to their functional manager. They may work part-time or full-time on the project. When their work is done, they return to their functional department.

A matrix organization works quite well with people who can function with two managers, or even more than two if workers work on multiple projects. It can create synergy when people from various functional areas are brought together to work on a project. However, some people do not function well under such a structure, and may be stressed working in that environment. Matrix organizations typically do not allow long-term working relationships to develop. Furthermore, using multiple managers for one employee may result in uncertainty regarding employee evaluation and accountability.

Key Decisions in Project Management

Much of the success of projects depends on key managerial decisions over a sequence of steps:

  • Deciding which projects to implement.

  • Selecting the project manager.

  • Selecting the project team.

  • Planning and designing the project.

  • Managing and controlling project resources.

  • Deciding if and when a project should be terminated.

Deciding Which Projects to Implement or to Bid On. This involves determining the criteria that will be used to decide which projects to pursue. Typical factors include budget, availability of appropriate knowledge and skill personnel, and cost–benefit considerations. Of course, other factors may override these criteria, such as availability of funds, safety issues, government-mandated actions, and so on.

Selecting the Project Manager. The project manager is the central person in the project. The following section on project managers discusses this topic.

Selecting the Project Team. The team can greatly influence the ultimate success or failure of a project. Important considerations include not only a person’s knowledge and skill base, but also how well the person works with others (particularly those who have already been chosen for the project), enthusiasm for the project, other projects the person is involved in, and how likely those other projects might be to interfere with work on this project.

Planning and Designing the Project. Project planning and design require decisions on project performance goals, a timetable for project completion, the scope of the project, what work needs to be done, how it will be done, if some portions will be outsourced, what resources will be needed, a budget, and when and how long resources will be needed.

Managing and Controlling Project Resources. This involves managing personnel, equipment, and the budget; establishing appropriate metrics for evaluating the project; monitoring progress; and taking corrective action when needed. Also necessary are designing an information system and deciding what project documents should be generated, their contents and format, when and by whom they will be needed, and how often they should be updated.

page 738 

The U2 360 Tour was named after the 360-degree staging and audience configuration it used for shows. To accommodate this, the stage set made use of a massive four-legged supporting rig that was nicknamed “The Claw.” The tour crew consisted of 137 touring crews supplemented by over 120 hired locally. Moving the massive set from venues took as long as 3½ days. First, sound and light equipment was packed into the fleet of trucks during the four hours following the concert; the remainder of the time was spent deconstructing the steel structures.

Deciding If and When a Project Should Be Terminated before Completion. Sometimes it is better to terminate a project than to invest any more resources. Important considerations here are the likelihood of success, termination costs, and whether resources could be better used elsewhere.

The Project Manager

The project manager has many duties. In the planning stage, the project manager must prepare a scope statement that spells out the deliverables and goals, determine required skills and resources needed, develop a schedule and budget, and develop plans for managing the scope, the schedule, the budget, and quality and risk.

The project manager bears the ultimate responsibility for the success or failure of the project. He or she must be capable of working through others to accomplish the objectives of the project. The Project Management Institute (PMI) has developed a list of 10 areas of knowledge, called the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK), that a project manager should possess in order to effectively manage a project. They include the following:

  1. Managing integration: This involves developing the scope statement, and the plan to direct, manage, and monitor the project, and control project changes.

  2. Managing scope: This involves breaking down the scope and managing the project through a work breakdown structure.

  3. Managing time/schedule: This involves definition, sequencing, resource and duration estimating, schedule development, and schedule control.

  4. Managing costs: This involves resource planning, cost estimating, budgeting, and control.

  5. Managing quality: This involves quality planning, quality assurance, and quality control.

  6. Managing human resources: This involves human resources planning, hiring, and developing and managing a project team.

  7. Managing communication: This involves communications planning, information distribution, performance reporting, and stakeholder management.

  8. Managing risk: This involves risk planning and identification, risk analysis (qualitative and quantitative), risk response (action) planning, and risk monitoring and control.

  9. Managing procurement: This involves acquisition and contracting plans, sellers’ responses and selections, contract administration, and contract closure.

  10. Managing stakeholders: This involves identifying stakeholders, their interest level, and their potential to influence the project; and managing and controlling the relationships and communications between stakeholders and the project.

page 739 

Several of these responsibilities are often portrayed in what is known as the “project management triangle.” The triangle illustrates the three interrelated constraints that will govern the project: cost (budget), schedule, and scope.

To effectively manage the project constraints, a project manager must employ a certain set of skills. The skills include the ability to motivate and direct team members; make trade-off decisions; expedite the work when necessary; put out fires; and monitor time, budget, and technical details. For projects that involve fairly well-defined work, those skills will often suffice. However, for projects that are less well defined, and thus have a higher degree of uncertainty, the project manager also must employ strong leadership skills. These include the ability to adapt to changing circumstances that may involve changes to project goals, technical requirements, and project team composition. As a leader, the project manager not only must be able to deal with these issues, he or she also must recognize the need for change, decide what changes are necessary, and then work to accomplish them.

The job of project manager can be both difficult and rewarding. The manager must coordinate and motivate people who sometimes owe their allegiance to other managers in the functional areas of their company, or other companies if they are involved in subcontracting. In addition, the people who work on a project frequently possess specialized knowledge and skills that the project manager lacks. Nevertheless, the manager is expected to guide and evaluate their efforts. Project managers often must function in an environment that is beset with uncertainties. Even so, budgets and time constraints are usually imposed, which can create additional pressures on project personnel. Finally, the project manager may not have the authority needed to accomplish all the objectives of the project. Instead, the manager sometimes must rely on persuasion and the cooperation of others to realize project goals.

Ethical issues often arise in connection with projects. Examples include the temptation to understate costs or to withhold information in order to get a project approved, pressure to alter or make misleading statements on status reports, falsifying records, compromising workers’ safety, and approving substandard work. It is the responsibility of managers at all levels to maintain and enforce ethical standards. Moreover, employees often take their cue from managers’ behavior, so it is doubly important for managers to be a model of ethical behavior. The Project Management Institute (PMI) has a website ( www.pmi.org) that includes a code of ethics for project managers, in addition to other useful information about project management.

The position of project manager has high visibility. The rewards of the job of project manager come from the creative challenges of the job, the benefits of being associated with a successful project (including promotion and monetary compensation), and the personal satisfaction of seeing it through to its conclusion.

Behavioral Issues

Project metrics related to cost, schedule, and quality are important indicators of how well a project is doing. Behavioral metrics are also important and should not be overlooked. People make the project happen. However, behavioral issues can interfere with the success of a project if they are not carefully managed. Decentralized decision making, the stress of achieving project milestones on time and within budget, as well as surprises, can contribute to behavioral problems.

Because project work is often based on team efforts, workers are usually evaluated on the basis of the team’s overall contribution relative to project metrics, and not on an individual basis. The team must be able to function as a unit, so interpersonal skills are very important, as are coping skills. And conflict resolution can be an important part of a project manager’s job. Some problems can be avoided by the project manager via the following: by carefully selecting team members when possible; engaging in active leadership; by motivating employees; maintaining an environment of integrity, trust, and professionalism; and being supportive of team efforts.

page 740 

Project Champions

Some companies make use of project champions . These are people, usually within the company, who promote and support the project. They can be instrumental in facilitating the work of the project manager by “talking up” the project to other managers who might be asked to share resources with the project team as well as employees who might be asked to work on parts of the project. The work a project champion does can be critical to the success of a project, so it is important for team members to encourage and communicate with the project champion.

Certification

The Project Management Institute (PMI) administers a globally recognized, examination-based professional certification program. The certification program maintains ISO 9001 certification in Quality Management Systems. There are two levels of certification: Associate and Project Management Professional. Candidates for the Associate and Professional levels must meet specific education and experience requirements and agree to adhere to a code of professional conduct. The Project Management Professional must demonstrate an ongoing professional commitment to the field of project management by satisfying PMI’s Continuing Certification Requirements Program. 1

The Pros and Cons of Working on Projects

People are selected to work on special projects because the knowledge or abilities they possess are needed. In some instances, however, their supervisors may be reluctant to allow them to interrupt their regular jobs, even on a part-time basis, because it may require training a new person to do a job that will be temporary. Moreover, managers don’t want to lose the output of good workers. The workers themselves are not always eager to participate in projects because it may mean working for two bosses who impose differing demands, it may disrupt friendships and daily routines, and it presents the risk of being replaced on the current job. Furthermore, there may be fear of being associated with an unsuccessful project because of the adverse effect it might have on career advancement. In too many instances, when a major project is phased out and the project team is disbanded, team members tend to drift away from the organization for lack of a new project and the difficulty of returning to former jobs. This tendency is more pronounced after lengthy projects and is less likely to occur when a team member works on a part-time basis.

In spite of the potential risks, people are attracted by the potential rewards of being involved in a project. One is the dynamic environment that surrounds a project, which is often page 741in marked contrast to the staid environment of a routine in which some may feel trapped. Some individuals seem to thrive in more dynamic environments; they welcome the challenge of working under pressure and solving new problems. Then, too, projects may present opportunities to meet new people and to increase future job opportunities, especially if the project is successful. In addition, association with a project can be a source of status among fellow workers. Finally, working on projects frequently inspires a team spirit, increasing morale and motivation to achieve the successful completion of project goals.

17.4 WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE

Because large projects usually involve a very large number of activities, planners need some way to determine exactly what will need to be done so they can realistically estimate how long it will take to complete the various elements of the project and how much it will cost. They often accomplish this by developing a work breakdown structure (WBS) , which is a hierarchical listing of what must be done during the project. This methodology establishes a logical framework for identifying the required activities for the project (see Figure 17.2). The first step in developing the work breakdown structure is to identify the major elements of the project. These are the Level 2 boxes in Figure 17.2. The next step is to identify the major supporting activities for each of the major elements—the Level 3 boxes. Then, each major supporting activity is broken down into a list of the activities that will be needed to accomplish it—the Level 4 boxes. (For purposes of illustration, only a portion of the Level 4 boxes are shown.) Usually, there are many activities in the Level 4 lists. Large projects involve additional levels, but Figure 17.2 gives you some idea of the concept of the work breakdown structure.

image

Developing a good work breakdown structure can require substantial time and effort due to the uncertainties associated with a project and/or the size of the project. Typically, the portion of time spent on developing the work breakdown structure greatly exceeds the time spent on actually developing a project schedule. The importance of a work breakdown structure is underscored by the fact that the activity list that results serves as the focal point for planning and doing the project. Moreover, the work breakdown structure is the basis for developing time and cost estimates.

17.5 PLANNING AND SCHEDULING WITH GANTT CHARTS

The Gantt chart (see Chapter 16) is a popular visual tool for planning and scheduling simple projects. It enables a manager to initially schedule project activities and then monitor page 742their progress over time by comparing planned progress to actual progress. Figure 17.3 illustrates a Gantt chart for a bank’s plan to establish a new direct marketing department. To prepare the chart, the vice president in charge of the project had to first identify the major activities that would be required. Next, time estimates for each activity were made, and the sequence of activities was determined. Once completed, the chart indicated which activities were to occur, their planned duration, and when they were to occur. Then, as the project progressed, the manager was able to see which activities were on schedule and which were behind schedule.

image

However, Gantt charts fail to reveal certain relationships among activities that can be crucial to effective project management. For instance, if one of the early activities in a project suffers a delay, it would be important for the manager to be able to easily determine which later activities would result in a delay. Conversely, some activities may safely be delayed without affecting the overall project schedule. The Gantt chart does not necessarily reveal this. On more complex projects, it is often used in conjunction with a network diagram, defined in the following section, for scheduling purposes.

17.6 PERT AND CPM

PERT (program evaluation and review technique) and CPM (critical path method) are two of the most widely used techniques for planning and coordinating large-scale projects. By using PERT or CPM, managers are able to obtain:

  • A graphical display of project activities

  • An estimate of how long the project will take

  • An indication of which activities are the most critical to timely project completion

  • An indication of how long any activity can be delayed without delaying the project

Although PERT and CPM were developed independently, they have a great deal in common. Moreover, many of the initial differences between them have disappeared as users borrowed certain features from one technique for use with the other. For all practical purposes, the two techniques are now essentially the same. The comments and procedures described here will apply to both CPM analysis and PERT analysis of projects.

page 743 

The Network Diagram

One of the main features of PERT and related techniques is their use of a network (or precedence) diagram to depict major project activities and their sequential relationships. There are two slightly different conventions for constructing these network diagrams. Under one convention, the arrows designate activities; under the other convention, the nodes designate activities. These conventions are referred to as activity-on-arrow (AOA) and activity-on-node (AON) . Activities consume resources and/or time. The nodes in the AOA approach represent the activities’ starting and finishing points, which are called events . Events are points in time. Unlike activities, they consume neither resources nor time. The nodes in an AON diagram represent activities.

Both conventions are illustrated in Figure 17.4, using the bank example depicted in the Gantt chart in Figure 17.3. Compare the two. In the AOA diagram, the arrows represent activities and show the sequence in which certain activities must be performed (e.g., Interview precedes Hire and train); in the AON diagram, the arrows show only the sequence in which certain activities must be performed, while the nodes represent the activities. Activities in AOA networks can be referred to in either of two ways. One is by their endpoints (e.g., activity 2-4) and the other is by a letter assigned to an arrow (e.g., activity c). Both methods are illustrated in this chapter. Activities in AON networks are referred to by a letter (or number) assigned to a node. Although these two approaches are slightly different, they both show sequential relationships—something Gantt charts do not. Note that the AON diagram has a starting node, S, which is actually not an activity but is added to have a single starting node.

image

Despite these differences, the two conventions are remarkably similar, so you should not encounter much difficulty in understanding either one. In fact, there are convincing arguments for having some familiarity with both approaches. Perhaps the most compelling is that both approaches are widely used. Moreover, a contractor doing work for the organization may be using the other approach, so employees of the organization who deal with the contractor on project matters would benefit from knowledge of the other approach. However, any particular organization would typically use only one approach, and employees would have to work with that approach.

Of particular interest to managers are the paths in a network diagram. A path is a sequence of activities that leads from the starting node to the ending node. For example, in the AOA diagram, the sequence 1-2-4-5-6 is a path. In the AON diagram, S-1-2-6-7 is a path. Note that in both diagrams there are three paths. One reason for the importance of paths is that they reveal sequential relationships. The importance of sequential relationships cannot be overstated: If one activity in a sequence is delayed (i.e., late) or done incorrectly, the start of all following activities on that path will be delayed.

Another important aspect of paths is the length of a path: How long will a particular sequence of activities take to complete? The length (of time) of any path can be determined by summing the expected times of the activities on that path. The path with the longest time is of particular interest because it governs project completion time. In other words, expected project page 744duration equals the expected time of the longest path. Moreover, if there are any delays along the longest path, there will be corresponding delays in project completion time. Attempts to shorten project completion must focus on the longest sequence of activities. Because of its influence on project completion time, the longest path is referred to as the critical path , and its activities are referred to as critical activities .

Paths that are shorter than the critical path can experience some delays and still not affect the overall project completion time, as long as the ultimate path time does not exceed the length of the critical path. The allowable slippage for any path is called slack , and it reflects the difference between the length of a given path and the length of the critical path. The critical path, then, has zero slack time.

Network Conventions

Developing and interpreting network diagrams requires some familiarity with networking conventions. Table 17.2 illustrates some of the most basic and common features of network diagrams, and gives sufficient background for understanding the basic concepts associated with precedence diagrams and lets you solve some typical problems.

A special feature that is sometimes used in AOA networks to clarify relationships is a dummy activity. In order to recognize the need to use a dummy activity using the AOA approach when presented with a list of activities and the activities each precedes, examine the “Immediate Predecessor” list. Look for instances where multiple activities are listed, such as a, b in the following list. If a or b appears separately in the list (as b does in the following table), a dummy will be needed to clarify the relationship (see the last diagram in Table 17.2).

Activity

Immediate Predecessor

a

b

c

a, b

d

b

Here are two more AOA conventions:

For reference purposes, nodes are numbered typically from left to right, with lower numbers assigned to preceding nodes and higher numbers to following nodes, as in the following.

Starting and ending arrows are sometimes used during development of a network for increased clarity, as shown next.

TABLE 17.2

Network conventions

AOA

Interpretation

AON

Activities must be completed in sequence: first a, then b, and then c.

Both a and b must be completed before c can start. Note that activities a and b mergeat activity c.

Activity a must be completed before b or c can start.

Both a and b must be completed before c or d can start.

Use a dummy activity to clarify relationships:

1. To separate two activities that have the same starting and ending nodes.

(No dummyneeded)

2. When activities share some, but not all, preceding activities. Here, activity c is preceded by activities a and b, while activity d is only preceded by activity b.

(No dummyneeded)

17.7 DETERMINISTIC TIME ESTIMATES

page 745 

The main determinant of the way PERT and CPM networks are analyzed and interpreted is whether activity time estimates are probabilistic or deterministic. If time estimates can be made with a high degree of confidence that actual times are fairly certain, we say the estimates are deterministic . If actual times are subject to variation, we say the estimates are probabilistic . Probabilistic time estimates must include an indication of the extent of probable variation.

This section describes analysis of networks with deterministic time estimates. A later section deals with probabilistic times.

One of the best ways to gain an understanding of the nature of network analysis is to consider a simple example.

17.8 A COMPUTING ALGORITHM

Many real-life project networks are much larger than the simple network illustrated in the preceding example; they often contain hundreds or even thousands of activities. Because the necessary computations can become exceedingly complex and time-consuming, large networks are generally analyzed by computer programs instead of manually. Planners use an algorithm to develop four pieces of information about the network activities:

ES, the earliest time activity can start, assuming all preceding activities at their earliest finish time.

EF, the earliest time the activity can finish.

LS, the latest time the activity can start and not delay the project.

LF, the latest time the activity can finish and not delay the project.

Once these values have been determined, they can be used to find:

  • Expected project duration

  • Slack time

  • The critical path

Activity-on-Arrow

The three examples that follow illustrate how to compute those values using the precedence diagram of Example 1.

page 747 

Computation of earliest starting and finishing times is aided by two simple rules:

  1. The earliest finish time for any activity is equal to its earliest start time plus its expected duration, t:

    (17–1)

  2. ES for activities at nodes with one entering arrow is equal to EF of the entering arrow. ES for activities leaving nodes with multiple entering arrows is equal to the largest EF of the entering arrow.

page 749 

Computation of the latest starting and finishing times is aided by the use of two rules:

  1. The latest starting time for each activity is equal to its latest finishing time minus its expected duration:

    (17–2)

  2. For nodes with one leaving arrow, LF for arrows entering that node equals the LS of the leaving arrow. For nodes with multiple leaving arrows, LF for arrows entering that node equals the smallest LS of leaving arrows.

Finding ES and EF times involves a forward pass through the network; finding LS and LF times involves a backward pass through the network. Hence, we must begin with the EF of the last activity and use that time as the LF for the last activity. Then, we obtain the LS for the last activity by subtracting its expected duration from its LF.

Activity-on-Node

The computing algorithm is performed in essentially the same manner in the AON approach. Figure 17.6 shows the node diagram, and Figures 17.7A, B, and C illustrate the computing algorithm.

page 751 

image image image

page 752 

image

SOLUTION

Computing Slack Times

The slack time can be computed in either of two ways:

(17–3)

The critical path using this computing algorithm is denoted by activities with zero slack time. Thus, the table in Example 4 indicates that activities 1-2, 2-5, and 5-6 are all critical activities, which agrees with the results of the intuitive approach demonstrated in Example 1.

Knowledge of slack times provides managers with information for planning the allocation of scarce resources and for directing control efforts toward those activities that might be most susceptible to delaying the project. In this regard, it is important to recognize that the activity slack times are based on the assumption that all of the activities on the same path will be started as early as possible and not exceed their expected times. Furthermore, if two activities are both on the same path (e.g., activities 2-4 and 4-5 in the preceding example) and have the same slack (e.g., two weeks), this will be the total slack available to both. In essence, the activities have shared slack. Hence, if the first activity uses all the slack, there will be zero slack for all following activities on that same path.

As noted earlier, this algorithm lends itself to computerization. A computer printout for this problem would appear something like the one shown in Table 17.3.

TABLE 17.3

Computer printout

page 753 

17.9 PROBABILISTIC TIME ESTIMATES

The preceding discussion assumed that activity times were known and not subject to variation. While that condition exists in some situations, there are many others where it does not. Consequently, those situations require a probabilistic approach.

The probabilistic approach involves three time estimates for each activity instead of one, shown next:

  • Optimistic time : The length of time required under optimum conditions; represented by t o

  • Pessimistic time : The length of time required under the worst conditions; represented by t p

  • Most likely time : The most probable amount of time required; represented by t m

Managers or others with knowledge about the project can make these time estimates.

The beta distribution is generally used to describe the inherent variability in time estimates (see Figure 17.8). Although there is no real theoretical justification for using the beta distribution, it has certain features that make it attractive in practice: The distribution can be symmetrical or skewed to either the right or the left according to the nature of a particular activity; the mean and variance of the distribution can be readily obtained from the three time estimates listed above; and the distribution is unimodal, with a high concentration of probability surrounding the most likely time estimate.

image

Of special interest in network analysis are the average or expected time for each activity, t e , and the variance of each activity time, σ 2. The expected time of an activity, t e , is a weighted average of the three time estimates:

(17–4)

page 754 

The expected duration of a path (i.e., the path mean) is equal to the sum of the expected times of the activities on that path:

(17–5)

The standard deviation of each activity’s time is estimated as one-sixth of the difference between the pessimistic and optimistic time estimates. (Analogously, nearly all of the area under a normal distribution lies within three standard deviations of the mean, which is a range of six standard deviations.) We find the variance by squaring the standard deviation. Thus,

(17–6)

The size of the variance reflects the degree of uncertainty associated with an activity’s time: the larger the variance, the greater the uncertainty.

It is also desirable to compute the standard deviation of the expected time for each path. We can do this by summing the variances of the activities on a path and then taking the square root of that number; that is,

(17–7)

Example 5 illustrates these computations.

Knowledge of the expected path times and their standard deviations enables a manager to compute probabilistic estimates of the project completion time, such as these:

The probability that the project will be completed by a specified time.

The probability that the project will take longer than its scheduled completion time.

These estimates can be derived from the probability that various paths will be completed by the specified time. This involves the use of the normal distribution. Although activity times are represented by a beta distribution, the path distribution is represented by a normal distribution. The central limit theorem tells us that the summing of activity times (random variables) results in a normal distribution. This is illustrated in Figure 17.9. The rationale for using a normal distribution is that sums of random variables (activity times or means) will tend to be normally distributed, regardless of the distributions of the variables. The normal tendency improves as the number of random variables increases. However, even when the number of items being summed is fairly small, the normal approximation provides a reasonable approximation to the actual distribution.

image

page 756 

17.10 DETERMINING PATH PROBABILITIES

The probability that a given path will be completed in a specified length of time can be determined using the following formula:

(17–8)

The resulting value of z indicates how many standard deviations of the path distribution the specified time is beyond the expected path duration. The more positive the value, the better. (A negative value of z indicates that the specified time is earlier than the expected path duration.) Once the value of z has been determined, it can be used to obtain the probability that the path will be completed by the specified time from Appendix B, Table B. Note that the probability is equal to the area under the normal curve to the left of z, as illustrated in Figure 17.10.

image

If the value of z is +3.00 or more, the path probability is close to 100 percent (for z = +3.00, it is .9987). Hence, it is very likely the activities that make up the path will be completed by the specified time. For that reason, a useful rule of thumb is to treat the path probability as being equal to 100 percent if the value of z is +3.00 or more.

Rule of thumb: If the value of z is +3.00 or more, treat the probability of path completion by the specified time as 100 percent.

A project is not completed until all of its activities have been completed, not only those on the critical path. It sometimes happens that another path ends up taking more time to complete than the critical path, in which case the project runs longer than expected. Hence, it can be risky to focus exclusively on the critical path. Instead, one must consider the possibility that at least one other path will delay timely project completion. This requires determining the probability that all paths will finish by a specified time. To do that, find the probability that each path will finish by the specified time, and then multiply those probabilities. The result is the probability that the project will be completed by the specified time.

It is important to note the assumption of independence . It is assumed that path duration times are independent of each other. In essence, this requires two things: Activity times are independent of each other, and each activity is only on one path. For activity times to be independent, the time for one must not be a function of the time of another; if two activities were always early or late together, they would not be considered independent. The assumption of independent paths is usually considered to be met if only a few activities in a large project are on multiple paths. Even then, common sense should govern the decision of whether the independence assumption is justified.

17.11 SIMULATION

We have examined a method for computing the probability that a project would be completed in a specified length of time. That discussion assumed that the paths of the project were independent; that is, the same activities are not on more than one path. If an activity were on more than one path, and it happened that the completion time for that activity far exceeded its expected time, all paths that included that activity would be affected and, hence, their times would not be independent. Where activities are on multiple paths, one must consider if the page 759preceding approach can be used. For instance, if only a few activities are on multiple paths, particularly if the paths are much shorter than the critical path, that approach may still be reasonable. Moreover, for purposes of illustration, as in the text problems and examples, the paths are treated as being independent when, in fact, they may not be.

In practice, when dependent cases occur, project planners often use simulation. It amounts to a form of repeated sampling wherein many passes are made through the project network. In each pass, a randomly selected value for each activity time is made based on the characteristics of the activity’s probability distribution (e.g., its mean, standard deviation, and distribution type). After each pass, the expected project duration is determined by adding the times along each path and designating the time of the longest path as the project duration. After a large number of such passes (e.g., several hundred), there is enough information to prepare a frequency distribution of the project duration times. Planners can use this distribution to make a probabilistic assessment of the actual project duration, allowing for some activities that are on more than one path. Problem 19 in the simulation supplement to Chapter 18 located on the text website illustrates this.

17.12 BUDGET CONTROL

Budget control is a critical aspect of a project. Costs can exceed budget for a number of reasons, and unless corrective action is taken, serious cost overruns can occur, possibly putting the project in jeopardy. Cost overruns can occur for various reasons. One possibility is that initial estimates might have been overly optimistic. Another is that unforeseen events such as weather or supplier issues, substandard work or parts that had to be remedied, or some other event, added costs.

Table 17.4 illustrates the project cost status for a hypothetical project that is in progress. For this project, the first three activities have been completed. Activity A was $1,000 under budget, Activity B was right at its budgeted amount, and Activity C was overbudget by $3,500. The remaining activities are incomplete, but each has a projected cost and a projected difference. Unless there is a change during the remaining life of the project, the cost overrun is projected to be $4,000. The project manager will have to decide if that amount is acceptable, or whether corrective action should be initiated. Although managers’ inclinations may be to focus on the activities that are overbudget, they would likely review all activities to see where potential savings are possible. Of course, the project cost status would be updated, usually on a daily or weekly basis, to keep the project manager informed.

TABLE 17.4

Project cost status for a hypothetical project

17.13 TIME–COST TRADE-OFFS: CRASHING

Estimates of activity times for projects usually are made for some given level of resources. In many situations, it is possible to reduce the length of a project by injecting additional resources. The impetus to shorten projects may reflect efforts to avoid late penalties, to take advantage of page 760monetary incentives for timely or early completion of a project, or to free resources for use on other projects. In new product development, shortening may lead to a strategic benefit: beating the competition to the market. In some cases, however, the desire to shorten the length of a project merely reflects an attempt to reduce the costs associated with running the project, such as facilities and equipment costs, supervision, and labor and personnel costs. Managers often have various options at their disposal that will allow them to shorten, or crash , certain activities. Among the most obvious options are the use of additional funds to support additional personnel or more efficient equipment, and the relaxing of some work specifications. Hence, a project manager may be able to shorten a project by increasing direct expenses to speed up the project, thereby realizing savings on indirect project costs. The goal in evaluating time–cost trade-offs is to identify activities that will reduce the sum of the project costs.

In order to make a rational decision on which activities, if any, to crash, and determine the extent of crashing desirable, a manager needs certain information, such as the following:

  • Regular time and crash time estimates for each activity

  • Regular cost and crash cost estimates for each activity

  • A list of activities that are on the critical path

Activities on the critical path are potential candidates for crashing, because shortening noncritical activities would not have an impact on total project duration. From an economic standpoint, activities should be crashed according to crashing costs: Crash those with the lowest crash costs first. Moreover, crashing should continue as long as the cost to crash is less than the benefits derived from crashing. Figure 17.11 illustrates the basic cost relationships.

image

Crashing analysis requires estimates of regular and crash times, the costs for each activity, the path lengths, and identification of critical activities. The general procedure for crashing is:

  1. Crash the project one period at a time.

  2. Crash the least expensive activity that is on the critical path.

  3. If shortening results in multiple critical paths, find the sum of crashing the least expensive activity on each critical path. If two or more critical paths share common activities, compare the least expensive cost of crashing a common activity shared by critical paths with the sum for the separate critical paths.

page 761 

An important benefit of the sequential crashing procedure just described is that it provides the ability to quote different budget costs for different project times.

17.14 ADVANTAGES OF USING PERT AND POTENTIAL SOURCES OF ERROR

PERT and similar project scheduling techniques can provide important services for the project manager. Among the most useful features are the following:

  • Use of these techniques forces the manager to organize and quantify available information and to recognize where additional information is needed.

  • The techniques provide a graphic display of the project and its major activities.

  • They identify ( a) activities that should be closely watched because of the potential for delaying the project, and ( b) other activities that have slack time and thus can be delayed without affecting project completion time. This raises the possibility of reallocating resources to shorten the project.

page 763 

No analytical technique is without potential errors. Among the more important sources of errors are the following:

  • When developing the project network, managers may unwittingly omit one or more important activities.

  • Precedence relationships may not all be correct as shown.

  • Time estimates may include a fudge factor; managers may feel uncomfortable about making time estimates because they appear to commit themselves to completion within a certain time period.

  • There may be a tendency to focus solely on activities that are on the critical path. As the project progresses, other paths may become critical. Furthermore, major risk events may not be on the critical path.

17.15 CRITICAL CHAIN PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Critical chain project management (CCPM) is an approach to project management that includes an emphasis on the resources required to execute project tasks. It was developed by Eli Goldratt, who also developed the theory of constraints (see Chapter 16). Goldratt identifies certain aspects of projects that he believes managers need to be aware of to better manage projects:

  • Time estimates are often pessimistic and with attention can be made more realistic (i.e., shortened).

  • When activities are finished ahead of schedule, that fact may go unreported, so managers may be unaware of resources that could potentially be used to shorten the critical path.

The critical chain of a project is analogous to the critical path of a network. However, the critical chain approach takes into account not only sequential task relationships, but also resource constraints that can result in tasks being delayed when they must wait for a resource that is being used on another task.

A key feature of the critical chain approach is the use of various buffers. Feeding (time) buffers are positioned at points in the network where noncritical sections of the network feed into the critical chain path to reduce the risk of delaying critical chain activities. Their purpose is to insulate the critical chain from variation in noncritical chains’ activities. Not every intersection will require a time buffer; only those sections that have a relatively small degree of slack time will provide benefit from a time buffer. A project (time) buffer at the end of the project is used to reduce the risk that time variations on the critical chain will interfere with timely project completion. Capacity (resource) buffers are used when multiple projects are ongoing to help manage the impact of variation of resource requirements among projects.

Regular updates of activity status relative to planned completion times can enable the project manager to see where actual or potential problems may arise, as well as where buffers can be reduced or eliminated, to reconfigure buffers.

17.16 OTHER TOPICS IN PROJECT MANAGEMENT

This section touches briefly on several other project management topics, including Six-Sigma projects, virtual project teams, and managing multiple projects.

One increasingly popular use of project management is for Six-Sigma projects. Although Six-Sigma projects tend to have a narrow focus, they still involve all of the typical elements and requirements of general project management. Six-Sigma projects are discussed in more detail in Chapter 9.

As companies globalize operations, they are increasingly using virtual project teams . All the basic elements of a project are present, but some or all of the team members are page 764geographically separated. Recent advances in communication technology have made this feasible. A key benefit is the ability to tap into human talents and perspectives that would otherwise be difficult or impossible to use. A key disadvantage can be the inability to realize synergies that may arise from closer contact among team members. Also, there are risks if there are language or cultural differences among team members, so communications must be managed more carefully.

The existence of multiple projects can create added layers of pressure and complexity to project management. Resources often need to be shared across projects, and problems on one project may create issues for other projects, and can require reassessing priorities. When multiple projects are ongoing within an organization, resources needed for one project may be in use on another project, which could delay the project waiting for the resources to become available. Hence, it is important for managers to cross-check project schedules to avoid such conflicts. Project management software can help avoid conflicts when there are shared resources. In a related issue, project slippage can occur as a project nears completion if resources are transferred to new projects too quickly.

17.17 PROJECT MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

There are many advantages to using a project management software package, especially for managing complex projects or multiple projects. Among them are the following:

  • It imposes a methodology and a common project management terminology.

  • It provides a logical planning structure.

  • It can enhance communication among team members.

  • It can flag the occurrence of constraint violations.

  • It automatically formats reports.

  • It can generate multiple levels of summary reports and detailed reports.

  • It enables what-if scenarios.

  • It can generate various chart types, including basic Gantt charts.

Depending on the nature and scope of a project, software choices range from a simple system like Google Drive to more robust systems that contain all project-related information and materials. Software platforms typically give users the ability to upload documents to specific tasks or projects. Some systems use message boards that enable team members to discuss issues or provide status updates. Moreover, they often record the history of each task and project, providing audit trails that enable project managers to view task progress and investigate challenges that team members may be experiencing.

Because of the variety of software systems available and their features, and the continuing change in what is available, rather than describe any particular system and its capabilities, if you would like to see what is available right now, it is suggested you do a search on the term project management software.

One thing to keep in mind is that project management is more than choosing the right software. There is much that a project manager must do. Recall the key decisions discussed early in the chapter.

17.18 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

Projects can present both strategic opportunities and strategic risks, so it is critical for management to devote adequate attention and resources to projects.

Projects are often used in situations that have some degree of uncertainty, which can result in delays, budget overruns, and failure to meet technical requirements. To minimize the page 765impact of these possibilities, management must ensure that careful planning, wise selection of project managers and team members, and monitoring of the project occur.

Computer software and tools such as PERT can greatly assist project management. However, care must be taken to avoid focusing exclusively on the critical path. The obvious reason is that as the project progresses, other paths may become critical. But another, less obvious reason is that key risk events may not be on the critical path. Even so, if they occur, they can have a major impact on the project.

It is not uncommon for projects to fail, either completely or partially. When that happens, it can be beneficial to examine the probable reasons for the failure, and decide what possible decisions or actions, if any, might have contributed to the failure. These become “lessons learned” that may be applicable to future projects to decrease the likelihood of failure.

17.19 RISK MANAGEMENT

Risks are inherent in projects. They relate to the occurrence of events that can have undesirable consequences, such as delays, increased costs, and an inability to meet technical specifications. In some instances, there is the risk that events will occur that will cause a project to be terminated. Although careful planning can reduce risks, no amount of planning can eliminate chance events due to unforeseen, or uncontrollable, circumstances.

The probability of occurrence of risk events is highest near the beginning of a project and lowest near the end. However, the cost associated with risk events tends to be lowest near the beginning of a project and highest near the end. (See Figure 17.12.)

image

Good risk management entails identifying as many potential risks as possible, analyzing and assessing those risks, working to minimize the probability of their occurrence, and establishing contingency plans (and funds) for dealing with any that do occur. Much of this takes place before the start of a project, although it is not unusual for this process to be repeated during the project as experience grows and new information becomes available.

The first step is to identify the risks. Typically, there are numerous sources of risks, although the more experience an organization has with a particular type of work, the fewer and more identifiable the risks. Everyone associated with the project should be responsible for identifying risks. Brainstorming sessions and questionnaires can be useful in this regard.

Once risks have been identified, each risk must be evaluated to determine its probability of occurrence and the potential consequences if it does occur. Both quantitative and qualitative approaches have merit. Managers and workers can contribute to this effort, and experts might be called on. Experience with previous projects can be useful. Many page 766tools might be applied, including scenario analysis, simulation, and PERT (described earlier in the chapter).

Risk reduction can take a number of forms. Much depends on the nature and scope of a project. “Redundant” (backup) systems can sometimes be used to reduce the risk of failure. For example, an emergency generator could supply power in the event of an electrical failure. Another approach is frequent monitoring of critical project dimensions with the goal of catching and eliminating problems in their early stages, before they cause extensive damage. Risks can sometimes be transferred, say, by outsourcing a particular component of a project, or by having an insurance policy. Risk-sharing is another possibility. This might involve partnering, which can spread risks among partners. This approach may also reduce risk by enlarging the sphere of sources of ideas for reducing the risk.

A project leader may have to contend with multiple risks that have different costs and different probabilities of occurring. A simple matrix such as the one illustrated in Figure 17.13 can be used to put the risks into perspective.

image

Events in the upper right-hand quadrant (events 3 and 4) have the highest probability of occurring, and also high costs. They should be given the greatest attention. Conversely, events in the lower left-hand quadrant (events 2 and 5) have relatively low probabilities and low costs, so they should be given the least attention. Events in the other two quadrants (events 6 and 1) should get moderate attention due either to high cost (event 6) or high probability of occurrence (event 1).

1 www.pmi.org.

page 784 

page 785 

Waiting lines occur when there is a temporary imbalance between supply (capacity) and demand. If demand is less than capacity, although there is not a waiting line of customers, there is idle capacity, which, in effect is a “waiting line.” Waiting lines add to the cost of operation and they reflect negatively on customer service, or a waste of resources if capacity (temporarily) exceeds demand, so it is important to balance the cost of having customers wait with the cost of providing service capacity. Customer waiting lines occur when there is too little capacity to handle demand, but having more capacity than what is needed to handle demand means there is idle (unproductive) capacity. From a managerial perspective, the key is to determine the balance that will provide an adequate level of service at a reasonable cost.

Waiting lines abound in all sorts of service systems. They are non-valued-added occurrences. In lean systems, waiting is one of the seven wastes. For customers, having to wait for service can range from being acceptable (usually short waits), to being annoying (longer waits), to being a matter of life and death (e.g., in emergencies). For businesses, the costs of waiting come from lower productivity and competitive disadvantage. For society, the costs are wasted resources (e.g., fuel consumption of cars stuck in traffic) and reduced quality of life. Hence, it is important for system designers and managers of existing service systems to fully appreciate the impact of waiting lines.

page 786 

Designers must weigh the cost of providing a given level of service capacity against the potential (implicit) cost of having customers wait for service. This planning and analysis of service capacity frequently lends itself to queuing theory , which is a mathematical approach to the analysis of waiting lines. Queuing theory is directly applicable to a wide range of service operations, including call centers, banks, post offices, restaurants, theme parks, telecommunications systems, and traffic management.

The foundation of modern queuing theory is based on studies about automatic dialing equipment made in the early part of the 20th century by Danish telephone engineer A. K. Erlang, who used queuing theory to determine how many phone lines (no cell phones in those days) and operators companies needed to provide adequate service. Prior to World War II, very few attempts were made to apply queuing theory to other business problems. Since that time, queuing theory has been applied to a wide range of problems.

The mathematics of queuing can be complex. For that reason, the emphasis here will not be on the mathematics but on the concepts that underlie the use of queuing in analyzing waiting-line problems. We shall rely on the use of formulas and tables for analysis.

Waiting lines are commonly found wherever customers arrive randomly for services. Some examples of waiting lines we encounter in our daily lives include the lines at supermarket checkouts, fast-food restaurants, airport ticket counters, theaters, post offices, and toll booths. In many situations, the “customers” are not people but orders waiting to be filled, trucks waiting to be unloaded, jobs waiting to be processed, or equipment awaiting repairs. Still other examples include ships waiting to dock, planes waiting to land, and cars waiting at a stop sign.

One reason queuing analysis is important is because customers regard waiting negatively. Customers may tend to associate this with poor service quality, especially if the wait is long. Similarly, in an organizational setting, having work or employees wait is the sort of waste that workers in lean systems strive to reduce.

The discussion of queuing begins with an examination of what is perhaps the most fundamental issue in waiting-line theory: Why is there waiting?

18.1 WHY IS THERE WAITING?

Many people are surprised to learn that waiting lines tend to form even though a system is basically underloaded. For example, a fast-food restaurant may have the capacity to handle an average of 200 orders per hour and yet experience waiting lines even though the average page 787number of orders is only 150 per hour. The key word is average. In reality, customers arrive at random intervals rather than at evenly spaced intervals, and some orders take longer to fill than others. In other words, both arrivals and service times exhibit a high degree of variability. And because services cannot be performed ahead of time and stored until needed, the system at times becomes temporarily overloaded, giving rise to waiting lines. However, at other times, the system is idle because there are no customers. It follows that in systems where variability is minimal or nonexistent (e.g., because arrivals can be scheduled and service time is constant), waiting lines do not ordinarily form. JIT/lean systems strive to achieve this.

18.2 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS OF WAITING LINES

Managers have a number of very good reasons to be concerned with waiting lines. Chief among those reasons are the following:

  • The cost to provide waiting space

  • A possible loss of business should customers leave the line before being served or refuse to wait at all

  • A possible loss of goodwill

  • A possible reduction in customer satisfaction

  • The resulting congestion may disrupt other business operations and/or customers

page 788 

18.3 GOAL OF WAITING-LINE MANAGEMENT

In a queuing system, customers enter the waiting line of a service facility, receive service when their turn comes, and then leave the system. The number of customers in the system (awaiting service or being served) will vary randomly over time. The goal of waiting-line management is essentially to minimize total costs. There are two basic categories of cost in a queuing situation: those associated with customers waiting for service, and those associated with capacity. Thus,

Capacity costs are the costs of maintaining the ability to provide service. Examples include the number of bays at a car wash, the number of checkouts at a supermarket, the number of repair people to handle equipment breakdowns, and the number of lanes on a highway. When a service facility is idle, capacity is lost because it cannot be stored. The costs of customers waiting include the salaries paid to employees while they wait for service (mechanics waiting for tools, the drivers of trucks waiting to unload), the cost of the space for waiting (size of doctor’s waiting room, length of driveway at a car wash, fuel consumed by planes waiting to land), and any loss of business due to customers refusing to wait and possibly going elsewhere in the future.

A practical difficulty frequently encountered is pinning down the cost of customer waiting time, especially because major portions of that cost are not a part of accounting data. One approach often used is to treat waiting times or line lengths as a policy variable: A manager simply specifies an acceptable level of waiting and directs that capacity be established to achieve that level.

The goal of waiting-line management is to balance the cost of providing a level of service capacity with the cost of customers waiting for service. Figure 18.1 illustrates this concept. Note that as capacity increases, its cost increases. For simplicity, the increase is shown as a linear relationship. Although a step function is often more appropriate, use of a straight line does not significantly distort the picture. As capacity increases, the number of customers waiting and the time they wait tend to decrease, thereby decreasing waiting costs. As is typical in trade-off relationships, total costs can be represented as a U-shaped curve. The goal of analysis is to identify a level of service capacity that will minimize total cost. (Unlike the situation in the inventory EOQ model, the minimum point on the total cost curve is not usually where the two cost lines intersect.)

image

In situations where those waiting in line are external customers (as opposed to employees), the existence of waiting lines can reflect negatively on an organization’s quality image. Consequently, some organizations are focusing their attention on providing faster service—speeding up the rate at which service is delivered rather than merely increasing the number of servers. The effect of this is to shift the total cost curve downward if the cost of customer waiting decreases by more than the cost of the faster service.

page 789 

18.4 CHARACTERISTICS OF WAITING LINES

There are numerous queuing models from which an analyst can choose. Naturally, much of the success of the analysis will depend on choosing an appropriate model. Model choice is affected by the characteristics of the system under investigation. The main characteristics are:

  • Population source

  • Number of servers (channels)

  • Arrival and service patterns

  • Queue discipline (order of service)

Figure 18.2 depicts a simple queuing system.

image

Population Source

The approach to use in analyzing a queuing problem depends on whether the potential number of customers is limited. There are two possibilities: infinite-source and finite-source populations. In an infinite-source situation , the potential number of customers greatly exceeds system capacity. Infinite-source situations exist whenever service is unrestricted. Examples are supermarkets, drugstores, banks, restaurants, theaters, amusement centers, and toll bridges. Theoretically, large numbers of customers from the “calling population” can request service at any time. When the potential number of customers is limited, a finite-source situation exists. An example is the repair technician responsible for a certain number of machines in a company. The potential number of machines that might need repairs at any one time cannot exceed the number of machines assigned to the repairer. Similarly, an operator may be responsible for loading and unloading a bank of four machines, a nurse may be responsible for answering patient calls for a 10-bed ward, a secretary may be responsible for taking dictation from three executives, and a company shop may perform repairs as needed on the firm’s 20 trucks.

Number of Servers (Channels)

The capacity of queuing systems is a function of the capacity of each server and the number of servers being used. The terms server and channel are synonymous, and it is generally assumed that each channel can handle one customer at a time. Systems can be either single- or multiple-channel. (A group of servers working together as a team, such as a surgical team, is treated as a single-channel system.) Examples of single-channel systems are small grocery stores with one checkout counter, some theaters, single-bay car washes, and drive-in banks with one teller. Multiple-channel systems (those with more than one server) are commonly found in banks, at airline ticket counters, at auto service centers, and at gas stations.

A related distinction is the number of steps or phases in a queuing system. For example, at theme parks, people go from one attraction to another. Each attraction constitutes a separate phase where queues can (and usually do) form.

Figure 18.3 illustrates some of the most common queuing systems. Because it would not be possible to cover all of these cases in sufficient detail in the limited amount of space available here, our discussion will focus on single-phase systems. Note that for most systems, a single waiting line that results in first-come, first-served, is favored by humans because it is associated with “fairness.” Later in the chapter you will learn about priority systems, which are not first-come, first-served.

page 790 

image

Arrival and Service Patterns

Remember, waiting lines are a direct result of arrival and service variability. They occur because random, highly variable arrival and service patterns cause systems to be temporarily overloaded. In many instances, the variabilities can be described by theoretical distributions. In fact, the most commonly used models assume that arrival and service rates can be described by a Poisson distribution or, equivalently, that the interarrival time and service time can be described by a negative exponential distribution. Figure 18.4 illustrates these distributions.

image

The Poisson distribution often provides a reasonably good description of customer arrivals per unit of time (e.g., per hour). Figure 18.5A illustrates how Poisson-distributed arrivals (e.g., accidents) might occur during a three-day period. In some hours, there are three or four arrivals; in other hours, one or two arrivals; and in some hours, no arrivals.

image

page 791 

The negative exponential distribution often provides a reasonably good description of customer service times (e.g., first-aid care for accident victims). Figure 18.5B illustrates how exponential service times might appear for the customers whose arrivals are illustrated in Figure 18.5A. Note that most service times are very short—some are close to zero—but a few require a relatively long service time. That is typical of a negative exponential distribution.

Waiting lines are most likely to occur when arrivals are bunched or when service times are particularly lengthy, and they are very likely to occur when both factors are present. For instance, note the long service time of customer 7 on day 1 in Figure 18.5B. In Figure 18.5A, the seventh customer arrived just after 10 o’clock, and the next two customers arrived shortly after that, making it very likely a waiting line formed. A similar situation occurred on day 3 with the last three customers: The relatively long service time for customer 13 ( Figure 18.5B) and the short time before the next two arrivals ( Figure 18.5A, day 3) would create (or increase the length of) a waiting line.

It is interesting to note that the Poisson and negative exponential distributions are alternate ways of presenting the same basic information. That is, if service time is exponential, then the page 792service rate is Poisson. Similarly, if the customer arrival rate is Poisson, then the interarrival time (i.e., the time between arrivals) is exponential. For example, if a service facility can process 12 customers per hour (rate), average service time is five minutes. And if the arrival rate is 10 per hour, then the average time between arrivals is six minutes.

The models described here generally require that arrival and service rates lend themselves to description using a Poisson distribution or, equivalently, that interarrival and service times lend themselves to description using a negative exponential distribution. In practice, it is necessary to verify that these assumptions are met. Sometimes this is done by collecting data and plotting them, although the preferred approach is to use a chi-square goodness-of-fit test for that purpose. A discussion of the chi-square test is beyond the scope of this text, but most basic statistics textbooks cover the topic.

Research has shown that these assumptions are often appropriate for customer arrivals but less likely to be appropriate for service. In situations where the assumptions are not reasonably satisfied, the alternatives would be to (1) develop a more suitable model, (2) search for a better (and usually more complex) existing model, or (3) resort to computer simulation. Each of these alternatives requires more effort or cost than the ones presented here.

The models in this chapter assume customers are patient, that is, that customers enter the waiting line and remain until they are served. Other possibilities are that (1) waiting customers grow impatient and leave the line ( reneging); (2) customers switch to another line ( jockeying); or (3) upon arriving, customers decide the line is too long and, therefore, do not enter the line ( balking).

Queue Discipline

Queue discipline refers to the order in which customers are processed. All but one of the models to be described shortly assume that service is provided on a first-come, first-served basis. This is perhaps the most commonly encountered rule. There is first-come service at banks, stores, theaters, restaurants, four-way stop signs, registration lines, and so on. Examples of systems that do not serve on a first-come basis include hospital emergency rooms, rush orders in a factory, supermarkets that have multiple checkout lines, and mainframe computer processing of jobs. In these and similar situations, customers do not all represent the same waiting costs; those with the highest costs (e.g., the most seriously ill) are processed first, even though other customers may have arrived earlier.

18.5 MEASURES OF WAITING-LINE PERFORMANCE

The operations manager typically looks at five measures when evaluating existing or proposed service systems. They relate to potential customer dissatisfaction and costs:

  1. The average number of customers waiting, either in line or in the system

  2. The average time customers wait, either in line or in the system

  3. System utilization, which refers to the percentage of capacity utilized

  4. The implied cost of a given level of capacity and its related waiting line

  5. The probability that an arrival will have to wait for service

Of these measures, system utilization bears some elaboration. It reflects the extent to which the servers are busy rather than idle. On the surface, it might seem that the operations manager would want to seek 100 percent utilization. However, as Figure 18.6 illustrates, increases in system utilization are achieved at the expense of increases in both the length of the waiting line and the average waiting time. In fact, these values become exceedingly large as utilization approaches 100 percent. The implication is that under normal circumstances, 100 percent utilization is not a realistic goal. Even if it were, 100 percent utilization of service personnel is not good; they need some slack time. Thus, instead, the operations manager should try to achieve a system that minimizes the sum of waiting costs and capacity costs.

page 793 

image

18.6 QUEUING MODELS: INFINITE-SOURCE

Many queuing models are available for a manager or analyst to choose from. The discussion here includes four of the most basic and most widely used models. The purpose is to provide an exposure to a range of models rather than an extensive coverage of the field. All assume a Poisson arrival rate. Moreover, the models pertain to a system operating under steady-state conditions; that is, they assume the average arrival and service rates are stable (e.g., the opening rush at a store is over). The four models described are:

  1. Single server, exponential service time

  2. Single server, constant service time

  3. Multiple servers, exponential service time

  4. Multiple priority service, exponential service time

Note that the terms server and channel mean the same thing. To facilitate your use of waiting-line models, Table 18.1 provides a list of the symbols used for the infinite-source models.

TABLE 18.1

Infinite-source symbols

Symbol

Represents

λ

Customer arrival rate

μ

Service rate per server

L q

The average number of customers waiting for service

L s

The average number of customers in the system (waiting and/or being served)

r

The average number of customers being served

ρ

The system utilization

W q

The average time customers wait in line

W s

The average time customers spend in the system (waiting in line plus service time)

1/ μ

Service time

P 0

The probability of zero units in the system

P n

The probability of n units in the system

M

The number of servers

L max

The maximum expected number waiting in line

page 794 

Basic Relationships

Certain basic relationships hold for all infinite-source models. Knowledge of these can be very helpful in deriving desired performance measures, given a few key values. The following are the basic relationships:

Note: The arrival and service rates, represented by λ and M, must be in the same units (e.g., customers per hour, customers per minute).

System utilization: This reflects the ratio of demand (as measured by the arrival rate) to supply or capacity (as measured by the product of the number of servers, M, and the service rate, μ).

(18–1)

The average number of customers being served:

(18–2)

For nearly all queuing systems, there is a relationship between the average time a unit spends in the system or queue and the average number of units in the system or queue. According to Little’s law, for a stable system, the average number of customers in line or in the system is equal to the average customer arrival rate multiplied by the average time in line or in the system. That is,

The implications of this are important to analysis of waiting lines. The relationships are independent of any probability distribution and require no assumptions about which customers arrive or are serviced, or the order in which they are served. It also means that knowledge of any two of the three variables can be used to obtain the third variable. For example, knowing the arrival rate and the average number in line, one can solve for the average waiting time.

The average number of customers

Waiting in line for service: L q [Model dependent. Obtain using a table or formula.]

(18–3)

The average time customers are

(18–4)

(18–5)

All infinite-source models require that system utilization be less than 1.0; the models apply only to underloaded systems.

The average number waiting in line, L q , is a key value because it is a determinant of some of the other measures of system performance, such as the average number in the system, the average time in line, and the average time in the system. Hence, L q will usually be one of the first values you will want to determine in problem solving.

Figure 18.7 can help you relate the symbols to the basic relationships in a queuing system.

image

page 795 

Note that as the system capacity as measured by M μ increases, the system utilization for a given arrival rate decreases.

Single Server, Exponential Service Time, M/M/1 1

The simplest model involves a system that has one server (or a single crew). The queue discipline is first-come, first-served, and it is assumed that the customer arrival rate can be approximated by a Poisson distribution, and the service time determined by a negative exponential distribution. There is no limit on length of queue.

Table 18.2 lists the formulas for the single-server model, which should be used in conjunction with Formulas 18–1 through 18–5.

page 796 

TABLE 18.2

Formulas for basic single-server model

Performance Measure

Equation

 

Average number in line

(18–6)

Probability of zero units in the system

(18–7)

Probability of n units in the system

(18–8a)

Probability of less than n units in the system

(18–8b)

Single Server, Constant Service Time, M/D/1

As noted previously, waiting lines are a consequence of random, highly variable arrival and service rates. If a system can reduce or eliminate the variability of either or both, it can shorten waiting lines noticeably. A case in point is a system with constant service time. The effect of a constant service time is to cut in half the average number of customers waiting in line.

(18–9)

page 797 

The average time customers spend waiting in line is also cut in half. Similar improvements can be realized by smoothing arrival times (e.g., by use of appointments). Thus, anything a manager can do to reduce service time variability will reduce the number waiting and the time waiting.

Multiple Servers, M/M/S

A multiple-server system exists whenever two or more servers are working independently to provide service to customer arrivals. Use of the model involves the following assumptions:

  • A Poisson arrival rate and exponential service time.

  • Servers all work at the same average rate.

  • Customers form a single waiting line (in order to maintain first-come, first-served processing).

Formulas for the multiple-server model are listed in Table 18.3. Obviously, the multiple-server formulas are more complex than the single-server formulas, especially the formulas for L q and P 0. These formulas are shown primarily for completeness; you can actually determine their values using Table 18.4, which gives values of L q and P 0 for selected values of λ/ μ and M.

TABLE 18.3

Multiple-server queuing formulas

Performance Measure

Equation

Average number in line

(18–10)

Probability of zero units in the system

(18–11)

Average waiting time for a customer who has to wait

(18–12)

Probability that an arrival will have to wait for service

(18–13)

page 798 

TABLE 18.4

Infinite-source values for L q and P 0 given λ/ µ and M

λ / µ

M

L q

P 0

0.15

1

0.026

.850

 

2

0.001

.860

0.20

1

0.050

.800

 

2

0.002

.818

0.25

1

0.083

.750

 

2

0.004

.778

0.30

1

0.129

.700

 

2

0.007

.739

0.35

1

0.188

.650

 

2

0.011

.702

0.40

1

0.267

.600

 

2

0.017

.667

0.45

1

0.368

.550

 

2

0.024

.633

 

3

0.002

.637

0.50

1

0.500

.500

 

2

0.033

.600

 

3

0.003

.606

0.55

1

0.672

.450

 

2

0.045

.569

 

3

0.004

.576

0.60

1

0.900

.400

 

2

0.059

.538

 

3

0.006

.548

0.65

1

1.207

.350

 

2

0.077

.509

 

3

0.008

.521

0.70

1

1.633

.300

 

2

0.077

.509

 

3

0.008

.521

0.70

1

1.633

.300

 

2

0.098

.481

 

3

0.011

.495

0.75

1

2.250

.250

 

2

0.123

.455

 

3

0.015

.471

0.80

1

3.200

.200

 

2

0.152

.429

 

3

0.019

.447

0.85

1

4.817

.150

 

2

0.187

.404

 

3

0.024

.425

 

4

0.003

.427

0.90

1

8.100

.100

 

2

0.229

.379

 

3

0.030

.403

 

4

0.004

.406

0.95

1

18.050 

.050

 

2

0.277

.356

 

3

0.037

.383

 

4

0.005

.386

1.0

2

0.333

.333

 

3

0.045

.364

 

4

0.007

.367

1.1

2

0.477

.290

 

3

0.066

.327

 

4

0.011

.332

1.2

2

0.675

.250

 

3

0.094

.294

 

4

0.016

.300

 

5

0.003

.301

1.3

2

0.951

.212

 

3

0.130

.264

 

4

0.023

.271

 

5

0.004

.272

1.4

2

1.345

.176

 

3

0.177

.236

 

4

0.032

.245

 

5

0.006

.246

1.5

2

1.929

.143

 

3

0.237

.211

 

4

0.045

.221

 

5

0.009

.223

1.6

2

2.844

.111

 

3

0.313

.187

 

4

0.060

.199

 

5

0.012

.201

1.7

2

4.426

.081

 

3

0.409

.166

 

4

0.080

.180

 

5

0.017

.182

1.8

2

7.674

.053

 

3

0.532

.146

 

4

0.105

.162

 

5

0.023

.165

1.9

2

17.587 

.026

 

3

0.688

.128

 

4

0.136

.145

 

5

0.030

.149

 

6

0.007

.149

2.0

3

0.889

.111

 

4

0.174

.130

 

5

0.040

.134

 

6

0.009

.135

2.1

3

1.149

.096

 

4

0.220

.117

 

5

0.052

.121

 

6

0.012

.122

2.2

3

1.491

.081

 

4

0.277

.105

 

5

0.066

.109

 

6

0.016

.111

2.3

3

1.951

.068

 

4

0.346

.093

 

5

0.084

.099

 

6

0.021

.100

2.4

3

2.589

.056

 

4

0.431

.083

 

5

0.105

.089

 

6

0.027

.090

 

7

0.007

.091

2.5

3

3.511

.045

 

4

0.533

.074

 

5

0.130

.080

 

6

0.034

.082

 

7

0.009

.082

2.6

3

4.933

.035

 

4

0.658

.065

 

5

0.161

.072

 

6

0.043

.074

 

7

0.011

.074

2.7

3

7.354

.025

 

4

0.811

.057

 

5

0.198

.065

 

6

0.053

.067

 

7

0.014

.067

2.8

3

12.273 

.016

 

4

1.000

.050

 

5

0.241

.058

 

6

0.066

.060

 

7

0.018

.061

2.9

3

27.193 

.008

 

4

1.234

.044

 

5

0.293

.052

 

6

0.081

.054

 

7

0.023

.055

3.0

4

1.528

.038

 

5

0.354

.047

 

6

0.099

.049

 

7

0.028

.050

 

8

0.008

.050

3.1

4

1.902

.032

 

5

0.427

.042

 

6

0.120

.044

 

7

0.035

.045

 

8

0.010

.045

3.2

4

2.386

.027

 

5

0.513

.037

 

6

0.145

.040

 

7

0.043

.040

 

8

0.012

.041

3.3

4

3.027

.023

 

5

0.615

.033

 

6

0.174

.036

 

7

0.052

.037

 

8

0.015

.037 page 799

3.4

4

3.906

.019

 

5

0.737

.029

 

6

0.209

.032

 

7

0.063

.033

 

8

0.019

.033

3.5

4

5.165

.015

 

5

0.882

.026

 

6

0.248

.029

 

7

0.076

.030

 

8

0.023

.030

 

9

0.007

.030

3.6

4

7.090

.011

 

5

1.055

.023

 

6

0.295

.026

 

7

0.019

.027

 

8

0.028

.027

 

9

0.008

.027

3.7

4

10.347 

.008

 

5

1.265

.020

 

6

0.349

.023

 

7

0.109

.024

 

8

0.034

.025

 

9

0.010

.025

3.8

4

16.937 

.005

 

5

1.519

.017

 

6

0.412

.021

 

7

0.129

.022

 

8

0.041

.022

 

9

0.013

.022

3.9

4

36.859 

.002

 

5

1.830

.015

 

6

0.485

.019

 

7

0.153

.020

 

8

0.050

.020

 

9

0.016

.020

4.0

5

2.216

.013

 

6

0.570

.017

 

7

0.180

.018

 

8

0.059

.018

 

9

0.019

.018

4.1

5

2.703

.011

 

6

0.668

.015

 

7

0.212

.016

 

8

0.070

.016

 

9

0.023

.017

4.2

5

3.327

.009

 

6

0.784

.013

 

7

0.248

.014

 

8

0.083

.015

 

9

0.027

.015

 

10

0.009

.015

4.3

5

4.149

.008

 

6

0.919

.012

4.3

7

0.289

.130

 

8

0.097

.013

 

9

0.033

.014

 

10

0.011

.014

4.4

5

5.268

.006

 

6

1.078

.010

 

7

0.337

.012

 

8

0.114

.012

 

9

0.039

.012

 

10 

0.013

.012

4.5

5

6.862

005

 

6

1.265

.009

 

7

0.391

.010

 

8

0.134

.011

 

9

0.046

.011

 

10 

0.015

.011

4.6

5

9.289

.004

 

6

1.487

.008

 

7

0.453

.009

 

8

0.156

.010

 

9

0.054

.010

 

10

0.018

.010

4.7

5

13.382 

.003

 

6

1.752

.007

 

7

0.525

.008

 

8

0.181

.009

 

9

0.064

.009

 

10 

0.022

.009

4.8

5

21.641 

.002

 

6

2.071

.006

 

7

0.607

.008

 

8

0.209

.008

 

9

0.074

.008

 

10 

0.026

.008

4.9

5

46.566 

.001

 

6

2.459

.005

 

7

0.702

.007

 

8

0.242

.007

 

9

0.087

.007

 

10 

0.031

.007

 

11

0.011

.007

5.0

6

2.938

.005

 

7

0.810

.006

 

8

0.279

.006

 

9

0.101

.007

 

10 

0.036

.007

 

11

0.013

.007

5.1

6

3.536

.004

 

7

0.936

.005

 

8

0.321

.006

 

9

0.117

.006

 

10 

0.042

.006

 

11

0.015

.006

5.2

6

4.301

.003

 

7

1.081

.005

 

8

0.368

.005

 

9

0.135

.005

 

10 

0.049

.005

 

11

0.018

.006

5.3

6

5.303

.003

 

7

1.249

.004

 

8

0.422

.005

 

9

0.155

.005

 

10 

0.057

.005

 

11

0.021

.005

 

12

0.007

.005

5.4

6

6.661

.002

 

7

1.444

.004

 

8

0.483

.004

 

9

0.178

.004

 

10 

0.066

.004

 

11

0.024

.005

 

12

0.009

.005

5.5

6

8.590

.002

 

7

1.674

.003

 

8

0.553

.004

 

9

0.204

.004

 

10 

0.077

.004

 

11

0.028

.004

 

12

0.010

.004

5.6

6

11.519 

.001

 

7

1.944

.003

 

8

0.631

.003

 

9

0.233

.004

 

10 

0.088

.004

 

11

0.033

.004

 

12

0.012

.004

5.7

6

16.446 

.001

 

7

2.264

.002

 

8

0.721

.003

 

9

0.266

.003

 

10 

0.102

.003

 

11

0.038

.003

 

12

0.014

.003

5.8

6

26.373 

.001

 

7

2.648

.002

 

8

0.823

.003

 

9

0.303

.003

 

10 

0.116

.003

 

11

0.044

.003

 

12

0.017

.003

5.9

6

56.300 

.000

 

7

3.113

.002

 

8

0.939

.002

 

9

0.345

.003

 

10 

0.133

.003

To use Table 18.4, compute the value of λ/ μ and round according to the number of decimal places given for that ratio in the table. Then, simply read the values of L q and P 0 for the appropriate number of channels, M. For instance, if λ/ μ = 0.50 and M = 2, the table provides a value of 0.033 for L q and a value of .600 for P 0. These values can then be used to compute other measures of system performance. Note that the formulas in Table 18.3 and the values in Table 18.4 yield average amounts (i.e., expected values). Note also that Table 18.4 can be used for some single-channel problems (i.e., M = 1) as well.

page 800 

The Excel template also can be used to solve Example 4. After entering λ = 6.6 and μ = 1.2 at the top of the template, the queuing statistics for 7 servers are shown in the first column of the table in the template. The template also provides queuing statistics for 8 through 12 servers for comparison, although these are not required for this example. In addition, the template can be used to increment λ, μ, or the number of servers to further investigate the queuing system.

The process also can be worked in reverse; that is, an analyst can determine the capacity needed to achieve specified levels of various performance measures. This approach is illustrated in the following example.

Finally, note that in a situation where there are multiple servers, each with a separate line (e.g., a supermarket), each line would be treated as a single-server system.

Cost Analysis

The design of a service system often reflects the desire of management to balance the cost of capacity with the expected cost of customers waiting in the system. (Note that customer waiting cost refers to the costs incurred by the organization due to customer waiting.) For example, in designing loading docks for a warehouse, the cost of docks plus loading crews must be balanced against the cost of trucks and drivers that will be in the system, both while waiting to be unloaded and while actually being unloaded. Similarly, the cost of having a mechanic wait for tools at a tool crib must be balanced against the cost of servers at the crib. In cases where the customers are not employees (e.g., retail sales), the costs can include lost sales when customers refuse to wait, the cost of providing waiting space, and the cost of added congestion (lost business, shoplifting).

The optimal capacity (usually in terms of number of channels) is one that minimizes the sum of customer waiting costs and capacity or server costs. Thus, the goal is:

page 802 

The simplest approach to a cost analysis involves computing system costs—that is, computing the costs for customers in the system and total capacity cost. Capacity cost typically is a function of the number of servers.

An iterative process is used to identify the capacity size that will minimize total costs. Capacity is incremented one unit at a time (e.g., increase the number of channels by one), and the total cost is computed at each increment. Because the total cost curve is U-shaped, usually the total cost will initially decrease as capacity is increased, and then it will eventually begin to increase. Once it begins to increase, additional increases in capacity will cause it to continue to increase. Hence, once that occurs, the optimal capacity size can be readily identified. Figure 18.8 illustrates this approach. Find the total cost for M = 1, then M = 2, M = 3, and continue as long as the total costs continue to decline. However, as soon as the total cost begins to rise, as it does at M = 3 in Figure 18.8, the search can be stopped. The optimal solution is apparent; it is M = 2. There would be no need to continue computing total costs for additional servers because, as you can see, the total costs will continue to increase as more servers are added. Note: Although in many instances the starting point is M = 1, the general rule is to begin at the smallest number of servers for which the system is underloaded (i.e., the system utilization is < 1.00).

image

The computation of customer waiting costs is based on the average number of customers in the system. This is perhaps not intuitively obvious; instead, it might seem that customer waiting time in the system would be more appropriate. However, that approach would pertain to only one customer—it would not convey information concerning how many customers would wait that long. Obviously, an average of five customers waiting would involve a lower waiting cost than an average of nine. Therefore, it is necessary to focus on the number waiting. Moreover, if, on average, two customers are in the system, this is equivalent to having exactly two customers in the system at all times, even though in reality there will be times when zero, one, two, three, or more customers are in the system.

One additional point should be made concerning cost analysis. Because both customer waiting costs and capacity costs often reflect estimated amounts, the apparent optimal solution may not represent the true optimum. One ramification of this is that when computations are shown to the nearest penny, or even the nearest dollar, the total cost figures may seem to imply a higher degree of precision than is really justified by the cost estimates. This is compounded by the fact that arrival and service rates may either be approximations or not be exactly represented by the Poisson/exponential distribution. Another ramification is that if cost estimates can be obtained as ranges (e.g., customer waiting cost is estimated to range between $40 and $50 per hour), total costs should be computed using both ends of the range to see whether the optimal solution is affected. If it is, management must decide whether to expend additional effort to obtain more precise cost estimates or choose one of the two indicated optimal solutions. Management would most likely choose to employ the latter strategy if there were little disparity between total costs of various capacity levels close to the indicated optimal solutions.

Maximum Line Length

Another question that often comes up in capacity planning is the amount of space to allocate for waiting lines. Theoretically, with an infinite population source, the waiting line can become infinitely long. This implies that no matter how much space is allocated for a waiting line, one can ever be completely sure the space requirements won’t exceed that amount. Nonetheless, as a practical matter, one can determine a line length that will not be exceeded a specified proportion of the time. For instance, an analyst may wish to know the length of line that will probably not be exceeded 98 percent of the time, or perhaps 99 percent of the time, and use that number as a planning value.

The approximate line length that will satisfy a specified percentage can be determined by solving the following equation for L max:

(18–14)

where

The resulting value of L max will not usually be an integer. Generally, round up to the next integer and treat the value as L max. However, as a practical matter, if the computed page 804value of L max is less than .10 above the next lower integer, round down. Thus, 15.2 would be rounded to 16, but 15.06 would be rounded to 15.

Multiple Priorities

In many queuing systems, processing occurs on a first-come, first-served basis. However, there are situations in which that rule is inappropriate. The reason is that the waiting cost or penalty incurred is not the same for all customers. In a hospital emergency waiting room, a wide variety of injuries and illnesses needs treatment. Some may be minor (e.g., sliver in a finger) and others may be much more serious, even life-threatening. It is more reasonable to treat the most serious cases first, letting the nonserious cases wait until all serious cases have been treated. Similarly, computer processing of jobs often follows rules other than first-come, first-served (e.g., shortest job first). In such cases, a multiple-priority model is useful for describing customer waiting times.

In these systems, arriving customers are assigned to one of several priority classes, or categories, according to a predetermined assignment method (e.g., in a hospital emergency room, heart attacks, serious injuries, and unconscious persons are assigned to the highest priority class; sprains, minor cuts, bruises, and rashes are assigned to the lowest class; and other problems are assigned to one or more intermediate classes). Customers are then processed by class, highest class first. Within each class, processing is first-come, first-served. Thus, all customers in the highest class would be processed before those in the next lower class, then processing would move to that class, and then to the next lower class. Exceptions would occur only if a higher-priority customer arrived; that customer would be processed after the customer currently being processed (i.e., service would not be preemptive).

This model incorporates all of the assumptions of the basic multiple-server model except that it uses priority serving instead of first-come, first-served. Arrivals to the system are assigned a priority as they arrive (e.g., highest priority = 1, next priority class = 2, next priority class = 3, and so on). An existing queue might look something like this:

page 805 

Within each class, waiting units are processed in the order in which they arrived (i.e., first-come, first-served). Thus, in this sequence, the first 1 would be processed as soon as a server was available. The second 1 would be processed when that server or another one became available. If, in the interim, another 1 arrived, it would be next in line ahead of the first 2. If there were no new arrivals, the only 2 would be processed by the next available server. At that point, if a new 1 or 2 arrived, it would be processed ahead of the 3s and the 4. Conversely, if a new 4 arrived, it would take its place at the end of the line.

Obviously, a unit with a low priority could conceivably wait a rather long time for processing. In some cases, units that have waited more than some specified time are reassigned to a higher priority.

Table 18.5 gives the appropriate formulas for this multiple-channel priority service model. However, due to the extent of computations involved, it is best to use the appropriate Excel template on the website for computations.

TABLE 18.5

Multiple-server priority service model

Performance Measure

Formula

Formula Number

System utilization

(18–15)

Intermediate values ( L q from Table 18.4)

(18–16)

(18–17)

Average waiting time in line for units in kth priority class

(18–18)

Average time in the system for units in the kth priority class

(18–19)

Average number waiting in line for units in the kth priority class

(18–20)

Revising Priorities. If any of the waiting times computed in Example 8 is deemed too long by management (e.g., a waiting time of .147 hour for tools in the first class might be too long), several options are available. One is to increase the number of servers. Another is to attempt to increase the service rate, say, by introducing new methods. If such options are not feasible, another approach is to reexamine the membership of each of the priority classifications, because if some repair requests in the first priority class, for example, can be reassigned to the second priority class, this will tend to decrease the average waiting times for repair jobs in the highest priority classification, simply because the arrival rate of those items will be lower.

Example 9 offers several interesting results. One is that through reduction of the arrival rate of the highest priority class, the average waiting time for units in that class has decreased. In other words, removing some members of the highest class and placing them into the next-lower class reduced the average waiting time for units that remained in the highest class. Note that the average waiting time for the second priority class also was reduced, even though units were added to that class. Although this may appear counterintuitive, it is necessary to recognize that the total waiting time (when all arrivals are taken into account) will remain unchanged. We can see this by noticing that the average number waiting (see Example 8, part d) is .2938 + .8813 + 1.7625 = 2.9376. In Example 9, using the average waiting times just computed, the average number waiting in all three classes is:

Aside from a slight difference due to rounding, the totals are the same.

Another interesting observation is that the average waiting time for customers in the third priority class did not change from the preceding example. The reason for this is that the total arrival rate for the two higher-priority classes did not change, and the average arrival rate for this class did not change. Hence, units assigned to the lowest class must still contend with a combined arrival rate of 4 for the two higher-priority classes.

18.7 QUEUING MODEL: FINITE-SOURCE

The finite-source model is appropriate for cases in which the calling population is limited to a relatively small number of potential calls. For instance, one person may be responsible for handling breakdowns on 15 machines; thus, the size of the calling population is 15. However, there may be more than one server or channel; for example, due to a backlog of machines awaiting repairs, the manager might authorize an additional person to work on repairs.

page 808 

As in the infinite-source models, arrival rates are required to be Poisson and service times exponential. A major difference between the finite- and infinite-source models is that the arrival rate of customers in a finite situation is affected by the length of the waiting line; the arrival rate decreases as the length of the line increases simply because there is a decreasing proportion of the population left to generate calls for service. The limit occurs when all of the population is waiting in line. At that point, the arrival rate is zero because no additional units can arrive.

Because the mathematics of the finite-source model can be complex, analysts often use finite-queuing tables in conjunction with simple formulas to analyze these systems. Table 18.6 contains a list of the key formulas and definitions. You will find it helpful to study the diagram of a cycle that is presented in the table. It can be useful to think of the cycle in terms of a machine that is running (first part of the cycle), waiting to be repaired or unloaded (second phase of the cycle), or being repaired or unloaded (last phase of the cycle). The cycle then repeats.

TABLE 18.6

Finite-source queuing formulas and notation

Performance Measure

Formulas

Notation

Service factor

(18–21)

D = Probability that a customer will have to wait in line

Average number waiting

(18–22)

F = Efficiency factor: 1 – Percentage waiting in line

Average waiting time

(18–23)

H = Average number of customers being served

Average number running

(18–24)

J = Average number of customers not in line or in service

Average number being served

(18–25)

L = Average number of customers waiting for service

Number in population

(18–25)

M = Number of service channels

N = Number of potential customers

T = Average service time

U = Average time between customer service requirements per customer

W = Average time customers wait in line

X = Service factor

*The purpose of this formula is to provide an understanding of F. Because the value of F is needed to compute J, L, and H, the formulas cannot be used to actually compute F. The finite queuing tables must be used for that purpose.

Adapted from L. G. Peck and R. N. Hazelwood, Finite Queuing Tables (New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1958).

Table 18.7 is an abbreviated finite-queuing table used to obtain values of D and F. (Most of the formulas require a value for F.) In order to use the finite-queuing table, follow this procedure:

page 809 

TABLE 18.7

Finite-queuing tables

X

M

D

F

Population 5

.012

1

.060

.999

.019

1

.095

.998

.025

1

.125

.997

.030

1

.149

.996

.034

1

.169

.995

.036

1

.179

.994

.040

1

.199

.993

.042

1

.208

.992

.044

1

.218

.991

.046

1

.228

.990

.050

1

.247

.989

.052

1

.257

.988

.054

1

.266

.987

.056

2

.018

.999

 

1

.276

.985

.058

2

.019

.999

 

1

.285

.984

.060

2

.020

.999

 

1

.295

.983

.062

2

.022

.999

 

1

.304

.982

.064

2

.023

.999

 

1

.314

.981

.066

2

.024

.999

 

1

.323

.979

.068

2

.026

.999

 

1

.333

.978

.070

2

.027

.999

 

1

.342

.977

.075

2

.031

.999

 

1

.365

.973

.080

2

.035

.998

 

1

.388

.969

.085

2

.040

.998

 

1

.410

.965

.090

2

.044

.998

 

1

.432

.960

.095

2

.049

.997

 

1

.454

.955

.100

2

.054

.997

 

1

.475

.950

.105

2

.059

.997

 

1

.496

.945

.125

2

.082

.994

 

1

.575

.920

.130

2

.089

.933

 

1

.594

.914

.135

2

.095

.933

 

1

.612

.907

.140

2

.102

.992

 

1

.630

.900

.145

3

.011

.999

 

2

.109

.991

 

1

.647

.892

.150

3

.012

.999

 

2

.115

.990

 

1

.664

.885

.155

3

.013

.999

 

2

.123

.989

 

1

.680

.877

.160

3

.015

.999

 

2

.130

.988

 

1

.695

.869

.165

3

.016

.999

 

2

.137

.987

 

1

.710

.861

.170

3

.017

.999

 

2

.145

.985

 

1

.725

.853

.180

3

.021

.999

 

2

.161

.983

 

1

.752

.836

.190

3

.024

.998

 

2

.117

.980

 

1

.778

.819

.200

3

.028

.998

 

2

.194

.976

 

1

.801

.801

.210

3

.032

.998

 

2

.211

.973

 

1

.822

.783

.220

3

.036

.997

 

2

.229

.969

 

1

.842

.765

.230

3

.041

.997

 

2

.247

.965

 

1

.860

.747

.260

3

.058

.994

 

2

.303

.950

 

1

.903

.695

.270

3

.064

.994

 

2

.323

.944

 

1

.915

.677

.280

3

.071

.993

 

2

.342

.938

 

1

.925

.661

.290

4

.007

.999

 

3

.079

.992

 

2

.362

.932

 

1

.934

.644

.300

4

.008

.999

 

3

.086

.990

 

2

.382

.926

 

1

.942

.628

.310

4

.009

.999

 

3

.094

.989

 

2

.402

.919

 

1

.950

.613

.320

4

.010

.999

 

3

.103

.988

 

2

.422

.912

 

1

.956

.597

.330

4

.012

.999

 

3

.112

.986

 

2

.442

.904

 

1

.962

.583

.340

4

.013

.999

 

3

.121

.985

 

2

.462

.896

 

1

.967

.569

.360

4

.017

.998

 

3

.141

.981

 

2

.501

.880

 

1

.975

.542

.380

4

.021

.998

 

3

.163

.976

 

2

.540

.863

 

1

.981

.516

.400

4

.026

.997

 

3

.186

.972

 

2

.579

.845

.440

3

.238

.960

 

2

.652

.807

 

1

.992

.451

.460

4

.045

.995

 

3

.266

.953

 

2

.686

.787

 

1

.994

.432

.480

4

.053

.994

 

3

.296

.945

 

2

.719

.767

 

1

.996

.415

.500

4

.063

.992

 

3

.327

.936

 

2

.750

.748

 

1

.997

.399

.520

4

.073

.991

 

3

.359

.927

 

2

.779

.728

 

1

.998

.384

.540

4

.085

.989

 

3

.392

.917

 

2

.806

.708

 

1

.998

.370

.560

4

.098

.986

 

3

.426

.906

 

2

.831

.689

 

1

.999

.357

.580

4

.113

.984

 

3

.461

.895

 

2

.854

.670

 

1

.999

.345

.600

4

.130

.981

 

3

.497

.883

 

2

.875

.652

 

1

.999

.333

.650

4

.179

.972

 

3

.588

.850

 

2

.918

.608

 

1

.999

.308

.700

4

.240

.960

 

3

.678

.815

 

2

.950

.568

 

1

.999

.286

.750

4

.316

.944 page 810

.110

2

.065

.996

 

1

.516

.939

.115

2

.017

.995

 

1

.537

.933

.120

2

.076

.995

 

1

.556

.927

.850

4

.522

.900

 

3

.907

.702

 

2

.995

.470

.900

4

.656

.871

 

3

.957

.666

 

2

.998

.444

.950

4

.815

.838

 

3

.989

.631

Population 10

0.16

1

.144

.997

.019

1

.170

.996

.021

1

.188

.995

.023

1

.206

.994

.025

1

.224

.993

.026

1

.232

.992

.028

1

.250

.991

.030

1

.268

.990

.032

2

.033

.999

 

1

.285

.988

.034

2

.037

.999

 

1

.301

.986

.036

2

.041

.999

 

1

.320

.984

.038

2

.046

.999

 

1

.337

.982

.040

2

.050

.999

 

1

.354

.980

.042

2

.055

.999

.044

2

.060

.998

.046

2

.065

.998

.048

2

.071

.998

 

1

.421

.970

.050

2

.076

.998

 

1

.437

.967

.052

2

.082

.997

 

1

.454

.963

.054

2

.088

.997

 

1

.470

.960

.240

3

.046

.996

 

2

.265

.960

 

1

.876

.730

.250

3

.052

.995

 

2

.284

.955

 

1

.890

.712

.064

1

.547

.940

.066

2

.126

.995

 

1

.562

.936

.068

3

.020

.999

 

2

.133

.994

 

1

.577

.931

.070

3

.022

.999

 

2

.140

.994

 

1

.591

.926

.075

3

.026

.999

 

2

.158

.992

 

1

.627

.913

.080

3

.031

.999

 

2

.177

.990

 

1

.660

.899

.085

3

.037

.999

 

2

.196

.988

 

1

.692

.883

.090

3

.043

.998

 

2

.216

.986

 

1

.722

.867

.095

3

.049

.998

 

2

.237

.984

 

1

.750

.850

.100

3

.056

.998

 

2

.258

.981

 

1

.776

.832

.105

3

.064

.997

 

1

.800

.814

 

2

.301

.974

.115

3

.081

.996

 

2

.324

.971

 

1

.843

.776

.120

4

.016

.999

 

3

.090

.995

 

2

.346

.967

 

1

.861

.756

.125

4

.019

.999

 

1

.986

.493

.420

4

.031

.997

 

3

.211

.966

 

2

.616

.826

 

1

.989

.471

.440

4

.037

.996

.135

2

.415

.952

 

1

.907

.699

.140

4

.028

.999

 

3

.132

.991

 

2

.437

.947

 

1

.919

.680

.145

4

.032

.999

 

3

.144

.990

 

2

.460

.941

 

1

.929

.662

.150

4

.036

.998

 

3

.156

.989

 

2

.483

.935

 

1

.939

.644

.155

4

.040

.998

 

3

.169

.987

 

2

.505

.928

 

1

.947

.627

.160

4

.044

.998

 

3

.182

.986

 

2

.528

.921

 

1

.954

.610

.165

4

.049

.997

 

3

.195

.984

 

2

.550

.914

 

1

.961

.594

.170

4

.054

.997

 

3

.209

.982

 

1

.966

.579

 

4

.066

.996

 

2

.614

.890

 

1

.975

.890

.190

5

.016

.999

 

4

.078

.995

 

3

.269

.973

 

2

.654

.873

 

1

.982

.522

.200

5

.020

.999

 

3

.763

.777

 

2

.972

.532

.800

4

.410

.924

 

3

.841

.739

 

2

.987

.500

.220

5

.030

.998

 

4

.124

.990

 

3

.366

.954

 

2

.761

.815

 

1

.993

.453

.230

5

.037

.998

 

4

.142

.988

 

3

.400

.947

 

2

.791

.794

 

1

.995

.434

.240

5

.044

.997

 

4

.162

.986

 

3

.434

.938

 

2

.819

.774

 

1

.996

.416

.250

6

.010

.999

 

5

.052

.997

 

4

.183

.983

 

3

.469

.929

 

2

.844

.753

 

1

.997

.400

.260

6

.013

.999

 

5

.060

.996

 

4

.205

.980

 

3

.503

.919

 

2

.866

.732

 

1

.998

.384

.270

6

.015

.999

 

4

.228

.976

 

2

.886

.712

.280

6

.018

.999

 

5

.081

.994

 

4

.252

.972

 

3

.571

.896

 

2

.903

.692

 

1

.999

.357

.290

6

.022

.999

 

5

.093

.993

page 811

.056

2

.094

.997

 

1

.486

.956

.058

2

.100

.996

 

1

.501

.953

.060

2

.106

.996

 

1

.517

.949

.062

2

.113

.996

 

1

.532

.945

.064

2

.119

.995

.300

2

.932

.653

 

1

.999

.333

.310

6

.031

.998

 

5

.120

.990

 

4

.331

.957

 

3

.666

.858

 

2

.943

.635

.320

6

.036

.998

 

5

.135

.988

 

4

.359

.952

 

3

.695

.845

 

2

.952

.617

.330

6

.042

.997

 

5

.151

.986

 

4

.387

.945

 

3

.723

.831

 

2

.961

.600

.340

7

.010

.999

 

6

.049

.997

 

5

.168

.983

 

4

.416

.938

 

3

.750

.816

 

2

.968

.584

.360

7

.014

.999

 

6

.064

.995

 

5

.205

.978

 

4

.474

.923

 

3

.798

.787

 

2

.978

.553

.380

7

.019

.999

 

6

.083

.993

 

5

.247

.971

 

4

.533

.906

 

3

.840

.758

 

2

.986

.525

.400

7

.026

.998

 

3

.100

.994

 

2

.369

.962

 

1

.878

.737

.130

4

.022

.999

 

3

.110

.994

 

2

.392

.958

 

1

.893

.718

.135

4

.025

.999

 

3

.121

.993

.400

6

.105

.991

 

5

.292

.963

 

4

.591

.887

 

3

.875

.728

 

2

.991

.499

.420

7

.034

.993

 

6

.130

.987

 

5

.341

.954

 

4

.646

.866

 

3

.905

.700

 

2

.994

.476

.440

7

.045

.997

 

6

.160

.984

 

5

.392

.943

 

4

.698

.845

 

3

.928

.672

 

2

.996

.454

.460

8

.011

.999

 

7

.058

.995

 

6

.193

.979

 

5

.445

.930

 

4

.747

.822

 

3

.947

.646

 

2

.998

.435

.480

8

.015

.999

 

7

.074

.994

 

6

.230

.973

 

5

.499

.916

 

4

.791

.799

 

3

.961

.621

 

2

.998

.417

.500

8

.020

.999

 

7

.093

.992

 

6

.271

.966

 

5

.553

.901

 

4

.830

.775

 

4

.092

.994

 

3

.300

.968

 

2

.692

.854

 

1

.987

.497

.210

5

.025

.999

 

4

.108

.992

 

3

.333

.961

 

2

.728

.835

 

1

.990

.474

.500

3

.972

.598

 

2

.999

.400

.520

8

.026

.998

 

7

.115

.989

 

6

.316

.958

 

5

.606

.884

 

4

.864

.752

 

3

.980

.575

 

2

.999

.385

.540

8

.034

.997

 

7

.141

.986

 

6

.363

.949

 

5

.658

.867

 

4

.893

.729

 

3

.986

.555

.560

8

.044

.996

 

7

.171

.982

 

6

.413

.939

 

5

.707

.848

 

4

.917

.706

 

3

.991

.535

.580

8

.057

.995

 

7

.204

.977

 

6

.465

.927

 

5

.753

.829

 

4

.937

.684

 

3

.994

.517

.600

9

.010

.999

 

8

.072

.994

 

7

.242

.972

 

6

.518

.915

 

5

.795

.809

 

4

.953

.663

 

3

.996

.500

.650

9

.021

.999

 

8

.123

.988

 

4

.278

.968

 

3

.603

.884

 

2

.918

.672

 

1

.999

.345

.300

6

.026

.998

 

5

.106

.991

 

4

.304

.963

 

3

.635

.872

.650

7

.353

.954

 

6

.651

.878

 

5

.882

.759

 

4

.980

.614

 

3

.999

.461

.700

9

.040

.997

 

8

.200

.979

 

7

.484

.929

 

6

.772

.836

 

5

.940

.711

 

4

.992

.571

.750

9

.075

.994

 

8

.307

.965

 

7

.626

.897

 

6

.870

.792

 

5

.975

.666

 

4

.998

.533

.800

9

.134

.988

 

8

.446

.944

 

7

.763

.859

 

6

.939

.747

 

5

.991

.625

 

4

.999

.500

.850

9

.232

.979

 

8

.611

.916

 

7

.879

.818

 

6

.978

.705

 

5

.998

.588

.900

9

.387

.963

 

8

.785

.881

 

7

.957

.777

 

6

.995

.667

.950

9

.630

.938

 

8

.934

.841

 

7

.994

.737

Source: L. G. Peck and R. N. Hazelwood, Finite Queuing Tables (New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1958).

  1. Identify the values for

    1. N, population size

    2. M, number of servers/channels

    3. T, average service time

    4. U, average time between calls for service per customer

  2. Compute the service factor, X = T/( T + U ).

  3. Locate the section of the finite-queuing tables for N.

    page 812 

  4. Using the value of X as the point of entry, find the values of D and F that correspond to M.

  5. Use the values of N, M, X, D, and F as needed to determine the values of the desired measures of system performance.

page 813 

Hence, the present system is superior because its total cost is less than the expected total cost using two operators.

18.8 CONSTRAINT MANAGEMENT

Managers may be able to reduce waiting times by actively managing one or more system constraints. Typically, in the short term, the facility size and the number of servers are fixed resources. However, some other options might be considered:

Use temporary workers. Using temporary or part-time workers during busy periods may be possible. Trade-offs might involve training costs, quality issues, and perhaps slower service than would be provided by regular workers.

Shift demand. In situations where demand varies by time of day, or time of week, variable pricing strategies can be effective in smoothing demand more evenly on the system. Theaters use this option with lower prices to shift demand from busy times to slower times. Restaurants offer “early-bird specials” to accomplish this. Some retail businesses offer coupons that are valid only for certain (slow) days or times.

Standardize the service. We saw the effect of constant service on waiting lines compared to nonconstant service (the number and time in line were cut in half). The more the service can be standardized, the greater the impact on waiting lines.

Look for a bottleneck. One aspect of a process may be largely responsible for a slow service rate. Improving that aspect of the process might yield a disproportionate increase in the service rate. In this regard, employees often have insights that can be utilized.

18.9 THE PSYCHOLOGY OF WAITING

Despite management’s best efforts, in some instances it is not feasible to shorten waiting times. Nevertheless, steps can be taken in certain situations that make the situation more acceptable to those waiting in line, particularly when the waiting line consists of people. The importance of doing so should not be underestimated.

Studies have shown a difference—sometimes a remarkable difference—between the actual time customers spend waiting and their perceived time. Several factors can influence the differences. One is the reason for being in line (e.g., waiting for police or fire personnel, waiting at the emergency room, having other appointments or a plane or train to catch). Aside from those situations, where the level of anxiety can make even short waits seem long, in many instances management can reduce their customers’ perception of the waiting time.

page 814 

If those waiting in line have nothing else to occupy their thoughts, they often tend to focus on the fact that they are waiting in line and usually perceive the waiting time to be longer than the actual waiting time. Conversely, if something else occupies them while they wait, their perception of the waiting time is often less than their actual waiting time. Examples of distractions include in-flight snacks, meals or videos, and magazines and televisions in waiting rooms. Giving customers something to do while waiting, such as filling out forms, can make their wait seem productive. Of course, some customers provide their own distractions (e.g., they talk on their cell phones, text messages, or play games on their cell phones). Another factor can be the level of comfort available (e.g., standing versus sitting, waiting outside in the weather versus inside or under cover). Also, informing customers how long the wait will be can reduce anxiety. For example, call centers sometimes announce the expected waiting time before a service representative will be available, and restaurants usually are able to tell patrons how long they will wait to be seated.

The following reading offers insights for managers on waiting lines. Several of these approaches are employed at Disney theme parks, as illustrated in the second reading.

The implication in these ideas is that imagination and creativity can often play an important role in system design and that mathematical approaches are not the only ones worth considering.

18.10 OPERATIONS STRATEGY

Managers must carefully assess the costs and benefits of various alternatives regarding the capacity of service systems. Working to increase the processing rate may be a worthwhile option, instead of increasing the number of servers. New processing equipment and/or processing methods may contribute to this goal. One important factor to consider is the possibility of reducing variability in processing times by increasing the degree of standardization of the service being provided. In fact, managers of all services would be wise to pursue this goal, not only for the benefits of reduced waiting times, but also because of the benefits of standardizing server training, and hence reducing those costs and times, and because of the potential for increased quality due to the decreased variety in service requirements.

page 815 

Other approaches might involve efforts to shift some arrivals to “off-times” by using reservations systems, “early-bird” specials, senior discounts, or some of the approaches used by Disney to manage customer waiting.

It is also important to recognize that the models presented in this chapter involve assumptions about the probability distributions of arrivals and service that may not be completely satisfied in practice.

1 This notation is commonly used to specify waiting-line models. The first symbol refers to arrivals, the second to service, and the third to the number of servers. M stands for a rate that can be described by a Poisson distribution or, equivalently, a time that can be described by an exponential distribution. Hence, M/M/1 indicates a Poisson arrival rate, a Poisson service rate, and one server. The symbol D is used to denote a deterministic (i.e., constant) service rate. Thus, the notation M/D/1 would indicate the arrival rate is Poisson and the service rate is constant. Finally, the notation M/M/S would indicate multiple servers.

page 824 

page 825 

19.1 INTRODUCTION

Linear programming (LP) techniques consist of a sequence of steps that will lead to an optimal solution to linear-constrained problems, if an optimal solution exists. There are a number of different linear programming techniques; some are special-purpose (i.e., used to find solutions for page 826specific types of problems) and others are more general in scope. This chapter covers the two general-purpose solution techniques: graphical linear programming and computer solutions. Graphical linear programming provides a visual portrayal of many of the important concepts of linear programming. However, it is limited to problems with only two variables. In practice, computers are used to obtain solutions for problems, some of which involve a large number of variables.

19.2 LINEAR PROGRAMMING MODELS

Linear programming models are mathematical representations of constrained optimization problems. These models have certain characteristics in common. Knowledge of these characteristics enables us to recognize problems that can be solved using linear programming. In addition, it also can help us formulate LP models. The characteristics can be grouped into two categories: components and assumptions. First, let’s consider the components.

Four components provide the structure of a linear programming model:

  1. Objective function

  2. Decision variables

  3. Constraints

  4. Parameters

Linear programming algorithms require that a single goal or objective, such as the maximization of profits, be specified. The two general types of objectives are maximization and minimization. A maximization objective might involve profits, revenues, efficiency, or rate of return. Conversely, a minimization objective might involve cost, time, distance traveled, or scrap. The objective function is a mathematical expression that can be used to determine the total profit (or cost, etc., depending on the objective) for a given solution.

Decision variables represent choices available to the decision maker in terms of the amounts of either inputs or outputs. For example, some problems require choosing a combination of inputs to minimize total costs, while others require selecting a combination of outputs to maximize profits or revenues.

Constraints are limitations that restrict the alternatives available to decision makers. The three types of constraints are less than or equal to (≤), greater than or equal to (≥), and simply equal to (=). A ≤ constraint implies an upper limit on the amount of some scarce resource (e.g., machine hours, labor hours, materials) available for use. A ≥ constraint specifies a minimum that must be achieved in the final solution (e.g., must contain at least 10 percent real fruit juice, must get at least 30 MPG on the highway). The = constraint is more restrictive in the sense that it specifies exactly what a decision variable should equal (e.g., make 200 units of product A). A linear programming model can consist of one or more constraints. The constraints of a given problem define the set of combinations of the decision variables that satisfy all constraints; this set is referred to as the feasible solution space . Linear programming algorithms are designed to search the feasible solution space for the combination of decision variables that will yield an optimum in terms of the objective function.

An LP model consists of a mathematical statement of the objective, as well as a mathematical statement of each constraint. These statements consist of symbols (e.g., x 1, x 2) that represent the decision variables and numerical values, called parameters . The parameters are fixed values; the model is solved given those values.

Example 1 illustrates an LP model.

Model Formulation

An understanding of the components of linear programming models is necessary for model formulation. This helps provide organization to the process of assembling information about a problem into a model.

Naturally, it is important to obtain valid information on what constraints are appropriate, as well as on what values of the parameters are appropriate. If this is not done, the usefulness of page 828the model will be questionable. Consequently, in some instances, considerable effort must be expended to obtain that information.

In formulating a model, use the format illustrated in Example 1. Begin by identifying the decision variables. Very often, decision variables are “the quantity of ” something, such as x 1 = the quantity of product 1. Generally, decision variables have profits, costs, times, or a similar measure of value associated with them. Knowing this can help you identify the decision variables in a problem.

Constraints are restrictions or requirements on one or more decision variables, and they refer to available amounts of resources such as labor, material, or machine time, or to minimal requirements, such as “Make at least 10 units of product 1.” It can be helpful to give a name to each constraint, such as “labor” or “material 1.” Let’s consider some of the different kinds of constraints you will encounter.

1. A constraint that refers to one or more decision variables. This is the most common kind of constraint. The constraints in Example 1 are of this type.

2. A constraint that specifies a ratio. For example, “The ratio of x 1 to x 2 must be at least 3 to 2.” To formulate this, begin by setting up the following ratio:

image

Then, cross multiply, obtaining

image

This is not yet in a suitable form because all variables in a constraint must be on the left-hand side of the inequality (or equality) sign, leaving only a constant on the right-hand side. To achieve this, we must subtract the variable amount that is on the right side from both sides. That yields

image

(Note that the direction of the inequality remains the same.)

3. A constraint that specifies a percentage for one or more variables relative to one or more other variables. For example, “ x 1 cannot be more than 20 percent of the mix.” Suppose the mix consists of variables x 1, x 2, and x 3. In mathematical terms, this would be

image

As always, all variables must appear on the left-hand side of the relationship. To accomplish that, we can expand the right-hand side, and then subtract the result from both sides. Expanding yields

image

Subtracting yields

image

Once you have formulated a model, the next task is to solve it. The following sections describe two approaches to a problem solution: graphical solutions and computer solutions.

19.3 GRAPHICAL LINEAR PROGRAMMING

Graphical linear programming is a method for finding optimal solutions to two-variable problems. This section describes that approach.

Outline of Graphical Procedure

The graphical method of linear programming involves plotting the constraint lines on a graph and identifying an area on the graph that satisfies all of the constraints. The area is referred to as the feasible solution space. Next, the objective function is plotted and used to identify the optimal point in the feasible solution space. The coordinates of the point can sometimes be page 829read directly from the graph, although generally an algebraic determination of the coordinates of the point is necessary.

The general procedure followed in the graphical approach is as follows:

  1. Set up the objective function and the constraints in mathematical format.

  2. Plot the constraints.

  3. Identify the feasible solution space.

  4. Plot the objective function.

  5. Determine the optimum solution.

The technique can best be illustrated through solution of a typical problem. Consider the problem described in Example 2.

In terms of meeting the assumptions, it would appear that the relationships are linear: The contribution to profit per unit of each type of computer and the time and storage space per unit of each type of computer are the same regardless of the quantity produced. Therefore, the total impact of each type of computer on the profit and each constraint is a linear function of the quantity of that variable. There may be a question of divisibility because, presumably, only whole units of computers will be sold. However, because this is a recurring process (i.e., the computers will be produced daily; a noninteger solution such as 3.5 computers per day will result in 7 computers every other day), this does not seem to pose a problem. The question of certainty cannot be explored here; in practice, the manager could be questioned to determine if there are any other possible constraints and whether the values shown for assembly times, and so forth, are known with certainty. For the purposes of discussion, we will assume certainty. Last, the assumption of nonnegativity seems justified; negative values for production quantities would not make sense.

page 830 

Because we have concluded that linear programming is appropriate, let us now turn our attention to constructing a model of the microcomputer problem. First, we must define the decision variables. Based on the statement “The manager . . . would like to determine the quantity of each microcomputer to produce,” the decision variables are the quantities of each type of computer. Thus,

x 1 = quantity of type 1 to produce

x 2 = quantity of type 2 to produce

Next, we can formulate the objective function. The profit per unit of type 1 is listed as $60, and the profit per unit of type 2 is listed as $50, so the appropriate objective function is

Maximize Z = 60 x 1 + 50 x 2

where Z is the value of the objective function, given values of x 1 and x 2. Theoretically, a mathematical function requires such a variable for completeness. However, in practice, the objective function often is written without the Z as sort of a shorthand version. (That approach is underscored by the fact that computer input does not call for Z: It is understood. The output of a computerized model does include a Z, though.)

Now for the constraints. There are three resources with limited availability: assembly time, inspection time, and storage space. The fact that availability is limited means that these constraints will all be ≤ constraints. Suppose we begin with the assembly constraint. The type 1 microcomputer requires 4 hours of assembly time per unit, whereas the type 2 microcomputer requires 10 hours of assembly time per unit. Therefore, with a limit of 100 hours available, the assembly constraint is

4 x 1 +10 x 2 ≤ 100 hours

Similarly, each unit of type 1 requires 2 hours of inspection time, and each unit of type 2 requires 1 hour of inspection time. With 22 hours available, the inspection constraint is

2 x 1 + 1 x 2 ≤ 22

( Note: The coefficient of 1 for x 2 need not be shown. Thus, an alternative form for this constraint is 2 x 1 + x 2 ≤ 22.) The storage constraint is determined in a similar manner:

3 x 1 + 3 x 2 ≤ 39

There are no other system or individual constraints. The nonnegativity constraints are

x 1, x 2 ≥ 0

In summary, the mathematical model of the microcomputer problem is

x 1 = quantity of type 1 to produce

x 2 = quantity of type 2 to produce

Maximize 60 x 1 + 50 x 2

image

The next step is to plot the constraints.

Plotting Constraints

Begin by placing the nonnegativity constraints on a graph, as in Figure 19.1. The procedure for plotting the other constraints is simple:

  1. Replace the inequality sign with an equal sign. This transforms the constraint into an equation of a straight line.

image

page 831 

  1. Determine where the line intersects each axis.

    1. To find where it crosses the x 2 axis, set x 1 equal to zero and solve the equation for the value of x 2.

    2. To find where it crosses the x 1 axis, set x 2 equal to zero and solve the equation for the value of x 1

  2. Mark these intersections on the axes, and connect them with a straight line. ( Note: If a constraint has only one variable, it will be a vertical line on a graph if the variable is x 1, or a horizontal line if the variable is x 2.)

  3. Indicate by shading (or by arrows at the ends of the constraint line) whether the inequality is greater than or less than. (A general rule to determine which side of the line satisfies the inequality is to pick a point that is not on line, such as 0,0; solve the equation using these values; and see whether it is greater than or less than the constraint amount.)

  4. Repeat steps 1–4 for each constraint.

    Consider the assembly time constraint:

    4 x 1 + 10 x 2 ≤ 100

    Removing the inequality portion of the constraint produces this straight line:

    4 x 1 + 10 x 2 = 100

    Next, identify the points where the line intersects each axis, as step 2 describes. Thus with x 2 = 0, we find

    4 x 1 + 10(0) = 100

    Solving, we find that 4 x 1 = 100, so x 1 = 25 when x 2 = 0. Similarly, we can solve the equation for x 2 when x 1 = 0:

    4(0) + 10 x 2 = 100

    Solving for x 2, we find x 2 = 10 when x 1 = 0.

Thus, we have two points: x 1 = 0, x 2 = 10, and x 1 = 25, x 2 = 0. We can now add this line to our graph of the nonnegativity constraints by connecting these two points (see Figure 19.2).

image

Next, we must determine which side of the line represents points that are less than 100. To do this, we can select a test point that is not on the line, and we can substitute the x 1 and  x 2 values of that point into the left-hand side of the equation of the line. If the result is less than 100, this tells us that all points on that side of the line are less than the value of the line (e.g., 100). Conversely, if the result is greater than 100, this indicates that the other side of the line represents the set of points that will yield values that are less than 100. A relatively simple test point to use is the origin (i.e., x 1 = 0, x 2 = 0). Substituting these values into the equation yields a value of zero. Obviously, this is less than 100. Hence, the side of the line closest to the origin represents the “less than” area (i.e., the feasible region).

4(0) + 10(0) = 0

page 832 

The feasible region for this constraint and the nonnegativity constraints then becomes the shaded portion shown in Figure 19.3.

image

For the sake of illustration, suppose we try one other point, say x 1 = 10, x 2 = 10. Substituting these values into the assembly constraint yields

4(10) + 10(10) = 140

Clearly, this is greater than 100. Therefore, all points on this side of the line are greater than 100 (see Figure 19.4).

image

Continuing with the problem, we can add the two remaining constraints to the graph. For the inspection constraint:

  1. Convert the constraint into the equation of a straight line by replacing the inequality sign with an equality sign:

    image

  2. Set x 1 equal to zero and solve for x 2:

    2(0) + 1 x 2 = 22

    Solving, we find x 2 = 22. Thus, the line will intersect the x 2 axis at 22.

  3. Next, set x 2 equal to zero and solve for x 1:

    2 x 1 + 1(0) = 22

    Solving, we find x 1 = 11. Thus, the other end of the line will intersect the x 1 axis at 11.

  4. Add the line to the graph (see Figure 19.5).

image

Note that the area of feasibility for this constraint is below the line ( Figure 19.5). Again, the area of feasibility at this point is shaded in for illustration purposes. When graphing problems, it is more practical to refrain from shading in the feasible region until all constraint lines have been drawn. However, because constraints are plotted one at a time, using a small arrow at the end of each constraint to indicate the direction of feasibility can be helpful.

The storage constraint is handled in the same manner:

  1. Convert it into an equality:

    3 x 1 + 3 x 2 = 39

  2. Set x 1 equal to zero and solve for x 2:

    3(0) + 3 x 2 = 39

    page 833 

    Solving, x 2 = 13. Thus, x 2 = 13 when x 1 = 0.

  3. Set x 2 equal to zero and solve for x 1:

    3 x 1 + 3(0) = 39

    Solving, x 1 = 13. Thus, x 1 = 13 when x 2 0.

  4. Add the line to the graph (see Figure 19.6).

image

Identifying the Feasible Solution Space

The feasible solution space is the set of all points that satisfies all constraints. (Recall that the x 1 and x 2 axes form nonnegativity constraints.) The heavily shaded area shown in Figure 19.6 is the feasible solution space for our problem.

The next step is to determine which point in the feasible solution space will produce the optimal value of the objective function. This determination is made using the objective function.

Plotting the Objective Function Line

Plotting an objective function line involves the same logic as plotting a constraint line: Determine where the line intersects each axis. Recall that the objective function for the microcomputer problem is

60 x 1 + 50 x 2

page 834 

This is not an equation because it does not include an equal sign. We can get around this by simply setting it equal to some quantity. Any quantity will do, although one that is evenly divisible by both coefficients is desirable.

Suppose we decide to set the objective function equal to 300. That is,

60 x 1 + 50 x 2 = 300

We can now plot the line on our graph. As before, we can determine the x 1 and x 2 intercepts of the line by setting one of the two variables equal to zero, solving for the other, and then reversing the process. Thus, with x 1 = 0, we have

60(0) + 50 x 2 = 300

Solving, we find x 2 = 6. Similarly, with x 2 = 0, we have

60 x 1 + 50(0) = 300

Solving, we find x 1 = 5. This line is plotted in Figure 19.7.

image

The profit line can be interpreted in the following way: It is an isoprofit line; every point on the line (i.e., every combination of x 1 and x 2 that lies on the line) will provide a profit of $300. We can see from the graph many combinations that are both on the $300 profit line and within the feasible solution space. In fact, considering noninteger as well as integer solutions, the possibilities are infinite.

Suppose we now consider another line, say the $600 line. To do this, we set the objective function equal to this amount. Thus,

60 x 1 + 50 x 2 = 600

Solving for the x 1 and x 2 intercepts yields these two points:

image

This line is plotted in Figure 19.8, along with the previous $300 line for purposes of comparison.

image

Two things are evident in Figure 19.8 regarding the profit lines. One is that the $600 line is farther from the origin than the $300 line; the other is that the two lines are parallel. The lines are parallel because they both have the same slope. The slope is not affected by the right side of the equation. Rather, it is determined solely by the coefficients 60 and 50. It would page 835be correct to conclude that regardless of the quantity we select for the value of the objective function, the resulting line will be parallel to these two lines. Moreover, if the amount is greater than 600, the line will be even farther away from the origin than the $600 line. If the value is less than 300, the line will be closer to the origin than the $300 line. And if the value is between 300 and 600, the line will fall between the $300 and $600 lines. This knowledge will help in determining the optimal solution.

Consider a third line, one with the profit equal to $900. Figure 19.9 shows that line along with the previous two profit lines. As expected, it is parallel to the other two, and even farther away from the origin. However, the line does not touch the feasible solution space at all. Consequently, there is no feasible combination of x 1 and x 2 that will yield that amount of profit. Evidently, the maximum possible profit is an amount between $600 and $900, which we can see by referring to Figure 19.9. We could continue to select profit lines in this manner, and eventually could determine an amount that would yield the greatest profit. However, there is a much simpler alternative. We can plot just one line, say the $300 line. We know that all other lines will be parallel to it. Consequently, by moving this one line parallel to itself, we can “test” other profit lines. We also know that as we move away from the origin, the profits get larger. What we want to know is how far the line can be moved out from the origin and still be touching the feasible solution space, and the values of the decision variables at that point of greatest profit (i.e., the optimal solution). Locate this point on the graph by placing a straight edge along the $300 line (or any other convenient line) and sliding it away from the origin, being careful to keep it parallel to the line. This approach is illustrated in Figure 19.10.

image image

Once we have determined where the optimal solution is in the feasible solution space, we must determine the values of the decision variables at that point. Then, we can use that information to compute the profit for that combination.

Note that the optimal solution is at the intersection of the inspection boundary and the storage boundary, which is one of the corner points (see Figure 19.10). In other words, the optimal combination of x 1 and x 2 must satisfy both boundary (equality) conditions. We can determine those values by solving the two equations simultaneously. The equations are:

image

The idea behind solving two simultaneous equations is to algebraically eliminate one of the unknown variables (i.e., to obtain an equation with a single unknown). This can be accomplished by multiplying the constants of one of the equations by a fixed amount and then adding (or subtracting) the modified equation from the other. (Occasionally, it is easier to multiply each equation by a fixed quantity.) For example, we can eliminate x 2 by multiplying page 836the inspection equation by 3 and then subtracting the storage equation from the modified inspection equation. Thus,

image

Subtracting the storage equation from this produces

image

Solving the resulting equation yields x 1 = 9. The value of x 2 can be found by substituting x 1 = 9 into either of the original equations or the modified inspection equation. Suppose we use the original inspection equation. We have

2(9) + 1 x 2 = 22

Solving, we find x 2 = 4.

Hence, the optimal solution to the microcomputer problem is to produce nine type 1 computers and four type 2 computers per day. We can substitute these values into the objective function to find the optimal profit:

$60(9) + $50(4) = $740

Hence, the last line—the one that would last touch the feasible solution space as we moved away from the origin parallel to the $300 profit line—would be the line where profit equaled $740.

In this problem, the optimal values for both decision variables are integers. This will not always be the case; one or both of the decision variables may turn out to be noninteger. In some situations, noninteger values would be of little consequence. This would be true if the decision variables were measured on a continuous scale, such as the amount of water, sand, sugar, fuel oil, time, or distance needed for optimality, or if the contribution per unit (profit, cost, etc.) were small, as with the number of nails or ball bearings to make. In some cases, the answer would simply be rounded down (maximization problems) or up (minimization problems) with very little impact on the objective function. Here, we assume that noninteger answers are acceptable as such.

Let’s review the procedure for finding the optimal solution using the objective function approach:

  1. Graph the constraints.

  2. Identify the feasible solution space.

  3. Set the objective function equal to some amount that is divisible by each of the objective function coefficients. This will yield integer values for the x 1 and x 2 intercepts and simplify plotting the line. Often, the product of the two objective function coefficients provides a satisfactory line. Ideally, the line will cross the feasible solution space close to the optimal point, and it will not be necessary to slide a straight edge because the optimal solution can be readily identified visually.

  4. After identifying the optimal point, determine which two constraints intersect there. Solve their equations simultaneously to obtain the values of the decision variables at the optimum.

  5. Substitute the values obtained in the previous step into the objective function to determine the value of the objective function at the optimum.

Redundant Constraints

In some cases, a constraint does not form a unique boundary of the feasible solution space. Such a constraint is called a redundant constraint . Two such constraints are illustrated in Figure 19.11. Note that a constraint is redundant if it meets the following test: Its removal would not alter the feasible solution space.

image

page 837 

When a problem has a redundant constraint, at least one of the other constraints in the problem is more restrictive than the redundant constraint.

Solutions and Corner Points

The feasible solution space in graphical linear programming is typically a polygon. Moreover, the solution to any problem will always be at a corner point (intersection of constraints) of the polygon. It is possible to determine the coordinates of each corner point of the feasible solution space, and use those values to compute the value of the objective function at those points. Because the solution is always at a corner point, comparing the values of the objective function at the corner points and identifying the best one (e.g., the maximum value) is another way to identify the optimal corner point. Using the graphical approach, it is much easier to plot the objective function and use that to identify the optimal corner point. However, for problems that have more than two decision variables, and the graphical method isn’t appropriate, the “enumeration” approach is used to find the optimal solution.

With the enumeration approach , the coordinates of each corner point are determined, and then each set of coordinates is substituted into the objective function to determine its value at that corner point. After all corner points have been evaluated, the one with the maximum or minimum value (depending on whether the objective is to maximize or minimize) is identified as the optimal solution.

Thus, in the microcomputer problem, the corner points are x 1 = 0, x 2 = 10, x 1 = 11, x 2 = 0 (by inspection; see Figure 19.10), and x 1 = 9, x 2 = 4 and x 1 = 5, x 2 = 8 (using simultaneous equations, as illustrated on the previous pages). Substituting into the objective function, the values are $500 for (0,10); $740 for (9,4); $660 for (11,0), and $700 for (5,8). Because (9,4) yields the highest value, that corner point is the optimal solution.

In some instances, the objective function will be parallel to one of the constraint lines that forms a boundary of the feasible solution space. When this happens, every combination of x 1 and  x 2 on the segment of the constraint that touches the feasible solution space represents an optimal solution. Hence, there are multiple optimal solutions to the problem. Even in such a case, the solution will also be a corner point—in fact, the solution will be at two corner points: those at the ends of the segment that touches the feasible solution space. Figure 19.12 illustrates an objective function line that is parallel to a constraint line.

image

Minimization

Graphical minimization problems are quite similar to maximization problems. There are, however, two important differences. One is that at least one of the constraints must be of the = or ≥ variety. This causes the feasible solution space to be away from the origin. The other difference is that the optimal point is the one closest to the origin. We find the optimal corner point by sliding the objective function (which is an isocost line) toward the origin instead of away from it.

page 838 

page 839 

Slack and Surplus

If a constraint forms the optimal corner point of the feasible solution space, it is called a binding constraint . In effect, it limits the value of the objective function; if the constraint could be relaxed (less restrictive), an improved solution would be possible. For constraints that are not binding, making them less restrictive will have no impact on the solution.

If the optimal values of the decision variables are substituted into the left-hand side of a binding constraint, the resulting value will exactly equal the right-hand value of the constraint. However, there will be a difference with a nonbinding constraint. If the left-hand side is greater than the right-hand side, we say there is surplus ; if the left-hand side is less than the right-hand side, we say there is slack . Slack can only occur in a ≤ constraint; it is the amount by which the left-hand side is less than the right-hand side when the optimal values of the decision variables are substituted into the left-hand side. And surplus can only occur in a ≥ constraint. It is the amount by which the left-hand side exceeds the right-hand side of the constraint when the optimal values of the decision variables are substituted into the left-hand side.

For example, suppose the optimal values for a problem are x 1 = 10 and x 2 = 20. If one of the constraints is

3 x 1 + 2 x 2 ≤ 100

substituting the optimal values into the left-hand side yields

3(10) + 2(20) = 70

Because the constraint is ≤, the difference between the values of 100 and 70 (i.e., 30) is slack. Suppose the optimal values had been x 1 = 20 and x 2 = 20. Substituting these values into the left-hand side of the constraint would yield 3(20) + 2(20) = 100. Because the left-hand side equals the right-hand side, this is a binding constraint; slack is equal to zero.

Now consider this constraint:

4 x 1 + x 2 ≥ 50

Suppose the optimal values are x 1 = 10 and x 2 = 15; substituting into the left-hand side yields

4(10) + 15 = 55

Because this is a ≥ constraint, the difference between the left- and right-hand-side values is surplus. If the optimal values had been x 1 = 12 and x 2 = 2, substitution would result in the page 840left-hand side being equal to 50. Hence, the constraint would be a binding constraint, and there would be no surplus (i.e., surplus would be zero).

19.4 THE SIMPLEX METHOD

The Simplex method is a general-purpose linear programming algorithm widely used to solve large-scale problems. Although it lacks the intuitive appeal of the graphical approach, its ability to handle problems with more than two decision variables makes it extremely valuable for solving problems often encountered in operations management.

Although manual solution of linear programming problems using simplex can yield a number of insights into how solutions are derived, space limitations preclude describing it here. However, it is available on the website that accompanies this book. The discussion here will focus on computer solutions.

19.5 COMPUTER SOLUTIONS

The microcomputer problem will be used to illustrate computer solutions. We repeat it here for ease of reference.

image

Subject to

image

Solving LP Models Using MS Excel

Solutions to linear programming models can be obtained from spreadsheet software such as Microsoft’s Excel. Excel has a routine called Solver that performs the necessary calculations.

To use Solver:

  1. First, enter the problem in a worksheet, as shown in Figure 19.15. What is not obvious from the figure is the need to enter a formula for each cell where there is a zero (Solver automatically inserts the zero after you input the formula). The formulas are for the value of the objective function and the constraints, in the appropriate cells. Before you enter the formulas, designate the cells where you want the optimal values of x 1 and x 2. Here, cells D4 and E4 are used. To enter a formula, click the cell that the formula will pertain to, and then enter the formula, starting with an equal sign. We want the optimal value of the objective function to appear in cell G4. For G4, enter the formula

    = 60*D4 + 50*E4

    The constraint formulas, using cells C7, C8, and C9, are

    image

image

Source: Microsoft

  1. Now, to access Solver in Excel, click Data at the top of the worksheet, and in that ribbon, click Solver in the Analysis group. The Solver menu will appear as illustrated in Figure 19.16. If it does not appear there, it must be enabled using the Add-ins menu. Begin by setting the objective (i.e., indicating the cell where you want the optimal value of the objective function to appear). Note, if the activated cell is the cell designated for the value of Z when you click Solver, Solver will automatically set that cell as the Objective.

    page 841 

    Select the Max radio button if it isn’t already selected. The Changing Variable Cells are the cells where you want the optimal values of the decision variables to appear. Here, they are cells D4 and E4. We indicate this by the range D4:E4 (Solver will add the $ signs).

    Finally, add the constraints by clicking Add. When that menu appears, for each constraint, enter the cell that contains the formula for the left-hand side of the constraint, then select the appropriate inequality sign, and then enter the right-hand-side amount of the cell that has the right-hand-side amount. Here the right-hand-side amounts are used. After you have entered each constraint, either click Add to add another constraint or click OK to return to the Solver menu. ( Note: Constraints can be entered in any order, and if cells are used for the right-hand side, then constraints with the same inequality can be grouped.) For the nonnegativity constraints, simply check the checkbox to Make Unconstrained Variables Non-Negative. Also select Simplex LP as the Solving Method. Click Solve.

image

Source: Microsoft

page 842 

  1. The Solver Results menu will then appear, indicating a solution has been found, or an error has occurred. If an error occurs, return to the Solver Parameters menu and check to see that your constraints refer to the correct changing cells, and that the inequality directions are correct. Make the corrections and click Solve.

    Assuming everything is correct, in the Solver Results menu, in the Reports box, highlight both Answer and Sensitivity, and then click OK.

  2. Solver will incorporate the optimal values of the decision variables and the objective function in your original layout on your worksheet (see Figure 19.17). We can see that the optimal values are type 1 = 9 units and type 2 = 4 units, and the total profit is 740. The answer report will also show the optimal values of the decision variables (middle part of Figure 19.18), and some information on the constraints (lower part of Figure 19.18). Of particular interest here is information on which constraints have slack and how much slack.

    page 843 

    Notice that the constraint entered in cell C7 (assembly) has a slack of 24, and that the constraints entered in cells C8 (inspection) and C9 (storage) have a slack equal to zero, indicating they are binding constraints.

image

Source: Microsoft

image

Source: Microsoft

19.6 SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS

Sensitivity analysis is a means of assessing the impact of potential changes to the parameters (the numerical values) of an LP model. Such changes may occur due to forces beyond a manager’s control, or a manager may be contemplating making the changes, say, to increase profits or reduce costs.

There are three types of potential changes:

  • Objective function coefficients

  • Right-hand values of constraints

  • Constraint coefficients

We will discuss the first two of these here, beginning with changes to objective function coefficients.

Objective Function Coefficient Changes

A change in the value of an objective function coefficient can cause a change in the optimal solution of a problem. In a graphical solution, this would mean a change to another corner point of the feasible solution space. However, not every change in the value of an objective function coefficient will lead to a changed solution—generally, there is a range of values for which the optimal values of the decision variables will not change. For example, in the microcomputer problem, if the profit on type 1 computers increased from $60 per unit to, say, $65 per unit, the optimal solution would still be to produce nine units of type 1 and four units of type 2 computers. Similarly, if the profit per unit on type 1 computers decreased from $60 to, say, $58, producing nine of type 1 and four of type 2 would still be optimal. These sorts of changes are not uncommon; they may be the result of such things as price changes in raw materials, price discounts, cost reductions in production, and so on. Obviously, when a change does occur in the value of an objective function coefficient, it can be helpful for a manager to know if that change will affect the optimal values of the decision variables. The manager can quickly determine this by referring to that coefficient’s range of optimality , which is the range in possible values of that objective function coefficient over which the optimal values of the decision variables will not change. Before we see how to determine the range, consider the implication of the range. The range of optimality for the type 1 coefficient in the microcomputer problem is 50 to 100. That means that as long as the coefficient’s value is in that range, the optimal values will be nine units of type 1 and four units of type 2. Conversely, if a change extends beyond the range of optimality, the solution will change.

Similarly, suppose instead that the coefficient (unit profit) of type 2 computers was to change. Its range of optimality is 30 to 60. As long as the change doesn’t take it outside of this range, nine and four will still be the optimal values. Note, however, even for changes that are within the range of optimality, the optimal value of the objective function will change. If the type 1 coefficient increased from $60 to $61, and nine units of type 1 is still optimum, profit would increase by $9: nine units times $1 per unit. Thus, for a change that is within the range of optimality, a revised value of the objective function must be determined.

Now let’s see how we can determine the range of optimality using computer output.

Using MS Excel. There is a table for the Changing Cells (see Figure 19.19). It shows the value of the objective function that was used in the problem for each type of computer (i.e., 60 and 50), and the allowable increase and allowable decrease for each coefficient. By subtracting the allowable decrease from the original value of the coefficient, and adding the page 844allowable increase to the original value of the coefficient, we obtain the range of optimality for each coefficient. Thus, we find for type 1:

image

image

Source: Microsoft

Hence, the range for the type 1 coefficient is 50 to 100. For type 2:

image

Hence, the range for the type 2 coefficient is 30 to 60.

In this example, both of the decision variables are basic (i.e., nonzero). However, in other problems, one or more decision variables may be nonbasic (i.e., have an optimal value of zero). In such instances, unless the value of that variable’s objective function coefficient increases by more than its reduced cost, it won’t come into solution (i.e., become a basic variable). Hence, the range of optimality (sometimes referred to as the range of insignificance) for a nonbasic variable is from negative infinity to the sum of its current value and its reduced cost.

Now let’s see how we can handle multiple changes to objective function coefficients—that is, a change in more than one coefficient. To do this, divide each coefficient’s change by the allowable change in the same direction. Thus, if the change is a decrease, divide that amount by the allowable decrease. Treat all resulting fractions as positive. Sum the fractions. If the sum does not exceed 1.00, then multiple changes are within the range of optimality and will not result in any change to the optimal values of the decision variables.

Changes in the Right-Hand-Side (RHS) Value of a Constraint

In considering right-hand-side (RHS) changes, it is important to know if a particular constraint is binding on a solution. A constraint is binding if substituting the values of the decision variables of that solution into the left-hand side of the constraint results in a value that is equal to the RHS value. In other words, that constraint stops the objective function from achieving a better value (e.g., a greater profit or a lower cost). Each constraint has a corresponding shadow price , which is a marginal value that indicates the amount by which the value of the objective function would change if there were a one-unit change in the RHS value of that constraint. If a constraint is nonbinding, its shadow price is zero, meaning that increasing or decreasing its RHS value by one unit will have no impact on the value of the objective page 845function. Nonbinding constraints have either slack (if the constraint is ≤) or surplus (if the constraint is ≥). Suppose a constraint has 10 units of slack in the optimal solution, which means 10 units that are unused. If we were to increase or decrease the constraint’s RHS value by one unit, the only effect would be to increase or decrease its slack by one unit. But there is no profit associated with slack, so the value of the objective function wouldn’t change. On the other hand, if the change is to the RHS value of a binding constraint, then the optimal value of the objective function would change. Any change in a binding constraint will cause the optimal values of the decision variables to change, and thus cause the value of the objective function to change. For example, in the microcomputer problem, the inspection constraint is a binding constraint: It has a shadow price of 10. That means if there was one hour less of inspection time, total profit would decrease by $10, or if there was one more hour of inspection time available, total profit would increase by $10. In general, multiplying the amount of change in the RHS value of a constraint by the constraint’s shadow price will indicate the change’s impact on the optimal value of the objective function. However, this is only true over a limited range called the range of feasibility . In this range, the value of the shadow price remains constant. Hence, as long as a change in the RHS value of a constraint is within its range of feasibility, the shadow price will remain the same, and one can readily determine the impact on the objective function.

Let’s see how to determine the range of feasibility from computer output.

Using MS Excel. In the sensitivity report, there is a table labeled “Constraints” (see Figure 19.19). The table shows the shadow price for each constraint, its RHS value, and the allowable increase and allowable decrease. Adding the allowable increase to the RHS value and subtracting the allowable decrease will produce the range of feasibility for that constraint. For example, for the inspection constraint, the range would be

22 − 4 = 18; 22 + 4 = 26

Hence, the range of feasibility for inspection is 18 to 26 hours. Similarly, for the storage constraint, the range is

39 − 6 = 33 to 39 + 4.5 = 43.5

The range for the assembly constraint is a little different; the assembly constraint is non-binding (note the shadow price of 0) while the other two are binding (note their nonzero shadow prices). The assembly constraint has a slack of 24 (the difference between its RHS value of 100 and its final value of 76). With its slack of 24, its RHS value could be decreased by as much as 24 (to 76) before it would become binding. Conversely, increasing its right-hand side will only produce more slack. Thus, no amount of increase in the RHS value will make it binding, so there is no upper limit on the allowable increase. Excel indicates this by the large value (1E + 30) shown for the allowable increase. So its range of feasibility has a lower limit of 76 and no upper limit.

If there are changes to more than one constraint’s RHS value, analyze these in the same way as multiple changes to objective function coefficients. That is, if the change is an increase, divide that amount by that constraint’s allowable increase; if the change is a decrease, divide the decrease by the allowable decrease. Treat all resulting fractions as positives. Sum the fractions. As long as the sum does not exceed 1.00, the changes are within the range of feasibility for multiple changes, and the shadow prices won’t change.

Table 19.1 summarizes the impacts of changes that fall within either the range of optimality or the range of feasibility.

TABLE 19.1

Summary of the impact of changes within their respective ranges

Changes to objective function coefficients that are within the range of optimality

Component

Result

Values of decision variables

No change

Value of objective function

Will change

Changes to RHS values of constraints that are within the range of feasibility

Component

Result

Value of shadow price

No change

List of basic variables

No change

Values of basic variables

Will change

Value of objective function

Will change

Now let’s consider what happens if a change goes beyond a particular range. In a situation involving the range of optimality, a change in an objective function that is beyond the range of optimality will result in a new solution. Hence, it will be necessary to recompute the solution. For a situation involving the range of feasibility, there are two cases to consider. The first case would be increasing the RHS value of a ≤ constraint to beyond the upper limit of its range of feasibility. This would produce slack equal to the amount by which the upper limit is exceeded. Hence, if the upper limit is 200, and the increase is 220, the result is that the page 846constraint has a slack of 20. Similarly, for a ≥ constraint, going below its lower bound creates a surplus for that constraint. The second case for each of these would be exceeding the opposite limit (the lower bound for a ≤ constraint, or the upper bound for a ≥ constraint). In either instance, a new solution would have to be generated.

page 857 

page 858 

CHAPTER 2: Competitiveness, Strategy, and Productivity

  1. Anniversary = 37.5 meals per worker

    Wedding = 40 meals per worker

  2. Smaller crew sizes had the higher productivity.

  3. Week 1: 3.03

    Week 2: 2.99

    Week 3: 2.89

    Week 4: 2.84

    1. Before: Labor productivity = 16 carts per worker per hour

      After: Labor productivity = 21 carts per worker per hour

    2. Before: Multifactor productivity = .89 cart per dollar

      After: Multifactor productivity = .93 cart per dollar

  4. 11.1%

  5. 4.44%

  1. Current: $5; A = $6.30; B = $6.71

CHAPTER 3: Forecasting

    1. blueberry = 33, cinnamon = 35, cupcakes = 47

    2. Demand did not exceed supply.

    1. (1) 20, (2) 19, (3) 20.4, (4) 19.26, (5) 20.86

    1. 88.16 percent

    2. 88.54 percent

    1. 22

    2. 20.75

    3. 20.72

    1. Increasing by 15,000 bottles per year

    2. 170 (i.e., 170,000 bottles)

  1. 500 − 20 t

    1. Ft = 208.44 + 19.00 t

    2. 588.44, 607.44

    3. Week 31.13

    1. Ft = 195.47 + 7.00 t

      F 16 = 307.47

      F 17 = 314.17

      F 18 = 321.47

      F 19 = 328.47

    2. 307.22

  1. Q 1: 127.6; Q 2: 143.5; Q 3: 105; Q 4: 273.65; Q 1 = 275

    1. Fri. = 0.756, Sat. = 1.341, Sun. = 0.874

    2. Fri. = 0.756, Sat. = 1.341, Sun. = 0.874

  1. Day

    a. Relative

    b. Relative

    1

    0.901

    0.887

    2

    0.838

    0.831

    3

    0.884

    0.876

    4

    1.020

    1.022

    5

    1.430

    1.438

    6

    1.480

    1.483

    7

    0.450

    0.464

    1. image

    1.  

      MSE

      MAD

      Forecast 1

      10.44

       2.8

      Forecast 2

      42.44

       3.6

      Naive

      156  

      10.7

    2. MAPE 1 = .36%

      MAPE 2 = .46%

    1. $847,000

    1. $17.90

    1. −0.985

    1. y = 66.44 + .58 x

    1. 90.22

    1. r = 1.96

    2. y = −0.672 + 6.158 x

    3. About 12 mowers

    1. MAD 5 = 5

      MAD 6 = 5.9

      MAD 7 = 4.73

      MAD 8 = 3.911

      MAD 9 = 4.238

      etc.

    2. TS 5 = 1.40

      TS 6 = −0.17

      TS 7 = −0.63

      TS 8 = −0.26

      TS 9 = −1.42

      etc.

    1. Initial MAD = 4.727. The tracking signal for month 15 is 4.088, so at that point, the forecast would be suspect.

    2. Σ errors = −1, Σ errors 2 = 345. Control limits: 0 ± 12.38 (in limits). Plot reveals cycles in errors.

CHAPTER 4: Supplement: Reliability

    1. .81

    2. .9801

    3. .9783

  1. .9033

  2. .9726

  3. .93

    1. .9315

    2. .9953

    3. .994

    1. .7876

    2. 0.8664, Component 4

    3. 0.8681, Component 4

    1. Plan 2 (.9934)

    1. .0020

    2. .0023

  4. .996

  5. .995

  6. .006

    1. (1) .2725

      (2) .2019

      (3) .1353

    2. (1) .6671

      (2) .3935

      (3) .1813

    3. (1) 21 months

      (2) 57 months

      (3) 90 months

      (4) 138 months

    page 859 

    1. .6321

    2. Three months or 90 days

    1. .3012

    2. .1813

    3. .5175

    1. .2231

    2. .8647

    3. .0878

    4. .0302

    1. .2266

    2. .4400

    3. .3830

    1. (1) .9772

      (2) .5000

      (3) .0013

    2. Approximately zero

    3. (1) 4.97 years

      (2) 5.18 years

    1. 4.97 years

    2. 5.18 years

    1. .93

    2. .98

CHAPTER 5: Strategic Capacity Planning for Products and Services

    1. Utilization = 70%

      Efficiency = 87.5%

    2. Utilization = 67%

      Efficiency = 80%

  1.  20 jobs per week

    1. 46,000 units

    2. (1) $3,000

      (2) $8,200

    3. 126,000 units

    4. 25,556 units

    1. A: 8,000 units

      B: 7,500 units

    2. 10,000 units

    3. A: $20,000

      B: $18,000

    1. 39,683 units

    2. $1.71 (rounded up)

    1. A: $82

      B: $92

      C: $100

    1. A: 0 to less than 178

      B: Never

      C: 178 +

    2. 1/3 day, 2/3 evening

  2. Vendor best for Q < 63,333. For larger quantities, produce in-house at $4 per unit.

    1. Vendor B is best for 10,000 and 20,000.

  3. 3 cells

    1. Buy 2 Bs

    2. Buy 2 Bs

    1. one: Q = 80. two: Q = 152

    1. 11 units/hr

  1. 50 units/hr

    1. 15 units/hr

    2. Operation #2, increase by 5 units for a system capacity of 20 units.

  2. 8 years

CHAPTER 5: Supplement: Decision Theory

    1. Expand (80)

    2. Do nothing (50)

    3. Indifferent between do nothing and subcontract (55)

    4. Subcontract (10)

    1. Expand (62)

    2. $9 (000)

    1. Do nothing: P(high) < .50

      Subcontract: .50 < P(high) <.67

      Expand: P(high) >.67

    1. image

    2. $164,000

    3. Large 0 to .46. Small .46 to 1.00

  1. Subcontract: $1.23

    Expand: $1.57

    Build: $1.35

    1. Relocate

    2. Renew

    3. Relocate

    4. Relocate

    1. Renew

    2. EVPI = $575,000

    3. Yes

    1. Build large: $53.6 million

    2. Build small: $42 million

    3. $12.4

    4. Build small for P(high) < .721

      Build large for P(high) > .721

  2. Buy two ($113.5)

  3. A: 49

    1. maximin: small

      maximax: large

      Laplace: large

      minimax regret: large

    1. New staff

    2. Redesign

    3. New staff

    4. New staff or redesign

    1. Alternative C

    2. P(2) > .625

    3. P(1) < .375

    1. Alternative B

    2. P(2) <.444

    3. P(1) > .556

CHAPTER 6: Process Selection and Facility Layout

    1. Minimum is 2.4 minutes, maximum is 18 minutes

    2. 25 units to 187.5 units

    3. Eight

    4. 3.6 minutes

    5. (1) 50 units

      (2) 30 units

    1. Station

      Tasks

      Time

      1

      a

      1.4

      2

      b, e

      1.3

      3

      d, c, f

      1.8

      4

      g, h

      1.5

    page 860 

    1. Station

      Tasks

      Time

      1

      f, a, g

      14

      2

      d, b, c

      13

      3

      e, h

      13

      4

      i

       5

    1. (3) 11.54%

      (4) 323 copiers per day

    2. (1) 2.3 minutes

      (3) 182.6 copiers per day

      (4) 91.3 copiers units per day

    1. 2 minutes

    2. Three stations

    1. (1) 11.1%

      (2) 11.1%

    1. CT = .84 min or 50.4 sec

    2. n = 3.83 (round to 4) stations

  1. image

  2. image

  1. image

    1. image

  1. A: 3; B: 5; C: 1; D: 4; E: 6; F: 2

  2. A:1; B:3; C:7; D:10; E:9; F:8; G:6; H:4; I:5; J:2

CHAPTER 7: Work Design and Measurement

  1. 15.08 minutes

    1. 1.2 minutes

    2. 1.14 minutes

    3. 1.27 minutes

  2. Element

    OT

    NT

    ST

    1

    0.46

    0.414

    0.476

    2

    1.505

    1.280

    1.472

    3

    0.83

    0.913

    1.050

    4

    1.16

    1.160

    1.334

  3. Element

    Average

    1

    4.1

    2

    1.5

    3

    3.3

    4

    2.8

  1. 5.85 minutes

  2. 7.125 minutes

  1. 57 observations

  2. 37 cycles

    1. 12%

    2. 163 observations

  1. 377 observations

CHAPTER 7: Supplement: Learning Curves

    1. 178.8 hours

    2. 1,121.4 hours

    3. 2,914.8 hours

    1. 41.47 hours

    2. 60.55 hours

    3. 72.20 hours

    1. 56.928 days

    2. 42.288 days

    3. 37.512 days

    1. P = 85 percent

    2. 26.21 minutes

  1. 87.9 minutes

  2. 201.26 hours

    1. 11.35 hours

    2. 13.05 hours

    3. 13.12 hours

    1. $80.31

    2. 10 units

  3. B and C

  1. 30.82 hours

  2. No

  3. 18.76 hours

  4. Art: 20; Sherry: 4; Dave: 10

  5. 7 repetitions

  6. Beverly: 6; Max: 23; Antonio: 4

  1. 8.232 hours

CHAPTER 8: Location Planning and Analysis

  1. Kansas City: $256,000

    1. A: 16,854; B: 17,416; C: 17,753

    2. C: $14,670

    1. 120 units

    2. A: 0 to 119; B: 121+

    1. B: 0 to 33; C: 34 to 400; A: 401+

  2. C ($270,000)

  3. Biloxi ($160,000)

    1. (1) outside; (2) city

    2. 230 cars

  1. A

    1. B = C > A

    2. B > C > A

    page 861 

  1. (5,4) is optimal

  2. (6,7)

  3. (5.97, 5.95)

  4. (3.24, 2.30)

CHAPTER 9: Management of Quality

  1. Res.

    Com.

    Noisy

    10

    3

    Failed

     7

    2

    Odor

     5

    7

    Warm

     3

    4

CHAPTER 10: Quality Control

    1. .0124

    2. 24.40 ounces and 24.60 ounces

    1. LCL: 0.996 liter

      UCL: 1.004 liters

    2. Not in control

    1. Mean: LCL is 3.019, UCL is 3.181

      Range: LCL is 0.1845, UCL is 0.7155

    2. Yes

  1. Mean:

    LCL is 78.88 cm

    UCL is 81.04 cm

    Range:

    LCL is 0 cm

    UCL is 3.95 cm

    Process in control.

    1. 1

      2

      3

      4

      .020

      .010

      .025

      .045

    2. 2.5 percent

    3. Mean = .025, standard deviation = .011

    4. LCL = .0011, UCL = .0489

    5. .0456

    6. Yes

    7. Mean = .02, standard deviation = .01

    8. LCL = 0, UCL = .04

  2. LCL: 0

    UCL: .0234

    Sample #10 is outside of the UCL

  3. Yes, UCL = 16.266, LCL = 0

  4. Yes, UCL = 5.17, LCL = 0

  5. No, UCL = .10, LCL = .01. Yes

  6. 20 pieces

  7. One in 30 is “out.” Tolerances seem to be met. Approximately 97 percent will be acceptable.

    1. LCL: 3.73

      UCL: 3.97

      Out of control

    2. Random variations

  8. image

    1. Random, because both z values are within ± 2

    2. Nonrandom, because the z value for U/D is less than −1.96

    3. Med: z = 1.11

      U/D: z = 0.68

    4. Med: z = −1.11

      U/D: z = −1.36

  9. Med: z = −2.34

    U/D: z = −1.45

  10. 200 pieces

    1. 566 units

    2. 62 units

    3. $1,160

  1. Med: z = +0.9177

    U/D: z = +0.5561

    1. 4.5, .192

    2. 4.5, .086

    3. 4.242 to 4.758

    1. None

    1. 1.11

    2. No

  2. Process 005 is capable.

  1. C pk : H = .94, K = 1.00, T = 1.33

  1. Melissa

    1. 2.506

    2. C pk = 1.41

    3. .987 ounces

CHAPTER 11: Aggregate Planning and Master Scheduling

    1. $95,500

  1. $57,000

  2. $69,000

  3. $69,750

    1. $31,250

    2. $31,310

    1. $350,800

    2. $356,200

    3. $353,700

  1. B: $14,340

    C: $14,370

  2. $13,475

  3. $13,885

  4. $4,970

  1. $124,960

  2. $126,650; additional cost: $1,920

CHAPTER 12: Inventory Management

    1. Item

      Category

      1

      B

      2

      B

      3

      C

      4

      C

      5

      C

      6

      A

      7

      C

    2. 180 units

    page 862 

    1. Item

      Category

      K34

      C

      K35

      A

      K36

      B

      M10

      C

      M20

      C

      Z45

      A

      F14

      B

      F95

      A

      F99

      C

      D45

      B

      D48

      C

      D52

      C

      D57

      B

      N08

      C

      P05

      B

      P09

      C

    2. Item

      Category

      4021

      A

      9402

      C

      4066

      B

      6500

      C

      9280

      C

      4050

      C

      6850

      B

      3010

      C

      4400

      B

    3. A: 11%, 55.26%

      B: 33%, 28.95%

      C: 56%, 15.79%

    1. 18 bags

    2. 9 bags

    3. 67.5

    4. $1,350

    5. Increase by $78.71

    1. 204 packages

    2. $6,118.82

    3. Yes

    4. No; TC = $6,120; only save $1.18

  1. $105.29

  2. $364

    1. 1–6: 74 units; 7–12: 91 units

    2. EOQ requirement

    3. 1–6: 50 units; 7–12: 100 units

    1. $1.32

    2. $54.20

    1. 4,812

    2. 15.59 (approx. 16)

    3. .96

    1. 10,328 bags

    2. 3,098 bags

    3. 10.33 days

    4. 7.75 (approx. 8)

    5. $774.50

    1. 1,414 units

    2. 7.07 days

    3. 424 units

    4. No

    5. Approximately 54 units, $168

    1. 37.5 batches

    2. 1,000 units

    3. 625 units

    4. No

    1. 5,000 boxes

    2. 3.6 orders

    1. 600 stones

    2. 600 stones

    3. 150 stones on hand

  3. Indifferent between 495 and 1,000 pulleys

  4. A, 500 units

  1. 6,600 feet

    1. 370 units

    2. 70 units

    3. Both smaller

    1. 91 pounds

    2. ROP = 691 pounds

    3. 50%

    1. 8.39 gallons

    2. 34 gallons, .1423

    3. risk = .2981

  2. 70.14 gallons

  3. .1093

  4. ROP = 70.14

    1. 400 gallons

    2. 45.02 gallons

    1. 72 boxes

    2. .0023

    3. .0228

  5. 749 pounds

    1. 134 rolls

    2. About 36 rolls

    1. 14 cases

  6. 97.26%

  7. Cycle

    Order Quantity

    1

    623

    2

    657

    3

    562

    1. P34: ROP = 132 units on hand

      P35: ROP = 153 units on hand

    2. 306 units

    3. 334 units

  1. 25 dozen

    1. Nine spares

    2. C s ≤ $10.47

  2. 78.9 pounds

  3. $4.89 per quart

  4. Five cakes

  5. 421.5 pounds

    1. $0.53 to $1.76

    1. $56.67 to $190.00

  6. 3 spares

  7. 2 cakes

  8. 16 tickets

page 863 

CHAPTER 13: MRP and ERP

    1. F = 2, G = 1, H = 1, J = 6, D = 10, L = 2, A = 4

    1. E = 138

    2. Week 5

    1. 360

    2. Day 1 (now)

      image

    page 864 

    1. image

      Notes:

      Scheduled Receipts (Week 4) = Original amount of 30 + 180 = 210

      Original on hand amounts (Week 6):  B = 20 and J = 50

      Revised on hand amounts (Week 6):  B = 40 and J = 80

      There will be an additional 20 units of B and 30 units of J on hand.

page 865 

  1. image

page 866 

  1. Order 160 units of subassembly G in week 2.

    1. Master Schedule for E

      image

page 867 

    1. Master Schedule for golf carts

      image

  1. image

CHAPTER 14: JIT and Lean Operations

  1. 3

  2. 3

  3. 3

  4. 3 cycles

  5. 2 cycles:

     

    Cycle

     

    1

    2

    A

    11

    11

    B

      6

      6

    C

      2

      2

    D

      9

      9

    E

      4

      4

  1. 1.35 minutes

  2. 6.50 minutes

  3. 4 minutes

CHAPTER 14: Supplement: Maintenance

  1. Expected recalibration cost = $925 a month

    Use the service contract.

  2. Expected repair cost = $456 a month

    Option #1: $500

    Option #2: $566

  3. Equipment

    Ratio

    Interval (days)

    A201

    .1304

    17.76

    B400

    .0571

    25.26

    C850

    .1104

    35.12

CHAPTER 15: Supply Chain Management

  1. Use 2-day freight.

  2. Use 6-day.

  3. Ship 2-day using A.

CHAPTER 16: Scheduling

  1. 1-A, 2-B, 3-C, TC = 15

  2. 1-B, 2-C, 3-A, TC = 21

  3. 1-A, 2-E, 3-D, 4-B, 5-C; or 1-A, 2-D, 3-E, 4-B, 5-C

  4. 1-B, 2-C, 3-D, 4-A, TC = 26

    1. 1-A, 2-B, 3-C, 4-D, 5-E

    2. b. 1-E, 2-B, 3-C, 4-D, 5-A

    1. image

  5. FCFS: a-b-c-d-e

    SPT: c-b-a-e-d

    EDD: a-b-c-e-d

    CR: a-b-c-e-d (or a-b-e-c-d)

    image

  1. B-A-G-E-F-D-C

    1. e-b-g-h-d-c-a-f

    1. 2 hours

    page 868 

    1. B-A-C-E-F-D

    1. b-a-c-d-e

    2. 37 minutes

    3. both reduced by 15 minutes

  2. G-A-E-D-B-C-F (or G-E-A-D-B-C-F)

    1. Grinding flow time is 93 hours. Total time is 37 hours.

    2. Grinding flow time is 107 hours. Total time is 35 hours.

    1. image

    2. a-c-b-e-d-f

  3. b-c-e-a-d

  1. A-B-C

  2. C-B-A

  3. B-C-D-A

CHAPTER 17: Project Management

    1. 1-3-6-9-11-12: 31

    2. 1-2-5-7-8-9: 55

    3. 1-2-5-12-16: 44

    1. Activity

      Immed. Pred.

      A

      _

      B

      _

      C

      A

      D

        A,B

      E

      C

    1. Summary:

      image

    2. Summary:

      image

  1. 30 weeks

    1. 24 days: .9686; 21 days: .2350

    2. 24 days: .9328; 21 days: .0186

    3. Crash activities F, C, and G one day each

    1. .6881

    2. .3978

    3. .0203

    1. .3479

    1. .52

    1. .030

    2. .2085

  2. Path

    Mean

    Standard Deviation

    a-d-e-h . . . . .

    24.34

    1.354

    a-f-g . . . . .

    15.50

    1.258

    b-i-j-k . . . . .

    14.83

    1.014

    c-m-n-o . . . . .

    26.17

    1.658

    27 weeks: .6742; 26 weeks: .4099

  1. Crash schedule (1 week each): C, C, F, F, E, P

    1. Crash four weeks: (1) 7-11, (2) 1-2, (3) 7-11 and 6-10, (4) 11-13 and 4-6

    1. 18.5 days

    2. .67

CHAPTER 18: Management of Waiting Lines

    1. (1) .60

      (2) .90 customer

      (3) .30 hr

    2. (1) 2.25 customers

      (2) .75

      (3) Two hours

      (4) .5625

    3. (1) .75

      (2) 3.429 customers

      (3) .107 hr

    1. 0.67 customer

    2. One minute

    3. 1.33 customers

    1. 6 minutes

    2. 0.25

    3. 2.25 customers

    1. Morning: 0.375 minute; .45

      Afternoon: 0.678 minute; .54

      Evening: 0.635 minute; .44

    2. M: 4; A: 8; E: 5

    1. .45

    2. .229

    3. .509 hour

    4. .28

    1. 4.444 trucks

    2. 6.67 minutes

    3. .711

    4. 6 minutes

    5. The system would be overloaded.

    6. 13.186

    1. One dock

    2. No

    page 869 

    1. 0.952 mechanic

    2. 0.228

    3. 0.056 hr

    4. 0.60

    5. Two

    1. 0.995 customer

    2. 2.24 days

    3. 19.9 percent

    4. 0.875 customer

    1. .437

    2. 0.53 machine

    3. 1.33 machines

    4. 40.72 pieces

    5. Three

    1. 28.56 pieces

    2. Two

    1. 15.9 pieces

    2. Three

  1. Three

    1. .90

    2. W 1 = .12 hour

      W 2 = .3045 hour

      W 3 = 2.13 hours

    3. L 1 = .365

      L 2 = .914

      L 3 = 6.395

    1. .75

    2. L 1 = .643

      L 2 = 1.286

    1. approx. 0.0116

    2. approx. 0.433

CHAPTER 19: Linear Programming

    1. (1) x 1 = 2, x 2 = 9, Z = 35

      (2) No

      (3) No

      (4) No

    2. (1) x 1 = 1.5, x 2 = 6.25, Z = 65.5

      (2) No

      (3) Yes, S has surplus of 15

      (4) No

    3. (1) A = 24, B = 20, Z = $204

      (2) Yes. Labor, 120 hr

      (3) No

      (4) No

    1. S = 8, T = 20, Z = $58.40

    2. (1) x 1 = 4.2, x 2 = 1.6, Z = 13.2

      (2) Yes. F = 4.6

      (3) No

      (4) No

    1. H = 132 units, W = 36 units, Profit = $6,360

  1. Deluxe = 90 bags, Standard = 60 bags, Profit = $243

  2. 500 apple, 200 grape, Revenue = $2,970. Fifty cups of sugar will be unused.

    1. x 1 = 4, x 2 = 0, x 3 = 18

      s 1 = 3, s 2 = 0, s 3 = 0

      Z = 106

    2. x 1 = 15, x 2 = 10, x 3 = 0

      s 1 = 0, s 2 = 0, s 3 = 5

      Z = 210

  1. A = 0, B = 80, C = 50

    Z = 350

    C A (insignificance): $ − ∞ to $3.04

    C B (optimality): $1.95 to $3.75

    C C (optimality): $2.00 to $5.00

    1. board = 0, holder = 50

    2. Cutting = 16 minutes, gluing = 0 minutes, finishing = 210 minutes

    1. Ham = 37.14, deli = 18, cost = $165.42

    2. Ham = 20, deli = 84, profit = $376

  1. Z = $433

    1. Machine and materials are binding.

    2. No change

    3. No change

    4. Only s 2 would change. It would be 46.

    5. None

    6. Yes; $844

    1. $1.50; range is 550 to 750

    2. $1.50/pound

    3. $0; range 375 to infinity

    4. None

    5. 150 pounds of pine bark

    6. Optimal quantities would not change; Z would increase by $75

    7. No, Yes, $1,155

    8. No

page 870 

A. Areas under the normal curve, 0 to z

B. Areas under the standardized normal curve

1. From −∞ to − z

2. From −∞ to − z

C. Cumulative Poisson probabilities

TABLE A

Areas under the normal curve, 0 to z

page 871 

TABLE B.1

Areas under the standardized normal curve, from −∞ to − z

page 872 

TABLE B.2

Areas under the standardized normal curve, from −∞ to + z

page 873 

TABLE C

Cumulative Poisson probabilities

page 874 

page 875 

page 876 

The normal distribution is a theoretical distribution that approximates many real-life phenomena. It is widely used in many disciplines, including operations management. Consequently, having the ability to work with normal distributions is a skill that will serve you well.

The normal curve is symmetrical and bell-shaped, as illustrated in Figure C.1. Although the theoretical distribution extends in both directions, to plus or minus infinity, most of the distribution lies close to its mean, so values of a variable that is normally distributed will occur relatively close to the distribution mean.

image

z Values

It is customary to refer to a value of a normally distributed random variable in terms of the number of standard deviations the value is from the mean of the distribution. This is known as its z value, or z score. In Figure C.2 you can see the normal distribution in terms of some selected z values. This particular distribution is referred to as the standard normal distribution. Notice that the z values to the left of (i.e., below) the mean are negative. Thus, a z value of −1.25 refers to a value that is 1.25 standard deviations below the distribution mean.

image

When working with a variable that is normally distributed, it is often necessary to convert an actual value of the variable to a z value. The z value can be computed using the following formula:

image

where

image

page 877 

z Values and Probabilities

Once the z value is known, it can be used to obtain various probabilities by referring to a table of the normal distribution, such as the probability that a value will occur by chance that is greater than, or less than, that value. Note that the probability of exactly that value is zero, because there are an infinite number of values that could occur, so the probability of specifying in advance that any one particular value will occur is essentially equal to zero. z values can also be used to find the probability that a value will occur that is between ± z. Two such cases are shown in Figure C.3. Note that the total area underneath the curve represents 100 percent of the probability, so knowing that the probability that a value will occur that is within the range, say, of z = ±2 is .9544, we can say that the probability that a value will occur that is outside of the range (e.g., either less than z = −2 or greater than z = +2) is equal to 1.0000 − .9544 = .0456.

image

Tables of the Normal Distribution

Virtually all applications of the normal distribution involve working with a table of normal distribution probabilities. Tables make the process of obtaining probabilities and z values quite simple. This book has two slightly different normal distribution tables. Appendix B Table A has values for the right half of the distribution for the area under the curve (note the figure at the top of the table), which is the probability from the mean of the distribution ( z = 0) to any other value of z, up to z = +3.09. Statistics books always have this version of the table, so you may already be familiar with it. A second table of normal probabilities is presented in Appendix B Tables B1 and B2. They show the area under the curve from negative infinity to any point z (see the figure at the top of the table), up to z = +3.49. In both tables, the values of z are shown in two parts. The integer and first decimal are shown along the side of the table, while the second decimal is shown across the top.

page 878 

Note: You will find versions of both tables at the very end of the book for easy reference. The last table repeats Appendix B Table A. The other table repeats Appendix B Table B.2., the positive values of z. For problems that involve negative values of z, refer to the portion of Appendix B Table B.1.

Finding a Probability of Observing a Value That Is Within ± z of the Mean or Outside of ± z

Use Appendix B Table A for this type of problem:

Finding an Area (Probability) That Is to the Left or to the Right of z

Use Appendix B Table B.2 for this type of problem (e.g., “What is the probability that the time will not exceed 22 weeks?”).

page 880 

Points to Remember

  1. The area under a normal curve represents probability.

  2. The area under the curve is 100 percent, or 1.0000.

  3. The area on either side of the mean is equal to half of the total, which is 50 percent, or .5000.

  4. The curve extends to ± infinity, but 99.74 percent of the values will occur within ±3 standard deviations of the mean.

  5. It is best to use Appendix B Table A for problems involving ±z (i.e., Chapters 7 and 10), and to use Appendix B Table B for problems involving one-sided probabilities such as the probability that x will be no more than a given (i.e., Chapters 4S, 13, and 17).

  6. The probability of an exact value (e.g., 22 in Example 5) is zero. Therefore, P( x ≤ 22) = P( x < 22).

Test Yourself

  1. Suppose a normal distribution has a mean of 40 and a standard deviation of 5. Find the value of z for each of these values:

    1. 48

    2. 30

    3. 34

    4. 52.5

  2. Using Appendix B Table A, find the area between ± z when z is:

    1. 1.00

    2. 1.96

    3. 2.10

    4. 2.50

  3. Find the probability of observing a value that is beyond ± z when z is:

    1. 1.00

    2. 1.80

    3. 1.88

    4. 2.54

  4. Use the appropriate Appendix B Table to find the probability of a value that does not exceed a z value of:

    1. .40

    2. 1.27

    3. −1.32

    4. 2.75

  5. Find the probability of observing a value that is more than a z value of:

    1. .77

    2. 1.65

    3. −1.32

    4. 2.75

Answers

    1. +1.60

    2. −2.00

    3. −1.20

    4. +2.50

    1. .6826

    2. .9500

    3. .9642

    4. .9876

    1. .3174

    2. .0718

    3. .0602

    4. .0110

    1. .6554

    2. .8980

    3. .0934

    4. .9970

    1. .2206

    2. .0495

    3. .9066

    4. .0030

page 881 

page 882 

  1. The way work is organized (i.e., project, job shop, batch, assembly, or continuous) has significant implications for the entire organization, including the type of work that is done, forecasting, layout, equipment selection, equipment maintenance, accounting, marketing, purchasing, inventory control, material handling, scheduling, and more.

  2. Pay attention to variability, and reduce it whenever you can. Variability causes problems for management, whether it is variability in demand (capacity planning, forecasting, and inventory management), variability in deliveries from suppliers (inventory management, operations, order fulfillment), or variability in production or service rates (operations planning and control). Any of these can adversely affect customer satisfaction and costs. Recognize this, and build an appropriate amount of flexibility into systems.

  3. “Homework is on the Highway to Happiness.” This relates not only to coursework, but also to your career: Be prepared for interviews, meetings, conferences, presentations (yours and others’), and other events. You can achieve a great deal of success by simply “doing your homework.”

  4. How managers relate to subordinates can have a tremendous influence on the success or lack of success of an organization. Selection, training, motivation, and support are all important. One philosophy is: “Choose the right people, give them the tools they need, and then stay out of their way.”

  5. Quality and price will always be prominent factors in consumers’ buying decisions. Strive to integrate quality in every aspect of what you do, and to reduce costs.

  6. Pay careful attention to technology; consider both the opportunities and the risks. Opportunities: improvements in quality, service, and response time. Risks: technology can be costly, difficult to integrate, needs to be periodically updated (for additional cost), requires training, and quality and service may temporarily suffer when new technology is introduced.

  7. Pay attention to capacity; the roads to success and failure both run through capacity.

  8. Never underestimate your competitors. Assume they will always make the best decisions.

  9. Most decisions involve trade-offs. Understand the trade-offs.

  10. Make ethics a part of everything you do.

page 883 

Company Index

Abt Electronics, 387

Adobe Systems, 30

Alibaba, 355

Allen-Bradley, 256257

Amazon.com, 44, 45, 47, 351, 473, 670, 684, 787

Apple, 47, 56, 181, 254, 360, 396

Barnesandnoble.com, 670

Bayer AG, 353

Bell Atlantic, 26

Bell Telephone Laboratories, 23, 380

Bethlehem Steel Company, 311

Blue Bottle Coffee, 355

BMW, 280, 353

Boeing Company, 145, 644, 675

Bose Corporation, 638

Boston Market, 49

Bruegger’s Bagel Bakery, 556

Buffalo Wild Wings, 155

Burger King, 47, 155, 262, 468

Chacarero, 484

Chrysler, 114

Coach, 47

Coca-Cola, 47, 353

Compaq Computer, 47

Consumer Reports, 181, 649

Costco, 31

Deaconess Clinic (Montana), 221

Dell Computers, 50, 155, 254, 675

Deloitte, 659

Deloitte Consulting, 586

Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu, 357358

Disneyland, 47, 644

Disney World, 77, 785, 815

Domino’s Pizza, 47, 637

Doordash, 661

eBay, 31

EOG Resources, 62

Express Mail, 47, 637

Federated Department Stores, 671

FedEx, 47, 71, 637, 661, 670

Fingerhut, 671

Firestone Tire & Rubber, 144

Ford Motor Company, 22, 30, 144, 257, 614

Foxconn, 254

Fuddruckers, 202

Gap, 26, 30, 75

Gartner, 740

General Mills, 619

General Motors (GM), 144, 504, 612, 621, 623

Globe Metallurgical, 391

Google, 47, 309, 764

Grubhub, 47, 661

Happy Returns, 684

Hershey’s, 28

Hewlett-Packard (HP), 47, 113, 143, 154, 165, 254, 408

High Acres Landfill (New York), 174

H.J. Heinz Company, 148

H&M, 26

Hoechst AG, 353

Home Depot, 75

Humantech Inc., 302

Hyundai Motor Company, 57, 389

IBM, 24, 47, 113, 143, 660

Intel, 17, 30

JCPenney, 75

Jersey Jack Pinball, 262

John Deere, 613

Kentucky Fried Chicken (KFC), 386

Kraft Foods Company, 148

Kraft Heinz Company, 148

Land O’Lakes, 202

LEGO A/S, 151, 152

Lexus, 47, 466

LG, 47

Liberty Resources, 62

L.L. Bean, 395

L’Oreal, 31

Louis Vuitton, 619

Luckin Coffee, 355

Lyft, 47

Macy’s, 26

Maria’s Market, 150151

Martin Company, 380

MasterTag, 689

Mattel Inc., 393, 424

McDonald’s, 47, 49, 51, 146, 262, 270, 281, 355, 433, 468

Mercedes, 353

Meta Group, 584

Michigan International Speedway, 304

Microsoft, 30, 44, 193, 281, 734

Milliken & Company, 391

Minneapolis-St. Paul International Airport, 260

Mondelez, 148

Morton International, 250251

Motorola Corporation, 391, 400, 446

MVP Services Group, Inc., 271

NASCAR, 619

Nestlé, 355

Netflix, 351

Nissan, 353

Nordstrom, 47

NUMMI (New United Motor Manufacturing), Inc., 612

Omron Electronics, 427

Paychex, 30

PeopleSoft, 581

PepsiCo, 47

Perkins, 202

Pizza Hut, 386

PMI, 424

PSC, Inc., 557559

Puma, 28

Queen Mary 2, 265

Ryder, 513

Safeway, 31

Sam’s Club, 787

Samsung, 47

SAP, 581

Sara Lee, 202

7-11, 787

Sherwin-Williams, 142

Siemens AG, 353

Solectron, 196

Sony, 47

Southwest Airlines, 47

SpaceX, 424

Sperry Univac, 24

Springdale Farm, 680

Starbucks, 30, 44, 355

Steelcase, Inc., 140

Stickley Furniture, 606609

Stockpot Soup Company, 202

Stryker Howmedica, 62

Target, 31

Texas Instruments, 30

Third Eye, 510

3M, 47, 662

Tmsuk, 256

Toyota Company, 24, 47, 382, 421, 466, 611, 612, 613615, 618, 635

Trek Bicycle Company, 16

Tri-State Industries, 627

Uber, 47

UberEats, 355

Union Carbide, 26

U.S. Postal Service (USPS), 47, 7073, 637

UPS, 31, 47, 71, 258, 311, 661, 670, 679

Vaak, 510

Verizon, 44

Vlasic Pickles, 143

Von Maur, 47

VX Corporation, 566

Walmart, 46, 47, 354, 377, 660, 661, 670

Walt Disney World, 77, 785, 815

Wegmans Food Markets, Inc., 31, 3335, 47, 655, 677678

Wendy’s, 155, 468

Western Electric, 23

Whole Foods, 31

Xerox Corporation, 30, 391

YouTube, 24

Zara, 26

Zipline, 258

image

page 884 

Subject Index

A-B-C approach, 510513

Acceptance sampling, 419, 420

Accidents, 307308

Accounting function

collaboration with operations, 12

ERP and, 582, 584

forecasting in, 76

interface with purchasing, 667

in lean operations, 624

Activities, on network diagrams, 743

Activity-based costing, 624

Activity-on-arrow (AOA), 743, 744750

Activity-on-node (AON), 743, 750752

Actual output, 195

Additive manufacturing (3D printing), 257259

Additive model, 94

Advertising, competitiveness and, 42

Africa

“Cocoa for Good” initiative, 28

drones in health care, 258

Aggregate planning, 465501

case, 501

concept of aggregation, 468

defined, 465

demand management strategies, 201, 467476, 484485, 492, 656

disaggregating the aggregate plan, 485486

general procedure, 476

inputs and outputs, 469, 470

master production schedule (MPS), 467, 486491, 563

mathematical techniques, 480483

need for, 468

overview, 469, 492

in perspective, 466467

in services, 484485

and supply chain, 470

supply chain management strategies, 468469, 471476, 492

trial-and-error technique, 476480

variations in, 465466, 468469

Agility, 26

competitive edge and, 26

in strategic capacity planning, 213

strategy based on, 50, 53

in supply chain management, 659, 665, 679

Airlines

airport layout, 260, 271

capacity planning, 484, 485

duplicate orders, 469, 470

product design, 145

scheduling, 693, 716, 719

scope of operations management, 1415

Air pollution

nonvegetarian diets and, 29

recycling and, 149

Alderman, Richard M., 181

Allison-Koerber, Deborah, 112n

American Society for Quality (ASQ), 12, 13, 380, 393

Analytics, 20

Andon, 623

Anticipation stocks, 505

APICS, the Association for Operations Management, 12, 13, 513

Applied research, 143

Appointment systems, 716

Appraisal costs, 389, 390

Armony, Mor, 470n

Arrival patterns, 790792

Arrival rate, 795

Artificial intelligence (AI)

blockchain technology, 660661

in project management, 740

in shoplifting prevention, 510

Assembled products. See Material requirements planning (MRP)

Assemble-to-order (ATO), 675

Assembly (repetitive processing). See Repetitive/assembly processing

Assembly diagrams, 563564

Assembly lines. See also Repetitive/assembly processing

defined, 261

line balancing, 272280

moving, origins of, 22

Assignable (nonrandom) variation, 14, 425, 439, 441442, 443

Assignment model, 701704

Associative models, 80, 98104

multiple regression, 102, 104

nonlinear regression, 104

predictor variables, 98

simple linear regression, 80, 98104

Attributes

defined, 430

statistical process control (SPC), 434437, 438

Audits, supplier, 671672

Automation, 253257

advantages/disadvantages, 253254

in global operations, 354355

Internet of Things (IoT), 257

in services, 270, 271272

types, 253257

Automotive industry

aggregate planning, 466

capacity planning, 192

component commonality, 165, 170

extended warranties, 181

flexible processes, 257

forecasting demand in, 75

global operations, 353

inventory management, 504

lean operations, 611615, 630631, 635

location decisions, 353, 359

mass production, 22

product design, 142

production/assembly lines, 261, 272280

product recall (case), 347

quality management, 382, 384385, 389, 421

self-driving vehicles, 259

specialization in, 302

Autonomation, 613, 619

Autonomous vehicles, 259

Availability, 183

as reliability, 183184

in strategic capacity planning, 194

Available-to-promise (ATP) inventory, 488491

Average number of customers, 794

Average number of customers being served, 794

Averaging techniques, 8488

exponential smoothing, 8788, 112

moving average, 8486, 112

weighted moving average, 8687

Avoidance, 684

Awad, Elias M., 314n

Awards

Deming Prize, 381, 391392

European Quality Award, 391

International Design Excellence Award, 152

Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award, 388, 391

Baatz, E., 583587

Bacal, Robert, 305, 305n

Backflushing, 576

Back orders/backlogging, in aggregate planning, 471, 474475

Backward pass, 749, 752

Backward scheduling, 699

Balance delay, 275276

Balanced Scorecard (BSC), 5456

Balancing transactions, 631

Baldrige Award, 388, 391

Bar coding, 508509

Bartlett, Christopher A., 51n

Basic quality (Kano model), 161162

Basic research, 143

Batch processing, 67, 247, 248, 249, 715. See also Material requirements planning (MRP)

Behavioral issues

job design, 302, 303

project management, 739

psychology of waiting, 813814

Benchmarking, 395, 408

Berry, Leonard L., 384n, 385n

Berry, William L., 615n

Berthiaume, Dan, 660n

Beta distribution, 753754

Bias, 109

Bill of materials (BOM), 563566

Binding constraints, 839

Blockchain technology, 659661

Block picking, 677

Bonuses, 309

Bottleneck operations, 203, 213, 714715, 813

Bounded rationality, 224

Brainstorming, 407

Branches, decision tree, 228229

Branding, 6

Breakdown maintenance, 647

breakdown programs, 650

high-volume system scheduling, 696

preventive maintenance vs., 648649

Break-even point (BEP), 208211

Brice, Virginia, 89n

Budgeting, 10, 468. See also Aggregate planning

page 885 

learning curves in, 341

in project management, 739, 759

Buffers

in critical chain project management (CCPM), 763

inventory as, 506, 650, 674675

Bullwhip effect, 674675

Business organizations

collaboration among functional areas, 1012

key component of, 139

key functional areas, 4, 1012

reasons for failure, 4344

uses of forecasting, 7678. See also Forecasting

Business plans, 467

Business process management (BPM), 13

Business-to-business (B2B) commerce, 671

Caldwell, Phillip, 614

Capability index, 445446, 447

Capacity

challenges of planning service capacity, 200201

defined, 191

defining and measuring, 194195

determinants of effective, 196197

forecasting capacity requirements, 198200

strategy formulation for, 197198

Capacity (resource) buffers, 763

Capacity “chunks,” 204

Capacity contraction, 213

Capacity cushion, 198, 213

Capacity disposal strategies, 213

Capacity expansion

capacity planning in, 206, 213

expand-early strategy, 213

wait-and-see strategy, 213

Capacity planning

intermediate-term decisions. See Aggregate planning

learning curves in, 341342

long-term decisions. See Strategic capacity planning

master scheduling, 486491

in service organizations, 14, 167, 200201, 484485

short-term decisions, 486491

in supply chain management, 32, 666

time horizons in, 198199, 200, 204205, 466467

waiting line. See Waiting-line management

Capacity requirements planning, 579581

Capacity utilization, 195

Capital productivity, 58

Career opportunities

operations management, 12

professional associations, 1213

Carrying cost. See Holding (carrying) cost

Case picking, 677

Cases

Big Bank, 822

Chick-n-Gravy Dinner Line, 414

Custom Cabinets, Inc., 854855

DMD Enterprises, 606

Eight Glasses a Day (EGAD), 501

Farmers Restaurant, 554555

Girlfriend Collective, 6970

Grill Rite, 554

Hazel, 38, 68

Hello, Walmart?, 377

Highline Financial Services, Ltd., 137

Hi-Ho, Yo-Yo, Inc., 731

Home-Style Cookies, 6768

Level Operations, 643

MasterTag, 689

M&L Manufacturing, 136

Outsourcing of Hospital Services, 221

Product Recall, 347

Promotional Novelties, 605

Son, Ltd., 853854

Tiger Tools, 462463

Time, Please, 781

Tip Top Markets, 415416

Toys, Inc., 462

UPD Manufacturing, 553

“Your Garden Gloves,” 69

Cash flow, 211212

Causal regression models, 102, 112

Causal (explanatory) variables, 80

Cause-and-effect (fishbone) diagrams, 383, 402, 405, 406

c-charts, 434, 435, 436437

Cells, 266

Cellular production, 266268

Centered moving average (MA), 96, 98

Center-of-gravity method, 368370

Centralized purchasing, 668669

Central limit theorem, 426

Certainty, 212

decision making under, 224225

defined, 224

Certification

fair trade, 30, 31

of project managers, 740

in quality management, 392393, 672

of suppliers, 672

Champions, 395, 400, 740

Changeover time, in lean operations, 618619

Changes, in MRP, 574

Change transactions, 631

Channels (servers), 789790, 800801

Chase demand strategy

in aggregate planning, 473476, 492

defined, 474

Chasen, Emily, 28n

Cheaper by the Dozen (film), 23

Check sheets, 401403, 406

Cheng, Andrew, 355n

China

fast-food restaurants, 386

outsourcing to, 659

quality management, 393, 424

recycling and, 149

Starbucks in, 355

CIA (Central Intelligence Agency), 358

Cleveland, Will, 424

“Clicks-or-bricks” model, 683

Climate, in location decisions, 359

Closed-loop MRP, 578

Closed-loop supply chain, 685

Closeness ratings, 284285

Closing phase (project life cycle), 735, 736

Clothing industry

agility in, 26

Girlfriend Collective, 6970

outsourcing to China, 659

Clustering, 363

“Cocoa for Good” initiative, 28

Collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment (CPFR), 674

Collaborative robots (cobots), 255

Combination layouts, 265268

Comfort band, 306

Common Good Principle, 29

Common variability, 425

Community identification, in location decision, 359360, 361

Compensation, 308310

knowledge-based pay systems, 310

management, 310

output-based (incentive) systems, 308310

for producing goods vs. providing services, 9, 10

productivity and, 61

recent trends, 310

time-based systems, 308309, 310

Competitive edge, 46

Competitiveness, 41, 4244

capacity planning and, 193

competition as external factor, 48

as key issue in operations, 27

marketing influences on, 42

operations influences on, 4243

process selection and, 256257

productivity and, 42, 59

product/service design and, 140143, 145

reasons organizations fail, 4344

in supply chain management, 31, 43

of U.S. Postal Service (USPS), 7172

Complementary demand patterns, 205

Complements, 337

Component commonality, 165, 170

Computer-aided design (CAD), 164165, 170

Computer-aided manufacturing (CAM), 254255

Computer-integrated manufacturing (CIM), 256257

Computerized numerical control (CNC), 254255

Computer software

enterprise resource planning (ERP), 581, 582583, 586

forecasting, 113

linear programming, 840843

project management, 764, 765

waiting-line, 785

Concurrent engineering, 163164, 617

Constant percentage, learning curve, 337

Constant work-in-process (CONWIP), 629

Constraints

binding, 839

defined, 207, 826

linear programming, 826, 830833, 836837, 839

redundant, 836837

sensitivity analysis, 844846

in strategic capacity planning, 207

theory of constraints, 715, 763

in waiting-line management, 813

Construction industry, modular design, 155

Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), 393

Consumer surveys, 81

Continuous improvement, 61, 382, 383, 394, 398400, 420

defined, 395

in lean operations, 612, 616, 623624

Continuous processing, 247, 248, 249, 250251

page 886 

Continuous review system, 507508

Contribution margin, 208

Control, transformation process, 6

Control charts

defined, 107, 404, 428

forecasting error and, 107108, 111

formula summary, 449

as graphical quality tools, 402, 404405, 407

in statistical process control (SPC), 428438, 442

Control limits, 428429

forecasting error, 108111

process capability and, 443444

statistical process control (SPC), 428429, 430431, 434437

Controlling phase (project life cycle), 735, 736

Conversion system, 6

Conveyance kanban (c-kanban), 627

Corbett, James J., 658n

Core competencies, 46

Corporate culture

conversion to lean systems and, 636

in lean operations, 612, 636

TQM vs. traditional organizations, 396

Correlation, 102

Cost-benefit analysis, 161

Costs

of buying vs. making, 201

of enterprise resource planning (ERP), 584586

global operations and, 352353

inventory, 506507, 509510, 526527

of over- and undercapacity, 1314, 192, 193194, 200, 213

of quality, 382, 389390

Cost strategy, 44, 46, 47

Cost-volume analysis, 208211

break-even point (BEP), 208211

indifference point, 209

locational cost-profit-volume analysis, 364366

Council of Supply Chain Management Professionals (CSCMP), 13, 681

Council on Competitiveness, 357358

Country identification, in location decisions, 357358

CPM (critical path method), 742745. See also Network (precedence) diagrams

Cradle-to-grave assessment, 146147

Craft production, 21

Crashing, 759762

“Creeping featurism,” 145

Critical activities, 744, 759762

Critical chain project management (CCPM), 763

Critical path, 744, 745746, 759762

Critical ratio (CR) priority rule, 704, 708709, 710

Crosby, Philip B., 382, 383, 390

Cross-distribution, 677

Cross-docking, 660, 677, 685

Cross-training workers, 280, 623

CR (critical ratio) priority rule, 704, 708709, 710

Cultural factors. See also Corporate culture

for global operations, 354, 355

in product/service design, 145146

Cumulative lead time, 563

Currency risk, in location decisions, 358

Customer contact, for goods vs. services, 9, 10

Customers

expectations for quality, 383385, 389

as external factor, 48

Customer satisfaction, 26

at Amazon.com, 45

competitiveness and, 42

Kano model and, 160162

in product/service design, 141, 142, 158162, 167, 170

in quality function deployment (QFD), 158160

at Wegmans Food Markets, Inc., 35

Customer service

inventory management in, 506507

quality and, 388

strategy based on, 45, 47

Customization, 20

mass customization, 154156, 170, 248

Cyber-security, as key issue in operations, 27

Cycle counting, 513

Cycles

defined, 82

in forecasting, 82, 83, 98

Cycle stock, 525

Cycle time, 273274, 276, 277279

Little’s Law, 506, 629

Cyclical scheduling, 717718

Dantzig, George, 24

Decentralized purchasing, 668669

Decision making, 1820

analysis of trade-offs, 1920

capacity decisions as strategic decisions, 193194

decision theory in. See Decision theory

decision types, 16, 18, 33

degree of customization, 20

ethical, 2931

forecasts in. See Forecasting

hierarchy of, 693694

models, 1819, 23

operational decisions, 16, 33, 44

by operations manager, 16, 1820, 223224

performance metrics, 19

priorities in, 20

in project management, 737738

qualitative approaches, 19

quantitative approaches, 19, 23

strategic decisions. See Strategic decisions

in supply chain management, 33

systems perspective, 20

tactical decisions, 44

under uncertainty, 224, 225227

Decision Sciences Institute, 13

Decision tables, 536537

Decision theory, 222243. See also Decision making

causes of poor decisions, 223224

decision environments, 224227

decision trees, 227229

elements, 222

expected value of perfect information (EVPI), 229230

payoff table, 223

sensitivity analysis, 230232

steps in decision process, 222, 223

in strategic capacity planning, 212

Decision trees, 227229

Decision variables (linear programming), 826

Decline phase of life cycle, 203

Defects, as waste in lean operations, 616

Delayed differentiation, 154, 468, 685686

Delivery speed, 193

Dell, Michael, 50

Delphi method, 81

Demand. See also Strategic capacity planning

in aggregate planning, 201, 467476, 484485, 492, 656

complementary patterns, 205

economic match with supply, 4, 76

forecasting, 7578, 114115, 165, 198199, 505507, 509, 537. See also Forecasting

inventory management and, 505, 507, 509, 537. See also Inventory management

in lean operations, 612, 626627

process management to meet, 1314

in product/service design, 141

for services, 484485

shifting, 813

structural variation in, 14

variability of, 167, 201, 205

Demand chains, 656

Demand management strategies, 201, 467476, 484485, 492, 556

Deming, W. Edwards, 2324, 381382, 381n, 383, 391392, 425

Deming Prize, 381, 391392

Deming wheel, 398399

Demographic conditions, in product/service design, 141

Dependent demand/dependent-demand items, 504, 561, 574, 575. See also Material requirements planning (MRP)

Depth skills, 310

Design. See Product/service design

Design capacity, 194195

Design for assembly (DFA), 165

Design for disassembly (DFD), 149

Design for manufacturing (DFM), 165

Design for recycling (DFR), 149

Design review, in product design and ­development, 163

Deterministic time estimates, 745746

Dettmer, H. William, 207

Development, 143

Differentiation strategy, 44, 47

Diffusion models, 89

Digital Millennium Copyright Act (1998), 142

Direct numerical control (DNC), 254255

Discounts, quantity, 506, 520525, 539

Diseconomies of scale, 205206

Disintermediation, 686

Disruption elimination, in lean operations, 615

Distribution function

operations management and, 16, 582

strategy in supply chain management, 666

Distribution resource planning (DRP), 580581

Division of labor, 23

DMAIC (define-measure-analyze-improve-control), 400

Dodge, H. F., 23, 24, 380

Doubling effect, learning curve, 337338

Drones, 258, 259, 513

Drum-buffer-rope conceptualization, 714715

Du, Lisa, 510n

Dummy activity, 744

Dynamic line balancing, 280

page 887 

Earliest due date (EDD) priority rule, 704, 707, 709, 710

E-business, 2425, 670671

business-to-business (B2B) commerce, 671

“clicks-or-bricks” model, 683

problems and advantages, 670671

returns, 684

in supply chain management, 32, 670671

E-commerce, 25, 586587

Economic conditions

economic indicators, 101102

as external factor, 48

forecasting and, 101102, 114115. See also Forecasting

for global operations, 354

as key issue in operations, 27

productivity as, 59. See also Productivity

in product/service design, 141

Economic order quantity (EOQ), 514525

annual carrying cost, 514518

annual ordering cost, 515517

assumptions, 514

economic production quantity (EPQ), 518520, 539

formula summary, 539

in lean operations, 618

length of order cycle, 516517

in MRP, 575

quantity discounts, 520525

total annual cost, 516518

Economic production quantity (EPQ), 518520, 539

Economies of scale, 21, 205206

EDD (earliest due date) priority rule, 704, 707, 709, 710

EF (earliest finish time), 746, 747749

Effective capacity, 194195

Effectiveness

of process layouts, 281282

productivity and, 6162

Efficiency

in job design, 2123, 302, 305, 306, 310327

in line balancing, 276

productivity and, 62

in strategic capacity planning, 195

in supply chain management, 685686

Emerson, Harrington, 22

Employees. See Workforce

End-of-life (EOL) programs, 147, 153

Energy productivity, 58

fracking productivity improvement, 62

OPEC embargo (1970s) and, 380

at U.S. Postal Service (USPS), 7273

Engineer-to-order (ETO), 675

Enterprise resource planning (ERP), 33, 581589

common mistakes, 587589

costs of, 584586

described, 581, 583

e-commerce and, 586587

implementation time, 584, 585

in improving business performance, 583584

integration with business, 584, 585

lean operations and, 634

operations strategy and, 582, 589

payback, 585586

project management and, 734

project organization and installation ­methods, 586

reasons to implement, 584

in service organizations, 587

software configuration, 586

software modules, 581, 582583

supply chain management and, 663664

Enumerative approach (linear programming), 837

Environmental concerns, 2729. See also Sustainability

global warming/temperature changes, 29, 104

“green initiatives,” 29, 658

landfills, 174

in product/service design, 146151

recycling, 6970, 149151, 174

vegetarian vs. nonvegetarian diets, 29

Environmental scanning, 4748

Equivalent current value, 212

Equivalent interest rate, 212

Ergonomics, 302, 305, 306, 312

Erlang, A. K., 786

ERP. See Enterprise resource planning (ERP)

Errors. See also Forecasting error

defined, 105

PERT (program evaluation review technique), 763

product recalls, 347, 614

project management, 762763

in statistical process control (SPC), 429

Type I/Type II, 429, 443

in work sampling, 324

ES (earliest start time), 746, 747749

Ethical framework, 2930

Ethics and ethical issues, 2931

ethical framework, 2930

ethical principles, 29

ethics, defined, 29

examples of corporate leaders, 3031

for global operations, 354

in location decisions, 354, 360

in product/service design, 144145

in project management, 739

in purchasing, 669

in quality management, 390391, 424

supply chain management and, 664, 673

in working conditions, 308

Ethisphere Institute, 3031

European Quality Award, 391

European Union (EU), 149, 154, 352, 392

Evans, J. R., 384n

Event-response capability, 662

Events, on network diagrams, 743

Exception reports, in MRP, 574

Excess capacity, 368

duplicate orders, 469, 470

problems of, 192

Excess cost, 533

Excess inventory, as waste in lean operations, 615616

Exchange rate risk, in location decisions, 358

Excitement quality (Kano model), 161162

Executing phase (project life cycle), 735, 736

Executive opinions, 80

Expand-early strategy, 213

Expansion, as location option, 352

Expected monetary value (EMV) criterion, 227

Expected value of perfect information (EVPI), 229230

Experimental design, 157

Exponential smoothing, 87

simple, 8788, 112

trend-adjusted, 9293, 112

Exporting

small businesses and, 665

in supply chain management, 665

Extended warranties, 181

External customer, 394

External factors, in strategic capacity planning, 197

External failures, 389390

Extrusion, 257

Eyring, Veronika, 658n

Fabrication, 15

Facilities

as internal factor, 49

locating. See Location planning and analysis

in strategic capacity planning, 196

Facilities layout, 260285

combination layouts, 265268

fixed-position layouts, 261, 264265

importance, 260

layout, defined, 260

objectives, 260

process layouts. See Process layouts

product layouts. See Product layouts

service layouts, 15, 263264, 268272

in strategic capacity planning, 196

Factor rating, 367

Fail-safing, 394, 622

Failure

defined, 156

extended warranties, 181

external, 389390

internal, 389390

mean time between failures (MTBF), 178180, 183184

preventive maintenance and, 261262

wear-out, 182183

Failure costs, 389390

Fairness Principle, 29

Fair Trade Certified label, 30, 31

Fazel, Farzaneh, 397n

FCFS (first come/first service) priority rule, 704, 706, 709

Feasibility analysis, in product design and development, 162

Feasible solution space (linear programming), 826, 828830, 833, 837

Feedback

on decision making, 16

transformation process, 6

Feeding (time) buffers, 763

Feigenbaum, Armand, 382, 383

Fill rate, 530, 682

Finance function

collaboration with operations management, 10, 11

flow management, 656657

forecasting in, 76

global operations and, 353

as key functional area, 4, 1011

nature of, 4

Financial analysis, 211212

cash flow, 211212

internal rate of return (IRR), 211212

inventory turnover, 507

payback, 212, 585586

present value (PV), 211212

return on investment (ROI), 504, 585586, 658

return on quality (ROQ), 390

page 888 

Financial resources, as internal factor, 49

Finished-goods inventory, 505. See also Inventory management

aggregate planning and, 472473

in inspection decision, 422

Finite element analysis (FEA), 165

Finite loading, 698699

Finite-source situations (queuing), 789, 807813

finite-queuing tables, 809811

formulas and notation, 808

First come/first service (FCFS) priority rule, 704, 706, 709, 792

Fitness-for-use, 382, 383384

Fitzsimmons, James A., 166n

Fitzsimmons, Mona J., 166n

5W2H approach, 634

Five forces model (Porter), 48

Five S’s, in lean operations, 632, 633

Fixed automation, 254

Fixed costs, in cost-volume analysis, 208211

Fixed-order-interval (FOI) model, 530533, 539

Fixed-period ordering, in MRP, 575576

Fixed-position layouts, 261, 264265

Flattening organizational structure, 2627

Flexibility. See also Agility

competitiveness and, 4243

forecasting and, 78, 113

in lean operations, 615, 620, 637638

in process strategy, 260

in strategic capacity planning, 202, 213

strategy based on, 46, 47, 50

of work hours, 307

Flexible automation, 255257

Flexible manufacturing systems (FMS), 255256, 268

Flowcharts, 401, 402, 403

Flow management, 656657

Flow process charts, 312313, 314

Flow-shop scheduling, 694696

Flow systems, 694696

Focus forecasting, 8889

Following capacity strategy, 197198, 206

Following tasks, in line balancing, 277

Follow-up evaluation, in product design and development, 163

Food. See also Food service and restaurants

Home-Style Cookies (case), 6768

product design at Vlasic Pickles, 143

productivity in tomato production, 60

quality control, 427

sustainable production, 28, 29

value analysis, 147, 148

vegetarian vs. nonvegetarian diets, 29

Food service and restaurants

aggregate planning, 468

capacity planning, 484

cultural factors in product design, 146

fast food in China, 386

inspection points, 423

mass customization, 155

outsourcing preparation, 202, 221

part-time workers and, 472

quality control, 433

repetitive processing, 262

restaurant layouts, 270, 271

service blueprint, 168

transformation process, 8

Foolproofing, 394, 622

Ford, Henry, 22, 23, 24, 614

Forecasting, 74137

accuracy/error in. See Forecasting error

in aggregate planning, 468469

approaches to, 80

cases, 136137

choosing a technique, 111112

common features, 78

computer software in, 113

of demand, 7578, 114115, 165, 198199, 505507, 509, 537

elements of good forecasts, 7879

forecast, defined, 76

formula summary, 116117

for goods vs. services, 9

introduction, 7678

judgmental/opinion methods, 8081, 116

nature of, 76

in operations strategy, 113

qualitative methods, 8081, 116

quantitative/statistical methods, 80, 82112, 116117

reactive/proactive approach to, 112113

in service organizations, 14

steps in process, 7980

in strategic capacity planning, 192, 198200

in supply chain management, 32, 79, 114115, 674, 678

time horizons in, 7679, 111112, 113, 198199

use by business organizations, 7678

weather, 14, 75, 82, 93, 113

in workforce scheduling, 717

Forecasting error, 76, 78, 104111

control charts, 107108, 111

control limits, 108111

cost/accuracy trade-off, 111112

mean absolute deviation (MAD), 106107, 109, 110

mean absolute percent error (MAPE), 106107

mean squared error (MSE), 106107, 108110

monitoring, 7980, 107111

nature of errors, 105

nonrandom errors, 108

possible sources, 107

standard error of estimate, 100101

tracking signals, 109111

Foroohar, Rana, 17

Forrester, Jay, 24

Forward pass, 749, 751

Forward scheduling, 699

Fraud. See also Ethics and ethical issues

false inspection reports, 424

Friedman, Norm, 221n

Fulfillment, 663, 670671, 675676

Functional strategies, 45

Funding operations, 10

Gantt, Henry, 22, 24

Gantt charts, 22, 24, 697700

load chart, 698699

in project management, 741742

schedule chart, 700

Garvin, David, 383n

Gatekeeping, 684

Gauntt, Joshua, 181n

Gemba walks, 635

General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT, 1994), 25

General-purpose equipment, 263264

General-purpose plant strategy, 362

Geographic information systems (GIS), 362363

Germany, cost savings from global locations, 352353

Ghoshal, Sumantra, 51n

Gilbreth, Frank, 22, 23, 24, 305, 315316

Gilbreth, Lillian, 23, 305, 316

Globalization, 25

advantages/disadvantages, 352354

automation, 354355

capacity planning and, 193

“Cocoa for Good” initiative, 28

competitiveness and, 27

European Union and, 149, 154, 352, 392

in location planning and analysis, 352355, 357359, 361

managing global operations, 354

in product/service design, 146, 149

recycling and, 149

risks, 354, 358

strategy based on, 51

in supply chain management, 3132, 659, 663, 665

Global priority rules, 704709

Global warming, 29, 104

Go, no-go gauge, 438

Goal(s), 44

of lean manufacturing, 615616

of maintenance, 646647

of strategic capacity planning, 192, 466

of waiting-line management, 788

Goal, The (Goldratt), 714715

Goldratt, Eli, 207, 714715, 763

Goldstein, Jacob, 311, 311n, 679n

Goods, 4

in goods-service continuum, 7

process variation and, 14

production of, vs. providing services, 810

supply chains for, 46, 656, 657

transformation processes, 68

Goods-in-transit, 505

Government service, location decisions, 359

GPS navigation, 678

Grant, Eugene, 433n

Graphical linear programming, 828840

binding constraint, 839

enumerative approach, 837

identifying feasible solution space, 833

minimization, 837839

outline, 828830

plotting constraints, 830833

plotting objective function line, 833836

redundant constraints, 836837

slack/surplus, 839840

Graphical tools, 401408

aggregate planning, 478480

cause-and-effect (fishbone) diagrams, 383, 402, 405, 406

check sheets, 401403, 406

control charts, 402, 404405, 407

flowcharts, 401, 402, 403

histograms, 401, 402, 404

illustrations of use, 406407

Pareto analysis, 401404, 406, 407

problem solving/process improvement, 401408

run charts, 406

scatter diagrams, 402, 404, 405

page 889 

Green, Erin H., 658n

“Green initiatives,” 29, 658

Groover, Mikell P., 280n

Gross requirements, in MRP, 567, 568

Group incentive plans, 309310

Group technology, 267268, 619

Growth

productivity, 5657

as strategy, 49

Growth phase of life cycle, 202203

Hagan, Alex, 311, 311n

Harris, F. W., 23, 24

Hawthorne studies, 23

Health care

capacity planning, 191, 221 (case), 484

decision trees, 227

drones in, 258

facilities layouts, 269, 271

inspection points, 423

inventory management, 258, 504

occupational, 307

radio frequency identification (RFID) in, 253, 448

robotic systems, 256

scheduling, 718

transformation process for hospitals, 8

Heijunka, 613

Hertzberg, Frederick, 23

Heuristic (intuitive) rules, in line balancing, 274, 276279

High-volume system scheduling, 694696

Histograms, 401, 402, 404

History

of operations management, 2124

of quality management, 380383

Holding (carrying) cost, 509510

economic order quantity (EOQ) model, 514518

incremental holding cost, 680

in supply chain management, 680, 685

Hook, Leslie, 149, 149n

Horizontal loading, 303

Horizontal skills, 310

Hospitality business

inspection points, 423

reservations, 716

Hospitals. See Health care

Housekeeping, in lean operations, 632

House of quality, 158160, 161

Howley, Lauraine, 62n

Human factors

in product/service design, 145

in strategic capacity planning, 197

Human relations movement, 23

Human resources. See Personnel/human resources function

Hungarian method, 701704

Idea generation

benchmarking, 408

brainstorming, 407

in product/service design, 142144

quality circles, 382, 383, 407

Imai, Masaaki, 616n

Implied warranty, 144

Import restrictions, global operations and, 353

Incentive (output-based) systems, 308310

Incremental holding cost, 680

Independence, 756

path duration times, 756758

Independent contractors, 472

Independent-demand items, 504, 575. See also Inventory management

Independent events, 177178

Indifference point, 209

Individual incentive plans, 309

Industrial engineering, operations management and, 16

Industrial parks, 361

Industrial Revolution, 21, 24, 380

Inefficiency, as waste in lean operations, 616

Infinite loading, 698699

Infinite-source situations (queuing), 789, 790, 793807

basic relationships, 794795

infinite-source tables, 798799

symbols, 793

Information technology (IT), 25, 252253

in supply chain management, 659661, 666

Information velocity, 682

Initiating phase (project life cycle), 734, 736

Innovation

competitiveness and, 42

history of operations management and, 2124

as key issue in operations, 27

in manufacturing, 17

newness strategy and, 46, 47, 54

in supply chain management, 657662, 665

technological, 25, 252. See also Technology

Input/output (I/O) control, 700, 701

Inputs

aggregate planning, 469, 470

examples of, 7

for goods vs. services, 9, 10

managing processes to meet demand, 1314

master production schedule, 488

material requirements planning, 562, 563566

in transformation process, 7, 8

Inspection, 420425

as acceptance sampling, 419, 420

amount and frequency, 421422

basic issues, 420421

off-site vs. on-site, 424425

points in process, 420, 422423

as process control, 420

Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences (INFORMS), 13

Institute for Supply Management (ISM), 13

Institute of Industrial Engineers, 13

Institute of Packaging Professionals, 142

Intellectual property rights, 354

patents, 9, 10, 17, 143

Interchangeable parts, 22, 153

Intermediate-range planning. See Aggregate planning

Intermediate-volume system scheduling, 696697

Intermittent processing, 261, 263264

Internal customer, 382, 394

Internal failures, 389390

Internal rate of return (IRR), 211212

International Design Excellence Award, 152

International Ergonomics Association, 305

International Standards Organization (ISO), 392393

ISO 9000, 392393, 672, 740

ISO 14000, 392393

ISO 24700, 393

Internet, 24, 61

Internet of Things (IoT), 257

Introduction phase of life cycle, 202

Inventory, 503

in intermediate-volume system scheduling, 696697

in lean operations, 612, 615, 621622

in theory of constraints, 715

Inventory management, 502559

aggregate planning and, 472473

buffer inventory, 506, 650, 674675

cases, 553555

classification system, 507, 510513

competitiveness and, 43

demand forecasts, 507, 509

ERP and, 582

for goods vs. services, 9, 10

inventory, defined, 503

inventory costs, 506507, 509510, 526527

inventory counting systems, 507509

inventory functions, 505506

inventory types, 505

lead-time information, 507, 509

in lean operations, 612, 615616, 621622

learning curves in, 341

master production schedule (MPS), 467, 488491

nature and importance of inventories, 504507

objective, 506507

in operations strategy, 538

ordering policies. See Inventory ordering policies

“real world” vs. “intuitive approach,” 504, 506507

requirements for effective, 507513

in service organizations, 15, 504

small businesses and, 664665

in supply chain management, 32, 33, 538, 664665, 674675

vendor-managed inventory (VMI), 638, 675, 677

at Wegmans Food Markets, Inc., 3435

Inventory ordering policies, 513537

economic order quantity (EOQ) models, 514525, 539

economic production quantity (EPQ), 518520, 539

fixed-order-interval (FOI) model, 530533, 539

quantity discounts, 506, 520525, 539

reorder point (ROP) ordering, 525530, 539

single-period model/newsboy problem, 533537, 539

Inventory order size, 23

Inventory records, 566

Inventory turnover, 507

Inventory velocity, 674

Investment proposals, 10

Irregular variations

defined, 82

in forecasting, 82, 83

Ishikawa, Kaoru, 24, 382, 383

Ishikawa diagrams, 383, 402, 405, 406

ISO 9000, 392393, 672, 740

ISO 14000, 392393

ISO 24700, 393

page 890 

Japan

influence on manufacturing process, 2324, 611, 612. See also Lean operations

influence on quality management, 381383, 395, 447, 448, 612

shoplifting prevention, 510

Jidoka, 613

JIT II, 638

Job design, 301305

behavioral approaches, 302, 303

efficiency approaches, 2123, 302, 305, 306, 310327

ergonomics, 302, 305, 306

human relations movement and, 23

motivation, 303

in operations strategy, 327328

specialization, 302303

teams, 303305

Job enlargement, 303

Job enrichment, 303

Job flow time, 705

Job lateness, 705

Job rotation, 303

Job shop processing, 247, 248, 249

Job-shop scheduling, 697713

loading, 697704

sequencing, 704713

Job time, 704

Jockeying, 792

Johnson, Kevin, 355

Johnson’s rule, 711713

Jones, Daniel, 612

Judgmental forecasts, 8081

consumer surveys, 81

Delphi method, 81

executive opinions, 80

salesforce opinions, 81

Juran, Joseph M., 2324, 381, 382, 383, 390

Just-in-time (JIT). See also Lean operations

defined, 611

problems, 613, 614, 634

supply chain and, 634

Kaizen, 382, 395, 613, 616

Kaminsky, Philip, 670n

Kanban, 613, 627629

Kano, Noriaki, 160162

Kano model, 160162

Kaplan, Robert S., 5456

Kasibhatla, Prasad, 658n

Kiosks, 270

Knod, Edward M., 620n

Knowledge-based pay, 310

Knowledge skills, 12

Koch, Christopher, 583587

Labeling, 142

Labor content, for goods vs. services, 9, 10

Labor factors, in location decisions, 359

Labor productivity, 58

location decision and, 353, 354, 358, 359

turnover and, 61

Labor turnover, productivity and, 61

Language factors, in global operations, 354

Laplace decision criterion, 225226

Laser technology, 253

Lauer, Axel, 658n

Layout. See Facilities layout

Leadership, in lean operations, 624

Leading capacity strategy, 197, 206

Leading variable, 98

Lead time, 113, 527530

cumulative, in MRP, 563

defined, 11, 509

Lean culture, 612, 636

Lean operations, 303, 420, 538, 610645

balanced system, 620621

basic elements, 611

benefits and risks of lean systems, 613

building blocks, 616632

case, 643

characteristics of lean systems, 612613

defined, 611

demand in, 612, 626627

fail-safe methods, 394, 622

goals, 615616

lean services, 637638

manufacturing cells, 619

manufacturing planning and control, 624632

minimizing inventory storage, 621622

in operations strategy, 638639

origins, 611, 612, 614

overview, 640

personnel/organizational elements, 622624

principles of, 613

process design, 252, 617622

product design, 616617

quality improvement, 619

setup time reduction, 618619

small lot sizes, 617618

in supply chain management, 659, 665

Toyota Production System (TPS), 611, 612, 613615, 635

traditional production philosophies vs., 632

transitioning to lean system, 635637

work flexibility, 615, 620

Lean process design, 252, 617622

Lean systems, 2627, 113, 280. See also Agility; Just-in-time (JIT)

Lean tools, 632635

enterprise resource planning (ERP), 634

5W2H approach, 634

gemba walks, 635

JIT deliveries, 634

Six Sigma, 634

value stream mapping, 632633

vendor-managed inventory (VMI)/JIT II, 638, 675, 677

Learning curves, 336347

applications, 340342

case, 347

cautions and criticisms, 342343

concept of, 336340

doubling effect, 337338

as experience curves, 336337

learning curve coefficients, 338340

operations strategy and, 342

Least squares line, 9899

Leavenworth, Richard, 433n

Legal department, collaboration with operations, 12

Legal environment

as external factor, 48

for global operations, 353, 354

in product/service design, 141, 142, 144145

for working conditions, 308

Leonard, Matt, 660n

Level capacity strategy

in aggregate planning, 473476, 492

defined, 474

in lean operations, 624626

Leveraged buyouts, 52

LF (latest finish time), 746, 749750

Liedtke, Michael, 787n

Life cycle

cradle-to-grave assessment, 146147

end-of-life (EOL) programs, 147, 153

extended warranties and, 181

product life cycle management (PLM), 153

in product/service design, 146147, 151153, 248

project, 734736

stages of, 202203

in strategic capacity planning, 202203

Lilac Festival (Rochester, NY), 104

Lindsey, W. M., 384n

Linear programming (LP), 824856

in aggregate planning, 481482, 483

assignment model of scheduling, 701704

cases, 853855

components, 826827

computer solutions, 840843

graphical, 828840

linear programming models, 826828

nature of, 825826

sensitivity analysis, 843846

Simplex method, 840

transportation model, 366

transportation table, 481482, 483

Linear regression analysis, 80, 98104

multiple regression, 102, 104

regression equation, 103

simple linear regression, 80, 98104

Linear trend equation, 8992

Line balancing, 272280, 695696

cycle time, 273274, 276, 277279

guidelines, 276279

importance, 272

in lean operations, 620621

other approaches, 279280

other factors, 279

precedence diagrams, 274276, 277279

Little’s law, 506, 629

Load chart, 698699

Loading, 697704

assignment model of linear programming, 701704

Gantt charts, 697700

Hungarian method, 701704

input/output (I/O) control, 700, 701

schedule charts, 700

Load reports, 579580

Local priority rules, 704709

Locational cost-profit-volume analysis, 364366

Location planning and analysis, 348377

case, 377

competitiveness and, 42

evaluating location alternatives, 364370

general procedures, 355370

geographic information systems (GIS), 362363

global locations, 352355, 357358

for goods vs. services, 9

identifying location alternatives, 356363

key factors, 356357

location options, 352

page 891 

in manufacturing. See Manufacturing location planning and analysis

nature of location decisions, 350352, 364

need for location decisions, 350

objectives of location decisions, 351

in process layout design, 282285

in service and retail businesses, 9, 15, 358359, 363364

in strategic capacity planning, 196

strategy based on location, 47

in supply chain management, 32, 33, 351

Logistical transactions, 631

Logistics, 676681

defined, 656, 676

evaluating alternatives, 680681

incoming and outgoing shipments, 678

movement within a facility, 676677

navigation, 678

reverse, 683

in supply chain management, 32, 656, 676681

third-party logistics (3-PL), 681

tracking goods, 678680, 681

Wegmans’ shipping system, 677678

Loma Linda University, 29

Long-range forecasting, 76, 77

Long-range planning

capacity planning. See Strategic capacity planning

layout decisions. See Facilities layout

location decisions. See Location planning and analysis

in perspective, 466467

product design. See Product design and development; Service design and development

work system design. See Job design; Work measurement

Long-term capacity, 198, 200

Lot-for-lot ordering, in MRP, 568571, 575

Lot-size ordering, in MRP, 568571, 575576

Lowell Center, 252

Lower control limit (LCL), 428429, 430431, 435437

Low-level coding, 566

Low-volume system scheduling. See Job-shop scheduling

LS (latest start time), 746, 749750

Lubbers, Sarah, 554555

Lusche, Chris, 554555

MacDonald, Jim, 142

Machine productivity, 58

Machine shops, 263264

Machine That Changed the World, The (Womack et al.), 612

MacLellan, Lila, 355n

MAD (mean absolute deviation), 106107, 109, 110

Maintenance, 646652

breakdown, 647, 650, 696

design issues in, 649

goal of, 646647

operations management and, 16

predictive, 649

preventive, 261262, 632, 647, 648650, 696

replacement, 650

Maintenance and repairs (MRO) inventory, 505

Maister, David H., 814

Makespan, 705

Make-to-order (MTO), 675

Make-to-stock (MTS), 676

Maki, Ayaka, 510n

Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award, 388, 391

Management information systems (MIS)

collaboration with operations, 12

forecasting in, 77

Management science, 23

Managers

competitiveness and, 43

of global operations, 354

implications of waiting lines, 787

management compensation, 310

operations managers. See Operations managers

project managers, 737740

role in forecasting process, 78

statistical process control (SPC) considerations, 437438

top. See Top management

Manufacturability, 11

defined, 141, 165

in product design, 141, 165

Manufacturing

importance of manufacturing sector, 17

outsourcing. See Outsourcing

providing services vs., 810. See also Goods

supply chain management. See Supply chain management

typical supply chain, 657

Manufacturing location planning and analysis, 350363, 364369

community identification, 359360, 361

country identification, 357358

evaluating location alternatives, 364370

general procedure, 355363

global operations, 352355, 357359, 361

multiple plant manufacturing strategies, 361362

nature of location decisions, 350352, 364

need for location decisions, 350

region identification, 358359, 361

site identification, 360361

Manufacturing planning and control, 624632

close vendor relationships, 629630

housekeeping, 632

level loading, 624626

limited work-in-process (WIP), 629

preventive maintenance, 632

pull systems, 626627

reduced transaction processing, 631

supplier tiers, 630631

visual systems, 612, 627628

Manufacturing resources planning (MRP II), 577578

MAPE (mean absolute percent error), 106107

Market(s)

as external factor, 49

global operations and, 352

in location decision, 358359

Market area plant strategy, 362

Marketing function

collaboration with operations, 11, 46, 53, 199, 200

ERP and, 582

forecasting in, 77

influences on competitiveness, 42

as key functional area, 4, 11

nature of, 4

quality and, 388

strategy formulation and, 53

Market test, in product design and development, 163

Markula Center for Applied Ethics, Santa Clara University, 2930

Maslow, Abraham, 23

Mass customization, 154156, 170, 248

Mass production, 22

Master production schedule (MPS)/master schedule, 467, 486491, 563

available-to-promise (ATP) inventory, 488491

in capacity requirements planning, 579580

inputs, 488

in intermediate-volume system scheduling, 697

master scheduler role, 486487

in material requirements planning (MRP), 486, 563, 566

outputs, 488491

projected-on-hand inventory, 488491

rough-cut capacity planning (RCCP), 487

time fences, 487488

Material requirements planning (MRP), 562578

benefits and requirements, 576577

capacity requirements planning, 579581

cases, 605606

closed-loop, 578

inputs, 562, 563566

kanban and, 628629

lot sizing, 575576

manufacturing resources planning (MRP II), 577578

master production schedule (MPS) in, 486, 563, 566

outputs, 562, 573574

overview, 562

problems, 629

processing, 562, 566573

safety stock, 574575

in service organizations, 576

updating the system, 572573

Mathematical models, 18

in aggregate planning, 480483

linear programming (LP). See Linear ­programming (LP)

simulation models. See Simulation models

transportation model, 366

transportation tables, 481482, 483

Matrix organization, 736737

Maturity phase of life cycle, 203

Maximax decision criterion, 225226

Maximin decision criterion, 225226

Mayo, Elton, 23, 24

McGregor, Douglas, 23

McKinsey Global Institute, 20

Mean (average), 14

Mean absolute deviation (MAD), 106107, 109, 110

Mean absolute percent error (MAPE), 106107

Mean control charts, 430434

Mean squared error (MSE), 106107, 108110

Mean time between failures (MTBF), 178180, 183184

Median, in run tests, 439442

Mergers and acquisitions, 52

Methane recycling, 174

page 892 

Methods analysis, 310314

Methods Engineering Council, 323

Methods-time-measurement (MTM), 323

Microfactories, 360

Micromotion study, 316

Miller, Jeffrey G., 631, 631n

Mills, Karen, 619n

Minimax regret decision criterion, 225, 226

Minimization (linear programming), 837839

Mission, 44, 52

Mission statement, 44

Mistake-proofing, 394

Mixed capacity strategy, in aggregate planning, 473474, 492

Mixed model line, 281

Mixed-model sequencing, 625

Models, 1819

analytics, 20

benefits and limitations of, 19

decision making, 1819, 23

in management science, 23

types of, 18

Modular design, 155156, 468, 617

Moira, Alexander, 740

Monitoring phase (project life cycle), 735, 736

Most likely time, 753

Motion study, 305, 315316

Motion study principles, 315

Motivation, in job design, 303

Mourdoukoutas, Panos, 355n

Moving, as location option, 352

Moving assembly lines, 22

Moving average, 8486, 112

MRP. See Material requirements planning (MRP)

MRP II (manufacturing resources planning), 577578, 628

MSE (mean squared error), 106107, 108110

Muda, 613, 615616

Multifactor productivity measures, 57, 5859

Multiple break-even quantities, 210

Multiple-priority model, 793, 804807

Multiple projects, 764

Multiple regression analysis, 102, 104

Multiple servers, exponential service time, 793, 797801

Multiple-source purchasing, 630

Multiplicative model, 94

Murray, Joseph, 69

Muther, Richard, 284, 284n

Muther grid, 284

Myers, Anthony, 28n

Naive forecasts, 8283

Nascimento Rodrigues, Jorge, 616n

National Association of Purchasing Managers, 669

National Institute of Standards (NISO), 388

Near-sourcing, 665

Necessity, in location of raw materials, 358

Negative exponential distributions, of service patterns, 790, 791792

Net-change systems, 572573

Net requirements, in MRP, 567, 568, 571

Network (precedence) diagrams, 742, 743745

activity-on-arrow (AOA), 743, 744750

activity-on-node (AON), 743, 750752

conventions, 744745

dependent path durations, 758759

determining path probabilities, 756758

events, 743

expected activity times and variances, 754755

expected duration and standard deviation, 754755

independent path duration times, 756758

nature and purpose, 743744

simulation, 758759

New demand, in aggregate planning, 471

New locations, as location option, 352

Newness strategy, 46, 47, 54

New products/services

degree of newness, 158

“first-to-market” approach, 170

learning curves in pricing, 341

product introduction, 163

in supply chain management, 666

Newsboy problem. See Single-period model

Nichols, Megan Ray, 661n

Niebel, Benjamin W., 307n, 313n, 315n, 317n, 322n

Nodes, decision tree, 228229

Noise and vibrations, 306, 307

Nonlinear regression, 104

Nonrandom (assignable) variation, 14, 425, 439, 441442, 443

Nonrenewable resources, 150

Normal distribution

in forecasting demand, 199

tables, 870872

working with, 876880

Normal operating conditions, 156

Norman, Ed, 271

Norton, David P., 5456

Numerically controlled (N/C) machines, 254255

Objective function (linear programming), 826, 833836

Objective function coefficient changes (sensitivity analysis), 843844

Occupational Safety and Health Act (1970), 308

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), 308

Office layouts, 271

Ohno, Taiichi, 24, 382, 383, 611, 635

Operational decisions, 16, 33, 44

Operational factors

in strategic capacity planning, 197

in supply chain management, 666

Operational processes, 13

Operations management

career opportunities, 12

collaboration with other functional areas, 1012, 46, 53, 199, 200

current state of, 2427

decision making in, 16, 1820, 223224

defined, 4

design of operations function, 68

forecasting in, 77. See also Forecasting

historical evolution of, 2124

implications of organization strategy for, 54

importance, 1012

influences on competitiveness, 4243

interface with purchasing, 667

introduction, 48

as key functional area, 4, 1012

key issues in, 2733

nature of, 3, 48

operations tours. See Operations Tours

for producing goods vs. providing services, 810

professional associations, 1213

quality and, 388

sample job descriptions, 12

scope in manufacturing business, 1517

scope in service organizations, 1415

strategic decision areas, 52, 53

supply chain management and, 1517, 582

Operations managers

decision making by, 16, 1820, 223224

ethical decisions of, 30

key function of, 1617

strategy formulation and, 53

Operations strategy, 5153

Balanced Scorecard (BSC), 5456

capacity planning in, 193194, 197198, 202206, 213

ERP and, 582, 589

examples of, 47

forecasting in, 113

inventory management in, 538

lean operations in, 638639

learning curves in, 342

location decisions in, 350351

nature of, 2526, 41, 52

operations management decision areas, 52, 53

product/service design as, 140, 141, 170

project management, 764765

quality-based strategies, 5253, 409

quality management, 448

in scheduling, 719

time-based strategies, 53

in waiting-line management, 814815

work design and measurement in, 327328

Operations Tours, 33

Boeing, 644

Bruegger’s Bagel Bakery, 556

High Acres Landfill (New York), 174

Morton International, 250251

PSC, Inc., 557559

Stickley Furniture, 606609

U.S. Postal Service (USPS), 7073

Wegmans Food Markets, Inc., 3335

Wegmans’ Shipping System, 677678

Opinion forecasts. See Judgmental forecasts

Opportunity cost, 470

Optimal operating level, 205206

Optimistic time, 753

Order cycles, 506

economic order quantity (EOQ) model, 516517

Order fulfillment, 663, 670671, 675676

Ordering costs, 510

economic order quantity (EOQ) model, 514518

Order monitoring, 668

Order qualifiers, 48

Order releases, in MRP, 574

Order winners, 48

Organizational structure

flattening, 2627

matrix organization, 736737

Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC), 380

Organization strategy

Balanced Scorecard (BSC), 5456

examples of, 47, 5051, 54

implications for operations management, 54

nature of, 41, 45, 52

page 893 

OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration), 308

Ouchi, William, 23

Output-based (incentive) systems, 308310

Output rate, 273

Outputs

aggregate planning, 469, 470

examples of, 7

for goods vs. services, 10

managing processes to meet demand, 1314

master production schedule, 488491

material requirements planning (MRP), 562, 573574

output constraints in line balancing, 276277

in transformation process, 7, 8

Outsourcing

in aggregate planning, 473

defined, 31

environmental issues in, 29

impact of, 17, 29

productivity and, 61

in strategic capacity planning, 201202, 205206, 221

as strategy, 49

in supply chain management, 31, 33, 658659, 663

Overproduction, as waste in lean operations, 616

Overstocking costs, 506507

Overtime work, 205, 472

Packaging

in product design, 142, 148, 149151, 170

quality and, 388

recycling, 6970, 150151

Parallel workstations, 279280

Parameter design, 157

Parameters (linear programming), 826

Parasuraman, A., 384n, 385n

Pareto, Vilfredo, 401

Pareto analysis, 401404, 406, 407

Pareto phenomenon, 20, 650

Part families, 266

Partial productivity measures, 5758

Part-time workers, aggregate planning and, 472

Patents

development of, 143

for goods vs. services, 9, 10

in manufacturing process, 17

Paths, network diagram, 743744

Pay. See Compensation

Payback, 211212

in ERP, 585586

Payoff table, 223

p-charts, 434436

Pegging, 572

People skills, 12

Percentage of idle time, 275276

Pereira, Ron, 635n

Perez, Marvin G., 28n

Performance-control reports, in MRP, 574

Performance metrics, 19

job sequencing, 705710

productivity, 9, 10

project management, 739

supply chain, 682

in theory of constraints, 715

waiting-line management, 792793

Performance quality (Kano model), 161162

Periodic orders, 506

Periodic system, 507, 508

Perishability, in location of raw materials, 358, 359

Perpetual inventory system, 507508

Personnel/human resources function. See also Workforce

collaboration with operations, 12

ERP and, 582, 584

forecasting in, 76

as internal factor, 49

in lean operations, 622624

PERT (program evaluation and review technique), 742745, 765. See also Network (precedence) diagrams

advantages, 762

potential errors, 763

Pessimistic time, 753

Phillips, Erica E., 149, 149n

Physical models, 18

Pipeline inventories, 506

Pisani, Joseph, 787n

Pisano, Gary, 17, 17n

Plambeck, Erica L., 470n

Plan-do-study-act (PDSA) cycle, 398399

Planned-order receipts, in MRP, 568

Planned-order releases, in MRP, 568, 570571

Planned orders, in MRP, 574

Planning phase (project life cycle), 735, 736

Planning reports, in MRP, 574

Point-of-sale (POS) systems, 508509

Poisson distribution

of arrival patterns, 790792

in forecasting demand, 199, 537

table, 873874

Poka-yoke, 394, 622

Policy factors, in strategic capacity planning, 197

Political conditions

as external factor, 48

for global operations, 354

in product/service design, 141

Pollution, 29

Population source (queuing)

finite-source situations, 789, 807813

infinite-source situations, 789, 790, 793807

Porter, Michael E., 48, 48n

Positional weight, 277

Precedence diagrams, 274276, 277279

Preceding tasks, in line balancing, 277

Predetermined time standards, 323

Predictability, learning curve, 337

Predictive maintenance, 649

Predictor variables, 98

Present value, 211212

Prevention costs, 389, 390

Preventive maintenance, 261262, 647, 648650

breakdown maintenance vs., 648649

defined, 632

high-volume system scheduling, 696

in lean operations, 632

Price and pricing

in aggregate planning, 470

competitiveness and, 42

degree of price elasticity, 470

inventory management and, 506

learning curves in setting, 341

quantity discounts, 506, 520525, 539

Price strategy, 47, 54

Primary reports, in MRP, 573574

Principles of Scientific Management,The ­(Taylor), 21

Priorities, 20

Priority rules, 704710

assumptions, 705

global, 704709

job sequences using, 705710

local, 704709

performance measures, 705

in scheduling services, 715

Proactive approach to forecasting, 112113

Probabilistic time estimates, 745, 753755

Problem solving

basic steps, 398

graphical quality tools, 401408

in lean operations, 623, 637

in total quality management (TQM), 398408

Process

categories of business processes, 13

defined, 13

in strategic capacity planning, 196

Process batch, 715

Process capability, 443448

capability analysis, 444447

defined, 444

formula summary, 450

improving, 447

limitations of capability indexes, 447

specifications and, 443, 444, 446447

Taguchi loss function, 447, 448

variability of process output, 443444

Process design and development

high-volume system scheduling, 696

in lean operations, 617622

in lean services, 637638

robust design in, 157

technology in, 25

Process improvement, 26, 398408

graphical quality tools, 401408

overview, 399

Six Sigma, 26, 161, 400, 446

in total quality management (TQM), 398408

Processing, in supply chain management, 32

Process layouts

advantages/disadvantages, 264

cellular layouts vs., 266, 267

closeness ratings, 284285

in combination layouts, 265268

described, 261, 263264

designing, 281285

information requirements, 282

measures of effectiveness, 281282

minimizing transportation costs or distances, 282283

Process management

categories of business processes, 13

for goods vs. services, 8

to meet demand, 1314

process variation, 14

Process plant strategy, 362

Process research & development (R&D), 143

Process selection, 246259

defined, 246

importance, 245, 246

lean process design, 252

process strategy, 246, 260

process types, 247251

product and service profiling, 251252

sustainable production of goods and services, 252

technology in, 252259

page 894 

Process specifications, in product design and development, 163

Process strategy, 260

Process technology, 25, 252, 253. See also Technology

Process types, 247251

batch, 67, 247, 248, 249, 715

continuous, 247, 248, 249, 250251

job shop, 247, 248, 249

project, 249251

repetitive/assembly, 247, 248, 249

Process variability, 14, 425, 443444

Process variation, 14

Process yield, 60, 423

Procurement. See Purchasing/procurement function

Product(s)

calculating processing requirements, 199200

flow management, 656

as internal factor, 49

recalls, 347, 614

Product bundle, 166

Product design and development, 162165. See also Product/service design

component commonality, 165

computer-aided design (CAD), 164165

concurrent engineering, 163164, 617

design for disassembly (DFD), 149

design for recycling (DFR), 149

high-volume system scheduling, 696

in lean operations, 616617

packaging in, 142, 148, 149151, 170

phases in, 162163

production requirements, 163, 165

quality considerations, 380, 383, 385, 386, 387, 419425, 448. See also Quality management

recycling, 149151

remanufacturing, 148149

service design vs., 166167, 169

technology in, 25

value analysis, 147148

Product families, 165

Product introduction, in product design and development, 163

Production and Operations Management Society (POMS), The, College of Engineering, Florida International University, 13

Production capabilities, 163, 165

Production decisions

process selection. See Process selection

in supply chain management, 33

Production flexibility, in lean operations, 615, 620

Production kanban (p-kanban), 627

Production lines

defined, 261

line balancing, 272280

Production planning function, ERP and, 582

Production process

quality and, 388

robust design in, 157

Productivity, 41, 5662

competitiveness and, 42, 59

computing, 5759

factors that affect, 6061

importance, 59

improving, 31, 6162

labor, 58, 61, 353, 354, 358, 359

metrics for goods vs. services, 9, 10

motion study, 305, 315316

multifactor measures, 57, 5859

partial measures, 5758

quality and, 389

in service sector, 5960

of U.S. Postal Service (USPS), 71

Productivity growth, 5657

Product layouts, 261263

advantages/disadvantages, 262263

assembly lines, 261

in combination layouts, 265268

defined, 261

line balancing, 272280

preventive maintenance, 261262

production lines, 261

U-shaped, 263

Product liability, 144

Product life cycle management (PLM), 153

Product mix, 200, 696

Product packages, 6

Product plant strategy, 362

Product profiling, 251252

Product/service design, 138174. See also Product design and development; Service design and development

activities and responsibilities of, 140

as business operations strategy, 140, 141, 170

capacity planning and, 196, 202

competitiveness and, 42

cultural factors, 145146

customer satisfaction in, 141, 142, 158162, 167, 170

degree of newness, 158

forecasting in, 77

globalization, 146, 149

human factors, 145

idea generation in, 142144

interface with purchasing, 667

Kano model, 160162

key questions, 141

legal and ethical considerations, 141, 142, 144145

life cycle in, 146147, 151153

mass customization, 154156

objectives, 141

operations strategy, 170

preventive maintenance and, 649

productivity and, 61

product or service life stages, 146147, 151153, 248

quality function deployment (QFD), 158160, 161

reasons for design or redesign, 141142

reliability, 156157. See also Reliability

robust design, 157

standardization, 22, 61, 153154

in supply chain management, 32

sustainability in, 146151

Product/service technology, 25

Product specifications, in product design and development, 162

Product structure trees, in MRP, 563565, 572

Profitability, transformation process, 6

Profit Impact of Market Strategy (PIMS) database, 4950

Programmable automation, 254255

Programmable robots, 255

Project(s)

defined, 249, 734

nature of, 734, 736737

Project (time) buffers, 763

Project champions, 740

Projected on hand, 488491, 567

Project life cycle, 734736

Project management, 732782

behavioral issues, 739

budget control, 739, 759

case, 781

computing algorithm, 746753

CPM (critical path method), 742745

crashing, 759762

critical chain project management (CCPM), 763

determining path probabilities, 756758

deterministic time estimates, 745746

ethics, 739

Gantt charts, 741742

key decisions, 737738

nature of projects, 734, 736737

network diagram/conventions, 743745

operations strategy, 764765

overview, 735

PERT (program evaluation and review technique), 742745, 762763, 765

potential sources of error, 762763

probabilistic time estimates, 745, 753755

project champions, 740

project life cycle, 734736

project management software, 764, 765

project management triangle, 739

project manager, 737740

pros and cons of projects, 740741

risk management, 765766

simulation, 758759

termination decision, 738

virtual project teams, 763764

work breakdown structure (WBS), 741

Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK), 738739

Project Management Institute (PMI), 13, 735, 738739, 740

Project management triangle, 739

Project managers, 737740

Project planning and design, 737

Project processing, 249251

Project slippage, 764

Project teams

evaluation methods, 739

matrix organization, 737

selecting, 737

virtual, 763764

Promotion

in aggregate planning, 470471

competitiveness and, 42

Prototype development, in product design and development, 163

Public relations department, collaboration with operations, 12

Pull systems, 626627

Purchase cost, 509

Purchased parts, in inspection decision, 422

Purchasing cycle, 667668

Purchasing/procurement function

centralized vs. decentralized, 668669

ERP and, 582

ethics in, 669

interfaces, 667

page 895 

learning curves in, 340341

operations management and, 16

purchasing cycle, 667668

quality and, 388

strategic sourcing, 681682

supply chain management and, 32, 33, 667669, 681682

at Wegmans Food Markets, Inc., 3435

Push systems, 626

Pyxis® ProcedureStation TM, 637

QFD (quality function deployment), 158160, 161

Qualitative approaches

to decision making, 19

to forecasting, 8081, 116

Quality, defined, 379380

Quality at the source, 395

Quality-based strategies, 5253

Quality circles, 382, 383, 407

Quality control, 23, 380, 381, 418463

cases, 462463

defined, 419

inspections, 420425

operations strategy and, 448

process capability, 443448

purpose, 419

statistical process control (SPC). See Statistical process control (SPC)

Quality differences, 61

Quality function deployment (QFD), 158160, 161

Quality improvement, in lean operations, 619

Quality Is Free (Crosby), 382

Quality management, 378416

awards, 152, 381, 388, 391392

benefits of quality, 388

cases, 414416

compensation system and, 309

competitiveness and, 42

consequences of poor quality, 388389

costs of quality, 382, 389390

determinants of quality, 386387

dimensions of quality, 383385

ethics and, 390391, 424

evolution, 380381

foundations of modern, 381383

for global operations, 354

for goods vs. services, 9, 10

graphical tools, 383, 401408

in high-volume system scheduling, 696

ISO certification, 392393, 672, 740

Kano model, 160162

as key issue in operations, 27, 388

in lean operations, 612, 617

in operations strategy, 5253, 409

process improvement. See Process improvement

quality, defined, 379380

responsibility for quality, 387388

in service organizations, 15, 167

supply chain and, 393394

in supply chain management, 31

total quality management (TQM). See Total quality management (TQM)

at Wegmans Food Markets, Inc., 35

Quality of conformance, 386, 425

Quality of design, 386

Quality of work life, 303, 305310

compensation, 308310

working conditions, 306308

Quality revolution, 24, 26

Quality strategy, 46, 47, 54

Quality tools, 401408

benchmarking, 408

brainstorming, 407

in generating ideas, 382, 383, 407408

graphical. See Graphical tools

quality circles, 382, 383, 407

Quality transactions, 631

Quality Without Tears (Crosby), 382

Quantitative approaches

to decision making, 19, 23

to forecasting, 80, 82112, 116117

to reliability measurement, 176183

Quantity discounts, 506, 520525, 539

Queue discipline, 792

Queuing systems

finite-source situations, 789, 807813

infinite-source situations, 789, 790, 793807

Queuing theory, 786

Quick changeovers, in lean operations, 612

Quick response

competitiveness and, 42

strategy based on, 50, 53, 54

Radford, G. S., 380

Radio frequency identification (RFID), 253, 448, 505, 509

active/semi-passive/passive, 681

defined, 678

in supply chain management, 661, 678680, 681

Rajamanickam, Vishnu, 684

Random number table, 325327

Random variations

defined, 82, 425

in forecasting, 82, 83, 84

nature of, 14, 82

in statistical process control (SPC), 425, 426

as white noise, 84

Range, as measure of process variability, 431

Range control charts, 432434

Range of feasibility, 846

Range of optimality (sensitivity analysis), 843

Rate of technological change, 153

Raw materials inventory, 505. See also Inventory management

in inspection decision, 422

in lean operations, 622

in location decisions, 358

Reactive approach to forecasting, 112113

Recalibration, 320

Recalls, product, 347, 614

Receiving function, interface with purchasing, 667, 668

Recycling, 6970, 149151, 174

Reddy, Ram, 114115

Redundancy, 177

Redundant constraints, 836837

Reed, John, 149, 149n

Regenerative systems, 572573

Region identification, in location decisions, 358359, 361

Regression, 98104

correlation/causal models, 102, 112

indicators, 101102

least squares line, 9899

multiple regression analysis, 102, 104

nonlinear, 104

regression equation, 103

simple linear regression, 80, 98104

standard error of estimate, 100101

Regret (opportunity loss), 226

Relationship management

customer, 664

in manufacturing planning and control, 629630

supplier, 672673

in supply chain management, 663664, 672673

Reliability, 156157, 176189

as availability, 183184

extended warranties, 181

in high-volume system scheduling, 696

improving, 156157

under normal operating conditions, 156

quantifying, 176183

requirements for, 156157

Relocation. See also Location planning and analysis

in strategic capacity planning, 207

Remanufacturing, 148149

Reneging, 792

Renewable resources, 150

Reorder point (ROP), 525530, 539

Repetitive/assembly processing, 15. See also Learning curves

incentive systems, 309

in lean operations, 617618

nature of, 247, 248, 249

product layout, 261263

Replacement, 650

Requisition, 668

Research and development (R&D), 143

Reservation systems, 716

Resiliency, 661662

Response time, in supply chain management, 686

Responsiveness strategy, 44, 47

Restaurant layouts, 270, 271

Retailing

eliminating waiting lines, 787

facilities layout, 270271

forecasting errors, 106

inspection points, 423

inventory management, 504. See also Inventory management

location planning and analysis, 15, 358359, 363364

part-time workers and, 472

point-of-sale (POS) systems, 508509

quality and, 388

recycling at Maria’s Market, 150151

shoplifting prevention, 510

stock keeping units (SKUs), 509

universal product code (UPC), 508509

Return on investment (ROI), 504

for ERP, 585586

supply chain, 658

Return on quality (ROQ), 390

Returns, 683685

Revenue management/yield management, 26, 485. See also Forecasting

Reverse engineering, 142

Reverse logistics, 683

RFID (radio frequency identification). See Radio frequency identification (RFID)

page 896 

Right-sized equipment, 266

Rights Principle, 29

Risk

decision making under, 224, 227

defined, 224

of global operations, 354, 358

Risk management

as key issue in operations, 27

in project management, 765766

in strategic capacity planning, 201

in supply chain management, 659, 661662, 665, 666, 686

Robotic systems, 57, 254, 255259

Robust design, 157

Rolling planning horizon, 469, 572

Romig, H. G., 23, 24, 380

Roos, Daniel, 612

Rother, Mike, 633n

Rough-cut capacity planning (RCCP), 487

Run, defined, 438439

Run charts, 406

Run tests, 438442

control charts with, 442

formula summary, 450

run, defined, 438439

runs above and below median, 439442

Rush priority rule, 704, 705

Rwanda, drones in health care, 258

Safety

ergonomics, 302, 305, 306, 312

productivity and, 61

in working conditions, 307308

Safety stock, 525529, 574575

Salary. See Compensation

Salegna, Gary, 397n

Sales and operations planning, 466. See also Aggregate planning

Salesforce opinions, 81

Sales function

operations management and, 582

in supply chain management, 663

Sample size, in statistical process control (SPC), 438

Sampling, 23

acceptance, 419, 420

work, 323327, 328, 329

Sampling distribution, 425426

Sampling variability, 444

Santa Clara University, Markula Center for Applied Ethics, 2930

Scale-based strategies, 46

Scatter diagrams, 402, 404, 405

Schedule chart, 700

Scheduled receipts, in MRP, 567

Scheduling, 691731

challenges of, 713714

in decision-making hierarchy, 693694

defined, 693

for goods vs. services, 9

high-volume system, 694696

importance, 694

intermediate-volume, 696697

low-volume. See Job-shop scheduling

multiple resources, 718719

operations strategy, 719

in project management, 739

in service organizations, 15, 715719

theory of constraints, 715

Schematic models, 18

Schiff, Jennifer Lonoff, 587589

Schonberger, Richard J., 620n

Schragenheim, Eli, 207

Scientific management, 2123, 24, 302, 305, 311, 380

SCOR® (Supply Chain Operations Reference) model, 682

Scrap and scrap rates, 61, 67

Seasonality

in aggregate planning, 465466, 468, 472, 473

defined, 82

in forecasting, 82, 83, 9398, 112, 198199

seasonal inventories, 505

in strategic capacity planning, 198199, 204205

Seasonal relatives, 9498

computing, 9698

using, 95

Seasonal variations, 9394

Secondary reports, in MRP, 573574

Security, global operations and, 353

Self-directed teams, 304

Self-driving (autonomous) vehicles, 259

Sensitivity analysis, 230232, 843846

Sequencing, 704713

Johnson’s rule, 711713

priority rules, 704710

setup times independent of processing order, 711713

setup times sequence-dependent, 713

through two work centers, 711713

Sequential relationships, network diagram, 743744

Serviceability

defined, 141

in service design, 141

Service blueprint, 168

Service delivery system, 166

Service design and development, 165170. See also Product/service design

challenges, 169

characteristics of well-designed service systems, 168169

guidelines, 169170

overview, 166

phases, 167

product design vs., 166167, 169

quality considerations, 384385, 386, 387, 419, 423, 448. See also Quality management

service blueprinting, 168

technology in, 25

Service layouts, 15, 263264, 268272

Service level, 526, 534535, 536

Service package, 166

Service patterns, 790792

Service profiling, 251252

Service quality

competitiveness and, 43

perceived, 167

strategy based on, 45, 47

Service rate, 795

Services/service organizations

aggregate planning, 484485

automation, 270, 271272

capacity planning, 14, 167, 200201, 484485

challenges of managing services, 169

competitiveness and, 43

ERP in, 587

facilities layout, 15, 263264, 268272

flow management, 656

in goods-service continuum, 7

importance of service sector, 17

in-house vs. outsourcing, 201202

as internal factor, 49

inventory management in, 15, 504

lean systems, 637638

location planning and analysis in, 9, 15, 363364

MRP in, 576

operations management and, 1415

process variation and, 14

productivity in service sector, 5960

providing, vs. production of goods, 810

quality assurance, 15, 167

scheduling, 15, 715719

service job categories, 8

services, defined, 4, 166

supply chains for, 46, 656, 657

transformation processes, 68

variability in demand, 199

waiting-line analysis. See Waiting-line management

Service strategy, 45, 46

SERVQUAL, 385

Setup costs, 510

in intermediate-volume system scheduling, 696697

in lean operations, 618619, 638

Setup times

in lean operations, 618619

sequence-dependent, 713

sequence-independent, 711713

Shadow price, 844845

Shewhart, Walter, 23, 24, 381, 383, 428

Shewhart cycle, 398399

Shih, Willy, 17, 17n

Shingo, Shigeo, 24, 382, 383, 611, 618, 622

Shook, John, 633n

Shoplifting prevention, 510

Shortage costs, 510, 533

Shortest processing time (SPT) priority rule, 704, 706707, 709

Short-range planning, in perspective, 466467

Short-term capacity, 198

Short-term forecasting, 76

Shutdown, as location option, 352

Simchi-Levi, David, 670n

Simchi-Levi, Edith, 670n

Simo chart, 316, 317

Simple average (SA) method, 9698

Simple linear regression, 80, 98104

Simplex method, 840

Simulation models, 199, 482

in aggregate planning, 482483

of path duration times, 758759

in strategic capacity planning, 212

Simultaneous development, 163

Single-minute exchange of die (SMED), 266, 618

Single-period model, 533537, 539

continuous stocking levels, 534535

discrete stocking levels, 535537

Single server

constant service time, 793, 796797

exponential service time, 793, 795796

page 897 

Sintering, 257

Site identification, in location decision, 360361

Six Sigma, 161, 446

defined, 26, 400

lean operations and, 634

Skill levels, aggregate planning and, 471

Skinner, W., 24

Slack (linear programming), 839840

Slack per operation (S/O) priority rule, 704, 710

Slack time, 744, 745746

aggregate planning and, 472

computing, 752753

Slater, Derek, 583587

Small Business Administration, 665

Small businesses

“Cocoa for Good” initiative, 28

inventory management and, 664665

supply chain management and, 664665, 679, 686

Small lot sizes, in lean operations, 612, 617618

SMED (single-minute exchange of die), 266, 618

Smith, Adam, 23, 24

Smith, Bernard T., 8889, 89n

Smoothing

in inventory management, 505

in strategic capacity planning, 204

Social conditions, in product/service design, 141

S/O (slack per operation) priority rule, 704, 710

Souza, Kim, 660n

Sower, Victor E., 731

SPC. See Statistical process control (SPC)

Specialization

advantages/disadvantages, 302303

defined, 302

in job design, 302303

as strategy, 46

Special variation, 425

Specifications

defined, 443

process capability and, 443, 444, 446447

Spencer, Lisa F., 28, 149, 181, 258, 355, 510, 513, 635, 660, 661, 679, 684, 740, 787

SPT (shortest processing time) priority rule, 704, 706707, 709

Standard deviation, 14

process capability, 445

run test, 440442

Standard elemental times, 322323

Standard error of estimate, 100101

Standardization, 22, 61, 170, 196

advantages/disadvantages, 153154

automation in, 253

defined, 153

degree of, 153

modular design, 155156

service, 167

standard parts in lean operations, 617

in waiting-line management, 813

Standard time, 316

Starting forecasts, 88

Stashick, Randy, 311, 311n, 679n

Statistical process control (SPC), 419, 425443. See also Quality control

attributes, 434437, 438

control charts, 428438, 442

control limits, 428429, 430431, 434437

control process, 427

defined, 425

nonrandom (assignable) variation and, 14, 425, 439, 441442, 443

process variability, 425

random variation (common variability) and, 425, 426

run tests, 438442

sampling and sampling distributions, 425426

Type I/Type II error, 429, 443

for variables, 430434

Step costs, 210

Stickley, George, 606

Stickley, Leopold, 606

Stock keeping units (SKUs), 509, 679

Stockouts, 506

Stopwatch time study, 317322

allowances, 321, 322

defined, 318

formula summary, 329

normal time (NT), 319, 320

number of observations needed, 318319

observed time (OT), 319

standard time (ST), 319, 320321

work sampling vs., 328

Storage facility layout, 270

Straight piecework, 309

Strategic buffering, 674675

Strategic capacity planning, 190221

case, 221

constraint management, 207

cost-volume analysis, 208211

decision theory, 212

defining and measuring capacity, 191, 194195

determinants of effective capacity, 196197

developing capacity strategies, 202206

evaluating alternatives, 207212

financial analysis, 211212

forecasting capacity requirements, 192, 198200

goal of, 192, 466

importance, 191193, 200

importance of capacity decisions, 193194

in-house vs. outsourcing, 201202

key questions, 192

location decisions, 196

operations strategy and, 213

outsourcing in, 201202, 205206, 221

for services, 200201

simulation, 212

steps in process, 198

strategy formulation, 197198

time horizons, 198199, 200, 204205

waiting-line analysis, 212

Strategic decisions, 33

critical importance, 1314, 193194, 200, 213

developing capacity strategies, 202206

strategic operations management decision areas, 52, 53

strategy formulation, 197198

Strategic partnering, 666, 673674

Strategic sourcing, 681682

Strategies, 16, 4456

cases, 6770

examples of, 44, 46

formulating, 4750

global, 51

nature of, 41

Profit Impact of Market Strategy (PIMS) database, 4950

strategy formulation, 4750, 5253

supply chain, 50, 665, 666

sustainability, 5051

types of, 45

Sturcken, Elizabeth, 660n

Subcontracting, 201202, 205. See also Outsourcing

in aggregate planning, 465, 467, 469, 473, 474, 476480

Subject-matter experts (SMEs), 115

Suboptimization, 224

Substitutability of parts, 165

Subtractive manufacturing, 257

Summers, Donna, 399n

Supplier forums, 672673

Suppliers

as adversary vs. partner, 673

audits of, 671672

certification of, 672

close vendor relationships, 629630

as external factor, 49

interface with purchasing, 667

in lean operations, 629631, 636, 639

multiple-source purchasing and, 630

partnerships with, 666, 673674

placing orders with, 668

in product/service design, 143

in quality management, 395

selecting, 668, 671, 672

in strategic capacity planning, 203

supplier relationship management, 672673

supplier tiers, 630631

in supply chain management, 32, 662, 663, 667, 668, 672673, 678

vendor-managed inventory (VMI), 638, 675, 677

Supply. See also Strategic capacity planning

in aggregate planning, 468469, 471476, 492

economic match with demand, 4, 76

Supply chain(s)

aggregate planning and, 470

complexity of, 32

defined, 4, 656

distribution resource planning (DRP), 580581

ethics and, 664

examples of, 56, 657, 658

external/internal parts of, 6

global, 663

inventory buffers in, 506

lean operations and, 634

location criteria, 351

nature of, 46

process variation and, 14

shortening, 662

in strategic capacity planning, 197

strategies in, 665, 666

strategy based on, 50

Supply chain management, 654690

capacity planning, 32, 666

case, 689

challenges, 685686

competitiveness and, 31, 43

defined, 656

e-business in, 32, 670671

elements of, 3233

page 898 

ERP and, 663664

ethics and, 664, 673

flow management in, 656657

forecasting in, 32, 79, 114115, 674, 678. See also Forecasting

for global operations, 3132, 659, 663, 665

for goods vs. services, 8

importance, 3132, 666, 686

inventory management in, 32, 33, 538, 664665, 674675. See also Inventory management

location planning and analysis in, 32, 33, 351

logistics in, 32, 656, 676681

management responsibilities, 665666, 685

operations management and, 1517, 582

outsourcing, 31, 33, 658659, 663

performance metrics, 682

purchasing/procurement, 32, 33, 667669, 681682

quality and, 31, 393394

returns in, 683685

risk management in, 659, 661662, 665, 666, 686

small businesses and, 664665, 679, 686

strategic sourcing, 681682

strategies in, 50, 665, 666

supplier management, 671674

at 3M, 662

trends, 657662

at Walmart, 660

at Wegmans Food Markets, Inc., 655

Supply chain visibility, 662

Supporting processes, 13

Surplus (linear programming), 839840

Sustainability, 2729. See also Environmental concerns

at Kraft Foods, 147, 148

in process selection, 252

in product/service design, 146151

reduce/reuse/recycle, 147151

strategy based on, 46, 5051, 54, 6970, 7172

at U.S. Postal Service (USPS), 7273

at Wegmans Food Markets, Inc., 35

SWOT analysis, 48

System, 20

System design, 16

in facilities layout, 260. See also Facilities layout

in process selection, 246

in strategic capacity planning, 203, 246

System operation, 16

Systems perspective, 20

System utilization, 794

Tactical decisions, 16, 44

Tactics, 45, 666

Taguchi, Genichi, 157, 382, 383, 447

Taguchi loss function, 382, 383, 447, 448

Takt time, 620621

Tangible output, 8

Tardiness, 705

Tariffs, 32

Taxation, in location decisions, 359

Taylor, Frederick Winslow, 2123, 24, 302, 305, 311, 317, 380

Teamwork

cooperative spirit in conversion to lean systems, 636637

forms of teams, 304

group incentive plans, 309310

in job design, 303305

in lean operations, 612, 623624, 636637

project teams, 737, 739, 763764

in quality focus, 26

in quality management, 395

requirements for successful, 305

Technological innovation, 25, 252

Technology. See also Computer software

agility and, 26

automation and, 253257, 354355

cashierless retailing, 787

computer-aided design (CAD), 164165, 170

computer-aided manufacturing (CAM), 254255

computer-integrated manufacturing (CIM), 256257

computerized numerical control (CNC), 254255

defined, 25, 252

Delphi method in technological forecasting, 81

drones, 258, 259, 513

end-of-life (EOL) programs, 147

enterprise resource planning (ERP). See Enterprise resource planning (ERP)

as external factor, 48

global operations and, 352, 354355

as internal factor, 49

job design and, 311

management of, 25

modular design, 155156

MRP. See Material requirements planning (MRP)

process selection and, 252259

productivity and, 6061

product/service design and, 141, 142144

rate of technological change, 153

robotic systems, 57, 254, 255259

in supply chain management, 659661, 666, 678680, 681

technological change strategy, 48

technological constraints in line balancing, 276

3D printing, 257259

types of, 25

at Wegmans Food Markets, Inc., 35

Temporary workers, 813

Termination, in project management, 738

Terrorism, 354

Theory of constraints, 715, 763

Theory X, 23

Theory Y, 23

Theory Z, 23

Therbligs, 315316

Third-party logistics (3-PL), 681

3D printing, 257259

3D scanning, 258

Throughput, 715

Time-based competition, 467

Time-based strategies, 53

Time-based systems, 308309, 310

Time buckets, 566

Time estimates

deterministic, 745746

probabilistic, 745, 753755

Time fences, 488, 579

Time horizons

in forecasting, 7679, 111112, 113, 198199

probability of functioning for specified time period, 178183

in strategic capacity planning, 198199, 200, 204205

Time reduction, 26

Time series, 82

Time-series forecasts, 80, 8298

averaging techniques, 8488

cycles, 82, 83, 98

diffusion models, 89

focus forecasting, 8889

irregular variations, 82, 83

naive forecasts, 8283

random variations, 82, 83

seasonality, 82, 83, 9398

trends, 82, 83, 8993

Time-to-market, competitiveness and, 42

Time value of money, 211212

Tippett, L. H. C., 23, 24

Top management

country identification for global operations, 357358

executive opinions, 80

quality and, 381382, 387, 391, 409

in supply chain management, 665666, 673674, 685

transition to lean operations, 635, 636, 639

upper-management processes, 13

Total cost

in cost-volume analysis, 208211

economic order quantity (EOQ), 516518

Total field, 382, 383

Total productive maintenance, 649

Total quality management (TQM), 26, 394408

criticisms, 397

elements of, 395

graphical quality tools, 401408

obstacles to implementing, 396397

process improvement, 398408

traditional corporate culture vs., 396

Total revenue, in cost-volume analysis, 208211

Toyoda, Eliji, 614

Toyota Production System (TPS), 611, 612, 613615, 635

TQM. See Total quality management (TQM)

Tracking capacity strategy, 198

Tracking signals, 109111

Trade agreements, 352

Trade-offs

cost/accuracy, in forecasting, 111112

in decision making, 1920

in resource allocation, 26

Trade wars, 32

Traffic management, 678

Training

cross-training workers, 280, 623

learning curves, 336337

Transaction processing

in lean operations, 631

transaction types, 631

Transfer batch, 715

Transfer pricing rules, 358

page 899 

Transformation processes, 68, 1314

Transparency, in supply chain management, 661

Transportation costs

in location decision, 350, 353, 356357, 358359, 363, 366

minimizing, 282283

process layouts, 282283

in supply chain management, 31, 33

unnecessary, in lean operations, 616

Transportation model, 366

Transportation tables, 481482, 483

Travel and tourism. See also Airlines

duplicate bookings, 469, 470

reservation systems, 716

revenue/yield management, 26

Trend-adjusted exponential smoothing, 9293, 112

Trend-adjusted forecasts (TAF), 112

Trends

in compensation, 310

defined, 82

in forecasting, 82, 83, 8993, 112

linear trend equation, 8992

nature of, 82

nonlinear trend types, 89

in supply chain management, 657662

Trial-and-error aggregate planning, 476480

Two-bin system, 508

Type I error, 429, 443

Type II error, 429

Uncertainty, decision making under, 224, 225227

Understocking costs, 506507, 526527

Uniform Commercial Code, 144

Uniform distribution, in forecasting demand, 199

Union contracts, aggregate planning and, 471472, 474475

Union of Japanese Scientists, 381

United Kingdom (UK), shoplifting prevention, 510

United Nations Food and Agricultural Organization (FAO), 29

U.S. Army, 380

U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), 393

U.S. Department of Education, 44

U.S. Small Business Administration, 665

Universal product code (UPC), 508509

Upper control limit (UCL), 428429, 430431, 435437

Upper-management processes, 13

U-shaped layouts, 263

Utilitarian Principle, 29

Value-added

defined, 6

manufacturing process, 17

transformation process, 6

waiting lines as non-value-added occurrences, 785786

Value analysis, 147148

Value chain(s)

demand component, 656

supply component. See Supply chain(s); Supply chain management

Value stream, operational processes in, 13

Value stream mapping, 632633

Variable costs, in cost-volume analysis, 208211

Variable-path material-handling equipment, 263264

Variables

control charts for, 430434, 438

defined, 430

Variety strategy, 47, 54

Vendor analysis, 671

Vendor-managed inventory (VMI), 638, 675, 677

Vendors. See Suppliers

Vertical loading, 303

Vertical skills, 310

Virtual project teams, 763764

Virtual teams, 146

Virtue Principle, 29

Visual controls, in lean operations, 612, 627628

VMI (vendor-managed inventory), 638, 675, 677

Vollmann, Thomas E., 615n, 631, 631n

Wages. See Compensation

Wait-and-see strategy, 213

Waiting-line management, 784822

analysis, 167

in capacity planning, 199

case, 822

characteristics of waiting lines, 789792

constraint management, 813

cost analysis, 801803

finite-source situations, 789, 807813

goal of, 788

infinite-source situations, 789, 790, 793807

managerial implications of waiting lines, 787

nature of, 785786

operations strategy, 814815

performance metrics, 792793

psychology of waiting, 813814

queuing theory, 786

reasons for, 786787

in strategic capacity planning, 212

technology in, 787

waiting time as waste in lean operations, 616

at Walt Disney theme parks, 785, 815

Walton, Sam, 660

Warehouses

facilities layout, 270

inventory management, 513

in supply chain management, 677678

Waste reduction, in lean operations, 612, 613, 615616, 633, 638

Water pollution

nonvegetarian diets and, 29

recycling and, 149

Wealth of Nations, The (Smith), 23

Weather forecasts, 14, 75, 82, 93, 113

Weber, Austin, 635n

Wei, Clarissa, 386n

Weighted average, 8687

Weighted moving average, 8687

Wheeler, John, 284n

White noise, 84

Whitney, Eli, 22, 24

Whybark, D. Clay, 615n

Williams, Terri, 181, 181n

Wilson, J. Holton, 112n

Winebrake, James J., 658n

Wolverson, Roya, 26n

Womack, James, 612

Work breakdown structure (WBS), 741

Work breaks, 307

Work cells, in lean operations, 612, 619

Work centers

input/output (I/O) control, 700

sequencing work through, 704713

workstations within, 279280, 704

Work design and measurement

job design. See Job design

methods analysis, 310314

motion study, 305, 315316

operations strategy and, 327328

quality of work life, 305310

work measurement, 316327

Worker-machine charts, 313, 314

Workers. See Workforce

Workforce. See also Personnel/human resources function

in aggregate planning, 471472, 474475, 485

compensation, 308310

competitiveness and, 43

empowering, 395, 407

impact of outsourcing on, 17

labor productivity, 58, 61, 353, 354, 358, 359

in lean operations, 622624

learning curves in scheduling, 340

in location decisions, 358, 359

motivating, 15

overtime work, 205, 472

productivity and, 6061

quality circles, 382, 383, 407

quality of work life, 303, 305310

scheduling, 717

service job categories, 8

shift demand, 813

temporary workers, 813

training, 15, 280, 336, 337, 623

unemployment benefits, 17

unions and, 471472, 474475

at Wegmans Food Markets, Inc., 35

working conditions, 306308

Working conditions, 306308

Work-in-process inventory, 505. See also Inventory management

constant work-in-process (CONWIP), 629

kanban , 629

in lean operations, 621622, 629, 638

Little’s Law, 506, 629

Work measurement, 316327

predetermined time standards, 323

standard elemental times, 322323

standard time, 316

stopwatch time study, 317322, 328, 329

work sampling, 323327, 328, 329

Work sampling, 323327

formula summary, 329

random number table, 325327

sample size, 324325

stopwatch time study vs., 328

Workstations, 279280, 704

World Bank, 358

World Trade Organization, 352

World War II, 23, 380, 381

Yield management, 77, 716717

Yield management/revenue management, 26, 485. See also Forecasting

Zeithaml, Valerie A., 384n, 385n

Zero defects, 380, 382, 383

page 900 

Table B.2

Areas under the standardized normal curve, from −∞ to + z

  1. Cover
  2. Halftitle
  3. Title
  4. Copyright
  5. The McGraw-Hill Series in Operations and Decision Sciences
  6. Preface
  7. Walkthrough
  8. Connect
  9. Note to Students
  10. Brief Contents
  11. Contents
  12. Operations Management
    1. 1 Introduction to Operations Management
      1. Introduction
      2. Production of Goods Versus Providing Services
      3. Why Learn About Operations Management?
      4. Career Opportunities and Professional Societies
      5. Process Management
      6. The Scope of Operations Management
        1. Reading: Why Manufacturing Matters
      7. Operations Management and Decision Making
        1. Reading: Analytics
      8. The Historical Evolution of Operations Management
      9. Operations Today
        1. Reading: Agility Creates a Competitive Edge
      10. Key Issues for Today’s Business Operations
        1. Readings: Sustainable Kisses
        2. Diet and the Environment: Vegetarian vs. Nonvegetarian
        3. Operations Tour: Wegmans Food Markets
      11. Summary
      12. Key Points
      13. Key Terms
      14. Discussion and Review Questions
      15. Taking Stock
      16. Critical Thinking Exercises
        1. Case: Hazel
      17. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
      18. Problem-Solving Guide
    2. 2 Competitiveness, Strategy, and Productivity
      1. Introduction
      2. Competitiveness
      3. Mission and Strategies
        1. Readings: Amazon Ranks High in Customer Service
        2. Low Inventory Can Increase Agility
      4. Operations Strategy
      5. Implications of Organization Strategy for Operations Management
      6. Transforming Strategy into Action: The Balanced Scorecard
      7. Productivity
        1. Readings: Why Productivity Matters
        2. Dutch Tomato Growers’ Productivity Advantage
        3. Productivity Improvement
      8. Summary
      9. Key Points
      10. Key Terms
      11. Solved Problems
      12. Discussion and Review Questions
      13. Taking Stock
      14. Critical Thinking Exercises
      15. Problems
        1. Cases: Home-Style Cookies
        2. Hazel Revisited
        3. “Your Garden Gloves”
        4. Girlfriend Collective
        5. Operations Tour: The U.S. Postal Service
      16. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    3. 3 Forecasting
      1. Introduction
      2. Features Common to All Forecasts
      3. Elements of a Good Forecast
      4. Forecasting and the Supply Chain
      5. Steps in the Forecasting Process
      6. Approaches to Forecasting
      7. Qualitative Forecasts
      8. Forecasts Based on Time-Series Data
      9. Associative Forecasting Techniques
        1. Reading: Lilacs
      10. Forecast Accuracy
        1. Reading: High Forecasts Can be Bad News
      11. Monitoring Forecast Error
      12. Choosing a Forecasting Technique
      13. Using Forecast Information
      14. Computer Software in Forecasting
      15. Operations Strategy
        1. Reading: Gazing at the Crystal Ball
      16. Summary
      17. Key Points
      18. Key Terms
      19. Solved Problems
      20. Discussion and Review Questions
      21. Taking Stock
      22. Critical Thinking Exercises
      23. Problems
        1. Cases: M&L Manufacturing
        2. Highline Financial Services, Ltd.
      24. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    4. 4 Product and Service Design
      1. Reading: Design as a Business Strategy
      2. Introduction
        1. Reading: Dutch Boy Brushes Up Its Paints
      3. Idea Generation
        1. Reading: Vlasic’s Big Pickle Slices
      4. Legal and Ethical Considerations
      5. Human Factors
      6. Cultural Factors
        1. Reading: Green Tea Ice Cream? Kale Soup?
      7. Global Product and Service Design
      8. Environmental Factors: Sustainability
        1. Readings: Kraft Foods’ Recipe for Sustainability
        2. China Clamps Down on Recyclables
        3. Recycle City: Maria’s Market
      9. Other Design Considerations
        1. Readings: Lego A/S in the Pink
        2. Fast-Food Chains Adopt Mass Customization
      10. Phases in Product Design and Development
      11. Designing for Production
      12. Service Design
        1. Reading: The Challenges of Managing Services
      13. Operations Strategy
      14. Summary
      15. Key Points
      16. Key Terms
      17. Discussion and Review Questions
      18. Taking Stock
      19. Critical Thinking Exercises
      20. Problems
        1. Operations Tour: High Acres Landfill
      21. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
      22. SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 4: Reliability
    5. 5 Strategic Capacity Planning for Products and Services
      1. Introduction
        1. Reading: Excess Capacity Can Be Bad News!
      2. Capacity Decisions Are Strategic
      3. Defining and Measuring Capacity
      4. Determinants of Effective Capacity
      5. Strategy Formulation
      6. Forecasting Capacity Requirements
      7. Additional Challenges of Planning Service Capacity
      8. Do It In-House or Outsource It?
        1. Reading: My Compliments to the Chef, Er, Buyer
      9. Developing Capacity Strategies
      10. Constraint Management
      11. Evaluating Alternatives
      12. Operations Strategy
      13. Summary
      14. Key Points
      15. Key Terms
      16. Solved Problems
      17. Discussion and Review Questions
      18. Taking Stock
      19. Critical Thinking Exercises
      20. Problems
        1. Case: Outsourcing of Hospital Services
      21. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
      22. SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 5: Decision Theory
    6. 6 Process Selection and Facility Layout
      1. Introduction
      2. Process Selection
        1. Operations Tour: Morton Salt
      3. Technology
        1. Readings: Foxconn Shifts Its Focus to Automation
        2. Zipline Drones Save Lives in Rwanda
        3. Self-Driving Vehicles
      4. Process Strategy
      5. Strategic Resource Organization: Facilities Layout
        1. Reading: A Safe Hospital Room of the Future
      6. Designing Product Layouts: Line Balancing
        1. Reading: BMW’s Strategy: Flexibility
      7. Designing Process Layouts
      8. Summary
      9. Key Points
      10. Key Terms
      11. Solved Problems
      12. Discussion and Review Questions
      13. Taking Stock
      14. Critical Thinking Exercises
      15. Problems
      16. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    7. 7 Work Design and Measurement
      1. Introduction
      2. Job Design
      3. Quality of Work Life
      4. Methods Analysis
        1. Reading: Taylor’s Techniques Help UPS
      5. Motion Study
      6. Work Measurement
      7. Operations Strategy
      8. Summary
      9. Key Points
      10. Key Terms
      11. Solved Problems
      12. Discussion and Review Questions
      13. Taking Stock
      14. Critical Thinking Exercises
      15. Problems
      16. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
      17. SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 7: Learning Curves
    8. 8 Location Planning and Analysis
      1. The Need for Location Decisions
      2. The Nature of Location Decisions
      3. Global Locations
        1. Reading: Coffee?
      4. General Procedure for Making Location Decisions
      5. Identifying a Country, Region, Community, and Site
      6. Service and Retail Locations
      7. Evaluating Location Alternatives
      8. Summary
      9. Key Points
      10. Key Terms
      11. Solved Problems
      12. Discussion and Review Questions
      13. Taking Stock
      14. Critical Thinking Exercises
      15. Problems
        1. Case: Hello, Walmart?
      16. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    9. 9 Management of Quality
      1. Introduction
      2. The Evolution of Quality Management
      3. The Foundations of Modern Quality Management: The Gurus
      4. Insights on Quality Management
        1. Readings: American Fast-Food Restaurants Are Having Success in China
        2. Hyundai: Exceeding Expectations
      5. Quality and Performance Excellence Awards
      6. Quality Certification
      7. Quality and the Supply Chain
      8. Total Quality Management
      9. Problem Solving and Process Improvement
      10. Quality Tools
      11. Operations Strategy
      12. Summary
      13. Key Points
      14. Key Terms
      15. Solved Problem
      16. Discussion and Review Questions
      17. Taking Stock
      18. Critical Thinking Exercises
      19. Problems
        1. Cases: Chick-n-Gravy Dinner Line
        2. Tip Top Markets
      20. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    10. 10 Quality Control
      1. Introduction
      2. Inspection
        1. Reading: Falsified Inspection Reports Create Major Risks and Job Losses
      3. Statistical Process Control
      4. Process Capability
        1. Readings: RFID Chips Might Cut Drug Errors in Hospitals
      5. Operations Strategy
      6. Summary
      7. Key Points
      8. Key Terms
      9. Solved Problems
      10. Discussion and Review Questions
      11. Taking Stock
      12. Critical Thinking Exercises
      13. Problems
        1. Cases: Toys, Inc.
        2. Tiger Tools
      14. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    11. 11 Aggregate Planning and Master Scheduling
      1. Introduction
        1. Reading: Duplicate Orders Can Lead to Excess Capacity
      2. Basic Strategies for Meeting Uneven Demand
      3. Techniques for Aggregate Planning
      4. Aggregate Planning in Services
      5. Disaggregating the Aggregate Plan
      6. Master Scheduling
      7. The Master Scheduling Process
      8. Summary
      9. Key Points
      10. Key Terms
      11. Solved Problems
      12. Discussion and Review Questions
      13. Taking Stock
      14. Critical Thinking Exercises
      15. Problems
        1. Case: Eight Glasses a Day (EGAD)
      16. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    12. 12 Inventory Management
      1. Introduction
        1. Reading: $$$
      2. The Nature and Importance of Inventories
      3. Requirements for Effective Inventory Management
        1. Readings: Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) Tags
        2. Catch Them Before They Steal! Reducing Inventory Loss With an Assist From AI
        3. Drones Can Help With Inventory Management in Warehouses
      4. Inventory Ordering Policies
      5. How Much to Order: Economic Order Quantity Models
      6. Reorder Point Ordering
      7. How Much to Order: Fixed-Order-Interval Model
      8. The Single-Period Model
      9. Operations Strategy
      10. Summary
      11. Key Points
      12. Key Terms
      13. Solved Problems
      14. Discussion and Review Questions
      15. Taking Stock
      16. Critical Thinking Exercises
      17. Problems
        1. Cases: UPD Manufacturing
        2. Grill Rite
        3. Farmers Restaurant
        4. Operations Tours: Bruegger’s Bagel Bakery
        5. PSC, INC.
      18. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    13. 13 MRP and ERP
      1. Introduction
      2. An Overview of MRP
      3. MRP Inputs
      4. MRP Processing
      5. MRP Outputs
      6. Other Considerations
      7. MRP in Services
      8. Benefits and Requirements of MRP
      9. MRP II
      10. Capacity Requirements Planning
      11. ERP
        1. Readings: The ABCS of ERP
        2. 11 Common ERP Mistakes and How to Avoid Them
      12. Operations Strategy
      13. Summary
      14. Key Points
      15. Key Terms
      16. Solved Problems
      17. Discussion and Review Questions
      18. Taking Stock
      19. Critical Thinking Exercises
      20. Problems
        1. Cases: Promotional Novelties
        2. DMD Enterprises
        3. Operations Tour: Stickley Furniture
      21. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    14. 14 JIT and Lean Operations
      1. Introduction
        1. Reading: Toyota Recalls
      2. Supporting Goals
      3. Building Blocks
        1. Reading: General Mills Studied NASCAR Pit Crew to Reduce Changeover Time
      4. Lean Tools
        1. Reading: Gemba Walks
      5. Transitioning to a Lean System
      6. Lean Services
      7. JIT II
      8. Operations Strategy
      9. Summary
      10. Key Points
      11. Key Terms
      12. Solved Problems
      13. Discussion and Review Questions
      14. Taking Stock
      15. Critical Thinking Exercises
      16. Problems
        1. Case: Level Operations
        2. Operations Tour: Boeing
      17. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
      18. SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER 14: Maintenance
    15. 15 Supply Chain Management
      1. Introduction
      2. Trends in Supply Chain Management
        1. Readings: Walmart Focuses on Its Supply Chain
        2. Supply Chain Transparency
        3. At 3M, a Long Road Became a Shorter Road
      3. Global Supply Chains
      4. ERP and Supply Chain Management
      5. Ethics and the Supply Chain
      6. Small Businesses
      7. Management Responsibilities
      8. Procurement
      9. E-Business
      10. Supplier Management
      11. Inventory Management
      12. Order Fulfillment
      13. Logistics
        1. Operations Tour: Wegmans’ Shipping System
        2. Readings: UPS Sets the Pace for Deliveries and Safe Driving
        3. Springdale Farm
        4. Active, Semi-Passive, and Passive RFID Tags
      14. Creating an Effective Supply Chain
        1. Readings: Clicks or Bricks, or Both?
        2. Easy Returns
      15. Strategy
      16. Summary
      17. Key Points
      18. Key Terms
      19. Discussion and Review Questions
      20. Taking Stock
      21. Critical Thinking Exercises
      22. Problems
        1. Case: Mastertag
      23. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    16. 16 Scheduling
      1. Scheduling Operations
      2. Scheduling in Low-Volume Systems
      3. Scheduling Services
      4. Operations Strategy
      5. Summary
      6. Key Points
      7. Key Terms
      8. Solved Problems
      9. Discussion and Review Questions
      10. Taking Stock
      11. Critical Thinking Exercises
      12. Problems
        1. Case: Hi-Ho, Yo-Yo, Inc.
      13. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    17. 17 Project Management
      1. Introduction
      2. Project Life Cycle
      3. Behavioral Aspects of Project Management
        1. Reading: Artificial Intelligence Will Help Project Managers
      4. Work Breakdown Structure
      5. Planning and Scheduling with Gantt Charts
      6. PERT and CPM
      7. Deterministic Time Estimates
      8. A Computing Algorithm
      9. Probabilistic Time Estimates
      10. Determining Path Probabilities
      11. Simulation
      12. Budget Control
      13. Time–Cost Trade-Offs: Crashing
      14. Advantages of Using Pert and Potential Sources of Error
      15. Critical Chain Project Management
      16. Other Topics in Project Management
      17. Project Management Software
      18. Operations Strategy
      19. Risk Management
      20. Summary
      21. Key Points
      22. Key Terms
      23. Solved Problems
      24. Discussion and Review Questions
      25. Taking Stock
      26. Critical Thinking Exercises
      27. Problems
        1. Case: Time, Please
      28. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    18. 18 Management of Waiting Lines
      1. Why Is There Waiting?
        1. Reading: New Yorkers Do Not Like Waiting in Line
      2. Managerial Implications of Waiting Lines
      3. Goal of Waiting-Line Management
      4. Characteristics of Waiting Lines
      5. Measures of Waiting-Line Performance
      6. Queuing Models: Infinite-Source
      7. Queuing Model: Finite-Source
      8. Constraint Management
      9. The Psychology of Waiting
        1. Reading: David H. Maister on the Psychology of Waiting
      10. Operations Strategy
        1. Reading: Managing Waiting Lines at Disney World
      11. Summary
      12. Key Points
      13. Key Terms
      14. Solved Problems
      15. Discussion and Review Questions
      16. Taking Stock
      17. Critical Thinking Exercises
      18. Problems
        1. Case: Big Bank
      19. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    19. 19 Linear Programming
      1. Introduction
      2. Linear Programming Models
      3. Graphical Linear Programming
      4. The Simplex Method
      5. Computer Solutions
      6. Sensitivity Analysis
      7. Summary
      8. Key Points
      9. Key Terms
      10. Solved Problems
      11. Discussion and Review Questions
      12. Problems
        1. Cases: Son, Ltd.
        2. Custom Cabinets, Inc.
      13. Selected Bibliography and Further Readings
    20. APPENDIX A Answers to Selected Problems
    21. APPENDIX B Tables
    22. APPENDIX C Working with the Normal Distribution
    23. APPENDIX D Ten Things to Remember Beyond the Final Exam
    24. Company Index
    25. Subject Index

Pages

  1. i
  2. ii
  3. iii
  4. iv
  5. v
  6. vi
  7. vii
  8. viii
  9. ix
  10. x
  11. xi
  12. xii
  13. xiii
  14. xiv
  15. xv
  16. xvi
  17. xvii
  18. xviii
  19. xix
  20. xx
  21. xxi
  22. xxii
  23. xxiii
  24. xxiv
  25. xxv
  26. xxvi
  27. xxvii
  28. xxviii
  29. 1
  30. 2
  31. 3
  32. 4
  33. 5
  34. 6
  35. 7
  36. 8
  37. 9
  38. 10
  39. 11
  40. 12
  41. 13
  42. 14
  43. 15
  44. 16
  45. 17
  46. 18
  47. 19
  48. 20
  49. 21
  50. 22
  51. 23
  52. 24
  53. 25
  54. 26
  55. 27
  56. 28
  57. 29
  58. 30
  59. 31
  60. 32
  61. 33
  62. 34
  63. 35
  64. 36
  65. 37
  66. 38
  67. 39
  68. 40
  69. 41
  70. 42
  71. 43
  72. 44
  73. 45
  74. 46
  75. 47
  76. 48
  77. 49
  78. 50
  79. 51
  80. 52
  81. 53
  82. 54
  83. 55
  84. 56
  85. 57
  86. 58
  87. 59
  88. 60
  89. 61
  90. 62
  91. 63
  92. 64
  93. 65
  94. 66
  95. 67
  96. 68
  97. 69
  98. 70
  99. 71
  100. 72
  101. 73
  102. 74
  103. 75
  104. 76
  105. 77
  106. 78
  107. 79
  108. 80
  109. 81
  110. 82
  111. 83
  112. 84
  113. 85
  114. 86
  115. 87
  116. 88
  117. 89
  118. 90
  119. 91
  120. 92
  121. 93
  122. 94
  123. 95
  124. 96
  125. 97
  126. 98
  127. 99
  128. 100
  129. 101
  130. 102
  131. 103
  132. 104
  133. 105
  134. 106
  135. 107
  136. 108
  137. 109
  138. 110
  139. 111
  140. 112
  141. 113
  142. 114
  143. 115
  144. 116
  145. 117
  146. 118
  147. 119
  148. 120
  149. 121
  150. 122
  151. 123
  152. 124
  153. 125
  154. 126
  155. 127
  156. 128
  157. 129
  158. 130
  159. 131
  160. 132
  161. 133
  162. 134
  163. 135
  164. 136
  165. 137
  166. 138
  167. 139
  168. 140
  169. 141
  170. 142
  171. 143
  172. 144
  173. 145
  174. 146
  175. 147
  176. 148
  177. 149
  178. 150
  179. 151
  180. 152
  181. 153
  182. 154
  183. 155
  184. 156
  185. 157
  186. 158
  187. 159
  188. 160
  189. 161
  190. 162
  191. 163
  192. 164
  193. 165
  194. 166
  195. 167
  196. 168
  197. 169
  198. 170
  199. 171
  200. 172
  201. 173
  202. 174
  203. 175
  204. 176
  205. 177
  206. 178
  207. 179
  208. 180
  209. 181
  210. 182
  211. 183
  212. 184
  213. 185
  214. 186
  215. 187
  216. 188
  217. 189
  218. 190
  219. 191
  220. 192
  221. 193
  222. 194
  223. 195
  224. 196
  225. 197
  226. 198
  227. 199
  228. 200
  229. 201
  230. 202
  231. 203
  232. 204
  233. 205
  234. 206
  235. 207
  236. 208
  237. 209
  238. 210
  239. 211
  240. 212
  241. 213
  242. 214
  243. 215
  244. 216
  245. 217
  246. 218
  247. 219
  248. 220
  249. 221
  250. 222
  251. 223
  252. 224
  253. 225
  254. 226
  255. 227
  256. 228
  257. 229
  258. 230
  259. 231
  260. 232
  261. 233
  262. 234
  263. 235
  264. 236
  265. 237
  266. 238
  267. 239
  268. 240
  269. 241
  270. 242
  271. 243
  272. 244
  273. 245
  274. 246
  275. 247
  276. 248
  277. 249
  278. 250
  279. 251
  280. 252
  281. 253
  282. 254
  283. 255
  284. 256
  285. 257
  286. 258
  287. 259
  288. 260
  289. 261
  290. 262
  291. 263
  292. 264
  293. 265
  294. 266
  295. 267
  296. 268
  297. 269
  298. 270
  299. 271
  300. 272
  301. 273
  302. 274
  303. 275
  304. 276
  305. 277
  306. 278
  307. 279
  308. 280
  309. 281
  310. 282
  311. 283
  312. 284
  313. 285
  314. 286
  315. 287
  316. 288
  317. 289
  318. 290
  319. 291
  320. 292
  321. 293
  322. 294
  323. 295
  324. 296
  325. 297
  326. 298
  327. 299
  328. 300
  329. 301
  330. 302
  331. 303
  332. 304
  333. 305
  334. 306
  335. 307
  336. 308
  337. 309
  338. 310
  339. 311
  340. 312
  341. 313
  342. 314
  343. 315
  344. 316
  345. 317
  346. 318
  347. 319
  348. 320
  349. 321
  350. 322
  351. 323
  352. 324
  353. 325
  354. 326
  355. 327
  356. 328
  357. 329
  358. 330
  359. 331
  360. 332
  361. 333
  362. 334
  363. 335
  364. 336
  365. 337
  366. 338
  367. 339
  368. 340
  369. 341
  370. 342
  371. 343
  372. 344
  373. 345
  374. 346
  375. 347
  376. 348
  377. 349
  378. 350
  379. 351
  380. 352
  381. 353
  382. 354
  383. 355
  384. 356
  385. 357
  386. 358
  387. 359
  388. 360
  389. 361
  390. 362
  391. 363
  392. 364
  393. 365
  394. 366
  395. 367
  396. 368
  397. 369
  398. 370
  399. 371
  400. 372
  401. 373
  402. 374
  403. 375
  404. 376
  405. 377
  406. 378
  407. 379
  408. 380
  409. 381
  410. 382
  411. 383
  412. 384
  413. 385
  414. 386
  415. 387
  416. 388
  417. 389
  418. 390
  419. 391
  420. 392
  421. 393
  422. 394
  423. 395
  424. 396
  425. 397
  426. 398
  427. 399
  428. 400
  429. 401
  430. 402
  431. 403
  432. 404
  433. 405
  434. 406
  435. 407
  436. 408
  437. 409
  438. 410
  439. 411
  440. 412
  441. 413
  442. 414
  443. 415
  444. 416
  445. 417
  446. 418
  447. 419
  448. 420
  449. 421
  450. 422
  451. 423
  452. 424
  453. 425
  454. 426
  455. 427
  456. 428
  457. 429
  458. 430
  459. 431
  460. 432
  461. 433
  462. 434
  463. 435
  464. 436
  465. 437
  466. 438
  467. 439
  468. 440
  469. 441
  470. 442
  471. 443
  472. 444
  473. 445
  474. 446
  475. 447
  476. 448
  477. 449
  478. 450
  479. 451
  480. 452
  481. 453
  482. 454
  483. 455
  484. 456
  485. 457
  486. 458
  487. 459
  488. 460
  489. 461
  490. 462
  491. 463
  492. 464
  493. 465
  494. 466
  495. 467
  496. 468
  497. 469
  498. 470
  499. 471
  500. 472
  501. 473
  502. 474
  503. 475
  504. 476
  505. 477
  506. 478
  507. 479
  508. 480
  509. 481
  510. 482
  511. 483
  512. 484
  513. 485
  514. 486
  515. 487
  516. 488
  517. 489
  518. 490
  519. 491
  520. 492
  521. 493
  522. 494
  523. 495
  524. 496
  525. 497
  526. 498
  527. 499
  528. 500
  529. 501
  530. 502
  531. 503
  532. 504
  533. 505
  534. 506
  535. 507
  536. 508
  537. 509
  538. 510
  539. 511
  540. 512
  541. 513
  542. 514
  543. 515
  544. 516
  545. 517
  546. 518
  547. 519
  548. 520
  549. 521
  550. 522
  551. 523
  552. 524
  553. 525
  554. 526
  555. 527
  556. 528
  557. 529
  558. 530
  559. 531
  560. 532
  561. 533
  562. 534
  563. 535
  564. 536
  565. 537
  566. 538
  567. 539
  568. 540
  569. 541
  570. 542
  571. 543
  572. 544
  573. 545
  574. 546
  575. 547
  576. 548
  577. 549
  578. 550
  579. 551
  580. 552
  581. 553
  582. 554
  583. 555
  584. 556
  585. 557
  586. 558
  587. 559
  588. 560
  589. 561
  590. 562
  591. 563
  592. 564
  593. 565
  594. 566
  595. 567
  596. 568
  597. 569
  598. 570
  599. 571
  600. 572
  601. 573
  602. 574
  603. 575
  604. 576
  605. 577
  606. 578
  607. 579
  608. 580
  609. 581
  610. 582
  611. 583
  612. 584
  613. 585
  614. 586
  615. 587
  616. 588
  617. 589
  618. 590
  619. 591
  620. 592
  621. 593
  622. 594
  623. 595
  624. 596
  625. 597
  626. 598
  627. 599
  628. 600
  629. 601
  630. 602
  631. 603
  632. 604
  633. 605
  634. 606
  635. 607
  636. 608
  637. 609
  638. 610
  639. 611
  640. 612
  641. 613
  642. 614
  643. 615
  644. 616
  645. 617
  646. 618
  647. 619
  648. 620
  649. 621
  650. 622
  651. 623
  652. 624
  653. 625
  654. 626
  655. 627
  656. 628
  657. 629
  658. 630
  659. 631
  660. 632
  661. 633
  662. 634
  663. 635
  664. 636
  665. 637
  666. 638
  667. 639
  668. 640
  669. 641
  670. 642
  671. 643
  672. 644
  673. 645
  674. 646
  675. 647
  676. 648
  677. 649
  678. 650
  679. 651
  680. 652
  681. 653
  682. 654
  683. 655
  684. 656
  685. 657
  686. 658
  687. 659
  688. 660
  689. 661
  690. 662
  691. 663
  692. 664
  693. 665
  694. 666
  695. 667
  696. 668
  697. 669
  698. 670
  699. 671
  700. 672
  701. 673
  702. 674
  703. 675
  704. 676
  705. 677
  706. 678
  707. 679
  708. 680
  709. 681
  710. 682
  711. 683
  712. 684
  713. 685
  714. 686
  715. 687
  716. 688
  717. 689
  718. 690
  719. 691
  720. 692
  721. 693
  722. 694
  723. 695
  724. 696
  725. 697
  726. 698
  727. 699
  728. 700
  729. 701
  730. 702
  731. 703
  732. 704
  733. 705
  734. 706
  735. 707
  736. 708
  737. 709
  738. 710
  739. 711
  740. 712
  741. 713
  742. 714
  743. 715
  744. 716
  745. 717
  746. 718
  747. 719
  748. 720
  749. 721
  750. 722
  751. 723
  752. 724
  753. 725
  754. 726
  755. 727
  756. 728
  757. 729
  758. 730
  759. 731
  760. 732
  761. 733
  762. 734
  763. 735
  764. 736
  765. 737
  766. 738
  767. 739
  768. 740
  769. 741
  770. 742
  771. 743
  772. 744
  773. 745
  774. 746
  775. 747
  776. 748
  777. 749
  778. 750
  779. 751
  780. 752
  781. 753
  782. 754
  783. 755
  784. 756
  785. 757
  786. 758
  787. 759
  788. 760
  789. 761
  790. 762
  791. 763
  792. 764
  793. 765
  794. 766
  795. 767
  796. 768
  797. 769
  798. 770
  799. 771
  800. 772
  801. 773
  802. 774
  803. 775
  804. 776
  805. 777
  806. 778
  807. 779
  808. 780
  809. 781
  810. 782
  811. 783
  812. 784
  813. 785
  814. 786
  815. 787
  816. 788
  817. 789
  818. 790
  819. 791
  820. 792
  821. 793
  822. 794
  823. 795
  824. 796
  825. 797
  826. 798
  827. 799
  828. 800
  829. 801
  830. 802
  831. 803
  832. 804
  833. 805
  834. 806
  835. 807
  836. 808
  837. 809
  838. 810
  839. 811
  840. 812
  841. 813
  842. 814
  843. 815
  844. 816
  845. 817
  846. 818
  847. 819
  848. 820
  849. 821
  850. 822
  851. 823
  852. 824
  853. 825
  854. 826
  855. 827
  856. 828
  857. 829
  858. 830
  859. 831
  860. 832
  861. 833
  862. 834
  863. 835
  864. 836
  865. 837
  866. 838
  867. 839
  868. 840
  869. 841
  870. 842
  871. 843
  872. 844
  873. 845
  874. 846
  875. 847
  876. 848
  877. 849
  878. 850
  879. 851
  880. 852
  881. 853
  882. 854
  883. 855
  884. 856
  885. 857
  886. 858
  887. 859
  888. 860
  889. 861
  890. 862
  891. 863
  892. 864
  893. 865
  894. 866
  895. 867
  896. 868
  897. 869
  898. 870
  899. 871
  900. 872
  901. 873
  902. 874
  903. 875
  904. 876
  905. 877
  906. 878
  907. 879
  908. 880
  909. 881
  910. 882
  911. 883
  912. 884
  913. 885
  914. 886
  915. 887
  916. 888
  917. 889
  918. 890
  919. 891
  920. 892
  921. 893
  922. 894
  923. 895
  924. 896
  925. 897
  926. 898
  927. 899
  928. 900